CN1271491A

CN1271491A - System, method and article of manufacture for switched telephone communication

Info

Publication number: CN1271491A
Application number: CN98806251A
Authority: CN
Inventors: D·A·泽伊
Original assignee: MCI Worldcom Inc
Current assignee: Verizon Business Global LLC
Priority date: 1997-04-15
Filing date: 1998-04-15
Publication date: 2000-10-25
Also published as: JP2001521695A; TR199902599T2; IL132397A; AU7251198A; BR9808592A; NO995042D0; WO1998047298A9; IL132397A0; NZ500383A; AP9901678A0; NO995042L; KR20010006455A; WO1998047298A2; AU738963B2; CA2286132A1; EP0976234A2; WO1998047298A3

Abstract

A hybrid telecommunication system includes a switched network which transfers information across the Internet to provide multi-routed and multidimensional callback processing. The hybrid network includes one or more switched networks coupled to one or more packet transmission networks, and a call router coupled to the switched communication network and the packet transmission network to route information to the appropriate switched telephony device or Internet device address. A computer with an attached display communicates with the packet transmission network. The computer is used to initiate remote management of the hybrid network, including tests of the hybrid network. The tests include circuit analysis such as selecting signaling states which could be loop start, ground start, or detecting signals such as dual tone multifrequency, multifrequency or dialpulse. The hybrid network includes support for an operator to monitor the management of the hybrid network, and an expert system to regulate the Quality of Service of the hybrid telecommunication system.

Description

A kind of system for the exchanging telephone communication, method and manufacture a product

The present invention relates to the integrated of internet and telephone system, more particularly, relate to for the internet as the communication trunk of communication system architecture, keep system, the method for a collection of abundant call processing feature and manufacturing a product simultaneously.

Background of invention

The internet more and more becomes the communication network of consumer electronics mail market first-selection. Recently, software company has instituted an inquiry the problem of uploading the calling of transmission of electricity words in the internet. Yet the user is regarded as for the call treatment on the internet indispensable to system's feature that normal call treatment requires. Now, there are not these features on the internet. Therefore, need a kind of communication network of telephony feature that will comprise to be connected with the internet so that the system that callback is processed.

Used sometimes for the callback situation of holding calling on existing telephone network. The example of this business has the CSI callback, be used for the Rumilla telecommunications of international callback and provide have distribution, the SummitLink of the international callback of the wholesale and feature of keeping accounts again. The Web website that the internet provides " callback " by name (Callback on the Net), it is claimed and will " collect all obtainable information about call back service ". This information is collected by (callback) carrying out Yahoo (Yahoo) retrieval with term " callback ".

The international callback that the system of prior art level provides refers to that the user can dialing numbers remove to be connected to external switch. The calling subscriber allows twice rear on-hook of phone ringing. Then switch uses ANI and/or called number information, and the profile information database of storing on the inquiry switch is to determine record keeping and the out of Memory about the calling subscriber. Then, switch starts the calling to the calling subscriber, and when calling subscriber's off-hook, switch provides dialing tone, allows the calling subscriber access any number open to switch. Like this, international or other long-distance calling subscriber just can obtain to hang down their in advance this business of register request of the long-distance service of expense-need only. This business still requires the calling subscriber to be responsible for all and the expense that the startup call treatment is associated, and requires the calling subscriber to learn to link the agreement of switch, and the reservation to the business such as meeting is not provided, and does not allow the operator who calls out auxiliary.

Recently, AT ﹠ T Corp. has announced a business that is very similar to conferenceMCI (operator's incoming call Conference Calling Function of MCI company). The function of the business of this " online teleconference " (On-Line TeleCoference) by name allows the teleconference client to allow the client preset an AT﹠T teleconference calling by the WWW with online interface. Yet, although provide for each participant's incoming call Conference Calling definition with the number that participates in a conference, " all speeches connections are all set up at existing telephone network " also requires all conversation sides' common numbers of contact to set up Conference Calling (AT﹠T TeleConference Service:On-Line Trial Information, on February 7th, 97).

Although this new AT﹠T business is just developing by the direction that the present invention has arrived, it does not but provide the integrated of speech and existing network business on the internet, does not mention that any permission calling party presets Network to contact one or more conversation sides and effectively to remove callback architecture to the needs of any manual intervention yet. In addition, it is not provided at yet and allows the operator carry out the IP operation under the exception. Therefore, the real combination of internet and existing telephone network is not provided.

" callback " is a telephony term, by being used through the client's of digital cross-connection system (DXC) speech and the remote testing system of data circuit about access and test. When having selected certain callback feature, the remote testing system is bridged to the local call circuit in client's DSO circuit. If being subjected to test circuit is an analog circuit, the remote testing device just monitors. If being subjected to test circuit is speech circuit, the remote testing device just carries out speaking test, and speaking test comprises by the remote testing system for being subjected on the test circuit callback to customer phone to select suitable signaling status. This callback feature makes the remote testing device can be to being positioned at telephone number of phone (co-located) input that closing of remote testing device position set a trap.

There is the local call line that links to each other with the inside card in the remote testing system. The purpose of these telephone wires is to allow test macro can carry out extroversion call out. The long-distance user inputs one and comprises after area code or their number that closes the interior phone of setting a trap, a local call line is selected by the remote testing system, off-hook, the telephone number that pulse dialing or DTMF input when detecting the dialing tone of local exchange carrier central office. The phone of remote testing device is accepted the calling from the remote testing system, off-hook, and then, the calling from the remote testing system to the remote testing device is considered as finishing.

The remote testing device then just can otherwise the monitoring audio quality, or by for being subjected to test circuit to select suitable signaling status to start to the calling of speech circuit client's phone. In case the suitable signaling status that has been customer selecting, channel bank card or PBX just test enter to exhale and convert thereof into the ringing cycle of going to customer phone. This action starts a ring condition to customer phone. When the client answered this phone, the remote testing device carried out Language Communication with the client on the client's who is tested circuit. This test is carried out for circuit ensures the validation test routine.

What the remote testing system was limited goes out to call out and can be done. The number of the telephone wire that the interface of test macro is supported is depended in this restriction. Also there is telephone operator that each termination is monthly collected access fee to the local line of test macro.

Summary of the invention

Preferred embodiment aspect according to the present invention, call, data and other multimedia messages transmit in comprising the hybrid network of exchange network, and exchange network is uploaded carry information in the Internet, processes with the callback that multipath and multidimensional are provided. Hybrid network comprises the exchange network that one or more and one or more packet transmission networks link to each other, packet transmission networks also is connected to call router switched communication network and packet transmission networks, in order to information is routed to suitable exchanging telephone equipment or internet devices address. The computer that is attached with display is communicated by letter with packet transmission networks, computer is used for starting the telemanagement of hybrid network, comprise the test of hybrid network, content comprises the circuit analysis such as selecting signaling status, and signaling status may be circulation starting, ground start, dual-tone multifrequency test or remove a circuit from business. Hybrid network comprises supports the operator to the monitoring of the management of hybrid network, supports expert system to regulate the service quality of hybrid telecommunication system.

To understand better above and other purpose, aspect and advantage, can read following detailed description to preferred embodiment of the present invention with reference to each accompanying drawing. Brief description:

Figure 1A is the block diagram according to the representative hardware environment of preferred embodiment;

Figure 1B represents the block diagram according to the architecture of typical common channel signalling system #7 (SS7) network of preferred embodiment;

Fig. 1 C is the block diagram according to the Internet telephone system of preferred embodiment;

Fig. 1 D is the block diagram according to the hybrid switching machine of preferred embodiment;

Fig. 1 E is the block diagram according to the connection of the hybrid switching machine of preferred embodiment;

Fig. 1 F is the block diagram of mixing (Internet-phone) switch according to preferred embodiment;

Fig. 1 G represents according to preferred embodiment, mixes the block diagram of the software process that adopts in the telephone exchange of Internet;

Fig. 2 represents according to preferred embodiment, uses the block diagram of PMU in typical SS7 network;

Fig. 3 is the block diagram of the system architecture of expression preferred embodiment;

Fig. 4 is that expression is according to the high-level process flow diagram of the flogic system parts of preferred embodiment;

Fig. 5～9th, expression is according to the procedure graph of detailed operations preferred embodiment, parts shown in Fig. 4;

Figure 10 A represents a PSTN (PSTN) 1000, it comprises LEC local exchange carrier (LEC) 1020, according to preferred embodiment, MPTY accesses exchange network by LEC local exchange carrier with phone 1021 or computer 1030;

Figure 10 B represents the Internet route selective network according to preferred embodiment;

Figure 11 represents that VNET PC (PC) according to preferred embodiment is to PC information call-flow;

Figure 12 represents VNET PC (PC) the PC information call-flow to network according to preferred embodiment;

Figure 13 represents VNET PC (PC) the phone information call-flow to network according to preferred embodiment;

Figure 14 represents according to the VNET PC (PC) of preferred embodiment phone information call-flow to the network.

Figure 15 represents according to the Internet call to PC of the PC of preferred embodiment;

Figure 16 represents to be routed to the call of phone according to preferred embodiment by the internet from PC;

Figure 17 represents according to the calling to PC of the phone of preferred embodiment;

Figure 18 represents to pass through the phone of Internet to call according to preferred embodiment;

Figure 19 A and 19B represent the intelligent network according to preferred embodiment;

Figure 19 C represents the video conference architecture according to preferred embodiment;

Figure 19 D represents according to the video storage of preferred embodiment and transmits architecture;

Figure 19 E represents according to the architecture of preferred embodiment at internet transmission visual telephone;

Figure 19 F represents the block diagram according to the Internet telephone system of preferred embodiment;

Figure 19 G represents the block diagram of the preferential access/router (prioritizing access/router) according to preferred embodiment;

Figure 20 represents the high level block diagram according to the network system of preferred embodiment;

Figure 21 represents the functional block diagram according to Figure 20 middle part subsystem of preferred embodiment;

Figure 22 represents another high level block diagram according to the preferred embodiment of Figure 21;

Figure 23 represents the block diagram without the switch network system according to preferred embodiment;

Figure 24 is that expression is according to the hierarchical chart of part system shown in Figure 20 of preferred embodiment and Figure 23;

Figure 25 is that expression is according to the block diagram of the part of the part of system shown in Figure 24 of preferred embodiment;

Figure 26 is that expression is according to the flow graph of the Part Methods of preferred embodiment;

Figure 27～39th, expression is according to the block diagram of other aspects of system shown in Figure 20 of preferred embodiment and Figure 23;

Figure 40 is the schematic diagram according to the web server login of preferred embodiment;

Figure 41 is the schematic diagram according to the used server directory structure of the login of Figure 40 of preferred embodiment;

Figure 42 is according to the more detailed schematic diagram of the login of Figure 40 of preferred embodiment;

Figure 43～50th, expression is according to the block diagram of the hybrid network each several part of preferred embodiment;

Figure 51 represents a kind of configuration of the data management area (DMZ) 5105 according to preferred embodiment;

Figure 52 A～52C represents according to preferred embodiment and network diagram that dial in environment facies and contact;

Figure 53 is that expression is according to the flow graph of the fax tone test of preferred embodiment;

Figure 54 A～54E is that expression is according to the flow graph of the VFP complete process that is used for fax and voice mail of preferred embodiment;

Figure 55 A and 55B represent the operation according to the pager terminal handler of preferred embodiment;

Figure 56 represents the GetCallback routine of calling from the pager terminal according to preferred embodiment;

Figure 57 represents the user's login screen that is used for accessing online profile management according to preferred embodiment;

Figure 58 represents according to call route selecting screen preferred embodiment, that be used for arranging or changing user's call route selecting instruction;

Figure 59 represent according to preferred embodiment, be used for arranging the guest's menu configuration screen to guest's menu of the proprietary caller's oblatio of non-account;

Figure 60 represents to substitute route and selects screen, and according to preferred embodiment, it makes the user all-calls can be routed to selected destination;

Figure 61 represents for the speed dialling screen of setting up speed dialling according to preferred embodiment;

Figure 62 represents for the voice mail screen of setting up quick voice mail according to preferred embodiment;

Figure 63 represents for the faxmail screen of setting up the quick fax mail according to preferred embodiment;

Figure 64 represents for the call visor screen of setting up the short calling shielding according to preferred embodiment;

Figure 65～67 expressions are according to each additional screen that is used for the user profile management of preferred embodiment;

The flow graph representation of Figure 68 is according to preferred embodiment, and how being confirmed to be of the speed dial number of user's input is carried out;

Figure 69 A～69AI is automatic answering equipment (ARU) call flow diagram that expression realizes according to the software of preferred embodiment;

Figure 70 A～70R is the console call flow diagram that further expression realizes according to the software of preferred embodiment;

Figure 71 represents the typical customers configuration according to VNET to the VNET system of preferred embodiment;

Figure 72 represents the operation according to the DAP of preferred embodiment;

Figure 73 represent according to preferred embodiment, phone is connected to process for the release link trunking line of 1～800 call treatment by it;

Figure 74 represents the customer side according to the DAP process request of preferred embodiment;

Figure 75 represents that according to preferred embodiment switch 10530 is selected the operation of particular number or " hot line " for the caller;

Figure 76 represent according to preferred embodiment, optionally be the operation of the computer based voice gateways of call selection route by the internet;

Figure 77 represents according to preferred embodiment, the operation of the VRU of the Figure 76 that disposes in the central type structure;

Figure 78 represents according to preferred embodiment, the operation of the VRU of the Figure 76 that disposes in distributed frame;

Figure 79 A and 79B represent according to preferred embodiment, are used for the operation of the sample application of internet call route selecting;

Figure 79 B represents the application processed according to many consumer's affairs that start for the caller of preferred embodiment.

Figure 80 represents according to preferred embodiment, provides voice mail and voice response device professional and to the configuration of the exchange network of service provider's interconnection;

Figure 81 represents according to preferred embodiment to have inbound shared automatic call distributor (ACD) calling by the data sharing of database;

Figure 82 represents the block diagram according to the exemplary telecommunication system of preferred embodiment;

Figure 83 represents the block diagram according to the illustrative computer system of preferred embodiment;

Figure 84 represents according to the CDR of preferred embodiment and PNR call record form;

The common expression of Figure 85 (A) and 85 (B) is according to ECDR and the EPNR call record form of preferred embodiment;

Figure 86 represents according to the OSR of preferred embodiment and POSR call record form;

The common expression of Figure 87 (A) and 87 (B) is according to EOSR and the EPOSR call record form of preferred embodiment;

Figure 88 represents the SER call record form according to preferred embodiment;

The control flow graph representation of Figure 89 (A) and 89 (B) uses the condition of the record format of expansion according to the preferred embodiment switch;

Figure 90 is that expression is according to the control flow graph of Change Time (change time) order of preferred embodiment;

Figure 91 is that expression is according to the control flow graph of Change Daylight Savings Time (change daylight saving time) order of preferred embodiment.

Figure 92 is the control flow graph that expression is processed according to network call identifier (NCID) switched call of preferred embodiment.

Figure 93 represents according to preferred embodiment, processes the control flow graph of the network call identifier that receives;

Figure 94 (A) represents according to preferred embodiment the control flow graph of generating network call identifier;

Figure 94 (B) is that expression is according to preferred embodiment, to the control flow graph of call record interpolation network call identifier;

Figure 95 is that expression is according to the control flow graph of preferred embodiment call transmission;

Figure 96 represents the embodiment of a hardware component, according to preferred embodiment, these parts are used for allowing vision operation person to participate in the video conference platform and service is provided, and these services include but not limited to: monitor, watch with recording videoconference and calling out, help video conference call person;

Figure 97 represents according to preferred embodiment, is used for making the system that comprises vision operation person's console system of vision operation person's energy managing video Conference Calling;

Figure 98 represents according to preferred embodiment, is used for making the system that comprises vision operation person's console system of vision operation person's energy managing video Conference Calling;

Figure 99 represents according to preferred embodiment video conference call is how to be started by vision operation person;

Figure 100 represents according to preferred embodiment, the class hierarchy of vision operation person's software systems class;

Figure 101 represents according to preferred embodiment, the state transition graph that the contingent state of the m_state variable of VOCall object changes;

Figure 102 represents according to preferred embodiment, the state transition graph that the contingent state of the m_state variable of VOConnection object (" state variable ") changes;

Figure 103 represents according to preferred embodiment, the state transition graph that the contingent state of the m_state variable of VOConference object (" state variable ") changes;

Figure 104 represents according to preferred embodiment, the state transition graph that the contingent state of the m_state variable of VORecorder object (" state variable ") changes;

Figure 105 represents according to preferred embodiment, the state transition graph that the contingent state of the m_state variable of VORecorder object (" state variable ") changes;

Figure 106 represents according to preferred embodiment, the class hierarchy of vision operation person's graphic user interface (" GUI ") class;

Figure 107 represents according to preferred embodiment, the wide area information server ideograph that vision operation person shares;

Figure 108 represents a Main Console (master console) window according to the preferred embodiment specific implementation;

Figure 109 represents a Schedule (scheduling) window according to the preferred embodiment specific implementation;

Figure 110 represents a Conference (meeting) window 41203 according to the preferred embodiment specific implementation, and this window shows when the operator selects a meeting or playback session in the Schedule window;

Figure 111 represents a video-see (Video Watch) window 41204 according to the preferred embodiment specific implementation, and this window shows the selected calling that connects from certain meeting or from the H.320 input of independent incoming call or outgoing call;

Figure 112 represents Console Output (console output) window 41205 that shows all error messages and warning according to the preferred embodiment specific implementation;

Figure 113 represents Properties (characteristic) dialog box according to preferred embodiment.

Figure 114 A is the block diagram of the access/router system according to preferred embodiment.

Figure 114 B is the block diagram according to the architecture of preferred embodiment.

Figure 115 is the block diagram based on the callback architecture of Internet according to preferred embodiment.

Describe in detail

The composition structure I I. consensus standard of catalogue I. internet

A. Internet Protocol

B. the communication in the standard I II.TCP/IP feature IV. of International Telecommunications Union-telecommunication standardization branch (" the ITU-T ") communication network

A. switching technology

B. gateway and router

C. come convenient user to connect with the network level agreement

D. datagram and route are selected the V. technology introduction

A.ATM

B. frame relay

C.ISDN VI.MCI intelligent network

The parts of A.MCI intelligent network

1.MCI exchange network

2. network control system (NCS)/data access point (DAP)

3. IN service net (ISN) 4

4. strengthen speech business (EVS) 9

5. other parts

B. intelligent network system survey

C. the example VII.ISP framework of call-flow

A. background

1. broadband access

2. IP system

3. function

4. following professional

The B.ISP architecture frame

The C.ISP functional framework

The D.ISP integrated network is professional

The E.ISP parts

F. without the communication service of switch

G. guideline

1. architecture principle

2. business function parts principle

3. functional principle

4. professional establishment, configuration and execution principle

5. resource management model 2150 principles

6. data management 2138 principles

7. principle is supported in operation

8. physical model principle

The H.ISP business model

1. purpose

2. the scope of making great efforts

3. business model general introduction

4. business structure

5. professional 2200 carry out

6. service interaction

7. professional monitoring

The I.ISP Data Management Model

1. scope

2. purpose

3. data management general introduction

4. logical description

5. physics is described

6. the choice of technology

7. realize

8. safety

9. metadata

10. standard database technology

J.ISP resource management model

2. local resource manager (LRM)

3. overall explorer (GRM) 2188

4. resource management model (RRM)

5. parts are mutual

K. operation assisting model

1. introduce

2. operation assisting model

3. protocol model

4. physical model

5. point of interface

6. general introduction

L. physical network model

1. introduce

2. information flow

3. term

4. entity relationship VIII. intelligent network

A. network management

B. customer service

C. charging

D. act on behalf of

E. report

F. safety

What G. troubleshooting IX. strengthened is individual professional

The A.Web server architecture

1. welcome server 450

2. token server 454

3. application server

B.Web server system environment

1. welcome server

2. token server 454

3. profile Management Application Server

C. safety

D. login process

E. professional selection

F. professional operation

1.NIDS server

(2.TOKEN token) data bank service

(3.SERVERS server) data bank service

4.HOSTILE IP (hostility IP) data bank service

5.TOKEN HOSTS (token host) data bank service

6.SERVER ENV data bank service

7. time operation (Chron Job)

G. standard

H. system management

I. product/enhancing

J. interface characteristics require (general introduction)

1. user account profile

2. the database of message

K. automatic answering equipment (ARU) function

1. user interface

L. message management

1. many media message are notified

2. many media message operations

3. Text To Speech

4. e-mail forward is to facsimile machine

5. pager is received the notice of information

6. the delivery confirmation of voice mail

7. message priorization

M. information service

N. message storage requirement

O. profile management

P. the call route selecting menu changes

Q. the configuration of No. two pagers is controlled and replying placement and paging (park and page)

R. Extraordinary is greeted

S. tabulation management

T. overall message is processed the X. Internet telephony with relevant professional

A. the system environments of internet media

1. hardware

2. OO Software tool

B. IP

1. introduce

2. as the IP phone of commercial occupation

3. the telephone number in the internet

4. other IP communication common carrier

5. international access

C. IP is professional

D. call treatment

1.VNET call treatment

2. the description of module unit

E. reusable call-flow frame

1.VNET PC is connected to company intranet and signs in to directory service

2.VNET PC is to directory service inquiry VNET conversion

3.PC be connected to ITG

4.ITG be connected to PC

5.VNET PC describes to the PC call-flow

6. the internet client computer that is the IP gateway on the internet selects to determine optimal selection

7.Vnet call treatment XI. telecommunication network management

The A.SNMS circuit diagram

The B.SNMS connection layout

C.SNMS nonneighbor node figure

D.SNMS LATA connection layout

The tabulation of E.NPA-NXX information

F. terminal station information tabulation

G. junction line group information tabulation

H. filter definition window

I. the visual telephone on the failure logging window XII.POTS

A. the parts of visual telephone system

1. with the DSP modem bank of ACD

2. act on behalf of

3. video keeps server

4. video mail server

5. video content engine

6. reservation engine

7. video bridge

B. scheme

C. connect and set up

D. call intent ground

E. recording of video mail, storage and forwarding video and greeting

F. retrieve video mail and video request program

G. the visual telephone of XIII. on the internet dispatched in video conference

A. parts

1. catalogue and registration engine

2. act on behalf of

3. video mail server

4. video content engine

5. conference reservation engine

6.MCI conference space

7. virtual reality space engine

B. scheme

C. connect and set up

D. recording of video mail, storage and forwarding video and greeting

E. retrieve video mail and video request program

F. video conference scheduling

G. virtual reality XIV. video conference architecture

A. feature

B. parts

1. terminal use's terminal

2.LAN interconnection system

3.ITU server H.323

4. the equipment (gatekeeper) of keeping goal

5. operator service module

6. multipoint control unit (MCU)

7. gateway

8. supporting business unit

C. general introduction

D. call-flow for example

1. point to point call

2. multipoint videoconference is called out

E. the XV. video of concluding the speech storage and forwarding architecture

A. feature

B. architecture

C. parts

1. content creates and code conversion.

2. Content Management and delivery

3. content retrieval and demonstration.

D. summarize XVI. vision operation person

A. hardware architecture

B. vision operation person's console

C. video conference call-flow

D. vision operation person's software systems

1. class hierarchy

2. class and object description

E. graphic user interface class

1. class hierarchy

2. class and object description

F. vision operation person's shared data bank

1. database schema

G. vision operation person's console graphical user interface window

1. master console window

2. scheduling window

3. meeting window

4. video watch window

5. console output window

6. characteristic dialog box XVII. WWW (WWW) browser function

A. user interface

B. performance

C. personal homepage

1. memory requirement

2. at the screen help text

3. personal homepage catalogue

4. control strip

5. homepage

6. safety requirements

7. at the screen help text

8. profile management

9. information service profile management

10. personal homepage profile management

11. tabulation management

12. overall message management

D. message center

1. memory requirement

The E.PC client functionality

1. user interface

2. safety

3. message retrieval

4. message operation

F. order input requirements

1. regulation and realization

G. communication system

H. fix a price

I. XVIII. straightforward line MCI keeps accounts

A. general introduction

(1.ARU audio frequency response unit) 502

(2.VFP speech fax platform) 504

(3.DDS data distribution services) 506

B. principle

C. details

1. the call-flow architecture 520

2. network connection

3. call-flow

4. data flow architecture

D. speech fax platform (VFP) 504 detailed architectures

1. general introduction

2. principle

3. details

E. speech distributes detailed architecture

1. general introduction

2. principle

F. login screen

G. call route selecting is shielded

H. the configuration of guest's menu is shielded

I. replace route and select screen

J. speed dialling shields

K.ARU call-flow XIX. internet fax

A. introduce

B. details XX. internet switching technology

A. embodiment one

B. embodiment two XXI. keep accounts

A. embodiment one

1. call record form

2. network call identifier

B. embodiment two

1. call record form

2. network call identifier XXII. preferentially accesses/router

A. preferentially access/router is summarized

B. preferential access/router process XXIII. callback telephone system

A. according to the introduction of the callback telephone system of preferred embodiment

B. based on the callback architecture of internet

C. call back service potentiality

D. professional potentiality in internet

E. based on the callback architecture of internet

F. self-adjusting system

The internet is introduced

I. the composition structure of internet

The internet is method and one group of agreement of a kind of physical network that interconnects, and agreement wherein is that it allows to meet the computer interactive effect of agreement about the agreement of use network. Physically, the internet is a huge global network. According to the statistics of U.S. Government Accounting Office (GAO), 92 countries are crossed in the internet, comprise 59,000 science, commerce, government and Military Networks, and estimating this digital every year will double. In addition, nearly 1,000 ten thousand main frames, 5,000 ten thousand users and 70,000 6 thousand Web servers link to each other with the internet. The trunk of internet is comprised of a series of high speed communications links, and they are connecting U.S. domestic and global main supercomputer place and education and research institution.

Before continuing to introduce, should clarify the usually misunderstanding on Internet (" internet ") word uses. At first, only as the title of the network that forms according to Internet Protocol (Internet Protocol), but present, internet has been the termini generales for a whole network class of expression to this word. " Internet " (internet-English with lowercase " i " beginning) is the combination of any discrete physical network, form single logical network after adopting the interconnection of certain common protocol, " internet " (Internet-English is with capitalization " I " beginning) then is to adopt Internet Protocol that a large amount of physical networks is connected into single logical network and the network of the global interconnection that forms.

II. consensus standard

A. Internet Protocol

Behavior on the consultative management internet trunk also thereby is set main regular for data communication. Transmission control protocol/Internet Protocol (ITP/IP) has open character can be for anyone, and namely it is attempted to set up one and is independent of the operating system of computer or network and the procotol system of architecture difference. Therefore, the ITP/IP agreement be with normative document, particularly to consult on the form of book (Request for Comments) open to the public. The requirement that the internet connects is TCP/IP, and it comprises a large set of data communication protocol, and these two agreements of transmission control protocol and Internet Protocol are wherein just arranged. " the TCP/IP example is separated " has very outstanding description (W.Richard Stevens work, Addison-Wesley publishing company, 1996) to the detailed content of relevant TCP/IP and UDP/IP.

B. International Telecommunications Union-communication standardization branch (" ITU-T ") standard

International Telecommunications Union-communication standardization branch (" ITU-T ") has set up numerous management for the agreement of telecommunication apparatus and the standard of line coding method. Because this paper quoted many these standards from start to finish, below list with regard to the summary of relevant standard and to be used as reference.

ITU is the proposed standard of the pulse code modulation of 3kHz voice-grade channel G.711.

ITU is the proposed standard of the 7kHz audio coding in 64k bps channel G.722.

G.723, ITU is used for 5.3 and the proposed standard of the double speed rate speech coder of the multimedia communication of 6.3k bit transfer.

G.728, ITU adopts the proposed standard of 16k bps speed encoded voice of low Delay-Code Excited Linear Prediction (LD-CELP).

H.221, ITU is used for the frame structure that sound is looked 64 to 1920k bps channel of long-range service.

H.223, ITU is used for the multipath conversion agreement of low bit rate multimedia terminal.

ITU is H.225 without the grouping of the MEDIA FLOW on the LAN that ensures service quality and synchronous ITU proposed standard.

H.230, ITU is used for control and the index signal of the frame synchronization of audiovisual system.

H.231, ITU adopts rate 2M bps digital channel to be used for the multipoint control unit of audiovisual system.

H.242, ITU adopts rate 2M bps digital channel to set up the system of communication between the audiovisual terminal.

H.243, ITU adopts rate 2M bps system that sets up communication between three or more audiovisual terminals.

H.245, ITU is used for the proposed standard of the control protocol of multimedia communication.

H.261, ITU be used for to support that video resolution is the proposed standard of video encoder-decoder of the audiovisual service of 352 * 288 pixels and 176 * 144 pixels.

H.263, ITU be used for to support that video resolution is the proposed standard of video encoder-decoder of the audiovisual service of 128 * 96 pixels, 176 * 144 pixels, 352 * 288 pixels, 704 * 576 pixels and 1408 * 1152 pixels.

ITU is the proposed standard of N-ISDN visual telephone system H.320.

H.321ATM, the calling video terminal that ITU goes up.

ITU is the calling video terminal on the LAN of secure service quality H.322.

H.323, ITU is used for providing without the visual telephone system of the LAN that ensures service quality and the proposed standard of equipment.

H.324, ITU is used for the terminal of low bit rate (28.8Kbps) multimedia communication on the dialup phone line and the proposed standard of system.

ITU is the host-host protocol of multi-medium data T.120.

In addition, the several relevant standards of other that quote herein are:

ISDN ISDN-transmit at the single communication link digital communication standard of sound, video and data.

RTP RTP-a kind of is for propagating at single channel and the multichannel communication network transmits the Internet Standard agreement of sound, video and so on real time data.

IP Internet Protocol-a kind of Internet Standard agreement for transmit and transmit packet at the packet switching network of interconnected computer systems.

The PPP peer-peer protocol

A normalizated unit under MPEG motion video expert group-International Standards Organization (ISO), it has formulated the proposed standard that is used for comprising the digital video of bit stream and the compression of audio frequency (but not being compression algorithm).

The SLIP Serial Line Internet Protocol

RSVP resource reservation setup protocol

Udp user datagram protocol

The III.TCP/IP feature

ICP/IP protocol on the internet rapidly popular reason be that they have catered to global metadata this great needs of communicating by letter, and have several key properties to make them can cater to this needs.

Still comprise in these features of using today: the generic addressing scheme, the equipment that it allows any operation TCP/IP is any miscellaneous equipment of addressing on the internet uniquely.

Open consensus standard-freely use, its exploitation is independent of any hardware or operating system. Therefore, TCP/IP can be used to different hardware and softwares, even do not need to carry out Internet traffic.

To the independence of any specific physics network hardware, allow the integrated many different types of networks of TCP/IP. TCP/IP can be used in Ethernet, token-ring network, dial line or almost on the physical transmission medium of any kind.

IV. the communication in the communication network

A. switching technology

Be appreciated that the action that the main fortune author of current internet trunk business takes recently, need to understand in communication system information and how to propagate. The communication network of traditional type is the circuit switch type. The telephone system of the U.S. just adopts this circuit switching technology. When people or computer carried out call, the interconnecting device in the telephone system will be sought the physical pathway from originating phone to recipient's phone. The circuit switching network attempt by one of model from originating phone, through Local Exchange, then cross over junction line, arrive long-range exchange, arrive the circuit of destination phone at last, between these 2, set up special-purpose a connection. This always existence of special-purpose connection stops to calling out.

For circuit switching network, setting up a fullpath is the prerequisite of data transmission. After circuit was suitably in place, microphone was caught analog signal, and signal is transferred to LEC local exchange carrier (LEC-Local Exchange Carrier) central office (CO) with analog form at the simulation loop. Analog signal did not convert digital form to before arriving the LEC central office, even arrive, only have when the equipment advanced person must be enough to support digital information yet and just change. Yet in ISDN embodiment, analog signal converts data signal at equipment, then is transferred to LEC with digital information.

During connection, link tester is crossed the data path that keeps a 64Kbps (kilobit/second) and is guaranteed that sample can be passed and regenerate. This speed itself is not to send the desired speed of digitized voice. Exactly, 64Kbps sends with the desired speed of the digitized sound of pulse code modulation (PCM) technology. Many other methods of digitized voice are arranged, comprise ADPCM (32Kbps), GSM (13Kbps), TrueSpeech8.5 (8.5Kbps), G.723 (6.4Kbps or 5.3Kbps) and Voxware RT29HQ (2.9Kbps). In addition, the data path of 64Kbps exchanges to LEC from LEC central office (CO) and keeps, but is not end-to-end maintenance. This simulation home loop sends analog signal, rather than the digital audio frequency of 64Kbps. The simulation home loop is usually as " last journey " of each telephone network line, in order to connect the local call of MPTY.

The guarantee of this ability is the strong point of circuit switching network. Yet the circuit exchange has two remarkable shortcomings. At first, Time Created may be very long, just is being busy with other calling because the call signal request may be found circuit; In this case, before connecting termination, other can not obtain connecting. Secondly, utilization rate may be low and expense is high. In other words, MPTY will also will be paid by All Time for paying during calling out and even without the data transmission (being that nobody speaks) occuring. Utilization rate may low reason be because circuit is special-purpose, to use so the time between the signal transmission can not be called out by any other. Any this untapped bandwidth during the connection has all been wasted.

In addition, the foundation structure of whole circuit exchange is set up around the circuit of 64Kbps. This foundation structure hypothesis is come transporting speech with the pcm encoder technology. Yet, have some coding that is of high quality one decoders use less than ten of the bandwidth of PCM/once bandwidth can encode sound. But the circuit-switched network Luoque is the bandwidth of an end-to-end call distribution 64Kbps blindly, even only utilized 1/10th of this bandwidth. In addition, each circuit generally only connects two conversation sides. If there be not the auxiliary of conference equipment (conference bridging equipment), all occupied be used to being connected a side to the opposing party with the whole circuit that phone links to each other. The circuit exchange does not have the ability of multicasting or multi-point, except non-binding conference equipment uses.

Other long reason of call set-up time comprises and relates to different signaling networks in the call setup and be the distance that causes transmission delay purely. The analog signal that mails to the central office from the end station on low bandwidth link also can be set up in delayed call. Also have, the call setup data will be through very long distance on the signaling network, and the signaling network is not always with light velocity the transmission of data. When calling was the world, the difference of signaling network just increased, and the equipment of processing call setup does not have modem apparatus (modem setup) fast like that usually, and distance is longer, so call setup is slower. In addition, in general, connection-oriented virtual or physical circuit device-such as the circuit exchange, owing to require end-to-end shaking hands between the conversation both sides, when connection is set up, need the longer time than comparable without interconnection technique.

Message exchange (message switching) is the advised another kind of exchanging policies of people. If adopt this exchanging form, just in advance between sender and recipient, do not set up physical pathway; On the contrary, whenever the sender has data code character (block of data) in the time of will sending, the data code character just is stored in first first exchange, is transferred to next exchange point after the error detection again. Message exchange is to the code character size system of not limiting, so requires switching station must have disk to come buffer memory long data code character; Also have, single code character may the busy line way minute, makes the message exchange become useless to interactive service (interactive traffic).

Packet switching network in computer network industry in occupation of advantage. Packet switching network is divided into the small data sheet that is called grouping with data, and the machinery compartment that is multiplexed to high power capacity connects. Grouping is a data code character, and strict code character maxsize is arranged, and is carrying as transmitting essential enough signs to its destination. This grouping generally contains the data of hundreds of bytes, only takies the time of tens of milliseconds of given transmission lines. Transmit larger documentation requirements by packet switch file is resolved into many little groupings, each transmission is one from a machine to another machine. The network hardware is delivered to named place of destination with these groupings, and software then is reassembled into them a single file.

Packet switch is used by nearly all computer interconnection owing to its data transmission efficiency. Packet switching network uses the bandwidth on the circuit on demand, and this just allows other transmission passing circuit during this period. Improved in addition flux, this is because in fact router or exchange can promptly receive it given grouping or the part of large file, just is forwarded to the next stop before other grouping of this document arrives. In the message exchange, intermediate router then must be waited until after whole code character is passed and could transmit. Now, because the superiority of packet switch has not re-used the message exchange in the computer network.

The internet is contrasted telephone system make the individual internet that relatively helps to understand better. The design object of public switch telephone network is to transmit the human speech that more or less can identify. For being applicable to computer to the communication of computer, they have been done improvement, but still be far from optimum. Cable between two computers can be with the speed transmission data of the hundreds of megabits of per second even kilomegabit. Under these speed, the poor bit error rate is mistake every day. , the maximum data rate that adopts the dial line of standard phone line is the thousands of positions of per second, and the bit error rate is then higher. In fact, the combination bit speed of local cable multiply by bit error rate performance may be than 11 orders of magnitude of voice grade telephone line. Yet new technology is being improved the performance of these circuits always.

B. gateway and router

The internet is comprised of a large amount of individual networks, and they have formed the global connection of thousands of computer systems together. Know machine be connected to each network after, we just can probe into network is how to be joined together to form internet (internetwork) or internet. At this moment, internet gateway and Internet Router just appear on the scene and have exposed.

With regard to architecture, two given networks are by the two computer that links to each other is connected with them. Internet gateway and router are provided as to send necessary those links of grouping and therefore make between network and are connected to become possibility. There are not these links, just impossible through the data communication of internet, because information or can not reach the destination, or can when arriving, become unintelligible. Gateway can be counted as the entrance that leads to certain communication network, and it carries out code between the incompatible network of two scripts and the conversion of agreement. For example, gateway transmission of e-mail and data file between the network on the Internet.

Ip router also is the computer that connects network, is the noun of the renewal liked of distributors. How these routers must decide by the routing table of use constantly updating the packet with its reception to send to the destination. Router is made these decisions by analyzing the destination network address (destination network address) of grouping. Importantly, router does not need generally to determine which main frame or terminal use will receive grouping; On the contrary, router is only sought destination network, therefore only follows the tracks of the information that is enough to arrive suitable network and needs not to be suitable terminal use. Therefore, router needs not to be huge super computer system and often just with the machine of small-sized main storage and minidisk memory. The difference of gateway and router is trickle, and current usage makes the smudgy degree that arrives these two frequent Alternates of term of difference boundary. In current term, gateway is Mobile data between different agreement, and router Mobile data between heterogeneous networks. So the system of mobile mail is gateway between TCP/IP and OSI, traditional (connecting different networks) IP gateway then is router.

It is useful investigating simply now that route in the traditional telephone system selects. Telephone system is configured to the multi-level hierarchy of high redundancy. Each phone has two copper cash of going out, and is directly connected to the nearest terminal station of telephone operator (end office), also claims local central office. Distance only just has about 20,000 terminal stations in the U.S. usually less than 10 kilometers. The juxtaposition of area code and telephone number front three is specified uniquely certain terminal station and is helped to determine rate and record keeping structure.

Each user's phone is connected with two-wire between the terminal station and is called home loop (local loop). Call out another user who is attached to same terminal station if be attached to the user of given terminal station, the exchange mechanism in the terminal station is just set up a direct electronics and is connected between these two loops. Because the circuit switching technology of preamble discussion, thisly remain intact during being connected to calling.

Call out the user who is attached to different terminals office if be attached to the user of given terminal station, will in the route of calling out is selected, do more work. The first, each terminal station has many circuits of going out to connect near one or more switching centres, is called long-distance exchange. These circuits are called long-distance tie trunk. If caller and recipient both sides' terminal station by chance has long-distance tie trunk to same long-distance exchange, then connect and just can in this long-distance exchange, set up. If the recipient of caller and calling does not share same long-distance exchange, then the path just must be in hierarchical structure higher somewhere foundation. The provincialism and the regional telephone office that form network are arranged, and long-distance exchange passes through network connection. Long-distance, area and zone exchange are each other by the basic routing line communication between the trunk line of high bandwidth. The quantity of different types of switching centre and their specific topological structure are different because of country, depend on the telephone density of this state.

C. carrying out the user with Internet communication facility connects

Except the data-transformation facility of internet, TCP/IP also seeks to make the user to believe that the internet is unique virtual network. The method that TCP/IP finishes this purpose provides the general interconnection of machinery compartment, and it is independent of main frame and the attached particular network of user terminal. Except the router interconnection of physical network, also require to have software to allow application program as using single true physical network, to use the internet on each main frame.

D. datagram and route are selected

The basis of internet business is the connectionless grouping transmission system by a basis of router operation, and BTU is grouping. In the Internet of operation TCP/IP, in the internet trunk, these groupings are called datagram. This section will briefly discuss how to select route for datagram in the internet.

In packet switching system, it is a process that the path that sends grouping is thereon selected that route is selected. As mentioned above, router is exactly the computer that carries out this selection. Route for the information of another main frame in from a main frame in the network to consolidated network is selected, and in fact the datagram that is sent out does not arrive the internet trunk. This is the example that inner route is selected, and it is fully from containing in network inside. The machine of network outside does not participate in these inner routes and selects to determine.

Should be distinguished direct transmission and indirect transfer now. Directly transmitting is the data transmission that starts from a machine, single one physical network of leap, arrives another machine on the Same Physical network. This transmission does not involve router. On the contrary, the sender is encapsulated in datagram in the physical frame, and then the mark address directly sends to the purpose machine with this frame.

When relating to more than one physical network, particularly when the machine in the network wish with another network in machine communication the time, indirect transfer is necessary. This communication type is exactly to stride the communication type of expecting when the internet trunk is selected the information route when we mention. Indirect transfer needs router. Send datagram, the sender must identify the router that this datagram can mail to, and then this router transmits this datagram to destination network. Recall, router is not generally followed the tracks of individual host address (having millions of), but only follows the tracks of physical network (having thousands of). In fact, the router in the internet forms the interconnection structure of a cooperation, and datagram is striden trunk and passed to router from router, until arrive a router that can directly transmit datagram.

V. technology introduction

The variation looks of Internet Forum have attracted the inflow of new system and technology. Below three new technologies-every all might be more popular in future soon, can be used to introduce this technical field:

A.ATM

Asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) is to adopt the networking technology of connection-oriented system at a high speed, is used for LAN and two kinds of networks of wide area network. The modern hardware that atm network requires comprises:

At a high speed exchange can be processed the traffic from many computers with the speed of gigabits/second (1012);

Optical fiber, (comparing with copper cash) provides high data rate, have with 100 or the main frame of the speed of 155Mbps (megabit/second) operation-ATM exchange connection;

The cell of fixed size (cell), each comprises 53 bytes.

ATM has merged packet switch and circuit and has exchanged the feature of the two, because it is to be designed for to go back transferring voice, video and TV signal except data. Pure packet-switch technology is helpless to carry out the voice transmission, because the more stable bandwidth of voice transmission requirement.

B. frame relay

The frame relay system adopts packet-switch technology, but higher than legacy system efficient. The partly cause of this efficient is actual to be that the frame relay system is than traditional X.25 packet switching service execution error check still less. In fact, many intermediate nodes seldom or are not made error check and are only processed route and select, and leave error check for system more high-rise. Because transmission reliability now is higher, it is insignificant that the error check that carried out in the past mostly becomes. Therefore, frame relay is compared with legacy system and is had higher performance.

C.ISDN

ISDN is a kind of " the international telecommunication standard of transferring voice, video and data on digital circuit ", mainly moves with the speed of 64K bps. The speed of traditional telephone network transferring voice only has the 4K bps. Adopt ISDN, terminal use or company must upgrade isdn terminal device, central office hardware and central office software. The conspicuous object of ISDN comprises following each point:

1. be provided for the internationally accepted standard of voice, data and signaling;

2. make all transmission lines become end-to-end numeric type circuit (end-to-end digital);

3. adopt the out-of-band signalling system of standard; And the bandwidth of bringing remarkable increase for desktop.

The VI.MCI intelligent network

The MCI intelligent network is a kind of processed voice, fax and relevant professional call treatment architecture. Intelligent network comprises special-purpose bridge joint switch (bridge switch) and one group of all-purpose computer with automatic call distributor (ACD) with specific function. Call treatment comprises number translated service, automatic or manual operator service, confirms that service and database service, these services are to be carried out by the special one group all-purpose computer with professional software. By so that simple and cost-mode strengthens software efficiently, can at an easy rate new value-added service be integrated in this system.

Before further launching, the implication of determining some terms is helpful. The artificial telecommunications operator console of ISP intelligent service platform NCS network control system DAP data access point ACD automatic call distributor ISN IN service networks (intelligent network) ISNAP IN service network attached processor MTOC ARU audio response unit ACP automatic call processor NAS network audio is the common older telephone systems ATN of server EVS enhancement speech business POTS asynchronous transfer mode frequently

The intelligent network architecture feature is abundant, and is very flexible. The method that increases new feature and service is simple and rapid. Be used in the special-purpose software that moves on the all-purpose computer and expand these features and service. Increase new feature and service and relate to the upgrading special-purpose software, cost-efficiency is than worthwhile.

Feature and the service of intelligent network comprise:

The type of call sign;

Call route selecting and selective terminal;

The operator selects and calls out to keep;

Artificial and automatic operation person;

Speech recognition and automatic, interactive responses;

The checking of client and client's profile and affirmation;

Voice mail;

Confirming call and database;

The videoconference reservation;

The video conference reservation;

Fax transmits and broadcasting;

The client keeps accounts;

The swindle monitoring;

Operating measurement and use statistical report; And Fabric Interface and control.

Each parts of A.MCI intelligent network

Figure 19 A represents an intelligent network according to preferred embodiment. The MCI intelligent network is comprised of many parts. The critical piece of MCI intelligent network comprises:

MCI exchange network 2

Network control system (NCS)/data access point (DAP) 3

ISN-IN service network 4

EVS-enhancement speech business 9

1.MCI exchange network

The MCI exchange network is comprised of special-purpose bridge joint switch (bridging switches) 2. These gapping switches 2 are after calling out by 4 affirmations of IN service network, for calling is connected route and is connected both sides with the called party. The bridge joint switch has limited programing function, provides basic Exchange Service under the control of IN service network (ISN) 4.

2. network control system/data access point (NCS/DAP)

NCS/DAP3 is the part of MCI intelligent network. DAP provides the various database services of number translated and so on, and also switch ID and the junction line ID for the termination number that identifies a calling provides service.

The difference service that NCS/DAP3 provides comprises:

800,900, the number translated of VNET number;

The scope restriction is used for restriction long-distance call selection and advanced parameters route and selects, and these advanced parameters routes select to comprise the percentage allocation on time, week, date, originating point and a plurality of place;

Information database comprises switch ID and the junction line ID of the termination number of given calling;

The remote inquiry customer database;

The VNET/950 card is confirmed service;

VNET ANI/DAL confirms service.

3. IN service network (ISN) 4

ISN 4 is included as the automatic call distributor (ACD) of call routing. ACD gives different artificial or active agencies (agents) from intelligent exchange network attached processor (ISNA) 5 communications and with call-delivery. ISN comprises ISNAP5 and operator's network center (ONC). Group selection (Group Select) and operator that ISNAP5 is responsible for call route selecting select (Operator Select). ISNAP communicates by letter to transmit calling to different agencies from ACD. ISNAP also is responsible for call pacing data and the voice that the operator assists. The composition of ONC is server, database and agency, and the agency comprises operator alive or audio response unit (ARU), and the latter comprises automatic call processor (ACP), MTOC and related NAS7. These systems communicate with one another on the net at Eternet LAN, for call treatment provides various services.

The various services that ONC provides comprise:

Confirm to serve-comprise type of call sign, call verification and call blocking (if the words that have);

Operator's service-artificial or automatic is used for helping the client;

The database service that various databases are consulted;

Call out expanded function;

Call out bridging functionality;

The prompting user input;

Played voice message.

4. enhancement speech business (EVS) 9

The enhancement speech business also provides except many increment features based on the route of menu and selects service. EVS system prompt user inputs and inputs the selective call route according to the user, perhaps selects to provide special service for voice mail and fax route. The difference service that provides as the part of the EVS parts of MCI intelligent network comprises:

Play the specific voice message of client;

The prompting user input;

Information Access based on user's input;

Call out expanded function;

Call out bridging functionality;

Conference call functions;

The call transfer function;

Recording user voice message;

The long-range renewal of the voice that record;

Connect-send a fax.

5. other parts

Except above-mentioned parts, also be equipped with one group of other parts in the MCI intelligent network. These parts are:

The intelligent call route is provided by providing of (ICR) service, and the data that are used for obtaining from MPTY according to during calling out or more early the time are carried out special call route selecting. Also select route according to the understanding of physics and logical network layout. Also provide other intelligent route according to the time to select service, select according to the alternate routing of busy router.

Record keeping is a critical component of MCI intelligent network. The record keeping parts provide according to type of call and the accounting of user service of calling out perdurabgility. Also provide special record keeping service for the value-added service that resembles 800 recipient's pay phones and so on extraly.

The swindle monitor component is a critical component of MCI intelligent network, and it provides and prevents because of other people swindle and the illegal service of using network to lose profit.

Operating measurement is included as the analytic product performance and carries out Data Collection. The analysis of advertising reaction, the call model (call patterns) of generation special report are resulted from operating measurement. The information of collecting also is used for following product plan and fundamentals of forecasting topology requirement.

Comprise that with statistical report from operating database and charging information collection information generates the report of use. Use statistical report to be used for research call model, loading mode (load patterns) and demographic information. These reports are used for the input of following product plan and the marketing.

B. intelligent network system survey

MCI call treatment architecture is set up at many vitals, and these parts comprise MCI exchange network, network control system, enhancement speech business system and IN service network. Call treatment is to carry out at one group of all-purpose computer with by its some special-purpose processors that produce, consist of the basis of MCI intelligent network fully. Switch (Switch) is a kind of special-purpose bridge joint switch with limited program capability and complex interface. It is very difficult to add new service at switch, sometimes may not. Whether the calling that at first will check on the MCI switch (MCI Switch) needs number translated (situation when for example being 800 number). If need number translated, originally be in according to inside table (internal table) then or at switch and finish conversion, DAP is mail in the request will changed, DAP is an all-purpose computer, has can carry out number translated, also can determine the junction line ID of termination number and the software of switch ID.

Calling can be routed to ACD, and ACD arrives various call-processing agents with call-delivery, such as operator or the ARU of living. ACD communicates by letter with ISNAP, and the latter carries out group selection and determines which group agency is responsible for this calling and which acts on behalf of free this calling of processing.

The agency is by processing the calling that receives with NIDS (network information distributed service) server communication. The NIDS server is to confirm or database server to have the necessary database of various services that is provided by ISN. Confirm that in case call out by the call treatment on this server the agency just sends it back ACD with this state. So ACD dials termination number and bridge joint has the incoming call of termination number, and to all paths execution release link trunking lines (RLT) orders of getting back to this switch, will call out release. The agency also generates the thin record of name (BDR) order of keeping accounts with account data. When calling was finished, switch was with regard to generating run service log (OSR) order, and the latter will mate to create complete account data later on corresponding BDR. The interpolation of new value-added service is very simple, and new feature can be added by the configuration of different computing systems among other software and the ISP. The below explains a typical call-flow (call flow) situation.

C. call-flow gives an example

This call-flow example has been explained the processing from the phone 1 of Figure 19 A to the 800 number recipient pay phone of phone 10. When MPTY is dialed 1-800-COLLECT, when carrying out recipient's Paycall to called party's phone 10, call out beginning. This calling called party's regional Bel business corporation (RBOC) (it knows that this is the number that MCI has) is routed to nearest MCI exchange apparatus, arrives MCI switch 2.

Switch 2 detects the service that this is a 800 number, so just carry out the 800 number conversion according to the reference table in the switch, perhaps request data access point (DAP) 3 usefulness database lookups provide the number translated service.

Now by automatic call distributor (ACD) 4 this call treatment is entrusted to one group of intelligence computation system. In this example, owing to be recipient's pay phone, MPTY will at first contact artificial or automatic operation person, and then, this calling just can further be processed. Calling is transferred to from switch can be with the ACD4 of IN service network attached processor (ISNAP) 5 operations. ISNAP5 determines that according to the type of calling out which group agency can process this calling. This operation is called as group selection. The agency that can carry out call treatment comprises artificial telecommunications operator console (MTOC) 6 or with the related network audio automatic call processor (ACP) 7 of server (NAS) 7a frequently. ISNAP5 determines this calling of the free processing of which agency, and this audio call is routed to specific agency.

The agency sets up with advanced call processing software. The agency from MPTY collect comprise called party's telephone number all for information about. Then the agency communicates by letter with database server with one group of database lookup request. The database lookup request comprises the type of query call, according to the confirming call of MPTY and called party's telephone number and call blocking (if the words that have)-comprise according to calling out and the call congestion (call blocking) of called both sides telephone number limits. Then the agency signals to the ISNAP-ACD combination, requires to allow caller waits, and dials the called party and be connected the callee. The agency is then to called party report call side and the situation of request recipient pay phone. The agency collects from the called party and replys, and then further processes this calling.

If the called party agrees to receive this calling, the agency just signals to the ISNAP-ACD combination, requires bridge joint called party and MPTY. Then the agency switches the BDR (keep accounts name thin record) of corresponding OSR (operate services record) coupling that is used for and is generated by switch to create complete account data. ISNAP-ACD makes up then bridge joint called party and MPTY, then by carrying out release trunk (RLT) order circuit is discharged the return switch. MPTY and called party just can converse by switch now. No matter during by which side finished call, switch generates an OSR, and it will mate to create with the BDR that generates in early time the complete account data of this calling. If called party's refusal is accepted this recipient's pay phone, the agency just makes up signalling to ACD-ISNAP, and the MPTY that requires to wait for reconnects the back substitution reason. At last, the agency replys to MPTY circular called party's, just stops this calling after generating a BDR.

The MCI intelligent network is a kind of scalable and efficient call treatment network architecture, and its basis is one group of intelligent processor with special-purpose software, special-purpose bridge joint switch and ACD. Intelligent network is the stacking network with MCI exchange network coexistence, is comprised of special-purpose processor a large amount of, that carry out call treatment with the exchange network reciprocation. An embodiment of intelligent network is fully centered by audio frequency (audio-centric). Data are processed with some special, special-purpose features and value-added service as audio call with fax.

In another embodiment, intelligent network is transformed to get to adapt to emerging technology, comprises based on the video telephone of POTS and is used for the Internet phone of voice and video. Below each joint be described in detail in architecture, feature and service on the emerging technology basis.

The compatibility of ISN and emerging technology

Below each joint describe architecture, feature and the service be based upon on some emerging technology bases in detail, they can both be integrated in the intelligent network.

The VII.ISP framework

A. background

ISP is comprised of some not identical systems. Along with the integrated progress of ISP, independently system had become larger part of the whole now in the past, and what accompany with it is the raising of analysis, test, scheduling and training level in the ISP all spectra.

1. broadband access (broadband access)

Preferred embodiment supports that the high bandwidth of a scope is professional. These services comprise: video request program, meeting, remote teaching, tele-medicine.

ATM (asynchronous transfer mode) is advanced to the periphery of network with network control, has avoided junction line and the exchange model of tradition based on the phone of circuit. It is professional that expectation will be widely adopted to adapt to these high bandwidths.

2. IP system

Internet and provide with the WWW (World Wide Web) of internet and to be easy to user's access, commercial opportunity widely, and cultivated new function for successful telecommunications company. The ISP platform provides the many features that can both use and use from the phone to the internet. These features comprise access, subscriber equipment, personal account, record keeping, marketing (and advertisement) data or application content, or even basic telephone service.

Telecommunications industry is the main transmission supplier of internet. Optimum for the Internet user provides the preferred embodiment from many features of telephony environment.

Figure 19 F is the block diagram according to the IP system of preferred embodiment.

Many computers

1900,1901,1902,1903 are connected to internet 1910 in fire wall 1905 back by Ethernet (Ethernet) or other network connection. Domain name system 1906 is mapped to IP address in the internet 1910 with name. Be used for to keep accounts 1920, supply 1922, directory service 1934, all be attached to internet 1910 by communication link such as each systems such as messaging service 1930 of voice message transmission 1932. Also adopt another communication link to come convenience and communicating by letter for the satellite equipment 1940 that sends information to various machines top equipment 1941～1943. Web server 1944 is provided to the access of internet 1910 for order entry system (order entry system) 1945.

Among the embodiment, order entry system 1945 is that given telephone number generates complete profile information, comprises title, address, fax number, secretary's number, wife's telephone number, pager, business adress, e-mail address, IP address and phone mail (phonemail) address. This information is kept in the database of everyone access that can be accessed by the network right of possession. In an alternate embodiments, order entry system utilizes web interface (web interface) to visit existing directory service database 1934 in order to be provided for the information of replenish user input message for profile.

Internet 1910 connects PSN (PSTN) 1960 by gateway 1950. Gateway 1950 in the preferred embodiment provides the virtual connection of certain entity of circuit switched call in the internet 1910 from PSTN 1960.

PSTN 1960 is attached with various systems, comprises dial-in direct input 1970, is used for making things convenient for the 800 number processing and is convenient to for example data access point (DAP) 1972 of virtual network (VNET) processing of company's special circuit (tieline). PBX (PBX) 1980 also by communication link attached so that PSTN1960 with such as communicating by letter between the various computer equipments of facsimile machine 1981, phone 1982, modem 1983. Operator 1973 selectively can also connect calling, to help to connect calling or the Conference Calling of discrepancy PSTN1960 or internet 1910.

Various services all are connected to PSTN by each communication link, and these communication links comprise the annex of IN service network (ISN) 1990, dial-in direct plan (direct-dial plan) 1991, supply (provisioning) 1974, order input 1975, record keeping 1976, directory service 1977, conference service 1978 and the mandate/service for checking credentials 1979. All these business can both communicated by letter between them by gateway 1950 usefulness PSTN1960 and internet 1910. ISN1990 is connected the equipment that function can be connected with internet 1910 and is used with DA1972.

Figure 19 G is that expression is according to the block diagram of the preferential access/router of preferred embodiment. The design synthesis of preferential access/router (PAR) feature of internet access device and Internet Protocol (IP) router. It can make dialing modem change to PPP/SLIP to IP and reverse IP by carrying out basic modem and PPP/SLIP, enters the Internet. It is the source/destination way address of analyzing IP grouping and UPD or tcp port and for each divides the suitable network interface of going out of group selection also. At last, it gives the grouping of mailing to the particular network interface priority higher than the grouping of mailing to other network interface with preferential route selection technology.

The design object of preferential access/router is that in real time communication is separated with remaining best trial (best-effort) data communication on the internet. Access point in the internet preferably will separate with the communication that does not have real-time constraint with interactive multimedia communication in real time, in order to can obtain the larger control to service quality. Following index map 19G illustrates the process that preferential access/router adopts.

At first, in step 2010, computer is by modem dialup PAR. Computer modulating demodulator and PAR modem negotiation specified data transfer rate and modem protocol parameter. Computer connects with modem-modem at public switch telephone network (PSTN) and connects to set up point-to-point protocol (PPP) session with PAR.

Computer connects point-to-point (PPP) transmitted in packets to PAR with modem. PAR modem 2010 by modem to primary processor interface 2080 with the PPP transmitted in packets to PPP to IP transfer process 2020. Modem to primary processor interface can be any existing or physical interface of remaining to be invented. The example of some existing interfaces is ISA, EISA, VME, SCbus, MVIP bus, storage channel (Memory Channle) and TDM bus. Adopt the multiplex bus of all as mentioned here time-sharing multiplex buses to have certain advantage, because can be used for specific data flow to capacity, kept deterministic performance.

PPP to IP transfer process 2020 becomes the IP grouping with the PPP packet switched, and the grouping of the IP after will changing is transferred to packet classifiers 2050 by process to procedural interface 2085. Process to procedural interface both can be the physical interface between the special-purpose processor hardware, also can be software interface. Process to some examples of progress software interface comprise function or subroutine call, message queue, shared drive, direct memory access (DMA) and mailbox.

Packet classifiers 2085 judges whether this grouping belongs to any specific preferential group. Packet classifiers keeps a flow specification table (table of flow specifications), and it is defined by following content:

IP address, destination

Source IP address

The IP address, source/destination ground of combination

The destination IP address/udp port of combination

The destination IP address/tcp port of combination

Source IP address/the udp port of combination

Source IP address/the tcp port of combination

The source IP address of combination and with TCP or the udp port of IP address, destination

The IP address, destination of combination and with TCP or the udp port of source IP address

The source IP address of combination and with TCP or udp port and the TCP/UDP port of IP address, destination.

The IP address of using in the packet classifiers contrast grouping and UDP or tcp port check its flow specification table. If the coupling of discovery, this grouping just is classified as and belongs to certain preferential flow (priority flow) and be coupled with priority flag (priority tag). Can adopt the resource preservation to set up agreement (Resource Reservation Setup Protocol) technology and carry out this packet classifiers step.

Packet classifiers 2050 by process to procedural interface (90) priority flag will be arranged and without the packet distribution of priority flag to packet scheduler (packet scheduler) 2060. Process to procedural interface 2090 needn't be equal to process to procedural interface 2085, but the identical choice of technology can be arranged. The best that the Priority Queues technology of packet scheduler 2060 usefulness such as Weighted Fair Queuing helps guarantee (being identified by packet classifiers) preferential grouping reception higher priority and can be placed on ratio competition in the network interface formation of going out is attempted the forward position of (best-effort) portfolio.

Packet scheduler 2060 will divide into groups to be distributed to any network interface of going out (2010,2070,2071 or 2072) by priority by primary processor-peripheral bus 2095. Can use any amount of network interface of going out.

The IP grouping can be passed through dec non-modem DEC interface (2070,2071 and 2072) and arrive PAR. Some examples of these interfaces comprise Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, FDDI, ATM and frame relay. The step that these groupings are identical with the IP grouping experience that arrives by modem PPP interface.

Preferential flow explanation (priority flow specifications) is by 2030 management of controller process. The controller process can be accepted external preferential reservation (priority reservations) by external control application programming interfaces 2040. Controller contrast allows control procedure and strategic process to confirm preferential the reservation for specific stream, if this reservation is allowed to, just by process to procedural interface 2065 this flow specification is logined flow specification table in the packet scheduler 2050. Process to procedural interface 2065 needn't be equal to process to procedural interface 2085, but the identical choice of technology can be arranged.

Turn to now Figure 20, the figure shows the structural framework of the used intelligent service platform of the present invention (ISP) 2100. The architecture of ISP2100 is intended to define a kind of integrated approach, provides and pay IN service for the MCI network on all parts of ISP.

Each existing communications network system has the methodology of oneself to provide service management, resource management, data management, safety, distributed treatment, network control or running to support. The architectural definition of ISP 2100 a single coherent structure framework that covers these fields. This architecture concentrates on and obtains following target:

The function in the exploitation whole world;

The following professional of enhancing is provided;

Efficent use of resources;

Improve marketing opportunities;

Reduce and safeguard and operating costs;

Improve whole product quality

The function convergent-divergent that introducing makes progress downward.

The target ability that people imagine ISP2100 is to provide basic structural member for very many business. These Characteristics of Services all provide higher bandwidth, larger client control or individual flexibility and shorten dramatically in addition moment cycle is provided.

3. capacity

The ISP2100 extend over the entire globe is omnipresent. On the geography, it will arrive by the partner's of alliance network each country; On the range, it arrives all commercial affairs and resident places by wired or wireless access.

4. following professional

Above-mentioned ability will be used to providing:

Surpass our present telephony and messaging service;

Emerging video and multimedia provide;

Powerful data service comprises the enhancement dedicated network;

Make the terminal use can obtain their business is had software and the equipment of fully control.

The business that ISP2100 provides will comprise advertisement, agricultural, education, amusement, finance, government, law, manufacturing industry, medical treatment, Internet Transmission, real estate, research, retail, shipbuilding, telecommunications, tourism, the required service in wholesale and many other fields.

Professional:

The user is customizable: the user can come by their needs the custom service project.

User management: user directly (network side) gets involved management and control to their business.

Loosely connected: Internet resources are only just obtained and use to business when needed; The user only pays for the thing that they use. Bandwidth can be used as requested, needn't allocate in advance.

Safety and secret: user's privacy and secret are sovereign in network world. Commercial interest is guaranteed that affairs are processed safety, maintained secrecy. Will identification and authentication of users and client, protecting network is not disturbed and is destroyed.

The B.ISP architecture frame

Next joint is described the effect of ISP platform 2100 in customer service is provided.

ISP2100 provides the client professional by IN service foundation structure. Foundation structure comprises provider network facility 2102, public network facility 2104 and customer equipment 2106. Professional foundation structure guarantees end-to-end quality and the availability of customer service.

Next joint is described ISP platform 2100 and relation in the inside and outside various external systems of provider.

Provider's parts 2108 among Figure 20 are:

IN service 2100-is responsible for that business provides, professional pays, the professional guarantee, comprises internal data communication network 2102. This has represented the effect of ISP.

Revenue control 2112-is responsible for the financial sector of client's business.

Network management 2114-is responsible for exploitation and the operation of physical network 2102.

Management of product 2116-is responsible for establishment and the marketing of client's business.

The external entity of ISP2100 shown in Figure 20 is:

This represents network 2104-that all-network connects and is the professional cut-in method that uses by the client. This comprise the circuit switching network, packet switching network of provider, inner expansion wide area network, Internet, provider wireless partner network, provider global alliance and national partner network, broadband network and be attached at customers' place equipment 2118 on these networks.

This represents those intelligent service platforms 2100 by provider to the outside organization of client's distribution service third party service provider 2120-.

Business resell merchant 2122-this represent the tissue that those have the client who uses facility 2100.

The whole world partner 2124-of alliance has the tissue of the ability of shared facility and their network of exchange and professional foundation structure.

The C.ISP functional framework

Figure 21 has represented the parts of ISP2100 in more detail. What show among the figure is the logical block set that comprises ISP 2100 architectures. These parts neither ones are single physical entities; Each parts repeatedly occurs in a plurality of places usually. Each parts cooperation provides seamless IN service 2110 environment. This environment is not fixed, and it is conceived to is a flexibly evolution platform that can increase new business, adopt ripe open new technology. Platform component is to link by the one or more network connections that comprise inner distributed treatment foundation structure.

The ISP2100 functional part is:

The business inbound and the gateway 2126-that goes out allows access to be provided by other provider, and allow other provider to access the business of this provider.

The interface of three layers of (three-tier) service creation environment of the business that sale property Service Gateway 2128-and provider sell. Business is by 2128 scheduling of sale property Service Gateway and renewal. This in fact from management service gateway 2130 there is no different, difference just, by the service that creates here and dispatch for the external client.

What management service gateway 2130-showed is that the business that is applied to the management of platform creates concept and service logic. Management service is by 2130 scheduling of management service gateway and management. The interface that connects the management system of ISP2100 outside is also realized by management service gateway 2130. The forwarding of (billable) network event that some examples of management service comprise collection, keep in and can keep accounts. Other business comprises collection, filters the warning message from ISP2100, then is transmitted to network management 2132.

Service enabler 2134-service logic execution environment that is used for sale property business or management service. Service enabler 2134 is carried out the logic that contains in order to unique custom service functional part is provided in the specific profile of client.

Service creation environment 2136-creates and management and running are professional and sale property is professional and their foundation characteristic and ability.

Data management 2138-uses the place of the profile information of all clients and business. Data are cached in service enabler 2134, statistics server 2140, call context server 2142, Analysis server 2144 and other needs special use application or the server 2146 of ISP2100 data.

Professional select 2148-no matter business be by the arrowband of circuit exchange, packet switch or cell switching or which kind of network insertion in the broadband network, professionally all provide professional selection function 2148 acquisitions. Professional selecting 2148 to be special-purpose versions of service enabler 2134, is specially for selecting one or several business that will carry out to design.

Explorer 2150-manages all resources, comprises special resource 2152 and at the srvice instance of service enabler 2134 operation, and needs to manage in ISP2100 and the resource of any other kind of distributing.

Among the special resource 2152-figure special based on network function (internet is to voice conversion, DTMF-detection, fax, speech recognition etc.) is expressed as special resource 2152.

Call context server 2142-accepts real-time network event record and business event record and allows data query. In case certain all event of calling out (or other network affairs of any kind) all is generated, the event information of combination is just all passed to revenue control function 2154. Data are short-term storage.

Statistics server 2140-accept from service enabler statistical phenomeon, carry out and roll (rollups) and allow data query. Data are short-term storage.

Based on software and the professional hardware at client's ability 2156-user place, can realize the function based on the customers' place, access such as ANI shielding, internet access, compression, interactive entertainment, video conference, retail, and so on.

One kind of Analysis server 2144-is not on the network insertion basis but according in real time or the particular service engine of setting up near the increment basis of real-time network statistics or call context information. Example comprises that swindle detects and client communication amount statistics.

Other particular service 2146-require other form, may be or may not be application or the server of setting up on the basis of service enabler model. The low level Functional Capability of using during these parts provide other computational resource and can pay, monitor in business or manage.

The D.ISP integrated network is professional

Figure 22 represents ISP architecture 2100 is how to provide professional by heterogeneous networks. Shown in network comprise internet 2160, public switch telephone network (PSTN) 2162, metropolitan area access ring (Metro access rings) 2164 and wireless 2166, in addition, people estimate can replace current PSTN network 2162 such as new " without switch " broadband network architecture 2168 of ATM or ISOEthernet etc. and 2170.

The reason that this architecture adapts to the network of non-basic PSTN2162 is the business that these replaceable network models often can not provide on basic PSTN with the structural support with expectation decrease cost. These networks have logically been represented among Figure 22.

Each these new network is conceived to the same manner and ISP2100 co-operate. Calling (or affairs) originates from the customer service request in the network. ISP receives these affairs and service is provided, and the method that service is provided is at first to identify the user, then affairs is transmitted to unitized service enabler 2174. Service enabler need to determine any business function parts, then utilizes self special Internet resources for required feature adopts essential logic OR.

ISP2100 itself is under the control of a series of explorers and management and monitor control mechanism. By concurrent use common information repository, can realize a single system image. Information bank is preserved all users, business, network and the resource information of being used or being generated by ISP. Other outside application (from MCI inside, sometimes from the outside of MCI) is authorized to by gateway, intermediate, and sometimes directly accesses identical information bank.

Each entity among Figure 22 represents the unity logic parts of ISP. Each is deployed in the Multi-instance at place, a plurality of place to estimate these entities.

The E.ISP parts

Outside application of Ext App2176-;

Inner ISP of APP2178-uses (analyzing such as swindle);

Dc2180-data client computer-a provide client computer of the ISP information bank of local data copy;

One of primary copy of Ds2182-data server-ISP information;

Admin2184-ISP administrative functions (being used for configuration and maintenance);

Mon2186-ISP monitoring function (be used for makeing mistakes, performance and accounting);

The overall resource management figure of the selected resource of GRM2188-;

The local resource control chart of the selected resource of LRM2190-;

SR2192-professional resources (such as video server, port, speech recognition) pond;

SE2134-carries out the generalization service enabler of desired service logic;

The professional 2194-of selection selects (in service enabler 2134 operations) that the function of the srvice instance of the affairs that provide from network should be provided.

F. without the communication service of switch

Without the application that switch network 2168 is used to refer to cell switching or packet-switch technology in data and multimedia communication is served when waiting. Past, the unique feasible technology of speech when the circuit exchange is waiting of transmission time sensitivity. Now, along with the development of the asynchronous transfer mode cell-switched network that quality of service guarantee is provided, in the time of realizing serving etc. with single network foundation structure and the pulse data serve the two.

Expection can provide the reason of the model lower than circuit switching architecture expense to be without switch network:

Can use for each neatly required bandwidth accurately is provided, when having the data transmission, can not save bandwidth. Be not to call out the circuit that automatically distributes minimum 56Kbps for each.

Be adapted to compress technique, further reduced the bandwidth requirement of each BlueDrama.

The expense of specialized resource equipment reduces because in fact also the nonessential analog port that provides obtain special DSP ability such as speech recognition or meeting. A single high bandwidth network port can side by side be served hundreds of " calling ".

Without switch network can be applicable to and transformed easily be applicable to advanced high bandwidth professional-such as video conference, as required immediately training, Remote, integrated video/speech/fax/Email and information service. Figure 23 represents the example without switch network 2168 according to preferred embodiment.

G. guideline

1. structure principle

This section contains the following guide look subsystem structure principle on the basis that has consisted of this architecture.

Professional principle:

1. business model must be supported the seamless integrated of new and existing business.

2. professional establishment from the service creation environment (SCE) public, that seamless professional figure is provided.

3. all business are all carried out in public service logic execution environment (SLEE), and this environment is being introduced the new software change that do not require when professional.

4. all services all create from one or more business function parts.

5. can be used in the ISP data server data of storing in single client's profile and drive a plurality of business.

6. business model must be supported the explanation of each professional service parameter quality and finish. These service parameter quality have consisted of the professional level agreement with each client on the whole. Professional scheduling must be considered the quality of service parameters of regulation.

2. business function parts (feature) principle

1. all business function parts are all described by the combination of one or more functions.

2. all business function parts can both be defined by the function of limited quantity.

3. individual other business function parts must define with standard method, in order to make professional designer to function common understanding be arranged. Each business function parts must state clearly their input, output, error amount, demonstration characteristic and potential business application.

4. the reciprocation of physical entity in network is realized do not seen by the business function unit interface by the user of business function parts.

5. each business function parts should have unified, stable external interface. One group of operation and each operation data that required and provided are provided interface.

6. the business function parts are not oneself to be deployed in the network by them. (referring to Figure 21) that the business function parts just are scheduled as a part of calling the service logic program of these business function parts. So the business function parts are to be linked to statically in the service logic program, function then is dynamically to be linked in the service logic program. Here it is reaches resource and professional loosely connected place.

3. functional principle

1. the definition of function is given no thought to any physics or logic realizes (be independent of network realize).

2. each function should have unified, stable external interface. Interface is described as one group of operation and operates the data that institute required and provided by each.

3. single function must define with standard method, in order to make professional designer to function common understanding be arranged. Each function must state clearly their input, output, error amount, demonstration characteristic and potential business application.

4. the reciprocation of physical entity in network is realized do not seen by functional interface by the user of function.

5. function can be combined to form Premium Features.

6. complete activity of Operation Definition to function. Operation to function has a logic starting point and one or more logic end point.

7. realize in one or more physical hardwares that function can be in network be realized or the software.

8. the required data of each feature operation are supported data parameter and customer instance data parameter-definition by feature operation.

9. function is independent of any business to the deployment in the network.

10. be overall in the function quintessence, professional designer needn't consider their position, because it seems from professional designer's viewpoint, whole network is considered a single entity.

11. function can re-use. They do not add modification just can be used for other business.

4. service-creation, scheduling and execution principle

1. each service enabler 2134 is supported a client storehouse (customer base) subset. That configuration data by storage on the ISP data server 2182 drives by the client's of certain service enabler support inventory.

2. each service enabler 2134 obtains its configuration data from ISP data server 2152 when starting.

3. service enabler 2134 usefulness ISP database client computer 2180 (referring to data management one joint of this specification) come the high-speed cache support to be the necessary data of client of these service enabler 2134 configurations. High-speed cache can by 2182 controls of ISP database server, perhaps be controlled by the database of ISP database server 2182. If think too large from the expense of data server 2182 frequent loading data, then can be at service enabler 2134 (in disk or the internal memory) semipermanent ground cached data.

4. service enabler 2134 expections can be carried out all business of certain client, perhaps a subset of this client's business. Yet in the situation of service interaction effect, a service enabler 2134 must always grasped the execution of certain business at any given time. Service enabler can be handed to other service enabler with control in the process that business is carried out.

5. service enabler does not have any data, does not even have configuration data.

6. service enabler 2134 is not that data are disposed the target of (deployment of data). Data server 2182 is targets that data are disposed.

5. resource management model 2150 principles

1. resource 2152 should be by the Anywhere access from network.

2. resource is not professional specific, can be by all professional sharing when needing.

3. the resource of same type should be divided in groups management.

4. resource management model 2150 should have enough flexibilities, can adapt to various management strategies, comprise least cost, circulation, least-recently-used, the most facile, at first run into, use until be out of order and monopolize and use until be out of order.

5. resource management model 2150 should be optimized the resource distribution, lays particular stress on if possible certain selected strategy.

6.RM2150 must allow use a series of resource distribution technique one scopes from static configuration to affairs ground one by one on affairs to the complete dynamic assignment of resource.

7. resource management model 2150 must allow to implement resource usage policy, and according to priority preferential reallocation overtime such as resource.

Resource management model 2150 must detect and access resources pond (resource pool) in resource state, use and perfect situation.

9. all resources 2152 all must be treated by managed object.

10. all resources 2152 must register to enter pond (pool) with RM2150, remove registration to leave the pond.

11. the unique channel of request, acquisition and releasing resource 2152 is to pass through RM2150.

12. the relation between the resource should not fixed, on the contrary, each example of given resource should distribute from the pond of registration as required or by demand.

13. all special resources 2152 must be to it seems it is manageable from unified flat roof area viewpoint.

14. all special resources 2152 must directly or by the agency provide SNMP or CMIP agent functionality.

15. each special resource 2152 will be expressed in public management information bank.

16. all special resources should support standard inquiry, detection, begin or quit work and the operational set of test event.

17. all special resources 2152 all should provide one by the basic set of the self-test function of standard SNMP or the control of CMIP management interface.

6. data management 2138 principles

1. allow any data item that a plurality of copies are arranged.

2. the value of certain data item may have a plurality of versions, but wherein a kind of be considered to be key plate this.

3. the key plate of data-oriented item originally only has an ownership.

4. allow the same data of simultaneously access of a plurality of users.

5. using business rules at ISP2100 must have uniformity, with the validity that guarantees that all data change.

6. the user is to the data trnascription work of this locality; Data access is independent of the position and is transparent.

7. from the viewpoint of data management, the user uses or other software part.

8. data access should meet the singleton of a normalized access method on ISP2100.

9. allowed exclusive data in the local data base, but exclusive data can not be shared or distribute.

10. only have master data to be shared or to distribute.

11. allow to share data item in the local data base professional format is arranged.

12. transaction capabilities can weaken in the scope that business rules allows with an end user's the meaning.

13. rule-based logic and the control of other metadata provide flexibly means to use strategy.

14. data Replica provides reliability by copying of data source.

15. partitions of database provides scalability by the size that reduces any specific data storage and the transaction rate of any specific data being stored by reduction.

16. data management 2138 must allow the Static and dynamic configuration of data resource.

17. should adopt public data model and public scheme.

18. the data application drawing of logic separates with the data manipulation of physics, the reloading or the again format of data storages of the reorientation of the latter such as file, database.

19. complete issue-resolution needs audit trail (audit trails) and event history.

20. guarantee data integrity, need on line data audit and conciliation.

21. need to carry out in real time the data of Mishap Database recovers.

22. need to there be DATA REASONING (metrics) to be used for the purposes such as monitoring, trend analysis (trending) and control.

Take advantage of 24 operations 23. require to have 7 of 99.9999 availabilities.

24. data management 2138 mechanisms must determine ratio in the high growth level.

25. data management 2138 mechanisms are necessary for extensive and small-scale deployment cost-efficient solution all are provided.

26. data management mechanism must properly dispose the overload situation.

27. data processing and data must carry out satisfying our commercial needs synchronously in real time.

28. will directly using on the ISP database rather than by the centre as much as possible, reliably order input (trusted order entry) and professional establishment carry out.

29. all data must be protected; In addition, customer data is special-purpose, must maintain secrecy.

30. configuration, operation setting and operational factor are controlled in ISP MIB (management information bank).

31. as possible, just should adopt ready-made data solution to satisfy the data management needs.

Below be the principle from OO viewpoint statement:

32. data item is the set of minimum permanent object; Single data value of these object encapsulation.

33. data item can have a user-defined type.

34. data item can create and delete.

35. data item only has single reading and method to set up.

36. the intrinsic value of data item is subject to the restriction of scope restriction and rule.

37. being in the data item of disarmed state must not be open to the user.

7. principle is supported in operation

1. common view pattern (view)-all ISP2100 operations support that user interface should have identical outward appearance.

2. the management of function versatility-object represents in whole ISP operation support environment in the same manner.

3. single view-distributed managed object supports that in the ISP operation user interface has single expression, and distribution is automatic.

4.OS/DM the data in territory-operation support region should be used ISP data management 2138 organization managements.

5. overall MIB-has the overall MIB of the logic of resource among the whole ISP of representative.

6. all it doesn't matter with operating support and data management as each the built-in MIB that is managed a parts part for outside MIB-, and this class MIB will be represented to OS by intermediate equipment.

7. system conformance-obtain to meet by each intermediate layer (Mediation Layers) system conformance of ISP OS standard.

8. operating function-operating personnel are that physics and logical resource are processed Internet and Single Component Management.

9. management function-administrative staff's processing plan and service management.

10. profile territory-service and client's profile database are to be managed according to the territory of data management system by administrative staff.

11. telecommunication management network (TMN) uniformity-obtain the TMN uniformity by the gateway that connects any TMN system.

12. concurrency-a plurality of operators and keeper must side by side carry out operation from ISP OS interface.

8. physical model principle

1. compatible: the physical network model provides the backward compatibility to existing telecommunications hardware and software.

2. scalability: the physical network model is telescopic, can vast customers and the business need of accommodation.

3. redundancy: the physical network model provides across a plurality of information flow paths between two NEs. Eliminated the single failure point.

4. transparent: NE is transparent to the network redundancy on basis. If break down, just automatically switch to redundant link.

5. appropriateness is demoted: the physical network model can provide the available service that reduces gradually capacity when a plurality of network failure occurs.

6. interoperability: the network that the physical network model allows to have different qualities operates mutually from different NEs.

7. security: the physical network model requires and provides safe communication. It is the capable secure access NE that guarantees also.

8. monitoring: the physical network model provides the interface of strict difinition to come communicating by letter on the monitor network with access method. Integrated security function (seeing above) is to prevent the unauthorized access to sensitive data.

9. partitionability: physical network model (in logic) can be divided into the territory of respectively managing independently.

10. quality of service: the QOS that the physical network model provides (service quality) measure is all uses (legacy applications) QOS, blocks management (congestion) and at user option QOS if any wide mass range, sufficient tradition.

11. generally access: the physical network model not because NE in network the position and stop access to it. Any resource on the professional energy accesses network.

12. regulations consciousness: the physical network model can both change to adapt to unexpected variation in the rule environment at all levels.

13. cost-efficient: the physical network model allows cost-efficiently realization owing to not relying on single distributors platform or specific profile.

The H.ISP business model

This section is described the business model of intelligent service platform network architecture framework.

1. purpose

The ISP business model is the framework support that service development is set up:

Fast professional foundation and deployment;

Effectively professional execution;

Fully customization control to customer service;

Form whole business integration of the professional figure of seamless client;

Improved the re-using the ISP function by the loose combination of function;

Reduce the professional cost of realizing;

Independence to distributors.

2. the scope of making great efforts

The ISP business model is supported and professional all related activities, is comprised following each side:

Supply;

Create;

Dispose;

Subscribe;

Upgrade;

Monitoring;

Carry out;

Test or simulation;

Customer support and fault diagnosis;

Keep accounts;

Faulty tag (trouble ticket) is processed;

Operation is supported.

This model is applicable to professional and two aspects of management service of sale property.

Sale property business is the business by our client's purchase

Management service is the part of MCI network running, does not sell to the client.

Service model also defines the reciprocation with the other parts of ISP architecture, and they comprise data management, resource management and operation support.

3. business model general introduction

The center of intelligent service platform is professional 2200 payment (Figure 24). Business is the aspect of most critical of the ability of telco service provider earning profit. Following business definition is used for this whole business model:

Professional 2200 is the set with the function of the logical construction of suitable definition and business process combination, when by disclosed interface accessing it the time, its can representative of consumer produces wishes and expected result.

Business 2200 and a main distinction of using between 2176 or 2178 (Figure 22) are that professional 2200 comprise the sale of supporting business, the business process of operation and maintenance. The professional mission critical of exploitation be definition what be can be automatically, and clearly describe the mankind how with the service interaction effect.

4. business structure

We will comprise business itself, business function parts and function for describing professional vocabulary. These contents are configured in three shown in Figure 24 layer by layer in the aggregated(particle) structure.

Professional 2200 is the objects on the meaning of the previously described OO object of this specification. Professional 220 example contains other object-be called business function parts 2202. Business function parts 2202 provide a suitably interface of definition, and this interface represents the professional controlled reciprocation of having summarized one or more functions 2204 in the ISP business framework.

2202 of business function parts use various function 2204 objects. Function 2204 is constructing modules of standard, reusable, network range, is used for creating business function parts 2202. The professional key request that creates is that the engineer of production basic function object will guarantee that each functional object can both reuse on demand in many different business.

A) professional 2200

Professional 2200 usefulness " service logic " are described, service logic fundamentally be write with very senior programming language or with a program of graphic user interface description. These service logic program signs:

Any business function parts is used;

The invoked order of business function parts;

The source of incoming traffic data;

The destination of outgoing traffic data;

Error amount and error are processed;

Calling of other business 2200;

With other professional reciprocation;

A plurality of reciprocations with other business;

Service logic itself generally is not enough to carry out the business 2200 in the network. Generally need customer data to come maneuver point definition value for defining in the business, perhaps customization meets the business of the specific needs of client. The two all is the part of same business model for management service and sale property business. Because management service and sale property business have similar part, so function can be shared. Management service and sale property business also represent two viewpoints of consolidated network: management service represents the operation viewpoint of network, outside terminal use's viewpoint of sale property business agent network. Two kinds of business all rely on the network data that public land is preserved.

Each sale property business has allows device, record keeping mechanism, some operation tenabilities and the service monitoring capacity of client's intended service. Management service is provided for process and the tenability that platform is safeguarded.

B) the business function parts 2202

Business function parts 2202 provide the function call interface of suitable definition. The business function parts can re-use in many different business 2200, can be re-using in many different business functional parts 2202 as function 2204. The business function parts have specific data input requirements, and they are to be derived by the data input requirements of basic function. The data output characteristics of business function parts is according to defining from the data that basic function obtains by the founder of these business function parts. Business function parts 2202 do not rely on the existence of any physical resource, and on the contrary, their calling functions 2204 are carried out these functions, as shown in Figure 25.

Some examples of business function parts are:

Time-based route selects-and on the basis such as the function of calendar, date/time and call object, this functional part allows to choose according to the time route of diverse location.

Checking-such as relatively and on the basis of the function of database lookup, this function can be used for confirming the call card use by prompting input card number and/or access number (personal identification number), perhaps confirms the access to VPN.

Automatically customer interaction-on the basis such as the function of speech object (being used for record and the playback of speech), call object (be used for transmission and bridge joint and call out special resource), DTMF object (being used for collection or the output pulse of DTMF numeral), vocabulary object (being used for speech recognition), this functional part allows to carry out automatic reciprocation with the user of business. This business function component object can expand to the ability that also comprises with user's video interaction.

C) function 2204

Function 2204 is objects, and in other words, a function has inner single user state data and the interface that is used for creating, deleting and use the example of function that suitably defines. Calling function 2204 is to finish by an interface operation that calls it. Function 2204 is set up for re-using. So function has clearly defined data demand to input/output structure. Function also has clearly defined error handler.

Function can define with OO class hierarchy, and a general utility functions can be inherited by some other functions in this hierarchical structure.

Some examples of based on network functional object are:

Speech (being used for record and playback),

Calling (being used for bridge joint, transmission, forwarding, dial-out etc.),

DTMF (being used for collecting or output pulse (outpulsing)),

Fax (be used for receiving, send or broadcasting).

Some function is not based on network, but purely based on the data of in our platform, having disposed. Some examples of these functions are:

Calendar (with determine what day or which date),

Comparison (with comparand word string or character string),

Conversion (data type is converted to another kind of form),

Distribute (to select a result according to percent profile).

D) business datum

Three data sources are arranged during professional the execution:

The static data that defines in service template comprises the default value that certain given business is called.

The interactive data that obtains when business is carried out can be explicit user's input or the data that connect derivation from basic network.

The customer data that defines in the user profile, (when creating) is by client or client's representative definition when business is requested.

5. professional 2200 carry out

Professional 2200 carry out in service logic execution environment (SLEE). But SLEE is the executive software that allows the business among any ISP2100 of being scheduled for to obtain carrying out. In the ISP architecture, service enabler 2134 (Figure 21) provide these execution environments. 2134 operation dispatchings of service enabler arrive the service 2200 on them.

The profile that service template and they are supported is scheduled for (Figure 22) on the database server 2182. When SLEE when service enabler 2134 starts, it retrieves its configuration from database server 2134. This configuration indication SLEE goes to carry out a series of professional 2200. Carrying out these professional softwares is the parts that are deployed in the service template on the database server. If software is not also on service enabler 2134, just from database server 2182 these softwares of retrieval. When this software was carried out, professional 200 just brought into operation.

In the most applications, professional 2200 at first call business function parts 2202 (Figure 24), and the latter allows professional in

explorer

2188 or 2190 oneself's registrations. In case registration, service just can begin to accept affairs. Next step, the professional 2200 business function parts 2202 with call waiting startup action. This action can be any event of confirming data transactions from the internet login, to 800 callings, to the point of sale card. Occur at network in case start action, professional selection function 2148 (Figure 21) just removes to seek the example of the execution business 2200 that will call with explorer 2150 functions. Start action and then be delivered to professional 2200 examples, service logic (from service template) is then determined follow up action by calling other business function parts 2202.

Professional 2200 the term of execution, profile information is used to determine the characteristic of business function parts 2202. According to the service feature requirement, can with certain professional required profile information partly or entirely cache to service enabler 2134 from ISP2100 database server 2182, be used for preventing that the remote data base of somewhat expensive from consulting. Along with the execution of business, information may generate and store context database by business function parts 2134. This information is identified uniquely with a network Transaction Identifier symbol. If the calling of circuit exchange then accords with defined network call identifier as Transaction Identifier. The network equipment also may generate out of Memory, and these information also can store context database into, also can accord with index with identical unique Transaction Identifier. The last NE that affairs relate to stores some affairs ending messages into context database. Adopt the chained list strategy to determine when the information of specific affairs all stores in the context database. In case all information all arrive, just generate an event to any business of having subscribed this event, then business just can operate the data in the context database. This operation comprises from context database extracts data and it is consigned to accounting system or swindle analytical system.

6. service interaction effect

In the process of network affairs, more than one business can be arranged by network call. Sometimes, the instruction meeting of a business conflicts with another professional instruction. The below is a routine this conflict: certain VNET caller has a business that does not allow this caller to connect overseas call. The VNET caller dials another number that VNET user of the business that allows to dial overseas call is arranged, and called VNET user connects overseas call, then first caller is bridged to overseas call. So user originally can connect overseas call by the third party in the same old way, although its company does not allow this user dial overseas call intentionally. In this case, be necessary to allow each other reciprocation of these two business, determine whether to allow this operation of bridge joint overseas call.

The ISP business model must be able to make business 2200 and other service interaction effect. Professional 2200 must have several mode can with other service interaction effect (referring to Figure 26):

Controls metastasis 2210: business is finished behind its execution route controls metastasis to another business;

Synchronous reciprocation 2212: business is called another professional and AR awaiting reply;

Asynchronous reciprocation 2214: business is called another business, carries out some other action, waits for that then other business finishes and answer;

2216: one business of one-way interaction are called another business, but AR awaiting reply not.

In the example of above-mentioned interactive VNET business, termination VNET business may inquire that initial VNET was professional with asynchronous service interaction action function. The interesting turnover of this idea is that service logic can not only be deployed to based on network platform but also be deployed on the user place equipment. This means that the service interaction effect must occur between network-based service and the business based on the client.

7. professional monitoring

Professional 2200 monitoring that must be subject to from User Perspective and network viewpoint. Monitoring is according to one of them of two kinds of forms:

Professional 2200 information that can generate detailed one by one event are used for consigning to the affairs context database

Business can generate statistical information and retrieve as required to staqtistical data base or by staqtistical data base for delivery on term.

Analyze professional can carrying out in real time or intimate real-time data analysis business with staqtistical data base or context database.

Context database is collected all event informations about the network affairs. This information will consist of the required full detail of network fault diagnosis, record keeping or network monitoring.

The I.ISP Data Management Model

This section is described data management 2138 aspects of intelligent service platform (ISP) 2100 target architectures

1. scope

ISP data management 2138 architectures are intended to set up establishment, maintenance and the use of data in the production environment that covers ISP 2100, comprise that all stride the model of the communication on ISP border.

Data management 2138 architectures cover any copy or the stream of this data in all permanent datas, the ISP and all data flow of striding the ISP border. This model definition be used for the role of data access, data partition, data security, data integrity, data manipulation and data base administration. It has also suitably summarized management strategy.

2. purpose

The purpose of this architecture is:

Create a public ISP functional mode that is used for management data;

Data are separated with application program;

Set up the Design Mode of data system;

The rule that provides system to dispose;

Instruct WeiLai Technology to select;

Reduce redundant exploitation and redundant data storage.

Other purpose of this target architecture is:

Guarantee the data flexibility;

Be convenient to data sharing;

Set up data control and the integrality of ISP scope;

Set up data security and protection;

Allow data access and use;

High data performance and reliability is provided;

The implementation data subregion;

Realize easy operation.

3. data management general introduction

In one embodiment, Data Management Architecture is the framework of the expection characteristic of a mode of describing various system units, system interaction effect and each parts. In this embodiment, data are simultaneously in the storage of many positions, but certain specific data and its all reproduction replica all are regarded as one single in logic. A key difference in the present embodiment is, user (or terminal use) determines that what data will download or store in this locality.

A) territory (Domain)

Data and data access are characterised in that two territories 2220 and 2222, as shown in Figure 27. In each territory a plurality of data trnascriptions can be arranged. This two territories have just generated an energy across the global data base of the single logic of international boundary together. The main aspect of following territory definition is that all data accesses all are the same. Feeding from the order input that call treatment is searched or the network side data are upgraded does not have difference.

The integrality of central authorities' territory 2220 control and protection systems. This is that a logic is described, and is not physical entity. Attached territory (satellite domain) 2222 provides the ability of user's access and renewal. This is that a logic is described, and is not physical entity.

B) subregion

In general, data are to store in many positions simultaneously, but specific data segment and its all reproduction replica all are regarded as one single in logic. Any these copy all can be divided into some physics subsets, so that all data item needn't be in the three unities. Yet, minute block reservation the logical view of a centralized database only.

C) architecture

Architecture is to have the distributed data base of following functions and the architecture of distributed data access:

Copy with synchronously;

The subregion of data file;

Concurrent control

Transaction capabilities

The utility mode of sharing.

Figure 28 presentation logic system unit and high-level information stream. Parts among the figure are not physical units. Each parts has Multi-instance in architecture.

Each unit is among Figure 28:

NETWK2224-is from the outside access of network side to ISP2100;

SVC I/F2226-connects the network interface of ISP;

SYSTMS2228-is outside to be used, and inputs such as order;

G/W2230-is used for the gateway of the outside connection ISP2100 that uses;

DbAppl2232-requires the role of data access or updating ability;

The dominant role in the attached territory of dbClient2234-;

The dominant role in dbServer2236-central authorities territory;

DbAdmin2238-is used for the managerial role of data;

DbMon2240-monitors the role;

I/F Admin2242-is used for the managerial role of interface;

The Ops2244-operating console;

D) information flow

The stream of describing among Figure 28 is the abstract of logic; They are intended to be inscribed in the type of the information that transmits between the logical block.

More than shown in stream be:

Rest-is from the request to ISP of external system;

Resp-ISP replys external system;

The inner data retrieval of carrying out of using of Access-ISP;

The inner data of carrying out of using of Updates-ISP are upgraded;

Evts-mails to the data dependent event of watch-dog;

Meas-mails to the data correlated measure of watch-dog;

New Data-is to the interpolation of ISP master data;

Changed Data-is to the change of ISP master data;

Views-retrieval ISP master data;

The ISP primary traffic that Subsciptions-is asynchronous;

The transient state copy of Cache Copies-ISP master data;

Any control activity of Actions-;

Any control data of Controls-.

E) territory related (Domain Associations)

The attached territory 2222 of data management 2138 generally comprises:

ISP uses;

External system;

Network interface 2226 and system's gateway 2230;

Database client computer (dbClient) 2234.

The central territory of data management 2138 comprises:

Monitoring (dbMon) 2240;

Management (dbAdmin) 2238;

MDL (dbServer) 2236.

4. logical description

Below the characteristic of each architecture parts described separately:

A) data are used (dbAppl) 2232

This any ISP that comprises the requirement database access uses. Example is ISN NIDS server and DAP task server, this application by being attached to expectation database and any required policy instructions be provided and obtain their desired datas from database client computer 2234. These are used the external system or the NE that also represent such as order input or switch request conversion database access are provided. Data are used and are supported following functions:

Upgrade: allow to use the data in insertion, renewal or the deletion ISP database.

Request of access allow to use retrieve data, enumerate a plurality of data item, select data item from data list or set or repeat member through set.

Event and measurement (Events and Measurements) are the renewals take monitoring function (dbMon) 2240 as the special shape of target.

B) data management 2138

(1) customer database (dbClient) 2234

The attached copy of dbClient representative data. This is the unique channel of application system ISP data. The ancillary data copy needn't be gone up with dbServer2236 the format match of the data of storage.

DbClient subscribes (Subscriptions) or cached data copy to MDL (dbServer) 2236 register requests. Reservation is safeguarded automatically by dbServer2236, but cached copy must be upgraded when version is out-of-date.

The main aspect of dbClient2234 is to guarantee that the data of being undertaken by application upgrade serialization and synchronous with the primary copy of being preserved by dbServer2236. Yet dbClient accepts renewal, and only will change later on dbServer (at this moment, may have the exception notice to transfer back to initial application) synchronously, and this is rational too. Being chosen in the locking step (lock-step) and whether upgrading, is to use the thing of strategy rather than the thing of data management 2138.

Only have the change to the dbServer primary copy just to be forwarded to other dbClients.

The inertia or lose contact with dbServer if dbClient2234 becomes, it just must be synchronous with MDL again. When situation is serious, operator's intervention be may need, database or selected subset reloaded.

DbClient2234 provides following interface operation:

Be attached to specific data acquisition system by the application of authorizing;

Will be by the strategy preferential (policy preferences) that should be used for arranging of authorizing;

Select the specific view (view) of local data copy;

Insert, upgrade or deletion local data copy;

The data (subscibed data) of subscribing are synchronous with dbServer;

The late note to cached data from dbServer.

In addition, dbClient also submits log (logs) or report to and sends the problem signal to watch-dog (dbMon) 2240.

(2) MDL (dbServer) 2236

DbServer2236 plays central role in data protection. It is data " by having ", the maintained place of master control copy. For the consideration of reliability, to keep at least two copies of master data. The copy that can also dispose other master data improves data performance.

These copies are synchronous in the locking step. In other words, require each more will obtain corresponding master lock fixed (master-lock) to prevent update inconsistency in new capital. Strict implementation strategy can be variant, but in general, all primary copies all must keep the update sequence of serial, and the Data View identical with any other primary copy and identical integrality pressure (integrity enforcement) are provided. Inner data trnascription is transparent to dbClients2234.

DbServer2236 comprises the business rules layer, and the relation between these rule descriptions and execution (enforce) data item limits specific data value or form. Each data more new capital must be passed through these rules, otherwise just are rejected. Like this, dbServer just guarantees that all data all manage like that by single copy, and all business rules are all collected uniformly and used.

When the dbServer2236 tracking is carried out data and is changed, carries out which class data change, and submits log and statistics to watch-dog (dbMon) 2240. In addition, these change the reservation that also is forwarded to any activity, and cached copy then is marked as expired by stale messages.

DbServer also provides safety inspection and checking, and guarantees to store after the data item that will select is encrypted again.

DbServer supports following interface operation:

Watch the data of selection from dbServer;

Data from dbServer reservation selection;

With the data copy the selected cached copy to dbClient2234;

Refresh the dbClient high-speed cache with current copy as required;

Carrying out new data at all dbServer primary copies inserts;

Change data attribute at all dbServer copies;

Reservation before the cancellation, the cached copy of cancellation data.

(3) data management (dbAdmin) 2238

Data management (dbAdmin) 2238 relates to and data strategy, management database logic and physics aspect are set, ensure and configuration data is managed the functional part in 2138 territories. The data management strategy comprises safety, distribution, integrality rule, performance requirement, copy the control with subregion. DbAdmin2238 comprises the physics control of data resource, such as specified data position, distribution physical storage, storage allocation, the storage of loading data, optimization access path, solution database problem. DbAdmin2238 also provides the logic control of data, and the logic control of data is all if any audit, coordination, migration, cataloguing and conversion data.

DbAdmin2238 supports following interface operation:

The characteristic of definition data type;

Create the logic container of given dimension;

By operation associated that two or more containers are related;

Limit data value or relation by condition trigger and action;

The physics container of data is placed on given position;

With the physics vessel moving of data to reposition;

Shift out physics container and their data;

Load data from a container to another container;

Remove the data content of container;

The data content of examination or coordination container.

(4) data monitoring device (dbMon) 2240

DbMon2240 represents a monitoring function, and it is caught from all data dependent events of ISP borde gateway, each dbClient2234 and each dbServer2236 and statistics and measures. DbMon2240 mechanism is used for creating audit trail and log.

DbMon represents a passive interface usually; Data are fed to this interface. Yet monitoring is the activity of a level, also further analyze in the dbMon with on roll (will by the data edition of collecting such as blanking time of per minute becomes such as in hour or the data of the longer time section of fate) operate. In addition, dbMon also can send alarm signal when reaching some threshold values or condition.

Various speed of measuring and counting are arranged for assessment of service quality (QOS), data performance and other professional skill agreement. All exceptions and error in data all want recording and sending to dbMon confession conduct a survey, store and on roll.

DbMon2240 supports following interface operation:

Watch-dog control, filtration and threshold values are set;

The record of data correlated activation;

Report condition, measure or auditing result;

Give the alarm or alarm signal.

(5) data management operation (Ops) 2244

Operating console (Ops) 2244 provides word station interface for personnel control, management or alternate manner management system. The Ops console provides to the access of the operation-interface of above-mentioned dbMon2240, dbAdmin 2238 and dbServer2236. Ops console 2244 is also supported to show dynamical state by the image based on icon of the application in various systems, interface and the data management territory 2138.

5. physics is described

This section is described the physics architecture of data management 2138. It describes how to dispose one group of parts. Represented a recapitulative allocation plan among Figure 29. Among Figure 29:

Circle be used for the represents physical place,

Square frame or the combination square frame be used for representing computer node,

Each functional role is indicated by abbreviation.

The meaning of used abbreviation is among Figure 29:

OE-order entry system 2250;

GW-ISP gateway 2230;

APP-uses (dbAppl) 2232

·CL-dbClient2234；

·SVR-dbServer2236；

ADM-dbAdmin parts 2238;

MON-dbMon parts 2240;

The Ops-operating console.

The functional role (referring to the logical description of target architecture) of these unit was above described in conjunction with Figure 28.

Each place shown in Figure 29 links with one or more other places by wide area network (WAN) link usually. Accurate network configuration and size are detailed engineering design task. It is uncommon that certain Database Replica is distributed to order input (OE) place 2251, but in present architecture, the input place is regarded as being equal to attached place, will contain the dbClient function.

At the network side of ISP2100, each also contains dbClient 2234 attached place 2252. LAN (LAN) is moved in these places usually. DbClient plays a part local storage vault for networks such as ISN operator's console, each ARU or NCS switch request conversion or system application.

Central authorities place 2254 provides redundant data storage and leads to the access path of each dbClient2234. Central authorities place 2254 also provides rolls monitoring (dbMon) although function-also can be disposed dbMon parts 2240 with the raising performance in central place 2254.

Administrative functions is positioned at operation or the management place 2254 of any expectation, but needn't leave no choice but identical with the position of dbMon. Administrative functions requires to have dbAdmin2238 and operating console 2244 to be used for order and control. The operated from a distance place can be from wide area or local interconnection access dbAdmin node 2238. Each place connects by the backup of the copy functional unit in other place and by different redundant links.

6. the choice of technology

Next joint is described the various choices of technology that should consider. The operation of data management 2138 architectures does not require any particular technology, but different choice of technology meetings affects the as a result performance of system.

Figure 30 represents that can provide the very technology of high performance environments. Specific application requires to determine the floor level of acceptable energy. Three kinds of general environments have been represented.

On the top of figure, the network 2260 that the multi-protocols route is selected is connected with remote unit the outside with the central data place. Shown among the figure office terminal and among a small circle computer and such as the high availability application platform of order input.

The middle part is the extensive high-performance machine 2262 with large data memory. These are representing that MDL and data are processed and such as data capture/following function of dbServer2236 and dbMon2240.

The bottom of figure is local the processing and network interface 2264, such as ISN operator center or DAP place.

7. realize

Although know manyly about current ISP data system people, determine that any realization also needs other detail requirement. These requirements must comprise existing ISN, NCS, EVS, NIA and TMN system needs, add that all predictions are used for broadband, internet and without the new product of application system.

8. safety

The ISP data are shielded common resources. Data access is restricted and checks. The activity that data are relevant is followed the tracks of and is audited. Finance, commerce and the user profile of the password of all storages, PINS (personal identification number), private personnel records and selection all require data encryption. Private data is not able to form transmission expressly.

9. metadata

Metadata is a kind of data mode that comprises the rule of data-driven logic. Metadata is used for describing and managing the operation format of (namely handling) data. Under this architecture, control will be driven by metadata as much as possible. Metadata (or logic of data-driven) generally provides when moving the most flexibly and selects. Metadata is under system manager's the control usually.

10. standard database technology

The enforcement of suggestion Data Management Architecture should utilize as much as possible can be by the product of commercial approach acquisition. Distributors provides database technology, copy services, algorithm, monitor and control facility, console environment and many other attracting things.

J.ISP resource management model

This section is described resource management 2150 models, because it is relevant with the ISP2100 architecture.

A) scope

The resource management model relates to the cycle that resource is distributed and gone to distribute with regard to the process that needs resource and the relation between the resource itself. This cycle starts from the resource registration and goes registration, then proceeds to resource request, resource acquisition, resource reciprocation and resource and discharges.

B) purpose

Resource management 2150 models are intended to be the common structure criterion of ISP exploitation corporations, particularly ISP architectural definition.

C) target

In existing conventional I SP architecture, their physics of professional control and management and logical resource. Move to one from the architecture of business extraction resource, just require to define a management service and resource Relations Among and interactive management function. This function is represented by resource management 2150 models.

The purpose of resource management model is intended to adapt to the resource management of whole network and optimizes resource and use, allow to share on the network resource:

Extract resource from business;

Real time access to resource status is provided;

Simplify the process of adding and removing resource;

Safety, simple resource access are provided;

Any resource user provides fair resource acquisition, so that all can not monopolize the use of resource.

D) background concept

In general, relation and the reciprocation between the process of resource management 2150 model management resources and these resources of use. Before this model of expression, at first should grasp for basic terms and the concept of explaining this model. Below enumerated these terms and concept:

(1) definition

Resource: the groundwork unit that the function of specific and suitable definition is provided when being called by external procedure. Can be logical resource and physical resource with resource classification, the former be such as service enabler and speech recognition algorithm, the latter such as CPU, memory and switch ports themselves. Resource can share-as atm link bandwidth or disk space, or special-purpose-such as VRU or switch ports themselves.

Resource pool: the resource member's of the registration of shared common function set.

Professional: to all a kind of logical descriptions movable and interactive flow between Internet resources user and the resource itself.

Strategy: management distributes and the regular collection that goes to distribute, resource pool size threshold value and resource are used the action that threshold value takes resource.

(2) concept

The resource management model is a kind ofly to manage and allow process and the strategy of function set by suitable definition and discharge mechanism to resource pool to resource pool request, Gains resources or with resource. Resource is distributed and is gone assigning process that three phases is arranged:

The resource request: in this stage, process is to explorer 2150 request resources.

Resource obtains: if institute's resource of asking can with and the process of filing a request have the right to ask, explorer 2150 just authorizes this process this resource, this process just can be used this resource. Otherwise this resource allocation process will be selected or abandon to process, later on again examination, but or request explorer 2150 in resource in case time spent or within the specific time, authorizing its resource.

Resource discharges: the resource that is assigned with should be put back to resource pool when process no longer needs. According to the type of resource, process or releasing resource are also notified its new state by resource to explorer, or process itself is notified the availability of this resource to explorer. Which kind of situation no matter, explorer all returns to this resource in the resource pool.

The resource management model is suitable for the establishing resource pond, formulates the strategy in management resource pond. The resource management model allows resource to be registered as the legal person of resource pool or removes registration.

The policy enforcement balancing the load of resource management model, without fault (failover) and minimum cost algorithm and forbid the service to resource monopoly. The resource management model is followed the trail of the operating position of resource, automatically takes suitable action when resource pool is not enough to satisfy the demand. Any available resources on the network-as long as this business has this right all should be accessed and use to any business.

The resource management model adopts the OO method of OSI to set up resource model. Each resource under this model is presented as a managed object (MO). Each MO defines by following each side:

The attribute of attribute: MO represents its character, is used for describing its characteristic and current state. Each attribute is related with a value, and for example, the value of the CURRENT_STATE of certain MO (current state) attribute may be IDLE (free time).

Operation: each MO has a permission with its set as the operation of operand. These operations are:

Create: create new MO.

Deletion: delete existing MO.

Action: carry out a specific operation, such as SHUTDOWN (closing).

Read value: obtain a specific MO property value.

Value added: increase a specific MO property value.

Removal value: with the set deletion of a specific MO property value from value.

Replacement value: replace existing MO property value with new value.

Settings: specific MO attribute is set to default value.

Notice: each MO can both or notify its state to the management entity report. Notice may be regarded as trigger (triggers) or trap (traps).

The characteristic of characteristic: MO is presented as the restriction how it react to specific operation and this reaction is applied. MO can react to outside stimulus or internal stimulus. Outside stimulus is presented as the message of an operation of transmission. Internal stimulus then is the internal event that MO runs into, such as timer then. By the regulation timer then behind the how many times MO could report, can should how react to out-of-date timer to MO and apply restriction.

All need all it to be treated as MO with, unit of operating or monitoring certain resource, and the operation by above-mentioned definition visits this resource. Need to know the relevant unit of the state of certain resource, need to know how to receive and the event that this resource generates is reacted.

The overall situation and local resource management

The resource management model is hierarchical structure, and at least two administrative structures are arranged: local resource manager (LRM) 2190 and overall explorer (GRM) 2188. Each has oneself territory and function local and overall RM:

2. local resource manager (LRM):

The territory of territory: LRM is limited to the specific resource pool (RP) that belongs to the network locality. May have a plurality of LRM in a single place, each LRM may be in charge of a specific resource pool.

The major function of function: LRM is to provide convenience for the resource allocation and deallocation process of carrying out according to resource management model criterion between process and the resource.

3. overall explorer (GRM) 2188:

The territory of territory: GRM2188 relates on the network registration resources all in all resource pools.

The major function of function: GRM is to help LRM2190 to locate one in the unavailable resource in LRM territory.

Figure 31 represents the territory of network 2270 interior GRM2188 and LRM2190.

4. resource management model (RMM)

The resource management model is to set up on the basis of the Dynamic Resource Allocation for Multimedia concept relative with static configuration. Dynamic Resource Allocation for Multimedia concept hint does not have predetermined static relation between the process of resource and use resource. Distribute with deallocate based on be supply and demand. Explorer 2150 will be clear that the existence of resource, needs the process of resource to obtain resource by explorer 2150. Static configuration then hints, in each resource and need to exist between the process of this resource a predetermined relation. Like this, just do not need to manage these resources with a management entity. The process relevant with resource can directly be managed. Dynamic Resource Allocation for Multimedia and static configuration representing two of the resource management example extreme. Also can there be other example at these two between extreme.

The characteristic of resource management model description LRM2190 and GRM2188 and the logical relation between them and reciprocation. It also describes management LRM/GRM and resource allocation and deallocation process regular and tactful that needs between the process of resource.

A) simple resource management model

Because the resource allocation and deallocation may relate to complicated process, introduces realistic model with the simple form of this process here. Simple resource allocation and deallocation realizes by 6 steps. Figure 32 has represented these steps.

1. process 2271 is from explorer 2150 request resources 2173.

2. explorer 2150 Resources allocation 2173.

3. explorer 2150 licenses to the resource 2173 of distributing the process 2271 of request.

4. process 2271 and resource 2273 reciprocations.

5. when process 2271 finishes to use resource 2273, notify this resource.

6. resource 2273 will oneself discharge back explorer 2150.

B) resource management model logical block:

The resource management model is presented as the set of logical block, these logical block reciprocations, works in coordination, to realize above-mentioned purpose. These unit as shown in Figure 33, they comprise: resource pool (RP) 2272, LRM2190, GRM2188 and resource management information bank (RMIB) 2274.

(1) resource pool (RP) 2272

All types are identical, predicable is arranged or the phase congenerous is provided, the resource that is positioned at the identical network website can logically be grouped in and form together a resource pool (RP) 2272. Each RP will have the LRM2190 of oneself.

(2) local resource manager (LRM) 2190

LRM2190 is the unit of being in charge of specific RP2272. All need to use the process by the resource among the RP of certain LRM management all will and visit this resource with above-mentioned simple resource management model by this LRM.

(3) overall explorer (GRM) 2188

GRM2188 is the entity with global view of each resource pool on network. GRM obtains this global view by each LRM2190. All LRM upgrade GRM with RP2272 state and statistics. Sometimes certain LRM can not Resources allocation, because all local resources all hurry or the resource of asking belongs to another website. In this case, LRM can consult with GRM, to locate the resource of being asked at network.

(4) resource management information bank (RMIB) 2274

As mentioned above, all resources are all treated by managed object (MO). RMIB2274 is the database that contains relevant for the information of all MO on the network. MO information comprises object definition, state, operation etc. RMIB is the part of ISP Data Management Model. All LRM and GRM can both access RMIB, and the MO information view of oneself can be arranged and pass through the ISP Data Management Model to the access privileges of MO information.

5. parts reciprocation

In order to carry out their task, each unit of resource management model must reciprocation and cooperation in rule, strategy and the criterion scope of resource management model. Next joint explains that how interactive mutually these entities are.

A) entity relationship (ER) figure (Figure 33)

Among Figure 33, each rectangle represents an entity, and the relation between two entities of verb hint between "＜〉", the direction of this relation of square brackets " [] " hint are without the bracket numeral from parenthesized numeral trend. Numeral hint relation be one to one, one-to-many or multi-to-multi.

Figure 33 read like:

1. a LRM2190 manages a RP2272.

2. many LRM2190 access RMIB2274.

3. many LRM2190 access a plurality of GRM2188.

4. many GRM2188 access RMIB2274.

B) registration and releasing registration

The resource registration is registered the resource collection that is only applicable to necessary dynamic management with releasing. Resource is static allocation in the situation about having.

Each LRM2190 is to resource pool 2272 operations, and wherein each resource pool contains a resource member set. In order to allow LRM manage certain resource, this resource will be notified its existence and state to this LRM. GRM2188 also needs to know the availability of each resource on the network, in order to can locate certain resource. Below registration should be applied on all resources of wanting dynamic management with releasing registration criterion:

All resources must be registered to their LRM2190 the member as specific resource pool 2272.

All resources are if because business need to be closed or withdraw to any reason, must remove registration from their LRM2190.

All resources must be to their their usability status of LRM2190 report.

The up-to-date Resource Availability situation that all LRM must draw with the resource with removing registration according to registration is upgraded GRM2188.

C) reciprocation of GRM, LRM and RP

Each RP2272 will be managed by LRM2190. Each needs the process of specific resource type to be assigned with a LRM that will provide convenience for resource access. When process needed certain resource, it must be filed a request by the LRM that distributes to it. When LRM received request to resource, two kinds of situations may occur:

1. resource can be used: in this case, resource member in the LRM Resources allocation pond also transmits resource handle (handle) to this process. Process and resource reciprocation are until finish using. According to resource type, in case process uses resource complete, process or notify it to use resource complete to resource, by resource itself to notifying LRM its availability, or releasing resource and notify it not re-use this resource to LRM.

2. resource is unavailable: in this case, LRM2190 and GRM2188 consult to require to contain an external resource pond of asking to some extent resource. If there is not external resource to use, LRM does not just have resource to use to the process notice of request. In this case, the process of request possibility:

Abandon then retry,

Request LRM Resources allocation when resource is in a single day available, perhaps

Resources allocation when if request LRM resource becomes available in special time.

If there is external resource to use, GRM2188 just sends position and visit information to LRM2190. Then LRM:

Represent the request process distribution and transmit resource handle (in this case, it is transparent distributing for process by the resource of GRM) to it,

Advise request process and the LRM contact of managing the resource that is positioned.

D) reciprocation of GRM, LRM and RMIB

RMIB2274 contains that all are managed information and the state of resource on the network. Each LRM2190 will have a RMIB2274 figure corresponding with the RP2272 of its management. GRM2188 then has whole views of all resources on the network. This view is comprised of all LRM views. The resource of whole views of GRM on can fixer network.

In order to make RMIB2274 keep accurate resource information, each LRM2190 must upgrade RMIB with up-to-date resource status. This comprises the interpolation resource, removes resource and upgrades resource status.

LRM2190 and GRM2188 can both and watch RMIB2274 by the access of ISP data management entity. The actual management of RMIB data belongs to ISP data management entity. LRM and GRM only are responsible for upgrading RMIB.

K. operate support model

1. introduce

Existing ISP service platform great majority all are stand-alone developments, and each has the cover operation supported feature of oneself. Along with the increase of platform quantity, how study operates the required time of given one group of platform also in increase. The ISP service platform need to be transferred to a kind of common model with all operations support function parts that are fit to its all products. This just requires to define one should support the current model that need to stand again the variation that occurs in the future. Operation support model (OSM) has defined a kind of implementation framework of supporting ISP2100 of managing.

A) purpose

The purpose of operation support model is:

Simplify the operation by integrated platform for each ISP resource;

By providing public fundamentals of management structure to reduce administrative staff's learning time;

Reduce the cost of management system by the exploitation that reduces overlapping management system;

The time of introducing to the market of improving the ISP business by being provided for all ISP public fundamentals of management structure professional and NE;

The framework of a managing I SP physical resource (hardware) and logical resource (software) is provided.

B) scope

OSM as described herein is fit to ISP physical network unit and the distributed management of the business moved on them. Governance framework described herein also can expand to the management of logic (software) resource. Yet the architecture of expression helps use and the mistake of physical resource are mapped impact that business produces with their here.

Management service occurs in four layers:

Plan,

Service management,

Internet,

NE.

Information in each layer is divided into four envelop of function:

Configuration management,

Mismanage,

Resource is measured,

Accounting.

Be fit to the use of the common operation support model of all ISP, will strengthen the operation of ISP, simplify following product and professional design in the ISP. This operation support system structure is consistent with ITU telecommunication management network (TMN) standard.

C) definition

Managed object: by the resource of one or more management system monitoring and controllings. Managed object is arranged in the system of being managed and can be embedded in other managed object. Managed object can be the logic OR physical resource, and a resource can be presented as more than one managed object (more than one object view).

Be managed system: one or more managed objects.

Management subdomain: the management domain that all is positioned at father's management domain.

Management system: start in the management domain of the monitoring and controlling function of managed object and/or the application process in the management subdomain.

Management information bank: MIB (management information bank) contains the information relevant for managed object.

Management domain: one or more management systems add zero or a plurality of set that is managed the systems and management subdomain.

NE: communication network is comprised of the analog-and digital-telecommunication apparatus of numerous species and related support equipment, all in this way transmission systems of these equipment, exchange system, multiplexed, signaling terminal, front-end processor, main frame, cluster control unit, file server, LAN, wide area network, router, bridge circuit, gateway, Ethernet switch, hub, x.25 link, SS7 link etc. When being managed, these equipment are commonly referred to as NE (NE).

The territory: management environment can be divided by the whole bag of tricks, such as functional (mistake, business ...), geographic, institutional framework etc.

Operating system: management function is deposited and is resided in the operating system.

2. operation support model

Figure 34 represents four

management level

2300,2302,2304,2306 of operation support model 2308 on the NE 2310. Operation support model 2308 is supported the daily management of ISP2100. This model is along three-dimensional tissue. These dimensions be in each layer 2300-2306, these layers functional areas, the activity of management service is provided. Managed object (resource) is managed system monitoring, control and modification.

A) functional mode

Below each joint functional areas in management level 2300-2306 are described.

(1) plan

ISP plan layer 2300 is the storage vaults about the data of ISP2100 that are collected, and is the place that data will provide added value.

Configuration management 2312: the setting of strategy and target.

Mismanage 2314: the prediction of fault average time.

Resource measures 2316: prediction in the future resource needs (consistent, the maintenance agreement of trend, capacity, service protocol, labour).

Accounting: the cost of determining to provide professional is so that the decision of supporting business price.

(2) service management

Service subscription, dispose, provide, quality of service agreement and quality of service monitoring be positioned at ISP SML 2302. The client can watch SM (service management) layer 2302 with limitation to monitor and to control their business. The SM layer provide with NLM in the interactive manager of agency. The SM layer also provide with plan layer 2300 in the interactive agency of manager. Manager in the SM layer also can with the SM layer in other manager reciprocation. Manager-the agent relation of level such as when existing in this case.

Configuration management 2320: professional definition, professional startup, client definition, client's startup, traffic performance, client's characteristic, hardware provide, software provides, the providing of other data or other resource.

Mismanage 2322: the violation of monitoring and report service protocol. Test.

Resource measures 2324: the violation of prediction service protocol also indicates potential shortage of resources. The business of predicting current and future (trend) needs.

Accounting 2326: process and transmit accounting information.

The Internet management

ISP Internet management (NLM) layer 2304 is born the responsibility of all NEs of management, is presented as other or one group of Single Component Management. It is indifferent to discrete cell is how to provide professional in inside. NLM layer 2304 provide with each EM2306 in the interactive manager of agency. The NLM layer also provide with SM layer 2302 in the interactive agency of manager. Manager in the NLM layer 2304 also can with the NLM layer in other manager reciprocation. In this case, the manager-agent relation who has reciprocity level.

Configuration management 2328: provide from the function of the characteristic of the local and remote resource of the viewpoint definition of whole network and business.

Mismanage 2330: detection, report, isolation are provided and revise the function of the mistake that occurs at a plurality of NE.

Resource measures 2332: be fit to calm measuring angle the resource use of whole network is measured, analyzed and reports.

Accounting 2334: merge the accounting information from a plurality of information sources.

(3) Single Component Management

Single Component Management layer 2306 is responsible for NE2310 one by one and the extraction of the function supporting to be provided by NE. EM layer 2306 provide with each NE in the interactive manager of agency. The EM layer also provide with NLM layer 2304 in the interactive agency of manager. Manager in the EM layer 2306 also can with the EM layer in other manager reciprocation. In this case, the manager-agent relation who has reciprocity level.

Configuration management 2336: the function that the characteristic of the local and remote resource of definition and business is provided.

Mismanage 2338: the function that detection is provided, reports, isolates and corrects mistakes.

Resource measures 2340: suitable calm measuring angle uses resource and measures, analyzes and report.

Accounting 2342: suitable resource the use from the accounting angle measured, analyzed and report.

B) NE

It all is NE 2310 that computer, process, switch, VRU, Internet gateway and other provide the equipment of network capabilities. NE provides the agency to carry out operation with the name of Single Component Management layer 2306.

C) information model

Figure 35 represents manager-act on behalf of reciprocation. Telecommunication network management is a distributed information application process. It relates to exchange of management information between the management application process set that distributes, for monitoring and controlling Internet resources (NE) 2310. In order to carry out this information exchange, management process will be taken on manager 2350 or act on behalf of 2352 role. The effect of manager 2350 is that management operation request is delivered to agency 2352, the information that the result of reception operation, reception event notice, processing receive. Agency's effect of 2352 is by managed object 2354 is carried out the request that proper handlings come the response management device, replys or notifies and deliver to manager any. Manager 2350 can with many agency's 2352 reciprocations, the agency can with more than one manager reciprocation. Manager can be classification, and the manager of higher level acts on managed object by the manager of lower level. In this case, the manager of lower level plays manager and agency's dual role.

3. protocol model

A) agreement

Information exchange between manager and the agency relies on a group communication protocol. TMN provides a good model, its uses be proposed standard X.710 and public administration information service (CMIS) and the CMIP (CMIP) of definition X.711. This provides the peer to peer communication protocol of an application CSU common service unit based on ITU (x.217 service describing and X.227 agreement description) and operated from a distance business unit (x.219 business description and X.229 agreement description). FTAM also is supported to be used for the file transmission as upper-layer protocol. Proposed standard has been described the use of these upper-layer protocols in X.812. Host-host protocol is described in X.811 in proposed standard. X.811, proposed standard has also been described working in coordination between different lower-level protocols. This group agreement is called as Q3.

B) common context

In order between process, to share information, need the explanation of institute's exchange message that common understanding is arranged. ASN.1 (X.209) with BER can be used for developing this common understanding for all PDU that exchanges between management process (manager/agent).

C) business on upper strata

The minimum business that following identification service layer requires, and set up model according to TMN CMIS business.

SET: the value that increases, removes or replace attribute.

GET: the value of reading attributes.

CANCEL-GET: the GET that cancellation is sent previously.

ACTION: request object is carried out certain operation.

CREATE: create an object.

DELETE: remove an object.

EVENT-REPORT: allow Internet resources to announce an event.

4. physical model

Figure 35 represents the physical model of ISP2100.

5. point of interface

Intermediate equipment 2360 provides the conversion from a kind of information model to the ISP information model. Gateway 2362 is used for connecting the management system of ISP outside. These gateways provide operation necessary function to ISP consistent system and inconsistent system. Gateway can contain intermediate equipment 2360. Figure 36 has identified 9 point of interfaces. The agreement related with these point of interfaces is:

1. two upper-layer protocols are arranged. The ISP upper strata that other operation support of the agreement and all of communicating by letter with work station is communicated by letter. Low layer is the TCP/IP on the Ethernet.

2. the upper strata is the agreement of communicating by letter with work station 2364. Low layer is the TCP/IP on the Ethernet.

3,4. the upper strata is the ISP upper strata. Low layer is the TCP/IP on the Ethernet.

5. proprietary protocol is the agreement of the legacy system incompatible with being supported interface. Provide the equipment of Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) interface to be supported with intermediate equipment.

6,7,8,9. gateway will support in essence ISP consistent with inconsistent interface. The gateway that connects enterprise's built-in system can comprise the wide TMN system such as order entry system or enterprise.

The ISP of operation support model realizes

Figure 37 represents that the operation support realizes.

6. general introduction

The operation support model provides a conceptual frame for the constructor back-up system. Figure 37 represents that the ISP of this conceptual model realizes. In this of this model realized, all ISP NEs all will be managed information bank (MIB) 2370 and act on that the agent process of object represents to operations support systems among the MIB.

The on-site support personnel have the level of two managing I SP2100.

1. for looking up the fault, Internet manager 2372 provides the integral body figure of ISP for on-site support. Detect, isolation and more the process of direct problem be exactly to begin therefrom. From this layer, problem can be isolated the single network unit. Each NE all can from 2374 access of NE manager, allow to monitor in more detail, control, dispose and test. The ISP of today has lacked the Centered Graphs of ISP, but many people are familiar with its importance.

In order to dispose, Internet manager 2370 provides full ISP figure, and with NE manager 2374 reciprocations so that with consistent mode configuration network unit. This will help to guarantee that it is consistent that ISP is configured on all platforms. Change an information in a place and make it that self-propagating ability is the powerful instrument that a kind of current I SP Governance framework can not have on full ISP.

In case created a professional definition from service creation environment 2376, just with Service Manager 2378 it be placed in the ISP network, and this network is used for new business. The client of a business is supplied with by Service Manager 2378. As the part that client's business is provided, Service Manager will be predicted the use of resource, determines whether to need to increase the use that new resources are processed client's business. It carries out a this definite basis with the conduct of current use statistics. In case certain client is activated, Service Manager just monitors whether the use of this client's business obtains carrying out with definite quality of service agreement. Along with the increase that client's business is used, whether Service Manager 2378 will be predicted needs to increase resource to the ISP network. After this service management adds suitable restriction, can be used as another business and expand to the client. Although professional the establishment is the topic in the IN world, its need one with the integrated Service Manager of the other parts of system, and one of purpose of Here it is this model.

At last, planning management device 2380 uses to determine needs in the future for the resource of the full ISP of staff planners' (non-at-scene support) analysis, and will be to different professional overhead costs in order to determine professional cost, as the basis of professional price in future.

L. physical network model

1. introduce

This section is described the physical network aspect of intelligent service platform (ISP) 2100 architectures.

A) purposes

The physical network model includes:

The logical construction mapping;

Information flow;

Platform in the production environment of architecture is disposed.

B) scope

The reciprocation between the various territories described in the term that this model definition is associated with physical network, and the example of the realization of architecture is provided.

C) purpose

The purpose of this model is:

Create the model of a sign diverse network platform;

Information flow is classified;

The term of standard is provided;

The rule that provides system to dispose;

Instruct the choice of technology in the future.

2. information flow

One of importance of intelligent network (IN) is the information flow on the various platforms of setting up in the network. By the type of identification information and with they classification, the needs of network service IN.

The client in a series of call-flow with the IN reciprocation. Calling can be Audio Center (as in the conventional ISP product), based on multimedia (as among the internetMCI user who uses the web-browsing device), based on (as in the video request program) or the combination of various contents of video.

Information can be done following classification:

Content;

Signaling; Or

Data.

Usually, will require all information flows of three types with the interactive client of intelligent network.

A) content

Content flow (content flow) contains the main information that is transmitting. The example of content flow is simulated voice, packet switched data, streaming video (streamed video) and leased circuit service (leased line traffic). Content flow is client's property, and IN must transmit with minimum loss, the shortest delay, optimal cost. The IN unit is standardized, so transmission structure (transport fabric) is supported the more website that connects, in order to allow content to flow in identical channel with the stream of out of Memory.

B) signaling

Signaling flow (signaling flow) contains the control information of being used by NE. Q.931, it all is the example of signaling flow that ISUP RLT/IMT, TCP/IP domain name are consulted with ISDN. IN requires, uses and generate this information. Signaling flow and diverse network platform are coordinated, and allow the intelligent call stream on the network. In fact, in the IN based on SCE, service deployment also will require to stride the signaling information stream of this transmission structure (fabric).

C) data

Data flow contains the information that is produced by call-flow, comprises it often being by the account data record of this this transmission structure with the key of some network platform generation.

3. term

Network: can transferring content, the set of the NE of the interconnection of signaling and/or data. The IXC exchange transmission structure (switch fabric) of MCI, WAN and the internet trunk of ISP expansion all are the classical examples of network. Current equipment tendency is in the different different contents of network transmission, and every kind of network is exclusively used in the transmission of specific content. Technology and client (to required high bandwidth) requirement all requires the telecommunications operator to finish great majority with more unified network to communicate by letter. This just requires this transmission structure can adapt to different content characteristic and agreement on the phase cochannel. Another aspect of this requirement will be independently signaling of more unified content.

Website (site): in the set of the juxtaposed physical entity in local geographic area. In current ISP architecture, the example of website is operation center, ISNAP website (it also has ARU) and EVS website. Strictly by definition, NT and DSC switch do not belong to website. On the contrary, they belong to transmission network (vide infra). In this architecture, one group of (juxtaposed on the geography) service enabler (SE), special resource (SR), data server (DS) and network interface and link form a website.

NE: the physical entity that is connected to transmission network by network interface. Its example is ACP, EVS SIP, MTOC, video conference book server, DAP task server and NAS. In the later on several years, all will add current NE family such as web server, voice verification server, video flowing linearize device (streamer) and network call record memory.

Network interface: can make NE be connected to the equipment of transmission network. DS1 CUS/DSU, 10BaseT ethernet network interface card and ACD port all are network interfaces. After adopting the architecture of preferred embodiment, network interface will provide a unified API collection of understanding easily for communication.

Link: the connection between two or more NEs of different websites. Link can be one section OC-12 SONET optical fiber or 100mbps dicyclo (dual ring) FDDI section. In a few years from now on, IN must process the network link such as ISO Ethernet WAN maincenter link and gigabit bit rate OC-48.

Connect: the linking to each other of two or more network interfaces that is positioned at identical website.

What Figure 38 represented is the schematic diagram of a physical network 2400. Network 2401 contains the NE 2402 that is positioned at website 2404, and they are by

network interface

2406 and 2408 interconnection of one or more gateway.

4. entity relationship

Entity relationship shown in Figure 39 is the part that the physical network model is set up rule. Some is to summarize in order to adapt to requirement in the future in these rules, and some then limits definition for avoiding conflict.

1. network 2401 is striden one or more websites 2404, and contains one or more NEs 2402.

2. website 2404 contains one or more NEs 2402.

3. 2402 of NEs are positioned at a website 2404.

4. link 2420 connects two or more websites 2404.

5. connect 2422 and connect two or more NEs.

6. NE 2402 contains one or more network interfaces 2406.

Preferred embodiment be the commercial user of MCI integrated product and business tine. Initial embodiment concentrates on limited product set. For utilizing the integrated requirement of determining docking port of these services. But this interface provides the managerial ability of user to functional part, distribution inventory ability and central message data storehouse.

VIII. intelligent network

The supporting business of all platforms all has been integrated on the platform. The merging of platform makes it possible to the functional part/function of share service so that each functional part is produced common the look and feel.

A. network management

The design of this architecture is so that it can be by a MCI operation support group telemonitoring. This telemonitoring ability then provides following ability for MCI:

Be identified at degeneration or discontinued connection between the following position:

-must to platform, server or the node of " universal inbox (inbox) " transmission information (being object),

Platform, server or the node of-responsible searching message and pass-along message,

-" universal inbox " and PC client communication passing interface,

-" universal inbox " and message center interface,

-must to profile transmit profile information platform, server or node,

-must transmit to ARU platform, server or the node of profile information;

The application process that sign is degenerated and the process of isolation degradation;

The identification hardware fault;

For all application processes, hardware or interface fault generation can be by inner MCI supervision group detection and the warnings that receives.

In addition, the ability that also provides remote access system architecture parts to telemonitoring and support group be so that they can carry out remote diagnosis, the reason of problem identificatioin.

B. the client is professional

The professional group of client is supported all business. Provide the client to support in seamless mode to the client, comprise the complete product life cycle, comprising:

Alpha test;

The β test;

The commerciality distribution;

Manage to strengthen solving client's feedback or other support for consumer requirement.

Supporting process comprehensive and that coordinate guarantees that complete client from start to finish supports. Providing from the account organizes submiting command of client's business is until the user cancels the account. Customer support program comprehensive and that coordinate must be accomplished following:

The customer service group of once operation (one-stop), directly access is supported ARU or VRU problem, WWW browser issue or PC client computer problem.

Have one with access (ARU, WWW browser or PC client computer), user interface (ARU, WWW browser or PC client computer), use well-trained personnel troop in the problem diagnosis that (message center or profile management) or back-end system interface (universal inbox, direct line MCI (directlineMCI) voice mail/faxmail platform, faxcasting system, SkyTel paging server, order entry system, accounting system etc.) is associated.

There is an online access of energy to contain personnel troop relevant for the database of the information of the application problem of the hardware problem of ARU or VRU ability, WWW browser ability, sign and sign.

7 * 24 customer supports

Directly contact the single free code (800 or 888) of the professional group of client

The the 1st, the 2nd and 3rd level that most problems is seamless are supported, wherein:

1 grade of support of-Di is the initial support representative who receives calls. They should solve the problem of the most common enquirement and client's report. These enquirements and problem are usually directed to dialcom, equipment or basic computer (PC, work station, the terminal) hardware problem of access style (ARU, WWW browser, PC client computer), WWW browser or PC client computer. In addition, they can also open and upgrade fault docket (trouble ticket), restart user's password.

2 grades of supports of-Di provide in the customer support group, at this moment need to seek help from more experienced technical specialist.

-3rd level is supported and may be related to the external vendor and carry out on-the-spot hardware support for client or inner MCI engineering or support group, specifically decides on the character of problem. The customer support group can be followed the tracks of the state of client access and the problem that checks out will be added in the customer database.

4 grades of-Di will continue to be provided by the system engineering programmer.

The staffing level of acceptable client's stand-by period and abandonment rate is provided.

The staff of the online access order input of energy and accounting system.

Automatically generate the week report, the quantity of the fault docket of average latency of the amount that week report detail record is called out, the amount of receipt of call, calling and open/close/increase.

C. accounting

Support accounting according to current MCI program.

D. act on behalf of

According to current MCI program support agency.

E. report

Require report income record (revenue tracking), inside and outside customer equipment/sale, use and product/service feature. Finishing mechanism (fulfilment house) need to be by the report of finishing all and monthly. These finish report will be with the order numbers of the order numbers received and payment relatively. In addition, report will indicate that different user passes through the quantity of the management of WWW site access profile or message center.

F. safety

Be that policy and the process that the internet is announced safely takes safety measures according to MCI. In addition, also in WWW browser and the selection of ARU interface, designed safety measure, to verify and to confirm that the user is to the access of directlineMCI profile, message center, personal homepage face calendar and the configuration of personal homepage face.

G. troubleshooting

The Trouble Report of problem is put down in writing in a centralized database and is followed the tracks of. All faults are all supported according to network service fault processing system (NSTHS) criterion. The structure of any operation layer agreement (SLA) of definition is all supported NSTHS between the MCI tissue.

Any fault of software reparation that needs all is closed in the Trouble Report database, and opens as problem report (PR) in the issue track system. This issue track system is used at all test phases, can be by all engineerings and supporting tissue's access.

IX. the individual who strengthens is professional

In this explanation, to use following term: the AIX of professional the two the Web server operation Netscape Commerce Server HTTP of term representative server hardware platform and TCP

4.2 system HTTP demons welcome server application server

Web server as the welcome server operation will be with safety and normal mode operation Netscape Commerce Server HTTP demons. Web server as various application server operations will only move this demons with safe mode. Safe mode is used SSLv2.

The A.Web server architecture

Web server is arranged in DMZ. Web server and required related database client computer have been installed among the DMZ. The database client computer is not preserved any data, but provides the interface of Connected Corp.'s fire wall data storage bank behind.

The Web space is used for name resolution with circulating addressing. Domain name is subnet (home rule) address space in the galileo.mci.com territory of distribution. With to the keeper in mci.com territory registration,

Figure 40 represents to cause the sequence of events of a success login.

1. welcome server 450

HTTP demons this Web server security of operation and normal. The major function of this server is authentication of users 452 when login. Checking needs to use Java and the conversion of the operation from normal to safe mode. One or more welcome servers 450 are arranged among the DMZ. The information that welcome server 450 provides is stateless. The stateless meaning is to there is no need synchronous a plurality of welcome server 450.

The top priority of welcome server is authentication of users. This requires to use alone token (TOKENS), password code checking and hostile IP to filter. The former finishes with token server 454, then will finish with 456 accesses of immediate data storehouse for other two.

If authentication failed, user's 452 just shown screens are enumerated all reasons (except hostile IP) of logining the failure of attempting on the screen. This screen guides the user to turn back to initial login screen automatically.

The last task of welcome server 450 after good authentication is to send a professional screen of selecting to user 452. The services selection screen guides the user to suitable application server. The user selects this application, but the html file in the server segment page or leaf is determined application server. This just allows welcome server 450 to remove to carry out preliminary balancing the load.

Welcome server 450 among the DMZ is mapped to www.galileo.mci.com. The realization of DNS also allows galileo.mci.com to be mapped to www.galileo.mci.com.

2. token server 454

This is a database client computer rather than Web server. Token server 454 is used for to token of login attempt issue by welcome server 450. In a single day the token of issue is identified, and just is employed the status information that server is used for following the tracks of certain connection. Token information is maintained in the database (storage vault) on the corporate firewall database server 456 behind.

Token server 454 is carried out following task:

1. issue alone token at Qualify Phase.

2. confirmation form is with token (be labeled as it multiplex).

3. confirm multiplex token.

4. confirm again multiplex token.

Token server 454 is required exclusive token of each new request issue. The conflict of the token value that the communication link of this token trustship between a plurality of token servers issued to avoid. This conflict is by eliminating to each token server 454 range of distribution.

Token is one 16 character numeral, may form by character by 62 in the set [0-9, A-Z, a-z]. The

position

0,1 and 2 of each token of token server issue is fixed. These character values are distributed to each token server when configuration. The character of position 0 is used as the physical location identifier. The character mark of position 1 is positioned at the server of this position, and the character of position 2 is fixed as " 0 ". This character can be used for being token server sign version number.

13 characters of all the other of token are that the set with 62 above-mentioned characters sequentially generates. During startup, token server is distributed to character position 15-10 with current system time, and position 9-3 is set to " 0 ". Then the token value sequentially increases progressively on the 15-3 of position, and wherein position 3 is least significant bits. Character code supposition digital value from high to low is following order: ' z '-' a ', ' Z '-' A ', ' 9 '-' 0 '.

If system time is to calculate with the value of 4 bytes, above scheme can generate unique token. It calculates at position 15-10 and reaches 62⁶(6 base-62) individual character. Another hypothesis is can not generate 62 in one second on any given token server among this scheme what embodiment in office⁷(35 ×10 ¹²) with last token.

The use of token scope allow in the territory, to use a plurality of token servers and need not clear and definite synchronously. The method adapts to maximum 62 websites, and each website is no more than 62 token servers. Another embodiment will adapt to more website.

All token servers among the DMZ all are mapped to token.galileo.mci.com. Initial embodiment contains two token servers 454. These token servers 454 physically are equal to welcome server 450, i.e. token service demons will also move for the identical machine of welcoming service operation HTTP demons. In another embodiment, these two kinds of services move in different systems.

Welcome server 450 usefulness token servers 454 are obtained an alone token at the Qualify Phase that connects. In case after the checking, welcome server 450 is effectively with this order card mark just and it is labeled as multiplex. This multiplex token is accompanied by welcome server and selects screen to the business that the user sends.

The below discusses the design of token database record in detail.

3. application server

Application server is the Web server of doing the commerce end work of user's business. The last task of welcome server after good authentication is to send a professional screen of selecting to the user. The professional screen of selecting contains new multiplex token.

After the user selects a business, select request to be sent to suitable application server together with built-in token. Application server is confirmed token with token server 454, if effectively, just serve this request. The token that the token server checking is sent by any one token server that is positioned at identical physics website. Why this may be because the database client computer of the data that token server 454 is management centralized database memories in the corporate firewall behind to be kept.

Invalid token (or token of losing) always causes occurring " access denied " page. This page is provided by welcome server 450. The refusal that all access are attempted all is logged.

Application itself is depended in the practical operation of application server. Application server among the DMZ is mapped to＜appName〉＜num〉.galileo.mci.com. So using in the embodiment of (such as profile management, message center, startup card profile, individual Web space etc.) one has more, using identical welcome and token server 450 and 454 also to increase as required more application server.

Another embodiment is that same application increases more server. If the increase of the live load on certain application server surpasses its capacity, just add another application server, but existing system is not done any change. SERVERS and TOKEN HOSTS database (hereinafter explanation) are updated, for new server increases a record. Important name＜num〉partly for the difference application server.

There is no need to use nominally the DNS circulation at these. Configuration tables of welcome server 450 usefulness (the SERVERS database that loads when starting) determine the title of application server before sending the services selection screen.

B.Web server system environment

All Web servers all move Netscape Commerce Server HTTP demons. Welcome server 450 is at general and safe mode operation demons, and the demons of an application server security of operation pattern.

The TCP service that one of token server operation moves at a known port that is used for convenient connection from DMZ inside. Token service demons are refused welcoming and application server systematic access in addition with tcp_wrapper. In order to accelerate this proof procedure, will be by these server load address inventories when configuration, rather than adopt reverse name mapping in each request. The use of tcp_wrapper also provides extra instrument for the service activity of login token.

Application server is mostly as bringing in work before the data service behind the fire wall. Their main task is to come authentication-access with token, then validation database request. The database request is that representative of consumer creates, reads, upgrades or delete existing record or data field. Before service request, application server will carry out necessary authentication vs. authorization inspection.

1. welcome server

Welcome server provides html page described below to the user between in due course. These pages are to use CGI (CGI) script (scripts) based on Perl to generate. Script is deposited and is resided in the catalogue, and this catalogue is not arranged in the HTTP daemon file root of standard. Take the precaution measures of standard-close directoryof and remove all backup files etc.-to guarantee that CGI scripting can not be read by the user. Figure 41 welcomes the bibliographic structure 455 on the server 450.

Figure 41 shows,＜document_root〉(file _ root) the 456th, with＜server_root〉(server _ root) 458 separate. This figure also shows,＜document_root〉catalogue only preserves and welcomes and the access fault html page.

Http server is mapped to " cgi " catalogue 460 according to the URL that asks with all requests. CGI scripting in time creates with the html template in " template " (template) catalogue 462 and sends HTML output to the user.

With URL cause＜document_root〉456 be mapped to CGI scripting, stoped malicious user use＜document_root〉catalogue 456. Because each access of welcome server 450 is mapped to a CGI scripting in the cgi catalogue 460 of welcome server 450, by when starting each script, calling the checking function, safety is guaranteed.

The user rs authentication storehouse is used for the authentication of users identity with the Perl exploitation. The Qualify Phase routine of NSAPI has also increased feature for token examination and access module detection at server itself.

Welcome server 450 reads in their operating parameter their environment from database 456 when starting. Be necessary this information is kept in the common data base to keep equivalent environment at a plurality of welcome servers 450.

A) welcome page

Welcome page sends as the default page when welcome server 450 is for the first time accessed. This is unique page that generates without the cgi script, and it is stored in＜document_root〉in the catalogue 456. The effect of this page is:

Determine that browser can show multiframe. If browser is display frame correctly, this page just shows suitable error message and guides the user to download Microsoft Internet Explorer V3.0 or highest version more.

Determine that browser can move Java. If can not, the user just is guided to Microsoft Internet Explorer V3.0 or highest version more.

If browser is display frame and move Java successfully, then this page just automatically asks welcome server 450 to send a login page.

The last action of welcome page is to finish with the built-in Java Applet of this page. This also is transformed into safe mode with user's browser from mode standard.

B) login page

Login page is the page that a cgi generates, and contains built-in alone token, Java Applet and is used for the format field that the user inputs ID and password. This page can be emphasized service by display graphics. The processing of this page is filled to introduce artificial a delay. In initial implementation, this filling is set to 0.

From replying of this page contain token, token value, ID and the password of the upset that generated by applet. This information is sent to welcome server by Java Applet with a POST HTTP request. This POST request also contains the applet signature.

If the login process success is that server is selected the page to replying of this request then. The failure in this stage then produces the failed page of access.

C) server is selected the page

It is the page that a cgi generates that server is selected the page, contains built-in multiplex token. This page shows that also one or more images represent the type of the business that the user can use. Some business is that our user can not obtain. In other embodiments, when existence is professional more than one, just generate this page with a customer service database take ID as keyword.

Welcome server embeds the title of suitable application server with its configuration information, and purpose is to share load between all available application servers. By using the configuration data that between the starting period, is read by welcome server to finish this load sharing.

Welcome server is application server of each services selection according to the clauses and subclauses in its configuration file. These clauses and subclauses have been enumerated the title of each application server of using and their selection possibility. This configuration table is loaded when starting by welcome server.

D) access the failed page

Accessing the failed page is a static page. It shows a piece of news, and expression login is because ID, password or the two are all wrong and failed. This page loads login page automatically after 15 seconds delay.

E) the access denied page

The access denied page is a static page, and it shows a piece of news, expression access failure owing to authentication error. This page loads login page automatically after 15 seconds delay. This access denied page is to be called when their service for checking credentials can not be identified token by application server. All loadings of this page all will be logged and monitor.

2. token server 454

Token service on the Web website is unique source that token generates and verifies. Token itself is stored in the shared database 456. This database can be shared between all token servers. This token database is positioned at the outer fire wall of DMZ behind.

The token service provides service at known (＞1024) tcp port. These services only provide to credible host. The tabulation that in configuration database, is keeping credible host. This database also is the fire wall behind that remains on the DMZ outside. Token server only just reads their configuration database when starting or receive the signal that will refresh. The token service is:

For an alone token is authorized in the login attempt.

Confirm an alone token.

Confirm a token.

Confirm again a token.

Aging independently the service by one of token carried out, and this is in order to reduce the live load on the token server.

All access to token server all are recorded and monitor. Token server itself is write as with the tcp_wrapper code that can obtain from the internal security group of MCI.

3. profile Management Application Server

The profile Management Application Server is the application server of unique type of realizing in the first embodiment. These servers have identical catalogue layout with welcome server. This just allows when needed same system to be used for two services.

C. safety

The data that the user entrusts to Web server are responsive for the user. The user wishes as much as possible protected data. The user can use this sensitive information by web server. This information physically can be deposited and be resided on one or more database servers, but with regard to the user, information is on server, should be protected.

In one embodiment, current only have following informational needs to be protected:

In other embodiments, the profile information of direct line account extraneous information is protected, and comprises Email, voice mail, faxmail and personal homepage information.

The protection that provides is for the assailant with Types Below:

Can access the people of Web;

Other users;

The MCI personnel;

The people of energy user's network;

The people of energy user's system;

Spy on user's people;

The system of other server that disguises oneself as.

This project realizes safety by following scheme:

To adopt alone token to the login attempt;

The token of having confirmed will be followed all affairs;

If token did not use, then come invalid token with the aging way of token in 10 minutes;

Token is related with the IP address of calling out machine, and like this, the token stealing is not a kind of easy selection just;

Prevent not token or the data stealing of physical access that the user is shown with SSL;

Use token with the mode that is similar to Netscape Cookies, the date that we just can be chosen in evening is transformed into cookies. Cookies provides the condition let us that token further is hidden in the document, to obtain the safety of extra one deck;

Employing hostility IP shows to stop up a plurality of assaulters and is not discovered by them.

Except above safety by the token realization, Web server is placed on data management area (DMZ) also can obtains further low layer safety. DMZ safety is discussed hereinafter.

D. login process

Figure 42 represents login process. The sequence of events that causes logining successfully is:

1. user's request is connected to www.galileo.mci.com.

2. from one (server) set, select a server with the DNS endless form.

3. a html page is mail to user's browser.

4. the Jaya uniformity of this page check browser and show welcome message.

5. if browser is not that Java is consistent, with suitable message stopped process.

6. if browser is that Java is consistent, it just sends " GET Login Screen " (reading login screen) request from trend www.galileo.mci.com server. This request also is transformed into browser SSL V2. If browser is not that SSL is consistent, then convert failed.

7.Web server is done following work:

The A.Web server is obtained an alone token from its internal token service.

The B.Web server is chosen an applet from a big collection.

The C.Web server is recorded in applet, token and client computer IP address in the database.

The D.Web server sends back login screen together with applet and token.

8. the user fills in login screen territory-ID and password.

A. ID is user's straightforward line (Directline) number (be imprinted on user's the business card, belong to PD).

B. password is one and only is six figure place font size codes known to the user.

9. when the user pressed "enter" key" (or clicking the LOGIN button), Java Applet just sent ID, password, token and crypto token and goes back. Encrypt (Scrambling) algorithm and be specific to the applet that sends at step 7D.

10. if the IP address of browser is in hostility IP table, then server turns back to step 7.

11.Web server is verified logging request with the content that records among the step 7C.

If 12. test invalidation: if this is the continuously for the third time attempt from same IP address, server just is recorded to this address hostility IP table.

13. server returns step 7.

14. if test effectively, server just selects service to shield the browser that mails to built-in token with one. Token is still related with the IP address of browser, but it has an expiration time now.

E. professional selection

When the user selected a options in the services selection screen, this request was with token. Before access service, token is certified, as shown in figure 43.

F. professional operation

The screen that is generated by application server all contains the token of issuing the user when login process starts. This token has a built-in expiration time and an effective source IP address. The all operations request all comprises this token, as the part of this request.

Professional request is with the HTML form, send based on form or the common hyperlink of applet by browser. In the first two example, token is sent as a hidden field with the HTTP-POST method to go back. Hyperlink or use with the HTTP-GET method of built-in token or with Cookie and substitute token. The form of token will be selected diligently, with compatible with this method.

1.NIDS server

NIDS server in the system is to be isolated by fire wall and a Web server based on router. The operation of NIDS server allows NIDSCOMM and the ASCOMM of the database on the TCP client computer access NIDS server professional. NIDSCOMM and ASCOMM business do not allow to be connected to the not database on the NIDS server of physical location.

Following database on the NIDS server (C-sets professional) is used by welcome server, token server and profile Management Application Server:

800_PIN_1Call (this be a subregion database);

·1CALL_TRANS；

·COUNTRY；

·COUNTRY_SET；

COUNTRY2 (possibility);

COUNTRY_CITY (possibility);

·NPA_CITY；

NPACITY_OA300 (possibility);

·OP153T00。

Professional except above-named C tree, below new C tree is professional also will define in SERVDEF and only use at the NIDS of system's special use server:

·TOKEN；

·SERVERS；

·HOSTILE_IP；

·TOKEN_HOSTS；

·SERVER_ENV。

Below to the description of these databases, do not represent respectively to record lead-in joint place and require the region filling (filler field) that has, do not attempt to represent any other region filling in order to require along the structure alignment of 4 byte boundaries yet. This omission purely for the sake of simplicity. Numeral in the bracket of territory definition rear adjacent is to preserve the desired byte number of thresholding.

2.TOKEN data bank service

The token database business is accessed by token server. Main operation on this server is the record that creates new record, reads given token value, upgrades the record of given token value.

Also access this database and regularly delete out-of-date record from the time operation of operation with it at the NIDS server. This time operation per hour moves once. Its sequential scanning database, the overdue record of deletion token.

The token database service contains the token record. The token record uses single keyword (token), and following each territory is arranged:

Key field is the token value.

1. version (1);

2. service marking (single/many) (1);

3. token value (16);

Address 4.IP (16);

5. ID (16);

6. the time of authorizing (4); With

7. the time stops (4).

(3.SERVERS server) data bank service

The server database business is accessed by welcome server when configuration. Record in this database contains following territory:

1. apply names (16);

2. application server host name (32);

3. application server domain name (32);

4. weight (1);

5. application icon file URL (64);

6. use and describe file URL (64).

Key field is the combination of apply names, server host name and server domain name. Database is read by the welcome server order. This database also by web administration person access to create, read, renewal and deletion record. This access will be passed through the ASCOMM interface. Web administration person is used for html format and CGI scripting (script) their management role.

4.HOSTILE IP data bank service

This database is accessed to create new record or according to the IP address read enchashment as key record is arranged by welcome server. Read access is very frequent. This database contains following territory:

Address 1.IP (16);

2. entry time (4);

3. termination time (4).

Key field is the IP address. Three values are all arranged when creating record by welcome server. If these clauses and subclauses will be substituted, the business of carrying out this replacement will only be allowed to the time stop value is changed into＜epoch_start 〉, so indicate that these clauses and subclauses are for replacing.

This database also by web administration person access to create, read, renewal and deletion record. This access will be passed through the ASCOMM interface. Web administration person is used for html format and CGI scripting their management role.

Customer service visits this database with the instrument of a special exploitation, and only the access from corporate firewall inside just is allowed to.

One the time operation that the NIDS server moves also access this database and from this database the deletion out-of-date record. All its activities of this charge book. The record of this operation is subject to web administration person's frequent inspection always.

5.TOKEN_HOSTS database service

This database is enumerated the host's who is trusted by token server IP address. This database is read when disposing by the token business. Record in this database contains following each territory:

Address 1.IP (16);

2. authority (1);

3. host's name (32);

4. host's domain name (32);

5. the host describes (64).

Key field is the IP address. The authority binary flags is determined access level. Low access level only allows the authentication of existing token/again authentication command; High access level also additionally allows to authorize and authenticate alone token order.

6.SERVER_ENV database service

This database is read when starting by welcome and application server. It defines the startup environment of these servers. In one embodiment, only designed one and can be used the territory of (and only for welcome server). This design is expanded in other embodiments.

Record in this database contains following each territory:

1. sequence number (4);

2. apply names (16);

3. environment name (32);

4. environment value (64).

Key field is sequence number. Environment value can be quoted other environmental variance with name. This value is calculated when moving by suitable CGI scripting. Welcome server is assigned to this pseudo-apply names of WELCOME (welcome).

7. time operation

A NIDS server operation cleaning (cleanup) time operation. This operation operation that per hour is scheduled. The main task of this operation is:

1. scanning hostility IP database is reported all records. This report contains all records. Purpose is to follow the tracks of the assaulter who repeatedly patronizes according to this report.

2. scanning hostility IP database, report is take＜epoch_time〉be their record of termination time.

3. scanning hostility IP database is deleted out-of-date record.

4. scanning hostility IP database is reported all records. The form of this report will be connected to business (traffic) and report rather than scan each clauses and subclauses.

5. the scanning token database is to delete out-of-date record.

G. standard

Developed following coding standard:

1.HTML outward appearance and sensation (Look and Feel) standard;

2.Java outward appearance and sensation level (derived by HTML outward appearance and sensation level, these are for carry out the common outward appearance new class libraries used with the exploitation of feeling to carry out at this website page);

3.HTML programming standard.

H. system management

System's operating parameter below the system management mission requirements is reported at least to system operator:

System statistics (stats) and the disk operating position of band time mark (time stamps);

Network operation parameter with time mark;

The Web page with time mark uses and accesses statistics;

Token uses statistics;

Hostility IP alarm and statistics;

On the server of following tool and utility in DMZ:

Time is synchronous;

Name server;

System's login monitoring;

Alert report;

Secure Shell program (secure shell).

System is that following condition generates alarm:

The incorrect use of token;

Hostility IP shows to change;

Token expires;

The login attempt.

Alarm will generate at different levels. Web server adopts following broad principles:

1. server moves in the root environment.

2. manager's classification (staging) server that can start on the non-standard ports is tested new (classification) business.

3. tiered server can be at the classification run duration from access to the Internet.

4. the manager can transfer to the production area with grading software from graded region with a single command selection. There is suitable inspection to guarantee this not accidental finishing.

I. product/enhancing

Preferred embodiment is by providing graphic user interface and common message transmission system to make direct line MCI user can control extraly their profile. The ability of obtaining this function of preferred embodiment exists with the form of direct line MCI profile and common message transmission system. The user can revise its account, customizes its application program by functional part/function renewal. This application just realize by allow the user move preferred embodiment that its application program provides integrated future ability function.

The user just can access its all message by only being connected with a position. Fax, Email, paging and speech information will visit by a central message passing interface. The user can be by its message center interface accessing searching message in the central message passing interface. The central message passing interface provides the ability of easily, effectively managing its communication for the user.

User interface has two parts, user's application profile and message center. Interface can be by PC software (being PC client communication passing interface), ARU or VRU, WWW (WWW) browser access. The customization of interface support application program and the management of message.

Hereinafter will represent functional part/functional requirement of embodiment. First part of describing is ARU interface and to the requirement of user interface, message management and profile management. After ARU requires, also provide the requirement to WWW browser and PC client interface.

J. interface characteristics require (general introduction)

According to preferred embodiment, front end plays a part the interface between user and screen display server. The user can access system also can directly access its profile and message. User interface is used for upgrading user's profile, the message of calling party. User's profile information and user's message can be deposited and be resided in diverse location, so interface can be connected to two places. Profile and message transmission capacity are the individual components of interface, and different requirements is arranged.

The user can upgrade its profile by the profile management in real time by its interface. Using profile is the front end of user account catalogue, and the user account catalogue is that all user account informations are deposited the place of staying in virtual location. The user also can manage its message (voice mail, faxmail, Email, pager recall) by its message center. Message center is the front end that central message is transmitted database, and it is that all user messages (regardless of message content) can be deposited the place of staying that central message is transmitted database.

Three supported user interfaces are arranged:

DTMF access to ARU or VRU;

WWW browser access to the WWW website;

PC client computer access to the messaging service device.

The profile (only being direct line MCI), retrieval voice mail message and pager that the user can upgrade them from ARU be message header (sender, main body, the date/time) information of message related to calls, retrieval faxmail and Email again. By the PC client computer, the user is limited to can carry out message retrieval and Message Processing. The WWW browser provides the user Complex interface for profile management and message retrieval. By the WWW browser, the user can upgrade their profile (direct line MCI, information service, list management, global message are processed and the personal homepage face) and all type of messages of retrieval.

1. user account profile

The user can visit account information by using profile. Using profile provides one to deposit intelligence interface between the account information that resides in the user account catalogue at user and its. User account directory access user's individual account information. The user can read and write catalogue, and their account is upgraded. Catalogue provides retrieval capability, makes the user business agent can retrieve specific account when helping the user.

When the user obtained a telephone number, the user account catalogue will reflect this phone registration, and the user just can visit and the update functions parts by its user account profile. If user's cancellation, User Catalog will reflect this cancelling, and business will be removed from user's application profile.

In a word, the user account catalogue provides the account information of each user's service. Yet the user account catalogue is confined to: direct line MCI profile, information service profile, global message processing, list management and personal homepage profile. This information has been determined the feature/function of user's application and has been customized the required flexibility of its application for the user provides, made MCI can satisfy the communication needs that the user constantly changes.

2. the database of message

A key character that provides is the integrated of message. Similarly be incorporated in a virtual location with similar message. By a calling, message center just provides its all message guide looks to the user, regardless of the interior perhaps access mode of message. By the interface message transmission capacity, the user also can keep an address book and distribution list.

This message database is a central information warehouse, for the user is laying in message. Message database provides the public object storage capacity, and data file is stored as object. By the access message database, the user retrieves again message related to calls of voice mail, faxmail, Email and pager from a single virtual location. In addition, by using the public object storage capacity, distribution of messages is extremely efficient.

K. automatic answering equipment (ARU) function

1. user interface

The management of direct line MCI profile, the management of information service profile, message retrieval and distribution of messages can be carried out in the ARU interface. The DTMF access that provides by ARU can be suitable for to uniformity on the different parts in system. For example, come the input alphabet symbol by the dtmf key dish, no matter the user is in access stock index information or to Fax Messaging of distribution list broadcasting, all input in the same manner.

Voice mail callback auto redial (Voicmail callback Auto Redial) provides the ans back of reminding and collecting the guest who stays voice mail, and initiates an ability of returning calling from this guest's ans back of trend when searching message. In case finish callback, the user can turn back to the same position that they left originally in the mailbox.

Music waits for that (Music On-Hold) provides music at guest's waiting time.

Stop and paging (Park and Page) provide the guest to select to come paging direct line MCI user by direct line MCI gateway, then keep waiting for during the user is paged. The user receives this paging, and calls out their direct line MCI number, and they can select to be connected with the guest who waits at this. If the user fails calling is connected with the guest, the guest will receive a selection that will be forwarded to voice mail. If the user does not have voice mail as the option of definition, then will play for the guest guest's ending message.

Annotate: the guest bides one's time waiting, and whenever can both will be forwarded to by the next one option of voice mail.

Have and stop and the call visor (call screening) of paging, embodiment provides stopping and the function of the identity response of paging, MPTY (being the guest) to the user. This provided being to wish to speak with the guest or the guest is transferred to the ability that voice mail is selected to the user before connect calling out. Specifically, the guest is just recorded their name by the ARU prompting when selecting stop and paging option. When the user to stopping and when paging reply, they will hear " you have from the calling that is recorded name " of ARU prompting, then be provided to be connected with MPTY the selection that still MPTY is transferred to voice mail. If the user does not have voice mail as the option of definition, then the guest will be stored in an ending message. The guest bides one's time waiting, and whenever also can both will be forwarded to by the next one option of voice mail.

No. two pagers configuration control and replying stop and paging

System also can make the user pass through the order of being submitted to by No. two pagers, and to voice mail or ending message or continuation wait, response stops and page notification instruction ARU with call route selecting.

Text pager is supported

System allows the user to come paging direct line MCI user by direct line MCI gateway and stays the message for the treatment of by the text pager retrieval. Specifically, after selecting suitable option, the guest will be sent to network MCI (networkMCI) paging or Sky Tel message center, and the operator will receive and submit to a text based message here, treat the text pager retrieval by the user.

Be forwarded to next terminal number (termination number)

One side that be routed to for direct line MCI calls out, that answer phone of system provides and selects to allow this calling be routed to the ability of next terminal number in the direct line MCI Route Selection sequence. Specifically, the called party will receive a prompting from direct line MCI ARU gateway, this prompting is pointed out, call out and be routed to this number by direct line MCI, the called party can this incoming call of selective reception, perhaps allows this calling be routed to next terminal number or destination in the Route Selection sequence. The option that provides to the called party comprises:

Come call accepted by an option

By an option calling is sent to next terminal

Allow calling overtime (namely holding fire) then proceed to next terminal.

# key regeneration (reorigination) less than 2 seconds

Embodiment also provides such ability, namely by pressing the # key less than 2 seconds, from export-oriented calling of direct line MCI gateway regeneration. Current direct line MCI requires the user that the # key was pressed 2 seconds or could regenerate a calling after the longer time.

L. message management

1. many media informations are notified

The user can receive about the message on current many media-comprise voice mail, faxmail, Email, paging-form. Specifically, the user will hear ARU script statement for example " you have 3 new voice mail message, 2 new fax mail messages, 10 new email messages. "

2. many media informations are disposed

The user can access universal inbox and carry out basic message disposal, disposes the message of a plurality of media (voice mail, faxmail, Email, the paging) form that receives by direct line MCI gateway. The user can retrieve voice mail message and pager message, the message header (priority, sender, date/time, size) of retrieval faxmail and email message. In addition, the user can also store, transmits or delete the message of watching from the ARU interface. The forwarding feature is limited to the form of voice mail or faxmail comes assignment messages. Only have voice mail message to transmit with voice mail. E-mail-fax mail and pager message can be transmitted with faxmail, yet may need Email and pager message are transformed into the G3 form. With the faxmail transforming message time, the user can send a message to distribution list and faxcasting tabulation.

3. Text To Speech

The text message that system will receive with the form of Email, faxmail or pager message is converted to can be by the audio frequency of direct line MCI gateway playback. Originally this text-to-speech ability will be limited to message header (priority, sender, theme, date/time, size) information.

The user is provided option and whether selects them be ready to listen first message header, and then selects them to want to play which full message. Unique type of message of not supporting full message is carried out the ability of text-to-speech will be fax mail messages. Can only play the faxmail title. The faxmail heading message comprises sender's ANI, the date received/time of faxmail and the size of faxmail.

4. e-mail forward is to facsimile machine

The user can with by direct line MCI ARU gateway retrieves or the e-mail forward of watching to user-defined terminal number. Specifically, the user can watch email message by direct line MCI ARU. Watch after the message, the user receives a prompting from each standard prompts, and he wants this prompting inquiry this email message is forwarded to particular terminal number, or selects temporary number of input. After selecting this option and pointing out terminal number, email message just is switched to the G3 form and is sent to this designated terminal number. Support the binary file annex of Email. If annex can not be delivered to this terminal facsimile machine, the text message that just must provide an expression to fail the conversion binary annex to the recipient. Email can not cause the deletion of message from " universal inbox " to the forwarding of facsimile machine.

5. receive the pager notifications of information

The user can by the message media by notice of user-defined time interval paging receiving machine, point out the current number of depositing the message of staying in user's " universal inbox ". Specifically, the user can set up by direct line MCI ARU the notice plan of a paging receiving machine message, and the number of voice mail, faxmail Email and the pager message of staying is deposited in this message indication in user's " universal inbox ".

6. the delivery confirmation of voice mail

System is provided to the user and receives an ability of confirming voice mail message when voice mail that the user starts successfully is not delivered to terminal side.

7. message prioritization

System provides the ability of giving the normal or urgent priority of message to the guest. When the user receives explanation about message, preferential situation will be instructed to, all emergency messages all with indexed before normal messages. This requirement is only applicable to voice mail, is not suitable for faxmail. This will require " universal inbox " will express the suitable message priority of direct line MCI voice mail.

M. information service

By the ARU interface, the user can be from receiving content the information service by the configuration of WWW browser interface. The information content will provide with inbound business and the business of going out. To be defined as the inbound communication content by the information content of WWW browser (being the profile management) definition also will be limited to:

Stock index and financal messaging

Headline news

The user also can access the extra information content by the ARU interface, yet this information can not be by WWW browser (being the profile management) configuration. This extraneous information content will be known as the going-out information content and will comprise:

Stock index and financal messaging;

Headline news;

Weather;

Sports news and score;

The soap opera latest news;

Horoscope (Horoscopes);

The prize drawing result;

Entertainment news;

The traveller helps.

The configurable parameter of the below's definition inbound communication content. The retrieval of going-out information content will be by supporting by dtmf key dish inputting alphabet characters. The input of alphabetic character must be consistent with the mode that by DTMF is the list management inputting alphabet characters.

The access that the traveller helps will be with other going-out information bundling, and like this, the user will do just dials a 800/8XX number. According to the selected information content, the 800/8XX phone may be stretched over different terminals.

N. message storage requirement

Message storage requirement is consistent with the message storage requirement that defines below.

O. profile management

Their direct line MCI account profile also can be watched, upgrades and be called to direct line MCI profile leading subscriber. DirectMCI profile management managerial ability by the ARU interface is consistent with the expression that provides by the WWW browser, and supports following requirement:

Create new direct line MCI profile and compose name to this profile;

Call direct line MCI profile;

Sound annotations direct line MCI profile name;

Upgrade existing direct line MCI profile;

Support the logic of rule-based establishment and renewal direct line MCI profile (for example, if only select a call route selecting option such as voice mail, then will call optimum and be routed to voice mail; Renewal in a parameter must involve all affected parameter such as page notification);

Gating direct line MCI number;

Gating and definition replace Route Selection number;

My (FollowMe) Route Selection is followed in gating and definition.

Gating and the last Route Selection of definition (be called in the past alternate routing select) be extremely:

-voice mail and pager;

-only have voice mail;

-only have pager.

-final message;

If two or more call route selecting options (follow me FollowMe), voice mail, faxmail or pager are arranged) gating, then call the menu Route Selection;

Define default number that faxmail is delivered;

For voice mail activates page notification;

For faxmail activates page notification;

It is urgent selection of delivering the classification voice mail that the guest is provided;

Be following definition call visor parameter:

-title and ANI;

-ANI only;

-title only.

Gating or close stops and paging.

P. the call route selecting menu changes

Gating also provides the call route selecting terminal number of revising them, needn't re-enter the ability that they do not wish the terminal number that changes simultaneously for the user. Specifically, the requirement of direct line MCI Route Selection modify feature, if the user wishes to change any Route Selection number, then the user will re-enter all terminal numbers in the Route Selection sequence. This ability allows user only to change them to wish the terminal number that changes, when they do not wish to change certain number in the Route Selection sequence, just can show by pressing the " # " key.

Q. the configuration of No. two pagers is controlled and replying stop and paging

System also can be by the order of being submitted to by No. two pagers, gating or close predefined direct line MCI profile.

R. Extraordinary is greeted

System provides to the user and watches and upgrade the ability that will play or greet from the personalization that their personal homepage shows from ARU. Each greet be preserve separately and be by the characteristic customization that can obtain by each interface (ARU or personal homepage).

S. list management

System also provides establishment and renewal tabulation, is the ability of list creating sound annotations name to the user. Faxcasting list management ability and direct line MCI list management ability integrated provides a single list database. The user can watch from the ARU interface, upgrades, the member on increase and the delete list. In addition, the user can also delete or create tabulation. The ARU interface energy distributes voice mail and fax mail messages with tabulation.

The alphabetical list title has been supported in the use of distribution list, so that tabulation is not to be confined to the name of code of tabulating. To the alphabetic character of ARU input for List name, mode is consistent with the alphabetic character that is used for information service by the DTMF input by DTMF. Hereinafter will discuss the requirement of list management in more detail.

Except the disposing capacity that gives information, the PC client computer also provides an address book and the utilization to tabulating. User's energy modified address book, the distribution list of management speech, fax, Email and beep-page message. In one embodiment, not integrated with the tabulation of passing through WWW browser or ARU interface creating or maintenance by the tabulation of the establishment of PC client interface or maintenance, then can implement in another embodiment this integrated. The user can send message to distribution list from the PC client computer. This requirement has two road interfaces between PC client computer and list management database, the PC client computer just can be made comma file separator or the DBF form by this interface and be transported to list database.

The user can set up and revise recipient's address information by its interface PC software. The user can record the address of a plurality of types in its address book, comprise ANI, voice mail identifier, fax mailbox identifier, paging number and the e-mail address (MCIMail or internet) of 10 numerals. This information should be preserved at PC. The address information that keeps in the PC client computer is classified by recipient's name and is sorted.

T. global message is processed

The user can define from the ARU interface can obtain from " universal inbox " for which message. The requirement that global message is processed is consistent with the following requirement that will define.

X. Internet telephony and related service

The discussion of this paper has so far been introduced the internet thereby has also been introduced Internet telephony, but Internet telephony comprises quite some development fields. The below's minute six major domains are done a summary to Internet telephony. First field is comprised of the access of IP service. This field relates to the ISDN system, Ethernet, token ring, FDDI GSM, LMDS, PCS, cellular network, frame relay and the mechanism X.25 that adopt such as satellite, dial-up service, T1, T3, DS3, OC3 and OC12 special circuit, SMDS network, ISDN B channel, ISDN D channel, many speed ISDN, the binding of a plurality of B channel and visits and use the internet.

Second field relates to shared Internet telephony. Multi-medium data can quite easily adopt circuit switching network, because latter's reliability is high, the handling capacity potentiality are large. Problem comprises url data propelling between shared data, the each side, data conferencing, shared blank technology (whiteboarding), cooperative resource and isdn user-subscriber signaling.

The 3rd field relates to the Route Selection Internet telephony. Problem comprises date in the moment, week, the moon, year interior date, also has in addition area of origin to manage point, origin nexus and origin time zone. The analysis of Route Selection also comprises Route Selection, ANI and the IP address of feature of type, the reservation of user data, recipient, telephone number, origin circuit, bearer service. VNET plan, scope privilege, directory service and service control point (SCP) also belong to the Route Selection Internet telephony.

The 4th field relates to quality of service. Analysis must comprise exchange network, ISDN, on-the-fly modifies, Internet telephony, RSVP and redundant Network. In addition, this field also comprises the record keeping of the business of mixing internet/telephone exchange, ethernet feature parts, ISDN functional part, simulation home loop and public telephone and reservation and/or use.

The 5th field is comprised of directory service, profile and notice. Example has distributed directory, seek me and with directory management and the user interface of my service, phone. Also comprise the measure of MPTY authenticating security. With LIST SERVER user profile, network outline data structure, service profiler and order input profile and also having of depositing layering with OO profile.

The 6th field forms by mixing the Internet telephony business. Scope comprises message transmission, the transmission of IP message, Internet session, internet fax, information router selection (IMMR), voice communication and (such as what exist in the intra-company) in-house network take object as target. Other business comprises operator service, management service, paging service, accounting business, wireless integrated, information broadcast, monitoring and report service, card service, video-mail service, compression, mandate, checking, encryption, phone application encoder, record keeping and data collection services.

The 7th field forms by mixing the internet media service, and scope comprises the cooperation work that relates to a plurality of users. The user can cooperate with the video in audio frequency, data. This field comprises the media conference of hybrid network inside. Also having a field that relates to face width is the auxiliary meeting of booking-mechanism, operator and to the content introduction of meeting. The virtual location of these meetings is in the future very important. The feature of follow-on chatting room is the virtual meeting space with simulation office environment.

A. the system environments of internet media

1. hardware

According to the implementation environment of the preferred embodiment of system of the present invention preferably one such as IBM PS/2, Apple macintosh computer or based on the personal computer of the UNIX of work station. Figure 1A represents a representational hardware environment, and the exemplary hardware configuration that the figure shows has the work station 99 and many other that have such as microprocessor CPU 10 according to preferred embodiment to pass through unit of system bus 12 interconnection. Work station shown in Figure 1A comprises random access memory (RAM) 14, read-only storage (ROM) 16, be used for and be connected to the I/O adapter 18 of bus 12 such as the ancillary equipment of communication network (for example data processing network) 81, printer 30, magnetic disc store 20, be used for being connected to the user interface adapter 22 of bus 12 with keyboard 24, mouse 26, audio amplifier 28, microphone 32 and/or such as other user interface of touch-screen (do not give and illustrating), and the display adapter 36 that bus 12 is connected with display 38. A general resident operating system on the work station is such as Microsoft's Window NT or Win95 operating system (OS), IBM os/2 operation system, MAC System/7 OS or UNIX operating system. Those skilled in the art know that the present invention also can realize in above-mentioned other platform or operating system in addition.

2. OO Software tool

Preferred embodiment is write with JAVA, C and C Plus Plus, adopts the object-oriented programming method. Object-oriented programming (OOP) is used for the complicated application program of exploitation more and more. Along with OOP becomes the main flow of software design and development gradually, require various software solutions can both be suitable for utilizing the benefit of OOP. There are such needs, are about to these application of principles of OOP to the message passing interface of electronic messaging system, so that the set of OOP class and object can be provided to message passing interface.

OOP is one and comes the process of develop computer software with object, comprises problem analysis, design system, all steps of constructor. To as if a kind of software kit that had not only contained data but also contained a series of dependency structures and process. Because it not only contains data but also contain a series of dependency structures and process, thus it can be considered as be a kind of do not require other structure, process or data carry out particular task from foot member. Therefore to look computer program be a series of very large autonomy-be called object-parts of having to OOP, and each object is responsible for specific task. This concept that data, structure and process are packaged into parts or module together is called encapsulation.

In general, the OOP parts be can re-use, to show be the software module that meets object model, they are accessed by the component integration architecture when operation. The component integration architecture is one and allows software module in the various process space to use mutually the each other set of the structure mechanism of ability and function. This generally is by supposing that a global facility object model of setting up this architecture thereon realizes.

Preferably distinguish now the class of object and object. One to as if the single-instance of the class (often just being called class) of object. The class of object can be regarded a blueprint that can therefrom form many objects as.

OOP allows the programmer to create an object of a part that is another object. For example, representing that a piston-engined object is said to be is that object with representing piston has compositive relation. In fact, piston engine comprises piston, valve and many other parts, and the fact is that piston is a piston-engined unit, can carry out in logic and representing semantically with two objects in OOP.

OOP also allows to create from object of another object " derivation ". If two objects are arranged, one represents piston engine, and another represents its piston is the piston engine of being made by pottery, and then the relation between these two objects is not compositive relation just. The Ceramic piston engine does not form piston engine. It is piston-engined a kind of, has Duoed a restriction than piston engine; Its piston is ceramic. In this case, the object that represents the Ceramic piston engine is called derived object, and it has been inherited all characteristics that represent piston-engined object and has increased further restriction or details. Represent the Ceramic piston engine to as if from representing piston-engined object " derivation ". Relation between these two objects is called succession.

When the object that represents the Ceramic piston engine or class had been inherited all characteristics that represent piston-engined object, what its was inherited was the thermodynamic property of defined standard piston in the piston engine class. Yet Ceramic piston engine object has exceeded these usually specific thermodynamic properties of the pottery different with the related thermodynamic property of metallic piston. It is ignored original function and uses new Ceramic piston correlation function. Piston engine not of the same race has different characteristics, but have the identical built-in function related with them (for example in-engine number of pistons, ignition order, lubricated, etc.). In order to access these functions in any piston engine object, the programmer identifies identical function with identical title, and different/alternative function realizes but each piston engine has behind in identical title. This difference with function realizes being hidden in same names ability afterwards and is called as polymorphism (polymorphism), and it has greatly simplified the communication between object.

After the concept of compositive relation, encapsulation, succession and polymorphism had been arranged, object just can represent anything in the real world. In fact, we are unique restrictions that decision can become the things kind of the object in the OO software to the logic perception of reality. The below is some typical kinds:

Object can represents physical object, such as the automobile in the traffic flow simulation, electronic device, country in the Economic Model or the aircraft in the air traffic control system in the circuit design program.

Object can represent the element of computer user's environment, such as window, menu or Drawing Object.

Object can represent form. Such as personal document or city latitude, longitude table.

The data type of object energy representative of consumer definition is such as the point on time, angle, plural number or the plane.

Because object can represent this huge ability of the things of any energy logical division, OOP allows the computer program of the model of some aspect of a performance reality of software developer's Design and implementation, and no matter this reality is a physical entity, process, system or comprehensive things. Because object can represent anything, the software developer just can create an energy serves as parts in the future larger software project object.

If 90% of a new OOP software all is comprised of the already present ready-made parts that re-use the check that gets in the object of working, then all the other of this new software project 10% just must completely newly be write and test. Because 90% has got from frequent the re-used object of testing, may produce wrong potential territory is exactly 10% of program. As a result, OOP is so that the software developer can set up object with the object of setting up before other.

This process is very similar to accessory and subassembly and builds complicated machine. Therefore, it more similarly is hardware engineering that the OOP technology makes soft project, because software is can set up with the ready-made parts that object form obtains with the developer. All these helps the improvement of software quality and the raising of development rate.

Programming language begins to support the OOP principle comprehensively, such as encapsulation, succession, polymorphic and compositive relation. Along with the appearance of C Plus Plus, commercial software development merchant has adopted OOP. C++ a kind ofly can provide the fast OOP language of machine executable code. C++ not only is fit to commercial application but also is fit to the system program design project in addition. At present, seemingly most popular selection among many OOP program designers of C++, but other a collection of OOP language is arranged, such as Smalltalk, common lisp objective system (CLOS) and Eiffel. In addition, also adding the OOP ability in more traditionally popular computer programming languages such as Pascal.

The benefit of object classification may be summarized as follows:

The class of object and their correspondences is decomposed into many less, simple questions more with the programming problem of complexity.

The object that encapsulation is small-sized by organizing data into, independent, can communicate by letter mutually and implementation data is abstract. The encapsulation also protect the data in certain object not to be subjected to contingent damages, but allow other object by the member's function and structure that calls this object with this data interaction effect. Subclass and succession are so that become possibility by expanding and revise object from the new various objects of available standards class derivation of system. Therefore, the establishment of new ability needn't begin fully completely newly.

Polymorphism and inherit more so that distinct program person with the characteristic of many different classes mix, coupling still can become possibility with the specialized object that predictable mode and relevant object are worked together to create.

Class hierarchy and comprise hierarchical structure for the model of setting up real world objects and their Relations Amongs provide a kind of flexibly mechanism.

The storehouse that can re-use class is all useful in many cases, but they also have some limitations, for example:

Complexity: in complication system, it is extreme complicated that the class hierarchy of associated class can become, and has tens even a hundreds of class.

Control stream: still be responsible for control stream (being that it must be controlled from the reciprocation between all objects of particular bin establishment) take class libraries as the program of assisting establishment. Which is which function of object reference of those kinds when the programmer must determine.

Double effort: although class libraries allows the programmer to use and reuse many little code segments, each programmer merges these code segments with distinct methods. Two distinct program persons may write the identical but significantly different program of internal structure (i.e. design) of two functions with identical class libraries collection, and internal structure depends on the hundreds of little decision that each programmer makes in program circuit. Inevitably, similarly code segment is finished similar work in slightly different mode, but with each code segment combine then unlike they should work.

Class libraries is very flexible. Become increasingly complex along with program becomes, increasing programmer is forced to be over and over the basic basic solution of problem design iterations. Relatively new expansion to the class libraries concept is the framework of relevant class libraries. This framework is more complicated, is comprised of the important cooperation class of each group, and these classes that cooperate have not only recorded the small-scale pattern but also recorded and realized the common main mechanism that requires and design in the application-specific territory. Originally the purpose of developing them is for the application programmer is freed from the design of trifling function. These trifling functions relate to other Standard User boundary element of display menu, window, dialog box and PC.

Framework also represents the variation of the interactive consideration mode between the code that the programmer writes them and the code that other people write. Early stage in the process programming, the programmer storehouse that is provided by operating system is provided carries out certain task, but essentially, from the beginning program carries out tail, and the programmer only is responsible for control stream. This is suitable to printing pay sheet, computational mathematics form with the program of only carrying out in one way or solving other problem.

The exploitation of graphic user interface begins this process programming arrangement is thoroughly reversed. These interfaces allow user rather than programmed logic to come driver and determine when to carry out certain action. Nowadays, most of PCs are finished this work with a kind of event loop. Event loop is monitored mouse, keyboard and other external event source, comes the suitable part of caller person's code according to the action of user's execution. The order that no longer decision event of programmer occurs. On the contrary, program is divided into the independent segment with uncertain sequence call in the uncertain time. By giving the user control by this way, the developer has created more easy-to-use program. But, each usability of program fragments that the developer writes the storehouse that is provided by operating system still is provided is finished certain task, and the programmer still must determine the control stream of its inside after each program segment is called by event loop. Application code still is positioned on the top of system.

The event loop program also requires the programmer to write many needs and uses the code of writing separately for each. The concept of application framework has been widened the concept of event loop. Use the programmer of application framework to process and make up basic menu, window and these assemblies of dialog box, then the work that combines of these assemblies, but operational application in place and elemental user interface are arranged at the very start. Subsequently, the programmer substitutes some generics (generic) ability of framework and construction procedures by the certain capabilities with application envisioned thus.

Application framework has reduced the code total amount that the programmer must start anew. Yet because the generic application program that framework is actually a kind of display window, supports to clip and paste etc., the programmer also can abandon control to a greater degree with what the event loop program was allowed. Skeleton code is looked after nearly all event handling and control stream, programmer's code only when when framework needs it when creating and disposing certain data structure (for example for) just be called.

The programmer who writes framing program not only gives control the user (the event loop program also is like this), and the control that program is inner detailed stream is also given framework. This method is so that can create in interesting mode the complication system of cooperation, and this is different from those creation methods that creates repeatedly the isolated program of habitually practising code (custom code) for solving Similar Problems.

Therefore as mentioned above, framework says that fundamentally one group is that given Problem Areas structure can be again with the class that designs. Its usually (for example be menu and window) to provide the object of definition default characteristic, programmer to use its method is to inherit some default characteristic and replace (override) other characteristic, so that framework calls application code between in due course.

Three main distinctions are arranged between framework and the class libraries:

Behavior and agreement. Class libraries is actually the set of the sort of behavior of just calling when which individual behaviour need to be arranged in program. Framework then not only provides behavior, and agreement or the rule set of the mode that administration behaviour can make up also is provided, and what and framework comprise about the programmer to provide rule is provided and so on.

Call and replace. The code instance object that the programmer writes with class libraries and member's function of calling them. Might be with the mode same with framework (namely treating framework by class libraries) instantiation and allocating object, still in order to take full advantage of the advantage that to use again design of framework, the code that the programmer usually writes replacement and called by framework. Framework is managed the control stream between its object. Coding relates to is to divide responsibility rather than how the different segment of regulation cooperates between the different software segment of being called by framework.

Realize and design. Adopt the class libraries programmer only to re-use realization, and adopt framing program person to re-use design. Framework has embodied the working method of gang's relative program or software segment. Its representative is a kind of can be for adapting to the generic design solution of adapting to various particular problems in the localization. For example, certain single framework can embody the working method of certain user interface, although two different user interfaces that create in identical frames may solve significantly different interface problem.

B. phone on the internet

Make a phone call to have become a kind of fan group sexuality that the charge is small on the internet. Several companies are developing this technology with the interconnection of interpolation with PSTN. This is to as particularly having chosen chance and challenge at the MCI in IDDD field and the communication common carrier of having set up the BT. How this discussion has inquired into that the basis of technology provides the carrier class professional in this development. Concerned especially is the mode that allows to utilize 1+ (1plus) dialing interconnection between PSTN and internet.

This introductory discussion is except considering PSTN to the specification requirement of internet voice gateway, also considered to support the specification requirement to the PC connection than the PC of the current mode that more strengthens. Considered how to access from PC to the PSTN destination or rightabout calling. Also inquired into the internet and carried out PSTN to the case of PSTN communication as long distance network.

Discussion has shown how this service provides, and could replenish existing PSTN service, provides lower price for lower quality of service. The problem of chronicity is to improve steadily the quality of technique of internet, and whether this can compete final certification with traditional voice service.

1. introduce

The seventies middle and advanced stage has carried out the test at transporting speech on the internet, and this is the part of ongoing project of being subsidized by U.S. national defense Advanced Research Projects administration at that time. The eighties mid-term, adopted the conventional audio/video conference of holding the quantity appropriateness based on the work station of UNIX in the internet. These are experimental to be applied in the eighties and to propagate (multicasting) with more massive one road voice and video multichannel late period and be expanded. Nineteen ninety-five, a VocalTec of little company (www.vocaltec.com) introduced that a kind of the charge is small, can be provided at multimedia PC that the internet links to each other between the software kit of two road Speech Communications. The phone on the internet of new generation so just has been born.

Follow-up software kit initial and that be right after thereafter provides a kind of fan's instrument. A kind ofly be used between the terminal station, set up point to point connect for Tone Via based on the Internet relay " chamber " meeting room (IRC) of talking. This has caused meeting with or predetermined conference (if each side was coordinated in advance) with the chance as common in the public chatting room that Email or other means are carried out.

A) how to work

There is the user of multimedia PC and Internet connection just can increase the ability of IP by loading a little software kit. In the case of VocalTec, software kit is connected with meeting room (IRC server) on the talk server basis of revising. The user sees that at IRC all are connected to other user's of IPC list.

The user just can call out another user by clicking name. The response of IRC is the IP address that sends the called party. The IP address is to be that the dial-in customer of internet distributes when dialling in, and therefore will change during dialling in session. Connect if speech is not yet carried out in the destination, its PC will bell signal of buzzing. Called user can click the answer phone with mouse, and then MPTY just begins directly to communicate by letter to called party's IP address transmission. Built-in or attached multimedia microphone and the loudspeaker of PC is used as microphone. Telephone user's speech through digitlization, compress and divide into groups, transmit in the internet, be extracted and convert sound at the other end and from the PC loudspeaker, send.

B) meaning

IP provides a kind of professional cheaply for the user, and this business is that distance and boundary are insensitive. With regard to current internet access fee (hourly rate is low, sometimes pay an expense then do not limit use), the user can have conversation with another pc user who is connected to the internet. The contribution that called party's talk telephone expenses are used is its internet access fee of payment. If one or both ends are the LAN that are connected to the internet by special circuit, then this phone is just exempted from other expenditure. All these and traditional long-distance call-may be overseas call-formation contrast.

C) quality of service

Speech quality on the internet is good, but does not have the tonequality of general long-distance call good. In addition, the delay during the conversation is very remarkable. It is problematic attempting dropped calls person in this environment. The difference of delay and quality, be the reason of distance and active volume, not equal to be compression, buffer memory and the result who carries out packet time.

The delay of Tone Via is attributed to some factors. Causing one of most important reason of postponing is employed sound card. Sound card the earliest is semiduplex, is designed for the audio frequency that playback is recorded. Long audio data buffer is suitable for guaranteeing continual voice reproducing, but causes real time delay. Along with being the appearance that " speaker-phone " uses the full duplex card of design, reduced gradually based on the sound card that postpones.

Other delay is that forwarding of packets postpones intrinsic in access line speed (generally being 14.4-28.8kbps concerning the access of dialing internet) and the internet. Intrinsic delay is also arranged when filling grouping with the audio frequency of digital coding. For example, fill grouping for the DAB with 90ms, application must wait for that the time of 90ms could be carried out digitlization by audio reception at least. Shorter grouping reduced the delay of group padding, but increased expense owing to having increased the ratio of packet header to the grouping pay(useful) load. The expense that increases has also improved the bandwidth requirement to this application, so that adopts the application of short grouping to operate in the 14.4kbps dial-up connection. PC based on LAN suffers less delay, but everybody will be subject to the impact of variable delay, and this variable delay may be bothersome.

At last, intrinsic delay is also arranged in the audio coder-decoder. The excursion that postpones during the coding decoder Code And Decode is that 5ms is to 30ms. Although IP has longer delay, price is suitable, and it seems that the Speech Communication of this form receive an acclaim.

2. as the IP phone of commerce services

No matter whether the communication common carrier of having set up is liked, IP telephony technology arrives. Very clear, providing international voice call with the internet is a potential threat for international directly long-distance call (IDDD) revenue stream of tradition. May also have several years although produce considerable income impact, this is irresistible, unless may stop according to decree in national boundary. The best defence of these communication common carriers be the mode with industry strength provide professional itself. Accomplish this point, the call setup device that need to be improved and to the interface of PSTN.

Making things convenient for PC is useful to the connection of PC for the situation that needs simultaneously to carry out the speech talk in the Internet data packet communication period, and each side can not access independently telephone device. That only has that the dialing Internet user of an access circuit can find themselves faces this situation with regard to body. The consideration of expense also can impel use PC to play effect in the PC phone. When the internet can be used to replace long-distance network to interconnect ordinary telephone set, the more massive application of this technology will occur. It is few that the quantity (about 1,000 ten thousand) that connects in the world the multimedia PC of internet is compared with the quantity (about 600,000,000 6 thousand ten thousand) of whole world subscribers' line, and this business is in the programming phase of several companies.

Below we investigate each possible in IP business completely end points combination in each joint. Most important aspect relates to PSTN to the internet gateway ability. It should be noted that especially to the PSTN MPTY provides a step to dial its called party's possibility. The context that a step discussed below dials the solution place is North America numeral plan (North America numbering plan). In fact they have 4 kinds of situations:

1.PC to PC;

2.PC to PSTN;

3.PSTN to PC;

4.PSTN to PSTN.

The first situation is to be solved by now IP phone software. Second, third kind situation is similar but be not equal to, and they need a gateway between PSTN and internet separately. Last a kind of situation is used as the long-distance network of two pstn telephones with the internet.

A) PC is to PC

(1) directory service

In order to make things convenient for PC to the IP of PC, need a kind of directory service to come to search according to the name that MPTY provides called party's IP address. Early stage the Internet phone software is talked server as meeting room with the internet of revising. Recently, the Internet phone software replaces talking server with the directory service that can identify uniquely IP user (may be to pass through e-mail address). For receipt of call, the client will register to LIST SERVER (will pay, band circulation charge), in the time will being connected to the internet or want will allow catalog system know their position (IP address) to calling out when open. The optimal path of finishing automatic notice is the consensus that obtains between the IP phone software vendors about the agreement of just notifying directory service (automatically expression notice) when starting software. Also wish as a kind of selection, can find a kind of when the IP storehouse starts the method with regard to Automatically invoked IP phone software.

Consider extensibility, LIST SERVER is envisioned for the picture internet domain name system of a kind of distributed system-a bit. This does not also mean that ID must be with the form of " user foo.com ". Theoretically, only have called to need just now registration. If MPTY is registration not, then the charge (if the words that have) of calling out can be collected to the called party (recipient's pay phone). In addition, we can adhere to that also MPTY also will register in catalogue, by this mechanism collected the charges (this is that we wish, because we charge by registration, the sort of complexity of avoiding the recipient to pay and require). To call setup-rather than to the duration-expense collected is higher than the charge of common internet. The duration expense has been applied to the Internet user that dials, Internet use expense-dialing and special-purpose use the two-may not be too far away.

Can require to meet the need of market from registered user's collect billing phone. Must design a kind of this scheme of calling out to the called party that identifies, will have simultaneously a kind of called party to accept or refuse the mechanism of collect billing phone. Directory service will be followed the tracks of by version number the ability (perhaps, this is the thing of an online negotiation between the IP phone software kit) of this feature of called software support. If collect billing phone (the not registration of supposition MPTY), then MPTY can arbitrarily be claimed to be anyone. Directory service will force calling subscriber (calling out between duration) to adopt interim (distribution) identity, so as to allow the callee know this be one without the calling subscriber who checks. Because the IP address needs not to be fixing, so can not rely on them to identify correspondent.

(2) interoperability

Nearly all IP phone software kit all uses different speech codings and agreement to exchange speech information on the market now. For convenient useful connection, catalogue will be stored type and the version (may also have option) of the Internet phone software of just using. For it is worked effectively, software vendors will automatically be reported this information to directory service. When access calling, this information be used for determined interoperability. If each side can not interoperability, just must send suitable message to MPTY, as a kind of alternative, perhaps except the registration software type, can also design a kind of agreement protocol and in time determine interoperability, but all software kits all to " be expressed " it.

Such problem is arranged, and namely can the implementation quality of conversion be accepted for the end user between the IP phone coding. This service may have the individual duration, and the capacity payment related with it (Volume fee) perhaps arranged. and also have, after screening stage, our expectation only has some different schemes to exist. Perhaps, they have interoperability by least common denominator compression and the signaling protocol that industry is agreed. Up to now, our all contacted IP phone software marketing commercial cities agree with allowing interoperability " universal language " (Esperanto). If this can realize that then the lifetime of transformation service will be of short duration, may make them not have economic attractiveness.

We can help main software distributors to seek a consensus at " public " compression scheme and information protocol that required interoperability will be provided. In case main distributors supports this method, other distributors will imitate, and this situation occuring-and Intel, Microsoft, Netscape and VocalTec announce that recently they will support H.323 standard within next few month. This can be detected when call setup automatically. Directory service will be recorded which version of which software can be used mutually. In order to make things convenient for this function, automatically exist notice should comprise current software version, like this, upgrading is record in directory service dynamically just, also must define certain scheme can transmit register information between software kit, like this, if certain user's switch software bag, she just can transfer to register information new application program, have no reason to oppose that the user has two respectively with the application program of identical register information, directory service will know the user as the part operation that automatically has notice what is, this only just can have problems when the user can move more than one IP phone software kit simultaneously. If this ability of market demands just can be adapted directory service to such an extent that can process this problem, this problem also can be overcome by the use of the machinery of consultation between interactive IP phone software kit.

(3) call out the progress signaling

If the user can reach by catalog system, but the current speech that just is being busy with connects, so just a Call Waiting message (this does not have together with MPTY IP-) is sent to the called party in PSTN Call Waiting service, and corresponding message is beamed back MPTY.

If the user is accessible by catalog system, but current not in its speech software of operation (IP address response, but application program does not respond-side of checking Here it is problem vide infra), so just suitable message is returned to MPTY. (as a kind of selection, can send Email to the called party and remind him that call attempt is arranged. Another selection is to allow the calling party input a speech information and also should " voice mail " be attached on this Email. Business also can be indicated to the calling party with signal: busy, unreachable, and the movable but Call Waiting of ignoring, etc. Also can provide other Notification Method to the callee, such as fax or paging. In various situations, if notice can both comprise calling party's identity-known). In case catalog system is distributed, just will be necessary to inquire about other copies, if set up contact according to local information. This system provides the ability that has various notice forms and can control the parameter of these forms.

(4) ID

The problem of a key is how directory service will know that the callee no longer is positioned at the place (namely " leaving ") of her last report. The callee may break away from every way network (the called line line of fall, PC on-hook, terminal server collapse) and can not clearly notify its state variation to directory service. What is worse, this user is deviated from network, and another user with Voice Applications program may be assigned with the address with same IP. If (new calling party is with the user who automatically has notification enrollment, and is then no problem; Then directory service can detect this identical IP address. Between the each several part that directory service is distributed, may have some timing problems) therefore, must there be certain scheme to determine that the user still is positioned at last position of announcing for directory service.

A kind of way to this is that one of realization is shared with application program, the secret that when registration, creates, when catalog system is contacted by software (such as automatic existence notice or call initiationc) or when attempting to contact the callee of last known location, it can send an inquiry (as CHAP) to application program and examination response. This scheme does not need to announce the maintenance alive messages of " I not herein " or waste. The client can take apart at any time or turn off its IP telephony application and needn't consider to notify catalog system. If a plurality of IP phones are used the support that all is subjected to directory service, then each IP telephony application can be by different way to solution.

(5) other business

The IP conversation of encrypting will require software vendors to reach common understanding to minimizing encryption set up mechanism quantity. This will be that another interoperability solves function to directory service. Directory service can provide the support that public key is used, and the public-key certificate by the machine-operated issue of suitable certificate can be provided.

The user also can stipulate in directory service, if she current be not online, then his PC wants called (dial-out). The expense of transfering to can be collected to the callee, as calling forwarding meeting generation among the POTS, the call detail record (CDR) of transfering to need to be associated with the call details of certain entity (callee) in the IP telephony system, note, this and PC are not require that to the difference of PSIN situation voice conversion with the IP coding to PCM, transfers to and really will use TCP/IP at PPP. If transfer to unsuccessfully, then beam back the message of adaptation.

Dial-out may be domestic or international, and owing to the expense reason, the international existence of transfering to is practically impossible. But can not definitely get rid of this situation, it does not need extra function just can carry out.

B) PC is to PSTN

PC must support PCM is transformed into a plurality of encoding schemes to internet gateway, so that the software interactive effect that provides with various distributors. Alternative is, in case just use public compression scheme when realizing. From the viewpoint of quality, should select as much as possible best scheme. In many cases, preferred embodiments will be the proprietary version of software vendors. In order to finish this selection, telecommunications company will need to obtain technical licensing from selected distributors. Some distributors will can work and the work of needs at telecommunications company's platform as the scheme that makes them.

(1) domestic PSTN destination

The PC calling subscriber need to register and calling could be received PSTN. Unique exception is if allow recipient's pay phone from the internet. This will increase the complexity of charging aspect. Call out the PSTN destination, the PC calling subscriber will stipulate a domestic E.164 address. Catalog system becomes an internet based on NPA-NXX to transfer to the unit this address transition. Expect this dial-out unit far from the destination very close to, therefore will be a local call. Problem is situation about how to dispose when not having " this locality " to transfer to the unit. Another problem be if " this locality " when transfering to the unit full or unavailable what if.

Three kinds of possibility methods are arranged. A kind of method is that only having just provides the service of transfering to when the local call possibility. Second method is to beam back a message to the calling subscriber, informs that he must agree these expenses that payment causes thus with his name access long-distance call and request. The third method is access calling and not notifying by all means. Each of these situations all requires method that the expense (by directory service) of dial-out call (PSTN CDR) is connected with the billing record of calling out origin person.

The third method may increase the customer support expense, cause that the client is unhappy. First method is simple, but restricted property. The expense consciousness of estimating most of users is all very strong, therefore may be satisfied to method one. In any case method two provides flexibility-client all will continue sometimes, but increased the complexity that operates. A kind of possible compromise proposal is employing method one, and the method will refusal not be called out because of there being this locality to transfer to available. We also can increase an attribute in call request, the meaning is that " I do not mind whether the result is long-distance call yet. " in this situation, in any case meet with refusal but done to call out for the second time to attempt after also wanting the user of access calling that this attribute is set. For the client who has unnecessary money to use, all PSTN call out and can both carry out after being provided with this attribute.

Access domestic PSTN and call out the international call requirement of supporting the calling of the internet initiation that originates from the Internet locations the U.S. outside.

(2) international PSTN destination

Calling to international PSTN station can be undertaken by one of dual mode. The first, can be from the access international call of domestic dial-out station. This is not a kind of attracting service, because it can not save money for the client who in person beats international long-distance telephone. The second, can be national to the destination call transfer with the internet, carry out there " this locality " and transfer to.

This situation is problematic, because it must obtain the agreement of communication common carrier with being positioned at national goal. This situation may can be passed through in one of dual mode. Dual mode requires that all a partner is arranged in international destination. A kind of selection is as the partner with local communication company in the country of destination. The second select be with in ISP or the destination country with other service supplier of Internet connection.

C) PSTN is to PC

It is least important that this situation seems, but it also has certain to use, and for the integrality of narrating, is discussed at this.

As at PC described in the PSTN case, PSTN to internet gateway will need to support to change PCM to a plurality of encoding schemes with the software collaboration of various distributors sale. Require directory service can identify called PC. Automatically having notice is important for the accessibility that keeps the callee. The PSTN calling subscriber needn't register to directory service, will be based on PSTN information because the calling subscriber keeps accounts. The calling subscriber has one " constant " E.164 address, can be used for returning calling and keeping accounts. Suppose that we can be delivered to call number the callee whom indicates calling out. Because technology or secret, call number is not to obtain. This is the signal that PSTN calls out must to send expression to PC software, E.164 number is provided or points out that this number can not obtain.

Professional can being based on to called telephone charged. It is the long-distance part of calling out that the internet is used as, and just can finish this part thing. This is possible when second dialing tone arranged. If use 800 or local dialing professional, then the calling subscriber must input charging information. Alternative dispensing means is that 900 business will allow the record keeping based on the PSTN calling subscriber. Any situation no matter, the calling subscriber need to stipulate " telephone number " of destination after charging information or after dialling 900 numbers.

Main obvious problem is how regulation destination when second dialing tone of calling subscriber. Preferably only with a keypad tone. In order to simplify input, we can distribute an E.164 address to each directory entry. For fear of obscure (PSTN is to the PSTN situation) with actual phone number, this number need to be subjected to the control of catalogue. If have enough availablely, perhaps can use 700 numbers. Another kind of scheme is to use a kind of special area code. Spelling with button is a kind of not too " user-friendly " method.

3. the telephone number in the internet

The best way is to distribute an area code. The opening that this not only will keep the selection in future also facilitates simpler dialing from the beginning. Behind the given legal area code, the calling subscriber can directly dial the E.164 address of the PC on the internet. Telephone system can call route selecting to MCI POP, further be routed to PSTN-voice of the Internet gateway thus. Called number will be online and can reach for calling out access PC-supposition PC. This just makes the calling subscriber that the internet is used as is the PSTN part internet that dials like that. Without the need for second dialing tone, do not need to input charging information. This calling will be kept accounts to calling out the PSTN station, only has just increase of charge when destination PC answers. Other communication common carrier will be assigned with exclusive area code, and it is compatible that catalogue should keep.

For the calling of state's endogenous origin, all charging informations of keeping accounts required to the calling subscriber all are available, and third party's intelligent network service function or other accounting method can both obtain by second dialing tone.

4. other IP communication common carrier

When but the number uniformity becomes when needing, it will be more complicated requiring all these. May wish to country code of the Internet assignment. Although this can make domestic dialing more complicated (any number that dials outside 1 add that a tens number seems to reduce significantly the use of this business), desirable benefit may be arranged. In any case, it is not mutually exclusive distributing one (or several) area code and country code of distribution. The use of country code can make dialing more unified geographically.

5. international access

Impossible with an international call from the internet that the U.S. enters in the U.S.. Yet if this situation has occured, system will have enough information to do record keeping work based on the calling subscriber without any need for extra function for this situation.

Another may be, we arrange to process the incoming call of U.S. outside with (may be in partnership), enter the internet to turn back to the U.S. in this country, perhaps goes on the internet Anywhere. If the partner is local communication company, then this partner is with promising this PSTN calling subscriber needed information of keeping accounts.

A) call out the collect billing

PSTN calls out to the collect billing of PC and requires several steps. At first, the calling to PSTN to internet gateway must be the collect billing, and call out the collect billing then can be by calling out identical mode by signaling with PC to PC. Must point out that the calling subscriber is based on PSTN, also will comprise if any and call out E.164 address.

B) PSTN is to PSTN

, be in fully under the control of communication common carrier to transmitting the voice compression of speech and the selection of protocol scheme between internet gateway at PSTN. By being provided, the hierarchy compression that provides just can provide the different grades of service. Each grade can have different charges. The calling subscriber will select a credit rating, perhaps be professional by at first dialing different 800 numbers.

(1) domestic destination

Calling party or callee do not need just can be at call establishment on the internet to the directory service registration, the calling subscriber dials a PSTN to the gateway of internet, receive a second diali tone, and come in regulation charging information and the country of destination E.164 address with keypad tone. Also can use 900 business. Directory service (can be independent system, but directory service had dispose PC to the translation function of PSTN dial-out situation) will be used to Call Transfer to an extractor to access a local call-if possible. Record keeping need to be associated the call details of dial-out call for the calling subscriber with inbound calling subscriber's call details.

The problem of coming immediately is that how to process such situation-nearest dial-out unit be a long-distance call to called number result, described in PC to PSTN case. The situation difference degree here is, must notify with speech, must make by button the mandate that long-distance call is transferred to. If long-distance dial-out then can be crossed the internet fully, call out and fully all transmit at PSTN, whether can cost saving and indefinite by the use internet in this situation.

(2) one stage dialing

Problem is to need input destination PSTN number, and need to point out in some way and will arrive the destination by internet rather than traditional long-distance network.

Can pass on this selection criterion by following selection scheme:

1. distribute one to be the new 10xxx number of the internet of communication common carrier.

2. by subscribing

First method allows the calling subscriber to select one by one the internet as long distance carrier with calling out. As default long-distance network, in the second situation, the client just can turn back to traditional long distance network of communication common carrier to second method by the 10xxx code of putting through letter company the internet.

The shortcoming of first method is that the calling subscriber must dial extra five-digit number. Although many people are ready to do like this in order to save money, require extra dialing that professional total number of users is reduced. Second method has been avoided the needs of group extra digit, but requires the client to guarantee mainly to use the internet as its long distance network. The price of this selection is lower, and quality of service is also lower.

In the PSTN situation, might consider the grade of service that provides several prices different at PSTN. The combination that these grades will be measured based on encoding scheme and the institute compression of carrying out (bandwidth), then expense is also lower for the use lower bandwidth.

Notify the desired grade of service, can be with three 10xxx codes. By reservation, certain specific grade is exactly default grade, and other grade of service then will be selected by the 10xxx code.

(3) quality of service

The measurement of quality of service has two principal elements. First is tonequality, namely identifies the ability of calling subscriber's speech; Second is the delay that does not have in PSTN.

About the first point, can say that available now most products can both provide the acceptable calling subscriber level of identification. Yet delay is another problem. PC has stood half second to 2 seconds delay to the pc user. As pointed in foreword, can be with many delays owing to sound card and low speed dial-up access. In the situation of PSTN to the PSTN service, two factors all can be got rid of.

PSTN use in the voice of the Internet gateway DSP will keep compressing and the protocol processes time very low. Speed at PSTN side joint function Access Gateway will be whole 64KPS, approximately also be this speed at the Ethernet of the Internet side, gateway usually all from trunk very close to, so the router on the Ethernet just may be connected to trunk by T3 line. This combination should provide the grade of service with very low delay. Need to carry out certain and cushion to shield variable delay in the trunk, but at home in the communication common carrier trunk, might be controlled within 1/4th seconds.

The Main Differences of quality of service uses relevant speech recognition with being with bandwidth. If required, can use the IETF resource reservation setup protocol (RSVP-Resource reSer Vation setup Protocol) of suggestion to guarantee lower delay variation, but the needs of the complexity that increases RSVP are still waiting to determine. RSVP also remains a problem for the extensibility of extensive IP.

(4) expense

Replace switched telephone to carry out toll message with the internet, in fact whether more inexpensive is an obvious problem. Certainly be to fix a price so now, has but current price reflected bona fide cost? router is certainly cheap than telephone exchange, and the special-purpose 128Kbps than full duplex 64Kbps DSO is cheap certainly for (being actually semiduplex) 10Kbps of IP speech software application. Although these contrasts are arranged, problem still exists.

Although router is cheap more a lot of than telephone exchange, the capacity of router is very low. Build macroreticular with little building block and not only spend height, and reach rapidly income minimizing point. We have seen the Internet backbone because current so many high-end routers and over-burden, and they also will experience the remarkable increase of the traffic that successful IP service will bring. Here will talk two things.

1. current the Internet backbone can not support to follow the remarkable increase of the professional and next traffic of successful IP, and we need to wait for the raising of router technology.

2. the Second Problem that proposes above is the problem that bandwidth is used. 10Kbps half-duplex (many a little when both sides speak occasionally simultaneously, but between the duration of silence just still less) is really much lower than 64Kbps full duplex dedicated capacity. Have should be noted that at 2 about this argument.

At first, bandwidth at least when underground be cheap when also having unnecessary available optical fiber, in case when last root optical fiber was all used, the price of next bit per second was just very expensive. Secondly, the bandwidth of transoceanic route device is more expensive, and we are being compressed to 9.6kbps to speech bandwidth for this reason, and in fact this be equivalent to the 10kbps of IP.

Must why the prices of IP capacity be so lower than POTS? answer is that price difference part is historical relevant with the subsidy of internet. Now, the Internet backbone supplier begins to take steps to solve the cost issues of internet. The essence of this step is to recognize that the internet needs rent is to be paid. This charge has been applicable to the dial user, but generally be suitable for the special-purpose user who connects is not arranged.

If PC catches on to the PC IP, the user can tend to keep for a long time the connection status of they PC. This will make them be in the state of energy receipt of call. This also will improve the retention time in the dialing in the port. This will have great impact to capital and the repetition expense of internet.

(5) charge

Directory service must provide above-mentioned functions, for enough information is collected in the record keeping to service. Can charge to directory service, also can charge, but perhaps can not charge to the duration registration (disposable expense adds monthly fee), call setup. The duration expense has been collected to the internet dial-in customer, and it is to bundle for the user who connects LAN in some way. To the use of internet service charge will soon arrive (as discussed above). It is possible that input and output PSTN section is collected perdurabgility expense.

By adopting special area code, PSTN can be called out and charge by long-distance section. Other is directly kept accounts and selects is that (the two all needs second dialing tone) selected in 900 callings and call card (credit card) record keeping.

Require all calling subscribers (except the input PSTN calling) all to register directory service, the immediately demand that most of collect billings are called out will be eliminated, perhaps, this will not be a large obstacle, because most of users of IP telephone service can both want receipt of call also to want to send calling, and call accepted is the requirement registration. The calling subscriber may have the entry into volume, but does not have name, and these entrys will be with the entry of address E.164. Provide this E.164 the people of address can (from PSTN or from PC) call out the party, as the situation in the current telephone system.

Different voice reproduction quality can be provided with different hierarchy compressions, meanwhile use more or less the transfer resource of internet. Connect to PC for PC, the software kit at two ends can be consulted the amount of bandwidth that will use. This negotiation can obtain conveniently by directory service.

(6) technical problem

Carry out registration, automatically have notice and affirmation ability, coordinate and to be necessary with IP phone distributors. We will also need to increase the ability that service request is communicated. These will comprise the mandate of having called out such as attribute and other collect billing that attribute to be determined is arranged of " even long-distance also dial-out call is accessed PSTN " having stipulated.

Registering with catalogue is the feature of an indispensability, and the below will explain this feature. The DNS model is used for distributed directory service may be convenient to this following requirement. If usefulness is real area code, E.164 the effect of number is with the best then to distribute a puppet to directory entry, if each communication common carrier has area code, that will make the cooperation between the catalog system many easily. Begin to have portable requirement if check numbers, problem obviously complexity is got up.

Arrived and can have a period of time at least in the near future according to the IP phone of preferred embodiment. The combination of communication common carrier grade business on this technical foundation, and the growth of router capacity can cause the internet to occupy very important share in the future in the transmission of long distance communication amount.

If can obtain higher speed from the access of family such as cable modem, will make easier the obtaining of consumption IP phone service of high-quality. The increase video then can further improve the demand to business.

More common but what is interesting is facsimile service on the internet, this and voice service discussed above are closely similar, and the timing problems relevant with facsimile protocol makes this business more difficult in some place.

Adopt digital bridge in the internet to hold a meeting to make speech and Video service more attractive. This can accomplish by utilizing the multichannel of developing in Internet Forum to propagate (multi-casting) technology. Propagate to provide this class professional with multichannel, expense will reduce.

C. IP is professional

Fig. 1 C is the block diagram according to an internet telephone system of preferred embodiment. When a side dialed a telephone number, phone 200 was used for starting a calling by off-hook (going off hook), at this moment processed beginning. Phone 200 generally is that the two-wire user loop by routine connects, the voice signal of simulation can be in this loop two-way admittance. The general skilled person of this area knows that phone can pass through optical fiber, ISDN or other device and connect, and these do not depart from thought of the present invention. Alternative dispensing means is that people also can dial phone number from computer 210, paging system, video conference system or other system that can make a phone call. Calling enters LEC local exchange carrier (LEC) 220, and the latter is another title of regional bell operating company (RBOC) central exchange office. Calling is positioned at the LEC termination such as the public commercial circuit of the lease of the switched communication company of MCI (CBL) 230. The result who terminates to CBL is that MCI switch 221 receives an off-hook (off hook) indication.

Switch 221 these off-hooks of response start the request of a DAL hot line process to network control system (NCS), and the latter is also referred to as data access point (DAP) 240. Switch 221 has been done simplification in the drawings, only shows that it moves at a single DS1 circuit, but should be understood that and the call route selecting on thousands of individual user's circuits can be arrived at the final destination by this switch. DAP240 returns a Route Selection to ingress switch 221 and replys, and indication switch 221 arrives switch 230 or 231 with call route selecting. The Route Selection of calling out is carried out by DAP240, the latter converts transaction information to specific switch ID (SWID) and a specific termination relaying group (TTG), and TTG is the required route of leaving the MCI network of switch 230 or 231-corresponding to arriving in suitable destination-this example. The embodiment of another hybrid network access accesses facility with the internet and is fused in the switch 232. This integrated solution makes switch 232 can directly be attached to Internet 2 95, has reduced network and has been connected required network port quantity with Internet 2 95. DAP sends to ingress switch 221 with this response message, and original call is routed to correct termination switch 230 or 231. Then termination switch 230 or 231 seeks correct termination relaying group (TTG) by the indication that original DAP replys, and according to the routing information of DAP240 call route selecting is arrived ISN250 or directly arrives modem bank 270. If the destination of calling out is Intelligent Service network (ISN) 250, then DAP240 will indicate switch in switch 230 terminations.

According to the analysis to the number of dialing numeral, ISN arrives audio acknowledgement unit (ARU) 252 with call route selecting. ARU252 distinguishes speech, fax and modem call, if call out from modem, then calls out and is routed to modem bank 271, and connection is that authentication server 291 comes authentication of users. Be verified if call out, then call out and be for further processing and finally be delivered to computer or other can process the equipment of media to basic Internet Protocol platform (BIPP) 295 by UDP/IP or 281 one-tenth other media communication forwarded of TCP/IP LAN.

If calling out is speech, ARU just points out the calling subscriber that card number and terminal number are provided. Card number is confirmed database identification by card. Suppose that card number is effective, if then terminal number is in U.S.'s (domestic), then calls out just to be routed and select current MCI voice lines. If terminal number is international, then call out and be routed to coding decoder 260, the latter becomes voice conversion TCP/IP or UDP/IP and it is sent to Internet 2 95 by LAN 280. Calling is routed to be selected by being positioned at the gateway of terminating end, finally arrives certain phone or other can process the equipment of phone.

Fig. 1 D is the block diagram according to a kind of hybrid switching machine of preferred embodiment. Keep reference numerals among Fig. 1 C among the figure, increased an extra square frame 233. Frame 233 contains and is useful on the jockey that switch is directly connected to internet or other communicator. The detailed content of this jockey is showed in Fig. 1 E. The main distinction of the switch among the hybrid switching machine of Fig. 1 D and Fig. 1 C is that switch 221 can directly be attached to Internet 2 95.

Fig. 1 E is the block diagram of the jockey 233 that represents in Fig. 1 D according to preferred embodiment. Messaging bus 234 is connected to

internal network

236 and 237 with switch architecture. Internal network receives again the input that connects (DTC) 238 and 239 from dynamic telephone, and DTC provides multichannel to separate (demuxing) from a plurality of DSI circuits 242,243,244 with 245 signal for starting again. Preamble illustrated that the DS1 circuit referred to the conventional bit format on the T1 line.

In order to adapt to quick and various phone/media environment, the preferred embodiment switch independent for another internal network 237 has used connects. Adopt a spectrum peripheral module (Spectrum Peripheral Module-SPM) 247 to process from the array of switches 248,249,251,254 that shares, phone/media signal that 261-268 receives. The array of switches that shares is managed with the switch order by control circuit by SPM247. SPM 247 and service supplier's call processing system communication, call processing system can determine which circuit requires the hybrid switching of any type to process. For example, the tone of facsimile transmission generation identifies this and is transmitted as numerical data rather than digitized speech. When detecting digital data transfer, call processing system allows this specific incoming line be connected to a corresponding line with suitable treatment characteristic by the array of switches that shares with regard to the indicating call circuit. Therefore for example, an Internet connection will be connected to TCP/IP modem line 268 to guarantee that signal is suitably processed first, is sent to the ingress switch 221 of Fig. 1 D by messaging bus 234 through internal network 237 again.

The switch matrix that shares also adapts to current communication protocol and the in the future flexibility of communication protocol for switch provides except making things convenient for switch to the direct connection of internet. Echo Cancellation device 261 is installed in the switch effectively in the mode that allows Echo Cancellation as required. The relatively less echo canceller of quantity can the relatively large indivedual transmission lines of quantity of service. The array of switches that shares can be configured to dynamically will access the side transmission or the network side transmission route is chosen other professional treatment that OC3 demux, DSP processed or be derived from the switch either direction.

In addition, preferred embodiment as shown in Fig. 1 E provides extra system effectiveness, such as combination multiplexer level in the port device of a speech or data circuit switching equipment one side, in order to fiber optic cables can be directly connected to the output of the multiplexing of port device. In addition, by the upper available alternate routing of CEM248/249 and RM251/254 redundancy is built into and thinks in the switch that attached various COM1 replaces path.

When the switch 221 of Fig. 1 D was connected to Internet 2 95, processing provided as follows. Link tester ovennodulation demodulator port 268 from Internet 2 95 enters switch, and enter shared array of switches, after having carried out therein multichannel decomposition and other necessary operation, information exchange is crossed internal network 237 and messaging bus 234 is sent to switch 221, the ancillary equipment that module 261-268 satisfies various communication procedures for connection provides plug-and-play feature.

Fig. 1 F is the block diagram of mixing (internet-phone) switch according to preferred embodiment. TCP/IP on hybrid switching machine 221 and the Internet 2 95 or the circuit on the UDP/IP port translation public switch telephone network (PSTN) 256. The composition of hybrid switching machine 221 is PSTN network interface (247,260), high-speed Internet network interface (271,272,274), set of number signal processor (DSP) (259,263), time division multiplex bus 262 and high speed data bus 275.

Mixing IP switch 221 is products that router topology combines with circuit-switched architecture. The calling that arrives PSTN interface 257 is that the signaling with ＩＳＤＮUser Part (ISUP) starts, and with an initial address message (IAM), includes callee's number and optional caller rs number. PSTN interface 257 is transferred to host's processor 270 with IAM. Host's processor 270 checks PSTN network interface, callee's number and other IAM parameter of originating end, and selects a network interface of going out for calling out. The go out selection of network interface is made according to routing table, and the Route Selection instruction is asked at the external business control point (SCP) 276 that switch 221 also can be inquired about on the internet. No matter local on switch 221 Route Selection instruction-derived or derived from SCP276, and a subnet that can be used for arriving specific destination defines.

The same with router, each network interface in the switch 221 comes mark with a subnet address. Internet Protocol (IP) address contain computer bit in the address of subnet. The PSTN address does not contain the IP subnet address, so subnet is switched to PSTN area code and exchange. The method that switch 221 is chosen the route of IP address and PSTN address is to select an energy grouping to be taken to the interface of the subnet of nearer destination subnet or local switch.

Calling can be gone out from switch by another PSTN interface 258, perhaps can be by high-speed Internet interface 273 this switch of going out. If call out by PSTN interface 258 switch of going out, then call out and can be used as Standard PC M audio call and go out, or can be used as the modem call of carrying compression digital audio frequency and this switch of going out.

If call out as the Standard PC M audio call switch 221 of going out, this pcm audio just is transformed into PSTN interface 258 with TDM bus 260 from PSTN interface 257. Similarly, with TDM bus 260 pcm audio is transformed into PSTN interface 257 from PSTN interface 258.

If call out as the modem call of carrying compression digital audio frequency and leave switch 221, switch 221 can start an extroversion by 258 to PSTN numbers of PSTN interface to be called out, and on TDM bus 260 an attached DSP resource 259 that plays the modem effect. In case set up the session with the modem of destination, just the input pcm audio on the PSTN257 can be attached to the DSP resource 263 as audio codec, audio frequency is compressed. The example of audio format has ITU.729 and G.723. The audio frequency of compression is grouped in peer-peer protocol (PPP) grouping on the DSP263, and is transferred to DSP259 and is used for modem transmission on the PSTN interface 258.

If call out and leave switch 272 at high-speed Internet interface 272, switch 272 just connects PSTN interface 257 and DSP resource 263 as audio codec, with the compression pcm audio, and audio packet become for the UDP/IP grouping of transmitting at internet network. This UDP/IP grouping is transferred to high-speed Internet network interface 272 from DSP resource 263 through high speed data bus 275.

Fig. 1 G is the block diagram that expression mixes the software process that relates in the IP switch 221. The grouping that receives at internet network interface 296 is transferred to packet classifiers 293. Packet classifiers 293 judges that this grouping is standard I P grouping or the part of routing protocol (ARP, RARP, RIP, OSPF, BGP, CIDR) or management agreement (ICMP). Route Selection demons 294 are given in Route Selection and management agreement grouping. Route Selection demons 294 keep routing table for packet classifiers 293 and packet scheduler 298. Be classified as the grouping of standard I P grouping or be transferred to burster/depacketizer 292, or be transferred to packet scheduler 298. The grouping that converts pcm audio to is transferred to burster/depacketizer 292. Burster/depacketizer is extracted packet content and is given codec 291, and the latter converts compressed audio to pcm audio, then pcm audio is transferred to PSTN interface 290.

The standard I P grouping of mailing to other internet equipment is grouped grader 293 and gives packet scheduler 298, and the latter is minute group selection network interface of going out according to routing table. Grouping is placed in the outside packet queue of the selected network interface of going out, and then grouping is transferred to express network interface 296 for delivering at Internet 2 95.

D. call treatment

This section is described to call out and how to be processed in above-mentioned network context.

1.VNET call treatment

Figure 10 A represents a PSN Public Switching Network (PSTN) 1000, it comprises a Local Exchange (LEC) 1020, and the calling party includes a plurality of MCI switches 1011,1010 exchange network by LEC with 1030 accesses of phone 1021 or computer. The directory service of Route Selection call and out of Memory be by public branch exchange 1041,1040 and PSTN between the directory service 1031 shared provide.

This sight collection allows user to send or receive the VNET calling with PC, phone or the two, and in this business, the user can have following equipment:

Use the phone of VNET Route Selection can in the MCI network, obtain now. In this case, it is auxiliary lower Route Selection at DAP that the VNET that utilizes user's VNET number to arrive MCI PSTN network calls out, as them now the mode of Route Selection.

PC with internet telephony capability. The come in and go out calling of this PC is in the internet of the logging status of following the tracks of VNET user and current IP address or the auxiliary lower Route Selection of in-house network directory service.

Receive and send calling with a PC and a phone. In this case, will contain in user profile and can allow DAP and directory service determine to be to PC or send the information of incoming call to phone. For example, the user may always want that logining relief at them calls out the PC that arrives them, arrives their phone At All Other Times at all. Perhaps, they can wish that their calling always arrives their PC within normal working hours, at the phone that arrives At All Other Times them. This class subtend phone or the control that sends the decision of incoming call to PC can be controlled by the user.

Following situations is suitable for this type of service.

1.PC call out to PC, wherein will be to the position of directory service inquiry terminal PC.

Be connected to the PC of in-house network as transmission mechanism with in-house network.

Two PC that link to each other with company intranet by dial-up access.

Independently pass through two PC of Internet connection on the in-house network.

Two PC by dial-up connection on the internet.

A PC is directly connected to company intranet, and another PC is with being dial-up connection to the internet.

A PC is with being dial-up connection to company intranet, and another PC is with being dial-up connection to the internet.

Two PC that on in-house network independently, connect by PSTN.

One or two is connected to the PC of company intranet with dial-up access.

One or two is connected to the PC of ISP.

One or two is as the ITG of unit in the net.

2.PC to call, wherein will search directory service and determine that terminal VNET is a phone. Then PC contacts to calling of terminal phone access with the IP gateway.

Use the PC of a special I TG who is connected with PSTN on the in-house network, wherein ITG is as the unit of going out of NE. The destination phone links to each other with PBX.

PC also can must be by the public ITG of internet access with one.

PC can link to each other with company intranet with dial-up access.

Use the PC of a special I TG who is connected with PSTN on the in-house network, wherein unit in the ITG effect network. The destination phone links to each other with PSTN.

PC also can use one must be by the public ITG of internet access.

PC can link to each other with company intranet with dial-up access.

Use special I TG to be connected to PC on the in-house network of PSTN, with ITG as unit in the network. The destination phone is connected to this PSTN.

This PC also can adopt must be by the public ITG of internet access.

PC can be connected with company intranet with dial-up access.

ITG can be unit in the net.

Use the PC of a special I TG who is connected with PBX on the in-house network, wherein communication is transmitted at in-house network.

PC is positioned at the website different from the destination phone, business in the internet or in-house network transmit.

PC can use the dial-up connection of company intranet.

3. phone is called out to PC, and wherein DAP or PBX impel Route Selection marking terminal IP address and the ITG of the Internet directories service for calling out. Call out and then be routed to ITG by PSTN, set up a connection from ITG to destination PC.

Possible variation:

Identical to the variation of phone with PC.

4. phone is to call, and wherein DAP or PBX must the query directory service determine that this calling should end in user's phone or PC. Possible variation:

Two phones are all on PBX;

A phone is on PBX, and another phone is on PSTN;

Two phones are all on PSTN.

For these variations each, DAP and directory service can be single entities, perhaps can be independent entities. Directory service can be service-specific, perhaps can be share service. Describe to discuss each situation below in conjunction with a call-flow according to preferred embodiment. In order to help the understanding to embodiment, the below has listed the description of the module unit related with each call flow diagram (block element).

2. module unit is described

The unit	Describe
The unit	Describe	Ph1	Be connected to the traditional analog phone of LEC local exchange carrier (LEC). For the needs of these VNET situations, this phone can carry out VNET calling, local call or DDD and call out. In some situation, what VNET accessed finishes and can dial 700 numbers by the user, and last 7 bit digital are destination VNET number that calls out. LEC will know that this number is to engage past MCI, just arrives the MCI switch with this call route selecting. The MCI switch is peeled off " 700 ", carries out an ANI and searches identifying user ID, then carries out the VNET Route Selection with VNET number with ID. The user dials a 800 number, is prompted to input SSN (or other exclusive sign) and VNET number. Switch sends this information to the DAP that carries out the VNET conversion.
PC1 PC2	Can dial in the Internet service provider or company intranet to send or the PC of receiving internet call. Following cut-in method can be used for this PC. The PC of ISP dials a 800 number related with this service supplier (or any other dial plan), is routed to this supplier's modem bank by the standard Route Selection. Then the user of PC is connected to the internet by the standard login process. Company intranet PC dials a 800 number (or any other dial plan) related with the said firm in-house network, chooses the modem bank of this in-house network by the standard Route Selection. Then the user of PC is connected to this in-house network by the standard login process.	Ph1
PC1 PC2		LEC SF1	The switching fabric of LEC local exchange carrier. This structure provides being connected between the telephone network of Ph1/PC1/PC2 and MCI. It also provides this locality access to client PBX.

MCI SF1 MCI SF2	The switching fabric of MCI (or being open purpose, telephone service provider). These SF can carry out traditional exchange capacity for the network of MCI. They can utilize the routing capability of the advanced person among the NCS (network control system) such as MCI.
MCI SF1 MCI SF2		NCS	NCS provides the Route Selection service of enhancing for MCI. Some products of supporting on this platform are: 800, EVS, general freephone, add freephone, the inbound world, SAC (ISAC) code, charges paid 800,8xx/Vnet and meet with my Conference Calling, 900,700, PCS, Vnet, long-range access Vnet, Vnet Phone Home, CVNS, Vnet card, MCI card (950 card), credit card and GETS card. In order to support existing VNET service, DAP provides the private dialup projected capacity to come VPN to them to VNET user. DAP supports digital translation, the shielding of starting, supplemental code shielding, 800 long-range accesses and the specific characteristic that some are redirected such as the calling network for this business. In order to support these calling sights herein, NCS also can inquire about directory service, in order to call route selecting is arrived PC.

Dir Svc1 Dir Svc2	The Internet directories service. The Internet directories service execution: call route selecting-when calling out to the user with the IP service from MCI, must the query directory service could determine where calling should terminate. This can be according to carrying out such as following factor :-user's logging status;-identifying user is pc user or just telephone subscriber's service reservation;-better Route Selection is selected, such as " if I login, then always being routed to my PC ", perhaps " working day is 5 PC that are routed to me of 8 points-afternoon early, arrive At All Other Times phone " etc. User profile management-directory service is necessary for that each user keeps a profile so that can be with VNET number service reservation and the current state coupling with the user. Service authorization-when the user was connected to IP telephone service with its PC, they must obtain using professional mandate, can obtain security token or key and guarantee to be linked into this business. The type of the business that this mandate responsibility also may can access the user applies restriction, perhaps introduces the ability that the scope privilege is come limited subscriber access particular call type.
Dir Svc1 Dir Svc2		ITG1 ITG2	IP gateway-IP gateway provides a paths, and voice call is connected between IP network and traditional telephone network by this paths. In order to carry out the voice call from the IP network to PSTN, set up and being connected of ITG with a PC software kit, request ITG represents the pc user and transfers at PSTN. In case ITG is connected to the destination number by voice network, ITG just provides the service that the IP packet voice is transformed into the upper speech of PSTN from PC. Similarly, ITG will extract speech and convert thereof into speech for the IP packetizing of PC from PSTN. In order to carry out the voice call from PSTN to the IP network, calling will be routed to ITG by PSTN Route Selection mechanism. In case call out to arrive, ITG is with regard to the IP address, destination of identifying call letters, sets up an IP phone speech channel with this destination. In case connect and to set up, ITG just provides the service of changing between the speech of IP packetizing and the PCM speech.

ITG3 ITG4	These ITG play the similar function with the ITG that is connected PSTN, but these ITG also provide being connected between company intranet and the PBX.
ITG3 ITG4		IAD1 IAD2	The internet access device provides the access of the general dialing internet from the subscriber phone to the internet. The method of this connection internet can be used for IP, but also can just be used for the internet access. When this equipment was used for IP, its characteristic was different from ITG. Although IAD links to each other with PSTN, also non-voice in the information that this interface transmits, but the IP packet. With regard to the phone on the IAD, the IP packet by chance is speech packet, but IAD can't see the inner content of these groupings, can not distinguish speech packet and packet. IAD can be counted as a modem bank that the internet access is provided.
PBX1 PBX2	PBX-this user who provides the connection between the phone of same geographic location locates equipment. PBX also provides a kind of method of going out to call out of sending from this position to PSTN to these phones. Most of PBX have the connection to LEC, supply to carry out local call, and the DAL to another service supplier is arranged, for carrying out the calling of VNET type. These PBX also show one to the connection of directory service, are used for the assisted call Route Selection. This ability does not exist in PBX now, but in the VNET of presents call-flow, has shown reciprocation possible between PBX and the directory service. These PBX have also shown and being connected of ITG. These ITG provide the bridge service between user's in-house network and the PBX traditional voice ability.	IAD1 IAD2
PBX1 PBX2		Ph11 Ph12 Ph21 Ph22	These are phones that traditional PBX connects.
PC11 PC12 PC21 PC22	These are that the user who is connected to user's in-house network locates PC. With regard to these call-flow, PC has and allows the user to send or the in-house network phone software of receipt of call.	Ph11 Ph12 Ph21 Ph22	These are phones that traditional PBX connects.

E. reusable call-flow frame

1.VNET PC is connected to company intranet and signs in to directory service

1.PC the user their computer is connected to IP network, open computer and start the IP phone software kit. Software kit sends a message to directory service, in order to computer is registered as " online ", can be used for receipt of call. For safety, this online registration message is sent to directory service with the form of encrypting most probably. Encryption will be based on a public key of sharing between PC and directory service. This message contains following message:

Can be used to certain computer identity of this computer of addressing or VPN number. In this VNET situation, this is VNET number that distributes for the individual who uses this PC. This information will be for the user profile of sign with this user-association. It also can be certain sign that directory service can be related with the VNET user profile with it, such as name, employee ID or any exclusive ID.

Password or other certain mechanism that the user who is used for that VNET is identified verifies.

Sign just is being used to the IP address with the port of computer and network connection. This address will be used for be set up and being connected of this computer by other IP phone software kit.

This message can contain the extraneous information relevant for configuration/function of the detail specifications of the software kit that is just using for IP phone and software or PC. For example, for caller PC, understand that the type of the compression algorithm using or software or hardware may affect that other user is connected with them or during connecting other ability of the ability of use special feature, may be important.

Implement the position that (data distribution implementation) determines to receive the directory service of being somebody's turn to do " online " message by this user's data allocations. In some cases, this may be to subscribe the company of VNET business or the private database of tissue, in other cases, and all users' that this may certain service supplier (MCI) country or world data bank. This position is to dispose in the phone software bag that PC moves.

2. when directory service received this message from PC, it will confirm the user, and method is to consult user profile with this VNET number, and the password in the user profile and the password that receives are compared. In a single day the user is identified, and directory service is just upgraded this VNET number (or other exclusive ID) associated profile clauses and subclauses, is " online " with the expression user, is positioned at this assigned ip address. Directory service also will be used in the configuration data that sends during the logging request and upgrade profile. After successfully upgrading profile, replying that expression message is received and obtain processing beamed back in directory service to this assigned ip address. This response message also may contain the safety of certain key to guarantee to communicate by letter with directory service when sending other order. When PC has received this response message, just select to notify the user by visual or audible indicator.

The variation of online registration

In the online enrollment process of PC that the call-flow section that this section shows in early time shows, PC just sends a password to directory service and just can login. Following call-flow section is a kind of variation of this login process, and wherein directory service proposes a difficult problem, and the pc user must answer this difficult problem just can finish logging program. This variation of logging program does not all have in any call-flow to occur in presents, but can both use in any one at them.

1.PC the user their computer is connected to IP network, open computer and start the IP phone software kit. Software kit sends a message to directory service, in order to computer is registered as " online ", can be used for receipt of call. For safety, this online registration message is sent to LIST SERVER with the form of encrypting most probably. Encryption will be based on a public key of sharing between PC and LIST SERVER. This message contains following message:

Can be used to certain computer identity of this computer of addressing or VPN number. In this VNET situation, this is VNET number that distributes for the individual who uses this PC. This information will be for the client profile of sign with this user-association. It also can be certain sign that directory service can be related with the VNET user profile with it, such as name, employee ID or any exclusive ID.

This message can contain the extraneous information relevant for configuration/ability of the detail specifications of the software kit that is just using for IP phone and software or PC. For example, for caller PC, understand that the type of the compression algorithm using or software or hardware may affect that other user is connected with them or during connecting other ability of the ability of use specific characteristic, may be important.

Implemented to determine to receive the position of the directory service of being somebody's turn to do " online " message by this user's data allocations. In some cases, this may be to subscribe the company of VNET service or the private database of tissue, and in other situation, this may be all clients' of certain service supplier (MCI) country or world data bank. This position is to dispose in the phone software bag that PC moves.

2. in this situation, PC does not provide password in initial registration message. This is because directory service is adopted is a difficult problem/reply enrollment process. In this case, directory service will be adopted the difficult problem that a shared key design will propose to PC.

3.PC receive this difficult problem and with its expression to the pc user. The pc user calculates the replying an of difficult problem with this shared key, then will reply and send it back directory service.

4. when directory service received this and replys from PC, it just confirmed the user. In a single day the user is identified, and directory service is just upgraded this VNET number (or other exclusive ID) associated profile clauses and subclauses, is " online " with the expression user, and is positioned at this assigned ip address. Directory service also will be used in the configuration data that sends during the logging request and upgrade profile. After successfully upgrading profile, replying that expression message is received and obtain processing beamed back in directory service to this assigned ip address. This response message also may contain the safety of certain key to guarantee to communicate by letter with directory service when sending other order. When PC has received this response message, just select to notify the user by visual or audible indicator.

2.VNET PC is to directory service inquiry VNET conversion

1.PC with the Internet phone software bag attempt to be connected to one VNET number. In order to set up this connection, the pc user dials (perhaps such as name, employee ID etc. other exclusive ID) this VNET number. After the phone software bag determines that this calling is the calling of a VNET type, just send a conversion request to directory service. This conversion request will comprise following information at least:

Send the IP address of the computer of this request.

Send VNET number of PC of this request.

The VNET of the computer that dials number (or other ID).

The configuration of asking for connection. For example, caller PC may want with blank (white-board) function in the phone software kit, and may wish this function on the affirmation destination PC before connecting. If VNET number is not transformed into PC, this configuration information may not can provide any benefit, but the user can not just know when sending this request and will be transformed into PC or phone this VNET number.

2. when directory service receives this information, it determines VNET number (or other ID) related user whether " online " with VNET number (or other ID), and the IP address of the sign position that can contact with computer. This directory service also can contain and utilize the features such as time Route Selection, week Route Selection, ANSI shielding.

If be transformed into " online " PC for VNET number, configuration information available in the configuration information during directory service is just asked this and the profile of destination PC compares. Return when replying to conversion request from the PC that starts when directory service, this is replied and will comprise:

" online " IP address of destination PC registration. This is that the PC that starts can be used for contacting the IP address of destination PC.

The configuration information of ability of expression destination PC, may be also relevant for start and destination PC between which ability be compatible certain information.

If be transformed into for VNET number one must by PSTN dial number, the response message of then issuing PC will contain following content:

-be used in the IP address that obtains the IP gateway of this calling on the PSTN of MCI. Can select this gateway according to many selection algorithms. Related between calling subscriber and the ITG that will use is to decide according to the information in the profile contained in the directory service.

-dial to connect VNET number of destination phone by ITG. With regard to this call-flow, this is VNET number of destination phone. This allows to call out and uses the existing VNET that is provided by DAP to change and routing mechanism.

If be transformed into a phone that can arrive by the special I TG that is connected with user PBX for VNET number, then directory service will be returned following content:

-with VNET number of the ITG gateway that is connected of PBX of this destination phone of service. Relatedly being determined by directory service between destination phone and the ITG that is connected to its service PBX.

-provide VNET number that ITG will dial when calling out to PBX. In most cases, this is an extension.

3.PC be connected to ITG

1.PC send " connection " message with its Internet phone software bag to ITG. This IP address is generally returned from directory service for response VNET conversion. The specific format of this message and content depend on the software that sends message or receive the ITG software of this message. This message can contain the user's who represents PC information, perhaps can contain the information of the regulation parameter related with ask connection.

2.ITG reply to respond this connection message of this message response by what represent to receive calling with one. Call out ITG for PC, may not need the step of this call setup, but this paper show here, purpose be keep one consistent, depend on the call establishment that PC links to each other with ITG or another PC. When linking to each other with PC, the step of this process allows caller PC to know that destination PC is just in ring.

3.ITG accept this calling.

4.ITG and set up a speech path between the PC.

4.ITG be connected to PC

1.ITG send " connection " message with its phone software to PC. ITG must know the IP address of the PC that it is connecting. The specific format of this message and content depend on the ITG software that sends message or the PC software that receives this message. It is the information that provides from ITG that this message can contain this calling of sign, perhaps can contain the information of the configuration that is defined as this calling and asks (namely only voice call).

2. the message of step 1 is received by PC, provides the message of calling to confirm the reception of this message to the pc user by beam back an expression PC to ITG.

3.PC user's answer calls is beamed back an expression to the PC that starts and is called out received message.

4.ITG and set up a speech path between the PC.

5.VNET PC describes to the PC call-flow

The user of PC12 1051 is connected to IP (IP) network 1071 with computer, opens computer and starts IP phone software protocol system. Systems soft ware sends a message to directory service 1031, in order to computer is registered as " online ", can be used for receipt of call. This message contains sign and just is being used for this computer is connected to the connection IP address of network. This address can be used for be set up and being connected of this computer by other IP phone software kit. This address comprises the computer identity that can be used to this computer 1051 of addressing or VPN number. In this VNET situation, the address is VNET number that distributes for the individual who uses PC. VNET refers to a kind of virtual network, wherein supports the particular telephone number collection as the dedicated network of the number of energy switched call. Many companies are current for calling out the call duration time of buying as on the main line of private communication channel between access and acquiring company. The address also can be certain sign such as name, employee ID or any other exclusive ID.

This message can contain the detail specifications of other relevant systems soft ware that is used for the PC11 1051 that IP phone uses or the information of hardware configuration. For example, for caller PC, knowing that type just supported and movable compression algorithm in current communication or software or hardware may affect other ability of using the ability of special feature during other user connects or connecting, may be important.

6. be the IP gateway server on the internet

The Internet client select to determine optimal selection

Figure 10 B represents an internet route selective network according to preferred embodiment. If the client computer on the internet 1080 need to be connected to IP gateway 1084, according to the needs of client computer, to the ideal chose of gateway nothing more than two classes are arranged:

If client computer 1080 need to be received call regular pstn telephone, and determine that use PSTN network ratio use internet network is more cheap or quality is higher, then optimal selection is to select one to allow client computer from accessing the PSTN network with point of point of presence " nearest ". This is so-called for head end takes off (HEHO-Head-End Hop-Off), and wherein " head end " or " near-end " of client computer in the internet flies away from (hop off) internet.

If client computer 1080 need to be received call regular pstn telephone, and it is more expensive than using internet network determine to use the PSTN network, and then optimal selection is to select one to allow client computer to access the PSTN network from a nearest point of internet and destination phone. This is so-called for tail end takes off (TEHO-Tail-End Hop-Off), and wherein " tail end " or " far-end " of client computer in the internet flies away from (hop off) internet.

A) head end takeoff method

(1) client computer table tennis (ping) method

The method is by obtaining the tabulation of candidate's IP gateway address, by each address of table tennis, for the head end IP gateway that takes off is selected the optimal selection scheme, according to router jump stand-by period and the quantity of section, determines the optimal selection scheme.

The 1080 query directory services 1082 of client computer obtain the tabulation of IP gateway.

The gateway database is searched in directory service 1082, and the list of gateways that provides to client computer as the candidate is provided. Select the standard of candidate gateways to comprise:

The last gateway of selecting of.

is in IPv4 matching addresses 1,2 or 3 eight hytes.

The upper client computer access point of (if known).

selects at least one gateway (if feasible) from all main gateway websites.

directory service 1082 is returned row " n " individual candidate IP address to client computer 1080 in TCP/IP message.

client computer 1080 side by side sends the message of an Echo pattern to each candidate's IP gateway 1084,1081,1086 with the IP table tennis. The table tennis order will remove to obtain traceroute with " r " options.

is according to the table tennis result of each IP gateway, and client computer 1080 will be by be ranked table tennis result's order of following method:

If table tennis traceroute shows have any IP gateway just can be accessed without intermediate router by client computer 1080, then these IP gateways are listed in the front.

All the other IP gateways of are according to the order queuing of the minimum stand-by period that comes and goes the table tennis result.

Employing is in conjunction with the client computer table tennis method of above-mentioned sampling network topology, and client computer 1080 is wanted the IP list of gateways of table tennis to directory service 1082 inquiries. Directory service 1082 return-lists:

166.37.61.117

166.25.27.101

166.37.27.205

Client computer 1080 sends following three orders simultaneously:

ping 166.37.61.117-r1

ping 166.25.27.101-r1

ping 166.37.27.205-r1

The result of table tennis order is as follows:

Data table tennis 166.37.61.117 with 32 bytes:

Answer from 166.37.61.117: byte=32 times=3ms TTL=30

Route: 166.37.61.101

Answer from 166.37.61.117: byte=32 times=2ms TTL=30

Route: 166.37.61.101

Answer from 166.37.61.117: byte=32 times=2ms TTL=31

Route: 166.37.61.101

Answer from 166.37.61.117: byte=32 times=2ms TTL=30

Route: 166.37.61.101

Data table tennis 166.25.27.101 with 32 bytes:

Answer from 166.25.27.101: byte=32 times=14ms TTL=30

Route: 166.37.61.101

Answer from 166.25.27.101: byte=32 times=2ms TTL=30

Route: 166.37.61.101

Answer from 166.25.27.101: byte=32 times=3ms TTL=31

Route: 166.37.61.101

Answer from 166.25.27.101: byte=32 times=4ms TTL=30

Route: 166.37.61.101

Data table tennis 166.37.27.205 with 32 bytes:

Answer from 166.37.27.205: byte=32 times=1ms TTL=126

Route: 166.37.27.205

Answer from 166.37.27.205: byte=32 times=1ms TTL=126

Route: 166.37.27.205

Answer from 166.37.27.205: byte=32 times=1ms TTL=126

Route: 166.37.27.205

Answer from 166.37.27.205: byte=32 times=1ms TTL=126

Route: 166.37.27.205

Do not experience router (route and table tennis address identical) owing to be brought to the 166.37.27.205 route, so be the first place with this address column. Remaining IP gateway address is by the average latency ranking. The best ranking of result's IP gateway address is:

166.37.27.205

166.37.61.117

166.25.27.101

First-selected gateway is the gateway that most probable provides high-quality service, because it is positioned on the identical LAN. This gateway will be first gateway of attempting to use of user.

(2) access device location method

Should determine for the IP gateway method of the most suitable selection, the combined method that is above-mentioned client computer table tennis method and understanding client computer 1080 from where entering the Internet of employing. This method is fit to the client computer by dial-up access equipment access internet.

Client computer 1080 dials the internet access device. Access device is answered this calling and is play modem tones. Then, client computer and access device are set up a PPP speech channel. User on the client computer is verified (the user name/password prompting is confirmed by authentication server). The user by checking after, access device just can be automatically for the user who verified upgrades user profile in the directory service, store following message:

" user name " " coding of account " " the online mark that clocks " " access device station code "

After, when client computer requires by the IP gateway accessing, the optimal selection that it is determined the IP gateway with regard to query directory service 1082. If find to have the access device station code in the user profile in directory service, directory service 1082 just selects to be positioned at the IP gateway 1084,1081 and 1086 of same site code, and the IP address is returned to client computer 1080. If do not have available IP gateway 1084,1081 and 1086 at the website identical with the access device station code, then to select next optimal selection scheme according to the network topological diagram that keeps in the directory service.

If do not find the access device station code in directory service 1082, illustrate that client computer 1080 once crossed network by the equipment access that certain can not upgrade directory service 1082. In this case, just locate best IP gateway 1084 for usefulness with above-mentioned client computer table tennis method.

(3) user profile method

Another method of selecting IP gateway 1084,1081 and 1086 is to select the required information of gateway to embed in the user profile of storing on the LIST SERVER. Adopt this method, the user must carry out a Internet phone software bag in client computer. When software kit is carried out for the first time, collect register information from the user, comprise name, e-mail address, IP address (for stationary computer), station code, coding of account, common point of presence, and other relevant information. After the user inputted these information, software kit just stored information in the user profile on the LIST SERVER.

When the user started the Internet phone software bag, user's IP address was just upgraded automatically in directory service. This cries and automatically has notice. After, when the user needed the IP gateway service, the user was with regard to the query directory service, the IP gateway that searching will be used. User's IP address and user's common website and Network Access Point are known in directory service. Directory service can add all IP gateways 1084,1081 and 1086 network with this information, selects best IP gateway for client computer.

(4) gateway table tennis method

Select the last method of optimal selection scheme to be for the head end IP gateway that takes off, obtain the tabulation of candidate's IP gateway address, by each address of table tennis, with regard to router jump stand-by period and the quantity of section, determine the optimal selection scheme. Process is as follows:

The service of client computer query directory is to obtain the IP gateway of optimal selection.

The gateway database is searched in the directory service, and the list of gateways that provides to client computer as the candidate is provided. Select the standard of candidate gateways to comprise:

The last gateway of selecting of.

is in IPv4 matching addresses 1,2 or 3 eight hytes.

The upper client computer access point of (if known).

selects at least one gateway (if feasible) from all main gateway websites.

The catalogue sends message to each candidate gateways, indicates each gateway to go to the IP address of table tennis client computer.

Each candidate's IP gateway of is ping ordered the message that sends an Echo pattern to client computer with IP simultaneously. The table tennis order will remove to obtain traceroute with " r " options. The table tennis result turns back to directory service from each candidate gateways.

is according to the table tennis result of each IP gateway, and directory service will be by be ranked table tennis result's order of following method:

If table tennis traceroute shows have any IP gateway just can be accessed without intermediate router by client computer, then these IP gateways are listed in the front.

Client computer table tennis method and gateway table tennis method can replace the table tennis program with traceroute, determine the optimal selection scheme for head end jumps out of gateway.

B) tail end takeoff method

Tail end takes off and will select a gateway of internet to go out a little as one, and it is a little nearest from termination PSTN position as much as possible to go out. Higher PSTN call rate is avoided in general hope. Available internet is regional with the local call that packetized voice is transferred to the destination telephone number, and the conversation of here carrying out on the PSTN can be paid lower local rate.

(1) gateway registration

A method of the tail end service of taking off is to allow IP gateway 1084,1081 and 1086 register to directory service. Each IP gateway will have a profile in directory service, enumerate the calling area of its service. These areas can be enumerated with the method that country code, area code, exchange, city codes, wireless area, LATA or other can be used for limiting the numbering plan scope. Gateway sends a registration message to enumerate the area of its service to LIST SERVER 1082 after startup.

When client computer wishes to use the TEHO service, with regard to the query directory service, look for the IP gateway 1084 of required destination telephone number service. The IP gateway of directory service 1082 looking for qualifieds if find one, just returns the IP address of the gateway that will use. Can be equilibrated at load balancing algorithm and be the traffic on the IP gateway 1084,1081 and 1086 of same destination telephone number service.

If do not have IP gateway 1084,1081 and 1086 special calling area services for given destination telephone number, directory service 1082 is just returned the TCP/IP message of makeing mistakes to client computer 1080. Then client computer 1080 can select the query directory service, searches any IP gateway-just do not serve gateway of specific destination telephone number.

As the improvement to this gateway registration scheme, gateway can be registered as the call rate that the all-calls area provides. For example, if (Seatle) do not have gateway to use in the Seattle, the gateway call Seattle from Los Angeles (Los Angeles) may be more cheap than the gateway call Seattle from Portland (Portland) so. The rate of registering in the directory service can allow the directory service be the gateway that any specific call adopts minimum charge.

7.Vnet call treatment

Figure 11 is a call flow diagram according to preferred embodiment. Processing is in 1101 beginnings, and the position that receives the directory service of " online " message will be determined by this user's data distribution instrument. In some cases, this may be to subscribe the company of VNET service or the private database of tissue, in other cases, may be all users' of certain service supplier (MCI) country or world data bank. When directory service received this message from PC12 1051, it will upgrade the associated profile clauses and subclauses of this exclusive ID, is " online " with the expression user, is positioned at the assigned ip address. Then 1102, behind the profile that successfully upgrades this ID association, directory service beam back to this assigned ip address expression message received and obtain processing reply (ACK). When computer (PC12) has received this response message, just select to notify the user by visual or audible indicator.

User at 1103, PC11 1052 connects computer to IP network, opens computer and starts telephone system software. The enrollment process of this computer is identical with the enrollment process of PC12 1051. In this situation, suppose that the directory service that receives this message is logically or physically with identical from the directory service of PC12 1051 receipt messages.

1104, when directory service 1031 receives a message from PC11 1052, its start one with the similar process of process of behind PC12 1051 receipt messages, following. Yet in this case, it will upgrade the profile related with the identifier that receives from PC11 1052. Because the profile information that is updated, when sending response message from directory service, response message is addressed to the IP address related with PC11 1052. At this moment, two computers (PC12 1051 and PC11 1052) all are " online ", can be used to receipt of call.

Connect computer PC 11 1052 at its telephone system software of 1105, PC12,1051 usefulness. Connect in order to set up this, the user of PC12 1051 dials (perhaps other exclusive ID such as name, employee ID etc.) VNET number. According to realization situation and the software kit of customer network, an exclusive network identifier may must be added in this dial string. For example, in a VNET phone is realized, may require user's input digit 8 before dialing VNET number, to send signal to PBX, be illustrated in the VNET network and transmit calling. In case it is the calling of a VNET type that the phone software bag is determined this calling, it just sends a conversion request to directory service. This conversion request will comprise following information at least:

The IP address of the computer (PC12 1051) of this request of-transmission.

The VNET of the computer that will dial number (or other ID).

1106, when this message is received in directory service, just determine user related with this VNET number whether " online " with VNET number (or other ID), and identify the IP address of the position that can contact computer. Any other getable information about the computer (PC11 1052) that contacting such as compression algorithm or special hardware or software capability, also may be retrieved by directory service 1031. Then directory service 1031 returns a message to PC12 1051, message is with the status information of PC11 1052, such as this computer whether " online ", the information of its IP address (if available) and any other available ability about PC11 1052. When this is replied when PC12 1051 receptions, just determine whether can contact PC11 1052. The basis of making this decision is PC11 1052 " online " state, and other is about the information of the ability of PC11 1052. If the status information that PC12 1052 receives shows that PC11 1052 can not contact, then call-flow stops at this, otherwise just continues.

Following steps 1107 to 1111 are " normally " IP phone call setups and remove step. Transmit " ring " message at 1107, PC12 1051 to PC11 1052. This message is directed in the IP address of step 1106 from directory service 1031 receptions. This message can contain the user's who identifies PC12 1051 information, perhaps can contain the information that regulation is asked the relevant parameter that connects.

1108, the message of step 1107 is received by PC11 1052, and the reception of this message is to have the message of incoming call to confirm by the user who beams back an expression PC11 1052 to PC12 1051 is just notified. This notice can be visible, also can listen, and specifically decides on software kit and the configuration on PC11 1052 thereof.

1109, if the user of PC11 1052 accepts this calling, just beam back a message to PC12 1051, confirm " answer " this calling. If the user of PC11 1052 does not answer this calling or selects this calling of refusal, just beam back the message of an indication error situation to PC12 1051. Do not obtain answering if call out, then call-flow stops at this, otherwise just continues.

Can be with their phone software communication the user of 1110, PC11 1052 and PC12 1051. Communication proceeds to 1111, and this moment, the user of any PC may come middle connection breaking by send a clear message to other caller. The format and content of this message is looked the employed phone software Bao Erding of user of PC11 1052 and PC11 1052. In this case, PC11 1052 sends a clear message to PC12 1051, the transmission of the phone software system break speech on two computers.

Figure 12 represents to flow to the outer PC information calls of network according to a VNET PC (PC) of preferred embodiment. In this stream, the IP gateway is the outer unit of a net. This means that the IP gateway can not come and switch communication with the SS7 signaling, it must send VNET to be dialed number in pulse. Alternative embodiment provides directory service directly to be transformed into a switch/junction line with this VNET number and suitable numeral is sent in pulse. The conversion in the exchange network has been simplified in this processing, but more complicated signal transmission structure need to be arranged between internet gateway and switch. The situation of this " in the net " internet gateway will be described in another call-flow.

This situation hypothesis is located not have between the public branch exchange (PBX) integrated in internet and user. If have integratedly, PC just might be connected to ITG on the client PBX through internet (or in-house network), and avoids using PSTN. Figure 12 is a call flow diagram according to preferred embodiment. Processing starts from 1201, and receiving the position of the directory service of " online " message this moment will be determined by this client's data distribution instrument. In some cases, this may be to subscribe the company of VNET business or the private database of tissue, in other cases, may be all clients' of certain service supplier (MCI) country or world data bank.

When directory service received this message from PC12 1051, it will upgrade the associated profile clauses and subclauses of this unique ID, is " online " with the expression user, is positioned at the assigned ip address. Then 1202, behind the profile that successfully upgrades this ID association, directory service beam back to this assigned ip address expression message received and obtain processing reply (ACK). When computer (PC12) has received this response message, can select to notify the user by visual or audible indicator.

So 1203, send a VNET conversion request to directory service, require to determine that the dialing path is to the conversion of the outer Internet of network telephony gateway. 1204, return one and comprise replying of IP address and DNIS. This is replied as transmitting to call out and has resolved the phone addressing information fully. Then 1205, an IP phone dialing that utilizes DNIS information occurs. DNIS refers to the number information service (Dialed Number Information Services) that dials, and it is the definition information about the calling of using in call route selecting. 1206, return one from IP phone and reply (ACK), 1207, IP phone is answered, and 1208, call path is set up.

1209a represents VNET PC off-hook, and 1209b represents VNET PC Sending dialled number sound, and numeral is sent in 1210 expression VNET PC pulses. Then being routed in the conversion of the Route Selection of 1211, DNIS information selects database how to be used for determining call route selecting to the destination phone. Conversion is replied 1212 and is accepted, and 1213, the pulse that a switch-to-switch occurs is sent. Then 1215, to ring of destination phone transmission, to PC a ring-back occurs. Calling obtains answering 1216 after being passed out network by the internet gateway connection. Converse 1217, until a side of conversation is in 1218 on-hooks.

Figure 13 represents to arrive the outer phone information call-flow of net according to the VNET PC (PC) of preferred embodiment. In this call-flow, by call-delivery being arrived internet/in-house network, arriving the internet gateway that directly is connected with PBX again, avoided use PSTN.

Figure 14 represents to arrive the interior phone information call-flow of net according to the VNET PC (PC) of preferred embodiment. In this call-flow, the Internet telephony gateway is unit in the net. This just requires the Internet gateway to work as switch, and can switch be handed in calling with the SS7 signaling. This is so that directory service can just return switch/junction line when VNET searches first and numeral is sent in pulse. This step has been avoided by additionally searching that switch is carried out. In this case, directory service must can be accessed the VNET routing information.

A) PC is to PC

Figure 15 represents according to the Internet call to PC of the PC of preferred embodiment. In step 1501, the iphone user is connected to step 1502MCI directory service with the IP connection by the Internet, once searches at this, determines how to transmit this calling. In step 1503, call out in intelligence system platform (ISP) termination, to determine to where sending calling. Ip router is a gateway, and it enters MCI ISP and passes through network to determine how to allow by intelligent service networks (ISN) feature engine to call out. In step 1504, call out and be connected to the iphone user by the internet. In the step 1504 of another kind of situation, phone nobody connect, so the calling party wishes the conversation with MCI operator, ip router passes the network switch (interface that connects the speech world). In step 1505, the network switch (Net-Switch) enquiry call processing engine goes to carry out the DSP engine function. In step 1506, call out to be routed and select to be passed to the MCI switch by wide area network maincenter (WAN HUB) in step 1507, arrive again MCI operator or voice mail. This preferred embodiment has utilized existing infrastructure to come assisted call.

B) PC is to phone

Figure 16 represents a call that is routed to phone from PC through the internet. In step 1602, inquiry MCI catalogue is called out required ISN information to obtain Route Selection. Then in step 1603, call out and be redirected to the ISP gateway, and be routed to the call treatment engine in

step

1604 and 1605 usefulness IP routers. Then in step 1606, calling out and be routed to WAN, arrive at last RBOC, is that this call record main frame is kept accounts at this.

C) phone is to PC

Figure 17 represents to call out to PC according to the phone of preferred embodiment. In step 1701, phone is routed in the special network switch, and in step 1702, the call treatment engine is determined DTMF tone with a series of digital signal processors. Then in step 1703, the system searching directory information also connects calling. If the calling subscriber does not exist, perhaps the line is busy, then in step 1704, calls out by ip router, is routed on the switch with the call treatment engine in step 1705.

D) phone is to phone

Figure 18 represents to arrive call according to the phone on the internet of preferred embodiment. In step 1801, call out and enter switch, in step 1802, call out the call logic routine processes of moving in the called processing engine. In step 1803, in directory information database, once search, to determine aforesaid Route Selection to calling out. Route Selection is included in the main frame record keeping and uses billing record of storage in 1808. Even call out by the Internet and select route, all ISN features are all opened to this calling. Each end in the Internet will come conveniently call route selecting to be entered the network switch by Internet 1804 with ip router. Calling is routed to the call treatment engine from the network switch, by wide area network maincenter 1806, again by RBOC 1807, arrives target phone. Adopt various engines 1803 to come combine digital code conversion, DTMF detection, speech recognition, call progress, VRU function and modem feature.

XI. telecommunication network management

Preferred embodiment utilize the NMS of communication network analyze, related and submit network event to. The data signaling network that the modern telecom network utilization is different from call bearer (call-bearing) network is transmitted as the signaling data that carries out call setup, processing and removing and require. The architecture of these signal transmission networks employing industrial standards and agreement-be called altogether the 7th common channel signaling system or be called for short the 7th signaling system (SS7). SS7 is a major progress to former method for transmitting signals, and in the former method for transmitting signals, the call signaling data are transmitted at same circuit with calling. SS7 provides different special circuit networks to come the call transmission signaling data. The employing of SS7 has reduced call set-up time (delay after the dialing that the calling subscriber awares) and has increased capacity on the call bearer network. Detailed description about the SS7 signaling can be referring to " Signalling System #7 " (Trayis Russell work, Mcgraw Hill publication, 1995).

The standard of SS7 network, domestic (U.S.) network portion is set up by ANSI, and international coupling part is set up by ITU, is called ANSI SS7 and ITU C7. Represented a typical SS7 network among Figure 1B. The call bearer communication network utilizes array switch 102A/102B to change client's communication. These switches 102A/102B is conventional switch, such as the DMS-250 of Nortel (Northern Telecom) manufacturing or the DEX-600 of digital exchange company (Digital Switch Corporation) manufacturing. These switches 102A/102B interconnects with voice grade and data level call bearer junction line. This being interconnected among Figure 1B do not represent, can take many kinds configurations.

Switch in the communication network is carried out several functions. Except being the voice call built-up circuit, switch also must be forwarded to signaling message as other switch of calling out a control part. These signaling messages transmit by computer network, and wherein each computer is called signalling point (SP) 102A/102B. Three kinds of signalling points are arranged in the SS7 network:

-Service Switching Point (SSP)

-transmission point signal (STP)

-service control point (SCP)

SSP is the exchange interface to the SS7 signaling network.

Transmission point signal (STP) 104a ... 104f (being designated as altogether 104) is the packet switching communication equipment that exchanges with Route Selection SS7 signal. For redundant and recovery, they are disposed in couples, are called to troop. For example in Figure 1B, troop in the zone STP 104A and STP 104B pairing in 1, troop in the zone STP 104C and STP 104D pairing in 2, trooping in the zone, STP 104E and STP 104F match in 3. Contain a plurality of STP in the typical SS7 network and troop, schematically shown three among Fig. 1. Each STP troop 104 the service specific SSP 102 the geographic area. A plurality of SSP102 have one-level SS7 link connection among interior two SSP 104 each of trooping. It play a part one-level reset (homing) device. Only shown schematically among Figure 1B that two reset to troop 2 SSP102 of zone, in fact, had some SSP 102 will be at specific STP 104 reset (home) that troop. SSP 102 generally also will have another one or two STP 104 in trooping of a secondary SS7 link connection. This plays a part the secondary resetting means.

The SS7 link identification that connects various unit is as follows:

The A link is connected to SSP its each one-level STP (one-level resets).

STP during the B link is trooped one is connected to another STP in trooping.

STP during the C link is trooped one is connected to another STP in same the trooping.

The STP of D link connection different communication company network (do not give and illustrating).

The E link is connected to not the STP in it is trooped (secondary resets) with SSP.

The F link is connected to each other two SSP.

In order to link the network of two different communication companies, such as LEC local exchange carrier's (LEC) network and switched communication company (IXC) network, can the STP of each carrier network be trooped with D link or A link 104 couples together. SS7 provides standard agreement for this interface, in order to the signal of the calling that transmits between LEC and IXC also can be transmitted.

When switch was accepted and transmit customer call, the signaling of this calling received (or generation) by attached SSP 102. During the intermachine trunk transmission client's who connects switch calling, the signaling of this calling is addressed to STP104. STP 104 is with signal or be delivered to the SSP 102 of the switch of call ending, or is delivered to another STP 104, the latter and then pass the signal along to the SSP 102 of the switch of call ending. Another unit of SS7 network is protocol monitor unit (PMU) 106, as shown in Figure 2. PMU 106 is deployed in switch site, for the SS7 network provides a kind of independently monitoring tools. As shown in Figure 2, A, E and the F link of those equipment of these equipment-make such as INET company (being positioned at Texas, USA Richardson)-supervision SS7 network. They generate fault and performance information about the SS7 link.

The same with any representative network, the SS7 network also is subject to the infringement of fiber cut, other Transmission and equipment fault easily. Because SS7 is carrying and delivering all required signalings of telex network, be extremely important so rapid test problems also corrects immediately. Therefore, be a long felt need for a kind of system that can monitor SS7 network, analysis of failure and performance information, management corrigendum action.

Although carry out these basic functions, there are some shortcomings in the SS7 NMS of prior art level. Many system requirements human configuration network topologies, this requirement is subject to the impact of human error, postpones topology and upgrades. The configuration General Requirements system of these systems stops a period of time. Available many systems all are that PMU 106 for particular Seller is equipped with in the industry, in fact will obtain topological datas from their PMU 106, can ignore thus the NE that is not connected with PMU 106 and the equipment of other distributors.

Because the system of prior art level only uses the data manipulation that receives from proprietary PMU 106, they do not provide related between PMU event and the event that the NE of other type generates. They are also dumb for the proprietary analysis rule that event correlation provides.

By receiving and the distributed client/server platform of processing the event that is generated by different SS7 NEs, provide a kind of system and method for the SS7 Network Management Function be used to enhancing is provided. Analyzed and the standardization of each network event is so that the event that the unit of any type is generated is processed. Event also can be received by network topology database, transmission network management system, network operation scheduling and system user. Referring to Fig. 3, the figure shows a system architecture according to preferred embodiment of the present invention-be called SS7 NMS (SNMS). The composition of SNMS is 4 logical servers 302/304/306/308 and the client workstation 312a/212b/312c/312d of being connected by network management wide area network (WAN) 310 connections. These 4 logic SNMS servers 302/304/306/308 can all reside in single or a plurality of physical locations on. In preferred embodiment, for the purpose of strengthening the property, each logical server is deposited and is resided on the different physical equipments. These physical equipments can be any general types, such as the IBM RS6000 equipment of operation AIX operating system.

Client workstation 312 can be any conventional PC, dumb terminal or the VAX VMS work station of operation MS WINDOWS or IBM os/2 operation system. In fact, client workstation can be any PC or terminal that Internet Protocol (IP) address is arranged, move X-Windows software, link to each other with WAN 310. Do not move the SNMS special-purpose software on the client workstation 312.

SNMS is from various SS7 NEs and other NMS (NMS) 338 reception events. It also receives network topology, configure and maintenance data-hereinafter will illustrate from various external systems. The various network elements of generation event comprises network controller 314, international and domestic SP 316/102, STP 104 and PMU 106. Network controller 314 is the equipment that comes switched circuit according to external command. They use the SS7 signaling in the mode identical with SSP 102, but but are not connected with any STP 104. The switch that international SP 316 supports as the gateway between the internal and international communication network. STP 104 can be domestic or international.

All SS7 groupings that transmit through the SS7 circuit of PMU 106 scannings, the analysis of failure condition, then generation will be sent to the network event on the SNMS. PMU 106 also regularly generates the statistics about the performance of monitored SS7 circuit.

SP 102/316, STP 104 and PMU 106 SS7 and network controller 314 all come transferring network event by communication network. This does not just need SNMS and each equipment to keep a session. In exemplary embodiments shown in Figure 3, transmit event from network controller 314 and international SP316 with an asynchronous data communication network 320. With 3708 of IBM host front end processor (FEP) 324 1 a such as IBM this asynchronous protocol is transformed into SNA, like this, it just can be received by exchange host interface equipment transmission (SWIFT) system 326 based on the IBM main frame. SWIFT326 is communication interface and the data distribution applications that and each NE are kept a logic communication session.

In same embodiment, the event of transmitting from STP104, SP102 and PMU106 with an X.25 operating system support (OSS) network 328. These events are received by a local supporter (LSE) system 330. LSE330 can be a VAX/VMS system, is actually a packet assemblerdisassembler (PAD) and protocol converter, is used for event data is transformed into SNMS server 302/304 from OSS network 328 X.25. It is also the same with SWIFT 326, keeps a communication session with each NE, does not so just need SNMS to keep session. To the two needs of SWIFT 326 and LSE 330, illustrate in an embodiment of exemplary telecommunications network, dissimilar unit is installed is required to have different transmission mechanisms. SNMS supports the unit of all these types.

The all-network event all is input to SNMS Alarm Server 302 and goes to perform an analysis with related. Also there are some events to be imported into SNMS report server 304, store and make historical data. Control system 332 can be a VAX/VMS system, is used for collecting the topological sum configuration data by OSS network 328 X.25 from each NE. Some unit-such as STP104 and SP102-can directly X.25 send these data. Can only with the unit of asynchronous system communication, be connected to X.25 OSS network 328 with packet assemblerdisassembler (PAD) 318 such as this class of international SSP316. Then control system 332 is fed to SNMS topology server 306 with this topological sum configuration data.

Network topological information is used for carrying out the alarm association and provides figure to show by SNMS. Most of topology informations all receive from network topology database, and in preferred embodiment, network topology database is by order entry system and network engineering system creation and maintenance. Topological data both also was input to SNMS topology server 306 from control system 332 from network topology database 334. Also provide by using the artificial ability that replaces of PC336 input to SNMS topology server 306.

SNMS Alarm Server 302 also receives the event from other NMS (NMS) 338, particularly DS-3 transmission alarm. Use topological data, SNMS will use next related these events of event that receive from the SS7 NE. SNMS Alarm Server 302 also receives the network operation schedule information from network operation dispatching patcher 340. SNMS explains that with this information calculated maintainability network interrupts, and does not need to answer the warning that generates because of maintenance thus. SNMS also interrupts with the network that this information comes the active warning attendant to have meeting affect the scheduled maintenance activity.

SNMS Alarm Server 302 has an interface with Fault Management System 342. This makes the SNMS user of client workstation 312 submit faulty tag (trouble tickets) to for the alarm that SNMS generates. This interface is different from employing SNMS internal fault management system, and it can be configured to use many dissimilar Fault Management Systems. In preferred embodiment, SNMS graphics server 308 supports to be positioned at all working station 312 of single-site, is a plurality of servers therefore. The geographical distribution of SNMS graphics server 308 has been eliminated from certain center to a large amount of needs of supporting figured data of each work station website transmission. Only to the data of work station website transmission from Alarm Server 302, report server 304 and topology server 306, can save the network bandwidth thus, improve the SNMS performance. In another embodiment, graphics server 308 can be positioned at the center.

Referring now to Fig. 4,, the high-level process flow diagram of expression SNMS flogic system parts. The center of process is processing event 402. These parts play a part the traffic-police of SNMS process. Processing event 402 mainly in 302 operations of SNMS Alarm Server, is responsible for receiving event from the SNMS parts, processes these events, storage event, and the event data of processing is presented to report and display unit. Represented in more detail processing event procedure 402 among Fig. 5.

Receive network event parts 404 mainly in 302 operations of SNMS Alarm Server, by such as the system of SWIFT326 and LSE330 from various SS7 NEs (STP 104, SP102, PMU106 etc.) reception event. These parts are analyzed event and they are sent to processing event 402 and go to perform an analysis. Represented in more detail reception network event process 404 among Fig. 6.

Process topological parts 406, mainly in topology server 306 operation, from network topology database 334, by control system 332 from the SS7 NE, receive network topology and configuration datas from artificial replacement 336. These data are used for the related network event and these events are affected test and appraisal. It also is used for providing the diagrammatic representation of event. Process topology 406 carries out syntactic analysis (parse) to these topological sum configuration datas, stores them, and they are sent to processing event 402 goes to perform an analysis. Represented in more detail to process topological process 406 among Fig. 7.

Definition algorithm component 408, mainly in Alarm Server 302 operations, definition is for specific syntax analysis and analysis rule by SNMS. Then these rules are loaded into processing event 402 and are used for syntactic analysis and analysis. This algorithm is stored in the software module, defines with program code. Programmer's work is just enrolled this software module with predefined algorithm, is then used by processing event 402. These algorithms be Process Character and be based on network topology. Their composition is the useful specific language simple rule writing, can be on-the-fly modified by SNMS user both, and the more complicated rule of writing in the SNMS software code is arranged again.

Receive NMS data component 410, mainly in Alarm Server 302 operations, from other NMS (NMS) 338 reception events. This class event comprises DS-3 transmission warning. It also receives the network operation event from network operation dispatching patcher 340. Then these events are carried out syntactic analysis and they are sent to process event 402 going to perform an analysis. Display alarm parts 412 mainly in graphics server 308 and Alarm Server 302 operations, comprise the software that graphic user interface (GUI) and Data support topological sum related, that use director's part 402 provides are reported to the police and represented. It also supports customer interaction, submits to such as warning removing, affirmation, faulty tag. It is input to processing event 402 with these reciprocations and makes storage and required Data Update. Represented in more detail display alarm process 412 among Fig. 8.

Data report parts 414 are mainly in report server 304 operations, the Data support topological sum alarm report function that use director's part 402 provides. Data report parts 414 have been represented in more detail among Fig. 9.

Referring now to Fig. 5,, the figure shows the detailed process of processing event parts 402. This is the main procedure of SNMS. It receives comprehensive event from other SNMS parts, analyzes each event to extract related data, the type of identified event. If the relevant event of SS7, processing event 402 is just used a selected algorithm, reports to the police such as creating to report to the police or be associated with to have now.

First three step 502-506 is the initialization procedure that moves when each SNMS session initiation. They set up the state that system can work thus. Then step 510-542 moves in the mode of continuous circulation.

In step 502, read current topological data the topological database from topology server 306. This topological database is to create in Process topology process 406, is imported into processing event 402, as shown in Figure 4. The topological data that reads had been done to analyze in processing topology 406, and therefore processed event 402 reads in step 502, as the standardization event that can supply at any time to process.

In step 504, read in the algorithm that creates in the definition algorithm component 408. These algorithms determine what action SNMS will take to each warning. SNMS has a figure, and content is the warning for which type, should call which algorithm.

In step 506, read in alarm logging from fault management (FM) report database, alarm logging creates in report data process 414. All Alerts in the past all will abandon. Any for non-existent node or circuit in (reading in the step 502) topology and movable warning all is dropped. Any and (reading in the step 504) existing unmatched warning of algorithm also all is dropped. Report to the police is to read in from the FM report database in initializing. For strengthening the performance of system, be from processing the internal data library searching alarm logging in the future of event procedure 402. Step 506 comprises initialization procedure, read current topology, algorithm and warning after, SNMS just can begin to read in, analyze, process and store the continuous process of event.

This process starts from step 510, in this step, and received, the sign of the next event in the formation. Formation is first in first out (FIFO) formation, and it is to the event of processing parts 402 transport net events, topological event and NMS event. Reaffirm that the alert data that reads in the topological data of reading in the step 502 and the step 504 is to start the initialization data that reads in when creating system mode one time. In step 510, constantly there is event to be read in continuously from processing unit 404,406 and 410. These events are analyzed mistake, is received as standardized SNMS event. If find certain event early than certain threshold values, for example one hour, then this event just was dropped.

Step 512,520,524 and the event type sign done according to step 510 of 534, SNMS how to decide dispose event.

In step 512, if determine that event is topological data, SNMS just upgrades GUI in step 514 and shows to reflect new topology. Then in step 518, SNMS carries out a coordination of reporting to the police with activity, to abandon any and new topological unmatched warning. In step 518, new topological data is recorded in the topological database that keeps on the SNMS topology server 306.

In step 520, be the NMS data if determine event, report to the police 338 such as DS-3, then be stored in the FM report database on the SNMS report server 304 for cause SNMS rule invocation.

In step 524, if determine that event is a SS7 network event that defined, then in step 526, will call one or more algorithms for this event. This class algorithm can utilize the data of retrieval from NMS 338, network operation scheduling 340 and network topology 334.

For example, when each circuit level algorithm generated a warning, it once checked network operation scheduling 340 and NMS338 record. Each alarm logging is if the circuit of regulation is just marked in maintenance window (network operation scheduling 340); Otherwise just the DS-3 transmission of transmission warning (NMS338) is being arranged. The SS7 circuit is at DS-0 level run duration, and network topology database 334 provides a DS-3 to the DS-0 conversion table. Any DS-0 circuit in the DS-3 all is marked as and may be included in the transmission fault. Remove record from NMS338 and can cause evaluation and test that the SNMS circuit level of activity is reported to the police, in order to remove relevant NMS338 is related. SNMS removes event will remove actual SNMS warning. The warning that GUI filter user allows will be fit to comprise in maintenance window or the transmission fault stashes, because these warnings do not require that SNMS operator takes action.

In step 528, the new warning that activity warning and step 526 are caused generates and removes and coordinate. In step 520, the GUI demonstration is updated. In step 532, new alert data is stored in the FM report database.

In step 534, it is timer that event can be confirmed as. The SNMS algorithm needs the regular hour is postponed in the further processing to specified conditions sometimes, such as lasting and rate algorithm. Be delay timer of this condition setting, continue the processing to new SNMS event. This time past tense, SNMS just should treat by event the time, carries out corresponding algorithm.

For example, the temporary close of SS7 link possibility is worked in the possible several seconds again, perhaps closes the longer time owing to there being serious interruption to take action. SNMS will may be one minute timer to this of event distribution after this time of reception. If event was removed in one minute, SNMS does not just take action to it. Yet if regularly not variation (the SS7 link is still closed) of in the past rear event in a minute, SNMS just begins to take action.

In step 536, call suitable algorithm and take this action. In step 538, the warning of activity and the warning that generates in step 536 or remove are coordinated. In step 540, the GUI demonstration is updated. In step 542, store new alert data into the FM report database. As mentioned above, SNMS continuously receives and deal with data. After the data storage, process turns back to step 510 in step 518,522,532 and 542.

Referring now to Fig. 6,, the figure shows the detailed process that receives network event parts 404. These parts are by such as asynchronous data network 320, SWIFT 326, X.25 the transfer of data mechanism such as OSS network 328 and LSE 330 collects from the event of SS7 NE. These events are received in first in first out (FIFO) formation by SNMS Alarm Server 302. In step 602 and 604, used (mainframe applications)-collect such as SWIFT 326 and LSE 320 from the event of SS7 NE by the external host of SNMS, then, the agreement with event data becomes SNA or TCP/IP from the specific protocol conversion of NE. In one embodiment, SNMS also can have software to move at main frame, and protocol conversion is become can be by the agreement of SNMS Alarm Server 302 identifications. Then event data is transferred to SNMS Alarm Server 302 by SNA or TCP/IP. SNMS preserves the signaling event tabulation 608 of all pending SS7 event types, if find current event in tabulation, SNMS just captures this event and processes. If can not find this event in the tabulation, SNMS just abandons it.

In step 610, according to the rule governing parsing 614 analysis events of definition. Rule governing parsing 614 has been stipulated and will have been extracted which territory from which event type, has been organized in the SNMS code. Event analysis in the step 610 only extracts required event data territory in alarm algorithm or the demonstration. Be input to the scheduling events 612 from network operation scheduling 340 of also having of step 610. That scheduling events 612 is used for being identified at is that step 602 is collected, may be each network event of the result that safeguards of dispatch network. The reason that this SS7 network that SNMS operator can be found caused by scheduled maintenance is shut down.

In step 616, the event data of analyzing is used at SNMS residence memory Criterion event object, used by other SNMS process. In step 510 this event object is read in main procedure, processing event 402.

Referring now to Fig. 7,, the figure shows the detailed process of processing topological parts 406. This processing unit is retrieval network topological sum configuration data from the source of three types, and creating a standard topological data record stores data for other SNMS process. Especially, it is in the topological data of step 502 to the processing event 402 conveying activities of Alarm Server 302 operations.

In step 702, SNMS topology server 306 is collected topological data from three different sources. Collect current connection and the configuration data that is generated by the SS7 NE by control system 332, collect and be input to order input and engineering system and be stored in topological data in the network topology database 334, also receive artificial substituting 336 by work station. Collection to the data of topological database 334 and control system 332 is regularly carried out, and is independent of SNMS Alarm Server 302. Different from the system of the prior art level of the data of PMU106 retrieval from use, the topological data that SNMS receives comprises the NE that does not link to each other with PMU106 shown in Fig. 2 from all types of NEs. SNMS also uses the data of the topology of reflection external network, such as the data of the topology that reflects LEC local exchange carrier (LEC) or international common carrier. This data are used for affecting evaluation and test, and the impact evaluation and test makes the client can determine which endpoint client can be subjected to the SS7 link to shut down the fact affecting such as. The type of the topological data of SNMS collection and use, for example STP104 links with the SS7 of switch/SSP102, is received by the input of network order and engineering system. Being briefly described below of data and content thereof: STP link ID identifies each SS7 link switch-link ID to STP and identifies the junction line group switch-link set identifier of each SS7 link to SS7 link STP link set identification of switch/SP to STP to the junction line of the SS7 link of switch/SP

Group MCI/ communication common carrier circuit I D is identified to the SS7 link of external system. For two

Interface between the heterogeneous networks, each ID (MCI

ID and communication common carrier ID) each network (this example is provided

In be MCI and communication common carrier) SS7 chain road sign

Know. The type SLC signal link code of Linktype sign SS7 link

For the exchange voice network that SS7 supports, data are received by the input of network order and engineering system, are used for carrying out the evaluation and test of SS7 events affecting: the speech junction line group that speech junction line group is supported by each SSP102

For the SS7 link of domestic STP 104g to international STP 104h, data are received by the input of network order and engineering system: circuit I D is identified to the SS7 link SLC signal link code of external system

In order to affect evaluation and test, the NPA/NXX of LEC local exchange carrier (LEC) distributes and terminal station is called out the area data storehouse to access tandem (End Office to Access Tandem) return mechanism by one and received, and the latter is that the local exchange Route Selection guidance (LERG) by Bellcore provides. The local access transmission of LATA area (routine) NPA/NXX numbering plan area/prefix (routine) terminal station LEC customer service node visit tandem LEC terminal station maincenter

External network STP104 troops and the SSP102 return mechanism is received by control system by the SS7 NE.

Point code sign SS7 node (routine)

The data that identify some aspect of each NE receive by staying the switch configuration file of depositing on the external system.

The data that each network DS-0 are mapped to DS-3 are received by network topology database. These data are used for distributing the DS-3 that is received by NMS to report to the police to DS-0 level circuit.

Provided by artificial substituting for covering the required data of data that obtain by automated procedure.

Return now Fig. 7, in step 704, analyze various topological datas to extract the required data field of SNMS algorithm. Then data are standardized into the logout that the processed event 402 of energy is processed.

In step 706, the standardized data recording needle is verified other data. For example, recording proof scheme topology record for node topology, is to identify and definition arranged to guarantee end node.

In step 708, topological data is stored in the relational database of topology server 306 of Fig. 3, in the relational database that provides such as Sybase.

In step 710, new topology record is delivered to the main SNMS process of Alarm Server 302 operations from topology server 306, compare with active configuration (being the configuration of current graftabl). Activity is reported to the police and GUI demonstration coordination, to remove the warning relevant with non-existent topological circuit.

In step 712, topology is stored in (for processing event 402) on the Alarm Server 302, because performance, to launch the form storage of file. At this moment, this expansion file has reflected topology server 306 databases after the step 708. This expansion file can only be accessed by main procedure. In step 714, new topology record is loaded into movable SNMS internal memory, requires the new process of topology just to use now new configuration.

Referring now to Fig. 8,, the figure shows the detailed process of display alarm parts 412. The result that this process provides SNMS to process to user's (being called the operator) receives operator's input, as the action that will carry out in SNMS. Therefore, the process of display alarm 412 between processing event 402 is two-way. The more important of noting is, although for whole SNMS system is moving a single processing event procedure 402, it is its operation that each user of the upper login of SNMS has a different instances of display alarm process 412. In other words, each operator encourages one of display alarm 412 to carry out separately.

When the operator when SNMS logins, carry out front 4 step 802-808 as initialization. Thereafter, step 810-838 moves as continuous circulation. Initialization provides the system mode of being started working by it to each operator. In step 802, read in and show current topology by graphic user interface (GUI). Each operator GUI process that oneself is arranged, that start and finish according to operator's request. Each GUI process is managed its demonstration independently. State variation is all processed by individual other process.

In step 804, read in the filter of definition specific operation person view. Each operator can both define its GUI process with the view that shows. Filter parameter comprises:

1. communication warning, equipment alarm or the two.

2. the warning of confirming, unacknowledged warning or the two.

3. the warning on the circuit of maintenance window inside, the not warning on the circuit of maintenance window inside or the two.

4. have that associated transport is reported to the police warning on the circuit of (reporting to the police by shutting down the DS-3 that identifier represents), the warning on the circuit of reporting to the police without associated transport or the two.

5. the warning of specifying the order of severity is arranged.

6. the warning on node/circuit of having of designated user ID.

7. the warning on the international circuit, the warning on the national circuit or the two.

Operator's GUI shows renewal when both initializing in step 804, upgrade when also request filter changes in step 828 and 830. The example of each specific operation person's display alarm 412 processes open one with being connected of processing event 402, in order to only transmit those alarm loggings relevant with specific operation person's filter. In step 806, specific operation person's process, will be transmitted to identify which warning to 402 registrations of processing event own. In step 808, the GUI demonstration is presented to the operator.

The continuous execution of step 810 beginning display alarm. Received and the sign of event that each will be retrieved and represent according to the definition of operator's filter. Step 812,816,820,826 and 836, SNMS how to determine dispose event according to the event type done in the step 810 sign. In

step

812 and 816, if determine it is to report to the police to upgrade or the topology renewal, just show at

step

814 and 818 couples of operators' GUI respectively and upgrade, determine to reflect this. Then receive next event in step 810.

In step 820, if determine that this event is Operator action, just require to carry out two operations. At first in step 822, operator's GUI demonstration is upgraded, changed with the reflection state. Then in step 824, state changed to upgrade mails to main procedure-processing event 402 so that state change can reflection in the SNMS record, (other operator's) other GUI process can accepting state changes and it is reacted.

In step 826, if determine that this event is operator's display action, to determine that then this action is that filter changes request or shows request. In step 828, if determine it is that filter changes request, so in step 830, the GUI process is to 402 registrations of processing event, in order to transmit suitable alarm logging. In step 832, if determine that this event is that the operator shows request, so in step 834, the demonstration of asking is represented to the operator. Show that request may comprise:

The node details be connected with connection

2. circuit connects

3. link set connects

4. unknown topology warning (to the warning of undefined object in topological database)

5.STP to connecting

6.LATA the inner node that comprises

7. family/partner connects (nonneighbor node)

8.NPA/NXX tabulation

9. junction line Groups List

10. terminal station access tandem (end office access tandem)

11. rule definition helpscreen (helping the operator to understand the actual algorithm that uses in generating warning)

12. the action of recommending (operator's action definition, that when receiving particular alarm, should take)

In step 836, be the termination request if determine event, so just in terminate this specific operation person's GUI process of step 838. Otherwise receive next event in step 810. In the display alarm process, SNMS shows that several exclusive display windows support Fault Isolation, operation evaluation and test and troubleshooting. All GUI that contain node and line code show all be " activity " window in the SNMS (namely when node or circuit the alarm condition change time display screen that dynamically updates). Because the set in employed MCI topology source in the SNMS, all demonstrations all are possible. SNMS can process the SNMS that uses many-sidedly in the operator shows.

The A.SNMS circuit diagram

This window shows the topological sum alarm state information of selected link set. After receiving network event, the relation between the SNMS identification end points and the warning that generates by minimizing come isolated fault. This shows (from the angle of the node) set of links that allows operator monitor to see from the both sides of signal circuit.

The B.SNMS connection layout

This window shows the figure that troops of MCI signal network. All MCI that link to each other with MCI STP and non-MCI node are all shown together with related set of links in trooping. The importance of figure of trooping is that single STP fault/isolation is non-service affecting, and cluster failure then affects service, because all MCI STP are connected to two MCI STP in trooping.

C.SNMS nonneighbor node figure

This window shows that the STP of selected LEC signaling network is to figure. The LEC that all (signaling relation being arranged with the MCI network) LEC SP, STP are connected with SCP is to being shown. The zone of responsibility of MCI does not comprise LEC STP to LEC SSP signaling link, so do not show set of links here. This shows that permission SNMS operator monitor is by the being seen LEC signal network of MCI node.

D.SNMS LATA connection layout

The figure of the node that all LEC that this window demonstration is positioned at appointment LATA have. The MCI STP of service LATA is to also showing together with related set of links (feasible words). This shows that the permission operator monitors LATA nearly when going wrong in specific LATA. The LATA problem when exceeding the control range of MCI, can cause the MCI network internal to go wrong, because signaling message is to share between the network. Also may be subjected to the impact of LATA shutdown at the MCI Speech Communication of this specific LATA termination.

The E.NPA-NXX information list

This window shows the tabulation by the NPA-NXX of specific LEC switch service. This is presented at, and (if namely this specific LEC switch is isolated, which NPA-NXX is disabled) is very valuable during the impact evaluation and test.

F. terminal station information list

This window shows the tabulation of the LEC terminal station node that is connected to this specific LEC access tandem. This is presented at, and (if namely this specific LEC switch is isolated, which terminal station is disabled) is very valuable during the impact evaluation and test.

G. junction line group information list

The tabulation of the MCI speech junction line that this window demonstration is connected with specific MCI switch and the LEC terminal station switch at their termination places. This is presented at, and (if namely the MCI switch is isolated, what terminal station is affected) is very valuable during the impact evaluation and test.

H. filter definition window

SNMS operator can be limited in the scope of its demonstration:

The type of the warning that should show

The order of severity of the warning that should show

Warning, the unacknowledged warning confirmed, or the two

Warning on warning on the planned shut-down window interior circuit, the planned shut-down window external circuit, or the two

Not to shut down the warning that causes by specific transmission network

Warning on specific user's node or with circuit that the specific user links to each other on warning

I. failure logging window

The record that SNMS operator's energy opening signal is reported to the police. These fault dockets are to open in the mistake record system of MCI. The operator also can show the state of existing fault docket.

Referring now to Fig. 9,, the figure shows the detailed process of report data parts 414. These process parts are in report server 304 operations, and the data that storage SNMS processes also provide report.

Standardised networks unit (NE) logout 914 is together with received with location-specific time stamp. In step 902, the mark that clocks is converted into the GMT (GMT) in order to can produce standardization report.

In step 904, all received data all are stored in each database table. Data also can be on tape or disk longer-term storage. This data comprise mark 916 that SNMS generates, standardization topology record 918 and from the performance statistics of PMU 920. Also can comprise undressed data, report to the police and network operation planning data 340 such as the DS-3 from NMS 338.

In step 906, generate report. These reports can be customization or standard report. Also can be to generate as required or generate according to plan. The way of submission of these reports has many, comprises once be not limited to-Email 908, the X-terminal shows 910 and printed report 912.

Visual telephone on the XII.POTS

Speech from the POTS is ensuing to be exactly video naturally. Computer now when linking to each other with the computer network of certain type, just can be made a call video " " each other. Yet, most people can only access computer network in the following manner: send calling from their modem on POTS, POTS has another modem at the computer of interconnection network, they are with regard to another computer on energy " calling " network like this, and the latter is connected to another computer by modem again. Directly calling out another person at POTS, allow mutually communication and do not bear network overhead of modem, is the thing of simpler (also efficient). H.324, the ITU proposed standard has been described the terminal that is used for low bit rate (28.8kbps modem) multimedia communication. The V.34 modem that employing is worked in the POTS.H.324 terminal can transmit real-time voice, data and video, and perhaps their any combination comprises visual telephone. H.324 terminal can be integrated in the PC, perhaps to realize such as the autonomous device of visual telephone and TV. Support to each medium type (speech, data, video) is chosen wantonly, if but supported, just require to use specific public operation mode, so that all support the terminal of this medium type to cooperate with each other. H.324 allow each type to use more than one channel. H.324 H.233 other recommendation in the series comprises multipath conversion (combination of speech, data and video), H.245 control, H.263 Video Codec (digital encoder and decoder) and audio codec G.723.1.1.

H.324 utilized ITU proposed standard logic channel signaling procedure H.245, wherein, the content of each logic channel is all described when this channel is opened. Each calling subscriber provides process so that can only use the multimedia capabilities of their machine. For example, attempt not have to only having audio frequency video capability someone send the people that video (or audio frequency) is called out, still can communicate by letter with audio process (G.723.1.1).

H.324 be defined as point-to-point protocol. To hold a meeting with more than one people, need a MCU (multipoint control unit) to be used as the video call bridge circuit. H.324 computer can with ISDN on computer interactive work, also can with wireless network on computer interactive work.

A. the parts of video-telephone system

1. with the DSP modem bank of ACD

Digital signal processor (DSP) modem bank is a pool of modem, and each modem can both be programmed realizes additional functionality (detecting etc. such as new V. modem protocol, DTMF). Calling is routed to ACD from MCI. ACD preserves a matrix, and content is which modem is available. ACD also communicates by letter with ISNAP, and the latter carries out a group selection in minute and determines which agency organizes responsible this and calls out, and determines that also which has time to process this calling among the agency. In another embodiment, do not have ACD can dispose the DSP resource yet, connect in succession with switchboard direct. In this embodiment, the DSP resource is to use based on the Route Selection step of NCS to manage.

2. act on behalf of

The agency can be hdr video operator (MTOC that video capability is arranged) or automated procedures (video ARU). ACD knows which proxy port is available, and the agency is connected to proxy port.

3. video keeps (video on hold) server

If ACD does not have proxy port to use, the calling subscriber just is connected to video and keeps server, and latter's energy broadcast advertisement or other nonreciprocal video are until ACD finds the proxy port of a free time.

4. video mail server

Video mail messages is here stored. The client can manage their mail, and can record greeting, stores at this server.

5. video content engine

Video on demand content is deposited and is resided on the video content engine. The video that is stored in here may be former video conference of recording, training TV etc.

6. be scheduled to engine

When people wanted to arrange a multipart video-meeting, they can stipulate participant and time in this system. Configuration can be finished under hdr video operator's help or by other certain input method.

7. video bridge circuit

Because H.324 be a point-to-point protocol, multi-conference unit (mcu) (MCU) needs each participant of management to call out and video flowing suitably is redirected. The MCU meeting will be opened to the client who has H.324 with H.320 consistent system.

B. scheme

Computer or machine top TV have H.324 consistent software, and the modem that uses at POTS is arranged, and speed is 28.8kbps (V.34) or higher most likely. A target is to call out to the opposing party. If they do not answer or be busy, the promoter just can be chosen as destination one side and stay video-mail. Another target is plan and participates in the meeting that two above participants are arranged.

C. connect and set up

Figure 19 B represents to set up according to the call connection of preferred embodiment. Carry out video call to someone three kinds of methods are arranged. First method is, directly call they (Figure 19 B 1 and 7). If the line is busy in the destination or do not answer, the calling subscriber just can carry out another to 1 800 VID MAIL and call out, and carries out suitable process as described below.

When the user when 1 group " 1 800 VID MAIL ", the ACD on the DSP modem bank will connect a switch to modem 2, connect a port to agency 3. Then, the user signs in to system with the custom terminal program of a special use. H.324 this terminal program adopts, and the data flow part of bandwidth (adopting T.120 standard of ITU)-latter is called V-mail data interface (VMDI). The calling subscriber can from graphic user interface, icon or other menu, select:

-browse and retrieve the MCI client's of video capability catalogue,

-call out another H.324 consistent software program,

The video-mail of storage of-establishment and forwarding is delivered for later,

-personalized and record the hello messages of their video-mail,

-check and manage their video-mail,

-check the selection (video request program) of doing the storehouse from record.

In another embodiment, the user can dial " 1 800 324 CALL " and call out a number. Then, if the destination number is 1 139 375 1772, then the modem dialup string will be that (comma ', ' tells modem to do minibreak when dialing " ATDT 1 800 324 CALL,,, 1 319 375 1772 ". ) when carrying out to the connection of 1 800 324 CALL, just carrying out one from promoter's connection, the other side of connection is MCI switch 1, arrives the selected ARU 5a by ACD 2a, 3a again.

ARU 5a detects the DTMF tone of obtaining the destination number by the DTMF tone of telephone keypad or miscellaneous equipment input with generation. The promoter is in hold mode separately at ARU 5a during destination number 5a, 6a and 7 call out. If answer the destination, origin person just is connected to the destination, and both sides' modem just can connect, so ARU 5a is discharged. If the line is busy in the destination or do not answer, call out and just be transferred to 1 800 VID MAIL or certain agency by DSP modem bank 2. If do not detect DTMF tone, call out and just be transferred to certain agency by DSP modem bank 2. The agency will carry out and H.324 being connected of calling subscriber, and ask their destination number (or offering help). The architecture of this selection scheme is similar in direct line MCI system and detects and mode one this paper of transmitting facsimile once discussed for an alternative.

D. call intent ground

When the destination number was known, video kept server just to provide video input for H.324 connecting 4. Carry out new calling from acting on behalf of 5,6 to destination number 7. When the detailed embodiment of design, require a problem analyzing, be requirement determine modem can be under the condition that does not roll off the production line after conversion operations re-synchronization. If the destination number is answered, and be a modem, then must connect with the speed identical with promoter's modem speed. After modem was shaken hands, ACD indication switch discharged

agency

3,5,

discharges modem

2 and 6, and the promoter is connected to

destination

1 and 7. Destination PC recognizes that this connection is a H.324 calling (not being to fax or other), so video call continues.

In another embodiment, if the destination answer, and be a modem, a connection just set up. So, H.324 call out at two DSP modems of use for two. The agency can discharge from calling out 3 and 5. Input data from each calling are copied into other calling 2 and 6. Like this, the agency just can monitor video storage and the video call of transmitting 9. When (drop) carrier was rolled off the production line in a connection, video call was just finished, and the modem carrier of being responsible for all the other callings is just rolled off the production line.

E. recording of video mail, storage and forwarding video and greeting

If the destination number is not answered or the line is busy, video mail server is greeted with regard to play suitable video-mail for the owner of destination number 8. Then the calling subscriber stays next video messaging, and video messaging is stored on the video mail server. To the record of storage and the video of transmitting video and aforesaid to stay video messaging just the same. Parameters such as destination number, forwarding time and any current available audio storage and forwarding feature all by the VMDI input, perhaps uses human vision operation person (or automated video ARU) to transmit.

Record the one by one greeting of property, be used for having the people busy or do not answer playback when not contacting with you because of you, its method is similar to and stays video-mail. The selection of this way is finished by VMDI or notified to the hdr video operator.

F. retrieve video mail and video request program

The user can select their video-mail of periodic polling, and whether check has new information, perhaps allows video mail server have new information etc. to bide one's time at them and calls out termly them. Configuration is finished by VMDI or hdr video operator. The management of video-mail and checking also carries out by VMDI, perhaps contacts with the hdr video operator.

To video request program (VOD), the selection of the video that check will be passed through VMDI. The video conference that these videos record before may being, training TV etc. are stored on the video content engine 9.

G. video conference scheduling

The user can by VMDI or the navigation of internet 10 WWW forms, perhaps plan a multipoint conference with the hdr video operator communication. This information is stored on the reservation engine 11. Convention goer to other notifies this to plan to carry out with video-mail, Email or other method. To there be a selection to come by video-mail (perhaps Email, voice mail, paging service or any other available Notification Method), remind the convention goer registered at special time (for example meeting is front 1 hour). MCU (video bridge circuit) can call out each participant 12, and perhaps H.324 the user can dial in to MCU at planned time 12.

XIII. the visual telephone on the internet

Figure 19 E represents according to the architecture of preferred embodiment at internet transmission visual telephone. Video conference based on RTP (RTP) refers to transmission as audio frequency, video and the data of the encapsulation of RTP message. For the videoconference session based on RTP, end user station is at first set up a dialing point-to-point (PPP) with the internet and is connected, and then uses internet transmissions RTP message. Audio-frequency information is pressed G.732.1.1 audio coder-decoder standard compression, and video is pressed H.263 video coder-decoder standard compression of ITU, and data are pressed the ITU-T.120 standard transmission.

RTP is a kind of agreement that provides support for the application with real-time characteristic. Although the UDP/IP initial target networked environment that is it, RTP is independent of transmission, therefore can use at IPX or other agreement. RTP does not solve resource reservation or quality control of the business problem, and on the contrary, it but relies on for example RSVP of RSVP. For transmission service that most of network user was familiar with is point-to-point, or single channel is propagated (unicast) business. This is the standards service form that the gateway protocol such as HDLC and TCP provides.

(based on cable network, any rate) of common less use is broadcasting service. On catenet, broadcasting is unacceptable (because the network bandwidth is used in broadcasting everywhere, whether and it is interesting to them to ignore indivedual subnets), thereby they generally are limited in LAN scope use (broadcasting service is provided by the low level network agreement such as IP). Whether even on LAN, broadcasting also often is out of favour, because they require all machines all to carry out certain processing, decide machine interesting to broadcast data.

For being that the widely data of potential audience's design are arranged, the transmission service that more corresponds to reality is that multichannel is propagated (multicast). According to the multichannel model on the wide area network, only having has the host of positive interest just to allow this data pass to them to specific multichannel propagation is professional; This has limited the bandwidth consumption to link between the promoter of multichannel propagation data and the recipient. On LAN, many interface cards have a kind of like this mechanism, and namely interface card can automatically be ignored kernel and do not register its interesting multichannel propagation data, and the result does not just have unnecessary processing expenditure on uninterested host.

A. parts

The RSVP router has broadcasting from the MBONE function of the video of video content engine and MCI conference space network. MCI will have one to propagate and many single channels are transferred to internet MBONE network in addition at local multichannel.

RSVP is that the procotol that can obtain for their data flow special service quality (QOS) is used in a kind of internet that makes. This will be general (but be not must) requires in advance or the resource on the reserved data path dynamically. RSVP is parts of " integrated service " internet in the future, it provide be most hard-working be again real-time service quality. Provided an embodiment in the later detailed description.

When among certain host (terminal system) be applied as a specific service quality of its data flow request the time, RSVP is used to each router that reaches on this data flow path is passed in this request, and the service that keeps router and host state to be asked to provide. Although RSVP is for setting up resource reservation exploitation, it is easy to be changed to other network control message that is fit on the transmission of data flow path.

1. catalogue and registration engine

When people be connected to the internet (no matter by modem dialup, directly connect or alternate manner) time, they can be registered in oneself in the catalogue. This catalogue participates in a conference for determining whether that someone can be convened.

2. act on behalf of

The agency can be hdr video operator (MTOC that video capability is arranged) or automated procedures (video ARU). According to preferred embodiment, the design of internet ACD so that proxy port can be managed. ACD knows which proxy port is available, and the agency is connected to available proxy port. If ACD does not have proxy port to use, the calling subscriber just is connected to video and keeps server, and latter's energy broadcast advertisement and other nonreciprocal video are until ACD finds idle proxy port.

3. video mail server

Video mail messages is here stored. The user can manage their mail, and can record the greeting that will store at this server.

4. video content engine

5. scheduling meeting engine

6.MCI conference space

This is the virtual reality district that the client can occur therein. Each participant is embodied as one " incarnation ". Each incarnation has many abilities and feature, such as image individuality, video, sound etc. Come reciprocation by the object of processing various representative document sharing, file transfer etc. between incarnation is mutual, can speak mutually, also can see mutually.

7. virtual reality space engine

Conference space is generated and management by virtual reality engine. Any other logical description of the manipulation of virtual reality engine management object and conference space.

B. scheme

If the user has one to the current connection of internet, the user will use the H.263 consistent systems soft ware that adopts RTP (rather than TCP) in the internet. If the user also wishes to add virtual reality NCI conference space, create/check video-mail, the user just can add a virtual reality session.

C. connect and set up

Just directly not call out by menu and options navigation, as initial call in the straightforward procedure of carrying out video call to another person on the internet. If yet the line is busy in the destination or do not answer, MCI just provides the service of preserving message.

The user can sign in to telecommunications network server (telnet server) (for example telephone network vmail.mci.com), perhaps client computer or the WWW (for example http://vmail.mci.com) of user's customization. Services menu is called V-Mail data-interface (VMDI), is similar to the VMDI that can use when dialling by POTS as mentioned above.

The calling subscriber can select from menu:

-browse and retrieve the MCI user's of video capability catalogue,

-call out another H.263 consistent software systems,

-create a storage to deliver for later with video-mail with forwarding,

-personalized and record their video-mail hello messages,

-check and manage their video-mail,

-check from the selection (video request program) of record the storehouse.

After the user has specified the correspondent that will call out by title, IP address or other sign of pointing out the destination, will check catalogue. Might not carry out actual call and just can determine whether the destination can call accepted. So, owing to can determine the destination with call accepted, therefore just can tell promoter's video client to go to be connected with this destination. If the calling subscriber so just can start calling with Java, JavaScript or Helper App automatically visiting VMDI with WWW browser (for example Netscape Nayigator, Microsoft Internet Exploror, internetMCI Navigator etc.). Can not finish if call out, the selection of the video-mail of staying just will be arranged.

D. recording of video mail, storage and forwarding video and greeting

If it is inaccessible (off line, the line is busy or do not answer etc.) that the agency determines the destination correspondent, video mail server is just play a suitable video-mail greeting to the owner of destination number 8. Then the calling subscriber stays next video messaging, is stored on the video mail server. Identical with the mode that stays as mentioned above video messaging with the videograph that the forwarding video carries out to storage. Parameters such as destination number, forwarding time and any current available audio storage and forwarding feature all by the VMDI input, perhaps uses human vision operation person (or automated video ARU) to transmit.

The client can record their Extraordinary and greet, and being used for is having the people because doing or do not answer and show greeting when you do not contact, this be similar to that the mode that stays video-mail is finished by VMDI or with the hdr video operator communication.

E. retrieve video mail and video on demand

To video request program (VOD), the selection of the video that check will provide by VMDI. The video conference that these videos record before may being, training TV etc. are stored on the video content engine.

F. video conference scheduling

The user can navigate by VMDI or internet 10 WWW forms, perhaps plans one in the meeting of conference space with the hdr video operator communication. This information is stored on the scheduling meeting engine 8. Other convention goer obtains this plan by video-mail, Email or other method. Be equipped with an optional reminder, by video-mail (perhaps Email, voice mail, paging service or any other available Notification Method), remind the convention goer registered at special time (for example meeting is front 1 hour).

G. virtual reality

Can generate a virtual meeting room for Multi-Party Conference by the virtual reality space engine. The realization of this interface comprises one based on the embodiment of VRML. Everyone controls one " incarnation (avatar) ". Each incarnation can have many different features, such as image representation (static representations or movable image " head ") and audio frequency (speech or music). Exchanges data and cooperation are all action that can carry out in each virtual reality meeting room. Special-purpose MBONE network allows the multichannel of the data flow of conference member to propagate. Because everyone has different videos during reciprocation in virtual reality space, H.263, the input that the virtual reality space engine just can be optimized everyone flows to other everyone broadcasting, and method is that a multichannel is propagated the incarnation stream that those are considered for each specific incarnation.

XIV. video conference architecture

A kind of architecture of the multimedia communication be used to comprising Real-time voice, video and data is described in the MCI video conference. This architecture has also defined the mutual operation with other video conference standard. This architecture has also defined Multipoint weighting and control, directory service and video-mail service.

A. feature

The video conference architecture is a kind of multi-media service system, and being designed for provides many features and function, comprising:

Point-to-point visual telephone

Band is useful on the multimedia videoconference of the MCU of control and multimedia signal processing

Gateway support and other based on ITU H.320 with the H.324 mutual operation of the video conferencing system of standard of ITU

Support Real-time voice, video and data or any combination

With standard transmission protocol RTP transmitting multimedia information flow between end user terminal

The exchange of dynamic capability between the support terminal user terminal and model selection such as ITU be video and ITU audio frequency G.723 H.263.

Figure 19 C represents the video conference architecture according to preferred embodiment. Parts and the description details of this video conference architecture are as follows.

B. parts

One group of building block of video conferencing system comprises:

End user terminal

The lan interconnection system

ITU is server H.323

Support service unit

1. end user terminal

End user terminal is the terminal point of communication. The user communicates and participates in video conference with end user terminal. End user terminal comprises H.323 H.320 terminal 9 and terminal 10 H.324 of

terminal

1 and 8, ITU of ITU, by provide call out control, multiple spot control and gateway function ITU H.325 server interconnect. End user terminal can be carried out the multimedia input and output, is equipped with telephone plant, microphone, video camera, video display monitor and keyboard.

2.LAN interconnection system

Lan interconnection system 3 is MCI exchange networks 2 and comprises H.323 server 4, video content engine 5, video mail server 6 and the H.323 interface system between the system of LIST SERVER 7 H.323.

The end user terminal of participating in video-phone session or videoconference session is set up with the MCI exchange network and is communicated by letter, and by lan interconnection system and server communication H.323. The lan interconnection system provides the function of similar ACD for video conferencing system H.323.

3.ITU server H.323

H.323 server 4 for support different video meeting standard-as ITU H.320 and ITU H.324-terminal between inter-working various services are provided, comprise and call out control, multiple spot control, Multipoint process and gateway service.

H.323 server is comprised of one group of individual component, these parts mutually between communication, and communicate by letter with LIST SERVER H.323 with other external system such as end user terminal, video mail server. H.323 the different parts of server comprise:

H.323 the equipment (Gatekeeper) of keeping goal

The operator service module

H.323 multipoint control unit (MCU)

H.323 gateway

4. the equipment of keeping goal

H.323 the equipment of keeping goal is to H.323 terminal and gateway unit provide Call Control Service. The miscellaneous service that equipment on duty at the gate provides comprises:

Call control signals transmission with terminal, gateway and MCU;

Access control to the access video conferencing system;

Call authorization

The bandwidth control and management

Transport address conversion for reference address between the video conferencing system of different signal work;

The call manager of ongoing calling;

Interface with the LIST SERVER that directory service is provided [7];

Interface with the video mail server [6] that the video-mail service is provided;

The equipment of keeping goal H.225 flows packetizing with ITU and synchronization process is carried out various services, and it and operator's service module are closely integrated, so that the human operator may service to be provided.

5. operator service module

The operator service module provides manually/and automatic operation person is professional, and it and equipment on duty at the gate are closely integrated. Be positioned at artificial or automatic operation person's terminal of upper other position of LAN by operator service module and equipment reciprocation on duty at the gate, so that required operator service to be provided.

6. multipoint control unit (MCU)

MCU is comprised of multipoint controller and multipoint processor, and they jointly provide multiple spot control and process service for video conference. The control function that multipoint controller provides is supported the meeting between the three or more terminals. The capabilities exchange of each terminal in multipoint controller execution and the multipoint conference. Multipoint processor provides processing to audio frequency, video and/or data flow-comprise mixing, exchange to process-and other required processing under the control of multipoint controller. H.245 message and process realize feature and the function of multipoint controller and multipoint processor to MCU with ITU.

7. gateway

H.323 gateway provides the suitable conversion between the various transformats. Transformation Service comprises:

H.225 and as system's part H.320 H.221 between the call-signaling message conversion;

H.245 and the communication process H.242 conversion;

Video, audio frequency and data format are as H.263, H.261, G.723, G.728 and the conversion T.120.

H.323 gateway provides translation function for transformat, call setup and control signal and process.

8. supporting business unit

Support service unit to comprise H.323 LIST SERVER 7, video mail server 6 and video content engine 5, they with server interaction work H.323 in order to different service to be provided to end user terminal. H.323 LIST SERVER provide directory service and with the unit reciprocation on duty at the gate of server H.323. Video mail server is the storage vault of all video-mail of generating of system H.323, it with the unit reciprocation on duty at the gate of server H.323 to create and the playback video mail. The video content engine is the storage vault of the video content of all other types, can serve end user terminal. Video content engine and the unit reciprocation on duty at the gate of server H.323.

C. general introduction

Based on video conference architecture H.323 an architecture of multimedia communication that comprises Real-time voice, video and data or comprise any combination of visual telephone has been described fully. Having the user of terminal H.323 can participate in multimedia videoconference session, point-to-point video-phone session or with other terminal use who does not have video equipment the session of audio frequency only be arranged. This architecture also comprise according to as ITU H.320 with ITU standard H.324 and the gateway of other video conference terminal inter-working.

This architecture comprises a LIST SERVER that is used for providing the full directory service that comprises gopher. Video mail server is that the record of video-mail and the part of playback function are provided in this architecture. The video content engine also is the part that the content of multimedia delivery service is provided in the general architecture.

H.323 the terminal of participating in video conference or video-phone session is by MCI exchange network and server communication H.323. H.323 the various services that provide of server comprise and call out that control, information flow are delivered, multiple spot control, also for H.320 and or H.324 terminal mutually work gateway service is provided. Server also provides directory service and video-mail service.

The H.323 terminal that starts video call is set up communication link by MCI exchange network and server H.323. Permit after it enters network when server H.323, the terminal that server is just called out to this startup provides the catalogue of other available terminal, selects a destination terminal or destination group to participate in video conference by this terminal. Then server is set up and selected destination terminal or the communication link of set of terminal, at last with calling terminal and called terminal/set of terminal bridge joint. If the destination terminal is unavailable or the line is busy, server just provides the selection that deposits a video-mail in to calling terminal. Server is also notified the recipient of this video-mail and as required recipient's service of retrieve video mail is provided. Other business-professional such as the as required content delivery to terminal is H.323 also provided and is controlled by server H.323.

D. call-flow for example

In detail explain now that the different type of calls that will explain comprise: point to point call-comprise to other H.323, H.320 and H.324 calling of terminal, multipoint videoconference is called out based on the call-flow of the video conference of architecture H.323.

Figure 19 C represents the various call-flow according to preferred embodiment.

1. point to point call

A) case 1:H.323 terminal arrives another H.323 terminal

Start the H.323 terminal 1 of calling out and pass through the MCI exchange network to another H.323 calling of terminal [8] startup. To control this session with equipment on duty at the gate, comprise call setup and call out control. The end user interface of this terminal is arbitrary WEB browser that buys.

Calling terminal 1 starts a dial-up to the MCI exchange network;

Calling terminates on the EM equipment module of H.323 keeping goal of server 4 H.323 by lan interconnection 3 systems;

Set up a ppp link between calling terminal and the equipment on duty at the gate 4 at a known unreliable transport address/port.

Calling terminal sends an access request message to equipment on duty at the gate [4];

The equipment of keeping goal 4 sends an admission confirm message, and communicates by letter with LIST SERVER 7, and directory information is beamed back calling terminal for showing that at calling terminal this directory information shows together with the method for calling options as a web page or leaf. Method of calling comprises point-to-point or conferencing.

Then the access exchange is to connect for H.225 call control message transmission foundation is reliable on a known port.

Terminal use's selected element is to point mode, also the destination of selective call. This is to set up request message.

The equipment of keeping goal 4 is reinstated with operator service module/operator one and is set up request call terminal called 8.

Ask unsuccessfully if set up, the equipment 4 of keeping goal is just notified unsuccessfully to calling terminal, and provides a selection that stays video-mail to calling terminal.

Stay next video-mail if the user selection of terminal 1 is the user of terminal 8, the equipment 4 of keeping goal just set up one with being connected of video mail server 6, and receive a reliable port address from mail server 6 and be used for H.245 connection.

The equipment 4 of keeping goal is also set up one with video mail server and is connected for H.225 calling out to control.

The equipment of keeping goal 4 then sends one to calling terminal 1 and represents the H.245 reliable port address of control channel. H.245 may relate to equipment on duty at the gate in the control channel communication.

Calling terminal 1 is set up reliable a connection for control channel H.245, in order to carry out H.245 process, and such as capabilities exchange, mode selection etc.

After capabilities exchange, H.245 process will be used to different Media Streams to set up logic channel.

This capabilities exchange also is included as the transmission of different media flows and determines the dynamic port address.

The dynamic port of Media Stream in various logical channels transmits.

In case terminal has been finished video-mail, it just closes the logic channel of video after video flowing stops to transmit.

Transfer of data is stopped, and the logic channel of data is closed.

Audio transmission is stopped, and the logic channel of audio frequency is closed.

H.245 call cleared message is addressed to peer-entities.

To clear message of equipment 7 transmission on duty at the gate, equipment on duty at the gate sends to video mail server 6 with this clear message again to calling terminal 1 at port H.225.

This clear message is identified, call clearing.

Ask successfully if set up, terminal called just responds with a connection message that comprises the reliable port address that H.245 connects.

The port address of equipment 4 usefulness connection messages on duty at the gate and H.245 control channel communication responds calling terminal 1.

Calling terminal 1 is set up H.225 being connected of call signal transmission that is used for gateway 4, set up another H.245 control channel communication connection and reply gateway 4 with the connection acknowledge message.

The equipment 4 of keeping goal will connect again acknowledge message and send to terminal called 8.

Terminal called 8 is set up now one and is H.225 called out control connection, also sets up another and communicates by letter with H.245 being connected for control channel of equipment 4 on duty at the gate.

Set up H.245 the terminal switch ability of control channel and other H.245 initial procedure for reliable communication, before capabilities exchange, can select to open a voice-grade channel.

After the capabilities exchange, for each Media Stream is set up logic channel at dynamic port.

In case opened media logical channel at dynamic port, just can switched-media information.

During session, can call H.245 that control procedure changes channel architecture such as mode is controlled, ability etc.

H.225 control channel also is used for the particular procedure of equipment [4] request on duty at the gate, comprises call state, allocated bandwidth etc.

If termination, the whichever terminal can start one and stop video messaging, and break of video is transmitted, and then closes the logic channel of video;

Transfer of data is interrupted, and the logic channel of data is closed;

Audio transmission is interrupted, and the logic channel of audio frequency is closed;

H.245 end session message is sent out, and transmission is stopped on the control channel, and control channel is closed;

The terminal that receives end session message will repeat closing process, then carry out call clearing with call signal channel H.225;

The terminal that starts this termination will send a clear message to equipment 4 on duty at the gate at control channel H.225, and the latter is again to reciprocity terminal transmission clear message. Peer terminal is confirmed to take out stitches, and this is replied and is forwarded to the startup terminal, calls out finally to discharge.

B) case 2:H.323 terminal arrives H.320 terminal

Call one to the H.320 calling of terminal 9 from the calling of H.323 terminal 1 startup by the MCI exchange network. The equipment of keeping goal participates in this session of control together with gateway, comprises call setup and calls out control. The end user interface of terminal is arbitrary Web browser or the similar interface of market sale.

The H.323 terminal of explaining in call-flow and the upper case is to another terminal similar H.323, and exception is that gateway component 4 is introducings between equipment 4 on duty at the gate and terminal called 9. Gateway will comprise that the H.323 message conversion of audio frequency, video, data and control becomes H.320 message, and vice versa. If H.320 terminal 9 starts a calling to terminal [1] H.323, then carried out by gateway and initially dial routine, then to be taken over by equipment on duty at the gate and call out control, calling is carrying out described in case like that as above.

C) case 3:H.323 terminal arrives H.324 terminal

Start the H.323 terminal 1 of calling out and start one to the H.324 calling of terminal 10 by the MCI exchange network. The equipment of keeping goal participates in the control session together with gateway, comprises call setup and calls out control. The end user interface of terminal is Web browser or similar interface.

The H.323 terminal of explaining in call-flow and the front case is to another terminal similar H.323, and exception is that gateway component 4 is introducings between equipment 4 on duty at the gate and terminal called 9.

Gateway 4 will comprise that the H.323 message of audio frequency, video, data and control becomes code and becomes H.324 message, and vice versa.

If H.324 terminal 10 is then carried out by gateway and is initially dialed routine to H.323 calling of terminal 1 startup, then taken over by equipment on duty at the gate and call out control, call out and as described in the case of front, carry out.

2. multipoint videoconference is called out

With regard to multipoint videoconference, all terminals and equipment on duty at the gate 4 exchange initial call signals transmit and set up message, then are connected to multipoint controller 4 to carry out actual meeting, comprise the H.245 control channel message transmission by the equipment 4 of keeping goal.

Below be the consideration of doing for setting up meeting:

After initial access control message exchange, submit a web page or leaf to the user, content is the information about conference type and participant's dynamic listing.

Submit the web page or leaf of a conferencing information to the participant who later adds, also require participant's input validation information.

All users are connected to multipoint controller [4] by the equipment [4] of keeping goal.

Multipoint controller [4] distributed intelligence in various participants.

E. conclude the speech

The video conference architecture is the total solution to the multimedia communication that comprises Real-time voice, video and data or any combination (comprising point-to-point visual telephone). This architectural definition with the mutual work of ITU proposed standard and other system.

Other service comprises directory service and video-mail service, also is the part of general architecture.

XV. video storage with transmit architecture

Video storage has been described the video on demand content transmission system with the forwarding architecture. Content can comprise video and audio frequency or audio frequency is only arranged. The input source of content is from the existing video conference device of MCI or from any video/audio source. Input video with different reference formats such as ITU H.320, ITU H.324, ITU H.263 or MPEG in digital library, store, and deliver to client computer with desired form. To on the internet or comprise the delivery of client computer of the dial line of ISDN, each different data format has a single memory with different speed.

A. feature

Video storage and the design of transmitting architecture have abundant feature and function, comprising:

The Audio and Video of distribution program request;

Support different compression and transmission standard, comprise IP (Internet Protocol) and RTP (RTP) ITU on the two H.320, ITU H.324, MPEG and ITU H.263;

Support to reach the content delivery that passes through low speed (28.8kbps) analog phone line by the dialing isdn line on the internet;

Support single source contents, many storages, transformat and many transmission speeds;

Support Content Management and the file of multi-format.

B. architecture

Figure 19 D is the video storage and forwarding architecture according to preferred embodiment.

C. parts

Video storage can fully be described with following parts with the forwarding architecture.

Content creating and code conversion.

Content Management and delivery

Content retrieval and demonstration.

1. content is set up and code conversion.

Input source comprises analog video, from the video of multipoint control unit (MCU) and other video source 1a and 1b. Input content is converted into reference format, as ITU H.261, ITU H.263, ITU H.320, ITU H.263, ITU H.324, MPEG, be supported in addition on the RTP H.263 delivery and on

Internet Protocol

2 and 3 H.263 the form of delivery. Input just begins by H.263 encoding, and code converts various other forms to and stores 2 alternatively. Content after the code conversion is stored at different servers, and every kind of a kind of content type of server stores is to serve various client computer, and each client computer is supported different form 5a, 5b, 5c, 5d and 5f.

2. Content Management and delivery

Content is stored on the different servers, wherein the specific form of each server support. Content is managed by digital library, and the composition of digital library is:

The index of-organize content 4 and the index server of document,

-be used for the storage of content 5a, 5b, 5c, 5d and 5f object server,

-as the front end of index and object server, with the interactive proxy client of different server of request content 6.

The means of content delivery are:

-internet,

-dialing isdn line,

The dialing analog of telephone line of-28.8kbps,

Content format is the mpeg stream that transmits at IP or RTP, H.320 stream, H.324 stream or stream H.263.

3. content retrieval and demonstration.

Content retrieval is to be undertaken by the client computer of supporting following various forms:

-MPEG client computer-7a;

The ITU of-support RTP is client computer-7b H.263;

The ITU of-support IP is client computer-7c H.263;

-ITU is client computer-7d H.320

-ITU is client computer-7e H.324.

Content is to be retrieved as required by different client computer, shows at local display.

Client computer is supported the function as VCR, such as F.F., fall etc. soon.

D. general introduction

From the analog video of homology not and received as input from the H.320 video of MCU after, on request code convert to various forms such as ITU H.324, ITU H.261, ITU H.263 or MPEG, be stored on the different object servers of each form special use. Object server all by the index service management, is referred to as digital library again together. Any request to content is all received by index server from client computer, obtains again the service of object server by proxy client.

The request of index server or storehouse server response agent client computer, storage on object server, renewal and searching object-as H.261, H.263 or the MPEG multimedia messages. Index server has whole index informations of all different objects of storing at object server, also deposits information on which object server relevant for information. Index information on the index server can be accessed by proxy client, with from different object server retrieving multimedia contents. Safety and access control also are the parts of index server function.

Object server provide physical store and as video conference information from conference facility of content of multimedia-comprise-the part of digital library of storage vault. Content of multimedia is stored with reference format, can be retrieved by the proxy client program request. The content of multimedia that each object server is exclusively used in specific format as H.261, H.263, MPEG etc. Comprise about the tissue of the content of multimedia of the information of the special object server that is exclusively used in certain multimedia form and index information by the index service management. Object server passes to proxy client with the content of multimedia of storing after receiving the specific instruction of index server.

Acting server is the front end of digital library, by All Clients by access to the Internet to obtain the content of multimedia of program request. Proxy client also is WWW (WWW) server, when accessed to page of client transfers. Client computer and proxy client reciprocation are thus by WWW page or leaf and digital library reciprocation. Client computer by with the reciprocation request content of multimedia of WWW page or leaf. Proxy client by WWW page subscribing client request and process this request. Then proxy client communicates by letter with index server, carries out Object Query by the request of client computer. Index server is communicated by letter with one of them object server that is exclusively used in the multimedia form of asking, and then according to index information available on the index server, the instruction object server passes to proxy client with the content of multimedia of asking. Proxy client passes to the client computer of the request of making from this object server receiving multimedia content with it.

Client computer is connected to server by the internet or by the dial-up connection on the analog line of isdn line or 28.8kbps, specifically decides on request video format and client capabilities. H.320 client computer connects by isdn line, H.324 client computer request service on the analog of telephone line of 28.8kbps. The H.263 client computer of the H.263 client computer of MPEG client computer or employing RTP or employing IP is by the Internet request service. The front end that is used for the content of multimedia inquiry and shows such as the WWW browser, is integrated into the part of client computer, for the terminal use provides wieldy interface.

After client computer was received by proxy client the request of video, proxy client passed to index server with request, the latter then process this request and with the special object server communication, index content is prepared to transmit in addition. Object server passes to client computer by the internet with institute's request content. With regard to dial-up link, content is passed gets back on the link of having set up.

In a word, video storage and forwarding architecture have been described an integrated system of establishment, code conversion, storage, file, management and transmission Audio and Video or program request audio frequency. The transmission of video and audio frequency or audio frequency will on the internet, perhaps be undertaken by ISDN or analog phone line. Comprise that video and the content of audio frequency or audio frequency are to transmit with various data rates from each indivedual memory location of serving different transfer rates.

XVI. vision operation person

A. hardware architecture

The system hardware that Figure 96 represents allows vision operation person to participate in video conference or video call, provides numerous services to the video calling subscriber. Have in the service that provides: answer input video and call out or dial out to customer rs site, access certain system for keeping the video conference plan, to use bandwidth on-demand interoperability group (" BONDING ") call out or International Telecommunications Union-telecommunication standardization branch (ITU-T) standard H.320 the calling subscriber of many rates carrying service (MRBS) Integrated Service Digital Network(ISDN)s (ISDN) be connected into video conference or video call, monitor, check and recording videoconference or video call, playback is video conference or the video call of record in the past, and the consulting of video conference calling subscriber during video conference or the video call is provided support or makes and replying.

The composition of system hardware is vision operation person's terminal 40001, call server 40002, multimedia maincenter (MM Hub) 40003, wide area network maincenter (" WAN Hubs ") 40004, multi-conference unit (mcu) (" MCU ") 40005, BONDING server 40006, client terminal 40007 and exchange network (" MCI ") 40008.

In one embodiment, vision operation person's terminal 40001 is one, and processing speed is 90MHz or higher based on the PC of Pentium (Pentium), with the RAM of 32MB and the capacity hard disk drive of 1GB at least. Operating system among this embodiment is the Windows 95 of Microsoft. Specific characteristic comprises Incite multimedia communication program (" MCP ") software, is used for H.320 video coder-decoder (" codec ") card (for example Z240 coding decoder of Zydacron), IsoEthernet (" the isoEthernet ") NIC of audio ﹠ video compression. The MCP management IsoEthernet NIC of Incite is in order to set up the synchronizing channel of 96 ISDN B-channels, in order to transmission video signal in equal ratio channel.

Call server 40002 among this embodiment is one, and processing speed is 90MHz or higher based on the PC of Pentium, with the RAM of 32MB and the capacity hard disk drive of 1GB at least. Operating system among this embodiment is the Windows nt server of Microsoft. Specific characteristic comprises the service of Incite call server and ethernet network interface card.

The different embodiment of system can adapt to any MM maincenter 40003 models and any WAN maincenter 40004 models. In one embodiment, MM maincenter 40003 is Incite multimedia maincenters, the WAN maincenter is Incite WAN maincenter, MM maincenter 40003 is a LAN (" LAN ") maincenters, it by many support IsoEthernet interfaces, each has the port of the bandwidth that is comprised of 96 full duplex B channels, be connected to PC-such as vision operation person's terminal 40001 and BONDING server 40006, be connected to WAN maincenter 40004, perhaps be connected to the MM maincenter of other rank connection. In addition, MM maincenter 40003 can be by such as the Ethernet data of accepting to reach 10Mbps from Ethernet interface of call server 40002. WAN maincenter 40004 plays a part MM maincenter 40003 and one such as the interface between the public or private switching network of MCI40008, video conference is expanded to contain outside the WAN or LAN of MM maincenter 40003 and WAN maincenter 40004.

The different embodiment of system also are fit to MCU 40005 equipment of different manufacturers. The function of MCU 40005 is to allow to use (may communicate by letter at the different digital networks based on circuit) video conference calling subscriber of distinct device to communicate with one another in single video conference. For example, an embodiment adopts the multimedia conferencing services device (" MCS ") of VideoServer, its mixed audio is processed video to allow each video conference calling subscriber to see simultaneously other calling subscriber to allow any one video conference calling subscriber to hear complete video conference discussion.

In one embodiment, BONDING server 40006 is based on the PC of Pentium, has 90MHZ or higher processing speed, the RAM of 32MB, and memory capacity is the hard disk drive of 1.0GB at least. Operating system among this embodiment is Microsoft Windows 95. Special feature comprises Incite BONDING server software, a digital signal processor (DSP) card (such as " TMS320C80 " DSP of Texas Instrument company), an IsoEthernet NIC. When client terminal 40007 carried out BONDING or collective's video call, BONDING server 40006 just became these Call Transfers the inner many speed isdn call used of vision operation person's platform.

In preferred embodiment, client terminal be one based on the PC of Pentium, processing speed 90MHz or higher, with the RAM of 32MB, memory capacity is the hard disk drive of 1.0GB at least. Operating system among this embodiment is Microsoft Windows 95, and client terminal 40007 is equipped with audio and video equipment, makes itself and ITU-T standard H.320 compatible.

In this embodiment, exchange network is the Integrated Service Digital Network(ISDN) (ISDN) that is provided by MCI4 0008.

Vision operation person's terminal 40001 is to be connected by an IsoEthernet interface with bandwidth of 96 full duplex B passages with MM maincenter 40003, and this interface allows nearly 8 video conference client computer that respectively adopt client terminal 40007 of each vision operation person's management. LAN (" LAN ") connection was connected with WAN maincenter 40004 when this MM maincenter 40003 passed through similarly to wait. WAN maincenter 40004 many speed of usefulness isdn interfaces are connected to MCU 40005 by MCI 40008. Another WAN maincenter 40004 many speed of usefulness isdn interfaces are connected to MCI 40008, and MCI is connected to each client terminal 40007 by a BONDING or many speed isdn interface. In one three the tunnel connected, MCU 40005, call server 40002 and MM maincenter 40003 connected by an Ethernet wide area network (" WAN ") 40009 between mutually. The MM maincenter 40003 also IsoEthernet interface of the bandwidth by a B channel that 248 complete " when waiting " patterns are arranged is connected to BONDING server 40006.

B. vision operation person's console

The embodiment that makes operator's energy managing video conference call system that Figure 97 represents comprises vision operation person's console system 40101 and external system and interface 40108～40117.

Vision operation person's console 40101 is comprised of graphical user interface (" GUI ") 40102, software systems 40103 and media control system 40107. GUI 40102 and software systems 40103 and media control system 40107 the two reciprocation are in order to make vision operation person can carry out with vision operation person's console system 40101 all functions of vision operation person's invention from vision operation person's terminal (Figure 96 40001).

Software systems 40103 realize following system: dispatching patcher 40104, its managing video operator's scheduling; Record and review system 40105, it records Voice ﹠ Video input and the playback of any calling and inputs by the Voice ﹠ Video of any calling; Calling system interface 40106, it plays the application programming interfaces effect with Incite MCP application program, manages individual calling by carrying out such as the function of exchange of dialing and maintenance.

Dispatching patcher 40104 connects (" ODBC ") interface 40108 by open database and is connected to vision operation person's shared data bank 40111, and the latter is connected to video conference reservation system (" VRS ") 40115 by the interface between VOSD and the VRS 40114 again. VRS 40115 regularly or press the needs of the database proxy system in vision operation person's shared data bank 40111 passes through interface 40114 and submits video conference plans, meeting definition and site definitions to vision operation person's shared data bank 40111. In preferred embodiment, vision operation person's shared data bank 40111 is deposited and is resided on the computer different from the computer that contains vision operation person's console 40101, storing all meetings and site information, so that each vision operation person's console 40101 can be necessary meeting and the site configuration of any conference call retrieval. In another embodiment of the external system related with internal schedule system 40104, vision operation person's shared data bank 40111 can be merged into single system with VRS 40115.

Record and review system 40105 communicates by letter with the vision operation person's storage and reproduce system 40112 that is positioned at vision operation person's terminal (Figure 96 40007) this locality by dynamic data exchange (" DDE "), object linking and embedding (" OLE ") or dynamic link library (" DLL ") interface 40109. Meeting operator storage and reproduce system by meet the ITU-T standard H.320 nonreturn recording equipment 40116 and meet ITU-T standard unidirectional playback device 40117 H.320 and form. Conference Calling is by recording from vision operation person's console 40101 to logger 40116 transmitting digitized audio and video frequency signals H.320. Conference Calling is to be sent to vision operation person's console and playback by the Conference Calling of recording before magnetic disc store retrieval and with video and audio signal from playback device 40117 H.320.

Calling system interface system 40106 is communicated by letter with Incite MCP application program 40113 by DDE interface 40110, with the function of exchange of management such as dialing, maintenance etc.

Media control system 40107 allows GUI 40102 directly to communicate by letter with external component, with GUI 40102 expressions of management Voice ﹠ Video. In the embodiment shown in Figure 40 1, media control system 40107 is communicated by letter with Incite MCP application program 40113 by DDE interface 40110. Incite MCP application program 40113 by DDE interface 40110 to inner media control system 40107, and and then provide all essential call setup feature and characteristics of the multimedias to GUI 40102, place and audio frequency control such as video window.

Figure 98 represents that this system comprises vision operation person's console system 40101 and external system and interface 40108～40117 and 40203～40216 be used to second embodiment of the system that makes the Conference Calling of vision operation person's energy managing video. Yet in this embodiment, software systems 40103 are not only compatible with " MCS " 40205 MCU of VideoServer (video server), and compatible with the MCU application of other manufacturer. So, in house software system MCU control 40201, external software system MCU control system 40208, MCU itself 40214 and 40215 and the interface between them 40206,40210 and 40211 have just appearred among Figure 98. In addition, in this embodiment, because not only Incite MCP 40113 uses but also " other has the program of calling out control interface " 40216 also can provide all call setup and characteristics of the multimedias, so external call control system 40209 is essential, this and the DDE, the OLE that insert or

DLL interface

40207,40212 and 40213 the same. This embodiment also comprises video storage and repeater system 40204 and DDE, OLE or DLL interface 40203. At last, second embodiment added in house software system calling monitor 40202.

As among first embodiment, vision operation person's console system 40101 is comprised of GUI 40102 and software systems 40103. Yet second embodiment also comprises MCU control 40201 and call supervision device 40202 except comprising dispatching patcher 40104, record and review system 40105 and calling system interface 40106.

Dispatching patcher 40104 and related

external system

40108,40111,40114 with 40115 with first embodiment in identical, in Figure 97, represent, above did explanation.

Inner MCU control 40201 communicates by letter to manage the various different specific resources of MCU system and feature by DDE, OLE or DLL interface 40206 from outside MCU control system 40208. MCU control system 40208 or communicate by letter with VideoServer MCS 40215 by meeting talk interface 40211 is perhaps communicated by letter with the MCU 40214 of some other MCU distributors by the special interface 40210 of another distributors.

Record and review system 40105 communicates by letter with repeater system 40204 with video storage with storage and retrieval system 40205 by DDE, OLE or

DLL interface

40109,40203. Storage and retrieval system 40205 communicates by letter with call control system 40209 by another DDE, OLE or DLL interface 40207 with repeater system 40204 with video storage. Call control system 40209 is communicated by letter with unidirectional H.320 playback device 40117 with unidirectional H.320 logger 40116 by another DDE, OLE or DLL interface 40212. Conference Calling is by recording to logger 40116 transmitting digitized audio and video frequency signals H.320 through storage and retrieval system 40205 and call control system 40209 from vision operation person's console 40101. Conference Calling is to be sent to vision operation person console 40101 and playback from playback device 40117 H.320 through call control system 40209 and storage and retrieval system 40205 by the Conference Calling of recording before magnetic disc store retrieval and with video and audio signal. The mode of operation of video storage and repeater system 40204 is similar to storage and retrieval system 40205, communication between record and review system 40105 and call control system 40209.

Call supervision device 40202 comes supervising connections for calling to be connected state with connection by the calling system interfaces 40106 in the periodic polling vision operation person console software systems 40103. Calling system interface 40106 is communicated by letter with call control system 40209 by DDE, OLE or DLL interface 40207, comprise such as the function of exchange that dials, keeps etc., the call data of between vision operation person's console 40101 internal data structures and call control system 40209 data, changing with management. Call control system comes managing I ncite MCP 40113 or other program with calling out control interface 40216 again.

Media control system 40107 is communicated by letter with call control system 40209 by DDE, OLE or DLL interface, and the latter passes through DDE interface 40110 with Incite MCP application program 40113 or with calling out control interface 40216 and other interprogram communication. Incite MCP application program 40113 or directly by DDE interface 40110 to inner media control system 40102 or by call control system 40209, all essential call setup feature and characteristics of the multimedias are provided, place and audio frequency control such as video window. If use with other program of calling out control interface 40216 call setup and characteristics of the multimedia are provided, then program is communicated by letter with media control system 40107 by call control system 40209.

C. conference call flows

It is how to connect by the system shown in Figure 96 that Figure 99 represents by the conference call that vision operation person starts. The first step, shown in call-flow route 40301, vision operation person starts one by the calling of MM maincenter 40003 to BONDING servers 40006 from vision operation person's terminal 40001, and BONDING server 40006 becomes a BONDING to call out Call Transfer. Second step, shown in call-flow route 40302, BONDING server 40006 again passes through the BONDING calling at MM maincenter 40003, passes through WAN maincenter 40004, passes through MCI 40008, is transferred to client terminal 40007. Each client terminal 40007 that will participate in video conference is repeated this step. In the 3rd step, shown in call-flow route 40303, vision operation person starts a calling from vision operation person's terminal 40001, by MM maincenter 40003, by WAN maincenter 40004, by MCI 40008, arrives MCU 40005. In the 4th step, shown in call-flow route 40304, vision operation person receives client terminal 40007 and MCU 40005 with vision operation person's terminal 40001 with this connecting bridge. When vision operation person's per call was positioned at the Conference Calling client computer of client terminal 40007, the ANI of the MCU of this hoc meeting website just transmitted in the calling party territory, the client computer that participates in a conference and call out to identify each with correct conference site. When the MCU called, the ANI of client computer just is passed. So MCU just can determine the correct conference site of each calling.

In another embodiment, client computer starts a BONDING from client terminal 40007 and calls out, by MCI 40005, by WAN maincenter 40004, by MM maincenter 40003, by BONDING server 40006, again by MM maincenter 40003, arrive vision operation person's terminal 40001. Then vision operation person connects a calling to MCU shown in call-flow route 40303, connect at last two callings shown in call-flow route 40304. In order to determine the correct conference site of the calling that client computer starts, the ANI that starts client computer will be delivered to MCU when vision operation person connects.

In the conference call progress, vision operation person is from 40001 each callings of monitoring of vision operation person's terminal. Vision operation person's function comprises monitor which calling and keeping connecting, and reconnects the calling of taking out stitches, and adds new client to meeting, perhaps participates in a conference with to the customer notification conference status.

Want closing session, all-calls is all taken out stitches, the programof meeting that vision operation person's shared data bank (Figure 98 40214) reflection has been upgraded.

D. vision operation person's software systems

1. class hierarchy

Figure 100 represents the class hierarchy of vision operation person's software systems class. In the embodiment of a use Visual C++ programming language, VOObject 40401 classes form from Visual C++ base class CObject expansion. VOObject 40401 is superclass of the class of all objects in the in house software system of vision operation person's console system, thus in the in house software system all objects all from VOObject 40401 inherited attributes.

VOOperator 40402 is compilation classes (assembly class) related with VOSchedule 40403 parts-1 class object and VOUserPreferences 40404 parts-2 class object, so with each VOOperator 40402 object association VOSchedule 40403 objects are arranged just, VOUserPreferences 40404 objects are arranged just. VOSchedule 40403 is again a compilation class related with zero or more VOSchedulable 40405 parts-1 class object, thus with any amount of VOSchedulable 40405 objects of can having of each VOSchedule 40403 object association.

VOSchedulable 40405 is superclass of VOConference 40406 subclasses-1 and VOPlaybackSession 40407 subclasses-2, so VOConference 40406 objects and VOPlaybackSession 40407 objects are from VOSchedulable 40405 object inherited attributes. VOConference 40406 be one with two or more VOConnetion 40412 parts-1 class objects and zero or the compilation class that VOPlaybackCall 40415 parts-2 class object is related, so two VOConnetion 40412 objects that have at least with each VOConference 40406 object associations may also have VOPlaybackCall 40415 objects. VOPlaybackSession 40407 be one with a compilation class that VOPlaybackCall 40415 parts-1 class object is related, so with each VOPlaybackSession 40407 object associations VOPlaybackCall 40415 objects are arranged just.

VOCallObjMgr 40408 is compilation classes related with zero or more VOCall 40410 parts-1 class object, thus with any amount of VOCall 40410 objects of can having of VOCallObjMgr 40408 object associations. Similarly, VOConnObjMgr 40409 is compilation classes related with zero or more VOConnetion 40412 parts-1 class object, thus with any amount of VOConnetion 40412 objects of can having of VOConnObjMgr 40409 object associations. VOConnetion 40412 be one with two compilation classes that VOCall 40410 parts-1 class object is related, so with each VOConnetion 40412 object associations two VOCall 40410 objects are arranged just. VOCall 40410 is superclass of VOPlaybackCall 40415 subclasses-1, so VOPlaybackCall 40415 objects are from VOCall 40410 object inherited attributes. VOCall 40410 also be one with two compilation classes that VOSite 40413 parts-1 class object is related, so with each VOCall 40410 object associations two VOSite 40413 objects are arranged just. At last, VOCall 40410 class objects use VORecorder 40411 class objects.

VOSite 40413 is superclass of VOMcuportSite 40417 subclasses-1, VOParticipantSite 40418 subclasses-2 and VOOperatorSite 40419 subclasses-3, so VOMcuPortSite 40417 objects, VOParticipantSite 40418 objects and VOOperatorSite 40419 objects are from VOSite 40413 object inherited attributes.

VOPlaybackCall 40415 is compilation classes related with a VOMovie 40416, thus with each VOPlaybackCall 40415 object associations a VOMovie 40416 arranged just. VOPlaybackCall 40415 class objects are also used VOPlayer 40414 class objects.

VOMessage 40420 does not have association except the attribute of inheriting VOObject 40401, VOObject 40401 is superclass of all objects in the in house software system.

2. class and object description

a)VOObject

All in house software systems all will inherit from following base class. This base class is expanded from Visual C++ base class CObject.

Class VOObject

Base class CObject

The succession type is public

Friend's class-

(1) data type

enum senderType_e{SENDER_INTERNAL，SENDER_SCHEDULE， SENDER_CONFERENCE，SENDER_CONNECTION，SENDER_CALL， SENDER_TIMER}；

enum messageType_e{MSG_DEBUG，MSG_ERROR，MSG_WARNING， MSG_APPLICATION_ERROR，MSG_STATE_UPDATE}；

Delivery type flags：DELIVER_MESSAGE_QUEUE， DELIVER_LOG_FILE，DELIVER_MODAL_DIALOG， DELIVER_MODELESS_DIALOG，DELIVER_CONSOLEOUTPUT

(2) attribute access level typonym is described the static VOCallSystem* m_pCallSys of the static VOCallObjMgr* m_pCallOM of the static VOSchedule* m_pSchedule of static VOOperator* m_pVO vision operation person pointer scheduler program pointer call object manager pointer static VOConnectionObjMgr* m_pConnOM connecting object manager pointer calling system interface pointer

(3) process

(a)PostMessage

Virtual PostMessage(messageType_e type，int errCode，Cstring info＝“”，int delivery＝(DELIVER_MSG_QUEUE|DELIVER_LOG_FILE)， senderType_e senderType＝SENDER_INTERNAL，void*sender＝NULL)；

(i) type of parametric t ype message-such as in data type one joint definition. ErrCode mistake or warning code-such as in the resource of using definition. The extra Word message that Info will transmit as a message part. The optimum process of delivery message dilivery. That delivers is chosen in above data

Illustrated in type one joint. The default method of delivering is stored in class

Among member's variable m_delivery, it should be only right

DELIVER_MSG_QUEUE and DELIVER_LOG_FILE the two

And be initialised. SenderType sender of the message's type-such as in data type one joint definition. Sender points to the pointer of the object that sends message, i.e. this (this).

(ii) describe

Create mistake, warning, debugging, record and notification message with this function. It will create a VOMessage object, and then the latter carries out suitable action according to the regulation of delivering sign (delivery flags).

(b)Get Error String

virtual CString Get Error String(int error Code)

Return of value: return a CString object with error burst corresponding with the error code of transmitting.

Error Code parameter: the error code of the error burst of, store this error burst as resource.

Call this function and can obtain the text description corresponding with error code.

B) core classes

(1) class tabulation

Website (Site)

Participant's website (Participant Site)

MCU port website (MCU Port Site)

Vision operation person's website (Video Operator Site)

Call out (Call)

(Playback Call) called out in playback

Call object manager (Call Object Manager)

Connect (Connection)

Connecting object manager (Connection Object Manager)

Message (Message)

Vision operation person (Video Operator)

(2) class description

(a) website (Site)

This is a base class, can derive class such as Participant Site and MCU Port Site class by it. Its main purpose is as a data structure, and content is to participate in calling about who or what.

Class VOSite

Base class VOObject

The succession type is public

Friend's class-

(i) data type

enum Bandwidth_e{MULTIRATE，BONDING，AGGREGATED，HO}；

(ii) attribute access level typonym is described

Cstring m_name site name

The unique Site ID of ID_t m_ID

ID_t m_locationID physical location ID

Cstring m_timezone time zone

The number that Cstring m_dialNumber will dial. Referring to calling

Many numbers lattice of system interface one joint

Formula

Bandwidth_e m_bandwidth Usage bandwidth is used

The int m_max Num Channels maximum possible number of channel

VOCall* m_p Call points to this website and belongs to one section

The pointer of the call object that divides.

* coding decoder or terminal type

(Picture Tel, MCP etc.)

* the call setup type (dial in,

Transfer to)

(b) participant's website

Inherit from the VOSite base class.

All users or convention goer will be stored in their information in the VO shared data bank.

Class VOParticipant Site

Base class VOSite

The succession type is public

Friend's class-

Attribute access level typonym is described

Cstring m_Coordinator Name website coordinator title

Cstring m_Coordinator Nbr website coordinator telephone number

The ID of company under this website of ID t m_companyID

VOMCUPortSite ^*M_pMCUport is related in connecting object

The MCU port website that arrives

(c) MCU port website

Inherit from the VOSite base class.

All meetings are all carried out at MCU. Each participant's website need to be connected with the logic " port " on the MCU.

Class VOMcuPortSite

Base class VOSite

The succession type is public

Friend's class-

Attribute access level typonym is described

The ID of ID_t m_mcuID sign MCU

VOParticipantSite ^*M_pParticipant is related in connecting object

The participant's website that arrives

(d) vision operation person's website

Inherit from the VOSite base class.

All-calls all vision operation person's website as one of website in the point to point call. This structure contains vision operation person's true ANI.

Class VOOperatorSite

Base class VOSite

The succession type is public

Friend's class-

Attribute access level typonym is described

ID_t m_operatorID operator's ID

CString m_voice Phone operator's voiceband telephone number

ID_t m_group ID operator's group ID

ID_t m_superviser ID supervisor's ID

This website of COblist m_Calls is as its part

The tabulation of call object

(e) call out

The definition of calling out is that H.320 two full duplexs between the website flow. In all-calls, vision operation person's website will be one of website. The a pair of calling that connects is called a connection.

Class VOCall

Base class VOObject

The succession type is public

Friend's class-

(i) data type

enum StateCall_e {ERROR，INACTIVE，INCOMING，DIALING， ACTIVE，DISCONNECTED，HELD，last Call States}；

enum callOperation_e{ERROR，DIAL，ANSWER，HOLD，PICKUP， DISCONNECT，HANGUP，last Call Operations}

(ii) attribute access level typonym is described

ID_t m_ID calls out ID

VOSite* m_pSite calls out the other end of website

(participant, MCU port

Or unknown)

VOOperatorSite ^*M_p Operator Site operator website

If it is by the operator that boolean m_operator calls out

Initiated starts, and value is true (lacking

Province's value)

CTime m_startTime calls out the reality when becoming activity

The border time

Boolean m_expectHangup helps to determine whether the expectation extension

The sign of machine

The state that StateCall_e m_state calls out

StateCall_e m_transition Table state transition table

[nCallStates]

[nCallOperations]

VORecorder ^*The logger object that m_pRecorder calls out

VOConnection ^*M_pConnection connects under pointing to this calling

The pointer of object

(iii) process

Disconnection (); When the on-hook of the circuit other end or line interruption, be called. Member variable m_expectHangup should be vacation. Otherwise, should modulatedly use the Hangup () operation of call object manager.

Reset (); Call state is reset to inactive state.

Recordingstart (); H.320 the inlet flow of beginning metered call.

Recording Stop (); The record that stops call.

setState(call Operation_e operation)；

Operating parameter: an operation has been carried out in indication, and the result will cause state variation.

The operation of the state that impact is called out should be called set State function after operation is carried out. This function by reference current state in the state transition table and operation changes the state of calling. With creating the VOMessage object that type is STATES_UPDATE, send to application queue. So GUI and any parts that read this application queue just obtain the notice that state upgrades.

(f) playback is called out

Inherit from the VOCall base class.

In this special calling case, the output of vision operation person's Voice ﹠ Video is used from the H.320 stream of film playback by the external system components of vision operation person's storage and reproduce and is replaced.

Class VOPlaybackCall

Base class VOCall

The succession type is public

Friend's class-

(i) attribute access level typonym is described

VOMovie ^*M_pMovie is with played movie object

VOPlayer ^*M_pPlayer carries out the player object of playback

(ii) process

PlaybackStart (); The beginning playback.

PlaybackStop (); Stop playback.

(g) film

Film is the record of H.320 calling out. In the stage 1, vision operation person's storage and reproduce system is record and playback film and storage and retrieval management document and data flow H.320.

Class VOMovie

Base class VOObject

The succession type is public

Friend's class-

Attribute access level typonym is described the public CString m_description of public ID_t m_movieID film ID film and is described

(h) call object manager

By constructing with the call object manager and destroying call object, just can keep at vision operation person's machine the tabulation of all-calls. The calling that this comprises a part that is not any meeting or playback session comprises incoming call and general dial-out call. Impact is called out but is not created or the operation that destroys calling can be carried out by call object itself.

Class VOCall Obj Manager

Base class VOObject

The succession type is public

Friend's class-

(i) attribute access level typonym is described

The sum of the untapped channel of int M_num Channels

The sum of the movable channel of int M_num Active

CMap String To Ob m_callList call list

(ii) process

Dial()；

Dial(VOCall ^*p Calling)；

The pCalling parameter: if this pointer non-zero, will be for call object. This is essential when creating or reusing a call object that is in inertia or disconnect state.

Dial carries out dial-out. The number of Dial is called out in member's structure at m_pSite.

ANSWER()；

ANSWER(VOCALL ^*pIncoming)；

The pIncoming parameter: if this pointer non-zero, will be for call object. This is essential when creating or reusing a call object that is in inertia or disconnect state.

Answer answers incoming call.

Hangup(VOCALL ^*pCall)；

PCall parameter: point to the pointer of calling out.

Hangup is hung up pCall calling pointed.

Hold(VOCall ^*pCall)；

PCall parameter: point to the pointer of calling out.

The Hold calling that pCall is pointed keeps.

VOCall ^*Call Create()；

VOCall ^*Call Create creates a call object.

VOPlayback CALL ^*Playback Call Create()；

VOPlayback CALL ^*Playback Call Create () creates a playback call object.

VOCall ^*GetCallPtr(ID_t idCall)；

Id Call parameter: call out ID

VO Call ^*Get Call Ptr obtains the pointer that points to the call object that id Call identifies.

(i) connect

Connect and to be defined as a pair of call object that is keeping joint (Join) state, each is called out all vision operation person's website as the common point that is used for realizing joint.

Class VOConnection

Base class VOObject

The succession type is public

Friend's class-

(i) data type

enum State Connection_e{ERROR，UNJOINED，JOINED，BROKEN， last Connection States}；

enum Connection Operation_e{ERROR， JOIN， UNJOIN，BREAK，RESET，last Connection Operations}；

(ii) attribute access level typonym is described

VOCall ^*M_p ParticipantCall points to the pointer that the participant calls out

VOCall ^*M_p MCUPort Call points to the pointer that the MCU port is called out

VOParticipantSite ^*M_p Participant Site points to the pointer of participant's website

The time that Ctime m_join Time engages

VOMovie ^*The film that m_pMovie is used for record or playback refers to

Boolean m_ex Pect Break helps to determine whether to expect to interrupt

Sign.

The state that State Connection_e m_state connects

StateConnection_e m_transition Table state transition table

[n Connection States]

[n Connection Ops]

VOConference ^*It is its part that m_p Conference points to this connection

The pointer of meeting.

(iii) process

Join (); Engage the calling of participant and MCU port.

Unjoin (); The calling of disconnecting participant and MCU port.

Set Participant Call(VOCall ^*participant Call)；

Participant Call parameter: the pointer that points to call object.

Set Participant Call calling is set to the participant and calls out, and this is when management can't be known other incoming call or to replace for the participant of last moment be useful.

Set MCU Port Call(VOCall ^*mcu Port Call)；

Mcu Port Call parameter: point to the pointer of calling out. Set MCU Port Call calling is set to the MCU port and calls out, and this is when the incoming call of management None-identified or to replace for the calling website of last moment be useful.

Do Participant Call (); Calling participant's website and it are set to the participant and call out.

Do MCU Port Call (); Calling MCU port website and it are set to the MCU port and call out.

set State(Connection Operation_e operation)；

Operation parameter: the operation that will cause state variation of having carried out.

The operation of the state that impact connects should be called set State function after operation is carried out. This function is the current state and the state that is connected to change connection in the state transition table by reference. With creating the VOMessage object that type is STATES_UPDATE, send to application queue. Therefore GUI and any parts that read this application queue will obtain the notice that state upgrades.

Protected Break (); When becoming disconnecting, the connection that engages is called. If member variable m_expect Break is false, then necessarily there is a calling unexpectedly to be taken out stitches. Otherwise, should be modulated the Unjoin () operation of using this connection.

protected Reset()；

The state of this connection is reset to UNJOINED (disconnecting).

(j) connecting object manager

Similar with the call object manager, must preserve the tabulation of all connections that move at vision operation person's machine. All cause the operation of establishment of connection or deletion all will use the connecting object manager.

Class VOConnectionObjMgr

Base class VOObject

The succession type is public

Friend's class-

(i) attribute access level typonym is described

The tabulation of all connections of CMapStringToOb m_connectionList

The number of the connection that int m_numJoined engages

(ii) process

VOConnection ^*Create()；

Return of value: the pointer that points to connecting object.

VOConnection ^*Create creates new connecting object and it is added in the tabulation.

Remove(VOConnection ^*old Connection)；

Old Connection parameter: deleted connecting object.

Return of value: if operate successfully then return true.

Remove deletes a connecting object and it is deleted from tabulation.

VOConnection ^*Get Connection Ptr(ID_t id Connection)；

Return of value: the pointer that points to connecting object.

Id Connection parameter: the ID of this connection.

VO Connection ^*Get Connection Ptr returns and points to one by the pointer of the connecting object of its ID sign.

(k) message

The remainder used to vision operation person of systems soft ware is that all one-way communications of graphic user interface all are that the message that is placed on the application queue sends internally. The function that creates and post message is at base class VOObject, and all in house software system class are all inherited from this base class. All run time error or Debugging message all are placed into message object, post to application queue, so that suitable object can be processed it according to its type and the order of severity. Therefore, show for GUI or register in the file if certain fault-all will post a message or Debugging message such as internal memory out-of-bounds-all class functions of not returning particular type occurs.

Class VOMessage

Base class VOObject

The succession type is public

Friend's class-

(i) data type

enum senderType_e{INTERNAL，SCHEDULE，CONFERENCE，CONNECTION， CALL，TIMER}；

enum message Type_e{DEBUG，ERROR，WARNING，APPLICATION_ERROR， STATE UPDATE}；

Deliver type code: DELIVER_MESSAGE_QUEUE, DELIVER_LOG_FILE, DELIVER_MODAL_DIALOG, DELIVER_MODELESS_DIALOG, DELIVER_CONSO LEOUTPUT

(ii) attribute access level typonym is described

Int m_error Code error code

Being used for best information during int m_delivery mailing delivers

Sign

SenderType_e m_senderType sender type

VOObject* m_pObject points to sender's pointer

MessageType_e m_messageType type of message

CString m_info information

* message or wrong priority

* message or the wrong order of severity

(iii) process

Post (); To message of application message formation mailing.

private static Append Log()；

Return of value: if operate successfully, then return true.

When the flag set of DELIVER_LOG_FILE, this process is called by VOObjec ∷ Post Message ().

(1) vision operation person

Each machine generally only has a vision operation person. Each vision operation person has the tabulation of a dispatch list and client participant's website to manage. Call object manager and connecting object manager also are vision operation person's parts.

Class VOOperator

Base class VOObject

The succession type is public

Friend's class-

(i) attribute access level typonym is described

ID_t m_operatorID operator ID

VOSchedule m_schedule current operation person's dispatch list

CObList m_MCUlist MCU list object

The default user application of the static VOUser Preferences of CObList m_operator Sites operator website m_user Preferences is selected

(ii) process

Protected Schedule Start (); Initialize vision operation person's dispatch list.

Protected Call Obj Mgr Start (); Initialize the call object manager

Protected Connection Obj Mgr Start (); Initialize the connecting object manager.

Protected Call System Interface Start (); Initialize the calling system interface.

(m) user selection

Vision operation person's console is used will one group of default application choice, can revise and preserve. The value of these variablees is extracted with the optimum ordered that increases progressively from following source: the VO.INI file of the default value of hard coded, preservation, order line call parameters, GUI input and revise when being saved in the operation of VO.INI file.

Class VOUser Preferences

Base class VOObject

The succession type is public

Friend's class-

(i) attribute access level typonym is described

The operator ID that ID_t m_operator ID is default

(ii) process

Save Prefs (); All values are saved in VO.INI.

Load Prefs (); Load all values from VO.INI.

(n)MCU

The corresponding specific MCU of all MCU ports. This class only is used for the storage of MCU port website. For the stage 2, will realize the specific operation of MCU and interface here.

Class VOMCU

Base class VOObject

The succession type is public

Friend's class-

(i) attribute access level typonym is described

The ID of ID_t m_mcuID MCU

The tabulation of CObList m_port List MCU port site object

(ii) process

VOMCU Port Site*Get Port Ptr(ID_t id Port)；

Return of value: the pointer that points to MCU port site object.

VOMCU Poft Site*Get Port Ptr returns the pointer that points to by the MCU port site object of its ID sign.

VOMCU Port Site*Create Port()；

Return of value: the pointer that points to new MCU port site object.

VOMCU Port Site*Create Port returns the pointer that points to by a new MCU port site object that creates of its ID sign.

(3) core state variable transition diagram

The state transition graph that Figure 101 shows represents the contingent state variation of m_state variable (" state variable ") of VOCall object. State variable begins 40501 and is in inertia 40502 states.

If the VOCall object receives a dialing 40503 inputs during being in inertia 40502 states, state variable just changes to 40504 states that dial. In dialing 40504 states, state variable changes to inertia 40502 states after receiving busy 40505 inputs, changes to movable 40507 states after receiving answer 40506 inputs. In movable 40507 states, state variable changes to after reception keeps 40509 inputs and keeps 40510 states, changes to 40515 states of taking out stitches after 40514 inputs are taken out stitches in reception, changes to inertia 40502 states after reception on-hook 40508 inputs. In keeping 40510 states, state variable changes to movable 40507 states after receiving off-hook 40511 inputs, change to 40515 states of taking out stitches after 40513 inputs are taken out stitches in reception, changes to inertia 40502 states after receiving on-hook 40512 inputs. In 40515 states of taking out stitches, state variable changes to inertia 40502 states after reception resets 40516 inputs.

If VO Call object receives an incoming call 40517 during being in inertia 40502 states, state variable just changes to input 40518 states. In input 40518 states, state variable changes to inertia 40502 states after receiving refusal 40520 inputs, change to movable 40507 states after 40519 inputs are answered in reception.

The state transition graph that Figure 102 shows represents the contingent state variation of m_state variable (" state variable ") of VOConnection object. State variable begins 40601 and is in 40602 states that do not engage. In not engaging 40602 states, state variable changes to 40604 states of joint after receiving joint 40603 inputs. In 40604 states of joint, state variable does not change to 40602 states that do not engage after engaging 40605 inputs, changes to 40607 states of interruption after receive interruption 40606 inputs. In 40607 states of interruption, state variable changes to 40604 states of joint after receiving joint 40608 inputs.

C) dispatching patcher class

(1) class tabulation

Playback session

Meeting

Scheduling

Schedulable

(2) class description

(a) playback session

The same with meeting, playback session also needs scheduling. Carry out call with participant's website and vision operation person's website. The film of selecting in advance that one of playback was dispatched by the external component system of vision operation person's storage and reproduce is replaced the AV output to participant's website. Playback session does not use MCU, in one embodiment, only uses participant's website.

Class VO Playback Session

Base class VOSchedulable

The succession type is public

Friend's class-

(i) data type

enum State Playback Session_e{ERROR，INACTIVE，SETUP， ACTIVE，ENDING，FINISHED，last PBSession States}；

enum playback Session Operation_e{ERROR，PREPARE，START， CLOSE，FINISH，last PBSession Operations}；

(ii) attribute access level typonym describes that public ID_t m_ID distributes when session is subscribed

The public CString m_description of short name of the public CString m_name of ID session briefly explains the state protection State Playback Session_e m_transition Table state transition table of public int m_xfer of duration Rate message transmission rate (channel number) the protection VOplayback Call* m_playback Call playback call object protection State Playback Session_e m_state playback session of public CTime m_start Time time started public CTime Span m_duration playback session

[last PBSession States]

[last PBSession Ops]

(iii) process

public boolean Setup()；

Return of value: if operate successfully then return true.

Public boolean Setup () sets up the playback calling and starts a VOPlayer object by calling out the participant. This function can be called by scheduler program.

public boolean Start()；

Return of value: if operate successfully then return true.

Public boolean Start starts player and calls out broadcast to playback. This function can be called by scheduler program.

public boolean Close()；

Return of value: if operate successfully then return true.

Public boolean Close is to vision operation person-also may be to participant-transmission message, and content is that playback session will finish.

public boolean Finish()；

Return of value: if operate successfully then return true.

Public boolean Finish stops player and hangs up playback calling out. The routine call that can be scheduled of this function.

public State Playback Session_e State Get()；

Return of value: the state that returns playback session.

Find out the state of playback session with public State Playback Session_e State Get function.

protected boolean State Set(playback Session Operation_e Operation)；

Return of value: if operate successfully then return true.

Operation parameter: the operation that will cause state to change of having carried out.

The operation that affects the state of playback session should be called the boolean State Set function of protection after operation is carried out. This function by reference current state in the state transition table and operation changes the state of playback session. With creating the VOMessage object that type is STATES_UPDATE, send to application queue. So GUI and any parts that read this application queue just obtain the notice that state upgrades.

(b) meeting

Vision operation person's major function is managerial meeting. Scaheduling system creates conference object, and the latter creates again the tabulation of connections (or participant-MCU port website calling to). Be played back in the special case of meeting at film, carry out extra call to the MCU port, with the similar mode of playback session to MCU playback film. This certainly require to have extra MCU port can with and before meeting begins, be scheduled.

Class VOConference

Base class VOSchedulable

The succession type is public

Friend's class-

(i) data type

enum conference Mode_e{CONTINUOUS_PRESENCE， VOICE ACTIVATED，LECTURE，DIRECTOR_CONTROL}；

enum State Conference_e{ERROR，INACTIVE，SETUP，ACTIVE， ENDING，FINISHED，last Conference States}；

enum conference Operation_e{ERROR，PREPARE，START，CLOSE， FINISH，last Conference Operations}；

(ii) attribute access level typonym is described

The ID that ID_t m_ID gives when subscribing

CString m_name meeting title

CString m_description brief description

CString m_time Zone time zone

CTime m_start Time meeting start time

The CTime Span m_duration meeting duration

Int m_transfer Rate transfer rate

The number that int m_num Active Conns is flexibly connected

Conference Mode_e m_mode conferencing

If this meeting of boolean m_recording Scheduled will be remembered

Record then is true

The row of CObList m_connection List storage connecting object

Table

CMap String ToObj m_participant Site List participant site list

If in the VOPlayback Call m_Playback Call meeting playback is arranged

Then effective

The current state of State Conference_e m_state meeting

State Conference_e m_transition Table state transition table

[last Conference States]

[last Conference Ops]

* call setup type

* audio protocols

* video protocols

* many MCU meeting

* chairman control H.243

With password

(iii) process

public boolean Setup()；

Return of value: if operate successfully then return true.

Public boolean Setup is connected with the MCU website to connect and sets up each connection (calling out if need to also set up playback) in the tabulation by calling out each suitable participant's website, and carries out Join (joints) and operate and create connection. This function can be called by scheduler program.

public boolean Start()；

Return of value: if operate successfully then return true.

Public boolean Start starts meeting. This function can be called by scheduler program.

public boolean End()；

Return of value: if operate successfully then return true.

Public boolean End removes the connection in the meeting, perhaps sends the warning that meeting will finish soon. The routine call that can be scheduled of this function.

public boolean Finish()；

Return of value: if operate successfully then return true.

Public boolean Finish stops meeting and hangs up all-calls in the meeting. The routine call that can be scheduled of this function.

public State Conference_e State Get()；

Return of value: the state that returns meeting.

Check the state of meeting with public State Conference_e State Get function.

protected boolean State Set(Conference Operation_e Operation)；

Return of value: if operate successfully then return true.

The operation that affects the state of meeting should be called the boolean State Set function of protection after operation is carried out. This function by reference current state in the state transition table and operation changes the state of meeting. With creating the VOMessage object that type is STATES_UPDATE, send to application queue. So GUI and any parts that read this application queue just obtain the notice that state upgrades.

(c) scheduling

Dispatching patcher is preserved the tabulation of a meeting and playback session. Each meeting and playback session are that the specified time interval before start-up time is created. It is synchronous that the dispatch list of storing in vision operation person's shared data bank of dispatch list in the internal memory and current video operator should always keep.

Class VOSchedule

Base class VOObject

The succession type is public

Friend's class-

(i) attribute access level typonym is described

ID_t m_operator ID responsibility operator's ID

But CMap String m_sched Items scheduler object (meeting and playback session)

The tabulation of ToObj

But CmapWordTo m_sched Alarms be on the scheduler object operation (structure and

The Ob deletion) tabulation of the alarm of Set For Current

(ii) process

Synch With Db (); Synchronous to dispatch list and vision operation person's shared data bank.

Add Schedulable(VOSchedulable*p Schedulable)；

The pSchedulable parameter: but the pointer of the scheduler object that sensing will be added to tabulating.

But Add Schedulable adds scheduler object in the tabulation to.

Delete Schedulable(ID_t aSchedulable)；

The aSchedulable parameter: but the scheduler object that will from tabulation, delete.

But scheduler object of Delete Schedulable deletion and deletion from tabulation.

(d) schedulable object or item

In stage 1 schedulable or to as if meeting and playback session. It is the event establishment dispatch list of any type that this class allows us.

Class VOSchedulable

Base class VOObject

The succession type is public

Friend's class-

(i) attribute access level typonym is described

ID_t m_requestor requestor's ID

The time started of Ctime m_start Time scheduling

The incident duration of CTime Span m_duration scheduling

The event concluding time of Ctime m_end Time scheduling

The ID of the alarm of MMRESULT m_alarmID Set For Current

(ii) process

public SetAlarm(Ctime time，LPTIMECALLBACK func)；

Time parameter: the time of triggering alarm.

Func parameter: the pointer that when alarm is triggered, points to call back function.

Return of value: if operate successfully then return true.

Public Set Alarm arranges an alarm that triggers at special time. When alarm is triggered, call back function will be called. This is applicable to the event of Time-Dependent, begins front 15 minutes such as meeting, and meeting adjourned front 5 minutes, and meeting adjourned rear 30 minutes.

public KillAlarm()；

Return of value: if operate successfully then return true.

Public Kill Alarm removes last alarm that is arranged by Set Alarm (). This is used for interrupting the situation of meeting and so on.

(3) dispatching patcher state variable transition diagram

The state transition graph that Figure 103 shows represents the contingent state variation of m_state variable (" state variable ") of VOConference object. State variable begins 40701 and is in inertia 40702 states. In inertia 40702 states, state variable changes to after receiving " 15 minutes before scheduling time " 40703 inputs and connects 40704 states of setting up. Set up in 40704 states in connection, state variable changes to movable 40706 states after receiving beginning meeting 40705 inputs. In movable 40706 states, state variable remains on movable 40706 states after receiving prolongation meeting 40707 inputs, changes to stop 40707 states after receiving closing session (normal termination) 40708 inputs. In stopping 40707 states, state variable changes to after receiving end 40710 inputs and finishes 40711 states.

D) record and review class

(1) class tabulation

Logger

Player

(2) class description

(a) logger

Logger is communicated by letter with any external component of the inlet flow of carrying out actual film establishment and metered call. This external component is vision operation person's storage and reproduce system.

Class VORecorder

Base class VOObject

The succession type is public

Friend's class

(i) data type

enum State Recorder_e{ERROR，IDLE，RECORDING，PAUSED， FINISHED，last Recorder States}；

enum recorder Operation_e{ERROR，BEGIN，PAUSE，RESUME， STOP，last Recorder Ops}

(ii) attribute access level typonym is described

VOMovie* m_movie film

VOCall* m_p Call calls out pointer (record is used)

Cstring m_info participant and meeting name

The Ctime m_start Time time started

Ctime m_end Time dwell time

The time of CtimeSpan m_duration summary journal

State Recorder_e m_state state

State Recorder_e m_transition Table state transition table

[last Recorder States]

[last Recorder Ops]

* VSF object

* recording mode

(iii) process

Init Movie (); VOSP initializes a record. This will tell VOSP to prepare record.

Start (); VOSP begins record.

Stop (); VOSP stops record.

set State(recorder Operation_e operation)；

Operation parameter: the operation of having carried out, will cause state variation.

The operation that affects the state of logger should be called set State function after operation is carried out. This function by reference current state in the state transition table and operation changes the state of logger. With creating the VOMessage object that type is STATUS_UPDATE, send to application queue. So GUI and any parts that read this application queue just obtain the notice that state upgrades.

(b) player

Player is communicated by letter with any external component of carrying out actual output stream playback film to calling out. For the stage 1, this external component is vision operation person's storage and reproduce system.

Class VOPlayer

Base class VOObject

The succession type is public

Friend's class-

(i) data type

enum State Player_e{ERROR，IDLE，PLAYING，PAUSED， FINISHED，nPlayer States}；

enum player Operation_e{ERROR，BEGIN，PAUSE，RESUME， STOP，RESET，nPlayer Ops}

(ii) attribute access level typonym is described

VOMovie ^*The m_pMovie film

VOCall ^*M_pCall calls out pointer (playback is used)

Cstring m_info participant and meeting name

Ctime m_start Time start and stop time

Ctime m_end Time

The total playback duration of CTime Span m_duration

State Player_e m_state state

State Player_e m_transition state transition table

[nPlayerStates] Table

[nPlayerOps]

* VSF object

* playback mode

(iii) process

public Init Movie()；

Return of value: if operate successfully then return true.

Public InitMovie VOSP initializes playback. This will tell VOSP to prepare playback.

public Start()；

Return of value: if operate successfully then return true.

Public Start VOSP begins playback.

public Stop()；

Return of value: if operate successfully then return true.

Public Stop VOSP stops playback.

setstate(player Operation_e operation)；

Return of value: if operate successfully then return true.

The operation that affects the state of player should be called the setstate function after operation is carried out. This function by reference current state in the state transition table and operation changes the state of player. With creating the VOMessage object that type is STATUS_UPDATE, send to application queue. So GUI and any parts that read this application queue just obtain the notice that state upgrades.

(3) state transition graph of record and review class

The state transition graph that Figure 104 shows represents the contingent state variation of m_state variable (" state variable ") of VORecorder object. State variable begins 40801 and is in idle 40802 states. In idle 40802 states, state variable changes to record 40804 states after reception begins to record 40803 inputs. In record 40804 states, state variable changes to after receiving time-out 40805 inputs suspends 40806 states, perhaps changes to after reception stops 40808 inputs and finishes 40810 states. In suspending 40806 states, state variable changes to record 40804 states after receiving recovery 40807 inputs, perhaps changes to after reception stops 40809 inputs and finishes 40810 states.

The state transition graph that Figure 105 shows represents the contingent state variation of m_state variable (" state variable ") of VOPlayer object. State variable begins 40901 and is in idle 40902 states. In idle 40902 states, state variable changes to 40904 states of broadcast after reception begins to play 40903 inputs. In 40904 states of broadcast, state variable changes to after receiving time-out 40905 inputs suspends 40906 states, perhaps changes to after reception stops 40908 inputs and finishes 40910 states. In suspending 40906 states, state variable changes to 40904 states of broadcast after receiving recovery 40907 inputs, perhaps changes to after reception stops 40909 inputs and finishes 40910 states. In finishing 40910 states, state variable changes to 40904 states of broadcast after 40911 inputs are play in reception again.

E) the calling system interface class is described

The all-calls that call control system can be managed the managing video operator. This comprises input and output H.320 call manager and the low-level operation to calling out, such as record and review. Vision operation person uses with its calling system interface and communicates by letter with a call control system external component of managing all-calls to unify mode. This just make vision operation person can managerial demand the calling of different external programs, added extra coding decoder to machine, perhaps even the calling on the management remote machine.

Class VOCallSys

Base class VOObject

The succession type is public

Friend's class-

(1) data type

enum Bandwidth_e{MULTIRATE，BONDING，AGGREGATED，HO}；

Use the Q.931 user profile of the calling of BONDING;

0×00 0×01 0×07 0×44 0×79 0×00 0×00

0 1 7 447-9000

Bonded, 1 number, 7 bit lengths, 447-9000

Q.931 the user profile of combination:

0×00 0×02 0×07 0×44 0×79 0×00 0×00 0×FF 0×01

1 2 7 447-9000，1

The combination, 2 numbers, 7 bit lengths, 447-9000,447-9001

(2) attribute access level typonym is described the available connection sum of the total public iht m_num Connections of the available calling of public int m_numCalls

(3) process

public Dial(Bandwidth_e calltype，CString destination)；

public Dial(Bandwidth_e calltype，CString destination， CString origination)；

Return of value: if operate successfully then return true.

Calltype parameter: the type of the calling that regulation will be carried out.

Destination parameter: the destination number that regulation will be dialled.

Origination parameter: the initiation number that regulation will be used, rather than the physical number of operator's console.

Public Dial dials outward.

public Answer(ID_t call)；

Call parameter: the calling ID of the calling of awaiting acknowledgement

Public Answer answers incoming call.

public Hangup(ID_t call)；

Return of value: if operate successfully then return true.

Call parameter: the calling ID that the calling of on-hook

Public Hangup is hung up calling.

public Hold(ID_t call)；

Return of value: if operate successfully then return true.

Call parameter: the calling ID of the calling that keep

Public Hold allows call out and keeps.

public Join(ID_t call1，ID_t call2)；

Return of value: if operate successfully then return true.

Call1 parameter: the calling ID of calling

Call2 parameter: the calling ID of calling

Public Join engages two callings.

public Unjoin(ID_t，connection)；

Return of value: if operate successfully then return true.

Connection parameter: the ID of the connection that disconnect.

Public Unjoin disconnects the connection of appointment.

public StateCall_e Call Status(ID_t call)；

Return of value: the state that returns calling.

Connection parameter: the ID of the connection that disconnect.

The state of public State Call_e Call Status report designated call.

public State Connection_e Join Status(ID_t，connection)；

Return of value: the state that returns connection.

Connection parameter: the ID of the connection that disconnect.

The state that engages is specified in public State Connection_e Join Status report.

protected LaunchMCP()；

Return of value: if operate successfully then return true.

The MCP that protected LaunchMCP starts Incite uses.

E. graphic user interface class

1. class hierarchy

Figure 106 represents the class hierarchy of vision operation person's graphic user interface (" GUI ") class. In general, vision operation person will by with the reciprocation of vision operation person's console GUI (" console GUI "), carry out all features of video conference operator as herein described system. The critical piece of console GUI is master console window, scheduling and is connected list window, meeting with the dialog box that is connected window, message area, audio ﹠ video and controls, send timely information, expressing possibility is not the frequently menu item of the action of execution. MCU operation and feature will not realize in vision operation person's console GUI, in order to can adopt different MCU typess of models to implement different vision operation person systems. The specific MCU operation of distributors will be carried out by the software that the distributors that provides is provided with MCU. In the embodiment of a MCS who adopts Video Server, the MCS workstation software can be used for that the feature that realizes is all directly to be controlled if any meeting adjourned time lengthening, Voice ﹠ Video obstruction (blocking), meeting, etc. This software can move concurrently with vision operation person GUI.

If describe with the object-oriented programming term, GUI has a main application that creates and preserve the view in all windows and the window. Main window is the VOMain Frame41009 that is created by VOConsole App 41008. This main window creates VOSchedule Wnd 41016, VOAlert Wnd 41015, VOConferenceVw 41014, VOVideo Watch Vw 41013. VOSchedule Wnd 41016 and VOAlert Wnd be can dock window-meaning is one side that they can be attached to their parent windows. Parent window in the present case is VOMain Frame 41009. The window that can dock also can separate with the border, and method is that they are dragged away from. In this case, the tool window that they will the image scale standard is the same.

The function of each object class can be summarized as follows. VO Console App 41008 is main application class, and VO Main Frame 41009 is the main windows that contain all other windows. VO Schedule Wnd 41016 is windows of display operation person's scheduling, and VO Child Frame 41010 is the frame windows (frame window) for multiple document interface (" MDI ") window. VO Child Frame 41010 plays a part the main frame window of each view. VO Conferenoe Frame 41018 is derived by VO Child Frame 41010, is the frame window of meeting view, and 41014 of VO Conference Vw are the windows of display conference information. VO Conference Doc 41012 is document class of corresponding VO Conference Vw 41014. VOVideo Watch Frame 41017 is derived by VO Child Frame 41010, is the frame window of observing view for video, and VO Video Watch Vw 41013 is windows of display of video streams and the control of calling out. VO Video Watch Doc 41011 is document class that corresponding video is observed view.

One with the embodiment of Visual C++ as programming language in, CWnd 41001 is superclass of CMDI Frame Wnd 41005 subclasses-1, CMDI Child Wnd 41006 subclasses-2, CFrom View 41007 subclasses-3 and CDialog Bar 41002 subclasses-4, so that CMDI Frame Wnd 41005 class objects, CMDI Child Wnd 41006 class objects, CFrom View 41007 class objects and CDialog Bar 41002 class objects are from CWnd 41001 class inherited attributes. CMDIFrame Wnd 41005 is superclass of VOMain Frame 41009 subclasses-1, CMDI Child Wnd 41006 is superclass of VOChild Frame 41010 subclasses-1, CFrom View 41007 is superclass of VOVideo Watch Vw 41013 subclasses-1 and VO Conference Vw 41014 subclasses-2, and CDialog Bar 41002 is superclass of VOAlert Wnd 41015 subclasses-1 and VOSchedule Wnd 41016 subclasses-2. VOChild Frame 41010 is superclass of VOVideo Watch 41017 subclasses-1 and VOConference Frame 41018 subclasses-2, CWinApp 41003 is superclass of VOConsoleApp 41008 subclasses-1, and CDocument 41004 is superclass of VOVideo Watch Doc 41011 subclasses-1 and VOConference Doc 41012 subclasses-2.

VOConsole App 41008 is and a compilation class that VOMain Frame 41009 parts-1 class object is related so that with just what a VOMain Frame 41009 object that only have of each VOConsole App 41008 object association. VOMain Frame 41009 is and VOVideo Watch Frame 41017 parts-1 class object, VOConference Frame 41018 parts-2 class object, VOAlert Wnd 41015 parts-3 class object and the compilation class that VOSchedule Wnd 41016 parts-4 class object is related so that with each VOMain Frame 41009 object association only have just what a VOVideo Watch Frame 41017 object, just what a VOConference Frame 41018 object, just what a VOAlert Wnd 41015 object and proper what a VOSchedule Wnd 41016 object.

VOVideo Watch Frame 41017 is and VOVideo Watch Doc 41011 parts-1 class object, the compilation class that VOVideo Watch Vw 41013 parts-2 class object is related so that with just what a VOVideo Watch Doc 41011 object, VOVideo Watch Vw 41013 objects of only having of each VOVideo FWatch Frame 41017 object association. Use from VOVideo Watch Vw 41013 objects of CForm View 41007 class objects expansion from each VOVideo Watch DOC 41011 object of aforesaid Cdocument 41004 class objects expansion.

Similarly, VOConference Frame 41018 is and VOConference Doc 41012 parts-1 class object, the compilation class that VOConference Vw 41014 parts-2 class object is related so that with each VOConference Frame 41018 object association only have just what a VOConference Doc 41012 object, proper what a VOConference Vw 41014 object. VOConference Doc 41012 uses VOConference Vw 41014.

2. class and object details

A) user interface class

(1) the class tabulation VOConsole App master application class VOMain Frame window VOOutput Wnd of dispatch list that contains the main window VOSchedule Wnd display operation person of all other windows shows that the window VOChild Frame of error message and alarm is used for the frame window of MDI window. It plays the framework master to each view

The effect of frame window. The frame window of VOConference Frame meeting view. This is to derive from VOChild Frame

. The window of VOConference Vw display conference information. The document class that VOConference Doc is corresponding with Conference Vw. VOVideoWatch Frame is used for the framework window that video is observed view (Video Watch view)

Mouthful. This derives from VOChild Frame. VOVideo Watch Vw is shown as the video flowing of calling out demonstration and the window of control. VOVideo Watch Doc observes document class corresponding to view with video.

(2) class details

(a)VOConsole App

Class VOConsole App

Base class CWin App

The succession type is public

Friend's class-

(i) attribute access level typonym is described protection VOOperator* m_pOperator and is pointed to listed video behaviour

Work person's pointer

(ii) process

Retcode Create Video Operator(CString login，Cstring password)；

Return of value: if nonzero value is returned in success; Otherwise return zero.

Login parameter: operator's login ID.

Password parameter: operator's password.

Retcode Create Video Operator Function Extreme just is invoked during application instantiates.

Retcode Initialize Call System Components()；

Retcode Initialize Call System Components Function Extreme just be after creating vision operation person, invoked during the application start, it carries out local replica to pointing to the VOCall System Interface, the VOCall Obj Mgr that are started by the in house software system and the pointer of VOConnection Obj Mgr object.

void OnGet VOMessage(VOMsg voMsg)；

VoMsg parameter: by the message object of in house software system transmission.

Void OnGetVOMessage function is called when using a message of internally software systems reception, and message is redirected to suitable window. In initial the realization, message is sent to VOMain Frame, and the latter explains this message. Type on message is decided, and message or show in VOOutput Wnd is presented at message box, perhaps is sent to VOConference Vw and VOVideo Watch window.

(b)VOMain Frame

Class VOMain Frame

Base class CFrame Wnd

The succession type is public

Friend's class-

(i) attribute access level typonym is described the pointer that protection VOOperator* m_p Operator points to listed vision operation person

VOSchedule Wnd* m_p Schedule Wnd points to the pointer of scheduling window

VOOutput Wnd* m_p Output Wnd points to the pointer of output window

VOConference Vw* m_p Conf Vw points to the pointer of meeting window. If simultaneously

The meeting window that a plurality of activities are arranged then is one

Individual pointer set (collection).

VOVideo Watch Vw* m_p Video Watch Vw points to the pointer of video watch window

(ii) process

Retcode Synch With Db()；

Login parameter: operator's login ID.

Password parameter: operator's password.

Retcode Synch With Db function changes at dispatch list, be called need to be with database synchronization the time.

Retcode Display Message(VOMsg voMsg)；

VoMsg parameter: the VOMsg object of internally software systems reception.

Retcode Display Message function according to the order of severity, also shows an alert message frame in the content of output window demonstration voMsg object.

void On Conference Status Changed(VOConference* pConference)；

PConference parameter: the pointer that points to the conference object that its state changed.

Void On Conference Status Changed function is called when the state of hoc meeting changes.

(c)VOSchedule Wnd

Class VOSchedule Wnd

Base class CDialog Bar

The succession type is public

Friend's class-

(i) attribute access level typonym is described the pointer that protection VOMain Frame* m_p Main Frame points to main frame window

VOSchedule* m_pSchedule points to vision operation person's dispatch list

Pointer

(ii) process

Retcode Display Schedule(BOOL filter＝O)；

Filter parameter: the filter (filter) of using for the display scheduling table. Filter=O shows whole dispatch list, and the meeting of filter=1 show events and playback are called out.

Calling of Retcode DisplaySchedule function is the tabulation for display conference in scheduling window and playback calling.

Retcode Display Conf Sites(VOConference*pConference)；

The pConference parameter: sensing will show at the site list frame of scheduling window the pointer of the conference object of its website.

Call Retcode Display Conf Sites function with the site list in the site list frame of display scheduling window.

Retcode on Click Scheduled Item()；

Return of value: return nonzero value if this selection is different from previous selection, otherwise return zero.

When user click during in the project of scheduling in the bezel, cluster, call this Retcode On Click Scheduled Item function. This initial enforcement is presented at corresponding website or this website and the film details in this playback is called out in this meeting.

Retcale On Dbl Click Scheduled Item()；

Return of value: return nonzero value if opened the meeting window, otherwise return zero.

When the user double-clicks a project in the dispatch queue bezel, cluster, call this Retcode On Dbl Click Scheduled Item function. The project that is embodied as this scheduling that this is initial is set up a new Vo Conference Vw.

Retcode On Click Site()；

When user click the scheduling window the site list frame in project the time, call this Retcode On Click Site function.

(d)VOOutput Wnd

Class VOOutput Wnd

Base class Cdialog Bar

The succession type is public

Friend's class-

(ii) process

Retcode Display Message(CString info，VOMsg*p Vo Msg＝NULL)；

Info parameter: the out of Memory that show.

P Vo Msg parameter: the pointer that points to p Vo Msg object.

Retcode Display Message function is at output window display message literal. If pVoMsg=NULL then only shows info.

(e)VOConference Vw

Class VOConferenceVw

Base class CForm View

The succession type is public

Friend's class-

VOMain Frame* m_p Main Frame points to the pointer of main frame window

VOOutput Wnd* M_pOutputWnd points to the pointer of output window

(ii) constructor

protected VO Conference Vw()；

VOConference Vw(VO Conference*p Conference)；

VOConference Vw(VOPlayback Session*p Pb Session)；

P Conference parameter: sensing will create for it pointer of the conference object of a view.

PPb Session parameter: sensing will create for it pointer of the playback session object of a view.

The meeting view is used for showing the information about the playback session of any meeting and scheduling. This view is only just called by main window when the meeting in user's double-click on scheduling window/playback session.

(iii) process

void On Conference Status Changed(VOConference* p Conference)；

PConference parameter: the pointer of the conference object that the sensing state has changed.

Void On Conference Status Changed is called when conference status changes, in order to can do corresponding renewal to UI (user interface).

void On Pb Session Status Changed(VO Playback Session* p Pb Session)；

P Pb Session parameter: the pointer of the playback session object that the sensing state has changed.

Void On Pb Session Status Changed is called when the state of playback session has changed, in order to can do corresponding renewal to UI.

void On Conn Status Changed(VOConnection*p Connection)；

P Connection parameter: the pointer of the connecting object that the sensing state has changed.

Void On Conne Status Changed is called when the state that connects has changed, in order to can do corresponding renewal to UI.

void On Call Status Changed(VOCall*pCall)；

PCall parameter: the pointer of the playback session object that the sensing state has changed.

The state of Void On Call Status Changed certain calling in active conference/playback session is called when having changed, in order to can do corresponding renewal to UI.

void On Pb Call Status Changed(VOPbcall ^*pPb Call)；

P Pb Call parameter: the pointer of the playback session object that the sensing state has changed.

Void On Pb Call Status Changed is called when the state of playback session has changed, in order to can do corresponding renewal to UI.

void Display Connection Status(VO Connection*p Connection)；

Calling of Void Display Connection Status is in order to show the state of connection.

void Display Call Status(VO Call*p Call)；

PCall parameter: the pointer of the call object that the sensing state has changed.

Calling of Void Display Call Status is state (participant or MCU) for show Calls.

Void Display Recording Status (); If have any calling in the meeting to be recorded, just call this function and show recording status.

Void Display Watch Status (); In active conference or the playback session which calls this function is presented at and calls out and to be monitored.

Void Display Playback Status (); Call this function and show playback state.

Retcode OnDial Site()；

Return of value: if nonzero value is returned in this operation start success; Otherwise return zero.

Retcode On Dial Site is called when clicking participant one side's Dial (dialing) button. This will dial the selected participant who connects.

Retcode On Dial MCU()；

Retcode Ondial MCU is called when clicking MCU one side's Dial (dialing) button. This will dial the MCU port of distributing to selected participant.

Retcode On Hangup Site()；

Retcode On Hangup Site is hung up the calling to the participant.

Retcode On Hangup MCU()；

Retcode On Hangup MCU is hung up the calling to MCU.

Retcode On Hold Site()；

Retcode On Hold Site function allows the participant keep (if calling is movable).

Retcode On Hold MCU()；

Retcode On Hold MCU function keeps (if calling is movable) by MCU.

Retcode On Watch Site()；

Retcode On Watch Site function will monitor current participant. To show at the video watch window video flowing that should the participant.

Retcode On Watch MCU()；

Retcode On Watch MCU function begins to monitor that the MCU of certain participant in the corresponding meeting draws handle (leg). Video flowing will show at the video watch window.

Retcode On Record MCU()；

Retcode On Record MCU function begins to record MCU stream. If record is carrying out, then this function suspends/stops record.

Retcode On Record Site()；

Retcode On Record Site function begins to record corresponding selected participant's stream. If record is carrying out, then record will suspend/stop.

Retcode Make Auto Connection()；

Calling of Retcode Make Auto Connection is for participant and the MCU of certainly being dynamically connected, if success just engages them.

Retcode Make Auto Disconnection()；

Return of value: if operation has been started successfully, return nonzero value, otherwise be zero.

Call Retcode Make Auto Disconnection, in order to automatically disconnect this joint, and disconnection is to the calling of participant and MCU.

Retcode Connect All()；

Calling of Retcode Connect All is in order automatically to carry out one by one all connections.

Retcode Disconnect All()；

Calling of Retcode Disconnect All is to connect in order to split off all meetings.

(f)VOVideo Watch VW

Class VOMain Frame

Base class CFrame Wnd

The succession type is public

Friend's class-

(i) attribute access level typonym is described protection VOOperator* m_pOperator and is pointed to listed vision operation person

Pointer

VOCallObjMgr* m_p Call Mgr points to the finger of call object manager

VOSchedule Wnd*m p Schedule Wnd points to the pointer of scheduling window

(ii) constructor

VOVideo Watch Vw()；

(iii) process

Void On Dial (); Dial the number in the edit box of destination.

Void On Transfer (); To the current calling of certain number argument. This will show a dialog box, and the user is the incoming call number top that will be transferred to therein.

Void On Answer (); When clicking the Answer key, be called.

Void On Forward (); When clicking the forward key, be called. The forwarding number that provides all will be provided all-calls.

Void On Mute (); When clicking the Mute key, be called. ON/OFF is quiet.

Void On Hangup (); When clicking the Hang-up key, be called. Hang up current calling.

Void On Hold (); When clicking the Hold key, be called. Current calling is kept.

Void On Pickup (); When clicking the Pickup key, be called. With the calling off-hook that keeps.

Void On Privacy (); When clicking the Privacy key, be called. The ON/OFF secret.

Void On Play Movie (); When clicking the Play key, be called. This will show a dialog box, in the tabulation of the film that will select is arranged. In case select certain film, just play this film.

Void On Record Call (); When clicking the Record key, be called.

Void On Join To Conference (); When clicking Join Conf key, be called. This is with the tabulation of show events meeting and website or playback session. The operator will select the website of corresponding current calling, and this calling will be connected to this meeting.

void Watch Video(BOOL selection)；

Return of value: if nonzero value is returned in success, otherwise return zero.

The selection parameter: what regulation will observe.

Selection=VDOWATCH_CONFERENCE shows the video that is used for observation of selecting from this website/MCU.

The output of selection=VDOWATCH_SELF display video operator's camera.

Selection=VDOWATCH_CALL shows the video of the calling of selecting from the list box that the video watch window provides, perhaps show the video (if the words that have) of incoming call.

Call the video flowing that the selection of void Watch Video function will be observed.

Void On Display Calls Window (); When clicking ' Calls ' button, be called.

Void On Self View (); When ' Self View ' is called when check box is examined or does not check. When self-view was examined, the output of vision operation person's camera just showed at an independent wicket.

Void On Local Volume (); When Local Volume slider bar change in location, be called. This will regulate local volume.

Void On Remote Volume (); When Remote Volume slider bar change in location, be called. This will regulate long-range signal volume.

B) media control class description

(1)VOMedia Control

Class VOMedia Control

Base class VOObject

The succession type is public

Friend's class-

(a) attribute access level typonym is described and is protected this structure of struct m_port Info to be used for

Mts Link Port Info communicates by letter with MCP

(b) constructor

VOMedia Control()；

(c) process

public vold Set Volume(short right Volume，short left Volume)；

Right Volume parameter: the integer between the 0-1000.

Left Volume parameter: the integer between the 0-1000.

Public void Set Volume arranges volume control.

public short Get Volume(short channel)；

Return of value: the volume of returning allocated channel.

Channel parameter: channel=PORT_CHANNEL_RIGHT is set is used for right volume setting, channel=PORT_CHANNEL_LEFT is set is used for left volume setting.

Public short Get Volume returns the current volume of allocated channel.

public void Set Self View(long flags)；

The flags parameter: the characteristic of self-view is set, and effectively the flag value is:

SELFVIEW_ON shows self-view.

SELFVIEW_OFF hides self-view.

SELFVIEW_MIRRORED mirror image oneself view.

Public void Set Self View arranges the characteristic of self-view.

public long Get Self View()；

Return of value: return self-view setting

Public long Get Self View returns self-view setting, it be used for finding self-view be visible, hide or mirror image.

public void Set Self View Size(short size)；

Size parameter: one of pre-sizing of self-view.

Public void Set Self View Size arranges the size of self-view window. Virtual value is FULL_CIF, HALF_CIF, QUARTER_CIF.

public short Get Self View Size()；

Return of value: the current size of returning self-view

Public short Get Self View Size function returns the size of current self-view window. This value is one of pre-sizing. See that Set Self View Size is to the explanation of size.

public void Set Auto Gain(BOOL auto Gain＝TRUE)

Auto Gain parameter: allow automatic gain, should be TRUE; Forbid then shoulding be FALSE.

Public void Set Auto Gain function is looked the value permission of auto Gain or is forbidden automatic gain.

public BOOL Get Auto Gain()；

Return of value: return current automatic gain setting.

Public BOOL Get Auto Gain function returns current automatic gain setting; If automatic gain allows, be true, otherwise be false.

public void Set Echo Cancellation(bool bCancel)；

BCancel parameter: if bCancel is true, allow " cancellation "; If be false, forbid " cancellation ".

Public void Set Echo Cancellation allows or forbids echo cancellation.

public BOOL Get Echo Cancellation()；

Return of value; Return current echo cancellation state.

Public BOOL Get Echo Cancellation reads the state of current echo cancellation.

public short Get Video Mode(short mode＝MODE_RX)；

Return of value: return video mode.

The mode parameter: indication receives or transmission mode.

Public short Get Video Mode reads audio frequency and receives or transmission mode, and specifically decide on the value of pattern: mode=MODE_RX represents receiving mode, and mode=MODE_TX represents transmission mode.

public short Get Audio Mode(short mode＝MODE_RX)；

Return of value: return the audio frequency mode.

The mode parameter: indication receives or transmission mode.

Public short Get Audio Mode reads audio frequency and receives or transmission mode, and specifically decide on the value of pattern: mode=MODE_RX represents receiving mode, and mode=MODE_TX represents transmission mode.

public void Set Video Wnd(HWND hWnd)；

HWnd parameter: the pointer of the window that the sensing video will be shown.

Public void Set Video Wnd function is at the window display video of hWnd parameter identification.

public HWND Get Video Wnd()；

Return of value: return the control of the window that video shows just therein. If window be not set then return zero.

When public HWND Get Video Wnd function is called, the control of the window that retrieve video shows just therein.

public void Make Video Wnd Resizeable(BOOL，bResize＝TRUE)；

The bResize parameter: if bResize is true, video window is variable-size; If be false then be immutable size.

Public void Make Video Wnd Resizeable function makes the video window variable-size with bResize=TRUE; Allow window size fix, it is false then will making bResize.

public BOOL Is Video Wnd Resizeable()；

Return of value: if video window is variable-size, return true; Otherwise return vacation.

Call public BOOL Is Video Wnd Resizeable function and determine whether variable-size of video window.

F. vision operation person's shared data bank

L. database synoptic diagram

Figure 107 represents the database synoptic diagram of vision operation person's shared data bank (see Figure 98 40214). In one embodiment, database contains lower tabulation. CONFERENCE (meeting) 41104 enumerates the details of modulated degree meeting, PARTICIPANT (participant) 41105 enumerates the participant of meeting, CONF_PARTICIPANT41108 contains the keyword in CONFERENCE 41104 and PARTICIPANT 41005 tables, and keyword is used for determining the participant of any meeting. MCU 41102 contains the characteristic from various suppliers' different MCU, and MCUPORT 41106 contains the port that the MCU identification number of MCU 41102 table and participant are used for being connected to the MCU of meeting. VOPERATOR enumerates vision operation person's attribute, and VOTYPES enumerates for conference setup or participant's all types (for example agreement, bandwidth), and VOTYPEVALUES 41107 enumerates the value of each defined type.

Each vision operation person's record in VDO_OPERATOR 41101 tables, all in its ID territory, contain an exclusive identification number, its number can occur in the operator ID territory of COFERENCE 41104 tables, each vision operation person is assigned to the hoc meeting that presets in COFERENCE 41104 tables. Each minutes in COFERENCE 41104 tables contain again an exclusive identification number in its ID territory, its number can appear at the confID territory of CONF_PARTICIPANT 41108 tables. Similarly, each the participant's record in PARTICIPANT 41105 tables contains again an exclusive identification number in its ID territory, and its number can appear at the participant ID territory of CONF_PARTICIPANT 41108 tables. At last, each the MCU record in MCU 41102 tables contains again an exclusive identification number in its ID territory, and its number can appear at the mcuID territory of MCUPORT 41106 tables, identifies the MCU sets of ports related with this MCU. Each MCU port record in MCUPORT 41106 tables contains again an exclusive identification number in its ID territory, its number can appear at the mcu Port ID territory of CONF_PARTICIPANT 41108 tables. In CONF_PARTICIPANT 41108 tables, confID, participant ID and mcu Port ID are used for definition and have the hoc meeting of given meeting profile, one group of participant and a MCU port as the keyword of cross reference.

In addition, each the VOType record in VOType 41003 tables contains again an exclusive identification number in its ID territory, and its number can appear at the typeID territory of VOTYPEVALUES 41007 tables, identifies a class value related with this VOType.

G. vision operation person's console graphical user interface window

1. master console window

Figure 108 is illustrated in an embodiment of the upper master console window 41201 that occurs of vision operation person's terminal (1 among Figure 96), expresses possibility to settle scheduling window 41202, meeting window 41203, video watch window 41204 and console output window 41205. Master console window 41201 makes the meeting of vision operation person's energy managing video.

2. scheduling window

Figure 109 represents an embodiment of scheduling window 41202, and having shown following 8 hours among the figure will be by whole meetings 41305 and the playback session 41306 of current video operator processing. In one embodiment, this is tabulated when application start, upgrades with 15 minutes intervals, upgrades when meeting adjourned at every turn.

Scheduling window will have a district, two rolling text districts-to be used for meeting 41301, another is used for participating in the website 41302 of selected meeting. If double-click the meeting title, suitable meeting window (Figure 108,110 41203) will appear.

3. meeting window

Figure 110 represents an embodiment of meeting window 41203, and it is shown when the operator selects a meeting or playback session in scheduling window 41202. The demonstration of meeting window 41203 depends on whether selected a meeting or playback session from scheduling window 41202. Only show a meeting window at every turn. When opening new meeting window, existing meeting window just stashes. Although a meeting window is hidden, the state of meeting is monitored with being connected still. Figure 110 shows a conference session 41401. Meeting window 41203 display conference participants tabulate 41415 and radio button, and radio button is used for that optionally operation is indivedual to be connected, and comprise call setup, watch, playback and record.

The information of relevant meeting such as duration, time started, concluding time, playback and recording status and conference type, shows in the bottom of window. If the operator is in the 41203 interior double-clicks of meeting window, wherein do not occur with the action that this double-clicks the some location association at this window, then display characteristic frame (Figure 113 41701) and meeting setting.

Meeting finishes when the closing session button is pressed. This will disconnect all all-calls that are associated with this meeting.

Connection in meeting window 41203 display conferences and their connection status 41417 are included as not yet any freely MCU port slot that the connection 41421 that adds keeps. Each connects tabulation and contains a radio button 41422, participant's site name 41423 and status lamp 41418-41420. The state of two callings and joint come under observation and show together with site name in meeting window 41203. State square 41418-41420 is colored box, the different call state of different color representative (for example, noncall, call out carry out, call active, the call active of being taken out stitches).

Meeting window 41203 provides button click 41417, and its definition participant website is by order vision operation person's Route Selection, that be connected to MCU port website. The further feature that this part window has is to observe from the video input of calling out, record and carry out normal video call from the video input that the either party calls out to participant's website or MCU.

The color of arrow 41424 represents the state of each calling. The color of the arrow also status lamp 41418-41420 in connecting tabulation repeats.

If there be the playback related with meeting to connect 41425, then only having a calling is essential to MCU port website. Can not access normal participant's website call setup interface, Engagement Control 41405 will become the startup of playback and the switch that stops.

Only have when the calling of the MCU of certain defined connection port is in inertia (or taking out stitches) state, could access freely MCU port. This just allows the operator similarly is that the participant participates in a conference the samely. This is by realizing selection and being connected of free MCU port calling. When connecting, the operator can notify remaining participant, and the operator is attempting contact or recovering a connection.

There are some limit of functions to reflect at meeting window 41203. Meeting window 41203 should not allow to access inexecutable function, for example:

Vision operation person once can only check a calling.

Vision operation person can at any time record any calling with the unidirectional decoder of software.

Playback connects selects appropriate change call setup button.

Vision operation person only just can participate in a conference when the MCU port is called out inertia.

Vision operation person only could talk with this participant when the participant is taken out stitches.

In order to illustrate this point, the below does once simple the connection with the meeting window and sets up. By pressing calling (Call) button near participant's website frame 41402, the operator calls out Adams (perhaps, Adams also can call operation person), and then the operator places calling and keeps 41407. By pressing the call button near MCU port website frame 41403, the operator calls out MCU, then calling is placed to keep 41408. By pressing joint (Join) button 41405, these two callings have just engaged. In another embodiment, this can be an automatic rather than artificial process. Adam and MCU couple together with video call H.320 now. All three arrows 41424 all are green.

4. video watch window

Figure 111 represents the embodiment of a video watch window 41204, and this window shows from the selected calling of meeting connection or the independent H.320 input that inputs or outputs calling. Video watch window 41204 also has to the control 41512 of carrying out normal call and media control, such as audio frequency control 41509-41510.

The video watch window is the unidirectional H.320 demonstration of decoding of selected video output of calling out. The default MCU that will show the first movable website that arranges calls out. Observe any other and call out, must press suitable checking (View) button in the meeting window. To the Voice ﹠ Video control of this window, such as volume control 41509-41510, image size control 41511 etc., be to manage with the video control panel.

When the operator selects to carry out a subnormal H320 video call (point-to-point) to the pot life sheet (slot) of certain website or certain active conference, just check video with video watch window 41204. When the operator selects Self View (oneself checks) button 41506, just should occur a little oneself nearby and check window.

5. console output window

Figure 112 represents the embodiment of a console output window 41205, and this window shows that institute is wrong and report to the police 41601. This window is rotatable, so vision operation person can see that the institute that occurs in the current sessions is wrong. These message also are recorded to a text and do in the future reference.

6. property dialog box

Figure 113 characterization dialog box 41701. Dialog box is provisional window, and is just temporary transient shown. They are generally used for inputting data or display requirement causes the information of noting immediately. This will be a modeless dialog box that shows the characteristic of hoc meeting or website. Whenever can only open a this window. If the user notice at another meeting window or connect window, just upgrade same dialog box with suitable characteristic. Figure 113 has represented the characteristic related with particular station, comprises website telegon 41702, website telephone number 41703, time 41704, connection type 41705, terminal type 41706. Close (closing) button 41707 closing property dialog boxes 41701.

XVII. WWW (WWW) browser capabilities

A. user interface

The design of graphic user interface is so that only need a single IP to connect from the work station to the server. This single IP connects the Internet connection of both having supported between WWW browser and the WWW website, also supports the PC client computer to be connected with the message transmission of universal inbox (being message center). PC client interface and WWW browser interface are integrated, so that these two parts can coexist as same work station, share single IP and connect and can not cause two conflicts between the application.

The WWW browser access is subject to the support of any WWW browser that can be obtained by the commercial channel:

·Mirosoft Internet Explorer；

·Netscape Navigator(1.2、2.X)：

·Spyglass Mosaic

In addition, the WWW browser interface is optimised, and to support Windows 95, but, Windows 3.1, Windows 3.11 are also supported.

The WWW browser interface detects the display characteristic of teller work station (or terminal), adapts this expression with the demonstration setting at support performance station. This expression is optimized about 640 * 480 pixels show, but also can utilize enhancement mode resolution ratio and the display quality of 800 * 600 (or higher) monitor.

For improving performance, the user can make one's options between ' minimal graph ' and ' full figure ' expression. The WWW browser will detect user selection ' minimal graph ' still ' full figure ', only send the graphic file that is fit to.

B. performance

From WWW website or personal homepage to the teller work station or the response time of terminal downloads information meet following benchmark:

Workstation configuration:

Processor: 486DX-33MHz;

Internal memory: 12MB;

Monitor: VGA, Super VGA or XGA;

Access: dialing;

·Windows 95；

Expression is selected: full figure

Peripheral hardware: sound card, audio frequency playout software, 14.4Kbps modem.

Requirement	Mean value	Limiting value
Requirement	Mean value	Limiting value	The retrieval personal homepage. The calculating of time shows " Document:Done " from the user selection bookmark to status bar	20 seconds	30 seconds

Other WWW screen beyond the retrieval personal homepage. The calculating of time shows " Document:Done " from user selection hypertext link or label to status bar	5 seconds (only text) or 15 seconds (scheduling screen)	15 seconds (only text) or 30 seconds (scheduling screen)
	5 seconds (only text) or 15 seconds (scheduling screen)	15 seconds (only text) or 30 seconds (scheduling screen)	Beginning voice played email message. The voice mail message of the calculating of time from the user selection message center begins to play in the teller work station to streaming audio file.	10 seconds	15 seconds

Download a screen or page or leaf from the WWW website to work station after, cursor is by the pre-aligned territory that is required to first or the territory that can be updated.

C. personal homepage

The ability that system provides the user to set up personal homepage, personal homepage are people and telex network or the instrument planning to meet with the user. Claim that the people of the personal homepage of calling party is the guest, the user of " having " personal homepage is the user.

Guest access to personal homepage is supported following characteristics:

Create and send the text based beep-page message by network MCI paging;

Create and send email message to Email (MCI mail or internet MCI) account;

The calling party calendar is to arrange meet.

Be sent to user's network MCI or Sky Tel pager or MCI electronic mail account by the message of individual subscriber homepage generation.

The email message of guest's establishment is incited somebody to action:

In Email Header proposition user's name, rather than user's e-mail address;

Provide a territory at Email Header, be used for

-sender's name (essential territory),

-sender's e-mail address (optional territory),

-theme (optional territory).

The guest is " request " appointment on the individual subscriber homepage.

The appointment of asking on the individual subscriber homepage will be with " (R) " as prefix.

The appointment of agreeing will be with " (A) " as prefix.

The user is responsible for their calendar of routine inspection, and the appointment of agreement or removal request, and begins the tracking communication to necessity of requesting party. By (" the A ") prefix as the appointment of agreeing.

Safety requirements

To support two level securities to the design from the calendar access of personal homepage:

Access without PIN:

-only have number of times, or

-number of times and event;

The PIN access:

-only have number of times, or

-number of times and event;

1. memory requirement

System stores and keeps the appointment in past and future in the following manner:

This month, add over 6 months historical calendar appointment

12 months calendar appointment in future after this month adds.

The user can select to download the content of the predetermined moon appointment that will be capped in database. Will be downloaded to user's calendar information, make separator with comma, or the DBF form, can be input in microsoft Schedule+, ACT or the Asend software.

2. at the screen aid text

Provide guest and the territory specifically icon access of " help " instruction of user to will in personal homepage, carrying out at the screen aid text. The information that help text provides has been described:

How to send to text based beep-page message of user by network MCI paging from personal homepage;

How send to email message of user from personal homepage to the MCI electronic mail account;

How to access and upgrade user's calendar;

The personal homepage of consumer positioning how;

If subscribe the personal homepage of oneself by MCI.

3. personal homepage catalogue

Provide the guest to pass through the ability of existing MCI homepage access personal homepage catalogue. This catalogue allows the guest with regard to unique individual's homepage address, by regulation surname (essential), name (optional), tissue (optional), country (optional) and/or postcode (optional), retrieve the personal homepage account of all foundation. The result of personal homepage catalog search returns following information: surname, name, middle name initial, tissue, city, state and postcode. Although one in city not in search condition, provides in result for retrieval.

Another means that the guest locates personal homepage are by the WWW browser. Many WWW browsers have the ability of built-in retrieval " mesh record ". User's personal homepage is listed in the IP address catalogue that is provided by the WWW browser. The benefit of retrieving from the MCI homepage is to only have personal homepage indexed (and retrieval). Select to retrieve by the WWW browser menu, will not be restricted to personal homepage to retrieval, therefore will retrieve by larger url list. In addition, the guest can input the specific URL (being open position) for personal homepage rather than carry out primary retrieval. This is particular importance concerning those do not have the user who in catalogue their personal homepage is enumerated.

4. control strip

Control strip appears at the bottom of personal homepage. Control strip occurs after the MCI homepage has been selected personal homepage the guest. Control strip provides the guest access following characteristics:

Help text

The MCI homepage

The personal homepage catalogue

Feedback

5. homepage

Homepage is that the user carries out message retrieval, exercises the point of penetration of profile management from the WWW browser. Designing of home page provides the user easily access message center or profile management.

6. safety requirements

Access to message center or profile management is limited to authorized user. The user is prompted to input ID and password, then could access message center or profile management. After three unsuccessful trials, the user is prevented from access message center or profile management, and a WARNING (warning) prompting message user and MCI User support group contact. This account is closed, until the representative of MCI User support recovers this account. The account requires the user to upgrade its password after recovering.

If login successfully to message center, the user needn't be subjected to another time just can access the profile management to the inquiry of (same) ID and password. Concerning the user of successful access profile management, situation also is equally needn't be subjected to another time to the inquiry energy access message center of (same) ID and password once them. The term of validity of password is 1 month. If password expires, more new password of reminding user. To the renewal of password, require the user to input overdue password, again with twice of new password input.

7. at the screen aid text

The user is provided the icon access of specific " help " instruction in territory to operating in homepage. The information that help text provides has been described:

Access message center how;

How to access the profile management;

' how to access the MCI homepage;

How to access personal homepage;

How to send (create or transmit) message by message center;

How to submit message to by message center;

How to upgrade direct line MCI profile;

Lastest imformation service profiler how;

How to access personal homepage;

How to upgrade their personal homepage;

How to provide feedback at homepage;

Subscribing user guide how.

Control strip (Control Bar)

Control strip appears at the bottom of homepage. Control strip provides the guest access to following feature:

Help text;

The MCI homepage

The personal homepage catalogue

Feedback.

8. profile management

Screen aid text and control strip, profile management screen also provides a title bar (Title Bar) except discussed above. Title bar makes the user can easily access profile and manages each parts, the fast access message center. By the access of profile being managed each parts is provided with label. Label comprises:

Direct line MCI;

Information service;

Personal homepage;

List management;

Message is disposed.

Direct line MCI label comprises other label of the inherent parts of expression direct line MCI:

Voice mail;

Faxmail;

Paging.

Direct line MCI profile management system provides the user profile management page, from then on can account's profile information wherein be operated, so that:

Create new direct line MCI profile and be profile tax name;

Upgrade existing direct line MCI profile;

Support rule-based direct line MCI to create and more new logic (for example, only to the selection of a call route selecting options such as voice mail, call the replacement Route Selection to voice mail; The renewal done involves all influenced screens-such as page notification in a screen);

Allow a direct line MCI number;

Allow and the alternative Route Selection number of definition;

Allow and definition Follow Me (with me) Route Selection;

Be each the number definition RNA parameter in the direct line MCI Follow Me Route Selection sequence;

Allowing and define final route selects (being called in the past alternate routing selects) to arrive:

-voice mail and pager,

-only voice mail,

-only pager,

-final message;

If have two or more call route selecting options (Follow Me, voice mail, faxmail or pager) to be allowed to, then call the menu Route Selection;

Allow voice mail;

Allow faxmail;

Allow paging;

For faxmail is delivered the default number of definition;

For voice mail starts page notification;

For faxmail starts page notification;

The plan of the different direct line MCI of definition activation/deactivation profile;

Provide the guest to be urgent selection of delivering the speech classification of mail;

For all type of message configuration time zones, be used for the received time of identification message;

Be the following definition call visor parameter:

-title and ANI;

-ANI only;

-title only;

Permission or No Stopping and paging.

9. information service profile management

The ability that information service profile management provides the user selection information source, deliver mechanism (voice mail, pager, Email) and deliver frequency according to information source and content choice. Specifically, any information source under the user can be configured to:

Stock index and money article;

News in brief

Stock index and money article provide the user following content:

The Business Wire summary;

Stock index (being no more than 10 minutes time delay);

Securities market report (per hour once, am/pm or COB);

Currency and bond report (per hour once, am/pm or COB);

Noble metal report (per hour once, am/pm or COB);

Commodity reports (per hour once, am/pm or COB);

The Business Wire summary is delivered once by Email every day. Various reports (securities market, currency and bond, noble metal, commodity) were delivered by the user-defined time interval. To require the time stamp of Email be behind the integral point 10 minutes to report by the hour. The am/pm report requires email message of transmission in the morning (a.m ET 11:10), email message of transmission in afternoon (pm ET 5:10), and the COB report requires to transmit at pm ET 5:10.

The content of securities market report contains:

The automatic quotations machine of stock or common fund symbol (mutual fund ticker symbol);

Stock or common fund opening price;

Stock or common fund closing price;

The stock that records at last or the valency of peddling of common fund;

The stock of record or common fund is buying price at last;

52 weeks of stock or common fund are high;

52 weeks of stock or common fund are low.

Stock index and money article provide the user to select and define the ability of the standard that voice mail or text based paging are provided from available stock and common fund tabulation. Definable standard is called ' trigger point ', can be following any or all of condition:

Stock or common fund reach the high value in 52 weeks;

Stock or common fund reach the low value in 52 weeks;

Stock or common fund reach user-defined high point;

Stock or common fund reach user-defined low spot.

After ' trigger point ' condition is met, just in 1 minute, transmit a message (voice mail or text based paging) to the user. Voice mail is sent to the mailbox that the user defines in user's direct line MCI account. The time of the information content of stock index and money article is no more than 10 minutes.

10. personal homepage profile management

The management of personal homepage profile provides their personal homepage of customization and defines the ability how guest communicates by letter with their (Emails and text based paging). In addition, the profile management also makes the user can control the guest to the access of their calendar. Specifically, the user can:

Set up and safeguard a hello messages;

Set up and safeguard contact details (being address information);

Set up and safeguard the personal calendar;

Gating or forbid that the guest is to the access of paging, Email or calendar;

The PIN that is used for standard or privilege access by definition controls the guest to the access of calendar;

The image that authorized user is submitted to such as individual photo or company's icon are placed on the precalculated position on the personal homepage.

When setting up personal homepage, contact details are that the destination address information with the user provides. The user has the ability to upgrade this address information in the contact details.

11. list management

List management provides the user to create and upgrades the ability of tabulation. The profile management provides the user to define can be by the ability message center access, that be used for the tabulation of message propagation. In one embodiment, list management is central authoritiesization, so that faxcasting list management ability and direct line MCI list management ability are integrated, so that a single list database to be provided. In an alternate embodiment, these two list management systems are independently, so the user can access any list database.

Tabulation by one with the PC client computer on the similar interface of address book preserve, the user can increase or the deletion name tabulation thus. Related with each name is e-mail address, faxmail address (being ANI), voice mail address (being ANI) and paging plane No.. When message was added message center inbox (being universal inbox) to, address book was upgraded by the source address with the association messages type.

When user selection is set up distribution list, be prompted to select name, type and identifier into this tabulation. The tabulation of all establishments can be used by the lexicographic order of name. The type (speech, fax, Email, paging) of tabulation accompanies with the tabulation name. In addition, list identifier can be comprised of alphabetic character.

Then the user is prompted to provide recipient's name and address to create a distribution list. The user can seek the recipient information with its address book. The user is not subjected to the restriction of record identical address type in its tabulation. If tabulation is to create with the fax type, the user can add ANI, Email and address of paging in tabulation. The user can manage its distribution list with creating, check, edit (adding and the deletion recipient) and renaming all abilities.

When user selection comes modification list by the WWW browser interface, be prompted to select address style (speech, fax, paging, Email), and should be the tabulation that this address style is stipulated user's distribution list. The user also can input list name and locate it. The user can be by creating, check, editor (adding and the deletion recipient), deleting and rename all orders and come modification list.

When the user came modification list with recipient's interpolation, deletion or address change, she can make this modification revise as the overall situation. For example, the user is in tabulation reorganization Mr.'s Brown voice mail address. She can make this change become overall situation change, namely changes Mr.'s Brown address in all its allocation tables. Although the user is except creating and revise allocation table by ARU and VRU by PC, the tabulation ability of maintenance of enhancing is supported by the WWW browser interface.

The user can retrieve tabulation by name or by different address fields, to list ordering. For example, the user is by using * DOLE* order just can retrieve the tabulation that all contain ' DOLE ' in search function. In addition, the user can retrieve tabulation with any one address field. For example, the user can retrieve on the basis of recipient's number name or the postcode of ' extremely '. The user can come list ordering by list name, identifier or type or by any one address field.

Except retrieval capability, distribution list software also makes the user copy and to create the son tabulation from existing distribution list record. The user can input or output the recipient's data from the external data library structure.

Also there is the ability of sharing tabulation and uploading (upload) tabulation to the host between the user.

12. global message management

The global message management provides the user to define will be in the ability of " universal inbox (inbox) " type of message that occur or that accessed by message center. The below is selectable type of message:

Direct line MCI voice mail;

Direct line MCI faxmail;

Network MCI and SkyTel paging;

Email (being MCI mail or internet MCI) from the MCI electronic mail account.

If the user at the row of special services, therefore can not select in global message is processed with regard to grizzle by this option. Any renewal to global message is processed all can cause the real-time update to message center. For instance, certain user may select to allow voice mail message to occur at message center. Message center automatically retrieve the voice mail databases all voice mail message.

D. message center

Message center plays retrieval and disposes the function of " universal inbox " of message object. " universal inbox " is comprised of file, and file contains the message of handing over to the user. The access of message center is subjected to the support of all WWW browsers, and still contained content only provides following type of message in " universal inbox ":

Voice mail: the direct line MCI account who sends to the user;

Email: MCI Email (being MCI mail or the internet MCI) account who sends to the user;

Faxmail: the direct line MCI account who sends to the user;

Paging: the network MCI paging account (or SkyTel paging account) who sends to the user;

Except each joint discussed above screen aid text and control strip, message center screen also provides a title bar. Title bar makes the user can easily access profile and manages each function, the fast access message center. The function of the message center by the title bar support is:

File: enumerate user-defined file, allow the user selection file;

Create: work out new email message;

Transmit: voice mail will be used as e-mail attachment and transmit;

Retrieval: the ability of retrieving according to type of message, sender's name or address, theme or date/time is provided;

Preserve: allow the user with message be saved in file on the universal inbox, to the work station file or to disk.

When by message center establishment or forwarding messages, the user can send message with Email or faxmail. Unique restriction is that voice mail can only be transmitted as voice mail or as e-mail attachment. All other type of messages are all interchangeable, so that Email can be forwarded to facsimile machine, pager message can be used as e-mail text message and transmits. The message of sending with faxmail generates by the G3 form, supports to the distribution of faxcasting tabulation.

The expression layout of message center is consistent with the expression layout of PC client computer, so that they have identical the look and feel. Message center is designed to provide a message header frame and message preview frame, is similar to the expression of being supported by nMB v3.x. The user can dynamically readjust the height of message header frame and message preview frame. The message header frame will show following envelope information:

Type of message (Email, speech, fax, paging);

Sender's name, ANI or e-mail address;

Theme;

Date/time;

Message size.

The message preview frame show the email message text initial number row, fax mail messages homepage initial number row, beep-page message or about the instruction of any dialing voice mail message. Supported as streaming audio (streaming audio) ability by WWW browser voice played mail, so that the user needn't arrive work station with downloaded before displaying audio file. Streaming audio is to start when the voice mail stem of user in the message header frame selected (clicking left mouse button). The demonstration of fax mail messages is to start immediately after the faxmail stem of user in the message header frame selected (clicking left mouse button).

Message center also allows the user to use the distribution list that has created in the profile management. Distribution list is supported between different type of messages and sends message.

Except basic message retrieval and distribution of messages, message center also is supported in and creates in the universal inbox and maintenance documentation folder (or catalogue). Originally the user is limited to following file:

Contribution: keep message all preservations, that not yet send;

Inbox: keep the message that all are received by " universal inbox ", the default file folder when being user's access message center;

Send: keep the message that all have sent;

Rubbish: all message of doing delete flag were kept 7 days. The user will finally can create (with renaming) file (with the file in the file).

1. memory requirement

Originally, the user is assigned with the memory space of limited quantity for storage direct line MCI voice mail and direct line MCI faxmail. Pager repeated call message and email message are not subjected to the restriction of spent amount of storage space, but are subjected to the restriction of the date/time mark of received message. At last, will implement memory requirement such as fate according to a public-measurement unit. This will provide the simpler method of user to understand message and when will be deleted from database, when will be forbidden the guest to their " universal inbox " storing message (voice mail, faxmail). In order to support this point, the message that keeps in the inbox there is following requirement:

Direct line MCI voice mail: 60 minutes;

Direct line MCI faxmail: 50 pages;

Network MCI page or leaf: 99 hours;

Email: 6 months.

The user has the right to choose that the message (except the message that keeps in the junk folder) of planning to be capped in database is downloaded.

E. PC client capabilities

1. user interface

The support of PC client interface is wanted in storage and is transmitted the user who operates in the environment. It is to dispose or local storage that these users want the purpose of download message. Profile management, PC client interface only give information (voice mail, faxmail, Email, text paging) are not supported in the design of PC client computer. Only has the ability that could obtain to utilize the profile management by ARU interface or WWW browser interface. The PC client interface is combined with the WWW browser interface, so that these two parts can coexist as same work station, shares a single IP and connects.

The PC client interface is optimized, to support Windows 95; But also support Windows 3.1.

The design of graphic user interface, the stem that gives information window and message preview window are similar to the expression of being supported and being supported by the WWW browser by nMB v3.x. The user can dynamically readjust the height of message header window and message preview window. The message header window shows following envelope information:

Type of message (Email, speech, fax, paging);

Sender's name, ANI or e-mail address;

Theme;

Date/time;

Message size.

The message preview window shows the initial number row, pager message of initial number row, the fax mail messages homepage of email message text or about how playing the instruction of fax mail messages or voice played email message. From PC client computer voice played email message, requiring has sound card on the PC. The demonstration of fax mail messages will be called the faxmail reader in the PC client computer.

2. safety

User rs authentication between PC client computer and the server is consulted during dialing enters system session. Support to safety is wanted so that when setting up interface ID and password information are embedded in the information of transmitting between PC client computer and the server. Do not require that the user inputs their ID and password by hand. In addition, to circulate a notice of to the PC client computer the renewal of password.

3. message retrieval

Message retrieval provides the retrieval of user selection ground to reside on the ability of voice mail, faxmail, paging and email message in " universal inbox ". Type of message in the demonstration of PC client computer and broadcast comprises:

Direct line MCI voice mail

Direct line MCI faxmail

Network MCI paging

Email from electronic mail account

The PC client computer starts single communication session and comes all type of messages of retrieval from " universal inbox ". This single communication session can be retrieved the upstream data storehouse of containing voice mail, faxmail, Email and paging.

The PC client computer also can be carried out the selective message retrieval, so that the user can

Retrieve all message;

The full text this (or text) of retrieval selected message stem;

Come searching message according to following editable search criterion:

-prioritized messages;

-email message;

-pager message;

-fax mail messages (all or only stem);

-voice mail message (all or only stem);

-sender name, address or ANI;

The date/time mark of-message;

-message size.

The fax mail messages that stem is only arranged of retrieval is retained in " universal inbox " until message text is retrieved out from " universal inbox ". Voice mail message be retained in " universal inbox " until the user by WWW browser (being message center) or ARU access " universal inbox " and delete this message. Be transferred to desktop folder from the message of " universal inbox " retrieval.

In addition, PC client's function is supported backstage and planned poll, so that the user can carry out message operation (create, edit, delete, transmit, preserve etc.) in PC client retrieves message.

4. message operation

The message operation makes the user can carry out many standard message and transmits the client computer action, as:

Establishment (or establishment) Email, faxmail or beep-page message;

Transmit all type of messages;

Preserve;

Editor;

Deletion;

Distribute;

Attached;

Retrieval;

Show or broadcast message.

F. order input requirements

The client of direct line MCI or network MCI business is provided to carry out the additional interface option of profile management and message management function. Professional the two the client of direct line MCI or network MCI all automatically provided by the different interface type access the account of getable feature and function. Also support to provide to the client of network MCI business account's ability, but be not to provide the account to the professional client of all-network MCI. The order input is flexibly, is enough to generate the account by being required to be the professional client of network MCI.

The design of order input is so that additional interface type and the service that the client of direct line MCI client or network MCI business is automatically provided access system to be provided. For example, the client of reservation direct line MCI (or network MCI is professional) is provided the account of the homepage of the management of an access profile or message center. Inspection will put in place, disposes the account of the account of two accounts-direct line MCI, a network MCI business to prevent the client. In order to finish this point, set up integrated between these two order input processes.

The integrated approach of order input requires a single interface. The ability of this Interface integration order input is installed in the order entry system so that the order input looks like, and does not require that order input keeper is established to the independently login sessions of a plurality of order entry systems. This integrated order input interface is supported conforming order input method is adopted in all services, can be from essential order entry system information extraction. In addition, this interface also supports to watch the ability with the service of the existing association of user.

The particular requirement of integrated order interface system is:

Be used for defining automatically feeding of MCI Email (MCI mail or internet MCI) account;

Be used for automatically feeding of define grid MCI paging account (or SkyTel paging account);

Be used for defining automatically feeding of direct line MCI account;

Be used for automatically feeding of gating faxcasting ability;

The ability of artificial input MCI electronic mail account, network MCI paging account or direct line MCI account information

Gating or forbid ability to the access of inbound communication service; With

Gating or the ability of forbidding the access of subtend external information service.

These abilities have been given the flexibility of order input operator according to professional (Email, paging, direct line MCI) account information interpolation of existing MCI user. Possibility is that order management person can add the user in the regulation infrastructure service.

Order entry system downstream accounting system provides necessary clients' accounts and information on services. They also follow the tracks of initial customer order and all follow-up renewals, so that MCI can avoid sending platform software (being PC client) and the document (being users' guidebook) of repetition. In addition, the order input process also makes the keeper can obtain following message:

The record client delivers and name;

-support America ﹠ Canada address,

-ability of delivering to P.O. Box of preventing is provided;

Record client's record keeping address, telephone number and contact name;

Record Order Date and all subsequently renewals;

Name, telephone number and the branch (division) of account's representative of order submitted in record;

Record or acquisition user's direct line MCI number;

Record or acquisition user's network MCI paging PIN;

Record or acquisition user's MCI electronic mail account ID;

Generating an electronics sends to and the day of finishing Statistics Division (fulfilmenthouse) finishes report;

Generate the Days report of a track record following content:

The order numbers of-reception;

-requirement creates network MCI paging (or SkyTle paging) account's order numbers;

-requirement creates the order numbers of network MCI electronic mail account;

-requirement creates direct line MCI account's order numbers.

The client can subscribe personal homepage. Client's delivery information of record is the default addresses for use information that the personal homepage from the user provides during order input. In addition, the order input process is supported installation and the charge of special graph.

Exist for special services and ' open ' ability of ' pass ' existing functional part/function. Can in order entry system, be identified by the functional part of user management. Then these functional parts are activated for the management in user's the catalogue account.

The real time access ability is arranged between order entry system and user's catalogue account. This account has equipped all users' business, product feature/function, account information, and no matter whether the user is manageable. Those be not the project that is designated user management be can not be by the user the interface access.

1. regulation and realization

By to the inbound access of system and from the outside accesses definition of system visiting demand. Inbound access comprises that user or calling subscriber can be by the processes of its access system. Outwards access comprises that the user is subjected to process according to the processing of the system of preferred embodiment by it. Exist the inbound and outside internet support of processing the two.

Can provide inbound access with lower member:

Direct line MCI:800/8XX;

MCI mail: 800/8XX, e-mail address;

Network MCI paging: 800/8XX;

Internet MCI mail: 800/8XX, the POP3 e-mail address.

Be identified as for outside access with lower member:

Direct line MCI: dial 1;

Faxcasting: 800/8XX, this locality;

MCI mail: 800/8XX, e-mail address;

Internet MCI mail: 800/8XX, the POP3 e-mail address.

G. communication system

By current MCI process support communication.

H. fix a price

Originally, according to the existing price structure for the basic components definition, the functional part of marking the price. In addition; For basic components, being supported, they also support taxation and discount ability as current. Also support the discount to the user who subscribes a plurality of business.

I. keep accounts

Accounting system:

Support is to the charge of direct line MCI enhancement service (voice mail, faxmail, the two);

Support the charge by peak period and non-peak period rate;

Support is to the discount of multi-service (direct line MCI, network MCI business, network MCI paging, network MCI Cellular Networks), and discount becomes according to the quantity of service;

Direct line MCI is called out (initiation with termination) support forbid the ability of network MCI Cellular Networks charge;

The charge of responsive monthly fee is used in support to direct line MCI;

Support is to use free a few minutes as the sales promotion of form according to direct line MCI;

Support is to the charge of personal homepage;

The ability to the personal homepage charge is forbidden in support;

Support the SCA price.

In one embodiment, accounting system is supported the current opening or cleaning list process that each basic components are existed. In another embodiment, record keeping provides a kind of unified inventory that comprises all basic components. Except the opening or cleaning list, also support the current orientation of directed all basic components of keeping accounts of supporting is kept accounts.

XVIII. direct line MCI

Below be described as the architecture of the direct line MCI that revised for native system. This file relates to general data and the call-flow in the direct line MCI platform, has put down in writing network and hardware architecture for supporting that these streams are essential. Record keeping stream in the down-stream system is in very high-level narration. Order input (OE) stream in the up-stream system is in very high-level narration. Certain part of direct line MCI architecture re-uses existing parts (for example audio acknowledgement unit (ARU)). Direct line MCI architecture those new parts will be described in detail.

A. general introduction

Except record keeping, order input and reporting to the police, there are three chief component parts in direct line MCI system, as shown in figure 43:

ARU (audio acknowledgement unit) 502

VFP (speech fax platform) 504

DDS (data allocations is professional) 506

Below each merogenesis at high level each critical piece is described.

Figure 43 represents the high-level relationships between the Major Systems parts.

1. ARU (audio acknowledgement unit) 502

ARU 502 processes all initial inbound callings of direct line MCI. Some feature (such as look for I/follow me) realize at ARU fully. Inbound fax is to carry out pitch detection by ARU, expands to VFP's 504. The menu that ARU provides can be used to request access voice mail/faxmail feature, calls out in this case and also is extended to VFP.

2. VFP (speech fax platform) 504

VFP for voice mail/faxmail also for outwards the forwarding of fax and speech and pager notifications provide menu. VFP also is the central data storage vault of preserving the customized user prompting of being play and recording by ARU502.

3. DDS (data allocations professional) 506

DDS is the central data storage vault of preserving 0E profile and record keeping detail records (BDR). The 0E profile is stored with DDS, and DDS is responsible for profile is assigned to all suitable systems. DDS 506 collects BDR and they is transferred to the downstream accounting system.

B. principle

To the requirement of direct line MCI service be with the miscellaneous service component integration be one by the single business of single 800 number access. Many these business components had been developed at ISN ARU platform in the past. The business that does not provide among the ARU is mailbox service and facsimile service. The ARU 502 of system 500 has adopted from the voice mail of Texas Instrument (TI) company purchase/faxmail platform. For performance, reliability and extensibility, part software is transplanted on the DEC A1pha machine and is moved. Another requirement that direct line MCI is realized is and keep accounts integrated with order entry system of main flow (existing MCI). DDS provides inbound between direct line MCI and the main flow order entry system and to external tapping.

C. details

Figure 43 represents the relation between the Major Systems parts. OE system 508 generates user profile, and the latter is downloaded to ARU 502 and speech fax platform (VFP) 504 by DDS 506. The BDR that is generated by ARU 502 and VFP 504 is fed to accounting system 510 by DDS 506. ARU 502 processes all inbound callings. If detect fax tones, if perhaps require voice mail/faxmail, call out and just expanded to VFP 504 from ARU 502. With regard to mailbox state (for example " you have three message "), ARU 502 is to VFP504 query State and play cuing.

The prompting of user's customization is stored on the VFP 504. When ARU plays the prompting of customization or records new prompting, point out accessed on VFP 504. Warning from ARU 502 and VFP 504 is sent to local supporter (LSE).

1. the call-flow architecture 520

Figure 44 represents the call-flow architecture of direct line MCI. The top of figure represents to connect for the network 522 of call transmission. The bottom of figure represents the call direction of different type of calls. Below each merogenesis explanatory note to this figure is provided.

2. network connection

All inbound ISN call out received at the automatic call distributor that is connected to MCI network 522 (ACD) 524. Access control point (ACP) receives the notice from the inbound calling of integrated service network application processor (ISNAP) 526, and ISNAP is the control/data-interface that links ACD 524. Network audio system (NAS) is play and recording of voice by the T1 interface to ACD under the control of ACP. In the U.S., adopt digital multiplex switching system, wherein the first order of multipath conversion transmission-be called T1-combine 24 digitlization speech channels at 4 line cables (couple of conductor is used for " transmissions " signal, and couple of conductor is for " reception " signal). The bit format of the routine on the T1 carrier wave is called DSl (being first order multiplexing digital business or digital signals format), and it is comprised of continuous frame, and each frame has 24 each PCM voice channels of 8 (or DS0 channel). Each frame also has the framing bit as control in addition, and every frame always has 193. The T1 transfer rate is per second 8000 frames or per second 1.544 megabits (Mbps). Adopt a kind of technology that is called time division multiplex (DTM) to assemble the frame that transmits for T1, wherein each DS0 passage is assigned with one of 24 sequential time sheets in the frame, and each timeslice contains 8 words.

The transmission of the network by local, area and long distance service supplier relates to the call treatment by the complexity of various switches and multiplexed carrier level. The summit of conventional high-speed transfer is Synchronous Optical Network (SONET), and it adopts fiber medium, and the transfer rate (surpassing per second 1,000,000,000 bits) of gigabit scope can be arranged. Through behind the network, more senior multiplexed carrier is decomposed back each DS0 circuit by multichannel, is connected to each subscriber phone after the decoding.

Usually, a plurality of signals multipath conversion on a uniline. For example, DS3 transmission is normally with the coaxial cable transmission, the DS1 signal that to combine 28 speed be 44.736Mbps. Be positioned at the OC3 optic fibre carrier of the low layer of photosphere time, the DS3 signal that to combine 3 speed be 155.52Mbps provides the capacity of 2016 indivedual voice channels at single optical cable. The SONET transmission of being made carrier by optical fiber can have higher transfer rate.

The NAS/ACP combination is called as ARU 502. If ARU 502 determines that certain calling must be extended to VFP 504, it is just transferred to VFP 504. VFP media server and MCI network 522 link to each other by T1. Per call is all finished by dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) from the transmission that relates to of ARU 502 to VFP 504.

3. call-flow

The below is described in detail calling sight shown in Figure 44. When any inbound calling began, ARU 502 had received this calling, had carried out an application choice, called out to determine this whether direct line MCI calls out.

A) inbound fax

Inbound facsimile call is passed to ARU 502. ARU carries out fax tones and detects, and then calling is expanded to VFP 504. With dtmf signaling account number and mode are delivered to VFP.

B) inbound speech, only use ARU

Under user mode or guest's mode, carry out an inbound voice call, only have and use those features of ARU 502 just accessed. ARU determines mode (user or guest). Under user mode, ARU inquiry VFP 504 determines the number of message. Do not carry out extra access to netwoks.

C) inbound/outwards speech, only use ARU

Call out to ARU 502. And the access pager notifications or seek I/follow my functional part, ARU 502 transfers to outside number through ACD 524.

D) inbound speech, VFP functional part

Call out to ARU 502, call out and be extended to VFP 504. By DTMF account number and mode (user or guest) are delivered to VFP. Guest's mode is:

1. deposit voice mail.

2. deposit faxmail.

3. collection faxmail.

User mode is:

1. retrieve or send mail.

2. keep broadcast lists.

3. revise the name record.

VFP 504 prompting user continuously during the VFP session.

E) export-oriented fax/speech/pager, only use VFP

Deliver or pager notifications for fax or speech, VFP directly transfers at MCI network 522.

F) again start/fetch

During inbound user's call connection arrived VFP 504, the user pressed two seconds by sterling being accorded with key, just can turn back to the top layer of ARU 502 direct line MCI menus. Network 522 will be called out from VFP 504 and fetch, and will call out the ARU 502 that again starts.

4. data flow architecture

Figure 45 has described the elementary stream in the direct line MCI architecture 520: OE record (client's profile) and has been imported into up-stream system, is downloaded to main frame 532 530. The DDS main frame is recorded network information Distributed Services (NIDS) server 534 and the VFP/ that are downloaded on the ARU/ACP with OE and is carried out server 536. These downloads are undertaken by ISN token-ring network 538. Carrying out on the server 536, the OE record is stored in the local execution server database (not giving expression).

BDR is performed server 536 and ACP540 is cut apart. These BDR store in operator's network center (ONC) server 542, then are uploaded to DDS main frame 532. Uploading by ISN token-ring network 538 from the ONC server to the DDS main frame carried out.

ARU 502 points out the quantity of their voice mail/fax mail messages to the user. The quantity of the message that the user has is to be obtained from VFP 504 by the ACP 540 on the ISNAP Ethernet 544. Notice that ACP 540 can be positioned at any ISN website.

The specific prompting of being play by NAS 546 of user record is stored in VFP 504, is play as required on network by NAS 546. NFS agreement 548 is used on ISNAP LAN (LAN) 544 and the wide area network (WAN) 550.

D. speech fax platform (VFP) 504 detailed architecture

1. general introduction

Figure 46 represents the hardware component of speech facsimile part 504 of the direct line MCI system of first embodiment. Critical piece in this system is:

TI Multi Serve 4000 media servers 560

DEC 8200 carries out server 536.

Cabletron MMAC+ maincenter 562.

Alpha Station 200 console managers and terminal server 564.

Bay Networks 5000 maincenters 566.

In another embodiment, the Cabletron maincenter will be removed from configuration, bears all Networks by Bay Networks maincenter.

2. principle

TI Multi Serve 4,000 560 select to be used for the voice mail of direct line MCI platform/faxmail part by MCI. Multi Serve 4000 is the 68040 quite full machines on a quite slow Nubus base plate. The 68040/Nubus machine not only is used as media server (DSPs of T1 interface, speech and fax) but also be used as execution server (database and object memories) by TI company. Although this hardware enough is used as media server, serve as the execution server speech and facsimile data and the thousands of media server port of hundreds if not thousands of GB, but be inadequate. In addition, not having can be for troop (clustering) (for performance or redundancy) of media server hardware. Therefore, the execution server section realized of TI is transplanted by MCI in order to troop at

DEC Alpha

8200 and 536 move-hereinafter will be illustrated. This is trooped not only provides failover but also provide load sharing (therefore having scalability).

Equally, must from the GB of high speed 8200 platform movements, must move to the TI media server at network. With the Cabletron maincenter 562 of FDDI (FDDI) with the 10bT connection that is connected, for realizing providing trunk. The redundancy that each media server 560 is attached to the switched ethernet port is right. Because each port is switching port, so each media server has just obtained the special-purpose 10Mb bandwidth of maincenter. 8200 servers 536 each need a catenet pipeline to serve many less 10Mb Ethernet pipelines. With regard to first embodiment, fddi interface 568 will be used. Yet traffic prediction shows that the necessary traffic will be above the several times of FDDI capacity. Therefore, an embodiment according to preferred embodiment will adopt the higher internetworking of speed such as ATM. Maincenter 562 configurations are fully redundances.

Alpha Station 200 work stations 564 are that operation is supported needed. Alpha Station 200 provides the console management by the multicenter console manager of DEC for each direct line MCI VFP 504 parts. It also moves DECpolycenter (multicenter) performance analyser software. This performance analyser software is for coordinating the purpose Collection and analysis from the data of 8200s.

3. details

Figure 47 represents that VFP 504 installs in the production of production scene.

About Figure 47 and with the note of the relation of Figure 46:

DEC Alpha 8200s 536 is in (failover) configuration that prevents fault. Central frame is to share disk array.

TI MutiServe 4,000 560 is actually the synthetic of four independent media's servers in the single rack. Among the later figure of this figure each " quadrant " (one of four media servers among the MutiServe 4000) are expressed as an independent entity. Each of four 16FDG T1 is connected to each quadrant.

Alpha Station 200 work stations 564 and terminal server are used to provide console and system management. Cabletron maincenter 562 provides the network between media server 560 and the execution server 536.

Bay Networks maincenter 566 provides the network between VFP 504 and the network router 569.

A) internal hardware network

Figure 48 represents VFP internal hardware/network architecture:

General remark about Figure 47-49:

DEC 8200 machines 536 on the left side have drawn all its ATM and have been connected 570 with FDDI among the figure. DEC 8200 machines on the right have shown that its Ethernet connects 572. In actual deployment, whole ATM, FDDI, token ring and Ethernet shown in two machines have are connected 570 and 572.

The connection to port that Cabletron maincenter 562 shows occurs still less than actual, because each 8,200 560 have been drawn half of its network connection. One of equally, only shown in four media servers 560 and to have linked to each other with ethernet port. In fact each media server has a transceiver and is connected an Ethernet connection.

Bay maincenter 566 does not represent in Figure 48. They show in the outside lan network of the direct line MCI of Figure 49 VFP connects.

From the top of Figure 48 of DEC 8200s 536:

The driver 574 that top unit contains 3 4GB is used for operating system, exchange etc. System CD driver 576 also is positioned at this. This unit is to be controlled by the single-ended small computer system interface (SCSI) in the main system 579 (being " SES " among the figure) interface 578.

Tape stacker 580 is magnetic tape stations of a 140GB, has single driver and 10 tapes folded. This unit be by in the main system 579 fast-wide SCSI (being " FWS " among the figure) interface 582 controls.

Main system unit 579 is used 3 in 5 available slots. Slot 1 has master CPU card. This card has the CPU of a 300MHz, can escalate into two CPU. Slot 2 has the RAM card 586 of a 512MB. This card can be upgraded to 2GB, perhaps can add another RAM card. System's maximum memory is 4GB.

Slot 3 and slot 4 are empty, but can be used for extra CPU, internal memory or I/O plate. Slot 5 has main I/O card 588. This card has 8 I/O interfaces:

Fast-wide scsi interface 582 control tape stackers.

Two fast-wide scsi interface 590-592 do not use.

Single-ended scsi interface 578 control local system drivers.

Fddi interface 594 is connected to one of maincenter.

PCI slot 596 is connected to a PCI extended housing 598.

A port is 10baseT Ethernet card 600, it by a special thin net (thinnet) Ethernet with another in 8,200 536 corresponding linking connect. This network is that system prevents that one of fault (failover) heartbeat is desired.

Embodiment uses in the PCI/EISA extended housing 598 9 in 10 available slots.

Slot

1 and 2 has disk adapter 602. Each disk adapter 602 is connected to a RAID Magnetic Disk Controler 604, and the latter links with (on another machine) another Magnetic Disk Controler 604, and this is connected to again the Magnetic Disk Controler 604 on this machine. Therefore, each 8200 machine has two Magnetic Disk Controlers 604 to be attached to each disc driver 602. This is basic group mechanism, because whichsoever machine can both be controlled all disks among 598 times Figure 48 of PCI cabinet. Slot 3 has a Prestoserve plate 606. This is a NetWare file server (NFS) accelerator.

Slot 4 has a FDDI plate 608. The maincenter that this FDDI connects is not the maincenter that the FDDI of above-mentioned home slot 5 connects.

Slot

5 and 6 has ATM plate 610. It has a 10baseT Ethernet card 612, the latter by a special thin net Ethernet with another in 8,200 536 corresponding linking connect. This network is that system prevents that one of fault heartbeat is desired. Slot 10 is empty.

Two unit below the PCI cabinet are Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disc (RAID) Magnetic Disk Controlers 604. Each Magnetic Disk Controler 604 is positioned on the SCSI chain, has two Magnetic Disk Controlers 604, every end that a disk adapter 602 (one in each machine) is arranged in the middle of the SCSI chain. So just have two respectively with the SCSI chain of two Magnetic Disk Controlers 604 and two disk adapters 602. This is the connection to main system 579. Each Magnetic Disk Controler 604 is supported 6 single-ended SCSI chains. In this configuration, each has one Magnetic Disk Controler that two SES connect to be arranged and is connected a Magnetic Disk Controler that 3 connections are arranged in two chains. Each chain has 5 disk drive group (or " rack ") 614, shown in centre frame among the figure. Note with the redundant power supply in the rack of RAID Magnetic Disk Controler.

Cabletron MMAC+ maincenter 562 (Figure 47) with a redundancy to the configuration. The two all is connected to 8200s 536 and TI media server 560 562, two maincenters 562 of two maincenters and also is connected to each other. From the left side of maincenter: FDDI Hub Card 616 provides 8 a port FDDI ring. Each 8200 connection that a fddi card 616 to each maincenter 562 arranged. 24 port ethernet cards 618 are provided to the connection of TI media server 560. Each media server 560 is connected to each supercentral ethernet port 618. There are 8 empty slots to can be used for extra FDDI, ATM or Ethernet expansion on each maincenter.

At the single-rack that is called " Multiserver 4000 " 4 TI media servers 560 are installed. Each media server on the frame is identical. From top unit, by home slot order from left to right: but top unit 622 is the racks that contain two 1GB disc drivers, a detachable/hot-inserting type tape drive. Four media servers have two tape drives that can share. 7 plates 624 that the left side is labeled as " DSPxxx " are TI MPB plates, and each can support 6 input channels or 15 output channels. These plates 624 are divided into three groups. The right group has 3 plates, and middle groups has 3 plates, and left side group has 1 plate. Every group has a T1. T1 is being labeled as the interface termination of " T1M ". This is main T1 interface. The T1 passage can be shared by the plate group of master/slave T1 plate isolation, and they are bridged Module Links together. Rightmost plate is host CPU/IO plate. This plate is supported a scsi interface 628 to the disk rack, 630, the serial ports that are used for console (do not give and illustrating) of Ethernet link to special transceivers 632.

The transceiver 632 on CPU/IO plate the right is linked to the ethernet port on each of two main maincenters 562. Whether transceiver detects one of its Ethernet connection and breaks down, and communication is routed to other port.

B) external hardware/network connection

Figure 49 represents hardware and the network connection from VFP 504 to external network. Explanation about Figure 49: each 8,200 536 is connected on the ISN token ring 640 by the Bay maincenter, is used for DDS access on the SNA and the BDR on the IP and accesses. A pair of terminal server is connected to the console port of each machine and maincenter. DEC Alpha Station 200 564 operation console management softwares visit the port that links to each other with terminal server 642. The DECNIS router is being connected between Bay maincenter 566 and two DEC 8200s 536 all on FDDI ring 568 (Figure 46).

Bay maincenter 566 by shown in 7 routers VFP system 504 is connected to external network.

E. speech distribution detailed architecture

1. general introduction

Speech distributes and to refer to NAS 546 (Figure 45) wherein and read user's particular hint, write the architecture part of user's particular hint to VFP 504 from VFP 504 on LAN or WAN with the NFS agreement.

2. principle

In one embodiment, the implementation method that speech distributes is, settles a server at each ISN website, and the batch process by complexity is from each server to other Servers-all copy data.

" large object management " (LOM) object definition a kind of based on network method. Determine with direct line MCI VFP 504 as based on network central object storage vault, for NAS 546 read-write clients promptings.

Figure 50 represents to support according to preferred embodiment the network architecture of speech distribution service. Figure 52 A has described the configuration of data management area 5105 of the present invention. Data management area (DMZ) is one and is positioned at and dials in platform (although itself not being real the Internet) and ISN with the internet and produce fire wall between the network. Its objective is as ISN client provides the access of dialling in to data, meanwhile keep the safety of ISN network and produce the secret of customer data in the ISN network and complete.

DMZ allows the client regularly to accept the data that generate, such as from feedback (down feeds) under the DDS data of host data base. This data are regularly extracted from database, are put into a user account catalogue on Secure File Transfer Protocol (FTP) main frame, retrieve subsequently for the client.

For client's data access will be by dialling in the private port of gateway, they by the Internet providers have, operation and maintenance. Dial-in customer checking will be by using the one-time password that passes through the secure identity card-hereinafter will elaborate. These cards are by the personnel assignment of the Internet providers and management.

DMZ provides a kind of protected type subnet fire wall, and it adopts packet filter router to shield communicating by letter from outside unsecured network and internal proprietary network. Only have selected grouping to be authorized to by router, other grouping gets clogged. The employing of multiple fire-proof wall technology guarantee do not have single fault in the DMZ configuration or an energy of makeing mistakes to ISN generating network cause danger.

DMZ 5105 is intended to consistent with several safety standards. At first, not to authorize employee's individual must not be allowed to use the internal pair production network. Therefore, the IP connection by gateway is unallowed. Secondly, the access of DMZ service and use are limited to the user through the specific purpose of authentication vs. authorization. Therefore, all other utility programs and the service that usually have at general-purpose machinery all are closed. The practicality of the 3rd, DMZ service and facility must be subject to monitor closely, detects the problem that authorized user runs into, and also detects potential fraud.

The central apparatus of DMZ is MDZ Bastion main frame 5110. Ftp server demons of Bastion main frame 5110 operation, these demons are carried out is a FTP agreement of having revised-hereinafter will further describe. Bastion main frame 5110 is the machines as the high safety of the interface that links the external world. 5110 permissions of Bastion main frame are from the conditional access in the external world. It normally connects internal host among the ISN 5115 as ALG, provides access to it by agency service. In general, crucial information is not placed on the Bastion main frame 5110, like this, even main frame is destroyed, if do not have other integrality to destroy at ISN 5115, can not the access critical data.

Bastion main frame 5110 both also linked to each other with external user with internal user, shown in Figure 52 A. Bastion main frame 5110 can be one based on the computer of the UNIX IBM RS/6000 type 580 such as operation AIX operating system.

Internal user is the user who links to each other with ISN production token ring 5115. Token ring 5115 is connected to an inner packet filter 5120, such as Cisco 4500 pattern blocking routers. Packet filter 5120 links to each other with token ring lan 5125, and the latter is connected to again bastion main frame 5110. Token ring lan 5125 is dedicated token rings of isolating with all parts except bastion main frame 5110 and inner packet filter 5120, prevents thus any access by 5125 pairs of bastion main frames 5110 of token ring lan except packet filter 5120 allows.

External user connects such as Cisco 4500 pattern blocking routers by external packet filter 5130. Packet filter 5130 is connected to bastion main frame 5110 by the ethernet lan section 5153 of an isolation. Ethernet lan section 5135 is private sections of isolating with all parts except bastion main frame 5110 and external packet filter 5130. Because this configuration, unless the user by inner packet filter 5120 or external packet filter 5130, otherwise can not access bastion main frame 5110.

Figure 52 A has described and the DMZ 5105 that dials in environment 5205 and interrelate. In dialling in environment 5205, client PC 5210 usefulness modems 5215 link to each other with public switch telephone network (PSTN) 5220. Modem bank 5230 distributes a modem, is used for answering the incoming call from PSTN 5220. Modem bank by one group such as U.S Robotics V.34Kbps the high speed modem of modem form. Incoming call is by authentication server 5235 checkings. Authentication server 5235 can be realized with server, such as the Radius/Keystone server that moves on Sun Sparcstation 20 types.

Bastion main frame 5110 resides in the fire wall, but is to be positioned at outside ISN 5115 and the gateway point 5205 in logic.

After the checking, selected modem 5233 is connected to incoming call router five 240 with point-to-point protocol (PPP). PPP is an agreement that is provided at the standard method of transmission multiprotocol datagram on the point-to-point link. These links provide full duplex concurrent bidirectional operation, are assumed that to deliver in order grouping. PPP provides a kind of public solution for easily connecting various main frames, bridge and router. The complete description of couple PPP is arranged in RFC 1661:The Point-to-Point (PPP) (W. Simpson, Ed., 1994, abbreviation " the RFC 1661 ") literary composition, and this paper quotes as a reference hereby.

Incoming call router five 240 is chosen input request route on such as the communication link of T1 line 5250 the external packet filter 5130 of DMZ 5105 selectively. T1 line connects external packet filter 5130 by a channel service unit (do not give and illustrating). Incoming call router five 240 for example can be realized with a Cisco 7000 serial MPRs. Incoming call router five 240 is connected with internet 5280 alternatively. Yet router five 240 is configured to block from the internet 5280 communications to external packet filter 5130, can block from external packet filter 5130 communication of 5280 to the internet, stops thus the access of 5280 couples of DMZ 5105 from the internet.

Ftp server demons of Bastion main frame 5110 operations, what these demons were carried out is a File Transfer Protocol of revising on 2.2 editions bases of the wu-ftpd of University of Washington FTP demons. Unless this paper indicates, File Transfer Protocol and RFC 765:File Transfer Protocol (being called for short " RFC 765 ", author J.Postel, in June, 1980) are consistent, and this paper quotes this article as a reference hereby. RFC 765 has described a kind of known agreement that connects transfer files based on the telecommunications network of TCP/IP of using, and wherein the transmission that starts of server response user or the order that receives file perhaps provide status information. DMZ FTP realizes not comprising send order (it is used for file is sent to ftp server from the long-distance user) and any other order to FTP main frame transfer files. Support the order of a restriction subset, comprise get (or racv), help, ls and quit order.

The get order is used for from master server 5110 to the long-distance user 5210 transfer files. The recv order is the synonym of get. The order that the help order is supported for master server 5110 provides compact online document. The ls order provides the current directory of server or the listed files of user's assigned catalogue. Ftp session of quit order termination. Alternatively, can realize that cd order and pwd order-cd command specifies named directory are current directory, pwd orders the name that displays the name of the current directory.

Owing to forbid send and other order to the server transfer files, transmit the computer program of " Trojan Horse " type that may be used for the destruction security of system so can prevent the potential intruder. Extra benefit is that this unidirectional traffic can prevent that the user from deleting unintentionally or covering it and staying the file of depositing at the Bastion server.

When the FTP demons started a user conversation, its used UNIX chroot (2) service to come the root of User Catalog tree is defined as the obvious root of the file system that the user sees. This has just limited the user, make its can't see the unix system catalogue such as/etc and/bin, can't see other user's catalogue, although allow to see with the own directory tree of user in file. In order further to guarantee the security of environment, the FTP demons are located to carry out at the user-id of user class (" uid "), rather than as root, and only allow access from the authorized user of predetermined IP address set (known mandate) communication. Especially, the non-verifying account of the standard anonymous and guest is under an embargo.

For the further safety of Bastion server 5110, many demons that usually started by UNIX Internet server process inetd all are under an embargo. Forbidden demons, or be the unwanted demons of Bastion server operation, or be the known demons that the problem of divulging a secret is arranged. These demons comprise rcp, rlogin, rlogind, rsh, rshd, tftp and tftpd. The forbidden method of these demons is to delete or their clauses and subclauses in the AIX/etc/inetd.conf file are commented out. / etc/inetd.conf file provides a tabulation that receives the server that is called by inetd of a Internet request at inetd by socket. By deletion or comment out corresponding clauses and subclauses, can prevent the request that the demons response receives and carry out.

The measure that further guarantees safety is, forbids the execution of many demons and utility program, and method is the file permission that changes their associations, and they are labeled as executable program not (for example have 000 file mode). When being started in system by DMZ instrument closer (DUD) routine, this carries out. The DUD routine is labeled as not executable file with the file (rcp, rlogin, rlogind, rsh, rshd, tftp and tftpd) of above sign and many other demons and the utility program that is not generally called by inetd. The set of these other demons and utility program comprises sendmail, gated, routed, fingered, rexecd, uucpd, bootdp and talkd. In addition, DUD also forbids telnet and ftp client computer, if to prevent that carrying out these client computer after the effractor from invading visits internal host. During carrying out system maintenance, can temporarily be labeled as telnet and ftp client executable.

Bastion main frame 5110 is transmitted IP and is forbidden. This assurance IP operation can not be crossed over Bastion main frame 5110 subnet 5115 of DMZ isolation as router.

The limited ftp seeervice level that Bastion main frame 5110 provides provides safe ftp session, but causes difficulty for carrying out the conventional system maintenance. In order to carry out system maintenance, the attendant must be connected to Bastion main frame 5110 from the internal host in the ISN 5115 with telecommunications network (telnet) client computer. Then with AIX chmod order, the FTP client program among the Bastion is become and can carry out (for example 400) by carrying out (for example 000). Then the attendant just can carry out the ftp CLIENT PROGRAM, in order to be connected to main frame required on the ISN 5115. During this process, therefore the control of transmission be from Bastion main frame 5110 inside, by the inner FTP CLIENT PROGRAM of carrying out of this main frame, rather than the client computer of main frame outside. When maintain sessions finished, ftp session just finished, and the chmod order is carried out again, and the ftp CLIENT PROGRAM is converted to the state that can not carry out (for example 000), then, the telecommunications network session that ISN starts just can finish.

For record is provided, Bastion server 5110 is carried out a TCP demons wrapper, such as the TCPwrappers external member from Wietse Venema. TCP wrapper indication little wrapper program of inetd operation rather than the demons of name. Wrapper program login user rs host name or address, other checks to carry out some, then represents inetd and carries out required server program. After server program finishes, from internal memory, remove this wrapper. The wrapper program not with client user or with the client process reciprocation, not with the server applications interaction. This provides two major advantages. The first, this wrapper is independent of application, so same program can be protected many kinds of Networks. The second, interactive shortage means that this wrapper is outside sightless.

This wrapper program only is only movable when setting up initial link between client-server. Therefore, after wrapper is finished its login feature, there is not the expense that increases in the client-server session. The wrapper program sends to syslog demons sylogd with their log-on message. The processing of wrapper record is decided by syslog configuration file-normally/etc/syslog.conf.

Dialling in access provides by dialling in environment 5105. The use of authentication server 5235, regulation be to user's checking, with the user's that prevents uncommitted access DMZ access. The proof procedure of realizing adopts a password scheme. Adopt the checking client/server mechanism that is called Keystone of inner exploitation, all built-in systems and NE are all used the SecurID secure identity card of password generated device token card-produce such as Security Dynamics-be protected. The Keystone client computer is installed on the unit of each checking request that receives the user. Then these requests are submitted to the Keystone server that spreads all over network safely.

Each user all distribute to a credit card-sized, there is the secure identity card of liquid crystal display in the front. Display shows 6 an item codes pseudo-random generation, that changed once in per 60 seconds. For will obtaining concerning the employee of the access of the system of Keystone protection, the user must input their indivedual PIN numbers that distribute, and and then inputs the number of current demonstration on the secure identity card. This checking can prevent from adopting the program of attempting to scout or intercept and capture password or be the unauthorized access of the trojan-horse program of catching the password design from the user.

Authorization information by the Keystone client computer is collected with RSA and DES secret key encryption, then sends to one of many Keystone servers. This Keystone server is evaluated and tested this information, the PIN of authentication of users and the fetcher code that this moment should show at user's card. After two numbers of this of this user of system verification were all inputted correctly, this user who authorizes just was authorized to access system or the resource of asking.

In order to guarantee the safety of external network entrance, the exterior gateway machine does not all have the general-purpose accessing account, and in check access all is provided. Each gateway machine will guarantee that all gateway services generate recorded information, and each exterior gateway machine keeps an audit-trail that gateway is connected. All exterior gateway machines all will make the business of non-basic nature disconnect.

Authentication server 5235 plays a part the front end of all long-range access dials, becomes not allow to pass through with programming. All-network certifying organization all stipulates the record to unsuccessful access attempts. The record that generates is best by specifying day by day reexamination of Security Officer.

The fax tones of flow graph representation shown in Figure 53 detection method. In step 5305, the fax tones detection system distributes a null link table namely without the chained list of clauses and subclauses. In step 5310, the fax tones detection system begins asynchronous auCheckForFaxAsync routine 5315. AuCheckForFaxAsync routine 5315 is the asynchronous routines with the concurrent execution of main line program, rather than asynchronously control is returned to caller. Whether the tone of au Check For Fax Async routine evaluation and test incoming call is seen what this calling was started from facsimile machine, just generates an au Check For Fax and replys 5318 if detect fax tones.

After beginning au Check For Fax Async routine 5315, control proceeds to step 5320. In step 5320, the chained list that the fax tones detection system is distributed in the step 5305 increases clauses and subclauses. The clauses and subclauses that increase represent an exclusive identifier with the message relating of processing. In step 5330, the fax tones detection system begins au Play File Async routine 5335. Au Play File Async routine 5335 is the asynchronous routines with the concurrent execution of main line program, rather than asynchronously control is returned to caller. Au Play File Async routine 5335 is accessed the audio files of the digital record of storing in the past and they is play to the calling subscriber that starts. The audio files of playing can be used for for example indicating the order of calling subscriber's button of starting, and is used for carrying out for example tabulation of the message of record etc. before recording messages, the retrieval of specific function.

In step 5340, the fax tones detection system begins au Input Data Async routine 5340. Au Input Data Async routine 5340 is the asynchronous routines with the concurrent execution of main line program, rather than asynchronously control is returned to caller. Au Input Data Async routine 5340 monitoring originating calls, detection user's button is so that calling routine is carried out the task related with the specific keys order.

The front was said, au Check For Fax Async routine 5315 and the concurrent execution of main program generate au Check For Fax and reply 5318 when detecting fax tones. In step 5350, whether the inspection of fax tones detection system receives that an au Check For Fax replys 5318. If receive and reply, just represent that originating call is facsimile transmission, the fax tones detection system just expands to incoming call speech/FAX processor (VFP) 5380. If (for example 7 seconds) can not receive au Check For Fax and reply 5318 in the given time, the fax tones detection system just thinks that the originator of calling out is not facsimile equipment, so the au Check For Fax Async routine 5315 that just terminates. In one implementation, preferably implement this detection by an asynchronous interrupt processing procedure. In this realization, can set up a time of implementation routine and come when au Check For Fax 5318 events of replying occur, to obtain control. This can reply the exception handler of 5318 events and realize with a for example processing of C++catch structure definition au Check For Fax.

After the decision of step 5350, the fax tones detection system is waited for next incoming call in step 5360.

Flow graph representation fax shown in Figure 54 A～54E and the VFP complete process of voice mail. As shown in Figure 54 A, VFP finishes routine record related with interviewed mailbox in step 5401 searching database. In step 5405, VFP finishes the routine inspection and whether successfully retrieves a mailbox record. If the mailbox record does not find, then in step 5407, VFP finishes routine and generates the VCS warning that an expression mailbox record does not find. Because the mailbox record does not find, VFP finishes the attribute that routine can not be tested this email address. Yet, no matter whether find the mailbox record, control all proceeds to step 5409. In step 5409, VFP finishes the content of processor test mailbox record (if any), determines whether interviewed mailbox is full. If interviewed mailbox is full, then in step 5410, VFP finishes routine and just plays error messages, shows that interviewed mailbox capacity is saturated, can not store extra message, then withdraws from step 5412.

In step 5414, VFP finishes processor and obtains the mode that VFP calls out. Mode is to be derived by the dial string that the calling subscriber that starts provides, and is stored in the en Currenct Num territory of pst Call1 State structure. Dial string has lower column format:

{

Char number[10]; 10 8xx number * that/* user dials/

Char asterisk; / * constant ' * ' */

Char mode; / * 1 byte mode */

Char octothorp; / * constant ' # ' */

}

Mode gets one of following each value:

1 guest's voice mail

2 guests that explain with speech fax

3 guest's faxes of not explaining with speech

4 voiceband users/fax retrieval

5 user lists are safeguarded

6 subscriber mailbox records

In step 5416, VFP finishes processor from the database retrieval routing number related with interviewed mailbox. In step 5418, routing number is sent to the SIS layer.

Shown in Figure 54 B, carry out and continue with step 5420. In step 5420, VFP finishes processor and initializes one and answer the supervision sign, and this sign is used for determining the whether transmission of positive call accepted of VFP. In step 5422, VFP finishes processor and calls Sis Collect Call routine and process calling. If call out unsuccessfully, step 5424 makes the Sis Collect Call of step 5420 call to repeat to reach predetermined number of retries.

In step 5426, VFP finishes processor and obtains a predetermined timer maturity value from the otto.cfg file. The timer maturity value is configured to time quantum, within this time, if do not receive answer, VFP finish processor just can think VFP current be inaccessible. In step 5428, VFP finishes processor and according to the value that step 5426 obtains timer is set. In step 5430, VFP finishes the processor inspection whether supervision had occured to answer before the timer that step 5424 sets expires. If so, control proceeds to step 5430 and goes controls metastasis to VFP.

Figure 54 C represents according to the affirmative determination of step 5430 and shifts the operation of control to VFP. In step 5440, any 5428 that set, just the timer in timing all is cancelled. In step 5442, VFP finishes processor calling routine sis On Hold Term () keeps VFP. In step 5444, VFP finishes the maintenance that processor calling routine sis Off Hold Orig () stops originating call.

In step 5446, VFP finishes processor and plays the in the past audio files of the digital record of storage, indicates the calling subscriber that starts waiting for during the process of VFP call transmission. In step 5448, VFP finishes processor calling routine sis On Hold Orig () makes originating call get back to maintenance. In step 5450, VFP finishes the maintenance that processor calling routine sis Off Hold Term stops VFP. In step 5452, VFP finishes processor and calls au Play Digits routine, and the parameter of transmitting to it is: one comprises the string of interviewed mailbox number, asterisk (' * '), ' # ' who represents the ending of command string that representative domain is separated.

In step 5454, VFP finishes processor and obtains a timeout value Acktimeout and an interdigit length of delay from the otto.cfg file. The Acktimeout value is used for determining that finishing processor at VFP determines not have the time quantum of response before the VFP arrival. The interdigit length of delay is used to the representative that sends to press the delay timing of the audio signal of telephone key. In step 5456, VFP finishes processor and calls the response that Input Date routine obtains VFP.

Behind step 5440～5456, perhaps after the negative judgement in step 5430, control proceeds to step 5460, shown in Figure 54 D. In step 5460, VFP finishes the response of processor request VFP. In step 5462, VFP finishes processor and wait for that VFP response or the timer that arranges expire in step 5428. In step 5464, if VFP responds, VFP finishes processor and proceeds to step 5446.

In step 5446, VFP finishes processor and checks the VFP response, writes suitable BDR term state recording. Response indication be affirmation from the TI platform. Response ' 00 ' represents successfully, writes a BDR_STAT_NORMAL sign so VFP finishes processor. Response ' 01 ' expression VFP does not receive the key of interviewed mailbox, writes a BDR_STAT_DLINE_TI_NO_DIGITS sign so VFP finishes processor. ' 02 ' expression VFP is overtime when collecting this key in response, writes a BDR_STAT_DLINE_TI_FORMAT sign so VFP finishes processor. Interviewed mailbox is not found in response ' 03 ' expression, writes a BDR_STAT_DLINE_TI_MAILBOX sign so VFP finishes processor. If do not receive response, just write a BDR_STAT_DLINE_TI_NO_RSP sign. After the BDR sign, control proceeds to step 5480, shown in Figure 54 E.

If do not receive the answer of VFP, the timer that arranges in the step 5428 expires, and step 5486 is passed in control. In step 5486, VFP finishes processor and provides the VCS warning that an expression VFP does not have answer. In step 5470, VFP finishes processor calling routine sis Release Term () and disconnects calling to VFP. In step 5472, VCS finishes the maintenance that processor calling routine sis Off Hold Orig stops originating call. In step 5474, VFP finishes processor and calls ti Cancel Timers and cancel all still undissolved uncompleted timers. In step 5476, VFP finishes processor and plays the in the past audio files of the digital record of storage, and to the calling subscriber's report of starting, VFP finishes processor can't be connected to VFP.

In step 5476 or step 5466 (deciding on the judgement in the step 5464) afterwards, control proceeds to step 5480, shown in Figure 54 E. In step 5480, it is subscriber that VFP finishes the processor inspection calling subscriber that starts. If so, control advances to step 5482. In step 5484, it is guest user that VFP finishes the processor inspection calling subscriber that starts. If so, control advances to step 5482. Step 5482 calling subscriber that then will start turns back to the menu that the calling subscriber starts VFP when request place. The calling subscriber if start is neither subscriber neither guest user, and control just advances to step 5486. In step 5486, the calling subscriber that starts is assumed to be it is a facsimile call, and this calling is disconnected.

Figure 55 A and 55B represent the operation of pager terminal processor. In step 5510, the pager terminal processor calls that Get Call Back routine obtains telephone number-be used for the sign calling subscriber, will show at paging equipment will be by the number of pager carrier's callback with sign. The detailed description to Get Call Back routine in conjunction with Figure 56 is hereinafter arranged.

In step 5515, the pager terminal processor checks whether Get Call Back returns telephone number. If do not return telephone number, in step 5520, the pager terminal processor is pointed out to call out and should be finished, and provides menu to select other service in step 5522 to the calling subscriber.

If returned number, just obtain interviewed pager PIN in step 5530 from database. Pager dial string of pager terminal processor structure includes the ans back that obtains in the pager PIN that retrieves in the step 5530 and the step 5510. In step 5532, the pager terminal processor obtains the type of pager, obtains routing information from database. In step 5534, the pager terminal processor checks configuration file, with the pager analysis string of the parameter of the pager that obtains an interviewed type of definition. In step 5536, whether the inspection of pager terminal processor successfully retrieves the pager analysis string of asking. If no, in step 5538, the pager terminal processor is pointed out to carry out paging by DBR term state is set to BDR_STAT_PAGER_NOT_FOUND. And provide to the calling subscriber in step 5540 and to select another professional menu.

If successfully retrieve pager analysis string, the pager terminal processor proceeds to step 5550, shown in Figure 55 B. In step 5550, the pager terminal processor calls the pager subsystem, transmits routing number, dial string and pager analysis string to it. In step 5552, the pager terminal processor checks the return code of pager subsystem. If paging is successfully completed, the pager terminal processor is just play the message that numeral is pre-recorded in step 5554 to the calling subscriber, notifies calling subscriber's paging successfully to send. In step 5556, upgrade en End Call Status territory, with this pager call-sign for finishing. In step 5558, transmission state is labeled as blank, expression there is no need to transmit the calling subscriber, and in step 5560, the pager terminal processor provides the user menu that allows to select other service or terminated call.

If successfully do not finish paging, the pager terminal processor checks in step 5570 calling subscriber is attempting whether to disconnect between paging periods. If the calling subscriber disconnects, the pager terminal processor checks in step 5575 that paging has and sends before not disconnecting. Although if disconnected but paging sends, the pager terminal processor is pointed out this paging request normal termination in step 5580, and is set to finish at step 5582 state. In step 5584, the pager terminal processor provides the user menu that allows to select other business or terminated call.

If paging does not send, the pager terminal processor is pointed out the improper end of this paging request in step 5586, and points out that in step 5588 calling subscriber disconnects. In step 5590, the pager terminal processor provides the user menu that allows to select other business or terminated call.

If the calling subscriber not yet disconnects, the pager terminal processor arranges a code that indicates failure cause in step 5572. Fault type comprises

BDR_STAT_PAGER_ROUTE_NUM (the expression routing number is invalid);

BDR_STAT_PAGER_CRIT_ERROR (in the expression originating call fault being arranged);

BDR_STAT_PAGER_TIMEOUT (the expression pager is not confirmed this calling in predetermined timeout interval);

BDR_STAT_PAGER_DIGITS_HOLD (expression pager subsystem fails to play the numeral of corresponding pager address);

BDR_STAT_PAGER_DISC (expression paging subsystem disconnects too early);

BDR_STAT_PAGER_NOT_FOUND (it is invalid that string is analyzed in expression);

In step 5592, the code of makeing mistakes that the pager terminal processor will be selected in step 5572 is delivered to BDR. In step 5582, the pager terminal processor is play a digital sound files pre-recorded, that the expression paging fails to send. In step 5595, upgrade en End Call Status territory and call out as finishing with this pager of mark. In step 5597, transmission state is labeled as blank, expression there is no need to transmit the calling subscriber, and in step 5599, the pager terminal processor provides the user menu that allows to select other business or terminated call.

Figure 56 is illustrated in the Get Call Back routine that step 5510 is called from the pager terminal processor. In step 5610, Get Call Back routine obtains the constant of the applicable beginning of definition and interdigit delay from the otto.cfg file. In step 5615, Get Call Back routine is play a pre-recorded digital sound files, and prompting user provides a call-back telephone number, and supplying method is to press applicable keyboard, then finishes with symbol ' # '. In step 5620, Get Call Back routine reads the number of calling subscriber's input. In step 5625, the data of accepting are put into BDR. In step 5630, whether the number that the inspection of Get Call Back routine is inputted ends up with symbol ' # '. If so, Get Call Back routine is returned successfully in step 5635; If not, Get Call Back routine checks in step 5640 whether number of retries surpasses. If do not surpass number of retries, just begin to repeat from step 5615. If number of retries surpasses, Get Call Back routine is just play digital massage pre-recorded, that the expression number is not successfully received in step 5650, and returns an error condition in step 5660 to caller.

Below describe the user interface of explanation, be used for current direct line MCI profile strip purpose user management by ARU (DTMF) and client's Operational Visit. These clauses and subclauses comprise:

∑ (cancellation) activates the account

∑ is looked for my Route Selection

-dispatch list

-3-number sequence

-first, second, 3-number and ring-nothing answers overtime

∑ pager ON/OFF

∑ substitutes Route Selection

Final (for subsequent use) Route Selection of ∑

∑ calling subscriber shielding

The pager notifications of ∑ voice mail message

The pager notifications of ∑ fax mail messages

∑ is dialled the number soon

Following table has been enumerated direct line MCI client can be by each territory of DTMF renewal. This table does not comprise professional employed all territories, only contains those and is used used territory by direct line MCI.

The secondary timeout value third level of the elementary timeout value secondary terminal of the elementary terminal of domain name 800#+PIN terminal third level timeout value substitutes Route Selection and substitutes timeout value alternate routing selection standby time-out value PIN_ sign, specific definition: paging state _ sign when during 2 15 video-mail of position 1 11 dispatch list of 10 dispatch lists fax in paging position 16, specific definition: the default Fax number speed dial of my ON/OFF position 15 voice mail ON/OFF positions, 16 fax ON/OFF call visor states #1 speed dial #2 speed dial #3 speed dial #4 speed dial #5 can be looked for 13 pager ON/OFF positions 14, account position in position 3

Speed dial #6 speed dial #7 speed dial #8 speed dial #9

The user will access its direct line MCI profile by http:/www.mci.services.com/directline. After inputting effective account ID and password, user's Route Selection screen will occur. The user can click label (tabs), moves on to another screen from a screen. If the user turns back to the screen that had upgraded during session, this screen will be shown by its last appearance, and namely any more new capital of doing of user will be reflected in data. If yet user log off or overtime, when the user entered its profile management screen next time, shown data will be from the new Query Result to the 800PIN_1Call database. The renewal of doing within 15 minutes time may not yet arrive the NIDS database of serving Web server, so data may not reflect the renewal of making recently.

Following entry will occur at index frame, as the link to the Web of their associations screen. When the user clicked clauses and subclauses in these clauses and subclauses, the screen of its association just showed in next frame.

Call route selecting

Guest's menu

Substitute Route Selection

Dial the number soon

Voice mail

Faxmail

Call visor

In addition, the LOGOFF button appears at the bottom of index frame. Click this button friendship and cause token to expire immediately, the user will be returned to login screen.

F. login screen

Figure 57 represents user's login screen 700 that is used for using online profile association.

Direct line MCI702 number

Account ID will be 10 access numbers of direct line MCI user, and form is 8xx xxx xxxx. This number links together with ' 0000 ' PIN, just will be the keyword that enters the 1Call database that contains user's outline data.

If routine denotation (PIN sign 4) is set to ' N ', the user can not successfully login. If attempt to carry out this account, will show the logon error screen.

Password 704

This password will be used for identical by ARU interface accessing user selection item. It is 6 number of characters word strings. User's input will not responded in this territory, corresponding each incoming symbol and that show is asterisk ' * '.

Status message

Direct line MCI number: " input you direct line MCI number. "

Password: " input your password. "

G. call route selecting is shielded

Figure 58 represents callback Route Selection screen 710, is used for arranging or changing user's call route selecting instruction.

" call accepted " section 712

The button 714 that user by selecting is suitable or 716 just can be stipulated whether 712 call accepteds on its account. Account's available flag (Status Flag, position 3) in the direct corresponding client's direct line record of these buttons

Radio button	Account's available flag
Radio button	Account's available flag	Call accepted Y call not accepted N

" from following selection, select " section 718

The user stipulates whether the guest calling subscriber should accept guest's menu or alternative Route Selection is processed. This selection will point out whether the data in guest's menu or the alternative Route Selection screen are applicable.

Client's replacement terminal is that following selection by the user provides:

" guest is provided ... " radio button	Replacement terminal
" guest is provided ... " radio button	Replacement terminal	Guest's menu is without menu-alternative Route Selection	00 08 ^*(default voice mail)

" when I can not be reached ... " section 720

The user is not to arriving user's calling regulation call treatment. Standby terminal in the user logging is updated as follows:

Radio button	Standby terminal
Radio button	Standby terminal	Voice mail pager voice mail or pager-calling subscriber select final message	08 07 09 05

Status message

The selection of doing depending on the user provides following status message to each selection of following sign to the user:

Call not accepted: " the direct line MCI number at you is incited somebody to action not receipt of call. "

Call accepted: " on your direct line MCI number with receipt of call. "

Guest's menu: " allow the calling subscriber select them to want how to contact with you. "

Without menu-substitute Route Selection: " Route Selection calling subscriber is to the particular address of being selected by you. "

Voice mail: " calling subscriber will be required to stay voice mail. "

Faxmail: " calling subscriber will be prompted to stay faxmail. "

Pager: " calling subscriber will be required to point out and issue your paging. "

Voice mail or pager: " calling subscriber can select to leave for your voice mail and still send paging to you. "

Close message: the calling subscriber will hear one require after them again call attempt message.

H. guest's menu configuration screen

When alternative Route Selection had been closed, when namely having selected guest's menu, guest's menu just was provided for the guest calling subscriber. The user can dispose its guest's menu with guest's menu configuration screen (Figure 59), and the degree of configuration is as follows:

" look for me Route Selection " check box 732

∑ looks for my Route Selection can not be gone to select in this stage. Check box will be in that to look for me to indicate on the basis of (PIN sign, position 9) checked, and then, option becomes ash.

If the ∑ user input shows national number " guiding 1 ", it will be peeled off from number, only has NPA-Nxx-xxxx will be stored in database.

The ∑ user can selective system answers the ringing number (1 to 6) that should allow before determining to make in ring-nothing when its 3-number sequence number of programming. Ringing number will be stored in database by second, and the computing formula of number of seconds is that 6 * ring limit is inferior. If input value not, default value are 3 rings or 18 seconds. When reading from database, will be converted into 1 ring in 0 to 8 second, the number of seconds greater than 8 will be removed by 6, has just determined after the result rounds up that ringing number, maximum are 16.

∑ to the renewal of user logging with as follows:

Radio button	Dispatch list	1/2 sign	Elementary terminal and overtime	Secondary terminal and overtime	Three grades of terminals and overtime
Radio button	Dispatch list	1/2 sign	Elementary terminal and overtime	Secondary terminal and overtime	Three grades of terminals and overtime	Scheduling 3-number sequence	The two all be Y the two all be N	The number of unchanged the 1st input^**With overtime	The number of unchanged the 2nd input^**With overtime	The number of unchanged the 3rd input^**With overtime

^**Domestic/international terminal will be confirmed by the description in the appendix A.

The check box 734 that " stays voice mail "

∑ is in this stage, and voice mail can not be disengaged selection. Check box will be checked on the basis of voice mail sign (PIN sign, position 3), and then, option becomes ash.

" send and fax " check box 736

∑ is in this stage, and fax can not be disengaged selection. Check box will be checked on the basis of facsimile terminal sign (PIN sign, position 13), and then, option becomes ash.

" transmission paging " check box 738

Whether the ∑ user can stipulate to provide by the paging option of switch flag for " issue me paging " check box to the calling subscriber. Pager ON/OFF sign in the direct corresponding client's of this frame the direct line record (Status Flag, position 13).

The paging check box	Pager ON/OFF sign
The paging check box	Pager ON/OFF sign	Select	Y N

Status message is looked for my Route Selection: " all allow the calling subscriber to attempt ' finding you ' in everywhere you go. " the scheduling Route Selection: " according to your scheduling Route Selection calling subscriber. " 3 numbers ...: allow the calling subscriber to find your position by these 3 numbers. 1#, 2#, 3#: " input telephone number. " the 1st, the 2nd, the 3rd ring limit time: " input the ringing number of this number. " stay voice mail: " allow the calling subscriber to leave your voice mail for. " send fax: " allow the calling subscriber to issue your fax. " send paging: " allow the calling subscriber to issue your paging. "

I. substitute the Route Selection screen

Figure 60 represents to substitute Route Selection screen 740, and it allows user's Route Selection all-calls to selected destination. When user selection sends to specific purpose with its all-calls, just skip the expression to guest's menu 730 of Figure 59, the replacement terminal in the user logging will be done following renewal:

Substitute the Route Selection radio button	Replacement terminal
Substitute the Route Selection radio button	Replacement terminal	Selected guest's menu voice mail pager is looked for my telephone number	The number of 00 08 07 06 inputs^**

When this option is selected from the profile screen at first, also do not substitute the Route Selection setting in client's the user record. When showing this screen, if voice mail can be used, default setting is voice mail; If voice mail is unavailable, then default setting is to look for me.

Status message

Look for my Route Selection: " in everywhere you go, only allow the calling subscriber to attempt ' finding you '. "

Scheduling Route Selection: " according to your scheduling Route Selection calling subscriber. "

The 3-number ...: " allow the calling subscriber to seek you with these three numbers. "

1#, 2#, 3#: " input telephone number. "

1st, the 2nd, the 3rd ring limit is inferior: " input the ringing number of this number. "

Stay voice mail: " will point out the calling subscriber to leave your voice mail for. "

Send paging: " will point out the calling subscriber to issue your paging. "

Interim replacement number: " calling subscriber can only be routed to this number that you select. "

Telephone number ring limit is inferior: " input the ringing number of this number. "

J. speed dialling shields

Figure 61 represents to dial the number soon and shields 744. The user can upgrade its 9 by the Web interface and dial the number soon. Be labeled as 1～9 dial the number soon corresponding to identical dialling the number soon in the user logging on the Web page or leaf. Internal and international terminal will be confirmed by the mode of following explanation.

Status message

1-9: " input is dialled the number＜1-9 soon 〉. "

Figure 62 represents voice mail screen 750.

" reception voice mail message " check box 752

" when I receive paging I " check box

" when I receive new voice mail paging I " check box 754. This check box is directly corresponding to the voice mail paging sign in client's the direct line record (PIN sign, position 15):

The pager notifications check box	Voice mail paging sign
The pager notifications check box	Voice mail paging sign	Do not select	N Y

Status message

Receive voice mail ... " calling subscriber can leave your voice mail message for. "

Each paging I ... " when you receive a voice mail message, with paged. "

Figure 63 represents faxmail screen 760.

" my main fax number is " territory 762

" mail of receiving faxes " check box 764

The expression of the profile management of these clauses and subclauses and upper occur the same of faxmail screen.

" when I receive paging I " check box 766

These clauses and subclauses occur with " when I receive new voice mail paging I " check box 766. This check box is directly corresponding to the faxmail paging sign in client's the direct line record (PIN sign, position 16):

The pager notifications check box	Fax paging sign
The pager notifications check box	Fax paging sign	Do not select	N Y

Status message

Receive faxes ... " calling subscriber can send fax to you. "

Each paging I ... " you will be paged when receiving faxes. "

Figure 64 represents call visor screen 770. The user can be with selecting to shield its calling with calling subscriber's name, originating number or name and number. Call visor state in the user logging will be done following renewal:

The call visor check box	Radio button	The call visor state
The call visor check box	Radio button	The call visor state	Do not select	Only name name and number of number only	00 02 01 03

Status message

Allow me to shield ... " starting this functional part allows you to shield your calling. "

Name only: " calling subscriber's name will offer answer side. "

Number only: " calling subscriber's number will offer answer side. "

Name and phone: " calling subscriber's name and telephone number will offer answer side. "

The additional screen 780,782 that Figure 65-67 expression user profile administrative institute uses, and 784.

Logon error screen 780

When the login attempt is failed because of invalid account number, password or hostility IP address, show this logon error screen. This also is that token as the user expires, shown screen when requiring it again to login.

Be updated successfully screen 782

When being updated successfully when finishing, show this screen. ' blank ' will be filled to be: ' the call route selecting option has ', ' guest's menu option has ', ' substituting Route Selection has ', ' having dialled the number soon ', ' the voice mail option has ', ' the fax option has ' and ' the call visor option has '.

Upgrade and unsuccessfully shield 784

When the user attempts to input one or more invalid direct numbers or upgrades its account with blank number one code, show this screen. The account make all corrigendums, all numbers can not upgrade before successfully being confirmed.

In the various display screens of user interface, the profile option is ' grey ', shows that this option is unavailable in display screen according to following sign setting:

Screen	Option	The subordinate sign
Screen	Option	The subordinate sign	Login screen	Login	Program (following me) sign
The profile screen	Call accepted	Avail programming sign	Login screen	Login	Program (following me) sign
	Call accepted	Avail programming sign	Final route to voice mail is selected	Look for my sign A ND voice mail sign
	Final route to pager is selected	Look for my sign A ND pager terminal sign	Final route to voice mail is selected	Look for my sign A ND voice mail sign
	Final route to pager is selected	Look for my sign A ND pager terminal sign	Final route to voice mail or pager is selected	Look for my sign A ND voice mail sign A ND pager terminal sign

Guest's menu	Scheduling	Dispatch list 2 conversions that the dispatch list 1 conversion AND that looks for I sign A ND to provide provides
	Scheduling		The 3-number sequence	Look for the international terminal of the domestic end mark OR of I sign A ND
	Number (the 1st, the 2nd, the 3rd)	Look for the international end mark of the domestic end mark OR of I sign A ND	The 3-number sequence
	Number (the 1st, the 2nd, the 3rd)		Send paging	The pager terminal sign
	Substitute Route Selection	Scheduling	Send paging	The pager terminal sign	Dispatch list 2 conversions that the dispatch list 1 conversion AND that looks for I sign A ND to provide provides
The 3-number sequence		Scheduling	Look for the international terminal of the domestic end mark OR of I sign A ND
The 3-number sequence		Number (the 1st, the 2nd, the 3rd)		Look for the international end mark of the domestic end mark 0R of I sign A ND
Pager		Number (the 1st, the 2nd, the 3rd)	The pager terminal sign
Pager		Telephone number	The pager terminal sign	Look for the international end mark of the domestic end mark OR of I sign A ND
Dial the number soon		Telephone number	1-9		The international complement mark of the domestic complement mark OR of speed dial programming AND
Dial the number soon	The voice mail screen	When I receive ... the time paging I	1-9	Voice mail sign A ND pager terminal sign
The faxmail screen	The voice mail screen	When I receive ... the time paging I	When I receive ... the time paging I	Voice mail sign A ND pager terminal sign	Facsimile terminal sign A ND pager terminal sign
The faxmail screen	Call visor	Allow me to shield	When I receive ... the time paging I	The call visor programming	Facsimile terminal sign A ND pager terminal sign

With regard to above-mentioned profile option, confirm that the mode of selecting is as follows:

∑ international number-except North America dial plan (NADP) number, must add in front ' 011 ', otherwise do not accept its programming.

∑ 976 blocks will be by following realization:

To inquire about with the NPA of category 000, type 002 and programming international blocking data storehouse, searching modes coupling is not the information that gets clogged/adult's service number with the number that guarantees programming. If the coupling of finding then will not be allowed to the programming of this number.

∑ country collection blocks will be by following realization:

Country's collection of direct line MCI characteristic records will contrast the country code of programming number and confirm. Block if termination country concentrates in direct line MCI country, then the programming of this number will be allowed to.

The programming Route Selection

If the number of programming is	Carry out the following inspection of confirming
If the number of programming is	Carry out the following inspection of confirming	Domestic	Domestic sign 976 blocks
NADP	Domestic sign 976 blocks country's collection and blocks (blocking with Term PCC, checking country collection)	Domestic	Domestic sign 976 blocks
NADP		International	International symbol country collection blocks (blocking with Term CC, checking country collection)

Programming is dialled the number soon

If the number of programming is:	Carry out the following inspection of confirming
If the number of programming is:	Carry out the following inspection of confirming	Domestic	Domestic complement mark 976 blocks
NADP	Domestic complement mark 976 blocks country's collection and blocks (using Term CC, checking country collection)	Domestic	Domestic complement mark 976 blocks
NADP		International	International complement mark

Country's collection blocks (using Term CC, checking country collection)

How the flow graph representation of Figure 68 carries out the affirmation of dialling the number soon to user's input. This same flow graph also is applicable to the affirmation in the input of guest's screen to guest when the user by non-user calls out.

Integration switch system of the present invention and packet transmission networks allow for the user improved feature set are provided. Direct line MCI is the personal number of a single number access, has to comprise features such as looking for my function, voice mail, paging and fax storage and the service of forwarding. User or user are required to provide profile information. Profile information is imported into its user logging in the direct line MCI database on the ISN main frame. The feature set of this product comprises:

Personal greeting: the user can select to record one will be to the personal greeting of its guest calling subscriber broadcast. If user record personal greeting, this personal greeting just substitute " Custom House Welcome to Custom House direct line MCI " this default greeting.

Guest's menu: guest's menu is to define with the feature that the user has subscribed. The guest calling subscriber that access " loads " account fully will be provided to the user and speak, calling user, transmission fax, stays the option of voice mail message.

Look for the 3-number sequence of my function: system attempts to arrive the user with 3 numbers, tries first the 1st number, tries the 2nd again, and then tries the 3rd. If can not get the answer of any one number in these numbers, the predetermined processing in just selecting by alternate routing should be called out.

Look for 2 grades of scheduling of my function: system attempts to arrive users-inquire about its dispatch list with current date/week/time with 3 numbers. A number in the dispatch list 1 at family on probation tries the number in the dispatch list 2 more first, if can not receive answer, alternate routing is selected with regard to definition process.

Alternate routing select to allow the user to stipulate that how processing selecting is called out to it but beaten the guest calling subscriber who can not get answering behind each number in examination. The options that alternate routing is selected comprise the guest of voice mail, pager, voice mail or pager select or require the guest later on again call attempt close message.

Substitute Route Selection and allow the user to close the demonstration of guest's menu, all guest calling subscribers are stipulated single processing method. Options comprises and is accomplished to a telephone number, user-defined my sequence, voice mail or the pager looked for.

Default route select to be processed be in face of guest's menu after three promptings responseless guest calling subscriber. Default route is selected to comprise and is transferred to the operator, is accomplished to a telephone number, looks for my sequence or voice mail.

Call visor allows user's definition whether to wish to obtain calling subscriber's intelligence aids before being connected. Options comprises noncall shielding or adds number by name, telephone number or name and identifies the calling subscriber. ' access calling ' options allow users in the custom menu is called out, and expense is remembered its direct line MCI account.

Speech/faxmail: speech and Fax Messaging can both store for the user and retrieve later on. The user can be chosen in new speech and/notify to it during Fax Messaging, perhaps deposit its mailbox in.

Speech/fax platform (VFP) has been integrated in the integrated service network (ISN), with its database of permission ISN application query, and wants the direct billing record of cutting down from VFP.

Improvement to original direct line PCI product comprises the following:

Look for my Route Selection

Look for my Route Selection that two options that can supply user selection are arranged now: the 3-number sequence of current realization or 2 grades of scheduling options. The realization of scheduling option will be wanted so that user's dispatch list 1 conversion will be used as elementary finalization process, and its dispatch list 2 conversions will be used as secondary finalization process. Looking for my Route Selection to affect Zhu Jiezhong at call flow diagram and ARU is described in detail.

Default route is selected

It is to stipulate the action that this application should be taked when the calling subscriber does not respond the prompting of guest's menu that default route is selected. The option that default route is selected comprises telephone number, voice mail, looks for my Route Selection and operator's transmission.

Speech/Fax Messaging information

When the user accessed a custom menu, this application provided the mailbox status information, comprised whether the number of new speech or Fax Messaging, its mailbox be full. This application start obtains this information to the inquiry of VFP database.

Speed dial

Except the calling of the telephone number that can be accomplished to real-time input, the user can also be accomplished to the calling of dialling the number soon of programming now. Dialling the number soon for these 9 is that the user can carry out programming by DTMF.

K. ARU call flow diagram

The software of the above-mentioned direct line MCI of each automatic answering equipment (ARU) flow graph representation product of 69A～69AI is realized, is understood the present invention of great use to further.

Figure 69 A represents the processing starting point that ARU calls out. When calling out startup, suppose that it is that the guest calls out. If it is not online calling out account pointed current, ARU just plays a message of pointing out to accept to the calling of this account in step 69010, disconnects calling in step 69012. If ARU detects fax tones is arranged on the incoming call, ARU just carries out ARU Xfer to Voice/Fax Guest Fax without Annotation (ARU is without being transferred to speech/fax guest fax) routine-this routine in step 69014 with explaining and explains in conjunction with Figure 69 L later. If do not detect fax tones, ARU just carries out ARU Play Greeting (ARU plays greeting) routine-this routine in step 69018 and explains in conjunction with Figure 69 L later. Then ARU checks whether the user indicates substituting of pair incoming call. If so, in step 69020, ARU carries out ARU Find Me (ARU looks for me) routine, the parameter of regulation " substituting ". ARU Find Me routine explains in conjunction with Figure 69 E and 69F later. If not yet regulation substitutes, ARU just carries out ARU Guest Menu (ARU guest's menu) routine-this routine in step 69022 and explains in conjunction with Figure 69 D later.

Figure 69 B represents ARU Play Greeting (ARU plays greeting) routine. Greeted if record customization, ARU just plays this customization in step 69030 and greets. Otherwise ARU just plays pre-recorded generality in step 69032 and greets.

Figure 69 C represents ARU Play Temp Greeting (ARU plays interim the greeting) routine. If recorded interim the greeting, ARU just plays and should greet temporarily in step 69034. Greeted if record customization, ARU just plays this customization in step 69036 and greets. Otherwise ARU just plays pre-recorded generality in step 69038 and greets.

Figure 69 D represents Guest Menu (guest's menu) routine. In step 69040, ARU provides a sound equipment menu to the calling subscriber. In the example shown, menu item ' 1 ' is corresponding to the request of speaking to the user, menu item ' 2 ' is corresponding to the request that stays voice mail for the user, and menu item ' 3 ' is corresponding to the request that sends fax to the user, and menu item ' 4 ' is corresponding to the request of calling user. In addition, the user can input its password to obtain as the access of user to ARU.

If calling subscriber's request is spoken to the user, ARU just checks the scheduling sign related with calling subscriber's profile. If the indication of user's profile is carried out Route Selection by dispatch list, ARU just uses " Sched1 " as ARU Find Me (ARU the looks for me) routine of parameter execution graph 69E and 69F in step 69042. Do not carry out Route Selection if user's profile is not indicated by dispatch list, ARU just carries out ARU Find Me routine with " First " as parameter in step 69044. Hereinafter in connection with Figure 69 E and 69F ARU Find Me routine is discussed in further detail.

If calling subscriber's request stays voice mail message, ARU just checks whether user's mailbox is full. If mailbox is full, just play a recording messages, the calling subscriber is returned guest's menu. If mailbox is discontented, just play a recording messages, prompting the calling subscriber keep, and in step 69046 he is transformed into ARU Voivemail routine simultaneously.

If the calling subscriber asks to send fax, ARU just checks whether user's mailbox is full. If mailbox is full, just play a recording messages, the calling subscriber is returned guest's menu. If mailbox is discontented, just play a recording messages, prompting the calling subscriber keep, and in step 69048 he is transformed into the voice/fax routine simultaneously.

If the calling subscriber asks calling user, ARU just carries out ARU Send Page (ARU transmits paging) routine-hereinafter in connection with Figure 69 M this routine is described in step 69050.

If the calling subscriber inputs effective password, ARU just carries out ARU User Call (ARU user's calling) routine-hereinafter in connection with Figure 69 P this routine is described in step 69052.

Figure 69 E and 69F represent ARU Find Me (ARU looks for me) routine. Shown in step 69060, ARU Find Me routine adopts a single parameter Term_Slot, and this parameter is arranged by the calling subscriber, when carrying out Find Me routine for ARU, is used for selecting course of action to be selected. If Term_Slot is set to " Find Me ", this expression ARU will determine with default method user's current number. For example can this value be set for alternative or default process. If user's profile comprises scheduling sign, ARU just carries out Find Me routine-shown in step 69062 with " Sched1 " parameter. If do not comprise, ARU just carries out ARU Find Me routine-shown in step 69061 with first telephone number in user's the list of numbers.

If Term_Slot is set to " Voicemail ", ARU just plays the user to the calling subscriber asks the calling subscriber to stay the message of voice mail message. If user's mailbox is discontented, ARU just carries out ARU Xfer to Voice/Fax Guest Voice (ARU the is transferred to speech/fax guest speech) routine shown in Figure 69 in step 69064. Just return if routine is unsuccessful, just play in this case message, the expression calling subscriber should be later on again call attempt, then disconnect the calling subscriber. Equally, if user's mailbox is full, ARU just plays message, the full calling subscriber of expression mailbox should be later on again call attempt, then disconnect the calling subscriber.

If Term_Slot is set to " Pager ", ARU just plays the user to the calling subscriber asks the calling subscriber to stay the message of the request of calling user. Then ARU carries out ARU Send Page, and routine-this routine will be hereinafter in conjunction with Figure 69 M explanation. Just return if routine is unsuccessful, just play in this case message, the expression calling subscriber should be later on again call attempt, then disconnect the calling subscriber.

If Term_Slot is set to any POTS (" plain old telephone service ") value (such as Sched1, Sched2, First, Second or Third), this POTS value show the user the regulation incoming call to send with the standard telephone system, ARU has been used by instruction and has specifically dispatched or selected telephone number. In step 69070, ARU carries out ARU Record Name (ARU records name) routine to obtain the digital record of caller identity. ARU Record Name routine elaborates in conjunction with Figure 69 H hereinafter. The message (for example when attempting for the first time, play " please keep, I attempt to arrive you ", when trial subsequently, play " please continue to keep, I am still attempting to arrive you ") that ARU is suitable for the calling subscriber plays. In step 69071, ARU places maintenance with the calling subscriber, and calling is started to selected telephone number. If call out and to be answered by the people, ARU is just in step 69072 execution ARU Connect Call (ARU connects calling) routine-hereinafter in connection with Figure 69 I this routine is discussed. If line be busy, ARU are just in the ARU Alternate of step 69074 execution graph 69N Routing (selection of ARU alternate routing) routine. If ARU detects an answering machine, just check whether the user asked ARU to forward next number for subsequent use to when running into an answering machine. If not, ARU just connects calling. Otherwise ARU selects next recursive call number, re-executes ARU Find Me routine with the number of this new selection.

If both unmanned answers, without the circuit busy signal, the also answer of nonreply machine, if Term_Slot is set to so " Operator ", ARU just carries out ARU Guest Xfer to MOTC (ARU guest is transferred to MOTC) routine-hereinafter in connection with Figure 69 M this routine is discussed. Otherwise ARU just selects next telephone number (if any), with the new number re invocation ARU Find Me routine of selecting. If there is not alternative number remaining, ARU is just in the ARU Alternate of step 69804 execution graph 69N Routing routine.

Figure 69 G represents ARU Record Name (ARU records name) routine. This routine is used for having stipulated by name or carrying out the name of record calling subscriber in the situation of call visor by name and ANI the user. If the user has stipulated call visor, ARU just checks whether recorded calling subscriber's a name. If no, just point out the calling subscriber that name is provided, this can be listened and reply at step 69090 record. If the user did not stipulate any type of call visor, the name that ARU Record Name routine does not record the calling subscriber just returns.

Figure 69 H represents ARU Guest Xfer to MOTC (ARU guest is transferred to MOTC) routine. This routine is play the pre-recorded message that requires the calling subscriber to keep, and then in step 69092 call transfer is arrived the operator.

Figure 69 I represents ARU Connect Call (ARU connects calling) routine. If need the operator to help through calling, ARU is with regard to the ARU Guest Xfer to MOTC routine of execution graph 83H. If the user did not ask call visor, call out and just be connected to the user. If the user has selected call visor, ARU just plays an informational message collection to the user. ARU plays " you have from ... the calling of (sign calling subscriber's information-on user-selected option and whether recorded calling subscriber's name and decided) ". If do not record name, identification message is at 69106 ANI that provide from its access calling. If recorded name, identification message just comprises name in step 69107 (if the user asked by the name shielding), perhaps comprises name and ANI in step 69108 (shielding if the user asks to add ANI by name). After the identification information prompting user, ARU is in the ARU Gain Acceptance routine shown in the step 69110 execution graph 69J.

Figure 69 J represents ARU Gain Acceptance (ARU obtains to accept) routine. ARU check the user whether have less than mailbox can use. If so, ARU is call accepted or later on callback of indication status of calling person with regard to prompting user. If the user points out that it will accept callback (for example by by ' 1 '), ARU just connects calling in step 69124. Otherwise ARU just confirms this refusal with suitable informational message (for example " will require your calling subscriber to stay voice mail message " or " will require your later on again examination of calling subscriber ", and specifically decide on the content of mailbox definite in the step 69120). ARU disconnects the user, stops calling party's maintenance. ARU plays a segment record to the calling party, points out to arrive the user, points out alternatively the calling subscriber to stay voice mail message. If there is not mailbox to use, the calling subscriber is just disconnected. If have less than mailbox can use, ARU is just in the ARU Xfer of step 69128 execution graph 69K to Voice/Fax Guest Voice routine. Carry out after this routine, then the message of callback disconnect after the ARU playing request calling subscriber.

Figure 69 K represents ARU Xfer to Voice/Fax Guest Voice (ARU is transferred to speech/fax guest speech) routine. This routine connect the calling subscriber to VFP to stay voice mail message. ARU attempts to obtain and the shaking hands of VFP. If shake hands successfully, ARU just connects calling in step 69130. If unsuccessful, ARU just plays error messages in step 69132, then withdraws from. Figure 69 L represents ARU Xfer to Voice/Fax Guest Fax w/or w/out Annotation (ARU be transferred to speech/fax guest fax-with or without explaining) routine. This routine connect the calling subscriber to VFP with transmitting facsimile. ARU attempts to obtain and the shaking hands of VFP. If shake hands successfully, ARU just connects calling in step 69140. If unsuccessful, ARU just plays error messages in step 69142, then withdraws from. The routine of Figure 69 K and 69L is similar, and difference is the content of institute's request service of VFP and the error messages play to the calling subscriber.

Figure 69 M represents ARU Send Page (ARU sends paging) routine, and it starts the calling to user's paging service. In step 69150, the telephone number that ARU prompting calling subscriber input should provide to interviewed pager. This points out triplicate, until receive an ans back. If do not have ans back after three promptings, ARU just carries out ARU Guest Xfer to MOTC routine, and the calling subscriber is transferred to the operator. This allows the calling subscriber who does not have DTMF gating equipment to input ans back that number is offered the operator, represents the calling subscriber by the operator and Enters Number. In step 69158, ARU plays a segment record to the calling subscriber, makes the more positive input number of makeing mistakes or confirm that the number of input is correct of calling subscriber. In step 69160, calling to user's paging service of ARU access, the data that provide with the calling subscriber are pointed out the number that will show at pager to paging service. If to the access success of paging service, ARU just is shown as the message of merit in step 69164 playlist, disconnect in step 69166. If the calling to paging service is unsuccessful, ARU just plays the expression failure in step 69162, then returns, and this moment, ARU can select to provide other selection to the calling subscriber.

Figure 69 N represents ARU Alternate Routing (selection of ARU alternate routing) routine. ARU carries out this routine and comes route to select to be routed to user's calling. Will be with this call route selecting that is not delivered to its paging service if the user pointed out, ARU just plays a segment table in step 69170 and shows that the calling subscriber can send the record of paging. Then ARU carries out ARU Send Page routine-front and in conjunction with Figure 69 M this routine was described. If paging is unsuccessful, ARU just plays the expression failure in step 69174, then disconnects. Will be with this call route selecting that is not delivered to voice mail if the user pointed out, ARU just plays a segment table in step 69173 and shows that the calling subscriber can stay the record of voice mail message. If user's mailbox is discontented, ARU just carries out ARU Xfer to Voice/Fax Guest VOice routine. If this routine is returned, what stay voice mail attempts unsuccessfully, and ARU just plays the expression failure and disconnects the calling subscriber in step 69184. If mailbox is full, ARU just plays one section and notifies the record of this condition of calling subscriber and disconnect the calling subscriber in step 69184. If the user pointed out " guest's selection ", ARU is just in the ARU of step 69180 execution graph 690 Alternat Routing Guest Option routine, otherwise just disconnects the calling subscriber in step 69182.

Figure 69 0 expression ARU A1ternat Routing Guest Option (the ARU alternate routing selects the guest to select) routine. This routine allows the guest to select to stay voice mail in the inaccessible situation of user or sends paging. ARU provides a menu in step 69190 to the calling subscriber, and content is possible Route Selection option, and ' 1 ' representative herein stays voice mail, and ' 2 ' representative sends paging. If the calling subscriber asks to send paging, ARU is just in the ARU Send of step 69200 execution graph 69M Page routine. If the failure of Send Page routine, ARU just plays one section idagnostic logout to the calling subscriber, then disconnects the calling subscriber in step 69202. If calling subscriber's request stays voice mail, ARU just checks whether subscriber mailbox is full. If mailbox is discontented, ARU is with regard to the ARU Xfer to Voice/Fax Guest Voice routine of execution graph 69K. If routine is returned, expression is carried out unsuccessful. In this case, if perhaps mailbox is full, ARU just plays the message that expression can not send voice mail, and the calling subscriber points out whether it is ready to replace the transmission paging in step 69195 prompting. If the calling subscriber selects to send the option of paging, ARU just carries out ARUU Send Page routine in step 69200, and process is as the calling subscriber selects this option at the very start. If it is unsuccessful to carry out ARUU Send Page routine, ARU just plays one section idagnostic logout to the calling subscriber, then disconnects the calling subscriber in step 69202.

The main menu that Figure 69 P represents is used for ARU User Call Routine mechanism from user's calling. If the calling subscriber inputs effective password, this routine is just carried out as step 69052 in the ARU Guest Menu routine shown in Figure 69 D. After the welcome of playing one section guided bone was greeted, ARU checked whether user's mailbox is full. If mailbox is full, ARU just plays one section message of notifying this condition of user in step 69300. Play after this warning, if perhaps mailbox is discontented, it is the state recording of the number of user's new voice mail message of storing and Fax Messaging that ARU just notifies the user one section of step 69302 broadcast.

In step 69304, ARU is user's play menu. In the example shown, clauses and subclauses ' 1 ' are corresponding to the request that changes call route selecting; Clauses and subclauses ' 2 ' are corresponding to the request that sends or retrieve; Clauses and subclauses ' 3 ' are corresponding to the request of access calling; Clauses and subclauses ' 1 ' are corresponding to the request to Administration menu; Clauses and subclauses ' 0 ' are corresponding to will be to the request of customer service transmission.

If user selection changes the option of call route selecting, ARU is just in step 69310 execution ARU Change Routing routine-hereinafter in connection with Figure 69 T this routine is described. If user selection sends and the option of retrieval mail, ARU plays the message that one section request user who prerecords keeps, and then carries out ARU Xfer to Voice/Fax Subscriber Send/Retrive routine-hereinafter in connection with Figure 69 Q this routine is described in step 69312. If the option of user selection access calling, ARU just provide the menu of type of the calling of the desired access of one of user inquiry in step 69314. If the user uses International or National telephone number answers, perhaps in order to front regulation, reply corresponding to dialling the number soon of International or National telephone number, ARU just connects this calling in step 69316. If user solicit operation person helps, ARU just carries out ARU Xfer to MOTC routine in step 69318, and the user is transferred to the operator. If the user cancels call request, ARU just turns back to step 69304. If-the main menu that provides in step 69304 selects ' 4 '-ARU just to carry out the Adminstration routine, this routine is hereinafter in conjunction with Figure 69 P explanation. If select the request customer service, ARU is with regard to the ARU Xfer to Customer Service routine of execution graph 69AH-hereinafter this process will be described.

Figure 69 Q represents ARU Xfer to voice/Fax Subcriber Send/Receive routine, this routine connect this user to VFP to send and the retrieval voice mail message. This ARU attempts to obtain the signal exchange with VFP. If this signal exchange success connects this calling at step 69330 ARU. If unsuccessful, then ARU is in step 69332 playback error message and withdraw from.

Figure 69 R represents ARU Xfer to Voice/Fax Subscriber Send/Receive (ARU is transferred to speech/fax user sending/receiving) routine, and it connects the user to the allocation table of VFP with leading subscriber. ARU attempts to obtain and the shaking hands of VFP. If shake hands successfully, ARU just connects calling in step 69340; If unsuccessful, ARU just plays an error messages in step 69342, then withdraws from.

Figure 69 S represents ARU Xfer to Voice/Fax Subscriber Record Name (ARU is transferred to speech/fax user record name) routine, and it connects the user will be used for the name of identifying user to VFP with record in the message that VFP starts. ARU attempts to obtain and the shaking hands of VFP. If shake hands successfully, ARU just connects calling in step 69350; If unsuccessful, ARU just plays an error messages in step 69352, then withdraws from. The routine of Figure 69 Q, 69R and 69S is similar, and difference is the content of institute's requested service of VFP and the error messages play to the user.

Figure 69 T represents ARU Change Routing (ARU changes Route Selection) routine, and the user revises its professional associated Route Selection option with it. In step 69390, ARU provides options menu to the user. If user selection Find-Me is routing (look for me Route Selection) option, ARU are just carried out ARU Change Routing routine-hereinafter in connection with Figure 69 U this routine is described. If user selection Override is routing (substitute Route Selection) option, ARU just plays the message of the current alternative Route Selection setting of expression user and provides the user menu that is used for the selection new option in step 69404 in step 69400. If the user selects to change in option, ARU just-as step 69408-executions ARU program (program) routine so that alternative selection to be set in accordance with regulations, method is to transmit the parameter of " override (substituting) " and the option of selecting. If user selection " Cancel " (cancellation) option, ARU just turns back to step 69390.

If the user is from ARU Change Routing menu setecting " A1ternate Routing " (alternate routing selection) option of step 69390, ARU just plays the message that a segment table shows that user's current alternate routing selection arranges in step 69409, and provides the user menu that is used for selecting new option in step 69409. If the user selects to change in option, ARU just-as step 69414-executions ARU program (program) routine so that Back Up Option to be set in accordance with regulations, method is to transmit the parameter of " alternate (for subsequent use) " and the option of selecting. If user selection " Cancel " (cancellation) option, ARU just turns back to step 69390.

If the user is from the Change Routing menu setecting " Cancel and Return " of step 69390 (cancel and return) option, ARU just turns back to the custom menu of Figure 69 P in step 69412.

Figure 69 U represents ARU Change Find-Me Routing (ARU change look for me Route Selection) routine. In step 69420, ARU checks that the user's looks for my Route Selection whether by the dispatch list setting. Just play one in step 69422 if not, ARU and show that Route Selection is configured to the message of attempting three telephone numbers continuously, in step 69424 execution ARU Change 3-Number Sequence routine-hereinafter in connection with Figure 69 V this routine is described. If the user looks for me Route Selection to be arranged by dispatch list, ARU just step 69426 play show the user look for my Route Selection current be by dispatch list arrange message, and provide " Change Schedule Routing " (changing scheduling Route Selection) menu in step 69428 to the user. If user selection change to 3-number (changing to the 3-number sequence) option, ARU just plays the message that Route Selection is set up the 3-number sequence in step 69430, in the ARU Change of step 69432 execution graph 69V 3-Number Sequence routine. If user selection Save and is Continue (preserve also continue) option, ARU just is configured to message by the Route Selection of dispatch list in my Route Selection of looking for that step 69434 is play the user, carries out ARU Change Routing routine in step 69436. If user selection cancel and is return (cancel and return) option is then also wanted execution in step 69436 and ARU Change Routing routine.

Figure 69 V represents ARU Change 3-Number Sequence (changing the 3-number sequence) routine, and it allows user's change by content and the order of employed three numbers for subsequent use of ARU Find-Me routine of Figure 69 E and 69F. In step 69440, ARU provides the user options menu. If user selection changes the option of one of three telephone numbers, just play a recording messages in step 69422, show current number setting, then carry out the Program routine in step 69444, to this routine transmit a sign want reformed number and point out to change after the parameter of POTS number. Then ARU turns back to step 69440. If select to check the option of Set For Current, ARU just plays a series of message of the setting of each number that shows three numbers in step 69446. Then ARU turns back to step 69440.

If user selection changes the option of scheduling Route Selection, ARU just checks in step 69450 whether the user is fit to dispose the scheduling Route Selection. If have, ARU just plays a segment table in step 69454 and shows the message of looking for my Route Selection to be set to user's dispatch list, step 69456 switch the dispatch list setting with gating it. Switch after the setting, ARU just turns back to the ARU Change Routing routine of Figure 69 T in step 69450. If the dispatch list Route Selection is not this user's a option, ARU just plays one section diagnostic message, and expression dispatch list Route Selection is unavailable, the user can with customer service contact to obtain this option. Then ARU turns back to step 69440.

If user selection represents the option cancelling and return, ARU just turns back to the ARU Change Routing routine of Figure 69 T.

Figure 69 W represents ARU Administration (ARU management) routine. In step 69460, ARU provides the user options menu. In the example shown, clauses and subclauses ' 1 ' are corresponding to maintenance customer's broadcasting or the request of speed dial tabulation, and clauses and subclauses ' 2 ' are corresponding to the request of record greeting, and clauses and subclauses ' 3 ' are corresponding to the request of activation or deexcitation feature. If request list safeguards that ARU just provides the user options menu in step 69462. If user selection is safeguarded the option of its broadcast lists, ARU is just in the ARU Xfer of step 69464 execution graph 69R to Voice/Fax Subscriber Distribution Lists routine. Carry out after this routine, ARU is just in the ARU Lists of step 69468 execution graph 69W (ARU tabulation) routine. If user selection is safeguarded the option of speed dial tabulation, ARU is just in the ARU Change of step 69470 execution graph 69X Speed-Dial Numbers routine. If user selection cancellation and the option that returns, ARU just turns back to step 69460.

If the option that the user greets according to the menu setecting record that step 69460 provides, ARU just provides the user options menu in step 69474. In the example shown, clauses and subclauses ' 1 ' are corresponding to the request of the welcome message of revising the user, and clauses and subclauses ' 2 ' are corresponding to the request of the title of revising the subscriber mailbox association. If user selection is revised the option of welcome message, ARU just in the ARU Play of step 69476 execution graph 69B Greeting routine, plays current welcome message, in the ARU Change of step 69478 execution graph 69Y Greeting routine. If user selection is revised the option of box name, the message that ARU keeps with regard to the playing request user is carried out ARU Xfer to Voice/Fax Subscriber Mailbox Name routine-preamble in step 69480 and in conjunction with Figure 69 S this routine was described. Carry out after this routine, ARU turns back to step 69474. If the user according to the menu that step 69474 provides, points out and should will revise the request cancellation (for example by pressing asterisk ' * ') of greeting that ARU just turns back to step 69460.

If the menu that the user provides according to step 69460 select to activate or the option of deexcitation functional part, ARU is just in step 69484 execution ARU Feature Activation routine-hereinafter in connection with Figure 69 Z this routine is described. If the request cancellation (for example by pressing asterisk ' * ') that user then point out should revise greet, ARU just turns back to ARU User Menu routine-this routine and be expressed as step 69304 in Figure 69 P.

Figure 69 X represents ARU Change Speed Dial Numbers (ARU changes fast dialing) routine. ARU provides correspondence of user specific options menu of dialling the number soon in step 69490. For example, clauses and subclauses ' 1 ' are dialled the number soon corresponding to the 1st, and clauses and subclauses ' 2 ' are dialled the number soon corresponding to the 2nd, etc., until clauses and subclauses ' 9 '-dial the number soon corresponding to the 9th. When one of them option of user selection, ARU just plays the message that a segment table shows this selected Set For Current of dialling the number soon in step 69492. In step 69494, ARU carries out ARU Program routine-hereinafter in connection with Figure 69 AA this routine is described, the POTS number of regulation " Spd_Dial_n " parameter to point out will to be set to the fast dialing of the fast dialing (wherein n is by the numeral replacement corresponding with the number of interviewed speed dial key) of programming and appointment. Then ARU turns back to step 69490. If user selection is cancelled the option (for example using asterisk ' * ' expression) of the fast dialing request of this change, ARU just turns back to step 69462, as shown in Figure 69 W.

Figure 69 Y represents ARU Change Greeting (ARU changes greeting) routine. In step 69500, ARU provides one corresponding to the menu of available options to the user. For example, the request that clauses and subclauses ' 1 ' are greeted corresponding to the record customization, the request that clauses and subclauses ' 2 ' are greeted corresponding to the Application standard system. If the option that the customization of user selection record is greeted, ARU just provide a relevant customization to greet the menu of option in step 69502. In the example shown, the request of the current content that clauses and subclauses ' 1 ' are greeted corresponding to the customization that checks the user, clauses and subclauses ' 2 ' corresponding to new record customization greet the request that the customization that replaces current record is greeted. Symbol ' # ' is corresponding to the request of preserving the content of greeting, and symbol ' * ' is corresponding to the request of cancelling and returning.

If the option of the current content that user selection reexamination user's customization is greeted, ARU are just carried out ARU Play Temp Greeting routine-this routine preamble in step 69504 and illustrated in conjunction with Figure 69 C, then turn back to step 69502. If user selection with new record the customization option that greet to replace the customization of current record to greet, ARU just begins to record new greeting at step 69506 prompting user. After record was greeted, ARU turned back to step 69502. After record was greeted, the user can ask the greeting of new record is preserved. Greet if user selection is preserved, ARU just is saved in disk to the greeting of recording in step 69510, covers to greet file content in the past, plays a segment table in step 69514 and shows the message that new greeting has been stored. After storage was greeted, ARU carried out ARU Administration routine-preamble and in conjunction with Figure 69 W this routine was described. If the user is according to the menu that is provided by ARU in the step 69502, the request of greeting is revised in cancellation, and ARU just carries out ARU Greeting routine-preamble in step 69518 and in conjunction with Figure 69 W this routine was described.

If the user is according to the menu that provides in the step 69500, the option of (namely not identifying this user's default greeting) is greeted by the choice for use system, just any greeting of record before step 69520 deletion of ARU. Play a pre-recorded message in step 69522, the expression calling subscriber will hear system's greeting rather than personalized greeting now. Then ARU turns back to ARU Administration routine-preamble in step 69525 and in conjunction with Figure 69 W this routine was described. If user selection cancellation and the option that returns, ARU also returns in step 69525.

Figure 69 Z represents ARU Feature Activation (ARU feature activation) routine. In step 69350, ARU provides the menu of a corresponding available options to the user. For example, clauses and subclauses ' 1 ' are corresponding to the request that the call visor option is set; Clauses and subclauses ' 2 ' are corresponding to activation or deexcitation pager recipient's request; Clauses and subclauses ' 3 ' are corresponding to the request that pager notifications is set; Clauses and subclauses ' 4 ' are corresponding to activation or deexcitation account's request. If user selection call visor option, ARU are just play the record that a segment table shows the Set For Current of call visor option in step 69532. In step 69534, ARU provides the tabulation of the option of subscriber-related call visor. In this example, clauses and subclauses ' 1 ' are corresponding to the request of only pressing ANI (telephone number) selection shielding; Clauses and subclauses ' 2 ' are corresponding to the request of only pressing name selection shielding; The two selects the request of shielding to clauses and subclauses ' 3 ' corresponding to pressing ANI and name; Clauses and subclauses ' 4 ' are corresponding to the request of all turning off call visor. If one of these options of user selection, ARU just carries out ARU Program routine-hereinafter in connection with Figure 69 AA this routine is described in step 69536, first parameter to its transmission shows that hope changes the shielding option, and second parameter shows the value that option should be configured to. ARU turns back to step 69530 after the step 69536. Equally, if the user selects cancellation and returns option in step 69534, ARU also turns back to step 69530.

If user selection activates or the option of deexcitation pager, ARU just plays a segment record message in step 69538, the new state of expression pager notifications option. In step 69540, ARU switch Pager Option current state (that is, close if option is current, with regard to gating it; If the current gating of option is just closed it). After the switching, ARU just turns back to step 69530.

If the option of user selection pager notifications, ARU are just play a segment record in step 69542, the Set For Current of expression call visor option. In step 69544, ARU provides the user tabulation about the option of pager notifications. In this example, clauses and subclauses ' 1 ' are corresponding to the request of selecting only to notify with pager the input voice mail; Clauses and subclauses ' 2 ' are corresponding to the request of selecting only to notify with pager the input faxmail; Clauses and subclauses ' 3 ' are corresponding to the request of selecting with pager notifications input voice mail and faxmail; Clauses and subclauses ' 4 ' are corresponding to the request of all turning off call page machine notice. If one of these options of user selection, ARU just carries out ARU Program routine-hereinafter in connection with Figure 69 AA this routine is described in step 69546, first parameter to its transmission shows that hope changes the pager notifications option, and second parameter shows the value that option should be configured to. ARU turns back to step 69530 after the step 69546. Equally, if the user selects cancellation and returns option in step 69544, ARU also turns back to step 69530.

If the user is at step 69530 selection activation or its account's of deexcitation option, ARU just plays a segment record message in step 69550, expression account's new state. In step 69552, ARU switch Account Options current state (that is, close if option is current, with regard to gating it; If the current gating of option is just closed it). After the switching, ARU just turns back to step 69530.

If the user selects cancellation and returns option in step 69530, ARU just turns back to ARU Administration routine-preamble and in conjunction with Figure 69 W this routine was described.

Figure 69 AA represents ARU Program (ARU program) routine, and it carries out to arrange the option that the user selectes by ARU. Shown in step 69560, the Program routine adopts two input parameter: Term_Slot and Term, and the former identifies the option that its value is changing, the value that the option that the latter's value indication is accessed by Term_Slot just is being set up. In step 69562, ARU checks the type of defined value among the Term. If the Term value is a POTS identifier (being telephone number, such as the telephone number that is arrived fast dialing in the step 69494 among Figure 69 X by programming), ARU is just at step prompting user input POTS number. If the user inputs the option (being ' 1 ' in the illustrated example) of the POTS value of storage before a domestic or international number or the deletion, ARU just plays a message in step 69566, represents the new setting that this interviewed groove (slot) will be changed to. In step 69568, the ARU prompting user is corrected number by re-entering a new number, perhaps confirms this request, perhaps cancels this request. If the option of user selection corrigendum number, ARU just turns back to step 69564. If the user confirms this request, ARU just in step 69570 with the Term parameter as being got up by the variable storage of Term_Slot parameter access. If the user cancels this request, ARU just turns back to calling routine in step 69572. If select the cancellation option when step 69564 is prompted to input the POTS number, then ARU also turns back to calling routine in step 69572.

If the Term value is not the POTS identifier, ARU just plays message in step 69580, notifies this interviewed option of user to be changed. In step 69582, the ARU prompting user is confirmed or the cancellation request. If the user confirms this request, ARU just in step 69584 with the Term parameter as being got up by the variable storage of Term_Slot parameter access, then turn back to calling routine in step 69572. If the user cancels this request, ARU does not store this value and just turns back to calling routine in step 69572.

Figure 69 AI represents ARU User Xfer to Customer Service routine, and in step 69592, this ARU plays pre-recorded message asks this user to keep to the user. In step 69594, this ARU forwards this user to customer service.

Figure 69 AB represents ARU Validate Guest Entry (ARU checking guest input) routine. This routine is used for determining that by ARU the guest attempts to use VFP guest's facility whether effective. ARU allows the guest to attempt its identity information of input for three times. For the invalid input of the first two times, ARU returns the expression guest in step 69610 and inputs invalid state. When attempting for the third time, ARU is in the Find-Me of step 69615 execution graph 69E and 69F routine. Input if receive the guest, ARU just checks that in step 69617 guest inputs an available selection on the menu that whether is suitable for. If not, ARU just plays a segment table in step 69620 and shows that the guest inputs the disabled recording messages of option. If this is for the third time invalid input, ARU is with regard to the ARU Guest Xfer to MTOC routine of execution graph 69H. If this is the first time or for the second time invalid input, the routine in the step 69622 is returned an expression guest and is inputted invalid sign. If ARU judges that in step 69617 guest's input is suitable menu option, just return an effective status in step 69626.

Figure 69 AC represents ARU Validate User Entry (input of ARU authentication of users) routine. This routine is used for confirming that by ARU the user uses the trial of user's service of VFP. If do not receive user's input, ARU just plays an expression in step 69630 and does not receive the diagnostic message of input. If receive user's input, ARU just checks in step 69634 whether the menu that the user is just responding comprises the option that is fit to user's input. If so, ARU just returns an effective status in step 69636. If not, ARU just plays the disabled message of this option of expression in step 69638. If do not receive input, or input is invalid to menu, and just whether this is the designated user information of failing for the third time to ARU step 69632 inspection. If so, ARU is just in the ARU User of step 69640 execution graph 89AI Xfer to Customer Service routine. If this is unsuccessfully to input for the first time or for the second time, ARU just returns a disarmed state in step 69642.

Figure 69 AD represents ARU Validate Passcode Entry (input of ARU checking password) routine. This routine is used for confirming the password of user's input by ARU. In step 69650, the password that ARU checks input whether with this specific user's password match. If so, ARU just returns an effective status in step 69652. If it is invalid to input, ARU just plays the recording messages that a segment table shows that input is invalid in step 69654. ARU allows to attempt inputting effective password twice. In step 69656, ARU checks whether this is the trial of entering password for the second time. If this is to attempt for the second time, ARU just carries out ARU User Xfer to Customer Service routine-preamble in step 69660 and in conjunction with Figure 69 AI this routine was described. If this is not for the second time invalid input, ARU just inputs effective password and turns back to step 69650 at step 69658 prompting user.

Figure 69 AE represents ARU Validate Completion (the ARU checking is finished) routine. This routine is used for confirming the validity the input of telephone number by ARU. In step 69670, ARU checks whether receive the validated user input. If no, ARU just checks whether this is the invalid input of attempting for the third time. If not, ARU just returns an expression in step 69672 and does not receive the sign of effective input. If this is to attempt for the third time, ARU just plays a message and carries out ARU Xfer User to MTOC routine-preamble in step 69676 in step 69674 and in conjunction with Figure 69 H this routine was described.

If receive effective user's input, ARU just checks that whether the telephone number of inputting is with ' 011 ' beginning. If so, ARU is just in the ARU Validate of step 69680 execution graph 69AF International Completion (finish the ARU affirmation world) routine. In step 69682, ARU checks whether the user is provided with domestic terms sign. If no, ARU plays the disabled diagnostic message of expression domestic call in step 69684, then advances to step 69671. Whether ARU has inputted 10 item codes step 69686 inspection, whether has inputted effective MPA-Nxx number step 69688 inspection. If the number of input is not 10 effective MPA-Nxx numbers, ARU just plays diagnostic message in step 69690, then advances to step 69671. ARU checks in step 69690 whether NADP blocks effective to this user, checks in step 69692 whether 976 obstructions are effective to this user. If any one blocks effectively, ARU plays expression to the diagnostic message that the calling of interviewed number gets clogged in step 69694, then advances to step 69671. Otherwise ARU just returns an expression effective state that Enters Number in step 69696.

Figure 69 AF represents ARU Validate International Completion (finish the ARU checking world) routine. In step 69700, ARU checks whether the user is configured to access international call. If not, ARU just plays a diagnostic message in step 69702. In step 69704, ARU checks the effectively international dialing that whether semantically Enters Number. If not, ARU plays a diagnostic message in step 69706. In step 69708, ARU checks Cset (country's collection) blocks whether will block this assigned number. If so, ARU just plays a diagnostic message in step 69710. If do not find error condition, ARU just returns an effective status in step 69712. If the discovery mistake, ARU just returns a disarmed state in step 69713. If attempt all failures that Enters Number for three times, ARU just plays a diagnostic message and in step 69716 user is transferred to the operator in step 69714.

Figure 69 AG represents ARU Validate POTS Programming (ARU checking POTS programming) routine. It is used that this routine is used for guaranteeing to only have effective telephone-number just can store for call route selecting by ARU. In step 69720, ARU checks whether receive the validated user input. If no, ARU just checks whether this is the invalid input of attempting for the third time. If not, ARU just returns an expression in step 69722 and does not receive the sign of effective input. If this is to attempt for the third time, ARU just carries out ARU User Xfer to Customer Service routine-preamble in step 69676 and in conjunction with Figure 69 AI this routine was described.

If receive effective user's input, ARU just checks that whether the telephone number of inputting is with ' 011 ' beginning. If so, ARU is just in the ARU Validate of step 69730 execution graph 69AF International Completion routine. In step 69732, ARU checks whether the user is provided with domestic terms sign. If no, ARU plays the disabled diagnostic message of expression domestic call in step 69734, then advances to step 69721. Whether ARU has inputted 10 item codes step 69736 inspection, whether has inputted effective MPA-Nxx number step 69738 inspection. If which is not input all, ARU just plays diagnostic message in step 69740, then advances to step 69721. ARU checks in step 69750 whether 976 obstructions are effective to this user. If so, ARU plays expression to the diagnostic message that the calling of interviewed number gets clogged in step 69754, then advances to step 69721. Otherwise ARU just returns an expression effective state that Enters Number in step 69756.

Figure 69 AH represents ARU Validate International Programming (ARU verifies international programming) routine. It is used that this routine is used for guaranteeing to only have effective telephone-number just can store for call route selecting by ARU. In step 69760, ARU checks whether the user is configured to access international call. If not, ARU just plays a diagnostic message in step 69762. In step 69764, ARU checks the effectively international dialing that whether semantically Enters Number. If not, ARU plays a diagnostic message in step 69766. In step 69768, ARU checks Cset blocks whether will block this assigned number. If so, ARU just plays a diagnostic message in step 69770. If do not find error condition, ARU just returns an effective status in step 69772. If discovery error condition, ARU just return a disarmed state in step 69773. If attempt all failures that Enters Number for three times, ARU just plays a diagnostic message and in step 69776 user is transferred to the operator in step 69774.

What Figure 70 A～70S represented is the automatic console call flow diagram of the software realization of the above-mentioned direct line MCI product of expression, can be used for further understanding the present invention. The difference of console call-flow and ARU call-flow is, although console is automatically, is again Attended mode, and people on duty can respond calling subscriber's request. This calling subscriber who just allows not possess the equipment of DTMF ability uses this product. The DTMF data that provided by the calling subscriber will obtain processing, but human operator who has been arranged, and just allow many available operations just can obtain carrying out without the DTMF input. Providing of data can by the directly input on keyboard (if keyboard is arranged) of calling subscriber, also can be inputted according to the VAB voice answer back that the calling subscriber provides by human operator who.

Figure 70 A represents the starting point to the processing of calling out to certain account's automatic control console. When calling out startup, suppose that it is that the guest calls out. Be not online if the account is current, automatic control console is just play in step 70010 can not be the message of this account call accepted. Unless the calling subscriber points out that to the operator he has password, otherwise console just disconnects this calling in step 70012. If the calling subscriber provides password to the operator, the operator just starts Console Validate Passcode (console affirmation password) routine-hereinafter in connection with Figure 70 K this routine is described in step 70014.

Be online if the account is current, console just checks whether the user pointed out substituting incoming call. If so, console just arrives the operator in step 70018 with call route selecting. If the calling subscriber is just generating fax tones, console is just carried out Console Fax Tone Detected (detecting the console fax tones) routine-hereinafter in connection with Figure 70 S this routine is described in step 70024. If the calling subscriber provides password to the operator, the operator just starts Console Validate Passcode routine-hereinafter in connection with Figure 70 K this routine is described in step 70026. Otherwise, just will call out by user's incoming call and process, console is carried out Console Find Me (console is looked for me) routine-hereinafter in connection with Figure 70 BC this routine is described in step 70020. Console provides " substituting " parameter to Console Find Me routine call.

If not yet regulation substitutes, console just provides the sound equipment menu in step 70030 to the calling subscriber. In the example shown, clauses and subclauses ' 1 ' are corresponding to the request of speaking to the user, and clauses and subclauses ' 2 ' are corresponding to the request of the sound mail of leaving word for the user, and clauses and subclauses ' 3 ' are corresponding to the request that sends fax to the user, and clauses and subclauses ' 4 ' are corresponding to the request of calling user. In addition, the user can provide its password to obtain as the access of user to console.

If calling subscriber's request is spoken to the user, console just checks the scheduling sign related with calling subscriber's profile in step 70032. If scheduling of calling subscriber's profile indication, console just uses ' Sched1 ' as Console Find Me (console the is looked for me) routine of parameter execution graph 70B and 70C in step 69304. If user's profile is not indicated scheduling, console just uses ' First ' as the Console Find Me routine of parameter execution graph 70B and 70C in step 69306. Console Find Me routine will further discuss in detail in conjunction with Figure 70 B and 70C hereinafter.

If calling subscriber's request stays voice mail message, console is just carried out Console Xfer to Voice/Fax Guest (console is transferred to speech/fax guest) routine-this routine in step 70040 and will be explained in conjunction with Figure 70 E hereinafter. If the calling subscriber asks to send fax, console is just carried out Console Xfer to Voice/Fax Guest w/or w/out Annotation (console be transferred to speech/fax guest-with or without note) routine-this routine in step 70042 and will be explained in conjunction with Figure 70 F hereinafter. Carry out after this routine, console turns back to guest's menu in step 70030. If the calling subscriber asks to send paging, console is just carried out Console Send Page (console transmission paging) routine-this routine in step 70040 and will be explained in conjunction with Figure 70 G hereinafter. Carried out after

step

70040,70042 or 70044 any routine, console turns back to guest's menu in step 70030.

If the calling subscriber provides password, console is just carried out Console Validate Passcode (console affirmation password) routine-this routine in step 70046 and will be explained in conjunction with Figure 70 K hereinafter. If console detects the fax tones on the incoming call, console is just carried out Console Fax Tone Detected routine-this routine in step 70048 and will be explained in conjunction with Figure 70 S hereinafter.

Figure 70 B and 70C represent Console Find Me (console is looked for me) routine. As shown in step 70060, Console Find Me routine adopts single parameter Term_Slot, and this parameter is arranged by the calling subscriber, is used for electing at course of action for subsequent use by console. If Term_Slot is set to " Find Me ", show that console will determine with default method user's current number. This value for example can be alternative or default process arranges. If user's profile comprises the scheduling sign, console is just carried out Console Find Me routine with the Sched1 parameter, shown in step 70062. If do not comprise, console is just carried out Find Me routine with first telephone number in user's the list of numbers, shown in step 70061.

If Term_Slot is set to " voice mail ", console is just play message to the calling subscriber, point out that the user asks the calling subscriber to stay voice mail message, in Console Xfer to Voice/Fax Guest Voice (console the is transferred to speech/fax guest speech) routine shown in the step 70074 execution graph 70E. If unsuccessful, routine is just returned, in this case, just play one section indication status of calling person should be later on again call attempt message, then disconnect the calling subscriber in step 70075.

If Term_Slot is set to " pager ", console is just play message to the calling subscriber, points out that the user asks the calling subscriber to stay the request of calling user. Then console is carried out Console Send Page routine-this routine and is hereinafter explained in connection with Figure 70 G. If unsuccessful, routine is just returned, in this case, just play one section indication status of calling person should be later on again call attempt message, then disconnect the calling subscriber in step 70066.

If Term_Slot be set to any POTS value (such as Sched1, Sched2, first, second or the 3rd), this expression user stipulated and will send incoming call with the standard telephone system that console is crossed in instruction will use particular schedule or selected telephone number. In step 70070, console is carried out the digital record that Console Record Name (console record name) routine obtains calling subscriber's sign. Console Record Name routine hereinafter explains in connection with Figure 70 H. Console is play suitable message (for example: play when attempting first " please keep, meanwhile I attempt to arrive you ", play " I am still attempting to arrive you, please continue to keep " during subsequently trial) in step 70073 and 70075 for the calling subscriber

Answer if call out by a people, console is just carried out Console Connect Call (console connects calling) routine-hereinafter in connection with Figure 70 D this routine is discussed in step 70072. Answer if call out the machine that is answered, console just checks in step 70090 whether the user asked console to be turned to next number for subsequent use when running into answering machine. If not, console just connects in step 70094 to be called out. If user selection is crossed upset, console just selects next number to call out, and again carries out Console Find Me routine with the new number of selecting, shown in step 70081,70082 and 70083.

If called line be busy does not perhaps have selective number remaining, console is just in the Console Alternate of step 70074 execution graph 70I Routing routine.

Figure 70 D represents Console Connect Call (console connects calling) routine. If the user did not ask call visor, console just arrives the user in step 70100 with call connection. If user selection is crossed call visor, console is just play a segment information message in step 70104 to the user, identifies the calling subscriber by name with by ANI (available words). If user selection call accepted, console just stop calling subscriber's maintenance in step 70106, play a segment table in step 70108 and show the message that calling is connecting, and connect in step 70110. If the user refuses call accepted, console just stops calling subscriber's maintenance in step 70114, plays a segment table in step 70118 to the calling party and shows the record that can't arrive the user, and point out alternatively the calling subscriber to stay voice mail message. If there is not mailbox to use, console is just play one section diagnostic message in step 70119, and disconnects the calling subscriber in step 70120. If there is mailbox to use, the energy receipt message, console is just in the Console Xfer of step 70128 execution graph 70E to Voice/Fax Guest Voice routine. Carry out after this routine, console is play the message of asking the calling subscriber to call out again later on regard to 70119, then disconnects in step 70120.

Figure 70 S represents Console Fax Tone Detected (detecting the console fax tones) routine. In step 70130, console is attempted to shake hands with VFP. If shake hands successfully, console just connects in step 70132 to be called out. If unsuccessful, console just disconnects the calling subscriber in step 69132, then withdraws from.

Figure 70 E represents Console Xfer to Voice/Fax Guest VOice (console is transferred to speech/fax guest speech) routine, and this routine is connected to VFP to stay voice mail message with the calling subscriber. Console checks in step 70142 in step 70140 broadcast state message whether user's mailbox is full. If mailbox is full, console is just play diagnostic message in step 70144, then returns. If mailbox is discontented, console is just attempted to shake hands with VFP. If shake hands successfully, console just connects in step 70146 to be called out. If unsuccessful, console is just play error messages in step 69148, then returns.

Figure 70 F represents Console Xfer to Voice/Fax Guest w/or w/out Annotation (console be transferred to speech/fax guest-with or without explaining) routine, and it is connected to VFP to transmit fax with the calling subscriber. Console checks in step 70152 in 70150 broadcast state information whether user's mailbox is full. If mailbox is full, console is just play diagnostic message in step 70154, then returns. If mailbox less than, console is just attempted to shake hands with VFP. If shake hands successfully, console just connects in step 70156 to be called out. If unsuccessful, console is just play error messages and is returned in step 70148. The routine of Figure 70 E and 70F is similar, and just institute's request service of VFP is different with the content of the error messages of playing to the calling subscriber.

Figure 70 G represents Console Send Page (console transmission paging) routine, and it starts to the calling of user's paging service. In step 70160, the telephone number that should provide to interviewed pager is provided console prompting calling subscriber. In step 70162, console please the calling subscriber keep when paging is sent out to calling subscriber's broadcast state record. If paging sends successfully, console is just play message that the expression paging sent and is disconnected calling in step 70165 in step 70164. If the calling to paging service is unsuccessful, console is just play the message of expression paging failure and is returned in step 70166, makes console provide other selection to the calling subscriber.

Figure 70 H represents Console Record Name (console record name) routine. Add the call visor of ANI if the user has specified by name or by name, this routine is used for record calling subscriber's name. Add the call visor of ANI if the user has specified by name or by name, console just provides a name step 70170 prompting calling subscriber, records this sound equipment and replys. If detect fax tones in recording process, console is just carried out Console Fax Tone Detected routine in step 70712; Otherwise routine is returned.

Figure 70 I represents Console Alternate Routing (selection of console alternate routing) routine. Console is carried out this routine and is come route to select to be routed to user's calling. Will be this call route selecting that is not delivered to its paging service if the user pointed out, console is just play the record that the expression calling subscriber can send paging in step 70180. If the calling subscriber selects to send paging, console is just carried out Console Send Page routine-preamble in step 70182 and in conjunction with Figure 70 G this routine was described. If paging is unsuccessful, console is just play the expression failure and is disconnected the calling subscriber in step 70184 in step 70185. Will be this call route selecting that is not delivered to voice mail if the user pointed out, console is just play the recording messages that the expression calling subscriber can stay voice mail in step 70183. If the calling subscriber selects to stay voice mail, console is just carried out Console Xfer to Voice/Fax Guest Voice routine-preamble in step 70186 and in conjunction with Figure 70 E this routine was described. If voice mail is unsuccessful, console is just play the expression failure and is disconnected the calling subscriber in step 70184 in step 70185.

If the user pointed out " guest's option ", console is just in the Console Alternate of step 69190 execution graph 70J Routing Guest Option routine; Otherwise console is just play a diagnostic message and is disconnected the calling subscriber in step 70194 in step 70192.

Figure 70 J represents Console Alternate Routing Guest Option (the console alternate routing is selected guest's option) routine. This routine allows the guest to select to stay voice mail in the inaccessible situation of user and still sends paging. Console provides the calling subscriber an available Route Selection options menu in step 70200, is to stay voice mail or send paging herein. If the calling subscriber asks to send voice mail, console is just in the Console xfer of step 70202 execution graph 70E to Voice/Fax Guest Voice routine. If it is a unsuccessful event that the return code that routine is returned shows, console fails to send the message of voice mail with regard to playing pre-recorded expression, points out whether transfer to send paging step 70204 prompting calling subscriber. If the prompting request of the prompting of calling subscriber's response of step 70200 or step 70204 sends paging, console is just in the Console Send of step 70206 execution graph 70G Page routine. If Console Send Page routine is returned (expression fails to send paging), perhaps the calling subscriber refuses the prompting of the transmission paging of response of step 70204, and console is just play a diagnostic message and disconnected the calling subscriber in step 70209 in step 70208.

Figure 70 K represents Console Validate Passcode Entry (console confirm password input) routine, and console is with its password that comes authentication of users to provide. In step 70220, prompting the calling subscriber enter password. In step 70224, the mouth that the console inspection provides whether with specific user's password match. If coupling, console are just in step 70226 execution Console User Call routine-hereinafter in connection with Figure 70 L this routine is described. Console allows twice trial to enter password. In step 70228, check whether this provides the failed trial of password for the second time. If attempt for the second time, console just notifies calling subscriber's password invalid in step 70232, proposes to connect this calling subscriber to customer service. If the calling subscriber selects not to be connected to customer service, just disconnect the calling subscriber in step 70234. If unsuccessfully attempt for the first time, console just provides effective password and turns back to step 70224 at step 70230 prompting user.

Figure 70 L represents Console User Call (console user calling) routine. In step 70240, console checks whether subscriber mailbox is full. If so, console is just play alert message in step 70242 to the user. No matter whether mailbox is full, and console is all play a status message in step 70244 for the user, the number of voice mail message and fax in the notice subscriber mailbox. In step 70246, console provides an options menu to the user. In the example shown, clauses and subclauses ' 1 ' are corresponding to the request that sends or retrieve mail; ' 2 ' request corresponding to access calling; ' 3 ' corresponding to the request of withdrawing from. If user selection sends or the option of retrieval mail, console is just play one in step 70248 and is kept message, then the Console Xfer to VOice/Fax Subscriber Send/Retrieve routine of execution graph 70M. After this routine was finished, console turned back to again step 70246. If this user selection is connected the option of a calling, console execution Console Outbound Calling routine-hereinafter in connection with Figure 70 N this routine is described. If user selection Exit is Programming (setting quits a program) option, console just disconnects calling.

Figure 70 M represents Console Xfer to Voice/Fax Subscriber Send/Receive (console is transferred to speech/fax user sending/receiving) routine, it connect the user to VFP to send and to retrieve voice mail message. Console is attempted to shake hands with VFP. If shake hands successfully, console just connects in step 70250 to be called out. If unsuccessful, console is just play error messages in step 70252, then withdraws from.

Figure 70 N represents Console Outbound Calling (console is to outcall) routine, and the user can be with its access to outcall. In step 70260, console checks whether the user is configured to access international call. If so, console is just at step 70262 gating international call key, in order to can carry out non-domestic call. The user is prompted to input telephone number in step 70264. Console connects the user in step 70268 and arrives to outcall.

Figure 70 O represents Console Validate Guest Entry (console checking guest input) routine. This routine is used for determining that by console the guest uses the trial of VFP guest's facility whether effective. Console checks that in step 70270 guest inputs an available selection on the menu that whether is suitable for. If not, just do not accept input, console is kept and menu identical shown in the step 70272. If guest's input is a suitable menu option, console just returns an effective status in step 70274.

Figure 70 P represents Console Validate Guest Entry (console checking guest input) routine. This routine be used for to confirm that by console the guest uses the attempting of customer service of VFP. Console checks that in step 70280 guest inputs an available selection on the menu that whether is suitable for. If not, just do not accept input, console is kept and menu identical shown in the step 70282. If guest's input is a suitable menu option, console just returns an effective status in step 70284.

Figure 70 Q represents Console Validate Completion (the console checking is finished) routine. This routine is used for confirming the validity the input of telephone number by console. In step 70292, console checks whether the user is provided with domestic terms sign. If no, console is play the disabled diagnostic message of expression domestic call in step 70294, returns with a sign that the number that is provided is invalid in step 70310. Whether console has inputted 10 item codes step 70296 inspection, whether provides effective MPA-Nxx number step 70298 inspection. If the number that provides is not 10 MPA-Nxx number, console is just play diagnostic message in step 70302, returns with a sign that the number that is provided is invalid in step 70310. Console checks in step 70304 whether NADP blocks effective to this user, checks in step 70306 whether 976 obstructions are effective to this user. If wherein whichever is effective, console is just play the diagnostic message that expression gets clogged to the calling of interviewed number in step 70308, and returns with a sign that the number that is provided is invalid in step 70310. Otherwise console just returns an expression effective state that Enters Number in step 70312.

Figure 70 R represents Console Validate International Completion (finish the console checking world) routine. In step 70322, console checks whether the user is configured to access international call. If not, console is just play a diagnostic message in step 70324, and returns with a sign that the number that is provided is invalid in step 70340. In step 70326, whether the telephone number that the console inspection is inputted starts with ' 011 ' of expression international number, and in step 70327, console checks whether semantically effective this number is as international dialing. If number is not that console is just play a diagnostic message in step 70328, and returns with a sign that the number that is provided is invalid in step 70340 with ' 011 ' beginning or semantic invalid.

In step 70330, console checks Cset (country's collection) blocks whether will block this particular number. If so, console is just play a diagnostic message in step 70332. If do not find error situation, console just returns an effective status in step 70334.

The realization of above-described improved direct line MCI product has following impact to the record keeping process:

The domestic record keeping type of direct line MCI: 15

The international record keeping type of direct line MCI: 115

Direct line MCI type of call:

Type of call is called out explanation

52 are transferred to customer service

138 users call out and finish

139 user managements are called out

The terminate number of programming of 140 guests

The 141 guests voice mail that terminates

The 142 guests account number (with default number, seeing below) that terminates

143 pager terminals

144 message diliveries

The 145 guests fax that terminates

The 146 guests inactive account that terminates

The 147 users speech/faxmail that terminates

178 operator's assisted users are called out and are finished

The terminate number of programming of the auxiliary guest of 179 operators

The auxiliary guest of the 336 operators auxiliary guest of the account number 337 operators auxiliary guest of the voice mail 338 operators auxiliary guest of the pager 339 operators fax 340 operator's assisted users speech/fax platform that terminates that terminates that terminates that terminates that terminates

For various direct line MCI type of calls provide following record keeping detail record and the SCAI message transmission of keeping accounts with OSR and being used for again starting:

Record keeping Class1 15 is not suitable for the BDR by VFP (type of call 144) generation; Because all these callings are all started at VFP, they all start, keep accounts with record keeping Class1 5 by domestic.

Guest's inactive account calling of can keeping accounts that terminates? no record keeping type: 15 or 115 type of calls: 146 termination numbers: blank account number account number^*+ 0000 originating number ANI termination method 02 final state 00 that starts^**Miscellaneous 1 account number miscellaneous 2 miscellaneous 3 only-OSR indicates that no OSR input code 08 SCAI OIR indicates that inapplicable SCAI BNOA sign is inapplicable

^*Account number refers to user's 800/8xx access number^**The suggestion final state; Other value may be more suitable

The guest disconnects-calls out to finish to keep accounts and calls out no record keeping type: 15 or 115

Type of call: 140 or 142 termination numbers: blank account number account number+0000 originating number start ANI termination method 01 final state 262 miscellaneous 1 account numbers miscellaneous 2 miscellaneous 3 only-that OSR indicates that no OSR input code 08 SCAI OIR indicates that inapplicable SCAI BNOA indicates is inapplicable

Does the guest disconnect-calls out and finishes (console) calling of can keeping accounts? no record keeping type: 15 or 115 type of calls: 179 or 336 termination numbers: blank account number account number+0000 originating number start ANI termination method 01 final state 262 miscellaneous 1 account numbers miscellaneous 2 miscellaneous 3 only-that OSR indicates that no OSR input code 08 SCAI OIR indicates that inapplicable SCAI BNOA indicates is inapplicable

The guest disconnects BDR can different type of calls, specifically looks to disconnect what point that appears in the call-flow.

The guest disconnects-voice mail finishes to keep accounts and calls out no record keeping type: 15 or 115 type of calls: 141 termination numbers: blank account number account number+0000 originating number start ANI termination method 01 final state 262 miscellaneous 1 account numbers miscellaneous 2 miscellaneous 3 only-that OSR indicates that no OSR input code 08 SCAI OIR indicates that inapplicable SCAI BNOA indicates is inapplicable

The guest disconnects-and voice mail finishes (console) and can keep accounts and call out no record keeping type: 15 or 115 type of calls: 337 termination numbers: blank account number account number+0000 originating number ANI termination method 01 final state 262 miscellaneous 1 account numbers miscellaneous 2 that start

Miscellaneous 3 only-0SR indicates that no OSR input code 08 SCAI OIR indicates that inapplicable SCAI BNOA sign is inapplicable

Does the guest disconnect-faxes and finishes the calling of can keeping accounts? no record keeping type: 15 or 115 type of calls: 145 termination numbers: blank account number account number+0000 originating number start ANI termination method 01 final state 262 miscellaneous 1 account numbers miscellaneous 2 miscellaneous 3 only-that OSR indicates that no OSR input code 08 SCAI OIR indicates that inapplicable SCAI BNOA indicates is inapplicable

The guest disconnects-faxes and finishes (console) and can keep accounts and call out no record keeping type: 15 or 115 type of calls: 339 termination numbers: blank account number account number+0000

Originating number start ANI termination method 01 final state 262 miscellaneous 1 account numbers miscellaneous 2 miscellaneous 3 only-OSR indicates that no OSR input code 08 SCAI OIR indicates that inapplicable SCAI BNOA sign is inapplicable

The guest disconnects-do pager finish the calling of can keeping accounts? no record keeping type: 15 or 115 type of calls: 140 or 142 termination numbers: blank account number account number+0000 originating number start ANI termination method 01 final state 262 miscellaneous 1 account numbers miscellaneous 2 miscellaneous 3 only-that OSR indicates that no OSR input code 08 SCAI OIR indicates that inapplicable SCAI BNOA indicates is inapplicable

The guest disconnects-calls out and finishes (console)

Can keep accounts and call out no record keeping type: 15 or 115 type of calls: 179 or 336 termination numbers: blank account number account number+0000 originating number start ANI termination method 01 final state 262 miscellaneous 1 account numbers miscellaneous 2 miscellaneous 3 only-that OSR indicates that no OSR input code 08 SCAI OIR indicates that inapplicable SCAI BNOA indicates is inapplicable

Guest's fax-mailbox calling of completely can keeping accounts that terminates? no record keeping type: 15 or 115 type of calls: 145 termination numbers: fax Route Selection number account number account number+0000 originating number start ANI termination method 03 final state 257 miscellaneous 1 account numbers miscellaneous 2 miscellaneous 3 only-OSR indicates no OSR input code 08

SCAI OIR indicates no SCAI BNOA sign 7C

Guest's fax-mailbox full (console) calling of can keeping accounts that terminates? no record keeping type: 15 or 115 type of calls: 339 termination numbers: fax Route Selection number account number account number+0000 originating number start ANI termination method 03 final state 257 miscellaneous 1 account numbers miscellaneous 2 miscellaneous 3 only-OSR indicates that no OSR input code 08 SCAI OIR indicates that no SCAI BNOA indicates 7C

The calling of can keeping accounts of guest's fax-standard that terminates? be-coupling/combined entry type: 15 or 115 type of calls: 145 termination numbers: fax Route Selection number account number account number+0000 originating number ANI termination method 00 final state 257 that starts

Miscellaneous 1 account number miscellaneous 2 miscellaneous 3 only-OSR indicates that no OSR input code 90 SCAI OIR indicate no SCAI BNOA sign 7C

Guest's fax-standard (console) _ calling of can keeping accounts that terminates? be-coupling/combined entry type: 15 or 115 type of calls: 339 termination numbers: fax Route Selection number account number account number+0000 originating number start ANI termination method 00 final state 257 miscellaneous 1 account numbers miscellaneous 2 miscellaneous 3 only-OSR indicates that no OSR input code 90 SCAI OIR indicate that no SCAI BNOA indicates 7C

Guest's voice mail calling of can keeping accounts that terminates? be-coupling/combined entry type: 15 or 115 type of calls: 141

The termination number: voice mail Route Selection number account number account number+0000 originating number start ANI termination method 00 final state 257 miscellaneous 1 account numbers miscellaneous 2 miscellaneous 3 only-OSR indicates that no OSR input code 90 SCAI OIR indicate that no SCAI BNOA indicates 7C

Guest's voice mail (console) calling of can keeping accounts that terminates? be-coupling/combined entry type: 15 or 115 type of calls: 337 termination numbers: voice mail Route Selection number account number account number+0000 originating number start ANI termination method 00 final state 257 miscellaneous 1 account numbers miscellaneous 2 miscellaneous 3 only-OSR indicates that no OSR input code 90 SCAI OIR indicate that no SCAI BNOA indicates 7C

Guest's close message calling of can keeping accounts that terminates? no record keeping type: 15 or 115 type of calls: 140 or 142 termination numbers: blank account number account number+0000 originating number start ANI termination method 02 final state 00 miscellaneous 1 account number miscellaneous 2 miscellaneous 3 only-that OSR indicates that no OSR input code 08 SCAI OIR indicates that inapplicable SCAI BNOA indicates is inapplicable

Guest's close message (console) calling of can keeping accounts that terminates? no record keeping type: 15 or 115 type of calls: 179 or 336 termination numbers: blank account number account number+0000 originating number start ANI termination method 02 final state 00 miscellaneous 1 account number miscellaneous 2 miscellaneous 3 only-OSR indicates no

OSR input code 08 SCAI OIR indicates that inapplicable SCAI BNOA sign is inapplicable

Guest's close message-voice mail fault calling of can keeping accounts of shaking hands that terminates? no record keeping type: 15 or 115 type of calls: 141 termination numbers: blank account number account number+0000 originating number start ANI termination method 02 final state 00 miscellaneous 1 account number miscellaneous 2 miscellaneous 3 only-that OSR indicates that no OSR input code 08 SCAI OIR indicates that inapplicable SCAI BNOA indicates is inapplicable

Guest's close message-voice mail fault (console) calling of can keeping accounts of shaking hands that terminates? no record keeping type: 15 or 115 type of calls: 337 termination numbers: blank account number account number+0000 originating number ANI termination method 02 that starts

Final state 00 miscellaneous 1 account number miscellaneous 2 miscellaneous 3 only-OSR indicates that no OSR input code 08 SCAI OIR indicates that inapplicable SCAI BNOA sign is inapplicable

Guest's close message-facsimile signal exchange trouble calling of can keeping accounts that terminates? no record keeping type: 15 or 115 type of calls: 145 termination numbers: blank account number account number+0000 originating number start ANI termination method 02 final state 00 miscellaneous 1 account number miscellaneous 2 miscellaneous 3 only-that OSR indicates that no OSR input code 08 SCAI OIR indicates that inapplicable SCAI BNOA indicates is inapplicable

Guest's close message-fax fault (console) calling of can keeping accounts of shaking hands that terminates? no

Record keeping type: 15 or 115 type of calls: 339 termination numbers: blank account number account number+0000 originating number start ANI termination method 02 final state 00 miscellaneous 1 account number miscellaneous 2 miscellaneous 3 only-that OSR indicates that no OSR input code 08 SCAI OIR indicates that inapplicable SCAI BNOA indicates is inapplicable

Guest's account number calling of can keeping accounts that terminates? be-coupling/combined entry type: 15 or 115 type of calls: 142 termination numbers: account number account number account number+0000 originating number start ANI termination method 00 final state 257 miscellaneous 1 account numbers miscellaneous 2 miscellaneous 3 only-OSR indicates that no OSR input code 90 SCAI OIR indicate that no SCAI BNOA indicates 7C

Guest's account number (console) calling of can keeping accounts that terminates? be-coupling/combined entry type: 15 or 115 type of calls: 336 termination numbers: account number account number account number+0000 originating number start ANI termination method 00 final state 257 miscellaneous 1 account numbers miscellaneous 2 miscellaneous 3 only-0SR indicates that no OSR input code 90 SCAI OIR indicate that no SCAI BNOA indicates 7C

Guest's programming number calling of can keeping accounts that terminates? be-coupling/combined entry type: 15 or 115 type of calls: 140 termination numbers: programming number account number account number+0000 originating number start ANI termination method 00 final state 257 miscellaneous 1 account numbers miscellaneous 2 miscellaneous 3 only-OSR indicates no

OSR input code 90 SCAI OIR indicate no SCAI BNOA sign 7C

Guest's programming number (console) calling of can keeping accounts that terminates? be-coupling/combined entry type: 15 or 115 type of calls: 179 termination numbers: programming number account number account number+0000 originating number start ANI termination method 00 final state 257 miscellaneous 1 account numbers miscellaneous 2 miscellaneous 3 only-OSR indicates that no OSR input code 90 SCAI OIR indicate that no SCAI BNOA indicates 7C

Is the guest transferred to operator's calling of can keeping accounts? no record keeping type: 15 or 115 type of calls: 140 or 142 termination numbers: transmission route number account number account number+0000 originating number ANI termination method 03 final state 257 that starts

Miscellaneous 1 account number miscellaneous 2 miscellaneous 3 only-0SR indicates that no OSR input code 08 SCAI OIR indicates no SCAI BNOA sign 7C

Guest's pager calling of can keeping accounts that terminates? be-BDR record keeping type only: 15 or 115 type of calls: 143 termination numbers: pager routing number account number account number+0000 originating number start 257 miscellaneous 1 account number miscellaneous 2 miscellaneous 3 ans backs of ANI termination method 00 final state only-that OSR indicates that no OSR input code 08 SCAI OIR indicates that inapplicable SCAI BNOA indicates is inapplicable

Guest's pager (console) calling of can keeping accounts that terminates? be-BDR record keeping type only: 15 or 115 type of calls: 338 termination numbers: pager routing number account number account number+0000

Originating number start 257 miscellaneous 1 account number miscellaneous 2 miscellaneous 3 ans backs of ANI termination method 00 final state only-OSR indicates that no OSR input code 08 SCAI OIR indicates that inapplicable SCAI BNOA sign is inapplicable

User's voice mail-message retrieval calling of can keeping accounts that terminates? be-coupling/combined entry type: 15 or 115 type of calls: 147 termination numbers: voice mail routing number account number account number+0000 originating number start ANI termination method 00 final state 257 miscellaneous 1 account numbers miscellaneous 2 miscellaneous 3 only-OSR indicates that no OSR input code 80 SCAI OIR sign is that SCAI BNOA indicates 7C

Guest's voice mail-message retrieval (console) calling of can keeping accounts that terminates? be-coupling/combined entry type: 15 or 115

Type of call: 340 termination numbers: voice mail routing number account number account number+0000 originating number start ANI termination method 00 final state 257 miscellaneous 1 account numbers miscellaneous 2 miscellaneous 3 only-OSR indicates that no OSR input code 80 SCAI OIR sign is that SCAI BNOA indicates 7C

User's voice mail-administer calls calling of can keeping accounts that terminates? no record keeping type: 15 or 115 type of calls: 147 termination numbers: voice mail routing number account number account number+0000 originating number start ANI termination method 03 final state 257 miscellaneous 1 account numbers miscellaneous 2 miscellaneous 3 only-OSR indicates that no OSR input code 08 SCAI OIR sign is that SCAI BNOA indicates 7C

Does the user call out and finishes the calling of can keeping accounts? be-coupling/combined entry type: 15 or 115 type of calls: 138 termination numbers: client's input/speed dialling ANI account number account number+0000 originating number start ANI termination method 00 final state 257 miscellaneous 1 account numbers miscellaneous 2 miscellaneous 3 only-OSR indicates that it is that SCAI BNOA indicates 7C that no OSR input code 80 SCAI OIR indicate

The user calls out and to finish-the console calling of can keeping accounts? be-coupling/combined entry type: 15 or 115 type of calls: 178 termination numbers: client's input/speed dialling ANI account number account number+0000 originating number start ANI termination method 00 final state 257 miscellaneous 1 account numbers miscellaneous 2 miscellaneous 3 only-OSR indicates no OSR input code 80

SCAI OIR sign is SCAI BNOA sign 7C

Is the calling of can keeping accounts called out in user management? no record keeping type: 15 or 115 type of calls: 139 termination numbers: blank account number account number+0000 originating number start miscellaneous 2 programmings of ANI termination method 08 final state 257 miscellaneous 1 account numbers information miscellaneous 3 only-that OSR indicates that no OSR input code 08 SCAI OIR indicates that inapplicable SCAI BNOA indicates is inapplicable

The user disconnects-programming or custom menu on without selecting to keep accounts calling? no record keeping type: 15 or 115 type of calls: 139 termination numbers: blank account number account number+0000 originating number information that ANI termination method 01 final state 262 miscellaneous 1 account numbers miscellaneous 2 are programmed that starts

Miscellaneous 3 only-OSR indicates that no OSR input code 08 SCAI OIR indicates that inapplicable SCAI BNOA sign is inapplicable

The user disconnects-programming or custom menu on without selecting (console) calling of can keeping accounts? no record keeping type: 15 or 115 type of calls: 340 termination numbers: blank account number account number+0000 originating number start miscellaneous 2 programmings of ANI termination method 01 final state 262 miscellaneous 1 account numbers information miscellaneous 3 only-that OSR indicates that no OSR input code 08 SCAI OIR indicates that inapplicable SCAI BNOA indicates is inapplicable

Does the user disconnect-calls out and finishes the calling of can keeping accounts? no record keeping type: 15 or 115 type of calls: 138 termination numbers: blank account number account number+0000 originating number ANI that starts

The information miscellaneous 3 of miscellaneous 2 programmings of termination method 01 final state 262 miscellaneous 1 account numbers only-OSR indicates that no OSR input code 08 SCAI OIR indicates that inapplicable SCAI BNOA sign is inapplicable

Does the user disconnect-calls out and finishes (console) calling of can keeping accounts? no record keeping type: 15 or 115 type of calls: 178 termination numbers: blank account number account number+0000 originating number start miscellaneous 2 programmings of ANI termination method 01 final state 262 miscellaneous 1 account numbers information miscellaneous 3 only-that OSR indicates that no OSR input code 08 SCAI OIR indicates that inapplicable SCAI BNOA indicates is inapplicable

Is the user transferred to the customer service calling of can keeping accounts? no record keeping type: 70 type of calls: 52

The termination number: transmission route select number account number account number+0000 originating number start ANI termination method 03 final state 257 miscellaneous 1 account numbers miscellaneous 2 miscellaneous 3 only-OSR indicates that no OSR input code 08 SCAI OIR sign N SCAI BNOA indicates 7C

Is the user transferred to operator's calling of can keeping accounts? no record keeping type: 15 or 115 type of calls: 138 termination numbers: transmission route select number account number account number+0000 originating number start ANI termination method 03 final state 257 miscellaneous 1 account numbers miscellaneous 2 miscellaneous 3 only-OSR indicates that no OSR input code 08 SCAI OIR sign N SCAI BNOA indicates 7C

Below be the new direct line MCI script for automatic answering equipment (ARU), it quotes the corresponding call flow diagram that they place occurs:

Call flow diagram	IV number	ARU pin this shop	Text
Call flow diagram	IV number	ARU pin this shop	Text	All	7330001	1	By 1.
	7330002	2	By 2.	All	7330001	1	By 1.
	7330002	2	By 2.		7330003	3	By 3.
	7330004	4	By 4.		7330003	3	By 3.
	7330004	4	By 4.		7330005	5	By 5.
	7330006	6	By 6.		7330005	5	By 5.
	7330006	6	By 6.		7330007	7	By 7.
	7330008	8	By 8.		7330007	7	By 7.
	7330008	8	By 8.		7330009	9	By 9.
	7330010	10	By 0.		7330009	9	By 9.
	7330010	10	By 0.		7330011	11	Press *.
	7330012	12	Press #.		7330011	11	Press *.
	7330012	12	Press #.	1	7330101	101	Sorry, this moment call not accepted.
2	7330201	201	Welcome direct line MCI!	1	7330101	101	Sorry, this moment call not accepted.
2	7330201	201	Welcome direct line MCI!	3	7330301	301	To speak with you
	7330302	302	Stay voice mail message	3	7330301	301	To speak with you
	7330302	302	Stay voice mail message		7330303	303	Send a fax
	7330304	304	Send out paging		7330303	303	Send a fax
	7330304	304	Send out paging		7330306	306	Please transmitting you at me keeps during voice mail.
	7330307	307	Sorry, the mailbox of your correspondent is full.		7330306	306	Please transmitting you at me keeps during voice mail.
	7330307	307	Sorry, the mailbox of your correspondent is full.		7330308	308	Please keep sending fax.
4	7330401	401	You stay voice mail message your correspondent request.		7330308	308	Please keep sending fax.
4	7330401	401	You stay voice mail message your correspondent request.		7330403	403	You send paging your correspondent request.
	7330404	404	Please during attempting to arrive you, I keep.		7330403	403	You send paging your correspondent request.
	7330404	404	Please during attempting to arrive you, I keep.		7330405	405	I am still attempting to arrive you, please keep.
	7330406	406	This moment, I can't arrive you.		7330405	405	I am still attempting to arrive you, please keep.
	7330406	406	This moment, I can't arrive you.	6	7330408	408	Could you tell me your name.
	7330409	409	Please transmitting you at me keeps during the operator.	6	7330408	408	Could you tell me your name.

7	7330701	701	You have from ... calling
7	7330701	701	You have from ... calling		7330702	702	{…##...##1},
	7330703	703	A undefined position.		7330702	702	{…##...##1},
	7330703	703	A undefined position.		7330704	704	An international location.
8	7330801	801	Want call accepted		7330704	704	An international location.
8	7330801	801	Want call accepted		7330802	802	Send your calling subscriber to voice mail
	7330803	803	Allow your calling subscriber try again later on		7330802	802	Send your calling subscriber to voice mail
	7330803	803	Allow your calling subscriber try again later on		7330805	805	Your calling subscriber will be required to stay voice mail.
	7330806	806	Again examination after your calling subscriber will be required.		7330805	805
	7330806	806			7330807	807	Sorry, your calling subscriber disconnects.
	7330809	809	Sorry, please be after you again call attempt.		7330807	807	Sorry, your calling subscriber disconnects.
	7330809	809	Sorry, please be after you again call attempt.	9	7330901	901	Sorry, this moment, I can't accessed voice mail.
	7330902	902	Sorry, this moment, I can't access faxmail.	9	7330901	901	Sorry, this moment, I can't accessed voice mail.
	7330902	902	Sorry, this moment, I can't access faxmail.	10	7331001	1001	Please input your ans back, with the # sign-off.
	7331002	1002	To be sent out	10	7331001	1001	Please input your ans back, with the # sign-off.
	7331002	1002	To be sent out		7331003	1003	Re-enter your ans back
	7331004	1004	Continue		7331003	1003	Re-enter your ans back
	7331004	1004	Continue		7331006	1006	Do not receive input.
	7331007	1007	Thanks, your paging sends.		7331006	1006	Do not receive input.
	7331007	1007	Thanks, your paging sends.		7331008	1008	Sorry, I can't finish your paging.
	7331101	1 101	I can't arrive you.		7331008	1008	Sorry, I can't finish your paging.
	7331101	1 101	I can't arrive you.	11	7331102	1102	Please keep sending paging or later on again call attempt.
12	7331207	1207	Send paging please by 1; Perhaps please be after you again call attempt.	11	7331102	1102	Please keep sending paging or later on again call attempt.
12	7331207	1207		13	7331301	1301	The Custom House Welcome to Custom House user program arranges 1
	7331302	1302	Your mailbox is full. Please delete the message of preservation.	13	7331301	1301
	7331302	1302			7331303	1303	You have
	7331304	1304	New voice mail and		7331303	1303	You have
	7331304	1304	New voice mail and		7331305	1305	New Fax Messaging.
	7331306	1306	Nothing		7331305	1305	New Fax Messaging.

	7331307	1307	Change your call route selecting
	7331307	1307	Change your call route selecting		7331308	1308	Send or retrieve mail
	7331309	1309	Want access calling		7331308	1308	Send or retrieve mail
	7331309	1309	Want access calling		7331310	1310	For accounts maintenance
	7331311	1311	To arrive customer service from any menu		7331310	1310	For accounts maintenance
	7331311	1311	To arrive customer service from any menu		7331313	1313	Please keep retrieving your speech and Fax Messaging.
	7331314	1314	Domestic call will be inputted area code and number.		7331313	1313	Please keep retrieving your speech and Fax Messaging.
	7331314	1314	Domestic call will be inputted area code and number.		7331315	1315	International call will input 011 and number.
	7331316	1316	Please input Subscriber Number or dial the number soon, finish with #.		7331315	1315	International call will input 011 and number.
	7331316	1316			7331317	1317	If want the operator to help
14	7331401	1401	Sorry, this moment, I can't access your speech/fax mailbox.		7331317	1317	If want the operator to help
14	7331401	1401	Sorry, this moment, I can't access your speech/fax mailbox.		7331403	1403	Sorry, this moment, I can't access your distribution list.
	7331404	1404	Sorry, this moment, I can't record your name.		7331403	1403	Sorry, this moment, I can't access your distribution list.
	7331404	1404	Sorry, this moment, I can't record your name.	15	7331501	1501	Change and look for my Route Selection
	7331502	1502	Change alternative Route Selection	15	7331501	1501	Change and look for my Route Selection
	7331502	1502	Change alternative Route Selection		7331503	1503	Changing final route selects
	7331504	1504	Cancel and turn back to previous menu		7331503	1503	Changing final route selects
	7331504	1504	Cancel and turn back to previous menu		7331507	1507	Substituting the current setting of Route Selection is
	7331508	1508	Voice mail.		7331507	1507	Substituting the current setting of Route Selection is
	7331508	1508	Voice mail.		7331509	1509	Pager.
	7331510	1510	You look for my sequence.		7331509	1509	Pager.
	7331510	1510	You look for my sequence.		7331512	1512	Your current being closed of alternative Route Selection.
	7331513	1513	Arrange to substitute and be routed to telephone number		7331512	1512	Your current being closed of alternative Route Selection.
	7331513	1513	Arrange to substitute and be routed to telephone number		7331514	1514	Arrange to substitute and be routed to voice mail
	7331515	1515	Arrange and substitute the pager that is routed to you		7331514	1514	Arrange to substitute and be routed to voice mail

7331516	1516	Arrange and substitute my sequence of looking for that is routed to you
7331516	1516			7331517	1517	Turn off alternative Route Selection
7331519	1519	Your final route is selected current being set to		7331517	1517	Turn off alternative Route Selection
7331519	1519	Your final route is selected current being set to		7331520	1520	Voice mail or Pager Option.
7331523	1523	Close message.		7331520	1520	Voice mail or Pager Option.
7331523	1523	Close message.		7331525	1525	Final route is set chooses voice mail or Pager Option
7331526	1526	The voice mail that final route is chosen you is set		7331525	1525	Final route is set chooses voice mail or Pager Option
7331526	1526	The voice mail that final route is chosen you is set		7331527	1527	The pager that final route is chosen you is set
7331528	1528	Final route is set chooses close message		7331527	1527	The pager that final route is chosen you is set
7331528	1528	Final route is set chooses close message	16	7331601	1601	Your my Route Selection of looking for is set to your dispatch list.
7331602	1602	Your my Route Selection of looking for is set to your 3-number sequence.	16	7331601	1601
7331602	1602			7331604	1604	Change your 3-number sequence
7331606	1606	Preserve and continue		7331604	1604	Change your 3-number sequence
7331606	1606	Preserve and continue	17	7331701	1701	Change your first number
7331702	1702	Change your second number	17	7331701	1701	Change your first number
7331702	1702	Change your second number		7331703	1703	Change your the 3rd number
7331704	1704	Check all three numbers		7331703	1703	Change your the 3rd number
7331704	1704	Check all three numbers		7331705	1705	Changing dispatch list is routed to
7331708	1708	Your first number is set to		7331705	1705	Changing dispatch list is routed to
7331708	1708	Your first number is set to		7331709	1709	Your second number is set to
7331710	1710	Your the 3rd number is set to		7331709	1709	Your second number is set to
7331710	1710	Your the 3rd number is set to		7331711	1711	Your second number be current not to have programming.
7331712	1712	Your the 3rd number be current not to have programming.		7331711	1711	Your second number be current not to have programming.

	7331713	1713	You not yet have dispatch list to set up this moment. Please with customer service contact.
	7331713	1713		18	7331801	1801	Create and upgrade your tabulation
	7331802	1802	Record your greeting or mailbox	18	7331801	1801	Create and upgrade your tabulation
	7331802	1802	Record your greeting or mailbox		7331803	1803	Activate or the deexcitation feature
	7331806	1806	For broadcast lists		7331803	1803	Activate or the deexcitation feature
	7331806	1806	For broadcast lists		7331807	1807	For fast dialing
	7331808	1808	Please keep upgrading broadcast lists.		7331807	1807	For fast dialing
	7331808	1808	Please keep upgrading broadcast lists.		7331809	1809	For your personal greeting
	7331810	1810	For your name		7331809	1809	For your personal greeting
	7331810	1810	For your name		7331811	1811	Please keep recording your name.
	7331812	1812	Your current greeting is		7331811	1811	Please keep recording your name.
	7331812	1812	Your current greeting is	19	7331901	1901	Change fast dialing
	7331911	1911	Fast dialing	19	7331901	1901	Change fast dialing
	7331911	1911	Fast dialing		7331912	1912	Be configured to
	7331913	1913	Current not by programming.		7331912	1912	Be configured to
	7331913	1913	Current not by programming.		7331914	1914	Record new greeting
	7331915	1915	To the employing system greet		7331914	1914	Record new greeting
	7331915	1915	To the employing system greet		7331916	1916	Begin record behind the sound equipment.
	7331917	1917	Check your greeting		7331916	1916	Begin record behind the sound equipment.
	7331917	1917	Check your greeting		7331918	1918	To again record your greeting
	7331921	1921	Your calling subscriber will hear system's greeting now.		7331918	1918	To again record your greeting
	7331921	1921	Your calling subscriber will hear system's greeting now.		7331922	1922	Your new greeting is preserved.
20	7334000	4000	Calling subscriber's shielding is set		7331922	1922	Your new greeting is preserved.
20	7334000	4000	Calling subscriber's shielding is set		7334001	4001	Activate or your pager of deexcitation
	7334002	4002	Pager notifications is set		7334001	4001	Activate or your pager of deexcitation
	7334002	4002	Pager notifications is set		7334003	4003	Activate or your account of deexcitation
	7334005	4005	Calling subscriber's shielding is configured to		7334003	4003	Activate or your account of deexcitation
	7334005	4005	Calling subscriber's shielding is configured to		7334006	4006	The calling subscriber shields current closing.
	7334007	4007	Number only.		7334006	4006	The calling subscriber shields current closing.

7334008	4008	Name only.
7334008	4008	Name only.		7334009	4009	Name and number.
7334010	4010	Calling subscriber's shielding to be set to only number		7334009	4009	Name and number.
7334010	4010	Calling subscriber's shielding to be set to only number		7334011	4011	Calling subscriber's shielding to be set to only name
7334012	4012	Calling subscriber's shielding to be set to name and number		7334011	4011	Calling subscriber's shielding to be set to only name
7334012	4012	Calling subscriber's shielding to be set to name and number		7334013	4013	Close calling subscriber's shielding
7334015	4015	Your calling subscriber will be endowed your selection of paging.		7334013	4013	Close calling subscriber's shielding
7334015	4015			7334016	4016	Your calling subscriber will not be endowed your selection of paging.
7334017	4017	Your account activates.		7334016	4016
7334017	4017	Your account activates.		7334018	4018	Your account has cancelled activation.
7334019	4019	Your current paged reason		7334018	4018	Your account has cancelled activation.
7334019	4019	Your current paged reason		7334020	4020	New voice mail message.
7334021	4021	New Fax Messaging.		7334020	4020	New voice mail message.
7334021	4021	New Fax Messaging.		7334022	4022	New voice mail and Fax Messaging.
7334023	4023	Pager notifications is current to be closed.		7334022	4022	New voice mail and Fax Messaging.
7334023	4023	Pager notifications is current to be closed.		7334024	4024	Essential factor is voice mail message and paged
7334025	4025	Essential factor is Fax Messaging and paged		7334024	4024	Essential factor is voice mail message and paged
7334025	4025	Essential factor is Fax Messaging and paged		7334026	4026	Essential factor is speech and Fax Messaging and paged
7334027	4027	Close pager notifications		7334026	4026	Essential factor is speech and Fax Messaging and paged
7334027	4027	Close pager notifications	21	7334101	4101	National number-input area code and number.
7334102	4102	International number-input 011 and number.	21	7334101	4101	National number-input area code and number.
7334102	4102	International number-input 011 and number.		7334103	4103	Delete this number
7334105	4105	Re-enter number		7334103	4103	Delete this number
7334105	4105	Re-enter number		7334107	4107	Your alternative Route Selection will be cancelled activation.
7334108	4108	Your alternative Route Selection will be changed to		7334107	4107
7334108	4108	Your alternative Route Selection will be changed to		7334111	4111	Please keep waiting for customer service.
7334112	4112	Your final route is selected and will be become		7334111	4111	Please keep waiting for customer service.
7334112	4112	Your final route is selected and will be become		7334116	4116	Your first number will become

	7334117	4117	Your second number is with deleted.
	7334117	4117	Your second number is with deleted.		7334118	4118	Your second number will become
	7334119	4119	Your the 3rd number is with deleted.		7334118	4118	Your second number will become
	7334119	4119	Your the 3rd number is with deleted.		7334120	4120	Your the 3rd number will become
	7334121	4121	This fast dialing is with deleted.		7334120	4120	Your the 3rd number will become
	7334121	4121	This fast dialing is with deleted.		7334122	4122	This fast dialing will become
	7334123	4123	Your calling subscriber's shielding will be closed.		7334122	4122	This fast dialing will become
	7334123	4123	Your calling subscriber's shielding will be closed.		7334124	4124	Your calling subscriber's shielding will become
	7334128	4128	Your pager notifications will be closed.		7334124	4124	Your calling subscriber's shielding will become
	7334128	4128	Your pager notifications will be closed.		7334129	4129	You with because of ... and it is paged.
22	7330309	309	This option is unavailable.		7334129	4129	You with because of ... and it is paged.
22	7330309	309	This option is unavailable.	23	7330102	102	This input is invalid.
	7330103	103	Please re-enter password.	23	7330102	102	This input is invalid.
	7330103	103	Please re-enter password.	24	7334401	4401	Sorry, domestic call is unavailable.
	7334403	4403	Sorry, the calling of this number is got clogged.	24	7334401	4401	Sorry, domestic call is unavailable.
	7334403	4403	Sorry, the calling of this number is got clogged.	25	7332501	2501	Sorry, international call is unavailable.
26	7332601	2601	Sorry, you cannot the programming national numbers.	25	7332501	2501	Sorry, international call is unavailable.
26	7332601	2601	Sorry, you cannot the programming national numbers.	27	7332701	2701	Sorry, you cannot the programming international numbers.

Below be the new direct line MCI script of using for console:

Call flow diagram	Console pin this shop	Text
Call flow diagram	Console pin this shop	Text	1	14160	The upper current call not accepted { courtesy are closed } of this account of Custom House Welcome to Custom House direct line MCI
	22008	A MCI operator! How do I help you to arrive your correspondent?	1	14160
	22008		22005	A MCI operator! If { calling subscriber is the account owner, presses User Prog}
2	22033	You stay voice mail your correspondent request; Please keep { invocation of procedure }	22005

	22034	You send paging { invocation of procedure } your correspondent request
	22034			22037	Please be after you again call attempt { courtesy are closed }
3	22031	Please during attempting to arrive your correspondent, I keep { invocation of procedure }		22037
3	22031			15848	A MCI operator! Please during attempting to arrive your correspondent, I keep { invocation of procedure }
	15844	I am still in the correspondent of attempting to arrive you; Please continue to keep { invocation of procedure }		15848
	15844			15849	A MCI operator! I am still in the correspondent of attempting to arrive you; Please continue to keep { invocation of procedure }
	33000	Obtain answering by YES, the line is busy by after BUSY, the ring of 4-5 sound without answering by NO, being used for the ANS MACH} of interrogation responder		15849
	33000		4	22036	I am MCI operator. You have the calling from NAME and/or ANI; Should you converse with the calling subscriber?
	15845	Sorry, this moment, I can't arrive your correspondent { invocation of procedure }	4	22036
	15845			22032	Thanks; Your calling connects { invocation of procedure }
5	7115	Please keep, treat that I transmit you to voice mail { invocation of procedure }		22032	Thanks; Your calling connects { invocation of procedure }
5	7115			22900	Sorry, the voice mail of your correspondent full { invocation of procedure }
	22104	Sorry, this moment, I can't accessed voice mail { invocation of procedure }		22900
	22104			22340	Please keep in order to send fax { invocation of procedure }

	22105	Sorry, this moment, I can't access faxmail { invocation of procedure }
	22105		6	15865	What ans back do you want to send?
	15866	A MCI operator! What ans back do you want to send?	6	15865	What ans back do you want to send?
	15866	A MCI operator! What ans back do you want to send?		22375	Please when sending, your paging keeps { invocation of procedure }
	15863	Your paging sends. Thanks! { disconnecting }		22375
	15863	Your paging sends. Thanks! { disconnecting }		15693	Sorry, I can't finish your paging { invocation of procedure }
	22035	May I ask name?		15693
	22035	May I ask name?	7	15860	Sorry, I can't arrive your correspondent this moment; Do you want to send out paging?
	22040	Do you want to send paging?	7	15860
	22040	Do you want to send paging?		15842	Sorry, I can't arrive your correspondent this moment; Please be after you again call attempt. { courtesy are closed }
8	22038	Sorry, I can't arrive your correspondent this moment; Your want to leave word sound mail or send out paging?		15842
8	22038		9	22003	Please enter password
	22102	Please repeat to enter password	9	22003	Please enter password
	22102	Please repeat to enter password		22017	Sorry, that is not effective password { customer service is provided or disconnect }
10	22901	Your mailbox is full; Please delete the message { invocation of procedure } that you preserve		22017
10	22901			22902	You have X new voice mail and Y new faxmail { invocation of procedure }
	22400	How do I help you?		22902
	22400	How do I help you?		22904	Please keep, wait for speech and Fax Messaging. { invocation of procedure }

11	22905	Sorry, I can't access your speech/fax mailbox { invocation of procedure }
11	22905			22906	What number do you wish to dial? { Enter Number or 1 fast dialing }
	22908	A MCI operator! What number do you wish to dial? { Enter Number or 1 fast dialing }		22906
	22908			22907	Thanks; Please when connecting your calling, keep { invocation of procedure }
13	15063	Sorry, domestic terminal unavailable { invocation of procedure }		22907
13	15063			15053	Sorry, this is not effective national number { invocation of procedure }
	15057	Sorry, to the calling of this number get clogged { invocation of procedure }		15053
	15057		14	15061	Sorry, international terminal unavailable { invocation of procedure }
	15051	Sorry, this is not effective international number { invocation of procedure }	14	15061
	15051			16001	{ processing non-domestic dial-up by GEN ASST }

Below describe the ARU impact in detail, and the impact of the ARU in the call flow diagram.

User's input

In general, in call-flow, when user/calling subscriber has the reader meeting, all to minimize as much as possible possible operating lag. The below is some examples:

During ' guest ' part of calling out, the user can input ' * ', and at this moment, NIDS audio server (NAS) just adopts a kind of interdigit timeout (inter-digit timeout) to begin to collect 6 password numerical digits.

During guest's menu is play, will produce immediately that response-what press is ' * ' key unless press a key, 6 passwords of NAS collection this moment.

During custom menu is play, will produce immediately response-in outside call menu unless press a key. Because domestic call number, international telephone number, fast dialing can both be inputted at this, so system allows the user to represent the end of the numeral of dialling by ' # '. ' # ' is regardless of being after single numeral input or all being accepted after string number is telephone number.

In call-flow the user can importer in or international number Anywhere, all must accept ' # ' key and indicate the digital end of dialling. This comprise to first, second or the 3rd look for my number, programming to POTS and fast dialing during.

In the possible situation, user's ' powerful dialing ' (power dial) ability be constructed in the call-flow. This means, if when having a plurality of keys to be pressed, just walk around script, arrive suitable menu.

Support a kind of cut-in method of the direct line MCI in the present embodiment: the 800/8xx number with PIN does not access. The default value in PIN territory is 0000 in the database.

Account number shielding (swindle) is confirmed

The direct line MCI that all are received calls out the affirmation that will be subjected to the account number shielding, and is unmarked for risk of fraud is arranged to verify this number. In category 5 types 0, search; The sign that checks is credit card (heat) sign. If this number is " closed ", the instant heating sign is set to ' Y ', and then application program should be called out as the off line account and be treated, but does not allow user's access program that option is set.

World's phone (World Phone)

The calling subscriber can interview direct line MCI platform by phone by the world. In preferred embodiment, these are called out with the pseudo-ANI in the originating number of SCAI message and arrive the direct line platform. This pseudo-ANI is related with special characteristic group A (FGA) circuit that starts calling expansion place, the world. In another embodiment, actual origin country information is forwarded to the direct line platform; Place 3 national code in the originating number territory.

In preferred embodiment, the direct line that world's phone starts is called out by following record keeping:

Start, arrive the calling of direct line platform with pseudo-ANI as the number of starting by world's phone, with record keeping Class1 5 by domestic record keeping. Originating number territory among the BDR is the pseudo-ANI of FGA.

In another embodiment, call out by following record keeping:

ARU and console performing a programme are identified the originating number territory and are contained and have plenty of pseudo-ANI or actual originated information. If actual national code originated information is provided, application program is option wherein with reference to its configuration file-world's phone puppet ANI just. This project that exists in the configuration file has been pointed out to call out to application program and how have been kept accounts.

If application program is found the pseudo-ANI of world's phone in its configuration file, just call out and press domestic record keeping with record keeping Class1 5. Call number territory among the BDR is set to the pseudo-ANI of this world's phone, and application program indication bridge joint switch becomes this same pseudo-ANI with its originating number.

If application program can not find the pseudo-ANI of world's phone in its configuration file, just to keep accounts by international with 5 pairs of callings of record keeping Class1, originating number information is retained in the switch record. The implanted 10 figure place word strings of BDR: ' 191 '+3 national code+' 0000 '.

Guest's call route selecting is stipulated with several method by direct line MCI user, and is as mentioned below:

According to the obstruction inspection of starting to guest's terminal, hereinafter narration.

Call route selecting

Provide the option of two definition call route selecting to the user: look for my sequence and scheduling sequence. Except the scheduling definition, the user can define call route selecting by DTMF.

The 3-number is looked for my sequence

If the user has selected to look for my sequence for its call route selecting, calling to elementary (first) programming number of user of application program launching. If someone answers, just the guest calling subscriber is connected with answer side. Call visor described below may be movable, in this case, answers Fang Zaiqi and is connected before energetically call accepted. If the line be busy at the first number place, the alternate routing of calling out the programming just be routed to the user selected-hereinafter description will be arranged. If can't detect answer within the configurable time, application program just starts one to the calling of secondary (second) programming number of user.

In the answer treatment at the second number place with the same to the call attempt of the first number, if do not answer the calling that just causes attempting to three grades of (the 3rd) programming numbers of user. Answer treatment mode at the 3rd number place is the same, does not just cause alternate routing to be selected if answer.

If any point in this calling sequence, programming does not arrange a terminal slot, and application program is just skipped this number in the sequence, advances to next number or alternate routing and selects.

To the international terminal of any programming, application program is searched the terminal national code in national code table. If direct dialing state that should country sign is set as ' Y ', ARU just calls out and deals with to Artificial Control platform (TTC=1e).

2 grades of scheduling sequences

If user selection scheduling sequence is as its call route selecting, application program just is used as the key word of retrieving schedule information in 800 conversion databases to Schedule 1 Trans and Schedule 2 Trans territories. From two scheduling conversions of user, with current date and time, determine the first and second scheduling numbers.

Start to call out to the first number, answer treatment is not dispatched number call try if just answer to second as looking for the same described in my sequence. Answer treatment mode at the second scheduling number place is the same, does not just cause alternate routing to be selected if answer.

Equally, if any point in the dispatch call sequence can not find termination number just to skip this position in the sequence, advance to next number or alternate routing and select.

User's scheduling arranges during the order input, is that the user can not upgrade by DTMF. When order was inputted, the user was required by date, week, (with 30 minutes increment) and time zone define its scheduling constantly.

Substitute Route Selection

This option can use by DTME, closes the expression of guest's menu for the user by stipulate specific Route Selection for the guest calling subscriber. By substituting Route Selection, the user can:

Route Selection calling subscriber allows the calling subscriber stay voice mail message to single telephone number, allow calling subscriber's paging it, the perhaps call route selecting of Route Selection calling subscriber by its programming (look for me or dispatch).

If being provided with alternative Route Selection, user program come route to select a telephone number, if do not have answer just to cause alternate routing to select processing at this number.

Alternate routing is selected

Alternate routing select to allow the user to define that any processing is attempted to arrive the user but the calling subscriber that can not get answering by DTMF. Alternate routing selects option to comprise guest's option of voice mail, pager, close message or voice mail or pager. If alternate routing is selected does not defaultly have a programming, then be to play close message.

Default route is selected

The user can stipulate how to process to provide the calling subscriber who does not respond after twice trial of guest's menu in the order input. Default route selects option to be: be transferred to operator (TTC=67)-wherein guest's menu is provided again, if telephone number-answer does not just cause alternate routing selection, voice mail or call route selecting (looking for I or scheduling). If default route is selected does not defaultly have a programming, then be that the operator is transmitted.

Call visor

The user can announce all guest calling subscribers by the Selection and call call visor. The call visor option only comprises name, only ANI, name add ANI in advance programming and noncall shielding. The user can pass through DTMF programming call visor.

When programming when only name or name add the shielding of ANI, will record calling subscriber's name. If the calling subscriber does not respond prompting, record not whatever, system with regard to default to only ANI shielding. When certain termination telephone number is received answer, with regard to playing and calling person's name and/or ANI, inquiry answer side is acceptance or refuses this calling. If call accepted just connects the calling subscriber. If calling subscriber shielding comprises that ANI shielding and originating number are national codes, just play script ' ... certain international location ' replacement ANI.

Be rejected if call out, perhaps do not receive replying of answer side, just require the calling subscriber to stay voice mail message, perhaps (if the user does not subscribe voice mail) plays close message.

Timeout parameter

Be that following terminal is pressed a second definition timeout value in direct line MCI database:

For this terminal point	Use this timeout value
For this terminal point	Use this timeout value	If if first look for I second look for I the 3rd look for me to dispatch 1 scheduling 2 substituting Route Selection-telephone number default route selection-telephone numbers	Elementary overtime secondary overtime three grades overtime elementary overtime secondary overtime substitute overtime default overtime

The default value of these timeout values is 25 seconds, but the user can revise them by customer service.

The call connection time

Finishing when calling out to the guest of the terminal point of programming, reduce as far as possible call connection and postpone.

Answer and detect

With regard to regard to the call attempt of oriented telephone number, be to detect poll sign (Status Flag, position 9) definition by machine to the processing of the detection of answering machine. If this sign is set to ' N ', the calling subscriber is connected to answering machine. If sign is set to ' Y ', next number or alternate routing that application program is routed in the calling sequence are selected.

It is as follows that the upper current answer of ISN detects performance: the reliability that NAS correctly detects the voice answer is 99%, and the reliability that correctly detects machine is 67%.

Any answer that is not particularly related in requiring for this detects response, and FAST-BUSY for example is by processing without the described mode of answer situation.

The number of programming is confirmed

The user can first, second, and third look for my number and alternative Route Selection Program that telephone number is set at it. Application program will be carried out following affirmation inspection before accepting the number of programming:

National number:

Check domestic end mark (PIN position 1), determine user's programming national number of having the right.

NPA with category 000, type 002 and programming inquires about international blocking data storehouse, and searching modes coupling is not the information of being blocked/adult's service number to determine this programming number.

Check that the switch host is to determine that terminal is the NADP number. If so, just using country's collection blocks. The pseudo-national code (PCC) of this programming number-associated is confirmed the country's collection that impinges upon in the direct line MCI characteristic records. If this PCC is blocked, just do not allow programming to arrive this number.

International number

Check international end mark (PIN position 2), determine user's programming international number of having the right.

From direct line MCI characteristic records retrieval country collection, the national code of this this programming of application verification is not blocked this country's collection.

The below's narration is to the obstruction inspection of programming guest terminal.

Call flow diagram represents to be transferred to the various situations of speech/fax platform (VFP). Transmission is to realize with the Route Selection number in the voice mail Route Selection number field of user logging.

For " shielding " some delay in the calling of the VFP expansion, called out before playing " please keep " script to the calling subscriber and be expanded. By overtime method between above-mentioned removal numeral, reduced again the calling extended delays. After starting calling and playing script, this applications wait is answered and is detected, at this moment, user's direct line MCI access number (800/8xx number) is outputed to VFP by pulse, then be ' * ', then be single mode numeral, the mode number is with ' # ' ending, and it represents to the type of process transmission to VFP. The mode sign is one of them numerical value described in the following table. For guarantee information is received by VFP and verifies, this applications wait is play two DTMF ' 00 ' tones from VFP, then connects the calling subscriber. The guest that mode sign transport-type 1 guest's voice mail 2 is explained with speech 3 guests that explain without speech, the 4 voiceband users/fax of faxing of faxing is retrieved 5 user lists and is safeguarded 6 subscriber mailbox name records

If that shakes hands attempts failure again, think that then it is failed that the VFP transmission is attempted. If between alternative, default or alternate routing selecting period, the guest is transferred to the failure of voice mail or faxmail, just require the calling subscriber later on again call attempt. If guest's transmission failure on guest's menu setecting just will provide menu again. If the user is transferred to speech or faxmail failure, will play a script to this failure of user notification, then the user is returned to Previous menu.

In the beginning of calling out, when detecting fax tones, occur without guest's facsimile transmission of explaining. The detection of fax tones is independent of the expression of welcome message, so the length of greeting is on the not impact of reliable detection of fax tones.

When user's calling party programming, if application program provides counting to voice mail new information, fax new information and whole mailbox message-feasible. This application is inquired about this information by the VFP_Trans business from VFP.

The user also can define the pager notifications whether it wants speech and fax new information by DTMF. The option of pager notifications is: the two notice and the N/A of voice mail notice, fax notice, voice mail and fax. The setting of pager notifications is stored in voice mail paging sign (PIN position 15) and the fax paging sign (PIN position 16).

Paging

The option of calling user is one of selection that provides on guest's menu. In addition, can according to user's programming substitute or alternate routing is selected to require the guest to send paging.

When sending paging, this application is asked ans back to the calling subscriber. User's user logging contains following information for the treatment of paging: pager access number-be used for starting the calling to pager company, and user's pager PIN, Pager type-it points to a configurable dial string that is used for the notice paging information. This dial string is provided for timeout value that awaiting acknowledgement detects, answer delay after detecting, to the number of the PIN numerical digit of DTMF and required any ending character-for example ' # '.

If the calling subscriber disconnects after the input ans back, paging is just finished and is kept accounts. The Pager type of supporting is as follows:

Pager type	Pager company pager dial string pager access number
Pager type	Pager company pager dial string pager access number	1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8	SkyTel/MTel A180T32R7D#ED# 6019609560 AirTouch A180T32R7D#ED# 6019609560 Mobile Media A180T32R7D#ED# 6019609560 AirSignal/McCaw A180T32R7D#ED# 6019609560 American Paging A180T32R7D#ED# 6019609560 Mobile Comm A180T136R6T18ET32 8009464646* MCI Page A180T136R7T18ET32 8006247243* MCI Word A180T136R7T18ET32 8006247243*

* 800 access numbers will be routed selection by the DAP-looparound that is positioned at the bridge joint switch.

User's energy gating/forbid representing as the pager of guest's menu option. When pager cut out, it did not occur at guest's menu, did not provide to the user that programming substitutes or alternate routing is selected yet. Guest's option of voice mail or pager is also arranged the selection from the alternate routing option program and is removed. Be set to pager if substitute Route Selection, and pager has cut out, called out just as not providing processed substituting. If alternate routing is selected to be set to pager, and pager has cut out, if then the calling subscriber has voice mail, the calling subscriber just is routed to voice mail, otherwise close message just occurs. These are to substitute the default process method of selecting with alternate routing. Pager ON/OFF sign (mode bit 3) is the place of storage pager gating/illegal state.

Except can gating/close pager, the user can also define the pager notifications option, described in voice mail/faxmail one joint of this explanation. VFP is that the notice of speech and fax new information is carried out paging, supports those Pager types of being supported by ISN. Pager ON/OFF sign state is on not impact of pager notifications; The user is required pager notifications is set to N/A, in order to receive the N/A of new information.

Outwards dial

The user can call out, and call-accounting is arrived its direct line MCI account. This option occurs at primary user's programming menu. Outwards call option comprises:

The speed dial terminal of domestic terminal-depend on domestic complement mark (mode bit 4), international terminal-depend on international complement mark (mode bit 5), programming-depend on speed dial complement mark (mode bit 6).

Finish for any requested world, application program is searched the terminal country code in the country code table. If direct dialing that should country country sign is set to ' Y ', ARU deals with to Artificial Control platform (TTC=9d) with regard to call transmission.

Before finishing calling for the user, to carry out following checking inspection:

National number

Domestic complement mark must be set to ' Y '

Check that the switch host is to determine that terminal point is the NADP number. If so, just be used in the country's collection that finds in the direct line AuthCode characteristic records and implement country's collection obstruction. If the user is from the international location incoming call, will be from the characteristic records of origin country and these two records of direct line MCI characteristic records retrieval country collection, application program will confirm this PCC to which country's collection is not blocked. In the characteristic records database, search the characteristic records of origin country as keyword with ' 191 '+3 national code+' 0000 '.

International number

International complement mark must be set to ' Y '

From direct line MCI characteristic records retrieval country collection, the national code of this programming of application program verification is not blocked this country's collection. If the world starts, will be from the characteristic records of origin country and these two records of direct line MCI characteristic records retrieval country collection, application program will confirm this destination country code to which country's collection is not blocked.

The below's narration is called out the obstruction inspection of finishing with the fast dialing of programming according to starting to the user.

Again start

The calling subscriber can finish to VFP or certain telephone number from calling and again start by pressing two seconds of ' # ' key. Whether switch is checked this calling and is allowed again to give orders or instructions, and if so, just the calling subscriber is transmitted back ISN.

Again the calling subscriber's who starts state is that the value from the Val Stat territory of the BDR of original call derives. Lower table definition the implication of the probable value in this territory and each value: the disposal of Val Stat value calling subscriber type original call can be started again? 200 users call out finish be 201 voiceband user mails be three grades of no 104 guests of secondary no 103 guests of elementary no 102 guests of no 101 guests of the inapplicable 100 guest's off lines of 202 telefax * substitute no 114 guests of the no 113 guest's pagers of the no 112 guest's voice mails of no 105 guest's shutdown systems fax no * do not use-currently access between the faxmail as broad as long in user's accessed voice mail and user; It will be indicated with a Val Stat 201.

In addition, make from the user who is accomplished to words person's mail/faxmail platform and can use # again to start. As the joint of keeping accounts is pointed, and this is to finish by the data that twice change implanted in switch record (OSR).

The user starts again

It is that Val Stat territory by initial calling identifies that the user starts again, and the user program menu is provided. The user who has been accomplished to speech/faxmail platform or telephone number is allowed to again start.

The console impact

Below each joint and call flow diagram describe the console impact in detail.

The ARU transmission

Console is because of the transmission of following reason reception from ARU. Processing to these transmission is pointed out in the console call flow diagram. TTC transmission reason text 1e guest calls out to finish and requires operator's ' guest calls out and requires the operator to help '

Help 64 under pager ans back prompting ' ans back of incorrect input pager '

Call out to finish and require operator's ' user calls out and requires the operator to help ' without input request or overtime ' transmission of asking on the main menu or overtime ' 9d user on 67 guest's menus for the third time

Help

Cut-in method

Referring to cut-in method one joint in the ARU impact.

Direct calling

Direct calling one joint referring in the ARU impact has following exception:

Default route is selected

Default route is selected not impact of console, unless it is transmitted to the operator by programming or default setting. In this case, calling will be used as new call treatment, and the guest is provided menu.

Voice mail/faxmail

Referring to voice mail/faxmail one joint in the ARU impact.

Paging

Referring to paging one joint in the ARU impact.

Outwards dial

Referring to outwards dialing a joint in the ARU impact.

Again start

Referring to the joint that again starts in the ARU impact.

The sign subordinate

The sign subordinate is as shown in the table:

Figure	Menu	Menu item	Subordinate
Figure	Menu	Menu item	Subordinate	3	Guest's menu	Stay voice mail message	The voice mail sign
Send fax	The facsimile terminal sign					Stay voice mail message	The voice mail sign
Send fax	The facsimile terminal sign	Send paging	Pager terminal sign A ND pager ON/OFF sign

		(password)	Program (following me) sign
		(password)	Program (following me) sign	13	User's main menu	Change call route selecting	Look for my sign A ND (the international end mark OR of domestic end mark OR voice mail sign OR pager terminal sign)
Send/the retrieval mail	Voice mail sign OR facsimile terminal sign					Change call route selecting
Send/the retrieval mail	Voice mail sign OR facsimile terminal sign	Access calling	The international complement mark OR of domestic complement mark OR speed dial complement mark
Management	Voice mail sign OR facsimile terminal sign OR speed dial programming sign OR greets record OR call visor programming sign OR pager terminal sign OR Avail programming sign	Access calling
Management		Access calling	Dial the number soon			The speed dial complement mark
National number	Domestic complement mark		Dial the number soon			The speed dial complement mark
National number	Domestic complement mark		International number		International complement mark
15	Change Route Selection		International number		International complement mark	Look for me Route Selection to substitute Route Selection	The international end mark OR of the domestic end mark OR domestic end mark OR of international end mark voice mail sign OR pager terminal sign
		Alternate routing is selected	Voice mail sign OR pager terminal sign			Look for me Route Selection to substitute Route Selection
		Alternate routing is selected	Voice mail sign OR pager terminal sign	Substitute Route Selection	POTS	The international end mark of domestic end mark OR

		Voice mail	The voice mail sign
		Voice mail	The voice mail sign	Pager	The pager terminal sign
		Look for me	The international end mark of domestic end mark OR	Pager	The pager terminal sign
		Look for me	The international end mark of domestic end mark OR	Alternate routing is selected	Guest's menu	Voice mail sign A ND pager terminal sign
	Voice mail	The voice mail sign			Guest's menu	Voice mail sign A ND pager terminal sign
	Voice mail	The voice mail sign	Pager		The pager terminal sign
	17	Change the 3-number sequence	Pager		The pager terminal sign	First number	The international end mark of domestic end mark OR
Second number			The international end mark of domestic end mark OR			First number	The international end mark of domestic end mark OR
Second number			The international end mark of domestic end mark OR	The 3rd number	The international end mark of domestic end mark OR
Change to the scheduling Route Selection			Dispatch 1 sign A ND scheduling, 2 signs	The 3rd number	The international end mark of domestic end mark OR
Change to the scheduling Route Selection			Dispatch 1 sign A ND scheduling, 2 signs	18	Management	Tabulation is safeguarded	Voice mail sign OR facsimile terminal sign OR speed dial programming sign
Record is greeted	Greet record mark OR voice mail sign OR facsimile terminal sign OR					Tabulation is safeguarded
Record is greeted		The activation/deactivation feature	Call visor programming sign OR pager terminal sign OR voice mail sign OR facsimile terminal sign OR available programs arranges sign
	Tabulation	The activation/deactivation feature				Broadcast lists	Voice mail sign OR facsimile terminal sign
		The speed dial tabulation	Speed dial programming sign			Broadcast lists	Voice mail sign OR facsimile terminal sign
		The speed dial tabulation	Speed dial programming sign		Greet	Welcome	Greet record mark

		Name	Voice mail sign OR facsimile terminal sign
		Name	Voice mail sign OR facsimile terminal sign	20	Feature activation	Call visor	Call visor programming sign
The activation/deactivation pager	The pager terminal sign					Call visor	Call visor programming sign
The activation/deactivation pager	The pager terminal sign	The pager notifications option	Pager terminal sign A ND (voice mail sign OR facsimile terminal sign)
Activation/deactivation account	Available programs arranges sign	The pager notifications option
Activation/deactivation account	Available programs arranges sign	Pager notifications	Voice mail only			The voice mail sign
Only fax	The facsimile terminal sign		Voice mail only			The voice mail sign
Only fax	The facsimile terminal sign		Voice mail and fax		Voice mail sign A ND facsimile terminal sign
21	Program		Voice mail and fax		Voice mail sign A ND facsimile terminal sign	National number	Domestic sign
		International number	International symbol			National number	Domestic sign

Block and check

This explanation does not comprise sign inspection, and it is discussed between country's collection, " adult's service " (976) and NANP and blocks. If required, be used for country's collection with default ANI characteristic records blocks.

∑ 976 blocks in the following manner to be realized:

NPA with category 000, type 002 and programming inquires about international blocking data storehouse, and searching modes coupling is not the information of being blocked/adult's service number with the number that guarantees programming. If the coupling of discovery does not just allow calling/programming.

(Inter-NANP) blocks in the following manner realization between ∑ NANP:

Check that the switch host is to determine that this terminal is a NANP number. If so, just check whether (Intra-NANP) sign is arranged to " Y " in the NANP. If so, just check the interior sign of country of originating number. If sign also is arranged to " Y " in the country of originating number, just block this calling. If not, just allow this calling. In brief, if sign all is arranged to " Y " in the country of the number that starts and terminate, just block this calling. If not, just allow this calling.

∑ country collection blocks in the following manner to be realized:

Country's collection and the ANI/ country that may start shown in following of direct line MCI characteristic records, the national code that contrast terminal is confirmed. If what country in office of this terminal country concentrates blocked, this calling is just blocked.

The guest calls out and finishes

The terminal G B that starts	Domestic NANP is international
The terminal G B that starts	Domestic NANP is international	Domestic NANP is international	Between NANP between (permission) NANP (permission) with terminal CC, start with terminal PC C, ANI starts^*And country's collection of blocking of country's collection of AUTH country collection ANI and AUTH country collection block between NANP (obstructions) between (permissions) NANP block with country's collection of terminal CC, start ANI and AUTH country collection allow with terminal PC C, country that the country that collects with terminal CC, start ANI and the collection ANI of AUTH country and AUTH country of starting collects obstruction collects obstruction

The user calls out and finishes

The terminal G B that starts	Domestic NANP is international
The terminal G B that starts	Domestic NANP is international	Domestic NANP is international	Domestic Comp (finishing) indicate domestic Comp (finishing) indicate between international Comp (finishing) sign NANP between (permissions) NANP (permissions) with terminal CC, 976 obstructions, 976 obstruction ANI start^And AUTH country country's collection of blocking ANI and AUTH country collection with country's collection of terminal PC C, the collection that starts block domestic Comp (finishing) indicate domestic Comp (finishing) indicate between international Comp (finishing) sign NANP between (permissions) NANP (obstruction) with terminal CC, 976 obstructions, 976 obstruction ANI start^The collection domestic Comp of obstruction of country (finishing) that collects with AUTH country indicates that domestic Comp (finishing) indicates that international Comp (finishing) sign 976 blocks with terminal CC, CC starts

Country's collection of the usefulness terminal PC C of 976 obstructions and AUTH country collection, start the collection obstruction CC of country and AUTH country collection blocks

The programming Route Selection

The terminal G B that starts	Domestic NANP is international
The terminal G B that starts	Domestic NANP is international	N/A	Country's collection that the domestic sign international symbol 976 of domestic sign blocks country's collection obstruction collection of 976 obstruction terminal CC, AUTH national expenditures terminal PC C, AUTH country collection blocks

Programming dials soon

The terminal G B that starts	Domestic NANP is international
The terminal G B that starts	Domestic NANP is international	N/A	Domestic Comp is (complete to indicating that (the complete national country's collection that collects of countries' collection obstruction to the international Comp of sign (finishing) sign 976 obstructions 976 obstruction terminal CC, AUTH national expenditures terminal PC C, AUTH family's collection blocks domestic Comp

XIX. fax in the internet

A. introduce

The most of calling of PSTN all is facsimile call. These are called out the digital information that sends coding and modulated and are used for analogue transmission to the central office (CO) of telephone operator. Analog signal is digitized for the speed continuously transmission on PSTN with 64Kbps at CO. Data signal is converted into analog signal at destination CO and is used for being transferred to the machine of receiving faxes. The continuous transmission of international facsimile communication causes the usury usefulness to rare transmission capacity, and then causes the high cost of IDD telephone service.

B. details

Current, people are more and more interesting to send fax and speech in the internet. In the past, fax tends to carry out at the ancillary equipment of network, does not utilize the intrinsic intelligence in internet. Preferred embodiment is transmitted on the internet pellucidly fax rather than must be used the telephone network can not. Network arrangement has suitable logic, can detect facsimile call by the tone on the detection line. Then, just calling can be directed to another hardware or software, then, the latter faxes in the internet. Network is carried out Route Selection with the telephone number of destination facsimile machine as the address. Then, by access DAP, just can select suitable gateway, call route selecting is arrived suitable destination based on this telephone number. This finishes by sending a Route Selection request to DAP. DAP has the several method gateway that selects your destination. A kind of method is to pass through originating point. In other words, by tabling look-up, for certain originating point distributes certain destination gateway. Another kind method is to utilize load balancing techniques. It is movable that cellular logic can detect normal telephone network pellucidly, transmits them on the internet and do not affect their globality. An embodiment utilization is similar to two schemes of dialling of current phone credits card. First number is used to specify how Route Selection is carried out in calling, and second telephone number is used for being routed to destination-address will calling out after having determined suitable gateway as other any call.

Uploading genuine alternate routing with the internet selects related detailed logic to finish by calling out on the supervision relay line group. In general, company or tissue will be bought the capacity on the junction line that can monopolize for serving the needs of organizing use. The junction line group of preferred embodiment is through improving, has suitable detection hardware, detection hardware can be a hybrid network such as-or comprise that-one is used for the predetermined carrier of conversion on the data network and is the digital signal processor (DSP) of the fax of destination, the wherein all in this way Internets of data network or X.25 network rather than PSN Public Switching Network. Execution to the monitoring of the calling that enters the particular trunk group is transparent.

The junction line group enters into the bridge converter of Call Transfer to intelligent network. It is on the Internet that the country be directed to or city are called out in the intelligent network inspection or other is not the object of processing as special Route Selection on the data network of PSTN. If calling out is not to be directed to country or the city code of paying close attention to, then calls out and just normally be routed to its destination through PSTN.

Say that more in depth when calling entered the MCI switch, switch started one and is the DAP inquiry of call request Route Selection. DAP analyzes this calling according to dial the number and other profile information, and call route selecting is arrived the fax tones detection system. Fax tones detection system audiometry fax CNG tone if detect the CHG tone, just is linked into the fax internet gateway with second call. When the fax internet gateway was answered, the first and second callings just were bridged together at gapping switch.

Desired modification is by destination shielding incoming call. For predetermined target destination, intelligent network is processed for other and is kept calling out. This is to finish according to the preferred embodiment shown in Figure 52 B. In the figure, the facsimile machine F1 of originating user connects telephone line by switch 5260. Switch 5260 connects by switch 5261 to be called out, for Route Selection inquiry purpose proposes the Route Selection request to DAP. DAP connects a routing data storehouse such as long-term adjusting routing data storehouse. Junction line also is connected to and is arranged in suitable logic-Tu of 5263 and has only shown fax tones detector (FTD). This logic comprises that the facsimile call take predetermined country as the destination is routed to fax gateway 5264-by

switch

5261 and 5265 is scheduled to the fax gateway 5267 of country to preliminary data network 5266-to this. For the country that is not predetermined country, switch 5261 will send calling with PSTN.

The visible Figure 52 C of the flow graph of the operation of above-described embodiment of Figure 52 B. In the step 5270 of flow graph, ingress switch 5261 receipt of call of Figure 52 B. Calling may be from phone, PC, facsimile machine F1 or other suitable equipment. Inquire about DAPs with the destination information of this correlation of call by switch 5261 in step 5271. DAP searches routing information, determines that in step 5273 destination is predetermined country, city or an interested position. If not, call out and just shown in step 5274, process by common Route Selection.

Mail to interested intended destination if call out, call out and just shown in step 5275, be routed to FTP. Then FTP determines to call out in step 5276 is facsimile call. This can finish by attempting in a known manner detecting the CNG tone. In a kind of method of finishing this part thing, can use timer. If in the official hour section, can't detect the CNG tone, just suppose that this calling is not facsimile call. Then should call out release, and on PSTN, carry out bridge joint by normal Route Selection, if as detect the CNG tone in step 5277, just shown in step 5278, will call out release and be bridged to fax gateway 5264, this calling is collected, fax is transferred to preliminary data network 5266, is addressed to fax gateway 5267 at this network, then sends to the facsimile machine F2 that is positioned at the destination.

This can have the further Route Selection that the domain name of several countries can be arranged by. Name server will distribute between several destinations by a look-up table to be called out. Gateway will be positioned at country of destination, set up a TCP/IP session with gateway and be used for the control purpose. According to the particular network characteristics, data can be TCP or the UDP that is passed. Under any circumstance, dialled numeral and all be passed to originating gateway, by originating gateway numeral is forwarded to the destination gateway, dialed the number there.

Then the destination gateway is dialled the destination number and is connected the facsimile machine of the other end. System adopts two pairs of fax modem, is used for speech signal is converted to grouping, and be telephone signal with packet switched. Fax modem is the same with any other modem, consult baud rate, but their every transmission one pages will be consulted once. Each end is all stipulated its ability, and they consult to support what speed. At first, secondly the transmission of beginning facsimile message, transmits an affirmation after every one page, at last baud rate is decided through consultation again at 300 bauds (LCD). At last, message receives at long-distance modem, and grouping is grouped into the facsimile message bag again. In the ending of every one page, again decide through consultation baud rate according to error rate, if wrong too many, fax will be decided through consultation a lower fax speed again, and then resend and/or again transmit this page or leaf.

According to preferred embodiment, system will be after testing goal ground telephone circuit have connected transmitting facsimile information. Process related expense and have and following normal fax is processed disadvantageous place with this:

1) postdialing delay increases;

2) the actual facsimile transmission time wants many 5%.

XX. internet switching technology

A. embodiment one

Current switching network circuit problem is, when you had a LEC who connects by legal feature group D junction line, it was difficult that the access of low expense is provided, because the access charge is determined by LEC. Therefore, if provide the internet access by the business that adopts feature group D junction line, it is just very high to marry again client's expense with it. If walk around feature group D junction line, dedicated network is provided, be about to the modem bank that LEC is directly connected to provides the internet access, produced again the second problem. These problems comprise: extensibility survival and the poor efficiency of design. In addition, each needs a modem from the DSO that LEC buys. Architecture discussed below has solved all these problems.

Extensibility is solved by the described CBL of Fig. 1 C, satisfies the Internet traffic requirement because can regulate modem bank. Can adjust CBL to satisfy the requirement of particular interest group. In dedicated network, exist man-to-man relation between the project in CBL and the modem bank. So, if certain modem is out of order, then the ability of service-user just directly is subject to utilizing the impact of the ability of modem bank. By removing the direct correlation between modem bank and the CBL, DAP just can correspond to calling the dynamic resource where that no matter resides on by the network acquisition. This design is more effective than current architecture. Hereinafter will discuss this architecture in detail.

The 3rd problem solved by preferred embodiment, is the direct result that has solved the first two problem. Need a kind of method that Route Selection is called out in network when LEC only provides an OI origin indicator. One has been adopted the embodiment of hot line facility to provide this solution of problem scheme. When the incoming trunk (circuit) that allows hot line facility detects an origin, carry out once the in return database lookup of the internal procedure in the routing data storehouse of machine. This database lookup produces a preliminary dial plan (i.e. 7 or 10 item codes), and it will be for the destination that determines to call out. Hot line facility is deposited and is resided in the switch, but it is not integrated in the routing function, routing function adopt DAP and allow one of switch establishment to DAP not with the DAL process request of any call information (ADF affairs). This request connects three (OC3) atm network, frame relay, SMDS or other communication links at protocol link X.25, LAN, light and is passed to DAP and deals with. DAP carries out extra database lookup to determine suitable destination (in the present case, the destination will be switch ID (SWID) and the termination junction line group (TTG) that corresponds to the junction line connection of modem bank). Hot line is the basis that overcomes the design of the problems referred to above.

Figure 71 represent one be used for to carry out dedicated network professional-such as VNET, Vision or other media-the local dialing access is provided simultaneously, share or special-purpose access on typical client's configuration of hybrid network of private dialup plan. The combination of FDDI LAN 10201, task server 10205 and the

communication server

10215 and 10225 is collectively referred to as DAP. Use the LAN such as Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) LAN 10201 to connect various communication equipments. Shown in the configuration in, task server (TS) 10205 links to each other with LAN 10201, telephone exchange such as switch 10210 links to each other with LAN 10201 with 10225 by the communication server (CS) 10215 respectively with switch 10220. In the example shown, CS 10225 usefulness are called agreement and the switch communication in application data territory (ADF) 10245. Gateway 10230 links to each other with LAN 10201, provides the client to access communication between the processor (CAP). CAP 10235 generally is the microprocessor such as Intel Pentium, RISC or Motorola 68XXX series. DAP will send an affairs inquiry to CAP. CAP executing data library lookup, so as according to for example the particular customer service center have how many operators can with state return the Route Selection instruction. CAP returns one and replys, and how its indication should be call routing on the basis of database lookup. DAP just uses this information as an expansion of its oneself database basically. So DAP just explains the information that receives from CAP 10235, it is converted to switch for call route selecting being arrived the local needed routing information of customer requirement.

Figure 72 represents to be labeled as respectively the operation of

DAP

10241,10242,10243 DAP 10240. Route Selection and client's profile information are imported into order entry system 10235 after confirming, this information is routed to Service control manager (SCM) 10230. SCM 10230 sends to each DAP in the network with Route Selection and client's profile information.

For example, if problem occurs Windows95, the client just calls out 1-800-FIX-WIN95. This calling enters network at ingress switch 10350, and switch will start one to DAP 10241～10243 and be the affairs of the suitable routing information of this calling inquiry. The DAP that is queried identifies this number, creates affairs, and it is routed to the suitable gateway 10230 that links to each other with suitable CAP 10235 (in the present case be CAP) related with Mirosoft company. CAP 10235 receives these affairs, determines that the Customer Service Center in New York is very busy, and the Customer Service Center of California not too busy (reason may be a time difference problem in the present case). CAP 10235 beams back one with regard to (by gateway 10230) to the DAP 10241-10243 that is queried and replys, and expression should be with the Customer Service Center of this 1-800-FIX-WIN95 call route selecting to the California. Selected DAP 10241-10243 converts this transaction information corresponding to the specific switch ID (SWID) of the outer route of the necessary MCI network of the Customer Service Center that will arrive the California and the junction line group (TTG) that specifically terminates to. Selected DAP 10241-10243 is transferred to ingress switch 10350 with this response message, and the latter will reply according to the DAP by SWID to the original call of 1-800-FIX-WIN95, is routed to correct termination switch 10351.

That then termination switch 10351 is used is that the parameter from original DAP replys creates, the information by the SS7 Internet Transmission decides correct termination junction line group (TTG), with the Customer Service Center of call route selecting to the California. When calling out by the switch Route Selection, call out through direct line attachment (DAL) connect-such as DAL 10386-be passed to client PBX 10387, the latter with call-delivery to target phone 10361.

Figure 73 represents that phone is connected to the process that the link trunking line is made the 1-800 call treatment that discharges. Phone such as phone 10410 is connected to LEC local exchange carrier (LEC) 10415. 1-800 number of user power utilization words keyboard input of phone 10410, this number makes LEC 10415 that this call route selecting is arrived MCI ingress switch 10420. In order to process this 1～800 request, switch 10420 must be communicated by letter with ISN 10480. So switch 10420 connects this calling to bridge joint switch 10440, the latter links to each other with Intelligent Service network 10480 by discharging link trunking line 10490. Bridge joint switch 10440 passes to ISN 10480 with the DAP request together with 1-800 information, and the latter passes to interviewed DAP 10241 with it. DAP 10241 checks this 1-800 request, selects suitable release link trunking line, is connected to MCID switch 10420 through it, and the latter is connected to again LEC 10415, finally is connected to phone 10410, finishes thus calling. ANI is a standard terminology in the industry, refers to ANI (ANI). ANI can be used for finishing calling. This is that the MCI network is from the information that definite calling is started wherefrom that is used for of LEC reception. In simple terms, if the calling that you initiate, this may be your home phone number number. It also may be calling subscriber with the credit card number of pay phone at place of giving orders or instructions, so be not always to determine to whom record keeping of calling with this number.

Can phone 10450 be connected to switch 10460 by LEC 10455 with similar process, method is will call out by ISN 10480 with bridge joint switch 10440 to be bridged to release link trunking line 10490.

Figure 74 represents client's one side of DAP process request. In family and small office/home office, equipment such as modem bank 10510, phone 10515, fax 10510 all is inserted in 10520 li of standard RJ11 sockets, is connected to LEC local exchange carrier. LEC local exchange carrier 10525 is connected to switch 10530 by public commercial circuit 10527. In large-scale working environment, the office that is equipped with PBX 10540 can be connected to switch 10530 by special-purpose line attachment (DAL) 10457, uses less than local communication company. Switch 10530 sends the request of DAL process to DAP 10560, and the latter hereinafter does comprehensive explanation in connection with Figure 75 for call routing 10570-.

Figure 75 represents that switch 10530 selects the operation of particular number or " hot line " for the calling subscriber. The incoming call that switch 10530 receives from CBL 10527 or DAL 10547 just contacts about the instruction of this calling of Route Selection with DAP 10560. DAP 10560 returns the routing information with pseudo-telephone number form coding. Pseudo-telephone number is identical with the form of plain old telephone number, but has but encoded one 3 switch identifier (SWID) and the document number of sign desirable termination junction line group (TTG) file. Switch 10530 contacts with the switch 10610 of SWID sign, transmits document number to it. Switch 10610 usefulness TTG select suitable modem bank 10620 to go to finish connection. The professional Internet Protocol (IP) with being connected basic Internet Protocol platform (BIPP) 10650 that modem bank is provided to again such as checking professional 10640 connects 10630. BIPP 10650 is comprised of the packet switch such as ATM switch, and packet switch is transferred to another node with the IP grouping from a node. Checking calling party's the security function that prevents the unauthorized access internet is carried out in checking professional 10640 alternatively. It also is used to the user's conviction that makes by TTG hotline access internet to work out charging information. This hot line facility is provided, makes the Route Selection of calling can be by

switch

10530 and 10610 and do not use the FGD link of the costliness of the FGD 10380 shown in Figure 72.

Figure 76 represents that gateway optionally passes through the operation of internet Route Selection call. Terminaling exchange 10710 is connected to ARU 10720 with the request routing information. The characteristic of ARU 10720 enquiry calls is to determine that it is the candidate of internet Route Selection. If calling out is modem call, calls out and just be routed to modem bank 10730. Call out then and be routed to basic Internet Protocol platform 10750 so that the internet access to modem call to be provided from modem bank 10730. Modem call is alternatively by professional 10760 checkings of checking. If this calling is facsimile call, calls out and just be routed to modem bank 10730. Call out and then be routed to basic Internet Protocol platform 10750 from modem bank 10730, arrive therefrom fax gateway 10770. The same with modem call, facsimile call is alternatively by professional 10760 checkings of checking.

If treating the calling of Route Selection is voice call, ARU just waits for that the user dials caller card number and destination telephone number. Then ARU 10720 inquires about the destination telephone number to determine that the destination phone is international call or domestic call. Domestic call be returned to the termination switch 10710 make conventional Route Selection, international call by by providing analogue voice signal to codec (Codec) 10725 by data encoding. Codec 10725 passes through modem bank 10730 and basic Internet Protocol platform 10750 with call route selecting after Signal coding is become numerical data.

In another embodiment, when calling is delivered to ISN by the network switch, to staying SS7 isup message of ISN switch Route Selection of depositing. This switch is DMS-ACD. The ACD meaning is automatic call distributor. ACD accepts input SS7 ISUP and calls out, and it is transformed into SCAI (switch/computer application interface). The opposite end of ACD is the equipment of a kind of ISN-AP of crying (intelligent service networks-attached processor). SCAI is the language of talking between ACD and the ISN-AP. So two interfaces are arranged: being SS7 ISUP in the inbound side from the network to ACD, is being SCAI from ACD to ISN-AP laterally. These are two kinds of different signaling protocols.

When calling out when arriving ACD from network, with call route selecting where ACD does not know automatically. ACD accepts the instruction of ISN-AP. For this reason, ACD accepts to convert them to the SCAI protocol format from the ISUP signaling parameter of network reception, sends SCAI message to ISN-AP.

Specifically, this SCAI message is DV-Call_Received (the DV meaning is data/speech). When ISN-AP receives this message, just check callee's number (CPN) territory in the SCAI message, according to this number, determine ACD should with call route selecting in the ISN where. After ISN-AP maked decision, ISN-AP just constructed a DV_Call_Received_RR (is return results to the replying of a upper message-RR meaning). In the RR message be to ACD about calling out the instruction of the ACD port that should terminate.

With regard to this was professional, ACD was arrived this call ending the ACD port that links to each other with ARU 10720 by instruction. When calling out arrival ARU 10720, two things may occur:

1) if the calling subscriber from a) phone or b) facsimile machine dials access number, the calling subscriber will hear voice prompt, and " speech is by 1, and fax is by 2. "

2) if the calling subscriber dials access code with pc modem, the calling subscriber may can't hear any prompting. What occur is that the ARU timer will expire. Expiring of timer shows that to ARU this is the calling from modem.

The call-flow of these situations may make us obscuring, so let us is investigated them seriatim.

If the calling subscriber is from call, under the voice prompt of ARU 10720, the calling subscriber will be by 1 (representative voice service) so. At this moment, ARU 10720 will collect the further information about the calling subscriber. This feature is the transformation version of the existing caller card business that provides now of telephone operator. ARU 10720 at first collects card number, then collects the number that the calling subscriber will terminate. After obtaining this information, ARU 10720 just sends to validation database with data at the ISN LAN. Except checking caller card number, database also will be guaranteed to terminate number within the dial plan of this holder's permission.

In case after having verified card information, ARU 10720 will judge that the termination number is domestic or international. If the termination number is domestic, ARU 10720 just will call out from ISN release and get back to voice network, and calling will be routed to its intended destination at voice network. If the termination number is international, calling will be routed to one and stay the equipment that is called codec (CODEC) deposit at the BIPP website. The effect of CODEC is to convert voice signal to select in route on the internet with UDP/IP data.

In another embodiment, if the calling subscriber calls out from facsimile machine, during ARU 10720 voice prompt, the calling subscriber is by 2, and fax services is asked in expression. At this moment, ARU 10720 will be call route selecting to a fax platform, for those not free or patient people who waits for that termination fax plane No. becomes the free time or wants help to send international fax, this fax platform is a secure service 10770. An embodiment collects about calling subscriber's information and the number that terminates, and then the instruction calling subscriber begins process of transmitting. Fax services 10770 is caught this fax, stores for delivering later on.

If the calling subscriber is by the pc modem dialing, when ARU 10720 voice prompt, the calling subscriber may can't hear so. This is deliberately like this design. Because although the calling subscriber can hear by PC loudspeaker or modem the sound of ARU 10720, but the calling subscriber can not input at ARU 10720, cause the most at last overtime (above illustrating), ARU 10720 is shown to call out start from pc modem. ARU 10720 will call out to discharge and get back to network with the modem bank (MP) 10730 of termination to one of BIPP 10750 websites of MCI.

Figure 77 is illustrated in the operation of the ARU of the Figure 76 that disposes in the central authoritiesization architecture. Phone 10810 is communicated by letter with switch 10710 by local switch 10820. Switch 10710 is connected to Intelligent Service network (ISN) 10840 by bridge joint switch 10830, arrives ARU 10720 again. ARU 10720 control call route selecting, or directly arrive modem bank 10730, pass through codec 10725 to BIPP 10750 or arrive Fax Server.

Figure 78 is illustrated in the operation of the ARU of the Figure 77 that disposes in the distributed architecture. Phone 10910 is communicated by letter with switch 10710 by local switch 10920. Switch 10710 is connected to Intelligent Service network (ISN) 10940 by bridge joint switch 10930, arrives ARU 10720 again. ARU 10720 operates under the control of the VAB voice answer back unit 10950 that connects being connected with the bridge joint switch by switch 10911, arrive this call route selecting modem bank 10730 of control by switch 10912, or control the Route Selection of calling by codec. ARU must be arranged in ISN, but miscellaneous equipment (ARU 10850～10950, modem bank 10730 and codec 10725) then can be arranged in network Anywhere.

Figure 79 A and 79B represent the operation for the sample application program of the Internet call Route Selection. Figure 79 A represents the operation for the sample application program of customer service. In-house network computer 11010 is connected to internet 11020 as described above, is thus connected server computer 11025. Server computer 11025 usefulness uniform resource locators come specifies Internet resource-such as packing shipping service supplier 11030, just allow the user's query supplier 11030 of in-house network computer 11010. By the built-in function shown in 11032, supplier 11030 response users' reciprocation can provide resource such as complete movie playback 11035 from its Customer Service Department, perhaps directly carries out dialog interaction with client business agent 11037.

Figure 79 B represents the application of many consumer's affairs that start for the calling subscriber. The consumer who calls out predetermined number 11040 (such as 555-IMCI, 555-PAGE or 555-RNET) can be routed to specific transaction processor with public commercial circuit (CBL) 11050. CBL 11050 links to each other with switch 11060. Switch 11060 is called out DAP 11065, and the latter analyzes incoming call with ANI (ANI), to determine calling subscriber's identity. According to calling subscriber's identity and the number of calling out, DAP 11065 indication switches 11060 are directed to 555-IMCI with calling, for example arrive data network interface (DNI) 11070. DNI 11070 plays a part switching network and can process interface between the database host 11075 of point of sale debit and credit card transactions. Except calling out according to the destination phone numbers Route Selection, ANI also is used for identification accessing database host 11075 calling subscriber. Similarly, also can be routed to the PBX of paging service company to the calling of 555-PAGE, the ANI data are used to select the specific paging service 11085 that provided by the said firm. At last, can be used for providing connection to basic Internet Protocol platform 11090-such as previously described to the calling of 555-RNET.

Figure 80 represents is the configuration that voice mail and VAB voice answer back unit business is provided and is interconnected to service supplier's exchange network according to preferred embodiment a kind of.

Phone

11111 and 11112 enters network by

switch

11120 and 11121 respectively, and switch 11121 also provides intermediate line link for switch 11120 except providing to phone 11112 network enters. Switch 11125 provides interconnection for switch 11121, also receives the direct input such as PBX 11130. Switch 11125 is provided to VAB voice answer back cell server 11140 and the connection of being connected voice mail server 11145. In addition, switch 11125 also is connected to service provider server 11150 by dialing access circuit 11155. Service provider server 11150 uses the BIPP 11075 by modem bank 11076 connections further incoming call to be routed to paging service 11060 or to arrive electronic mail service 11070 according to the service of asking and checking.

B. embodiment two

Figure 81 represents to call out according to an inbound shared automatic call distributor (ACD) with data sharing of preferred embodiment. Dialing Internet user 12000 usefulness computer modulating demodulators are dialed the number. Call is routed to MCI switch 112004 from PROC/LEC switch 12002. MCI switch 112004 inquiry network control systems (NCS) 12020 are for the ANI of regulation with by the requests for telephone numbers route of dialling. NCS 12020 returns an end address, and command M CI switch 112004 is with the junction line group of call route selecting to the MCI switch 212006.

MCI switch 212006 is accomplished to the calling of internet access device 12008. Modem in dial user's the computer 12000 and internet access device 12008 are set up a data session, carry out the exchange of packet according to point-to-point protocol (PPP). The PPP grouping is converted into Internet Protocol (IP) grouping from internet access device 12008, sends in the internet of 12026 representatives. Similarly, 12026 reception IP divide into groups and they are sent to dial user 12000 internet access device 12008 from the internet.

Before the permission grouping passes freely through internet access device 12008, check dial user 12000. Examination is carried out with user name/password method or inquire/response (challenge/response) method.

In the user name/password method, internet access device 12008 prompting dial users 12000 input address names. Dial user 12000 keys in computer with address name, and this address name is transferred to internet access device 12008 from dial user 12000. Then internet access device 12008 points out dial user 12000 to enter password. Dial user 12000 keys in computer with password, and this password is transferred to internet access device 12008 from dial user 12000. After receiving address name and password, internet access device 12008 sends the checking request that includes this address name and password to authentication server 12014. Authentication server 12014 checks the right database of this user name/password contrast valid user name/password. If the user name/password of input is in database, authentication server 12014 just sends it back internet access device 12008 with " user verifies " message. If the user name/password of input is not in database, authentication server 12014 just sends it back internet access device 12008 with " user can not get checking " message.

In the inquire/response method, internet access device 12008 prompting dial users 12000 input address names. Dial user 12000 keys in computer with address name, and this address name is transferred to internet access device 12008 from dial user 12000. Internet access device 12008 is then with an inquiry prompting dial user 12000. Dial user 12000 calculates the replying of this inquiry, and method is that inquiry is digital and shared key is input to one and replys generator. Only have dial user 12000 and authentication server 12014 just to know shared key. After dial user 12000 keys in replying of calculating, reply from dial user 12000 and be transferred to internet access device 12008. Internet access device 12008 sends the checking message that includes address name, inquires and reply to authentication server 12014. Authentication server 12014 reads address name, finds shared key that should address name, replys with shared key and inquiry numerical calculation. Replying that reply and the dial user 12000 that then will calculate provides compares. If response matches just sends " user verifies " message to internet access device 12008 from authentication server 12014. Do not mate if reply, just send " user can not get checking " message to internet access device 12008 from authentication server 12014.

No matter adopt user name/password or the verification method of inquire/response, we supposition " user verifies " message send to internet access device 12008 from authentication server 12014 the following description, allow the IP packet communication freely to pass through internet access device 12008.

Dial user 12000 starts Web browser, browses the WEB page or leaf from company's Web server 12024. The exclusive identifier of company's Web server 12024 usefulness is recorded the WEB page or leaf that dial user 12000 checked at Call Center Server 12038. Dial user 12000 also can be to company's Web server 12024 submission information, and method is to fill in HTML (HTML) table, then this information is submitted to company's Web server 12024. The same exclusive identifier of the Web of company server 12024 usefulness is preserved this information in Call Center Server 12038.

Dial user 12000 browses another WEB page or leaf, and have individual icon to show with text this moment, and the expression user clicks this icon just can same agent talking. If click this icon, will arrive the WEB browser that many parts the Internet mail extension (MIME) file is downloaded to dial user 12000 from company's Web server 12024. The MIME file contains the alpha-numeric string for as a result call recognition purpose ground-be called user identifier. Browser calls an assisting device application or browser plug-in (browser plug-in) is processed the file of specifying mime type. Assisting device is used and is read the MIME file, uses the content of MIME file to start the inquiry to LIST SERVER 12012 from dial user 12000. LIST SERVER 12012 will convert from the alpha-numeric string of MIME file the IP address, destination of destination IP gateway 12018 to, a message that contains this IP address be beamed back dial user 12000 assisting device and be used. Assisting device is used and then to be started one to the Internet phone call of the IP address of IP gateway 12018, provides alpha-numeric string from the MIME file to IP gateway 12018, as the part of call setup.

IP gateway 12018 converts the alpha-numeric string of giving to the destination telephone number, dials this destination telephone number to MCI switch 212006 on its telephone network interface. The telephone number inquiry NCS 12020 that MCI switch 212006 usefulness dial, the instruction of request Route Selection. NCS 12020 determines suitable routes, and the Route Selection instruction is sent it back MCI switch 212006, with this call route selecting certain junction line group to the MCI switch 112004. Calling is routed to MCI switch 112004, then, calls out and is accomplished to automatic call distributor (ACD) 12022. When ACD 12022 gets back to calling, IP gateway 12018 has just been finished a constant audio path between ACD 12022 and the dial user 12000, (on this path) audio frequency from ACD to the IP gateway is Circuit-switched pcm audio, and the audio frequency from the IP gateway to the dial user is the DAB of having encoded with the codec packetizing.

When calling was passed to ACD 12022, exclusive record identifier was passed to ACD by the telephone network signaling gear. When the agency in the call center 12026 receives calling, be that the agency shows this exclusive record identifier, retrieve the call information of being inputted by dial user 12000 from Call Center Server 12028.

XXI. keep accounts

Relate in general to according to another embodiment of the invention communication network, more particularly, relate to the switch that also generates the communication network of exclusive call identifier with flexible and extendible record format generation call record for each calling through network.

Typical communication network contains a plurality of telecommunications switch that are dispersed throughout certain region. When the user calls out, called out before arriving its destination and pass through possibly one or more switches.

Figure 82 represents a typical telecommunication system 30102 across the U.S.. For purposes of illustration, suppose that certain calling subscriber 30104 is from calling to the correspondent 30112 that is positioned at the New York, New York of Los Angeles, California access. This calling will be transmitted through three switches usually: the switch 30110 of the switch 30106 in Los Angeles, California, the switch 30108 in Chicago, Illinois State and New York, New York. In this situation, ingress switch is the switch 30106 in Los Angeles, California, and the termination switch is the switch 30110 of New York, New York.

Each switch 30106～30110 all is connected to two or more data access points (DAP) 30116～30120, for example main DAP 30116～30120 and DAP for subsequent use 30116～30120. DAP 30116～30120 this devices receive information request from switch 30106～30110, process request, institute's solicited message are turned back to the switch 30106～30110 of the request of sending. Switch 30106～30110 usefulness are from the information processing of DAP 30116～30120 calling by network.

When call out by switch 30106～30110 one of them the time, this switch creates a call record. Call record contains relevant for the information of calling out, comprise-but be not limited to: Route Selection, record keeping, call features and trouble shoot information. Behind the call ending, processed each switch 30106～30110 of calling out and all finished related call record. Switch 30106～30110 is combined into a record keeping piece with a plurality of call records.

When switch 30106～30110 was filled in the record keeping piece, switch 30106～3011O sent to booking center 30114 with the record keeping piece. So booking center 30114 processed switch 30106～30110 of calling out from each and received a record keeping piece, totally three record keeping pieces in the present case. The booking center 30114 retrieval piece of respectively keeping accounts retrieves the call record with this correlation of call, retrieves a record keeping piece from each switch 30106～30110 of processing calling thus. Then booking center 30114 generates a record keeping project with one or more billing records that retrieve. Booking center 30114 also is connected to each DAP 30116～30120 with the information of retrieval about certain switch 30106～30110 or call record.

In order to understand better the present invention, it is useful describing some other terms relevant with communication network. Call enters the switch on the transmission line that is called start port or junction line. The port that starts is one of them of many transmission lines that enters switch from identical original position, this port set junction line group that starts exactly. Processed after the incoming call, to destination locations, the latter can be another switch, LEC local exchange carrier or PBX to switch with call transfer. Calling is transmitted at the transmission line that is called termination port or junction line. Similar with the port that starts, the termination port is a port one group of port from switch to identical destination. This port set junction line group that terminates exactly.

The present age, communication network provided ability that the client uses general public network and the ability of definition customizing virtual network (Vnet). Vnet has been arranged, and the client just can define the private dialup plan, comprises the plan telephone number. Vnet client is not subjected to the restriction of the default telephone number of the public telecommunication system assignment of specific geographic area special use, but can define the customization telephone number.

When processing call, the call record that switch generates must get greatly the whole information needed that can hold about certain calling. But call record can not be greatly most of recording domain in the call record that makes common calling have no usage. If so, store a large amount of wastes that this call record will cause memory space, the many transmission when transmitting this call record all draw water with a sieve.

Creating with the relevant solution of processing call record is to adopt a kind of call record of f format, such as the call record of 32 words. 1 word has 2 bytes or 16 positions. But fixed length record format can not expand when having new call features to realize. What is more important, fixing call record form can not be at the communication network more complexes, increased the data field of New Characteristics and telephone number post processing expansion.

Current fixed length record format comprises the time point territory with three weightening finish second (three (3) second increments) format record local zone times, and wherein local switch time (local switch time) representative is positioned at the Time of Day of working as of certain switch. The time point territory is used by the network switch, booking center and other network subsystem. Yet each subsystem possibly seeking time section has different purposes, has different forms, such as the time format in epoch. Time in epoch from history specific date and time one second increment number. For example, booking center requires to be fit to the time in epoch of billing record, and switch report and error log then require the local switch time.

Only use the local switch time also to produce a problem, because can not adapt to the time variation that the summer time is brought. In addition, each subsystem may require than three current higher precision of increment second. If only provide three second the increment form the local switch time, switch has been exempted the burden that will convert the form that network subsystem can use the time to. Fixedly record format can not adapt to various time period requirements, because it only contains the time period of local switch time, precision is also low. Because its stationarity, fixedly record format can not expand to and comprise and different time formats can not comprise higher precision, such as one second increment.

Therefore, need the exchange function of communication network to come the stored calls recorded information with flexible and extendible form. Further need to provide form flexibly, time point territory with one second precision, adapt to easily and effectively the variation in the summer time and time zone.

Also need to mate the all-calls record with the particular telephone correlation of call. For example, in order suitably to keep accounts and regulate expenditure, booking center is necessary the call record coupling with call record with the termination switch of ingress switch. For trouble shoot and security, also need easily in network, to follow the tracks of particular telephone and call out so that the isolating problem district.

Therefore, need the exchange function of communication network to identify uniquely each call through network, thus the all-calls record of sign and particular telephone correlation of call uniquely.

A. embodiment one

1. call record form

An embodiment solves and provides the method for flexible and extendible call record form to be, adopts the record format that varies. Specifically, this embodiment adopts 32 default word call record forms, adds the call record form of 64 words of expansion. Embodiment is used for 32 word call record forms that common call-this has comprised the great majority of all calls, when need to be about the extraneous information of calling out, uses 64 word call record forms. This realization provides the required flexibility of data demand of the variation of the given call record of efficient management. Can develop new call features, be easy to just can be fused to variable call record form of the present invention.

This embodiment also uses time format point writing time in epoch. Embodiment is with the departure of this zero-time or differs number of seconds with the zero-time of time format metered call in epoch, remaining time point. This embodiment has solved the back and forth transfer problem of daylight saving time, because daylight saving time is a local time difference, does not affect the time in epoch. In addition, epoch time format the space that in call record, takies than the time point of local switch time format of time point still less.

Epoch, time format can represent universal time (by the time that England Greenwich is determined, it has the local switch time in zero (0) time zone) or At All Other Times any. Time in epoch is a kind of form, does not determine to use Greenwich mean time. Record keeping time and local switch time can be that Greenwich mean time also can be local zone time, and the local switch time needn't be identical with the used time of keeping accounts. Therefore, switch must separately record record keeping time and local switch time, with the problem of avoiding the daylight saving time During to occur.

2. calling network identifier

This embodiment is by providing exclusive identifier to each call record, solved identify uniquely each call and with the problem of the all-calls record of particular telephone correlation of call. It generates a calling network identifier (NCID) of distributing to each call record of calling out the originating point place, and in other words, ingress switch generates a NCID for each call. NCID follows associated call to arrive the destination node at termination switch place by communication network. Therefore, any call point in network, related NCID be originating point and the time started of identification telephone calling all. Each switch of call process records NCID in the associated call record of this calling. The little call record that can put into 32 words that gets of NCID has reduced data throughput and memory space thus. NCID provides booking center and other subsystem function with starting of calling out of coupling particular telephone and terminating call record.

Present embodiment also provides the NCID that switch abandons receiving and the function that generates new NCID. Switch is in the NCID not in valid format or when unreliable, just abandons the NCID that receives, guarantees that thus through network each call out effective identifier that unique association is arranged. For example, if NCID is generated by third-party switch in the communication network, so just may be insecure.

This embodiment relates to the communication network switch that generates call record with flexible, extendible form. The call record form comprises the form of little (best 32 words) and large (best 62 a words) expansion. How realizing the large and small record formats of different sizes, is apparent to the skilled person of relevant technologies.

This embodiment also is related to each communication network switch that generates NCID through the calling of network. NCID provides the mechanism of a kind of coupling with the all-calls record of particular telephone correlation of call. How realizing the call record identifier of different-format, is apparent to the skilled person of relevant technologies.

Selected embodiment is the computer software of carrying out in computer system. Figure 83 represents a typical computer system. Computer system 30202 comprises one or more processors, such as processor 30204. Processor 30204 links to each other with communication bus 30206.

Computer system 30202 also comprises main memory 30208-preferably random access memory (RAM), second-level storage 30210. Second-level storage 30210 for example comprises that hard disk driver 30212 and/or detachable memory driver 30214-represent floppy disk, magnetic tape station, CD-ROM drive etc. Detachable memory driver 30214 is write data in a well-known manner with from detachable memory cell 30216 read datas and/or to it.

Detachable memory cell 30216 also claims program storage or computer program, represents floppy disk, tape or CD etc. Detachable memory cell 30216 is included in the storage medium that the computer of wherein storing computer software and/or data can be used.

Computer program (also claiming computer control logic) is stored in main memory 30208 or the secondary storage 30210. This computer program can make computer system carry out the function of the present invention that this paper discusses when carrying out. Specifically, computer program can make processor 30204 carry out function of the present invention when carrying out. Therefore this computer program has represented the controller of computer system 30202.

B. embodiment two

Another embodiment comprises the wherein computer program of the computer-readable medium of store control logic (computer software) to liking one. When control logic is carried out by processor 30204, make processor 30204 carry out function as herein described.

Another embodiment mainly is for example use hardware state machine hard-wired. Realizing hardware state machine carrying out function as herein described, is apparent to the skilled person of correlative technology field.

1. call record form

Present embodiment provides the communication network switch with 9 kinds of different recording formats. These records comprise: dedicated operations person's service log (EPOSR) and the switch logout (SER) of dedicated network record (EPNR), operator's service log (OSR) of the call detail record (ECDR) of call detail record (CDR), expansion, dedicated network record (PNR), expansion, operator's service log (EOSR) of expansion, dedicated operations person's service log (POSR), expansion. Each records 32 word lengths, and the extended version of each record is 64 word lengths.

Figure 82-87 further describes the example embodiment of 9 kinds of call record forms as herein described. The embodiment of call record of the present invention comprises 32 words and two kinds of call record forms of 64 words. Designing the embodiment that comprises different numbers of words, other call record of the definition of same area is not arranged, is apparent to the skilled person of correlative technology field. The table 301 of appendix contains the example embodiment of CDR and PNR call record form. Shown in Figure 84 is the diagrammatic representation of CDR and PNR call record form. The table 302 of appendix contains the example embodiment of ECDR and EPNR call record form. Shown in Figure 85 A and the 85B is the diagrammatic representation of ECDR and EPNR call record form. The table 303 of appendix contains the example embodiment of OSR and POSR call record form. Shown in Figure 86 is the diagrammatic representation of 0SR and POSR call record form. The table 304 of appendix contains the example embodiment of EOSR and EPOSR call record form. Shown in Figure 87 (A) and 87 (B) is the diagrammatic representation of EOSR and EPOSR call record form. The table 305 of appendix contains the embodiment of SER call record form. Shown in Figure 88 is the diagrammatic representation of SER record format.

CDR and PNR, and the ECDR and the EPNR that release thus are standard call record format, contain the information that the call type code relevant for by switch the time is called out. CDR is used for non-VNET user, and PNR is used for VNET user and the switch called out at the VNET that starts generates. The territory of these two records is identical except following special domain information that will illustrate.

OSR and POSR and the EOSR and the EPOSR that release thus contain the information relevant for the call that requires the operator to assist, and are in the switch of the actual outfit of switch or operator position or system's generation. Switch is that non-VNET client finishes OSR, for proprietary VNET client finishes POSR. These records only can executable operations person switch or the system of service or network audio answering system (NARS) function generate. The form of these two kinds of records is identical except following special domain information that will illustrate.

SER be for special event-such as each hour in past, time change, event is recovered or arrive record keeping EOB-keep. Hereinafter also will describe SER record format in detail.

Figure 89 (A) and 89 (B) have illustrated that comprehensively switch is used for determining when the logic of the extended version that uses record format. Calling 30202 enters switch 30106-30110 and (claims current switch when quoting; Be that current switch is the current switch of processing calling), switch 30106-30110 will determine to call out 30802 call record and will adopt what call record and what call record form (little/default or large/expansion) this moment. For this reason, switch 30106～30110 carries out 9 inspections to each calling 30802 that it receives. For the calling 30802 by any inspection and the calling 30802 that checks by any combination, switch 30106-30110 adopts the record of expansion.

First checks 30804 judge to overflow whether involve this calling in (DTO) in the direct terminal at current switch 30106-30110 place. For example, when the client carries out call 30802 to certain number 30800, and DTO occurs in original 800 number destination busy. If original destination is busy, switch spills into new destination with call. In this case, switch must record destination, the final destination of call 30802 and the number of times that overflows that its ability arrives. Therefore, related to DTO if call out 30802, switch 30106-30110 just must finish the record (ECDR, EPNR, EOSR, EPOSR) 30816 of an expansion.

Switch 30106-30110 checks that to calling out 30,802 second of carrying out 30806 judge that whether the calling position of calling 30802 is greater than tens. Calling out the position is the telephone number of calling out 30802 positions of starting. The international call that contains at least 11 bit digital is exactly such example. If call out the position greater than tens, switch 30106-30110 is the telephone number of metered call position in record (ECDR, EPNR, EOSR, the EPOSR) 30816 of expansion just.

Switch 30106-30110 checks that to calling out 30802 the 3rd of carrying out 30808 judge that whether destination-address is greater than 17 figure places. Destination-address is the number of called position, can be that telephone number also can be the junction line group. If destination-address is greater than 17 figure places, switch 30106-30110 just records the destination in the record (ECDR, EPNR, EOSR, EPOSR) 30816 of expansion.

Switch 30106-30110 checks that to calling out 30802 the 4th of carrying out 30810 judge whether the numeric field of in advance conversion is used for the service call that the operator assists. If converting digital is that the number-this calling of calling subscriber's calling 30802 of dialling must be converted into another number in the network in advance. Therefore, serve when the calling subscriber uses the operator, switch 30106-30110 just records institute and dials the number in the record (EOSR, EPOSR) 30816 of expansion.

Switch 30106-30110 checks that to calling out 30802 the 5th of carrying out 30812 judge that whether the numeral of the in advance conversion that the calling subscriber is dialled when not having the operator auxiliary is greater than tens. If converting digital is greater than tens in advance, switch 30106-30110 just records institute and dials the number in the record (ECDR, EPNR) 30816 of expansion.

Switch 30106-30110 checks that to calling out 30802 the 6th of carrying out 30814 judgements comprise in the authorization code territory of call record whether supplementary data has recorded the data greater than 22 figure places. The authorization code territory is designated as the correspondent of accepting record keeping such as the calling of calling out position or Credit Card Calling. If data item need to surpass 22 numerical digits, switch 30106-30110 just records charging information in the record (ECDR, EPNR, EOSR, EPOSR) 30816 of expansion.

Switch 30106-30110 checks that to calling out 30802 the 7th of carrying out 30820 judge that calling out 30802 is broadband call. Broadband call is the calling that needs a plurality of transmission lines or channel. For example, general video call needs 6 transmission channels: 1 is used for Tone Via, and 5 are used for transmission of video. The transmission channel that uses during broadband call is more, and the quality of reception is just better. Current nearly 24 channels that provide of telecommunication system in the present age. Therefore, indicate how many channels that used during the broadband call in these 24 channels, switch 30106-30110 will record channel information in the record (ECDR, EPNR) 30828 of expansion.

Switch 30106-30110 checks to calling out 30802 the 8th of carrying out whether 30822 decision operation persons have used time and charge feature. Time and charge feature generally are used in the sight of hotel, and in this sight, the guest carries out call under operator's help, and 30802 the expense of will calling out is collected to its room. After calling 30802 is finished, to the expense of hotel guest notification call 30802. If called out 30802 usefulness time and charge feature, switch 30106-30110 is record guest's name and room number in the record (EOSR, EPOSR) 30832 of expansion just.

Switch 30106-30110 is that last inspection 30824 judges that calling out 30802 voice services that whether strengthen/network audio answering system (EVS/NARS) calls out to calling out 30802 the 9th of carrying out. EVS/NARS is a kind of audio menu system, and wherein the client selects according to spontaneous menu by telephone keypad. This system comprises one thereon in depositing the switch of audio menu system. Therefore, call out during 30802 NARS switch 30106-30110 record guest's in the record (EOSR, EPOSR) 30832 of expansion menu setecting at EVS/NARS.

If what inspection 30804-30824 returned is not positive result, switch 30106-30110 just uses default record format (OSR, POSR) 30830.

In case calling is checked, switch just generates and finishes suitable call record. The call record data are with binary system and phone BCD Binary Coded Decimal (TBCD) format record. The TBCD form is as follows:

0000=TBCD zero

0001=several 1

0010=several 2

0011=several 3

0100=several 4

0101=several 5

0110=several 6

0111=several 7

1000=several 8

1001=several 9

1010=several 0

Special several 1 (DTMF counts A) of 1011=

Special several 2 (DTMF counts B) of 1100=

Special several 3 (DTMF counts C) of 1101=

Special several 4 (DTMF counts D) of 1110=

1111=special several 5 (need not)

All TBCD number fields all must be with TBCD zero or zero padding before record data. Applicable, the dialed digit form meets these agreements:

N=numeral 2-9

X=numeral 0-9

Y=numeral 2-8

Therefore, if contain a N in the explanation in certain call record territory, then effectively thresholding is digital 2-9.

Each call record except SER contains specific time point territory. The time point territory is by time format record in epoch. Time in epoch is the number to increase progressively second that begins from certain particular historical date/time. The date/time that embodiments of the invention use is midnight on January 1st, 1976 (Greenwich mean time 00:00), but this a just example rather than restriction. Realizing the time in epoch based on another date/time, is apparent to the skilled person of correlative technology field. In record, the time in epoch of the zero-time of time point 1 representative calling 30802. Another time point of storing in the record is time point 1 number of seconds later. The departure of Distance Time point 1 when these number of seconds are the particular point in time generation. All time point territories all must be filled with 0 before any data of record. Therefore, if certain time point occurs, its count value is 1 or greater than 1. In addition, time point counter-the do not comprise counting non-return-to-zero of time point 1-. When the time oversteps the extreme limit, rest on the maximum count value.

What exchange clock reflected is the local switch time, free as the institute except keeping accounts. Charging information interocclusal record during with epoch, the time in epoch of using in the present embodiment is Greenwich mean time. The time difference is to reflect exchange board time with respect to the number of Greenwich mean time, in other words, because the departure that the time difference and (if applicable) summer time cause. At first, there is the time zone on the both sides in world standard time zone, so they may be positively biased residual quantity or negative bias residual quantity. The second, the time zone departure is started from scratch in (Britain's Greenwich) east direction and successively decreased, and is a kind of to international date line. At international date line, the date changes to next day, and like this, departure becomes positive number and begins and successively decreases, until become the zero-deviation amount at Greenwich again. The 3rd, the time zone that many areas are arranged in the world is not by calculating increment in one hour. For example Australia is 30 minutes in the time difference in two time zones on its both sides, and it is 15 minutes that north India has the time difference in individual time zone and next-door neighbour's next time zone. Therefore, the time difference of call record must adapt to the positive and negative departure that increased progressively by 15 minutes. Embodiments of the invention provide representative by the positive and negative time difference that increased progressively in 1 minute, thereby have satisfied this requirement.

Two formula are arranged for the back and forth conversion between local switch time and time in epoch.

I) epoch time+(sign bit * time difference)=local switch time

Ii) the meta-time in (sign bit * time difference)=epoch during local switch

Switch records the time difference in SER, and 1 represents 1 minute in the value of use, before call record is recorded, by a second calculating time difference, this value is added to each local zone time point 1. For example, central time is early than 6 hours UTC time. In this case, sign bit is ' 1 ', expression negative bias residual quantity, and the time difference value that records in SER is exactly 360 (6 hours * 60 minutes/hour=360 minutes). Referring to the more detailed content that records formula among Figure 86 about SER. Put 1 o'clock writing time in call record, and switch will multiply by 60-the time difference because the per minute increment is exactly 60 seconds, and the inspection sign bit determines that this departure just is or bears. This routine end value is-21,600 (1 * 360 minute * 60 seconds/minute=-21,600 seconds). With top equation (ii), if the local switch time is midnight, then the corresponding time in epoch for example just may be 1,200,000,000. Deduct-21,600 departure, the correct time in epoch that draws is 1,200,021,600 second, by epoch Time Calculation be after midnight 6 hours. This embodiment be equally applicable to be positioned at Greenwich in the east, time difference value be on the occasion of the switch of position.

Two orders are used in change during the time. At first, Figure 90 represents the control stream of Change Time (change time) order 30900, and this order changes local switch time and the time difference. Among Figure 90, the switch operator inputs after the Change Time order, and switch enters step 30902, prompting operation person input the local switch time and with time difference of UTC time. In step 30902, the operator inputs new local switch time and the time difference. Proceed to step 30904, new time and the time difference are shown back to the switch operator. Proceed to step 30906, the switch operator must confirm time and time difference of inputting before actual change time and departure on the switch. If the operator has verified change in step 30906, switch just proceeds to step 30908 and generates the SER that the event qualifier equals 2, and expression has changed local switch time and the time difference of switch. Booking center does to keep accounts with this SER and processes. Switch proceeds to step 30910, exits command. Look back at step 30906, if the switch operator does not confirm to change, switch just proceeds to step 30910, does not upgrade local switch time and the time difference just to exit command. More detailed content about SER can be referring to Figure 86.

Figure 91 represents the control stream of second order that changes the time-Change Daylight Savings Time (change daylight saving time) order 31000. Among Figure 91, the switch operator inputs after the Change Daylight Savings Time order, and switch enters step 31002, and prompting operation person's input selection forward direction or backward time change. Proceed to step 31004, switch the operator make one's options. In step 31004, if the switch operator selects the forward direction option, switch enters step 31006. In step 31006, switch before the time was transferred local switch one hour, will add one hour the time difference (60 count values). Then switch proceeds to step 31010. Get back to step 31004, if the switch operator selects backward option, switch after the time is transferred local switch one hour, will deduct one hour the time difference (60 count values). Then switch proceeds to step 31010.

In step 31010, the switch operator must confirm forward direction or rear to selecting and new local switch time and the time difference before the actual change time. If the operator has confirmed new time and the time difference in step 31010, switch just proceeds to step 31012, generates local switch time and the SER time difference, that the event qualifier equals 9 who changes switch. Switch proceeds to step 31014, exits command. Look back at step 31010, if the switch operator does not confirm to change, switch just proceeds to step 31014, does not upgrade local switch time and the time difference just to exit command.

After Change Daylight Savings Time order was successfully completed, booking center just was subjected to the impact of the new time difference. Present embodiment allows to be used as the time in epoch of record keeping time by the normal increase of daylight saving time variation program, is not subjected to the impact of the variation of local switch time and the time difference.

2. calling network identifier

An embodiment provides the exclusive NCID that distributes to each call through communication network. So NCID is the discrete identifier in the all-network calling. Each transmission of switch place and record that NCID relates in call.

The initial exchange machine of call generates NCID. The embodiment of the selected NCID of the present invention is one 82 identifier, is comprised of following subdomain:

I) ingress switch ID (14): this territory representative defined NCS switch ID in each switch place such as office's quantity sheet. Yet the SER call record contains the alphanumeric representation of switch ID. Therefore, switch is retrieved the index of corresponding NCS switch ID in database with alphanumeric switch ID conduct.

Ii) the junction line group (14) that starts: this territory representative defined junction line group that starts in 32/64 above-mentioned word call record form.

Iii) originating terminal slogan (19): this territory representative defined originating terminal slogan in 32/64 above-mentioned word call record form.

Iv) time point 1 (32): this territory representative is defined time point 1 value in 32/64 above-mentioned word call record form.

V) sequence number (3): this territory represents the number of the calling that occurs with same time point 1 (second) value on the same originating terminal slogan. First call will have one to be set to ' 0 ' sequence number. When each time of origin point 1 was worth identical calling on the originating terminal slogan later on, this value increased progressively.

Creating the NCID of different-format, is apparent to the skilled person of correlative technology field. Each switch is with the format record NCID of 32 or 64 word call records. With regard to 32 word call record forms, if when centre and termination switch will be not used in the authorization code territory record out of Memory NCID is recorded in the authorization code territory of 32 word call record forms. In this case, ingress switch ID is exactly NCS switch ID, rather than the alphanumeric switch ID that records in the SER call record. When if the authorization code territory is used to record out of Memory, middle and termination switch will be recorded in NCID in the 64 word call record forms. Differently therewith be, when ingress switch is stored NCID in 32 word call records without the authorization code territory. Ingress switch is recorded in each subdomain of NCID in the 32 word call records in each corresponding independent domains. In other words, ingress switch ID is used as in the switch ID territory that alphanumeric switch ID is stored in the SER call record; The junction line group that starts is stored in the junction line group territory of starting of 32 word call records; The originating terminal slogan is stored in the port territory of starting of 32 word call records; Time point 1 is stored in time point 1 territory of 32 word call records; Sequence number is stored in the NCID sequence number territory of 32 word call records. 32 word call records also comprise territory, a NCID position (NCIDLOC), are used for sign NCID and are when being recorded to the authorization code territory of call record. If the NCID position field contains ' 1 ', then NCID is contained in the authorization code territory. If the NCID position field contains ' 0 ', then NCID is stored in the subdomain independent in the call record. Be set to ' 1 ' with termination switch ability NCID position field in the middle of only having, because ingress switch is stored in NCID in the independently territory of 32 word call records.

With regard to 64 word call record forms, the call record of this expansion comprises an independent domains that is called the NCID territory, is used for the NCID of 82 of storages. No matter start, middle or termination switch storage NCID, the processed mode of this call record is identical. In 64 word call record forms, ingress switch ID is NCS switch ID, rather than the alphanumeric switch ID as recording in the SER call record.

Figure 92 represents the control stream that calling network identifier calling of switchboard is processed. In step 31104, calling 30202 enters switch 30106-30110 and (claims current switch when quoting; Be that current switch is the current switch of processing calling). In step 31104, switch 30106-30110 access local database goes to retrieve the junction line group parameter related with the junction line group that starts of calling out 30202. After obtaining parameter, current switch proceeds to step 31108. In step 31108, current switch judges whether it receives the NCID of calling 30202. Do not call out 30202 NCID if current switch is received, switch proceeds to step 31112.

In step 31112, the switch analysis junction line group parameter that starts is with the start type of junction line group parameter of judgement. Junction line group parameter type is intermachine trunk (IMT) or discharges link trunking line (RLT) if start, and switch just proceeds to step 31116. IMT is the junction line that connects two standard telecommunications switch, and RLT connects intelligent service networks (ISN) platform to the junction line of standard telecommunications switch. When current switch arrived step 31116, current switch knew that it is not ingress switch, does not receive NCID. In step 31116, the current switch analysis junction line group parameter that starts judges whether it has the right to create NCID for calling out 30202. In step 31116, if current switch haves no right to create NCID for calling out 30202, current switch just advances to step 31118. When current switch when step 31118 knows that it is not ingress switch, it does not receive and calls out 30202 NCID, but uncommittedly removes to generate a NCID. Therefore in step 31118, current switch will be write the local switch database with calling out 30202 related call records, then advance to step 31120. In step 31120, current switch will be called out 30202 NCIDs related with it and go out by Internet Transmission together. Hereinafter illustrate in greater detail step 31120.

Referring to step 31116, if current switch has the right to create NCID for calling out 30202, current switch just advances to step 31114 again. In step 31114, current switch generates new NCID for calling out 30202, then advances to step 31136. In step 31116, current switch will be called out the call record of 30202 associations-comprise that NCID-writes the local switch database, then advances to step 31120. In step 31120, current switch will be called out 30202 NCIDs related with it and go out by Internet Transmission together. Hereinafter illustrate in greater detail step 31120.

Referring to step 31112, if current switch judges that the trunk group class type that starts is not IMT or RLT, current switch just advances to step 31114 again. When arriving step 31114, current switch knows that it is ingress switch, therefore is necessary for to call out 30202 generation NCID. Hereinafter illustrate in greater detail step 31114. Current switch advances to step 31116 after step 31114 generates NCID, will call out the call record of 30202 associations-comprise that NCID-writes local data base. Write after the call record, current switch advances to step 31120, goes out by Internet Transmission together calling out the NCID related with it. Hereinafter illustrate in greater detail step 31120.

Again referring to step 31108, if current switch judges that it has received and call out 30202 NCID that current switch just advances to step 31110. In step 31110, the NCID that current switch processes receives. In step 31110, two possible outcomes are arranged. The first, current switch may determine not keep the NCID of reception, removes to generate new NCID so advance to step 31114 from step 31110. Hereinafter illustrate in greater detail step 31110. In step 31114, current switch generates new NCID for calling out 30202, then advances to step 31116. Step 31114 also illustrates in greater detail hereinafter. In step 31116, current switch will be called out the call record of 30202 associations and write local data base. Then current switch advances to step 31120, goes out by Internet Transmission together calling out the NCID related with it. Hereinafter illustrate in greater detail step 31120.

Referring to step 31110, current switch can determine to keep the NCID of reception, advances to step 31115 from step 31110 thus again. In step 31115, the NCID that receives is added in the call record of calling out 30202 associations. Hereinafter illustrate in

greater detail step

31110 and 31115. After the step 31115, current switch proceeds to step 31136, and the call record of calling out 30202 associations is write local data base. Then current switch advances to step 31120, goes out by Internet Transmission together calling out the NCID related with it. Hereinafter illustrate in greater detail step 31120.

Figure 93 represents to process the control logic of the step 31110 of the NCID that receives. Current switch enters the step 31202 of step 31110 when determining to receive the NCID of calling 30202. In step 31202, the current switch analysis junction line group parameter that starts is judged the trunk group class type that starts. The relaying group is IMT or RLT if start, and current switch just advances to step 31212. In step 31212, current switch recognizes that it is not that ingress switch and it have received and calls out 30202 NCID. So in step 31212, current switch keeps the NICD that receives and withdraws from step 31110, proceeds to thus the step 31115 of Figure 92, then, current switch will be stored NCID and the call transmission that receives in call record.

Refer again to step 31202, if the junction line group that starts is not IMT or RLT, current switch just advances to step 31204. In step 31204, current switch judges that the type of the junction line group that starts is the direct line attachment of integrated service User Part (ISUP DAL) or ISDN basic rate interface (ISDN PRI). ISUP is a kind of permission sends to as information parameter information switch from switch signaling protocol. ISUP DAL is a kind of junction line group of mainly being shared, can be exclusively used in again the single network client by a plurality of network clients. Different from it is, ISDN PRI is a kind of junction line group that mainly is exclusively used in the single network client, can be shared by a plurality of network clients again. Network client is the entity of leasehold network resource. In step 31204, if current switch judges that the trunk group class type is not ISUP DAL or ISDN PRI, current switch just advances to step 31206. In step 31206, current switch has known that NCID that it has received is not by the switch of a communication network part or the client's of network switch generates. So in step 31206, current switch is just abandoned the NCID that receives, because it is not reliable NCID. Current switch withdraws from step 31110 from step 31206, proceeds to thus the step 31114 of Figure 92, current switch will this create new NCID and with NCID with calling out 30202 transmission.

Later referring to step 31024, if current switch judges that the trunk group class type that starts is ISUP DAL or ISDN PRI, current switch just proceeds to step 31208. In step 31208, current switch has known that it has received NCID from client's junction line group. The junction line group parameter so current switch analysis is started judges whether it is authorized to be calling 30202 and creates new NCID. Current switch can be authorized to create a new NCID, and the NCID that is provided by the client is provided, to guarantee with to call out 30202 corresponding and be an effective NCID by the network transmission. In step 31208, if current switch haves no right to create new NCID for calling out 30202, current switch just advances to step 31210. In step 31210, the validity of the current switch inspection NCID that receives is NCID length for example. If the NCID that receives invalid, current switch just advances to step 31206. In step 31206, current switch is abandoned invalid NCID. Current switch withdraws from step 31110 from step 31206, proceeds to thus the step 31114 of Figure 92, current switch will this create new NCID and with NCID with calling out 30202 transmission.

Refer again to step 31210, if current switch judge the NCID that receives effective, current switch just advances to step 31212. In step 31212, current switch keep the NCID that receives and withdraw from step 31110, proceed to thus the step 31115 of Figure 92, then, current switch will be stored NCID and the call transmission that receives in call record.

Figure 94 A represents to generate the control logic of the step 31114 of NCID. Current switch enters step 31302 in the time must creating a NCID. In step 31302, sequence number of current switch computes. The number of the calling that time point that the representative of this sequence number number occurs at same port 1 is identical. First calling will have ' 0 ' sequence number, increase progressively during the identical calling of time point 1 value that at every turn starts on same port number after the sequence number. After step 31202 created sequence number, current switch advanced to step 31304. In step 31304, current switch creates a call record for calling out 30202, comprises the NCID of the new establishment of calling 30202 in the call record. Create after the call record, current switch withdraws from step 31114, advances to the step 31136 of Figure 92, and current switch is write the local switch database at this with call record.

Figure 94 B represents reception NCID is added to the control logic of the step 31115 in the call record of calling out 30202 associations. After entering step 31115, current switch enters 31306. In step 31306, current switch knows that it has received an effective NCID from middle or termination switch or from customer switch. In step 31306, current switch judges whether that the authorization code territory of 32 word call records can be used for storing this NCID. If there is the authorization code territory to use, current switch just advances to step 31310. In step 31310, current switch is stored NCID in the authorization code territory of 32 word call records. Current switch also must the NCID position field be set to ' 1 '-expression NCID and be stored in the authorization code territory. After the step 31310, current switch withdraws from step 31115, advances to the step 31136 of Figure 92, and current switch is write the local switch database at this with call record.

Referring to step 31306, if the with no authorized code domain can be used in the 32 word call records, current switch just advances to step 31308 again. In step 31308, current switch is stored NCID in the NCID territory of 64 word call records. After the step 31308, current switch withdraws from step 31115, advances to the step 31136 of Figure 92, and current switch is write the local switch database at this with call record.

Figure 95 represents to transmit the control logic from the step 31120 of the calling of current switch. This control logic has two entrances: step 31402 and 31412. After the step 31136 from Figure 92 entered step 31402, current switch knew that it has created a NCID or has received an effective NCID. In step 31402, current switch-access local data base reads the junction line group parameter related with the termination junction line group that is used for call transmission 30202. After obtaining parameter, current switch advances to step 31404. In step 31404, current switch is judged termination trunk group class type. If the termination junction line is the ISUP junction line, current switch just advances to step 31408. In step 31408, analyze the parameter related with this ISUP trunk type, determine whether and will transmit NCID to next switch. If current switch has the right to transmit NCID, current switch advances to step 31416. In step 31416, current switch will be called out together with SS7 initial address message (IAM) and be transferred to next switch. NCID transmits as the part of the general digital parameters of IAM. IAM contains the useful information of setting up of next switch, prepares next switch and receives and finish calling 30202. The form of general digital parameters is shown in following table 306.

General digital parameters:

Code: 11000001

Type: 0

Byte #, position	Describe
Byte #, position	Describe	Byte 1, position 0-4	Numeric type: the content of indication parameter. This territory has a binary value ' 11011 ' to represent that parameter contains NCID.
Byte 1, position 5-7	Encoding scheme: the form of indication parameter content. This territory has a binary value ' 011 ' to represent that NCID stores with binary format.	Byte 1, position 0-4
Byte 1, position 5-7		Byte 2, position 0-7 byte 3, position 0-5	Ingress switch ID
Byte		Byte 2, position 0-7 byte 3, position 0-5	Ingress switch ID
Byte	3, position 6-7 byte 4, position 0-7 byte 5, position 0-3	The junction line group starts
Byte 5, position 4-7 byte 6, position 0-7 byte 7, position 0-6	3, position 6-7 byte 4, position 0-7 byte 5, position 0-3	The junction line group starts	The originating terminal slogan

Byte

7, position 7	Need not
7, position 7	Need not	Byte 8, position 0-7 byte 9, position 0-7 byte 10, position 0-7 byte 11, position 0-7	Time point 1
Byte 12, position 0-2	The NCID sequence number		Time point 1
Byte 12, position 0-2	The NCID sequence number	Byte
12, position 3-7	Need not	Byte

Table 306

After call transmission 30202 and the IAM, current switch advances to step 31418, withdraws from thus switch processes.

Again referring to step 31408, if the next switch that current switch is had no right in the IAM message transmits NCID, current switch advances to step 31412. In step 31412, current switch will be called out 30202 by normal processes and be transferred to next switch, and normal processes comprises to IAM message that wherein NCID is not exchanged as a general digital parameters part of next switch transmission. After the call transmission 30202, current switch advances to step 31418, withdraws from thus recording processing.

Refer again to step 31404, junction line is not ISUP if current switch is judged termination, and current switch just advances to step 31406.

In step 31406, current switch judges that termination junction line group is ISDN junction line (this termination junction line group is exclusively used in a network client). If termination junction line group is ISDN, current switch advances to step 31410. In step 31410, the parameter that current switch analysis is related with ISDN trunk group class type determines whether to next switch and transmits NCID. If current switch has the right to transmit NCID, current switch advances to step 31414. In step 31414, current switch is transferred to next switch together with the same message of setting up of the company of calling. Set up message and contain the useful information of setting up of next switch, prepare next switch and receive and finish calling 30202. NCID transmits as a part that latchs displacement code set 6 parameters of setting up message. Latch the form of displacement code set 6 parameters shown in following table 307.

Latch displacement code set 6 parameters:

Code: 11000001

Type: 0

Byte #, position	Describe
Byte #, position	Describe	Byte 1, position 0-4	Numeric type: the content of indication parameter. This territory has a binary value ' 11011 ' to represent that parameter contains NCID.
Byte 1, position 5-7	Encoding scheme: the form of indication parameter content. This territory has a binary value ' 011 ' to represent that NCID stores with binary format.	Byte 1, position 0-4
Byte 1, position 5-7		Byte 2, position 0-7 byte 3, position 0-5	Ingress switch ID
Byte		Byte 2, position 0-7 byte 3, position 0-5	Ingress switch ID
Byte	3, position 6-7 byte 4, position 0-7 byte 5, position 0-3	The junction line group starts
Byte 5, position 4-7 byte 6, position 0-7 byte 7, position 0-6	3, position 6-7 byte 4, position 0-7 byte 5, position 0-3	The junction line group starts	The originating terminal slogan
	Byte		The originating terminal slogan
7, position 7	Byte	Need not
7, position 7	Byte 8, position 0-7 byte 9, position 0-7 byte 10, position 0-7 byte 11, position 0-7	Need not	Time point 1
Byte 12, position 0-2		The NCID sequence number	Time point 1
Byte 12, position 0-2	Byte	The NCID sequence number
12, position 3-7	Byte	Need not

Table 307

Call transmission 30202 and setting up after the message, current switch advances to step 31418, withdraws from thus switch processes.

Again referring to step 31410, if current switch determines that it haves no right to transmit NCID to the next switch of setting up in the message, current switch advances to step 31412. In step 31412, current switch will be called out 30202 by normal processes and be transferred to next switch, and normal processes comprises to next switch and sends one wherein not with the set up message of NCID as the part of records that latchs code set 6 parameters that are shifted. After the call transmission 30202, current switch advances to step 31418, withdraws from thus switch processes.

Refer again to step 31412, this step also can-current switch do not receive NCID, current switch be in the middle of or the termination switch, when current switch haves no right to create NCID-enter from the step 31118 of Figure 92. In this case, in step 31412, current switch also will be called out 30202 by normal processes and be transferred to next switch, normal processes comprise to next switch send one wherein not with NCID as the IAM of the part of records of parameter or set up message. After the call transmission 30202, current switch advances to step 31418, withdraws from thus switch processes.

A kind of switch for communication network, be the system and method that call generates call record with flexible and extendible record format. After receiving call, switch in the network is analyzed call, judge default call record whether enough large, can store the call log information about call, perhaps whether must store call log information about call with the call record of expanding. Determine will use after the sort of record, switch generates default or the expansion call record. In case filled whole record keeping piece, the record keeping piece that switch just will contain the call record of finishing sends to booking center.

XXII. priority access/router

A. priority access/router general introduction

The design of priority access/router (PAR) is intended to the feature of integrated internet access device and Internet Protocol (IP) router. It makes dialing modem access the Internet to IP and reverse IP to the PPP/SLIP conversion by carrying out basic modem and PPP/SLIP. It is analyzing IP source of packets/destination-address and UPD or tcp port also, is the suitable network interface of going out of each minute group selection. At last, it is more more preferential than the grouping of mailing to other network interface with the grouping that a kind of preferential Route Selection technology mails to particular network interface.

The design object of priority access/router is that the data communication of the real-time communication on the interference networks and all the other best endeavors (best-effort) is separated. In real time and the interactive multimedia communication preferably will with do not have the communication of real-time constraint to separate at Internet access point place so that acquisition is to the larger control of quality of service. Figure 114 A is the block diagram according to the access/route system of preferred embodiment.

B. priority access/router process

1. computer is put through PAR by modem. Computer modulating demodulator and PAR modem (11410) negotiation data transfer rate and modem protocol parameter.

2. computer connects point-to-point protocol (PPP) session of setting up with PAR with the modem in public switch telephone network (PSTN) connection to modem.

3. computer connects the grouping to PAR transmission PPP with this modem. PAR modem (11410) is transferred to PPP to IP transfer process (11420) through modem to host interface (11480) with the PPP grouping. Modem can be any physical interface of using at present or remain to be invented to host interface. Some present example is ISA, EISA, VME, SCbus, MVIP bus, storage channel and TDM bus. With multiplexed bus as mentioned here the time division multiplex bus some advantages are arranged because can for specific data stream incline its behavior that can and keep determine.

PPP to IP transfer process (11420) with the PPP packet switched after IP grouping, the grouping of the IP after the conversion has been journey interface (11485) through process has been transferred to packet classifiers (11450). Process can be physical interface between the application specific processor hardware to the process interface, also can be software interface. Process comprises function or subroutine call, message queue, shared drive, direct memory access (DAM) and mailbox to some examples of the software interface of process.

5. packet classifiers (11485) judges whether grouping belongs to any special preferential group. Packet classifiers keeps a flow specification table, and this table is defined by following content:

IP address, destination

Source IP address

The IP address, source/destination ground of combination

The destination IP address/udp port of combination

The destination IP address/tcp port of combination

Source IP address/the udp port of combination

Source IP address/the tcp port of combination

The source IP address of combination and with TCP or the udp port of source IP address

Location and TCUDP port and the TCP/UDP port of the IP address, destination, IP area, source of combination

The IP address of using in the packet classifiers contrast grouping and UDP or tcp port check its flow specification table. If find coupling, just with this packet classification for belonging to certain preferential flow and marking with precedence designation. The resource reservation setup protocol technology can be used for this packet classifiers step.

6. packet classifiers (11450) will have precedence designation and be journey interface (11490) without the grouping of precedence designation through process and given packet scheduler (11460). Process needn't be equal to process to process interface (11485) to process interface (11490), but can adopt the identical choice of technology. Packet scheduler (11460) is used such as priority queue's technology of Weighted Fair Queuing and is helped guarantee the higher priority of (being identified by packet classifiers) prior packet acceptance, can be placed on the position that the best that is positioned at competition in the network interface formation of going out is made great efforts the communication front.

7. packet scheduler (11460) will divide into groups to give any go out network interface (11410,11470,11471 or 11472) through primary processor to external bus (11495) by priority. Can use the network interface of going out of any amount.

8. similar with step 3, the IP grouping can arrive PAR through dec non-modem DEC interface (11470,11471,11472). Some examples of these interfaces comprise Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, FDDI, ATM and frame relay. When IP grouping when modem PPP interface arrives, same steps 5 to 7 are experienced in these groupings.

9. the preferential flow explanation is managed by controller process (11430). The controller process can be accepted the outside preferential reservation that proposes by external control API (11440). Controller contrast is permitted control procedure and strategic process and is confirmed preferential reservation to specific stream, if reservation obtains permitting, just this flow specification has been journey interface (11465) through process and has inputted flow specification table in the packet classifiers (11450). Process needn't be equal to process to process interface (11485) to process interface (11465), but can adopt the identical choice of technology.

XXIII. callback telephone system

A. to the introduction according to the callback telephone system of preferred embodiment

In current telephony environment, the caller must contact the operator and could start Conference Calling and/or make all correspondent dial common number and connect into Conference Calling. This just requires to expend human operator who, is not easy to dial the predetermined number that will propagate, and these all become the expense of each Conference Calling. This also makes the efficient that arranges Conference Calling and all correspondent of assurance to participate in very low. This also requires to access with convenient calling for all correspondent with a special number.

According to preferred embodiment, by the calling subscriber observe computer demonstration, fill in the information of the parameter of describe calling out, make callback system become convenient. The telephone number of all correspondent of calling out if any, the date and time that calling should start, charging information, participation of the information that can catch. Then, according to the information of inputting, with central authorities or the Distributed Calculation device of energy access hybrid network network, to each the correspondent transmission of e-mail notice that requires to participate in calling, copy other correspondent to confirm participation and this event is charged to schedule. Email will comprise any details, such as with the password of correlation of call, call out the event that will begin. Also to reserve necessary network implementation, to ensure suitable service quality (QOS), when desired date and time arrives, just can start calling by contacting each participant, no matter the phone that is attached to PSTN of participant's use or be attached to the device with voice functions (such as computer or intelligent television) of hybrid network. The plan of calling out, startup or the duration any moment, any correspondent can both by from the demonstration of correlation of call select the method for service to come solicit operation person to help. Like this, just provide a kind of full automatic callback system for call setup and control.

For the calling subscriber of regular this callback system of use, provide a customization profile, as the expansion to the existing profile information of user. The customization profile allows the user to store the Conference Calling participant's of frequent appearance information. Profile contain participant's telephone number (can be DDD, IDDD, IP address or cell phone number), Email, paging service, fax number, secretary's telephone number, position, time zone, working time and other to start call out for information about useful. Also allow the default profile based on company or organization need, can on the basis of more comprehensive information, adapt to satisfy specific user's needs to them.

Charging information is provided also onlinely. The user can input predetermined account number or can keep accounts to credit card or telephone number. If keep accounts to telephone number, system confirms to keep accounts just as docking collect billing phone or third party call to calling out.

If be the pre-defined profile information of specific calling scheme, then another kind of the selection is to allow to connect immediately when pressing the button Conference Calling or single calling, this is the spitting image of the speed dialling of present usefulness, difference is, there is not calling party's intervention just can add more than one caller, support the Internet call person, can add the operator when needing.

B. based on the callback architecture of internet

Following information discussion is according to the detailed construction based on the callback architecture of internet of preferred embodiment. Represented the block diagram according to the architecture of preferred embodiment among Figure 114 B. Shown among Figure 114 B 11410, during the beginning of callback call stream, the local the Internet service provider 11419 of caller's 11412 incoming calls. The caller is by being shown as the internet that is labeled as basic Internet Protocol platform 11419-look for callback server 11414 with access callback homepage 11411 among the internet 11419-figure. The caller in callback server homepage 11411 input, check and/or upgrade default information, such as at least callback Internet Protocol (IP) address, calling-to telephone number (perhaps will start a plurality of telephone numbers of Conference Calling) and (call-to) method of charging at least-arrive. Out of Memory such as one or more numbers that comprise direct distarce dialing (DDD), international direct dialing (IDDD) or Internet Protocol (IP) address entries, also can be used for the regulation telephone number or the Internet computer of voice functions is arranged. In addition, can also be scheduled to carry out the date and time of callback operation. Describe the out of Memory that to catch at callback server homepage 11411 in detail by the object lesson that is used for explaining of preferred embodiment design hereinafter.

Then 11420, callback server 11414 sends to callback switch 11432 has the message of suitable call information, callback switch 11432 starts a callback lead-in wire by common service telephone network (PSTN) 11435, and (callback leg)-shown in step 11430, the callback calling subscriber answers the incoming call to 11437 thus to the destination that the calling subscriber stipulates. In case be ready to the end that the calling subscriber calls out, the callback switch just starts calling to calling lead-in wire, and the latter arrives telephone set 11446 and/or 11447 by PSTN 11445 with this call connection by path 11440. In case connected all calling subscribers, then when the state variation of caller, if then it is that IP calls out, just indicate exception at display, if perhaps the calling subscriber is at the Application standard telephone plant, the audio frequency that just transmits this situation to the calling subscriber is indicated. The variation of state may be in calling subscriber's on-hook or the transmission glitch to occur. Exception also is hunted down for Analysis on Quality of Service.

The information that is input to callback server homepage 11411 when utilization start to be called out, and during as the initialized part of callback session, just creates independent interim web page or leaf, can be visited by the password of being selected by session session initiation person by all members. Connecting and duration whole phone experience all calling subscribers, calling out state change and the exception of lead-in wire indicates at the interim state web page or leaf that creates, if perhaps suitable, if the calling subscriber at the Application standard telephone plant, is just transmitted the audio frequency indication of this situation to the calling subscriber. Then, along with the calling subscriber is connected, removes or the change state, show the state that is updated to reflect each participant's connection. In addition, along with the carrying out that calls out, participant's energy drag and drop file, visual montage or any other will be used as the information of cooperation material during calling out. Require each participant before call ending, information to be moved on to their PC, because the web page or leaf is interim, deleted during call ending. Interim web page or leaf is subjected to password protection, to avoid the use of going beyond one's commission to the information that contains in the web page or leaf.

C. call back service potentiality

Call back service comprises that support is called out one to one, one-to-multiple call (transmit, voice dialogues sound message is transmitted, the Conference Calling reservation by Conference Calling, faxcasting, Text To Speech message, server thus with the Conference Calling details to call out-send Email to (call-to) participant, server to call out-send fax to (call-to) participant, perhaps server is to calling-send Text To Speech message to (call-to) participant.

D. internet service potentiality

Each Conference Calling participant's real-time status figure, ANI and when " reservation " one calls out by each participant's of sign of startup person's input alphanumeric representation, can when the participant is connected to meeting, show at screen. The part of this information call record that narrated as preamble, that describe in detail in appendix is hunted down.

In another embodiment, allow not have the Conference Calling of callback lead-in wire. In this embodiment, the callback client uses by online speech (VON) with the computer that voice functions is arranged and participates in, can start at computer display and eject a video screen, the human operator may that request above describes in detail in the explanation to vision operation person is supported.

E. based on the callback architecture of internet

In the callback architecture based on the internet shown in Figure 115, the callback calling subscriber dials in local the Internet service provider 11512. Then, the calling subscriber seeks and to contain

callback homepage

11510,11511 master server 11514. At callback server homepage 11511, the calling subscriber inputs above-described information, comprises at least callback Internet Protocol (IP) address, calling-to (call-to) telephone number (perhaps for starting a plurality of telephone numbers of Conference Calling) and charge-to (charge-to) method. Then, be call-flow for the mouth that will start calling, the callback server 11514 that callback server homepage 11511 is positioned at is to message with the necessary call information that generates from callback homepage 11511 of callback switch 11532 transmission. At last, the callback calling subscriber with the Internet service provider 11512 set up one with the speech IP session that starts client computer 11535. Then callback switch 11511 starts calling-call out lead-in wire to (call-to), will call out 11540 and outwards be routed to telephone set 11542 on common service telephone network 11541.

F. self-adjusting system

According to preferred embodiment, an expert system monitors each calling. This system comprises the rule of carrying out what logic when exception appears in definition. Rule comprises that according to calling be the special disposal of selecting route by PSTN or internet. In addition, if but system comprises that also one does not have other connection time spent to the default connection of human operator may. For example, if certain caller on-hook during teleconference, other caller is still connecting, and then sends an exception message to each caller who is still connecting, and notifies them this state variation. Another aspect of this expert system is to guarantee service quality (QOS) and produce the report of not only indicating integrality but also indicating exception. The scheduling of resource relies on this expert system, the latter when propose calling out can with or the resource of plan to regulating by dispatch call. For example, because the used all-calls of this system all is by callback switch (among among Figure 114 B 11432 and Figure 115 11532), if during the time period of callback user request, do not have enough trunk ports of going out, then this callback user just is prompted to select another time, perhaps is rejected this time access resources. This is used for prediction and when needs extra port and/or resource.

This paper describes a kind of method of more effective execution callback feature. The method that proposes has been exempted the needs to the outside local line attachment, has increased the number that can use simultaneously the user of callback feature. This method has been described virtual link rather than the physical connection of using from the remote test system to long-distance user. Local call circuit from the remote test system to long-distance user no longer is essential.

Below explanation provides and utilizes its loop through the client's of DXC I/O example. This is equally applicable to its loop through the client of other DXC type/level, and-use by remote test system and access the method for client's input port-by the switch access and test client's loop through the switch maintenance port by the TAD access.

Figure 116-Tu A

Figure 116 explanation is how to realize callback feature traditionally. In this illustration, the connection from digital VAX computer 11650 to remote test system by be to use the X.25 X.25 connection of network. Long-distance user 11660 for through client's loop choice of the DXC I/O 11617 that is positioned at test macro 11602 voice circuit. Test macro 11602 on long-distance user's display to long-distance user's 11660 display remindings " input ans back? " The telephone number of the phone 11603 in setting a trap is closed in long-distance user's 11660 inputs. Behind the telephone number of the phone in input is closed and set a trap, remote test system 11602 is selected its a local call line 11622. When detecting the dialing tone of local exchange carrier, remote test system 11602 is with regard to the dtmf tone of pulse dialing or transmission expression long-distance user's telephone number. Long-distance user's local exchange carrier receives incoming call and will call out on local line route and choose the phone 11603 of closing of long-distance user in setting a trap.

Long-distance user 11660 places off hook state with phone 11603, or can monitor client's the loop through DXC I/O 11617, or can start to the calling of customer phone with the signaling status of remote test system 11602. When the client answered phone, remote testing device 11660 just passed through test macro 11602 to client's communication from the phone 11603 that closes in setting a trap.

Figure 117-Tu B

Figure 117 represents a kind of method of utilizing virtual callback to realize callback feature according to preferred embodiment. In this architecture, the whole route from long-distance user to the remote test system all passes through Internet Protocol (IP) network. The two is equipped with all that the software of being convenient to IP-as mentioned before-it is with the IP destination-address of IP call connection to user's input long-distance user's computer 11721 and remote test system 11702. Long-distance user's computer 11721 is equipped with suitable internal modem or the NIC (NIC) of specially designed support loudspeaker and microphone function. User 11721 can carry out communication by modem or NIC card with the telephone headset that is equipped with loudspeaker and microphone. Telephone headset directly inserts in the modem or NIC card in the subscriber computer 11721.

Long-distance user 11721 has selected to be used for the speech Speech Path Test that the client of the DXC I/O 11717 that links to each other with test macro 11702 is passed through in its speech channel. The long-distance user will start the Internet phone software that resides on its computer 11721, and test macro 11702 shows a prompting to long-distance user 11721: " you want virtual callback? " If the selection "Yes", remote test system 11702 just starts its Internet phone software. The Internet phone software of remote test system 11702 can point out long-distance user 11721 that its IP address is provided. Input after its IP address, remote test system 11702 just starts to the IP of remote user computer 11721 to be called out. After having set up the IP connection of remote user computer 11721, the Internet phone software of remote test system 11702 is just asked to the connection of long-distance user 11721 the Internet phone software. In case long-distance user 11721 the Internet phone software is connected with the Internet phone software of remote test system 11702, long-distance user 11721 just has-describe in detail as mentioned like that-speech channel of the client in the test is monitored and the ability of communicating by letter.

It is useful that the long-distance user carries out whole communications by telephone headset and phone. Local line attachment no longer is essential. Remote test system is not supported to have the restriction of quantity of local line of the calling of callback feature, because do not re-use local line attachment; Therefore telephone operator is just no longer applicable to the charge of this locality access, because do not use local IP access.

Figure 118-Tu C

Figure 118 is the example according to the system architecture of the support IP of preferred embodiment. The remote test system of MCI provides the support that the speech speech channel is guaranteed test, dial plan and the necessary imperative structures of signaling status. In case suitable enhancement mode has been installed, the function of MCI remote test system just strengthens. With the software and hardware upgrade of long-range VAX 11876 and remote test system 11884, to support the used ICP/IP protocol of Internet traffic. This comprises interpolation TCP/IP systems soft ware and token ring, Ethernet or other network support card. Long-range VAX 11876 and remote test system 11884 are connected to token ring, Ethernet or other network.

In order to access wide area network (WAN) and/or internet, network links to each other with 11882 with router one 1878. Remote test system 11884 comprises makes remote test system 11884 can carry out the software that the speech speech channel guarantees test. This comprise select various signaling status-such as the loop begin, ground connection begins, the number that dials and suitable signaling (such as DTMF, dial impulse or multifrequency (MF))-ability. Remote test system 11884 is bridged to the Internet phone software with client's selected speech channel, in order to converse in client's circuit route monitoring and with the client. Remote user computer 11811 and remote test system 11884 are equipped with that the software of being convenient to IP-as mentioned before-it is with the IP destination-address of IP call connection to user's appointment.

Long-distance user's computer 11811 is equipped with suitable internal modem or supports the NIC (NIC) of loudspeaker and microphone function. The telephone headset that the user will be equipped with loudspeaker and microphone directly inserts in the modem or NIC card in the subscriber computer 11811, just can support monitoring and Language Communication.

This paper describes a kind of new service and function for carry out speech and data communication by the internet. The client can be scheduled to this business with lower per minute price, thereby compare with the charge of all other IEC interexchange carriers, reduce their toll charge per month. The method of this communication is to the current revolution to dialing speech and data communication view in the world. This business can be divided into two stages releases that this paper will point out. Server/multi-layer switches are conceptual equipment, support the method for the physical/virtual communication that I propose, and just need development.

The present calling layout (placement) of the bright typical continent U.S. for instance. This is applicable too to global calling. Country and city codes will have the cross-index table in server switch, to identify the destination, city of external server switch.

Figure 119-Tu A

Figure 119 is the call-flow according to preferred embodiment. Remote personal computer (PC) user 11904 is by dial-up access 11902 access the Internet 11905. Subscribe the

PC

11903 and 11904 that this professional client has and be equipped with access to the Internet software, software allows them to connect and access server multi-layer switches 11906, to be software send calling to the IP of server multi-layer switches 11906 to its method, and the latter is movable account by account number and the password identification user that the client provides. User's

PC

11903 and 11904 is equipped with the modem of being convenient to loudspeaker and microphone function of suitable type.

The Internet phone software is upgraded its installation file, and indication is successfully installed, and to another PC identical software kit is installed with not allowing again. This inspection prevents that other people from illegally using this program. When the internet program start, the user is required to input the password of account number, user identifier and distribution. Password is alphanumeric, is the obstacle that illegally uses this program. Software program also has an optional button, and selective data mode sends fax or selects the talk mode to come Language Communication.

Before

PC

11903 or 11904 start-up routines, must input personal information, such as user account number, password and destination telephone number. After input domain (field) was finished, the user will select a mark to start transmission. For direct IP access, PC 11903 will communicate by letter with server multi-layer switches 11906. For the dial-up access from user PC 11904, the user at first will set up the dial-up connection with internet 11905. In case the dial-up connection of they and internet 11905 is set up, the user just starts the Internet phone software, sends IP to server multi-layer switches 11906 and calls out. Be connected in case user's

PC

11903 or 11904 has set up with the IP of server multi-layer switches 11906, user's account number and password will by 11906 checks of server multi-layer switches, be confirmed to be active account. After the information examination, server multi-layer switches 11906 just scan the destination number of being dialled, to determine and will transmit this calling with which destination server switch. If area code and the NXX of

user

11903 or 11904 inputs do not have server switch, so the user just is prompted to input another number.

(South Carolina) has three server switch in American South Carolina that state, main cities of each server switch service, Charleston (Charleston) 11907, Colombia (Columbia) 11908 and Florence (Florence) 11909. The dial-up client 11904 that is positioned at Washington city, U.S. District of Columbia home loop 11902 set up one with being connected of internet 11905. In case set up the access to internet 11905, user 11904 just starts the Internet phone software of installing on the PC 11904.

User 11904 is input to user identifier and password and destination telephone number in the suitable territory in the Internet phone software. Behind the input information, the connection button that user 11904 clicks in the Internet phone software. In this example, the user dials 803-554-9899 as the destination, and this is a telephone number in southern Carolina Na Zhou Charleston city.

Server multi-layer switches 11906 check its known this code of server routing table cross reference of area code 803 rear contrasts, determine that realizingly this telephone number is that state of southern Carolina server switch NPA. Then the server multi-layer switches scan 554, contrast the NXX table cross reference 554 in that state of southern Carolina, determine that it is the server switch of Charleston 11907. Server multi-layer switches 11906 scans I P cross-index tables, the IP address of searching Charleston server switch 11907. Decide on message capacity, there is more than one IP node to this switch in each city. The server multi-layer switches can determine which node has the expression lighter optimal response time of traffic load by table tennis (ping) each

node

11910,11911,11912 or 11913.

With regard to this example, node address 166.22.784.215 11911 is found to have optimal response. In case determined to have the IP address 11911 of optimal response time, server multi-layer switches 11906 just 11905 send IP and call out through node 11911 to Charleston server switch 11907 in the internet. In case set up the connection of Charleston server switch 11907, server multi-layer switches 11906 are just peeled off 803 NPA from call number, send calling to the Charleston server switch 11907 that is positioned at callee's exchange on internet 11905.

Charleston server switch 11907 is equipped with many FG-A accesses or FG-B switching trunk 11914, is connected to local exchange carrier's transit exchange 12015 or telephone company central office 12016, as shown in Figure 120. When one of line attachment 11914 is selected and is taken by Charleston server switch 11907, telephone operator just from local exchange carrier central office 12016 or transit exchange 12015 dialing tone is provided. In case detect dialing tone, Charleston server switch 11907 just-shown in Figure 120-from calling party 12014 to from the nearest telephone company central office 12016 of callee 12017, the numeral that pulse dialing (dialpulse), DTMF or MF receive. Figure 120 is the detailed application drawing according to the central office of preferred embodiment.

Telephone company central office 12016 is distinguished this NXX in its calling zone, by local call process 7 numerals receiving and with ringing cycle electric current be put on client's the home loop 12018, make phone 12017 rings of endpoint client. When the callee answered phone 12017, call legs just was through (cut through) and thinks and finish. Then MPTY 11904 just can carry out Language Communication with callee 12017 by the PC 11904 of MPTY.

This communication means also can be used at PC to PC communication Language Communication or transmission fax. Similarly architecture acts on global call. Country and city codes will carry out index with cross reference table, with the server switch IP destination of determining to go abroad.

The below is the routing table that an example provides according to preferred embodiment.

Routing table represents

NPA:803: that state of southern Carolina

NXX:522: Charleston

766: the Charleston

572: the Charleston

IP1：161.22.784.214

IP2：161.22.784.215

IP3：161.22.784.216

IP4：161.22.784.217

730: Colombia

761: Colombia

856: Colombia

IP1：166.22.796.112

IP2：166.22.796.113

IP3：166.22.796.114

IP4：166.22.766.115

943: Florence

683: Florence

IP1：166.22.796.122

IP2：166.22.796.123

IP3：166.22.796.124

IP4.166.22.766.125

Figure 121 represent one support PC on the internet to PC, PC to phone or phone to the block diagram of telephone communication. They need to be positioned at the exchange area of being served by server switch these users. The user travel outdoors and from the user residence beyond the ground party call time, can obtain to access by calling out the specific 800 number that is used for Speech Communication and being used for the specific 800 number that PC communicate by letter.

In the Phase configuration, do not need special-purpose Route Selection switch. Each main cities will be equipped with to process and arrive and the server switch of communicating by letter from two tunnel of local exchange carrier. Server switch can be equipped with that two tunnel feature group A or two road FG-B junction lines are supported to go to or from the inbound and export-oriented communication of the switch in the local exchange carrier.

Described in Phase I, the pc user will be equipped with the Internet phone software program of special exploitation. When the ground party call of user beyond from the user residence, require the user to input 800 suitable numbers. The Internet phone software has individual option, points out " residence " still " roaming " for user selection. If user selection " residence ", the user must be by PIC ' d to the MCI as the substantially long-distance supplier of user. Then user's calling is called out by equal access (Equal Access) and is dealt with, and does not need the checking of user identifier and password. If user selection " roaming " just requires the user to input suitable IP territory for the 800 number of long-range PC access. The user also is required to input its user account number. Software program has a selectable buttons, can be used for or select to send the data mode of fax or file transfer, or selects the talk mode of Language Communication.

The telephone subscriber will be with its main residence PIC ' d to MCI such as Tommy Zey 12149. When whilst on tour or during the ground party call beyond from main residence, the user will have a special 800 number to be used for the long-range server switch that dials to carry out Language Communication. When calling out from its main residence, it is called out and calls out processed by equal access. When the ground party call of user beyond from main residence, require it to dial be used to the suitable 800 number that is linked into server switch and carry out voice communication. In case set up the connection of server switch, server switch is inputted account number with regard to prompting user. In case server switch has received user's account number and verified that it is movable, the user just is prompted to input the number that its hope dials. At this moment, the user inputs its number of wishing calling, adds 7 telephone office's numbers behind area code. Can point out this user's input information by VAB voice answer back unit (VRU), this can simplify user instruction widely.

The user comes the access server switch by equal access or 800 tie-in lines. The local call intra-office of the telephone operator of server switch its conveyer arrives called number with the Internet use family under is as the remote server switch of call ending. Next explanation be calling example after the finishing of progressive switch type virtual communication network. From client's angle, the mode that all-calls is processed, just as they by the mode of the processing of standard conventional I MT switch, do not have difference. Exception a bit be that all-calls all is the destination switch that is routed to them on IP network rather than at intermachine trunk.

The client of Washington D.C. 12149 as its long-distance supplier, dials 18035524475 with MCI. Telephone operator 12151 identifies off-hook from client's home loop 12150, after telephone company central office 12,151 one receives 1, just knows that this calling will be routed to MCI. Calling 12151 is routed to telephone operator's tandem switch 12152 from the central office. Telephone operator's tandem switch 12152 sends to calling local MCI server switch 12154 on tandem tie-in line 12153. MCI server switch 12154 these ANI of identification are MCI client, just begin call-accounting after connection is finished. Server switch 12154 is from NPA scanning dialled digits, identify its for southern Carolina that. Server switch 12154 is scan N XX then, identifies it and is the NXX of Charleston. Then server switch 12154 scans its logic routing table, finds the suitable IP address of Charleston server switch 12158. Can there be a plurality of IP nodes 12157 that are connected to this switch in each city calmly on message capacity.

Server switch 12154 is (ping) each IP node 12157 ping, determine which node has the optimal response time, so communication load is lighter. In case determined to have the address of the IP node 12157 of optimal response time, server switch 12154 just will be called out to the IP of Charleston server switch 12158 in the internet 12156 and receive determined node 12155. In case set up and being connected of Charleston server switch 12158, Washington server switch 12154 is just peeled off 803 NPA and is delivered to Charleston server switch 12158 with 5524475. Server switch 12158 its physics routing tables of scanning in Charleston are determined 552 local switch for it. Charleston server switch 12158 is attached to local exchange carrier's tandem switch 12160 with its one of FG-A/FG-B tandem trunk. Then local exchange carrier's tandem switch 12160 is routed to the called number numeral appropriate phone company central office 12161 that service has telephone number account 5524475 client 12163.

Local central office 12161 receives the called numbers numeral from tandem switch 12160, takies 5524475 junction line 12162, at client's circuit 12162 is set ringing cycle. Cause ringing cycle and be positioned at 5524457 phone 12163 rings. When in destination, Charleston answer calls, call out and just to be considered as finishing, from the record keeping of the server 12154 in Washington, District of Columbia city. Client 12149 and the Charleston destination locations in Washington, District of Columbia city now just can carry out Language Communication.

Various embodiment below have been described, have should be understood that they only enumerate as an example, without limits meaning. Therefore the scope of preferred embodiment is not subjected to the restriction of above-mentioned exemplary embodiment, and can only define according to following claim and equivalent thereof.

Appendix table 301-CDR/PNR record format

Word #, position	Describe
Word #, position	Describe	Word 0, position 0-3	Call record ID (CRID): identification record type
	The default 1=CDR 2=SER of 0=3=PNR 4=OSR 5=POSR 6=ECDR 7=EPNR 8=EOSR 9=EPOSR 10-15=need not	Word 0, position 0-3	Call record ID (CRID): identification record type

Word 0, position 4-15	Calling disconnects ID (CDID): the identifying call letters record. Each is called out an exclusive ID. 12 least significant bits of CDID are contained in these 12 positions.
Word 0, position 4-15		Word 1, position 0-15 word 2, position 0-15	Time point 1 (TP1): the binary counting of the number of seconds that between the time that midnight January 1 (UTC) in 1976 and the exchanged machine examination of incoming call measure, occurs.
Word 3, position 0-12	Time point 3 (TP3): the binary counting of the number of seconds that between the time that time point 1 and outgoing signaling agreement are finished, occurs.	Word 1, position 0-15 word 2, position 0-15
Word 3, position 0-12		Word 3, position 13-15 word 4, position 0-9	Time point 6 (TP6): supervise the binary counting of the number of seconds that occurs between the time that is detected or receives at time point 1 and answer. This is to call out to be answered the time of being taken by the people who is called out or audio system.
Word 4, position 10-15 word 5, position 0-15	Time point 7 (TP7): the binary counting of the number of seconds that occurs between the time that no matter who disconnects at first in time point 1 and originators and termination side.	Word 3, position 13-15 word 4, position 0-9
Word 4, position 10-15 word 5, position 0-15		Word 6, position 0-15 word 7, position 0	Port (OP) starts: the absolute port numbers of the junction line that starts. The junction line that starts is the circuit that the calling on it arrives switch.
Word 7, position 1-15 word 8, position 0-1	Termination port (TP): the absolute port numbers of calling out the upper termination junction line that attempt takies for output. The termination junction line is to call out a upper circuit of transmission thereon.	Word 6, position 0-15 word 7, position 0
Word 7, position 1-15 word 8, position 0-1		Word 8, position 2-14	The junction line group that starts (OTG): the start binary system number of the junction line group number that starts of junction line of expression. The junction line group that starts is one group of port from same position.
Word 8, position 15 words 9, position 0-11	Termination junction line group (TTG): the binary system of the termination junction line group number of expression termination junction line number. Termination junction line group is one group of port of whereabouts same position. A junction line group number on probation is not recorded in failure owing to there is available junction line if call out.	Word 8, position 2-14
Word 8, position 15 words 9, position 0-11		Word 9, position 12-15	Time point 3 delimiters (TP3Q): contain the call treatment delimiter of pulse output, it provides to the people's of called people calling telephone number. Called people needs to undertake obligations for " ANI delivery " service is signatory and display is arranged for display of calling people's telephone number. The default 1=ANI/CSI of 0=is delivered

	2=DNIS delivered 3=ANI/CSI and DNIS delivered 4-5=without 6=NCT 7=NCT, ANI/CSI delivered 8=NCT, DNIS delivered 9=NCT, ANI/CSI and DNIS delivered 10=NCT serial 11-15=need not
		Word 10, position 0-1	Time point 6 qualifiers (TP6Q): the answer limitation symbol that contains the mode answered of indication call. The 0=hardware detection detects answer * to answer 1=software detection to speech 2=without 3*=operator/NARS need not in CDR/PNR
Word		Word 10, position 0-1
Word	10, position 2-7	Action identification code (AC): switch provides an action identification code, the type of indication destination-address, and perhaps called telephone number is what type, perhaps error code. The dialing of the graunch 9=mistake that occurs among action identification code 6=Incoming isolation (incoming exclusion) fault 7=ID code fault 8=NCS/DAP that the non-spill 7 figure place number 2=of the default 1=of 0=have the 7 figure place number 3=DDD number 4=IDDD number 5=switches that overflow to generate, NCS/DAP can not change the non-spill 10 figure place number 11=of the 10=that dials the number the 10 figure place numbers that overflow are arranged

The non-spill country of 12=(number) 13=have the world of overflowing (number) 14=ANI do not find 15=NPA-NXXX do not find the 16=guiding number do not find the related subregion of 17=do not find 18=ADF format error 19=switch ID do not find the 20=800 number do not find the 21=800 number be in outer (out of band) the 22=800 number of band no longer serve the invalid ID code of 23=24=scope privilege 25=7 figure place number not in database 26=7 bit digital isolation characteristic 27=900 number do not find 28=900 number band outside that the 29=900 number no longer serves the 30=NCS network management and block the 31=NCS door and refuse 32=FlexSTC; Do not allow to overflow 33=FlexSTC, allow to overflow the 34=SAC number and do not find that the 36=700 number does not find that the outer 39=NCT-reverse call direction 40-49=of ICR band of the outer 38=appointment of 37=700 number band has the flexible directly terminal call that overflows without the non-spill flexibly direct terminal call 51=of 50=outside the 35=SAC number band

	The non-spill outside Vnet 53=of 52=has ANI index 56-62=that the outside IVNet 54=global switch profile that overflows do not find that 55=DAP provides without the international inbound AAP of 63=
		Word 10, position 8-11	The junction line class that starts (OTC): indicating the accessed junction line that starts is that what type 0=ONAL (FG-A) 1=ONAL (FG-B, FG-C, FG-D, CAMA, LAMA) 2=DAL, VNET, CAMA, FGS-DAL 3=IMT (the interior or SS7 of band) 4=international circuit (R1, R2, #5, #6, #7) 5=ISDN PRI 6=OST 7-15=are without FG=feature group
Word 10, position 12-15	Termination junction line class (TTC): indicating accessed termination junction line is that what type 0=ONAL (FG-A) 1=ONAL (FG-B, FG-C, FG-D, CAMA, LAMA) 2=DAL, VNET, CAMA, FGS-DAL 3=IMT (the interior or SS7 of band) 4=international circuit (R1, R2, #5, #6, #7) 5=ISDN PRI 6=OST 7-15=are without FG=feature group	Word 10, position 8-11
Word 10, position 12-15		Word 11, position 0-7	Message digit (ID): switch from the junction line winding of starting receive these the indication calls start the place phone type-such as home phone number, pay phone or prison phone-numeral.

	The direct CAMA FG-D of FG-B MCI IMT #5 #6 position 0-3:TBCD zero X X TBCD zero X position 4-7:X X X X X
		Word
11, position 8-15	ANI (ANI) call number: this call number is to obtain from the ANI concordance list of the all-calls except 800 call out. The purpose of searching ANI number be determine the calling party be Vnet client whether. If the calling party is VNet calling party, number search destination-address with regard to index of reference.	Word
11, position 8-15		Word 12, position 0-15 word 13, position 0-15 word 14, position 0-7	Call out position ID (CLI): representative call out from 10 numerals. If switch receives numeral more than 10, just they are recorded in ECDR/EPNR. Have 9 classes to call out the position: 1.Vnet CAMA DAL starts: if CSI is available, with can with documentation HNPA and HNXX information come prefix CSI and record. NOCLI value with 7. 2.FG-C start: if ANI or CSI information are unavailable, and number format is 00Y+NXX+XXXX, then records 00Y in CLI1-3, records OSID/OTG in CLI4-10. NOCLI value with 8. 3. FG-D starts in the band: the ANI that begins with CLI1 that record is received. NOCLI value with 1. 4.SS7 FG-D starts: record charge number (if getable words), if can not get, with regard to metered call side's number. NOCLI value with 2 or 3. 5. start in the world: the country code of metered call side and national number. NOCLI value with 9. 6.SS7 IMT starts: record following information according to sequence of importance: 1) charge number, 2) caller number, 3) from the OSID/OTG of generic numeral. NOCLI value with 2,3 or 8. Discuss 7.SS7 resell and to start: with TBCD-zero padding CLI territory. 8.SS7 dedicated network starts: with TBCD-zero padding CLI territory. 9.PRI tissue: be recorded in the caller number that receives in the isdn setup message.

	Form: the international word 12 of 1-10 figure place ANI OSID/OTG input, position 0-3 CLI1 TCBD zero X (CC) word 12, position 4-7 CLI2 TCBD zero X (CC) word 12, position 8-11 CLI3 TCBD zero X (CC) word 12, position 12-15 CLI4 X (OSID) X (NN) word 13, position 0-3 CLI5 X (OSID) X (NN) word 13, position 4-7 CLI6 X (OSID) X (NN) word 13, position 8-11 CLI7 X (OTG) X (NN) word 13, position 12-15 CLI8 X (OTG) X (NN) word 14, position 0-3 CLI9 X (OTG) X (NN) word 14, position 4-7 CLI10 X (OTG) X (NN) CC=client connects NN=national number OSID=ingress switch NSC ID (000-999) the OTG=junction line group (0000-8191) that starts
		Word 14, position 8-15 word 15, position 0-15 word 16, position 0-15 word 17, position 0-15 word 18, position 0-15 word 19, position 0-15	Authorization code: whom represents for calling out 22 numerals paying the bill, comprise following one or more contents and/or optionally replenish code: 1. authorization code-contain authorization code numeral. AUTH1-AUTH5 records the authorization code of dialing or preservation, records the safety code SEC1-SEC4 of an optional variable 1-4 figure place after it, and the latter is comprised of TBCD numeral 0-9 and A-D. After last numeral, record a TBCD zero, after record the arbitrary additional code digit of SUPP1-SUPP12. Record TBCD zero in what obsolete byte in office. Authorization code form: 5 numerals, 6 digital 7 authorization code authorization code authorization code words 14, position 8-11 A1 AUTH1 AUTH1 AUTH1 word 14, position 12-15 A2 AUTH2 AUTH2 AUTH2 word 15, position 0-3 A3 AUTH3 AUTH3 AUTH3 word 15, position 4-7 A4 AUTH4 AUTH4 AUTH4

Word 15, position 8-11 A5 AUTH5 AUTH5 AUTH5 word 15, position 12-15 A6 SEC1 AUTH6 AUTH6 word 16, position 0-3 A7 SEC2 SEC1 AUTH7 word 16, position 4-7 A8 SEC3 SEC3 SEC1 word 16, position 8-11 A9 SEC4 SEC3 SEC2 word 16, position 12-15 A10 TBCD zero SEC4 SEC3 word 17, position 0-3 A11 SUPP1 TBCD zero SEC4 word 17, position 4-7 A12 SUPP2 SUPP1 TBCD zero word 17, position 8-11 A13 SUPP3 SUPP2 SUPP1 word 17, position 12-15 A14 SUPP4 SUPP3 SUPP2 word 18, position 0-3 A15 SUPP5 SUPP4 SUPP3 word 18, position 4-7 A16 SUPP6 SUPP5 SUPP4 word 18, position 8-11 A17 SUPP7 SUPP6 SUPP5 word 18, position 12-15 A18 SUPP8 SUPP7 SUPP6 word 19, position 0-3 A19 SUPP9 SUPP8 SUPP7 word 19, position 4-7 A20 SUPP10 SUPP9 SUPP8 word 19, position 8-11 A21 SUPP11 SUPP10 SUPP9 word 19, position 12-15 A22 SUPP12 SUPP11 SUPP10 2. calling-station-IDs (CSI)-the contain numeral of calling station identifier. The CSI numeral will be begun record from A1. Recording TBCD zero after last CSI numeral, is to replenish code digit subsequently. No byte contains TBCD zero. Calling-station-ID form: 7 figure place CSI, 10 figure place CSI words 14, position 8-11 A1 X X word 14, position 12-15 A2 X X word 15, position 0-3 A3 X X word 15, position 4-7 A4 X X word 15, position 8-11 A5 X X word 15, position 12-15 A6 X X word 16, position 0-3 A7 X X

Word

16, position 4-7 A8 TBCD zero X word 16, position 8-11 A9 SUPP1 X word 16, position 12-15 A10 SUPP2 X word 17, position 0-3 A11 SUPP3 TCBD zero word 17, position 4-7 A12 SUPP4 SUPP1 word 17, position 8-11 A13 SUPP5 SUPP2 word 17, position 12-15 A14 SUPP6 SUPP3 word 18, position 0-3 A15 SUPP7 SUPP4 word 18, position 4-7 A16 SUPP8 SUPP5 word 18, position 8-11 A17 SUPP9 SUPP6 word 18, position 12-15 A18 SUPP10 SUPP7 word 19, position 0-3 A19 SUPP11 SUPP8 word 19, position 4-7 A20 SUPP12 SUPP9 word 19, position 8-11 A21 SUPP11 SUPP10 word 19, position 12-15 A22 SUPP12 SUPP11 3. replenish code-additional code and begin record from A1. No byte contains TBCD zero. Replenish code format: 800/900 VNet replenishes code word 14, position 8-11 A1 SUPP1 word 14, position 12-15 A2 SUPP2 word 15, position 0-3 A3 SUPP3 word 15, position 4-7 A4 SUPP4 word 15, position 8-11 A5 SUPP5 word 15, position 12-15 A6 SUPP6 word 16, position 0-3 A7 SUPP7 word 16, position 4-7 A8 SUPP8 word 16, position 8-11 A9 SUPP9 word 16, position 12-15 A10 SUPP10 word 17, position 0-3 A11 SUPP11 word 17, position 4-7 A12 SUPP12

Word

17, position 8-11 A13 SUPP13 word 17, position 12-15 A14 SUPP14 word 18, position 0-3 A15 SUPP15 word 18, position 4-7 A16 SUPP16 word 18, position 8-11 A17 SUPP17 word 18, position 12-15 A18 SUPP18 word 19, position 0-3 A19 SUPP19 word 19, position 4-7 A20 SUPP20 word 19, position 8-11 A21 SUPP21 word 19, if 12-15 A22 SUPP22 4.VNet long-range access-calling subscriber in position is professional by long-range access service access Vnet, access code begins record from A1. In the end record TBCD zero after the numeral then is any additional code. No byte contains TBCD zero. The long-range access form of VNet: word 14, position 8-11 A1 X word 14, position 12-15 A2 X word 15, position 0-3 A3 X word 15, position 4-7 A4 X word 15, position 8-11 A5 X word 15, position 12-15 A6 X word 16, position 0-3 A7 X word 16, position 4-7 A8 X word 16, position 8-11 A9 X word 16, position 12-15 A10 X word 17, position 0-3 A11 TCBD zero word 17, position 4-7 A12 SUPP1 word 17, position 8-11 A13 SUPP2 word 17, position 12-15 A14 SUPP3 word 18, position 0-3 A15 SUPP4

Word

18, position 4-7 A16 SUPP5 word 18, position 8-11 A17 SUPP6 word 18, position 12-15 A18 SUPP7 word 19, position 0-3 A19 SUPP8 word 19, position 4-7 A20 SUPP9 word 19, position 8-11 A21 SUPP10 word 19, position 12-15 A22 SUPP11 5. caller number-the be SS7 FGD calling that receives with a charge number and caller number metered call side's number that starts. Record SS7 caller number in A1-10. In the end record TBCD zero after the numeral then is to replenish code. No byte contains TBCD zero. Caller number form: word 14, position 8-11 A1 N word 14, position 12-15 A2 X word 15, position 0-3 A3 X word 15, position 4-7 A4 N word 15, position 8-11 A5 X word 15, position 12-15 A6 X word 16, position 0-3 A7 N word 16, position 4-7 A8 X word 16, position 8-11 A9 X word 16, position 12-15 A10 X word 17, position 0-3 A11 TCBD zero word 17, position 4-7 A12 SUPP1 word 17, position 8-11 A13 SUPP2 word 17, position 12-15 A14 SUPP3 word 18, position 0-3 A15 SUPP4 word 18, position 4-7 A16 SUPP5 word 18, position 8-11 A17 SUPP6 word 18, position 12-15 A18 SUPP7

Word

19, position 0-3 A19 SUPP8 word 19, position 4-7 A20 SUPP9 word 19, position 8-11 A21 SUPP10 word 19, position 12-15 A22 SUPP11 6. credit card numbers-begin to record commercial letter of credit number or reservation credit card number from A1. Effectively the PIN numeral of reservation credit card number is by writing TBCD-A and conductively-closed in these 4 PIN numerals. In the end record TBCD zero after the numeral then is to replenish code. No byte contains TBCD zero. Credit card number form: word 14, position 8-11 A1 X word 14, position 12-15 A2 X word 15, position 0-3 A3 X word 15, position 4-7 A4 X word 15, position 8-11 A5 X word 15, position 12-15 A6 X word 16, position 0-3 A7 X word 16, position 4-7 A8 X word 16, position 8-11 A9 X word 16, position 12-15 A10 X word 17, position 0-3 A11 X word 17, position 4-7 A12 X word 17, position 8-11 A13 X word 17, position 12-15 A14 X word 18, position 0-3 A15 X word 18, position 4-7 A16 X word 18, position 8-11 A17 X word 18, position 12-15 A18 X word 19, position 0-3 A9 X word 19, position 4-7 A20 TBCD zero

Word 19, position 8-11 A21 SUPP1 word 19,7.14 MCI/VNet cards-14 of position 12-15 A22 SUPP2 digital call MCI card/VNet card number code begins record from A1, last 4 PIN numeral conductively-closeds by writing TBCD-A. In the end writing TBCD zero after the numeral, then is to replenish code. No byte contains TBCD zero. Call out MCI card/VNet card form: word 14, position 8-11 A1 X word 14, position 12-15 A2 X word 15, position 0-3 A3 X word 15, position 4-7 A4 X word 15, position 8-11 A5 X word 15, position 12-15 A6 X word 16, position 0-3 A7 X word 16, position 4-7 A8 X word 16, position 8-11 A9 X word 16, position 12-15 A10 X word 17, position 0-3 A11 TCBD-A word 17, position 4-7 A12 TBCD-A word 17, position 8-11 A13 TBCD-A word 17, position 12-15 A14 TBCD-A word 18, position 0-3 A15 TBCD-zero word 18, position 4-7 A16 SUPP1 word 18, position 8-11 A17 SUPP2 word 18, position 12-15 A18 SUPP3 word 19, position 0-3 A19 SUPP4 word 19, position 4-7 A20 SUPP5 word 19, position 8-11 A21 SUPP6 word 19, position 12-15 A22 SUPP7

Telecommunications/PTT card-these 23 numerals or still less the numeral telecommunications card begin record from A1. In the end record TBCD zero after the numeral then is to replenish code. No byte contains TBCD zero. Telecommunications card form: word 14, position 8-11 A1 X word 14, position 12-15 A2 X word 15, position 0-3 A3 X word 15, position 4-7 A4 X word 15, position 8-11 A5 X word 15, position 12-15 A6 X word 16, position 0-3 A7 X word 16, position 4-7 A8 X word 16, position 8-11 A9 X word 16, position 12-15 A10 X word 17, position 0-3 A11 X word 17, position 4-7 A12 X word 17, position 8-11 A13 X word 17, position 12-15 A14 X word 18, position 0-3 A15 X word 18, position 4-7 A16 X word 18, position 8-11 A17 X word 18, position 12-15 A18 X word 19, position 0-3 A19 X word 19, position 4-7 A20 X word 19, position 8-11 A21 X word 19, position 12-15 A22 X 9.OSID and OTG-are used for OSID and the OTG record when received from SS7 generic digital parameters called out to VNet or SAC in international. After the reference record, remaining byte contains TBCD zero. OSID and OTG form:

Word 14, position 8-11 A1 X (OSID) word 14, position 12-15 A2 X (OSID) word 15, position 0-3 A3 X (OSID) word 15, position 4-7 A4 X (OTG) word 15, position 8-11 A5 X (OTG) word 15, position 12-15 A6 X (OTG) word 16, position 0-3 A7 X (OTG) word 16, position 4-7 A8 TCBD zero word 16, position 8-11 A9 TCBD zero word 16, position 12-15 A10 TCBD zero word 17, position 0-3 A11 TCBD zero word 17, position 4-7 A12 TCBD zero word 17, position 8-11 A13 TCBD zero word 17, position 12-15 A14 TCBD zero word 18, position 0-3 A15 TCBD zero word 18, position 4-7 A16 TCBD zero word 18, position 8-11 A17 TCBD zero word 18, position 12-15 A18 TCBD zero word 19, position 0-3 A19 TCBD zero word 19, position 4-7 A20 TCBD zero word 19, position 8-11 A21 TCBD zero word 19, position 12-15 A22 TCBD zero OSID=ingress switch ID OTG=start junction line group 10. commercial group ID-concerning some SS7 junction line group, and commercial group ID receives and be recorded in A1-A6 in the SS7 parameter. In the end record TBCD zero after the numeral then is to replenish code. No byte contains TBCD zero.

Word 14, position 8-11 A1 X word 14, position 12-15 A2 X word 15, position 0-3 A3 X word 15, position 4-7 A4 X word 15, position 8-11 A5 X word 15, position 12-15 A6 X word 16, position 0-3 A7 TBCD zero word 16, position 4-7 A8 SUPP1 word 16, position 8-11 A9 SUPP2 word 16, position 12-15 A10 SUPP3 word 17, position 0-3 A11 SUPP4 word 17, position 4-7 A12 SUPP5 word 17, position 8-11 A13 SUPP6 word 17, position 12-15 A14 SUPP7 word 18, position 0-3 A15 SUPP8 word 18, position 4-7 A16 SUPP9 word 18, position 8-11 A17 SUPP10 word 18, position 12-15 A18 SUPP11 word 19, position 0-3 A19 SUPP12 word 19, position 4-7 A20 SUPP13 word 19, position 8-11 A21 SUPP14

word

19,11. network informations-concerning some SS7 junction line group, network information ID receives and is recorded in A1-A4 to position 12-15 A22 SUPP15 in the SS7 parameter. In the end record TBCD zero after the numeral then is to replenish code. No byte contains TBCD zero. Word 14, position 8-11 A1 N word 14, position 12-15 A2 X word 15, position 0-3 A3 X word 15, position 4-7 A4 N

	Word

15, position 8-11 A5 TBCD zero word 15, position 12-15 A6 SUPP1 word 16, position 0-3 A7 SUPP2 word 16, position 4-7 A8 SUPP3 word 16, position 8-11 A9 SUPP4 word 16, position 12-15 A10 SUPP5 word 17, position 0-3 A11 SUPP6 word 17, position 4-7 A12 SUP7 word 17, position 8-11 A13 SUPP8 word 17, position 12-15 A14 SUPP9 word 18, position 0-3 A15 SUPP10 word 18, position 4-7 A16 SUPP11 word 18, position 8-11 A17 SUPP12 word 18, position 12-15 A18 SUPP13 word 19, position 0-3 A19 SUPP14 word 19, position 4-7 A20 SUPP15 word 19, position 8-11 A21 SUPP16 word 19, position 12-15 A22 SUPP17 12. calling network identifiers (NCID) if-NCID is by record in " A " territory, it will be begun record from A1 with binary form. Input code (Entry Code) territory will be indicated the call treatment related with this specific call or will be " 0 ". If NCID records in the NCID territory of 64 word call records, then input code also will be indicated the call treatment related with this specific call or will be " 0 ". NCID by under list and form: the ingress switch ID junction line group originating terminal slogan time point 1 NCID sequence number that starts
	Word 20, position 0-15	Destination-address: this is the destination-address of 17 numerals, just is exactly

Word 21, position 0-15 word 22, position 0-15 word 23, position 0-15 word 24, position 0-3	Called number. If the numeral that needs surpasses 17, use the ECDR/EPNR form. No byte contains TBCD zero. 7 numerals, 10 digital DDD IDDD words 20, position 0-3 D1 N N N CC word 20, position 4-7 D2 X X X CC word 20, position 8-11 D3 X X X CC word 20, position 12-15 D4 X N N NN word 21, position 0-3 D5 X X X NN word 21, position 4-7 D6 X X X NN word 21, position 8-11 D7 X X X NN word 21, position 12-15 D8 X (TSID) X NN word 22, position 0-3 D9 X (TSID) X NN word 22, position 4-7 D10 X (TSID) X NN word 22, position 8-11 D11 X (TTG) X (TSID) T zero NN word 22, position 12-15 D12 X (TTG) X (TSID) T zero NN word 23, position 0-3 D13 X (TTG) X (TSID) T zero NN word 23, position 4-7 D14 X (TTG) X (TSID) T zero NN word 23, position 8-11 D15 T-zero X (TTG) T zero NN word 23, position 12-15 D16 T-zero X (TTG) T zero T zero word 24, position 0-3 D17 T-zero X (TTG) the T zero T zero CC=client communication NN=of company national number TSID=termination switch ID TTG=termination junction line group
		Word 24, position 4-15 word 25, position 0-15 word 26, position 0-11	The numeral of conversion in advance: what this represented that the calling subscriber dials may be also may not be the numeral of destination-address. Only have and just record the in advance numeral of conversion when number translated occurs. If it is destination-address that institute dials the number, be not transformed into another number, then TBCD zero is contained in this territory. If a more than ten numeral is used the ECDR/EPNR form. 10 digital 00Y SAC 7 digital IDDD 10

	Vnet, SAC, code Vnet or numeral (routine DNIS or hot line hot line) word 24, position 4-7 PTD1 N 0 N N word 24, position 8-11 PTD2 X 0 X N word 24, position 12-15 PTD3 X Y X N word 25, position 0-3 PTD4 N N X N word 25, position 4-7 PTD5 X X X N word 25, position 8-11 PTD6 X X X N word 25, position 12-15 PTD7 X X X N word 26, position 0-3 PTD8 X X TBCD N word 26, position 4-7 PTD9 X X zero N word 26, position 8-11 PTD10 X X TBCD N zero TBCD zero
		Word 26, position 12-15	Need not
Word 27, position 0-3	Condition code (FC): switch is determined a condition code for calling out, and points out whether this calling needs the data circuit of particular type, such as the high-quality circuit that is used for facsimile transmission. DS3 (HSCS) 6-8=of DS1 (HSCS) the 5=exchange of the default 1=fax of 0=2=NARS 3=data call 4=exchange selects 11=AAP to call out (being used for the conversion of gateway charge ticket) 12=toll bar refusal 13=forum without the outer route of 9=NX64 10=net and dials in audio/video conference	Word 26, position 12-15	Need not

	14=concert freephone 15=need not
	14=concert freephone 15=need not	Word 27, position 4-7	Termination network code (TNC): the termination equipment of pointing out to be used as the remainder in the path of calling out. The sign that for example represents non-satellite transmission. The default 1=of 0=without Route Selection restriction 2=avoid satellite 3=by DS1 Route Selection 4=by the DS1 Route Selection and avoid satellite 5=to require preferably need not by there being the protection implement to carry out Route Selection 7-15=by there being the protection implement to carry out Route Selection 6=
Word 27, position 8-11	Network insertion type (NAT): point out defined such as ingress switch on the network, what use is the network insertion of which type; In other words, the calling subscriber is access network how. Access type has: the default 1=800 of 0=calls out the straight-through access of the auxiliary access of 2=credit card access 3=operator 4=VNET long-range access 5=BPP access 6=FGD 7-15=need not	Word 27, position 4-7
Word 27, position 8-11		Word 27, position 12-15	Time point 7 qualifiers (TP7Q): first that contains calling disconnects qualifier, namely calls out how to terminate. Disconnecting type has: 0=calling party disconnect 1=callee disconnect 2=calling party again start the 3=switch be activated (for example. switch mistake cutting call) the busy 5=of all routes of 4=ring time long disconnecting of causing; The ring timer expiry

	6=calls out transmission owing to network call and disconnects that the 7=feature/business interaction 8-15=need not
		Word 28, position 0-6	Input code (EC): the type of the type of the call treatment that indication occurs and the information that in the authorization code territory, records. If receive a plurality of input codes, record last. Following code is effective: the default 1=Human To Human of 0=(P-P) 2=Station To Station (S-S) 3=the 3rd side (recording the 3rd side's number) 4=P-P recipient pay (keeping accounts to the callee) 6=MCI card or VNET card (S-S) 7=of (keeping accounts to the callee) 5=S-S recipient that pay that keep accounts not have to call out the BOC that finishes and inwardly dials 8=and generally help 9=BOC/LEC card 10=to subscribe credit card 11=PTT card 12=catalogue to help 13=commercial letter of credit 14=to have to call out the BOC that finishes inwardly to dial 15=MCI card or VNET card (P-P) 16-19=to confirm that without 20=ANI (pass through/failure of shielding) 21=Auth confirms that (registration or dialing) 22=expires without 29=operator's release timer without 23=700 service access code (substituting #20) 24=500,800 service access codes (alternative #20) 25=900 service access codes (alternative #20) 26-28=

30＝EVS/NARS- ( referral ) ( DMR ) 31＝EVS/NARS-MCIDMR 32＝EVS/NARS-MCIDMR 33＝EVS/NARS-MCI ( CE ) DMR 34＝EVS/MARS-MCICEDMR 35＝EVS/NARS-CE ( CMA ) 36＝EVS/NARS-CECMA 37＝EVS/NARS- ( ECR ) 38-41＝EVS/NARS- 42-47＝ 48＝GETS 49＝ 50＝ 51＝ID 52＝ 53＝VNET 54＝SS7 55＝OSIDOTG 56＝DNIS 57＝ID 58＝ 59＝BG++OSID/OTG 60＝++OSID/OTG 61＝VNET RA++OSID/OTG 62＝VNET RA++OSID/OTG 63＝ ( NCT ) 64-79＝ 88-89＝ 90-99＝ 100＝18CPIN S/S

	101=18C is that I overall S/S 102=18C is that I ANI S/S 103=18C is that I NPA S/S 104=18C is that I courier S/S 105=18C is that I courier PIN S/S 106=18C is that the international speed dial 112-127=of I courier's overall situation S/S 107=18C BOC card S/S 108=18C MCI card S/S 109=Aos courier S/S 110=international courier S/S 111=need not
		Word 28, position 7-9	Prefix number (PD): the prefix number that represents called number. These numerals tell how switch processes calling. That 0=assists without received 1=0-(operator assists) 2=0+ (domestic CDOS) 3=01+ of prefix numeral (international CDOS) 4=011+IDDD 5=1+DDD 6=0+ operator, station address 7=*XX, wherein XX=0-9, star card
Word		Word 28, position 7-9
Word	28, position 10-12	NDID (NCS/DAP ID): whether the indication switch was processed calling or whether was included but not limited to VNET, call card, 800 and 900 callings to a database (such as the NCS/DAP) business information-business of inquiring about. NDID further points out the ID of the NCS/DAP that relates in last affairs are attempted. The 0=calling of switchboard is processed 1=NCS/DAP 1 2=NCS/DAP 2 3=NCS/DAP 3

	The 7=TCAP that 4-5=receives from operator's platform by RLT without 6=is to NCS/DAP
		Word
28, position 13-15	Partition id (DIVID): contain the partition id of Credit Card Calling, comprise the card of telecommunication system. DIVID receives from NCS/DAP for the checking of card number code. If switch does not receive information, just record default value ' 0 '. The partition id 1=partition id 1 2=partition id 2 3=partition ids 3 4=partition ids 4 5=partition ids 5 6=partition ids 6 7=partition ids 7 of 0=no standard	Word
28, position 13-15		Word
29, position 0	Overflow at a distance (DO): when being set to 1 in the call record at ingress switch, indication in the middle of certain or termination switch place attempted once directly terminal and overflowed (DTO) affairs to obtain the final destination address digit of this calling.	Word
29, position 0		Word 29, position 1	Need not
Word 29, position 2	The client connects (CC): indication is to calculate call duration with time point 6 or time point 3. 0=calculates call duration with time point 6, * F. 1=calculates call duration with time point 3, * C.	Word 29, position 1	Need not
Word 29, position 2		Word
29, position 3	Between network (IN): from a client/network originated, termination is to another client/network for indicating call. Default setting=0; If receive service groups or Netinfo parameter from NCS/DAP, this position is set as 1.	Word
29, position 3		Word 29, position 4	Need not
Word 29, position 5	SAC position (SC): this position is used for flexible SAC feature. That the junction line group that starts is closed whenever the number of collecting at the address digit collection phase is confirmed to be	Word 29, position 4	Need not

	The connection FlexSac Index in a SAC number time, this position is set to 1. In all other situations, this position is set to 0.
		Word 29, position 6	Call direction (CD): point out to call out at home and still start in the international network. 0=calls out and 1=to occur in the network that starts at home calls out to start and occur in the network at home
Word		Word 29, position 6
Word	29, position 7	Destination (DE): point out to expect to call out the international destination that when terminates. 0=is default, the calling of any international destination of not expecting to terminate of NANP, domestic VNET or other. 1=expectation termination is to the calling of international destination.
Word 29, position 8	29, position 7		Special-purpose termination (DT): indication has the shared network number of 10 numerals to be accomplished to a special-purpose destination. If the termination junction line class (TTC) in the call record equals 3 or 7, so just think that it is the junction line that directly terminates.
Word 29, position 8	Word 29, position 9-10	Need not
Word 29, position 11	Word 29, position 9-10	Need not	Satellite (SA): indicating call will be used satellite circuit. Default setting is 0; The position is set to represent in 1 o'clock call out and will relates to satellite, when the incoming trunk group is labeled as the outfit satellite by class, when the numeral of the SAT in the IMT calling in the input tape shows that connection relates to satellite circuit, or when SS7 connection nature parameters points out that used satellite trunk last time, this position, position. This is for trouble shoot, rather than in order to keep accounts.
Word 29, position 11	Word 29, position 12-15	Call out the character (NOCLI) of position ID: being identified in and calling out what record among the ID of position is the binary value of what data. Call out ID territory, position and contain the information of in NOCLI, quoting. The pseudo-ANI 6=that 0=creates in this switch from the original called number 5=of the ANI 2=SS7 of inside junction line charge number 3=SS7 caller rs number 4=without 1=is from the CSI of the junction line that starts

	The NPA-NXX junction line group information of 7=registration adds CSI 8=NNN+OSID+OTG or 00Y+OSID+OTG (N=TBCD zero) 9=country code+national number 10=need not from the ANI 14-15=of the CLI 13=NCT first speaker of operator's platform reception by RLT without CLI record 11=redirect number 12=
		Word 30, position 0-15	Communication common carrier number (CN): representative is at FG-B or FG-D start the communication common carrier number that provides or the communication common carrier number that receives at SS7 IMT. If only use 3 figure places, they just are recorded among the CN2-CN4, and CN1 will contain TBCD zero. Rear 4 bit digital (9595) of the specific 800 number of distributing to the VISA card are also contained in this territory. It also will contain rear 4 bit digital of MCI card access number-no matter be what access means. The example of communication common carrier number is: MCI=22, ATT=288, friend=333. FGB/FGD FGB/D visa card 3 digital CIC 4 digital CIC words 30, position 0-3 CN1 TBCD zero X 9 words 30, position 4-7 CN2 X X 5 words 30, position 8-11 CN3 X X 9 words 30, position 12-15 CN4 X X 5 SS7 TNS MCI card Vnet card words 30, position 0-3 CN1 X 11 words 30, position 4-7 CN2 X 01 words 30, position 8-11 CN3 X 21 words 30, position 12-15 CN4 X 21
Word 31, position 0-3	Authorization code ID territory (ACIF): contain the authorization code identification field that is useful on registration card number state. This territory indicating card number (call card or credit card) is that get well or bad.	Word 30, position 0-15

	0=7 position authorization code file (default) 1=first or unique the 6th five authorization code file 7=of the 5th five authorization code file 6=of the 4th five authorization code file 5=of the 3rd five authorization code file 4=of second five authorization code file 3=of five authorization code file 2=scope fault restriction (invalid address numeral) the positive commercial letter of credit of 8=/89 card/M cards checking 9=invalid or not distribution without 10=MCI card/Visa card. Do not allow. The 11=BOC account number distribute but block the 12=BOC account number use the 13=that transfinites without 14=from the overtime situation of replying of NCS/DAP, the MCI card that the default mandate 15=NCS/DAP of MCI card/Visa card authorizes/Visa card
		Word
31, position 4-10	Release code: be used for determining with time point 7 qualifiers release message is from where. This code is pointed out the reason of correspondent one side's on-hook, for example normally discharges=16, can be with=34 without circuit. 1=unassigned number 2=normally removes the busy 18=no user of 17=user and replys the 19=no user and reply (user is warned) 21=and call out and be rejected without sending the wrong junction line prefix 16=that dials of specific information tone 5=to the route 3=of particular network without the route 4=to the destination	Word
31, position 4-10			The 22=number changes

	27＝ 28＝ 29＝ 31＝- 34＝ 38＝ 41＝ 42＝ 44＝ 47＝- 50＝ 55＝CUG 57＝ 58＝ 63＝ 65＝ 69＝ 70＝ 79＝ 87＝CUG 88＝ 91＝ 95＝- 97＝ 99＝- 102＝ 103＝- 111＝- 127＝-
		Word 31, position 11-13	NCID sequence number: the calls with same time point 1 value that representative has occured on same port number. First calling is set as sequence number

	' 0 '. For each calling subsequently with same time point 1 value of number starting at same port, this value increases progressively. Scope=0-7.
		Word 31, position 14	NCID position (NCIDLOC): this bit-identify when NCID is recorded to the authorization code territory of call record. If in the middle of NCID is recorded to and the authorization code territory of the call record of termination switch-authorization code territory is not used for the record out of Memory. If the authorization code territory is used for the record out of Memory, then NCID is recorded in " NCID " territory of 64 word call records. 0=NCID is not recorded in authorization code territory (default) 1=NCID and is recorded in the authorization code territory
Word		Word 31, position 14
Word	31, position 15	Long-range ANI shielding (RS): if ANI does not list in the table of the local service area of switch, and this ANI is sent to DAP and does the shielding of ANI index, and then this position is set to ' 1 '. If switch sends to DAP with ANI and does ANI index shielding, but do not receive DAP reply or when standard switchboard ANI shielding had occured, this position was set to ' 0 '. 0=ANI is not shielded by DAP by DAP shielding (default) 1=ANI

Table 302-ECDR/EPNR record format

Word #, position	Describe
Word #, position	Describe	Word 0-11, position 0-15	With the CDR/PNR form
Word		Word 0-11, position 0-15	With the CDR/PNR form
Word	12, position 0-15 word 13, position 0-15 word 14, position 0-15 word 15, position 0-11	Call out position ID: the 1-15 numeral that contains starting station circuit. This is calling party's ANI number. If receive 1 to 15 ANI or CSI number, they are recorded in the position that begins with CLI1 according to the order of sequence. No byte contains TBCD zero. If do not have ANI or CSI to use, just record in CLI4-10 that OSID/OTG-especially indicates except. If there is not whatever record in the LCI territory, just with 10 NOCLI value. One of following 9 kinds of forms are contained in this territory: 1.Vnet CAMA DAL starts: if CSI is available, come prefix CSI and record with territory HNPA and HNXX information. NOCLI value with 7. 2.FG-C start: if ANI or CSI information are unavailable, and number format is 00Y+NXX-XXXX, then records the 00Y code that receives in CLI1-3, records OSID/OTG in CLI4-10. NOCLI value with 8. 3. FG-D starts in the band: the ANI that begins with CL1 that record is received. NOCLI value with 1. 4.SS7 FG-D starts: record charge number (if getable words), if can not get, metered call side's number. NOCLI value with 2 or 3. 5. start in the world: the country code of metered call side and national number. NOCLI value with 9. 6.SS7 IMT starts: record following information according to sequence of importance: 1) charge number, 2) caller number, 3) from the OSID/OTG of generic numeral. NOCLI value with 2,3 or 8. Discuss 7.SS7 resell and to start: with TBCD zero padding CLI territory. 8.SS7 dedicated network starts: with TBCD zero padding CLI territory. 9.PRI tissue: be recorded in the caller number that receives in the isdn setup message. Form:

	The international word 12 of 1-15 position ANI/ CSI (take 13 numerals as example) OSID/OTG input, position 0-3 CLI1 X TCBD zero X (CC) word 12, position 4-7 CLI2 X TCBD zero X (CC) word 12, position 8-11 CLI3 X TCBD zero X (CC) word 12, position 12-15 CLI4 X X (OSID) X (NN) word 13, position 0-3 CLI5 X X (OSID) X (NN) word 13, position 4-7 CLI6 X X (OSID) X (NN) word 13, position 8-11 CLI7 X X (OTG) X (NN) word 13, position 12-15 CLI8 X X (OTG) X (NN) word 14, position 0-3 CLI9 X X (OTG) X (NN) word 14, position 4-7 CLI10 X X (OTG) X (NN) word 14, position 8-11 CLI11 X TBCD zero X (NN) word 14, position 12-15 CLI12 X TBCD zero X (NN) word 15, position 0-3 CLI13 X TBCD zero X (NN) word 15, position 4-7 CLI114 TBCD zero TBCD zero X (NN) word 15, position 8-11 CLI115 TBCD zero TBCD zero X (NN) CC=client connects NN=national number OSID=ingress switch NSC ID (000-999) the OTG=junction line group (0000-8191) that starts
		Word 15, position 12-15 word 16, position 0-15 word 17, position 0-15 word 18, position 0-15 word 19, position 0-15	Authorization code: (Auth Code): identical with the authorization code of CDR/RNR form, but represent 45 numerals. 1. authorization code: 5 numerals, 6 digital 7 numerals

Word 20, position 0-15 word 21, position 0-15 word 22, position 0-15 word 23, position 0-15 word 24, position 0-15 word 25, position 0-15 word 26, position 0-15

Word 15, position 12-15 A1 AUTH1 AUTH1 AUTH1 word 16, position 0-3 A2 AUTH2 AUTH2 AUTH2 word 16, position 4-7 A3 AUTH3 AUTH3 AUTH3 word 16, position 8-11 A4 AUTH4 AUTH4 AUTH4 word 16, position 12-15 A5 AUTH5 AUTH5 AUTH5 word 17, position 0-3 A6 SEC1 AUTH6 AUTH6 word 17, position 4-7 A7 SEC2 SEC1 AUTH7 word 17, position 8-11 A8 SEC3 SEC2 SEC1 word 17, position 12-15 A9 SEC4 SEC3 SEC2 word 18, position 0-3 A10 T zero SEC4 SEC3 word 18, position 4-7 A11 SUPP1 T zero SEC4 word 18, position 8-11 A12 SUPP2 SUPP1 T zero word 18, position 12-15 A13 SUPP3 SUPP2 SUPP1 word 19, position 0-3 A14 SUPP4 SUPP3 SUPP2 word 19, position 4-7 A15 SUPP5 SUPP4 SUPP3 word 19, position 8-11 A16 SUPP6 SUPP5 SUPP4 word 19, position 12-15 A17 SUPP7 SUPP6 SUPP5 word 20, position 0-3 A18 SUPP8 SUPP7 SUPP6 word 20, position 4-7 A19 SUPP9 SUPP8 SUPP7 word 20, position 8-11 A20 SUPP10 SUPP9 SUPP8 word 20, position 12-15 A21 SUPP11 SUPP10 SUPP9 word 21, position 0-3 A22 SUPP12 SUPP11 SUPP10 word 21, position 4-7 A23 SUPP13 SUPP12 SUPP11 word 21, position 8-11 A24 SUPP14 SUPP13 SUPP12 word 21, position 12-15 A25 SUPP15 SUPP14 SUPP13 word 22, position 0-3 A26 SUPP16 SUPP15 SUPP14 word 22, position 4-7 A27 SUPP17 SUPP16 SUPP15 word 22, position 8-11 A28 SUPP18 SUPP17 SUPP16 word 22, position 12-15 A29 SUPP19 SUPP18 SUPP17 word 23, position 0-3 A30 SUPP20 SUPP19 SUPP18 word 23, position 4-7 A31 SUPP21 SUPP20 SUPP19 word 23, position 8-11 A32 SUPP22 SUPP21 SUPP20

	Word 23, position 12-15 A33 SUPP23 SUPP22 SUPP21 word 24, position 0-3 A34 SUPP24 SUPP23 SUPP22 word 24, position 4-7 A35 SUPP25 SUPP24 SUPP23 word 24, position 8-11 A36 SUPP26 SUPP25 SUPP24 word 24, position 12-15 A37 SUPP27 SUPP26 SUPP25 word 25, position 0-3 A38 SUPP28 SUPP27 SUPP26 word 25, position 4-7 A39 SUPP29 SUPP28 SUPP27 word 25, position 8-11 A40 SUPP30 SUPP29 SUPP28 word 25, position 12-15 A41 T zero SUPP30 SUPP29 word 26, position 0-3 A42 T zero T zero SUPP30 word 26, position 4-7 A43 T zero T zero T zero word 26, position 8-11 A44 T zero T zero T zero word 26, position 12-15 A45 T zero T zero T zero T zero=TBCD zero
			2. calling-station-ID (CSI) 7 digital 1-10 numeric words 15, position 12-15 A1 X X word 16, position 0-3 A2 X X word 16, position 4-7 A3 X X word 16, position 8-11 A4 X X word 16, position 12-15 A5 X X word 17, position 0-3 A6 X X word 17, position 4-7 A7 X X word 17, position 8-11 A8 TBCD zero X word 17, position 12-15 A9 SUPP1 X word 18, position 0-3 A10 SUPP2 X word 18, position 4-7 A11 SUPP3 TBCD zero word 18, position 8-11 A12 SUPP4 SUPP1 word 18, position 12-15 A13 SUPP5 SUPP2 word 19, position 0-3 A14 SUPP6 SUPP3 word 19, position 4-7 A15 SUPP7 SUPP4

Word 19, position 8-11 A16 SUPP8 SUPP5 word 19, position 12-15 A17 SUPP9 SUPP6 word 20, position 0-3 A18 SUPP10 SUPP7 word 20, position 4-7 A19 SUPP11 SUPP8 word 20, position 8-11 A20 SUPP12 SUPP9 word 20, position 12-15 A21 SUPP13 SUPP10 word 21, position 0-3 A22 SUPP14 SUPP11 word 21, position 4-7 A23 SUPP15 SUPP12 word 21, position 8-11 A24 SUPP16 SUPP13 word 21, position 12-15 A25 SUPP17 SUPP14 word 22, position 0-3 A26 SUPP18 SUPP15 word 22, position 4-7 A27 SUPP19 SUPP16 word 22, position 8-11 A28 SUPP20 SUPP17 word 22, position 12-15 A29 SUPP21 SUPP18 word 23, position 0-3 A30 SUPP22 SUPP19 word 23, position 4-7 A31 SUPP23 SUPP20 word 23, position 8-11 A32 SUPP24 SUPP21 word 23, position 12-15 A33 SUPP25 SUPP22 word 24, position 0-3 A34 SUPP26 SUPP23 word 24, position 4-7 A35 SUPP27 SUPP24 word 24, position 8-11 A36 SUPP28 SUPP25 word 24, position 12-15 A37 SUPP29 SUPP26 word 25, position 0-3 A38 SUPP30 SUPP27 word 25, position 4-7 A39 TBCD zero SUPP28 word 25, position 8-11 A40 TBCD zero SUPP29 word 25, position 12-15 A41 TBCD zero SUPP30 word 26, position 0-3 A42 TBCD zero TBCD zero word 26, position 4-7 A43 TBCD zero TBCD zero word 26, position 8-11 A44 TBCD zero TBCD zero word 26, position 12-15 A45 TBCD zero TBCD zero

3. replenish code word 15, position 12-15 A1 SUPP1 word 16, position 0-3 A2 SUPP2 word 16, position 4-7 A3 SUPP3 word 16, position 8-11 A4 SUPP4 word 16, position 12-15 A5 SUPP5 word 17, position 0-3 A6 SUPP6 word 17, position 4-7 A7 SUPP7 word 17, position 8-11 A8 SUPP8 word 17, position 12-15 A9 SUPP9 word 18, position 0-3 A10 SUPP10 word 18, position 4-7 A11 SUPP11 word 18, position 8-11 A12 SUPP12 word 18, position 12-15 A13 SUPP13 word 19, position 0-3 A14 SUPP14 word 19, position 4-7 A15 SUPP15 word 19, position 8-11 A16 SUPP16 word 19, position 12-15 A17 SUPP17 word 20, position 0-3 A18 SUPP18 word 20, position 4-7 A19 SUPP19 word 20, position 8-11 A20 SUPP20 word 20, position 12-15 A21 SUPP21 word 21, position 0-3 A22 SUPP22 word 21, position 4-7 A23 SUPP23 word 21, position 8-11 A24 SUPP24 word 21, position 12-15 A25 SUPP25 word 22, position 0-3 A26 SUPP26 word 22, position 4-7 A27 SUPP27 word 22, position 8-11 A28 SUPP28 word 22, position 12-15 A29 SUPP29 word 23, position 0-3 A30 TBCD zero

Word 23, position 4-7 A31 TBCD zero word 23, position 8-11 A32 TBCD zero word 23, position 12-15 A33 TBCD zero word 24, position 0-3 A34 TBCD zero word 24, position 4-7 A35 TBCD zero word 24, position 8-11 A36 TBCD zero word 24, position 12-15 A37 TBCD zero word 25, position 0-3 A38 TBCD zero word 25, position 4-7 A39 TBCD zero word 25, position 8-11 A40 TBCD zero word 25, position 12-15 A41 TBCD zero word 26, position 0-3 A42 TBCD zero word 26, position 4-7 A43 TBCD zero word 26, position 8-11 A44 TBCD zero word 26, position 12-15 A45 TBCD zero

4.VNET long-range access and caller rs number word 15, position 12-15 A1 N word 16, position 0-3 A2 X word 16, position 4-7 A3 X word 16, position 8-11 A4 N word 16, position 12-15 A5 X word 17, position 0-3 A6 X word 17, position 4-7 A7 X word 17, position 8-11 A8 X word 17, position 12-15 A9 X word 18, position 0-3 A10 X word 18, position 4-7 A11 TBCD zero word 18, position 8-11 A12 SUPP1

Word 18, position 12-15 A13 SUPP2 word 19, position 0-3 A14 SUPP3 word 19, position 4-7 A15 SUPP4 word 19, position 8-11 A16 SUPP5 word 19, position 12-15 A17 SUPP6 word 20, position 0-3 A18 SUPP7 word 20, position 4-7 A19 SUPP8 word 20, position 8-11 A20 SUPP9 word 20, position 12-15 A21 SUPP10 word 21, position 0-3 A22 SUPP11 word 21, position 4-7 A23 SUPP12 word 21, position 8-11 A24 SUPP13 word 21, position 12-15 A25 SUPP14 word 22, position 0-3 A26 SUPP15 word 22, position 4-7 A27 SUPP16 word 22, position 8-11 A28 SUPP17 word 22, position 12-15 A29 SUPP18 word 23, position 0-3 A30 SUPP19 word 23, position 4-7 A31 SUPP20 word 23, position 8-11 A32 SUPP21 word 23, position 12-15 A33 SUPP22 word 24, position 0-3 A34 SUPP23 word 24, position 4-7 A35 SUPP24 word 24, position 8-11 A36 SUPP25 word 24, position 12-15 A37 SUPP26 word 25, position 0-3 A38 SUPP27 word 25, position 4-7 A39 SUPP28 word 25, position 8-11 A40 SUPP29 word 25, position 12-15 A41 SUPP30 word 26, position 0-3 A42 TBCD zero word 26, position 4-7 A43 TBCD zero word 26, position 8-11 A44 TBCD zero

	Word 26, position 12-15 A45 TBCD zero
	Word 26, position 12-15 A45 TBCD zero		5. credit card: word 15, position 12-15 A1 X word 16, position 0-3 A2 X word 16, position 4-7 A3 X word 16, position 8-11 A4 X word 16, position 12-15 A5 X word 17, position 0-3 A6 X word 17, position 4-7 A7 X word 17, position 8-11 A8 X word 17, position 12-15 A9 X word 18, position 0-3 A10 X word 18, position 4-7 A11 X word 18, position 8-11 A12 X word 18, position 12-15 A13 X word 19, position 0-3 A14 X word 19, position 4-7 A15 X word 19, position 8-11 A16 X word 19, position 12-15 A17 X word 20, position 0-3 A18 X word 20, position 4-7 A19 X word 20, position 8-11 A20 TBCD zero word 20, position 12-15 A21 SUPP1 word 21, position 0-3 A22 SUPP2 word 21, position 4-7 A23 SUPP3 word 21, position 8-11 A24 SUPP4 word 21, position 12-15 A25 SUPP5 word 22, position 0-3 A26 SUPP6 word 22, position 4-7 A27 SUPP7 word 22, position 8-11 A28 SUPP8

	Word 22, position 12-15 A29 SUPP9 word 23, position 0-3 A30 SUPP10 word 23, position 4-7 A31 SUPP11 word 23, position 8-11 A32 SUPP12 word 23, position 12-15 A33 SUPP13 word 24, position 0-3 A34 SUPP14 word 24, position 4-7 A35 SUPP15 word 24, position 8-11 A36 SUPP16 word 24, position 12-15 A37 SUPP17 word 25, position 0-3 A38 SUPP18 word 25, position 4-7 A39 SUPP19 word 25, position 8-11 A40 SUPP20 word 25, position 12-15 A41 SUPP21 word 26, position 0-3 A42 SUPP22 word 26, position 4-7 A43 SUPP23 word 26, position 8-11 A44 SUPP24 word 26, position 12-15 A45 SUPP25
			6.14 digital MC Vnet call card: word 15, position 12-15 A1 X word 16, position 0-3 A2 X word 16, position 4-7 A3 X word 16, position 8-11 A4 X word 16, position 12-15 A5 X word 17, position 0-3 A6 X word 17, position 4-7 A7 X word 17, position 8-11 A8 X word 17, position 12-15 A9 X word 18, position 0-3 A10 X word 18, position 4-7 A11 TBCD-A word 18, position 8-11 A12 TBCD-A

Word 18, position 12-15 A13 TBCD-A word 19, position 0-3 A14 TBCD-A word 19, position 4-7 A15 TBCD zero word 19, position 8-11 A16 SUPP1 word 19, position 12-15 A17 SUPP2 word 20, position 0-3 A18 SUPP3 word 20, position 4-7 A19 SUPP4 word 20, position 8-11 A20 SUPP5 word 20, position 12-15 A21 SUPP6 word 21, position 0-3 A22 SUPP7 word 21, position 4-7 A23 SUPP8 word 21, position 8-11 A24 SUPP9 word 21, position 12-15 A25 SUPP10 word 22, position 0-3 A26 SUPP11 word 22, position 4-7 A27 SUPP12 word 22, position 8-11 A28 SUPP13 word 22, position 12-15 A29 SUPP14 word 23, position 0-3 A30 SUPP15 word 23, position 4-7 A31 SUPP16 word 23, position 8-11 A32 SUPP17 word 23, position 12-15 A33 SUPP18 word 24, position 0-3 A34 SUPP19 word 24, position 4-7 A35 SUPP20 word 24, position 8-11 A36 SUPP21 word 24, position 12-15 A37 SUPP22 word 25, position 0-3 A38 SUPP23 word 25, position 4-7 A39 SUPP24 word 25, position 8-11 A40 SUPP25 word 25, position 12-15 A41 SUPP26 word 26, position 0-3 A42 SUPP27 word 26, position 4-7 A43 SUPP28 word 26, position 8-11 A44 SUPP29

	Word 26, position 12-15 A45 SUPP30
	Word 26, position 12-15 A45 SUPP30		7.OSD/OTG: word 15, position 12-15 A1 X (OSID) word 16, position 0-3 A2 X (OSID) word 16, position 4-7 A3 X (OSID) word 16, position 8-11 A4 X (OTG) word 16, position 12-15 A5 X (OTG) word 17, position 0-3 A6 X (OTG) word 17, position 4-7 A7 X (OTG) word 17, position 8-11 A8 TBCD zero word 17, position 12-15 A9 TBCD zero word 18, position 0-3 A10 TBCD zero word 18, position 4-7 A11 TBCD zero word 18, position 8-11 A12 TBCD zero word 18, position 12-15 A13 TBCD zero word 19, position 0-3 A14 TBCD zero word 19, position 4-7 A15 TBCD zero word 19, position 8-11 A16 TBCD zero word 19, position 12-15 A17 TBCD zero word 20, position 0-3 A18 TBCD zero word 20, position 4-7 A19 TBCD zero word 20, position 8-11 A20 TBCD zero word 20, position 12-15 A21 TBCD zero word 21, position 0-3 A22 TBCD zero word 21, position 4-7 A23 TBCD zero word 21, position 8-11 A24 TBCD zero word 21, position 12-15 A25 TBCD zero word 22, position 0-3 A26 TBCD zero word 22, position 4-7 A27 TBCD zero word 22, position 8-11 A28 TBCD zero

	Word 22, position 12-15 A29 TBCD zero word 23, position 0-3 A30 TBCD zero word 23, position 4-7 A31 TBCD zero word 23, position 8-11 A32 TBCD zero word 23, position 12-15 A33 TBCD zero word 24, position 0-3 A34 TBCD zero word 24, position 4-7 A35 TBCD zero word 24, position 8-11 A36 TBCD zero word 24, position 12-15 A37 TBCD zero word 25, position 0-3 A38 TBCD zero word 25, position 4-7 A39 TBCD zero word 25, position 8-11 A40 TBCD zero word 25, position 12-15 A41 TBCD zero word 26, position 0-3 A42 TBCD zero word 26, position 4-7 A43 TBCD zero word 26, position 8-11 A44 TBCD zero word 26, the position 12-15 A45 TBCD zero OSID=ingress switch ID OTG=junction line group that starts
			8. telecommunications/PTT card: word 15, position 12-15 A1 X word 16, position 0-3 A2 X word 16, position 4-7 A3 X word 16, position 8-11 A4 X word 16, position 12-15 A5 X word 17, position 0-3 A6 X word 17, position 4-7 A7 X word 17, position 8-11 A8 X word 17, position 12-15 A9 X word 18, position 0-3 A10 X

Word 18, position 4-7 A11 X word 18, position 8-11 A12 X word 18, position 12-15 A13 X word 19, position 0-3 A14 X word 19, position 4-7 A15 X word 19, position 8-11 A16 X word 19, position 12-15 A17 X word 20, position 0-3 A18 X word 20, position 4-7 A19 X word 20, position 8-11 A20 X word 20, position 12-15 A21 X word 21, position 0-3 A22 X word 21, position 4-7 A23 X word 21, position 8-11 A24 TBCD zero word 21, position 12-15 A25 SUPP1 word 22, position 0-3 A26 SUPP2 word 22, position 4-7 A27 SUPP3 word 22, position 8-11 A28 SUPP4 word 22, position 12-15 A29 SUPP5 word 23, position 0-3 A30 SUPP6 word 23, position 4-7 A31 SUPP7 word 23, position 8-11 A32 SUPP8 word 23, position 12-15 A33 SUPP9 word 24, position 0-3 A34 SUPP10 word 24, position 4-7 A35 SUPP11 word 24, position 8-11 A36 SUPP12 word 24, position 12-15 A37 SUPP13 word 25, position 0-3 A38 SUPP14 word 25, position 4-7 A39 SUPP15 word 25, position 8-11 A40 SUPP16 word 25, position 12-15 A41 SUPP17 word 26, position 0-3 A42 SUPP18

	Word 26, position 4-7 A43 SUPP19 word 26, position 8-11 A44 SUPP20 word 26, position 12-15 A45 SUPP21
			9. service groups ID word 15, position 12-15 A1 X word 16, position 0-3 A2 X word 16, position 4-7 A3 X word 16, position 8-11 A4 X word 16, position 12-15 A5 X word 17, position 0-3 A6 X word 17, position 4-7 A7 TBCD zero word 17, position 8-11 A8 SUPP1 word 17, position 12-15 A9 SUPP2 word 18, position 0-3 A10 SUPP3 word 18, position 4-7 A11 SUPP4 word 18, position 8-11 A12 SUPP5 word 18, position 12-15 A13 SUPP6 word 19, position 0-3 A14 SUPP7 word 19, position 4-7 A15 SUPP8 word 19, position 8-11 A16 SUPP9 word 19, position 12-15 A17 SUPP10 word 20, position 0-3 A18 SUPP11 word 20, position 4-7 A19 SUPP12 word 20, position 8-11 A20 SUPP13 word 20, position 12-15 A21 SUPP14 word 21, position 0-3 A22 SUPP15 word 21, position 4-7 A23 SUPP16 word 21, position 8-11 A24 SUPP17 word 21, position 12-15 A25 SUPP18 word 22, position 0-3 A26 SUPP19

	Word 22, position 4-7 A27 SUPP20 word 22, position 8-11 A28 SUPP21 word 22, position 12-15 A29 SUPP22 word 23, position 0-3 A30 SUPP23 word 23, position 4-7 A31 SUPP24 word 23, position 8-11 A32 SUPP25 word 23, position 12-15 A33 SUPP26 word 24, position 0-3 A34 SUPP27 word 24, position 4-7 A35 SUPP28 word 24, position 8-11 A36 SUPP29 word 24, position 12-15 A37 SUPP30 word 25, position 0-3 A38 TBCD zero word 25, position 4-7 A39 TBCD zero word 25, position 8-11 A40 TBCD zero word 25, position 12-15 A41 TBCD zero word 26, position 0-3 A42 TBCD zero word 26, position 4-7 A43 TBCD zero word 26, position 8-11 A44 TBCD zero word 26, position 12-15 A45 TBCD zero
			11. the network information: word 15, position 12-15 A1 X word 16, position 0-3 A2 X word 16, position 4-7 A3 X word 16, position 8-11 A4 X word 16, position 12-15 A5 TBCD zero word 17, position 0-3 A6 SUPP1 word 17, position 4-7 A7 SUPP2 word 17, position 8-11 A8 SUPP3 word 17, position 12-15 A9 SUPP4 word 18, position 0-3 A10 SUPP5

Word 18, position 4-7 A11 SUPP6 word 18, position 8-11 A12 SUPP7 word 18, position 12-15 A13 SUPP8 word 19, position 0-3 A14 SUPP9 word 19, position 4-7 A15 SUPP10 word 19, position 8-11 A16 SUPP11 word 19, position 12-15 A17 SUPP12 word 20, position 0-3 A18 SUPP13 word 20, position 4-7 A19 SUPP14 word 20, position 8-11 A20 SUPP15 word 20, position 12-15 A21 SUPP16 word 21, position 0-3 A22 SUPP17 word 21, position 4-7 A23 SUPP18 word 21, position 8-11 A24 SUPP19 word 21, position 12-15 A25 SUPP20 word 22, position 0-3 A26 SUPP21 word 22, position 4-7 A27 SUPP22 word 22, position 8-11 A28 SUPP23 word 22, position 12-15 A29 SUPP24 word 23, position 0-3 A30 SUPP25 word 23, position 4-7 A31 SUPP26 word 23, position 8-11 A32 SUPP27 word 23, position 12-15 A33 SUPP28 word 24, position 0-3 A34 SUPP29 word 24, position 4-7 A35 SUPP30 word 24, position 8-11 A36 TBCD zero word 24, position 12-15 A37 TBCD zero word 25, position 0-3 A38 TBCD zero word 25, position 4-7 A39 TBCD zero word 25, position 8-11 A40 TBCD zero word 25, position 12-15 A41 TBCD zero word 26, position 0-3 A42 TBCD zero

	Word 26, position 4-7 A43 TBCD zero word 26, position 8-11 A44 TBCD zero word 26, position 12-15 A45 TBCD zero
			12. calling network identifier (NCID) if-NCID record in " A " territory, it will be begun record from A1 with binary form. Input code (Entry Code) territory will be indicated the call treatment related with this specific call or will be " 0 ". If NCID records in the NCID territory of 64 word call records, then input code also will be indicated the call treatment related with this specific call or will be " 0 ". NCID by under list and form: the ingress switch ID junction line group originating terminal slogan time point 1 NCID sequence number that starts
Word 27, position 0-3	Condition code (FC): with the CDR/PNR form
Word 27, position 0-3	Condition code (FC): with the CDR/PNR form	Word
27, position 4-7	Termination network code (TNC): with the CDR/PNR form	Word
27, position 4-7	Termination network code (TNC): with the CDR/PNR form	Word
27, position 8-11	Network insertion type (NAT): with the CDR/PNR form	Word
27, position 8-11	Network insertion type (NAT): with the CDR/PNR form	Word
27, position 12-15	Time point 7 qualifiers (TP7Q): with the CDR/PNR form	Word
27, position 12-15	Time point 7 qualifiers (TP7Q): with the CDR/PNR form	Word
28, position 0-6	Input code (EC): with the CDR/PNR form	Word
28, position 0-6	Input code (EC): with the CDR/PNR form	Word
28, position 7-9	Prefix number (PD): with the CDR/PNR form	Word
28, position 7-9	Prefix number (PD): with the CDR/PNR form	Word
28, position 10-12	NCS/DAP ID (NDID): with the CDR/PNR form	Word
28, position 10-12	NCS/DAP ID (NDID): with the CDR/PNR form	Word
28, position 13-15	Partition id (DIVID): with the CDR/PNR form	Word
28, position 13-15	Partition id (DIVID): with the CDR/PNR form	Word
29, position 0	Overflow at a distance (DO): with the CDR/PNR form	Word
29, position 0	Overflow at a distance (DO): with the CDR/PNR form	Word
29, position 1	The MCI network overflows (MNO): this point out to start Cause (reason) parameter of overflowing be because the condition that the MCI network detects or since the situation of reseller or Customer Location detection generate. If the MNO subdomain of MBCSI parameter put ' 1 '-to start the cause parameter of overflowing would be because the condition of MCI network detection generates this position ' 1 ' in expression; If the MNO subdomain of MBCSI parameter puts ' 0 '-expression starts the cause parameter of overflowing and generate owing to LEC, BOC or reseller's situation, this position ' 0 ' then	Word

Word 29, position 2	The client connects (CC): with the CDR/PNR form
Word 29, position 2	The client connects (CC): with the CDR/PNR form	Word 29, position 3	Between network (IN): with the CDR/PNR form
Word 29, position 4	Report overflow (RO): with the CDR/PNR form	Word 29, position 3	Between network (IN): with the CDR/PNR form
Word 29, position 4	Report overflow (RO): with the CDR/PNR form	Word 29, position 5	Need not
Word 29, position 6	Call direction (CD): with the CDR/PNR form	Word 29, position 5	Need not
Word 29, position 6	Call direction (CD): with the CDR/PNR form	Word 29, position 7	Destination (DE): with the CDR/PNR form
Word 29, position 8	Special-purpose termination (DT): with the CDR/PNR form	Word 29, position 7	Destination (DE): with the CDR/PNR form
Word 29, position 8	Special-purpose termination (DT): with the CDR/PNR form	Word 29, position 9-10	Need not
Word 29, position 11	Satellite (SA): with the CDR/PNR form	Word 29, position 9-10	Need not
Word 29, position 11	Satellite (SA): with the CDR/PNR form	Word 29, position 12-15	Call out the character (NOCLI) of position ID: with the CDR/PNR form
Word 30, position 0-15	Communication common carrier number (CN): with the CDR/PNR form	Word 29, position 12-15
Word 30, position 0-15		Word 31, position 0-3	Authorization code ID territory (ACIF): with the CDR/PNR form
Word 31, position 4-10	Release code: with the CDR/PNR form	Word 31, position 0-3
Word 31, position 4-10	Release code: with the CDR/PNR form	Word 31, position 11-13	NCID sequence number: with the CDR/PNR form
Word 31, position 14	NCID position (NCIDLOC): with the CDR/PNR form	Word 31, position 11-13	NCID sequence number: with the CDR/PNR form
Word 31, position 14	NCID position (NCIDLOC): with the CDR/PNR form	Word 31, position 15	Long-range ANI shielding (RS): with the CDR/PNR form
Word 32, position 0-15 word 33, position 0-15	Need not	Word 31, position 15	Long-range ANI shielding (RS): with the CDR/PNR form
Word 32, position 0-15 word 33, position 0-15	Need not	Word 34, position 0-15 word 35, position 0-15 word 36, position 0-15 word 37, position 0-15 word 38, position 0-15 word 39, position 0-15 word 40, position 0-3	Destination-address (DA): from D1, by receiving or change the nearly destination-address of the TBCD form of 25 numerals of journal. No byte contains TBCD zero. 7 numerals, 10 digital DDD IDDD words 34, position 0-3 D1 N N N CC word 34, position 4-7 D2 X X X CC word 34, position 8-11 D3 X X X CC word 34, position 12-15 D4 X N N NN word 35, position 0-3 D5 X X X NN word 35, position 4-7 D6 X X X NN word 35, position 8-11 D7 X X X NN word 35, position 12-15 D8 X (TSID) X X NN word 36, position 0-3 D9 X (TSID) X X NN

	Word 36, position 4-7 D10 X (TSID) X X NN word 36, position 8-11 D11 X (TTG) X (TSID) T zero NN word 36, position 12-15 D12 X (TTG) X (TSID) T zero NN word 37, position 0-3 D13 X (TTG) X (TSID) T zero NN word 37, position 4-7 D14 X (TTG) X (TTG) T zero NN word 37, position 8-11 D15 T zero X (TTG) T zero NN word 37, position 12-15 D16 T zero X (TTG) T zero T zero word 38, position 0-3 D17 T zero X (TTG) T zero T zero word 38, position 4-7 D18 T zero T zero T zero T zero word 38, position 8-11 D19 T zero T zero T zero T zero word 38, position 12-15 D20 T zero T zero T zero T zero word 39, position 0-3 D21 T zero T zero T zero T zero word 39, position 4-7 D22 T zero T zero T zero T zero word 39, position 8-11 D23 T zero T zero T zero T zero word 39, position 12-15 D24 T zero T zero T zero T zero word 40, position 0-3 D25 T zero T zero T zero T zero CC=client connects NN=national number TSID=termination switch ID TTG=termination junction line group T zero=TBCD zero
		18 words 34, position 0-3 D1 N word 34, position 4-7 D2 N word 34, position 8-11 D3 N word 34, position 12-15 D4 N word 35, position 0-3 D5 N word 35, position 4-7 D6 N word 35, position 8-11 D7 N word 35, position 12-15 D8 N

	Word 36, position 0-3 D9 N word 36, position 4-7 D10 N word 36, position 8-11 D11 N word 36, position 12-15 D12 N word 37, position 0-3 D13 N word 37, position 4-7 D14 N word 37, position 8-11 D15 N word 37, position 12-15 D16 N word 38, position 0-3 D17 N word 38, position 4-7 D18 N word 38, position 8-11 D19 X (TSID) word 38, position 12-15 D20 X (TSID) word 39, position 0-3 D21 X (TSID) word 39, position 4-7 D22 X (TTG) word 39, position 8-11 D23 X (TTG) word 39, position 12-15 D24 X (TTG) word 40, position 0-3 D25 X (TTG) TSID=termination switch ID TTG=termination junction line group
		Word 40, position 4-15 word 41, position 0-15 word 42, position 0-15 word 43, position 0-15	The numeral (PTD) of conversion in advance: representative is 15 the calling subscriber translation number of dialling the number nearly. 10 00Y SAC 7 Vnet/IDD Vnet, SAC, code Vnet or D15 position DNIS or hot line SNS (example) word 40, position 4-7 PTD1 N 0 N N word 40, position 8-11 PTD2 X 0 X N word 40, position 12-15 PTD3 X Y X N word 41, position 0-3 PTD4 N N X N word 41, position 4-7 PTD5 X X X N

	Word

41, position 8-11 PTD6 X X X N word 41, position 12-15 PTD7 X X X N word 42, position 0-3 PTD8 X X T zero N word 42, position 4-7 PTD9 X X T zero N word 42, position 8-11 PTD10 X X T zero N word 42, position 12-15 PTD11 T zero T zero T zero N word 43, position 0-3 PTD12 T zero T zero T zero N word 43, position 4-7 PTD13 T zero T zero T zero N word 43, position 8-11 PTD14 T zero T zero T zero N word 43, position 12-15 PTD15 T zero T zero T zero N T zero=TBCD zero
	Word 44, position 0-7	International Route Selection (EIR) type of call that strengthens: contain from NCS charging information parameter DAP or the operator receives from NCS charging information ISUP RLT parameter EIR type of call ID. With binary recording.
Word 44, position 8-14	Word 44, position 0-7		Overflow cause value (OVFVAL): this territory is the value such as binary system of interior first cause value that receives or format of switch. This value is that the cause value subdomain of the cause parameter of overflowing from startup extracts.
Word 44, position 8-14	Word 44, position 15	Press call attempt counting (CB): this territory is used for the EIR feature. This information by DAP from the CB territory of NCS charging information parameter or operator's reception from NCS charging information ISUP RLT parameter is set to ' 1, or ' 0 '. 0=presses the call attempt counting not according to call attempt counting (default) 1=
Word 45, position 0-3	Word 44, position 15		Overflow reason position (OVFCL): this territory is to receive in the switch or the value such as binary system of the value of first reason position record of format. This value is that the reason position subdomain of the cause parameter of overflowing from startup extracts.
Word 45, position 0-3	Word 45, position 4-15 word 46, position 0-15 word 47, position 0-15 word 48, position 0-15	Expectation end address (DTA): these 15 bytes contained before triggering is overflowed in the original plan or the terminal of " expectation ". They contain: 1) mail to expectation termination switch ID or the junction line group of the calling of DTC terminal, perhaps 2) national number, perhaps 3) be the international number what action identification code determines according to what return from DAP for the expectation terminal.

	DTC DTSID+ DTTG DDD word 45, position 4-7 DTA1 0 N word 45, position 8-11 DTA2 X (DTSID1) X word 45, position 12-15 DTA3 X (DTSID2) X word 46, position 0-3 DTA4 X (DTSID3) N word 46, position 4-7 DTA5 0 X word 46, position 8-11 DTA6 X (DTTG1) X word 46, position 12-15 DTA7 X (DTTG2) X word 47, position 0-3 DTA8 X (DTTG3) X word 47, position 4-7 DTA9 X (DTTG4) X word 47, position 8-11 DTA10 TBCD zero X word 47, position 12-15 DTA11 TBCD zero TBCD zero word 48, position 0-3 DTA12 TBCD zero TBCD zero word 48, position 4-7 DTA13 TBCD zero TBCD zero word 48, position 8-11 DTA14 TBCD zero TBCD zero word 48, the termination junction line group of the termination switch ID DTTG=expectation of position 12-15 DTA15 TBCD zero TBCD zero DTSID=expectation
		IDDD DTC (example) (in the future) word 45, position 4-7 DTA1 CC X (DTSID1) word 45, position 8-11 DTA2 CC X (DTSID2) word 45, position 12-15 DTA3 CC X (DTSID3) word 46, position 0-3 DTA4 NN X (DTSID4) word 46, position 4-7 DTA5 NN X (DTTG1) word 46, position 8-11 DTA6 NN X (DTTG2) word 46, position 12-15 DTA7 NN X (DTTG3) word 47, position 0-3 DTA8 NN X (DTTG4)

	Word 47, position 4-7 DTA9 NN X (DTTG5) word 47, position 8-11 DTA10 NN TBCD zero word 47, position 12-15 DTA11 NN TBCD zero word 48, position 0-3 DTA12 NN TBCD zero word 48, position 4-7 DTA13 NN TBCD zero word 48, position 8-11 DTA14 NN TBCD zero word 48, position 12-15 DTA15 TBCD zero TBCD zero CC=client connects the termination junction line group NN=national number of the termination switch ID DTTG=expectation of DTSID=expectation
		Word 49, position 0-6	Overflow counting (OVFC): point out that the centre before the terminal that hits pay dirk overflows the sum of attempt. This value increases progressively at every turn for flooding information access DAP the time.
Word 49, position 7-12	Expectation terminal action identification code (DTAC): this territory representative action identification code that DAP receives from first is replied. This information is used for being identified at the type of the information that records in the DTA territory.	Word 49, position 0-6
Word 49, position 7-12		Word 49, position 13	Need not
Word 49, position 14-15 word 50-54, position 0-15	Calling network identifier (NCID): the binary representation that contains NCID. If the authorization code territory is used to record out of Memory, just at middle and termination switch record NCID. NCID creates at ingress switch, is passed to middle and the termination switch. The form of NCID is: ingress switch ID (OSID) junction line group (OTG) port (OP) time point 1 (TP1) the NCID sequence number that starts that starts	Word 49, position 13	Need not
Word 49, position 14-15 word 50-54, position 0-15		Word 55-58, position 0-15 word 59, position 0-10	Need not
Word 59, position 11-13	The user is to user type (UUS type): contain and be useful on sign and use	Word 55-58, position 0-15 word 59, position 0-10	Need not

	The user to the binary representation of the type of user service. If this territory be set to ' 0 ' and the value that arranges of UUIE counting territory be not ' 0 ', the user of the right and wrong correlation of call that is then transmitting is to user profile. 0=is without the UUS of message or the correlation of call only MA-UUI 2=CA-TSC 3=when the call setup only during the CA-TSC 4=call setup behind call setup and the MA-UUI the when MA-UUI during the CA-TSC 5=call setup behind the call setup and the MA-UUI behind the CA-TSC 6=call setup and CA-TSC 7=call setup and the CA-TSC behind CA-TSC and the call setup only of (default) 1=that is called
		Word 59, position 14-15 word 60, position 0-13	The user is to user profile element count (UUIE counting): contain the binary counting of the UUIE that transmits in either direction relevant for TSC. Start and terminate switch the two all keep a counter to calculate the quantity of the UUIE that per call transmits. Each switch calculates all UUIE that no matter whether transmit on any direction. The side that kept accounts is responsible for the UUIE transmission and pays. If counting reaches maximum 65535, it will rest on this value, until there is new call record to create. In case reach maximum count value, the passage of carrying is just disconnected.
Word 60, position 14-15	Overflow situation coding standard (OVFCS): the value such as binary system that contain first coding standard of switch reception or format. This value is that the coding standard subdomain of the cause parameter of overflowing from startup extracts. The format value covers in the coding standard that it can not received subsequently or the switch, and this territory only is used for the calling of overflowing of enhancing.	Word 59, position 14-15 word 60, position 0-13
Word 60, position 14-15		Word 61, position 0-15 word 62, position 0-7	The NX64 bitmap starts: the corresponding port numbers of the control channel that starts of the calling in the port that starts among the record CDR/PNR. This bitmap is used for sign and is used in passage in the calling in the same T1 period subsequently. When certain certain bits is set up, represent that this passage is used in the calling. The number of the position that is set is used for the number N that sign NX64 calls out.
Word 62, position 8-15	Termination NX64 bitmap: the calling among the record CDR/PNR in the termination port	Word 61, position 0-15 word 62, position 0-7

Word

63, position 0-15

The corresponding port numbers of termination control channel. This bitmap is used for sign and is used in passage in the calling in the same T1 period subsequently. When certain certain bits is set up, represent that this passage is used in the calling. The number of the position that is set is used for the number N that sign NX64 calls out. In general, the transmission speed of each passage is 64Kb/ second. If the client needs a plurality of passages, which passage this bitmap has just used in the indicating call.

Table 303-OSR/POSR record format

Word #, position	Describe
Word #, position	Describe	Word 0, position 0-3	Call record ID (CRID): the default 1=CDR 2=SER of identification record type 0=3=PNR 4=OSR 5=POSR 6=ECDR 7=EPOSR 8=EOSR 9=EPOSR 10-15=need not
Word 0, position 4-15	Calling disconnects ID (CDID): the identifying call letters record. Each is called out an exclusive ID. 12 least significant bits of CDID are contained in these 12 positions.	Word 0, position 0-3
Word 0, position 4-15		Word 1, position 0-15 word 2, position 0-15	Time point 1 (TP1): the binary counting of the number of seconds that between the time that midnight January 1 (UTC) in 1976 and the exchanged machine examination of input signal measure, occurs.
Word 3, position 0-12	Time point 4 (TP3): catch the binary counting of the number of seconds that occurs between the time of this operator position at time point 1 and switch.	Word 1, position 0-15 word 2, position 0-15
Word 3, position 0-12		Word 3, position 13-15 word 4, position 0-9	Time point 6 (TP6): supervise the binary counting of the number of seconds that occurs between the time that is detected or receives at time point 1 and answer. This is this

	Calling is answered the time that spends by called people or audio system.
		Word 4, position 10-15 word 5, position 0-15	Time point 7 (TP7): the binary counting of the number of seconds that occurs between the time that no matter who disconnects at first in time point 1 and originators and termination side.
Word 6, position 0-15 word 7, position 1	Port (OP) starts: the absolute port numbers of the junction line that starts. The junction line that starts is the circuit that the calling on it arrives switch.	Word 4, position 10-15 word 5, position 0-15
Word 6, position 0-15 word 7, position 1		Word 7, position 2-15 word 8, position 0-1	Termination port (TP): the absolute port numbers of calling out the upper termination junction line that attempt takies for output. The termination junction line is to call out a upper circuit that is transferred to switch thereon.
Word 8, position 2-14	The junction line group that starts (OTG): the start binary system number of the junction line group number that starts of junction line of expression. The junction line group that starts is one group of port from same position.	Word 7, position 2-15 word 8, position 0-1
Word 8, position 2-14		Word 8, position 15 words 9, position 0-11	Termination junction line group (TTG): the binary system of the termination junction line group number of expression termination junction line number. Termination junction line group is one group of port of whereabouts same position. If call out owing to do not have available junction line and failure, the upper junction line group number that record is attempted.
Word 9, position 12-15	Time point 3 delimiters (TP3Q): contain pulse output call treatment delimiter, it provides to the people's of called people calling telephone number. Called people needs to undertake obligations for " ANI delivery " service is signatory and display is arranged for display of calling people's telephone number. The default 1=ANI/CSI of 0=delivered 2=DNIS delivered 3=ANI/CSI and DNIS delivered 4-5=without 6=NCT 7=NCT, ANI/CSI delivered 8=NCT, DNIS delivered 9=NCT, ANI/CSI and DNIS delivered 10=NCT serial 11-15=need not	Word 8, position 15 words 9, position 0-11
Word 9, position 12-15		Word 10, position 0-1	Time point 6 delimiters (TP6Q): contain the indication call and answered

	The answer limitation symbol of mode. The 0=hardware detection detects answer to speech 2=without 3=operator/NARS to answering the 1=software detection
		Word
10, position 2-7	Action identification code (AC): switch provides an action identification code, the type of indication destination-address, and perhaps called telephone number is what type, perhaps error code. The dialing of the graunch 9=mistake that occurs among action identification code 6=input isolation (incoming exclusion) fault 7=ID code fault 8=NCS/DAP that the non-spill 7 figure place number 2=of the default 1=of 0=have the 7 figure place number 3=DDD number 4=IDDD number 5=switches that overflow to generate, NCS/DAP can not change the country that the non-spill 10 figure place number 11=of the 10=that dials the number of institute have the 10 figure place number 12=that overflow to have to overflow (number) 13=have the world of overflowing (number) 14=ANI do not find that 15=NPA-NXXX does not find that the 16=guiding number finds not that the related subregion of 17=do not find that 18=ADF format error 19=switch ID does not find that the 20=800 number do not find outside the 21=800 number band (out of band)	Word

	22=not with the invalid ID code of 23=24=scope privilege 25=7 figure place number not in database 26=7 bit digital isolation characteristic 27=900 number do not find that 29=28=900 number band outside does not block 31=NCS door refusal 32=FlexSTC-do not allow with the 30=NCS network management and overflows 33=FlexSTC-allow and overflow the 34=SAC number and do not find that 36=700 number 35=SAC number band outside do not find that 38=ICR 37=700 number band outside specifies the outer 39=NCT-reverse call direction 40-48=of band to have the flexible direct non-spill outside Vnet 53=of terminating call 52=that overflows ANI index 56-62=that the outside VNet 54=global switch profile that overflows do not find that 55=DAP provides to be arranged without the inbound APP in the 63=world without the non-spill flexible direct terminating call 51=of 49=information calls 50=
		Word 10, position 8-11	The junction line class that starts (OTC): the junction line that starts that indication is access in is any type 0=ONAL (FG-A)

	4=international circuit (R1, R2, #5, #6, #7) 5=ISDN PRI 6=OST 7-15=need not for 1=ONAT (FG-B, FG-C, FG-D, CAMA, LAMA) 2=DAL, VNET, CAMA, FGS-DAL 3=IMT (in the band or SS7)
		Word 10, position 12-15	Termination junction line class (TTC): the termination junction line that indication is access in is that what type 0=ONAL (FG-A) 1=ONAT (FG-B, FG-C, FG-D, CAMA, LAMA) 2=DAL, VNET, CAMA, FGS-DAL 3=IMT (the interior or SS7 of band) 4=international circuit (R1, R2, #5, #6, #7) 5=ISDN PRI 6=OST 7-15=are without FG=feature group
Word 11, position 0-7	Message digit (ID): switch from the junction line winding of starting receive these the indication calls start the place phone type-such as home phone number, pay phone or prison phone-numeral. The direct CAMA FG-D of FG-B MCI IMT #5 #6 position 0-3:TBCD zero X X TBCD zero X position 4-7:X X X X X	Word 10, position 12-15
Word 11, position 0-7		Word
11, position 8-11	NACC (ONACC) starts: the North America coding treaty code that is receiving is contained in this territory in the input digit stream of operator's switch. The type of the required support of the inbound international call of this marking code. The default 1=121 of 0=(support that noncall is finished)	Word

	6-15=need not for 4=160 (human relay working) 5=191 (calling out the U.S.) for 2=131 (catalogue support) 3=151 (have and call out the support of finishing)
		Word 11, position 12-15	Termination NACC (TNACC): the North America coding treaty code in transmission in the input digit stream of another operator's switch is contained in this territory. The type that the next operator's switch of this marking code place need be supported. 6-15=need not for 4=160 (human relay working) 5=191 (calling out the U.S.) for the default 1=121 of 0=(support that noncall is finished) 2=131 (catalogue support) 3=151 (have and call out the support of finishing)
Word 12, position 0-15 word 13, position 0-15 word 14, position 0-7	Call out position ID (CLI): representative call out from 10 figure places. If switch receives numeral more than 10, just they are recorded in ECDR/EPOSR. 1.Vnet CAMA DAL starts: if CSI is available, with can with document HNPA and HNXX information come prefix CSI and record. NOCLI value with 7. 2.FG-C start: if ANI or CSI information are unavailable, and number format is 00Y+NXX+XXXX, then records 00Y in CLI 1-3, records OSID/OTG in CLI4-10. NOCLI value with 8. 3. FG-D starts in the band: the ANI that begins with CLI1 that record is received. NOCLI value with 1. 4.SS7 FG-D starts: record charge number (if getable words), if can not get, with regard to metered call side's number. NOCLI value with 2 or 3.	Word 11, position 12-15

	5. start in the world: the country code of metered call side and national number. NOCLI value with 9. 6.SS7 IMT starts: record following information according to sequence of importance: 1) charge number, 2) caller number, 3) from the OSID/OTG of generic numeral. NOCLI value with 2,3 or 8. Discuss 7.SS7 resell and to start: with TBCD-zero padding CLI territory. 8.SS7 dedicated network tissue: with TBCD-zero padding CLI territory. 9.PRI tissue: be recorded in the caller number that receives in the isdn setup message. The international word 12 of form: 1-10 numeral ANI OSID/OTG input, position 0-3 CLI1 TCBD zero X (CC) word 12, position 4-7 CLI2 TCBD zero X (CC) word 12, position 8-11 CLI3 TCBD zero X (CC) word 12, position 12-15 CLI4 X (OSID) X (N) word 13, position 0-3 CLI5 X (OSID) X (NN) word 13, position 4-7 CLI6 X (OSID) X (NN) word 13, position 8-11 CLI7 X (OTG) X (NN) word 13, position 12-15 CLI8 X (OTG) X (NN) word 14, position 0-3 CLI9 X (OTG) X (NN) word 15, position 4-7 CLI10 X (OTG) X (NN) CC=client connects NN=national number OSID=ingress switch NSC ID (000-999) the OTG=junction line group (0000-8191) that starts
		Word 14, position 8-15 word 15, position 0-15 word 16, position 0-15 word 17, position 0-15 word 18, position 0-15 word 19, position 0-15	Authorization code: whom represents for calling out 22 figure places pay the bill, comprise following one or more contents and/or optionally replenish code: 1. authorization code-contain authorization code numeral. The AUTH1-AUTH5 record is recorded the safety code SEC1-SEC3 of an optional variable 1-4 figure place by the authorization code of dialling or preserving after it, the latter is comprised of TBCD numeral 0-9 and A-D. After last position, record one

Individual TBCD zero, and record replenishes arbitrarily code digit SUPP1-SUPP12 afterwards. Record TBCD zero in what obsolete byte in office. Authorization code form: 5 figure places, 6 figure places, 7 figure place authorization code authorization code authorization code words 14, position 8-11 A1 AUTH1 AUTH1 AUTH1 word 14, position 12-15 A2 AUTH2 AUTH2 AUTH2 word 15, position 0-3 A3 AUTH3 AUTH3 AUTH3 word 15, position 4-7 A4 AUTH4 AUTH4 AUTH4 word 15, position 8-11 A5 AUTH5 AUTH5 AUTH5 word 15, position 12-15 A6 SEC1 AUTH6 AUTH6 word 16, position 0-3 A7 SEC2 SEC1 AUTH7 word 16, position 4-7 A8 SEC3 SEC3 SEC1 word 16, position 8-11 A9 SEC4 SEC3 SEC2 word 16, position 12-15 A10 TBCD zero SEC4 SEC3 word 17, position 0-3 A11 SUPP1 TBCD zero SEC4 word 17, position 4-7 A12 SUPP21 SUPP1 TBCD zero word 17, position 8-11 A13 SUPP3 SUPP2 SUPP1 word 17, position 12-15 A14 SUPP4 SUPP3 SUPP2 word 18, position 0-3 A15 SUPP5 SUPP4 SUPP3 word 18, position 4-7 A16 SUPP6 SUPP5 SUPP4 word 18, position 8-11 A17 SUPP7 SUPP6 SUPP5 word 18, position 12-15 A18 SUPP8 SUPP7 SUPP6 word 19, position 0-3 A19 SUPP9 SUPP8 SUPP7 word 19, position 4-7 A20 SUPP10 SUPP9 SUPP8 word 19, position 8-11 A21 SUPP11 SUPP10 SUPP9 word 19, position 12-15 A22 SUPP12 SUPP11 SUPP10 2. calling-station-IDs (CSI)-the contain numeral of calling station identifier. The CSI numeral will be begun record from A1. Recording TBCD zero behind last CSI position, is to replenish code digit subsequently. No byte contains TBCD zero. The calling-station-ID form:

7 figure place CSI, 10 figure place CSI words 14, position 8-11 A1 X X word 14, position 12-15 A2 X X word 15, position 0-3 A3 X X word 15, position 4-7 A4 X X word 15, position 8-11 A5 X X word 15, position 12-15 A6 X X word 16, position 0-3 A7 X X word 16, position 4-7 A8 TBCD zero X word 16, position 8-11 A9 SUPP1 X word 16, position 12-15 A10 SUPP2 X word 17, position 0-3 A11 SUPP3 TCBD zero word 17, position 4-7 A12 SUPP4 SUPP1 word 17, position 8-11 A13 SUPP5 SUPP2 word 17, position 12-15 A14 SUPP6 SUPP3 word 18, position 0-3 A15 SUPP7 SUPP4 word 18, position 4-7 A16 SUPP8 SUPP5 word 18, position 8-11 A17 SUPP9 SUPP6 word 18, position 12-15 A18 SUPP10 SUPP7 word 19, position 0-3 A19 SUPP11 SUPP8 word 19, position 4-7 A20 SUPP12 SUPP9 word 19, position 8-11 A21 SUPP13 SUPP10 word 19, position 12-15 A22 SUPP14 SUPP11 3. replenish code-additional code and begin record from A1. No byte contains TBCD zero. Replenish code format: 800/900 VNet replenishes code word 14, position 8-11 A1 SUPP1 word 14, position 12-15 A2 SUPP2 word 15, position 0-3 A3 SUPP3 word 15, position 4-7 A4 SUPP4

Word

15, position 8-11 A5 SUPP5 word 15, position 12-15 A6 SUPP6 word 16, position 0-3 A7 SUPP7 word 16, position 4-7 A8 SUPP8 word 16, position 8-11 A9 SUPP9 word 16, position 12-15 A10 SUPP10 word 17, position 0-3 A11 SUPP11 word 17, position 4-7 A12 SUPP12 word 17, position 8-11 A13 SUPP13 word 17, position 12-15 A14 SUPP14 word 18, position 0-3 A15 SUPP15 word 18, position 4-7 A16 SUPP16 word 18, position 8-11 A17 SUPP17 word 18, position 12-15 A18 SUPP18 word 19, position 0-3 A19 SUPP19 word 19, position 4-7 A20 SUPP20 word 19, position 8-11 A21 SUPP21 word 19, if 12-15 A22 SUPP22 4.VNet long-range access-calling subscriber in position is professional by long-range access service access VNet, access code begins record from A1. In the end record TBCD zero after the numerical digit then is any additional code. No byte contains TBCD zero. The long-range access form of VNet: word 14, position 8-11 A1 N word 14, position 12-15 A2 X word 15, position 0-3 A3 X word 15, position 4-7 A4 N word 15, position 8-11 A5 X word 15, position 12-15 A6 X word 16, position 0-3 A7 X

Word

16, position 4-7 A8 X word 16, position 8-11 A9 X word 16, position 12-15 A10 X word 17, position 0-3 A11 TCBD zero word 17, position 4-7 A12 SUPP1 word 17, position 8-11 A13 SUPP2 word 17, position 12-15 A14 SUPP3 word 18, position 0-3 A15 SUPP4 word 18, position 4-7 A16 SUPP5 word 18, position 8-11 A17 SUPP6 word 18, position 12-15 A18 SUPP7 word 19, position 0-3 A19 SUPP8 word 19, position 4-7 A20 SUPP9 word 19, position 8-11 A21 SUPP10 word 19, position 12-15 A22 SUPP11 5. caller number-be with a charge number and the SS7 FGD origin metered call side number that caller number receives. Record SS7 caller number in A1-10. In the end record TBCD zero after the numerical digit then is to replenish code. No byte contains TBCD zero. Caller number form: word 14, position 8-11 A1 N word 14, position 12-15 A2 X word 15, position 0-3 A3 X word 15, position 4-7 A4 N word 15, position 8-11 A5 X word 15, position 12-15 A6 X word 16, position 0-3 A7 X word 16, position 4-7 A8 X word 16, position 8-11 A9 X

Word

16, position 12-15 A10 X word 17, position 0-3 A11 TCBD zero word 17, position 4-7 A12 SUPP1 word 17, position 8-11 A13 SUPP2 word 17, position 12-15 A14 SUPP3 word 18, position 0-3 A15 SUPP4 word 18, position 4-7 A16 SUPP5 word 18, position 8-11 A17 SUPP6 word 18, position 12-15 A18 SUPP7 word 19, position 0-3 A19 SUPP8 word 19, position 4-7 A20 SUPP9 word 19, position 8-11 A21 SUPP10 word 19, position 12-15 A22 SUPP11 6. credit card numbers-begin to record commercial letter of credit number or reservation credit card number from A1. Effectively the PIN numeral of reservation credit card number is by writing TBCD-A and conductively-closed in these 4 PIN numerals. In the end record TBCD zero after the numeral then is to replenish code. No byte contains TBCD zero. Credit card number form: word 14, position 8-11 A1 X word 14, position 12-15 A2 X word 15, position 0-3 A3 X word 15, position 4-7 A4 X word 15, position 8-11 A5 X word 15, position 12-15 A6 X word 16, position 0-3 A7 X word 16, position 4-7 A8 X word 16, position 8-11 A9 X word 16, position 12-15 A10 X word 17, position 0-3 A11 X

Word

17, position 4-7 A12 X word 17, position 8-11 A13 X word 17, position 12-15 A14 X word 18, position 0-3 A15 X word 18, position 4-7 A16 X word 18, position 8-11 A17 X word 18, position 12-15 A18 X word 19, position 0-3 A19 X word 19, position 4-7 A20 TBCD zero word 19, position 8-11 A21 SUPP1 word 19,7.14 MCI/VNet cards-14 of position 12-15 A22 SUPP2 calling MCI card/VNet card number code begins record from A1, last 4 PIN conductively-closeds by writing TBCD-A. In the end writing TBCD zero after the numeral, then is to replenish code. No byte contains TBCD zero. Call out MCI card/VNet card form: word 14, position 8-11 A1 X word 14, position 12-15 A2 X word 15, position 0-3 A3 X word 15, position 4-7 A4 X word 15, position 8-11 A5 X word 15, position 12-15 A6 X word 16, position 0-3 A7 N word 16, position 4-7 A8 X word 16, position 8-11 A9 X word 16, position 12-15 A10 X word 17, position 0-3 A11 TCBD-A word 17, position 4-7 A12 TBCD-A word 17, position 8-11 A13 TBCD-A

Word

17, position 12-15 A14 TBCD-A word 18, position 0-3 A15 TBCD-zero word 18, position 4-7 A16 SUPP1 word 18, position 8-11 A17 SUPP2 word 18, position 12-15 A18 SUPP3 word 19, position 0-3 A19 SUPP4 word 19, position 4-7 A20 SUPP5 word 19, position 8-11 A21 SUPP6 word 19, position 12-15 A22 SUPP7 8. telecommunications/PTT card-these 23 or still less the telecommunications card of figure place begin record from A1. In the end record TBCD zero after the numeral then is to replenish code. No byte contains TBCD zero. Telecommunications card form: word 14, position 8-11 A1 X word 14, position 12-15 A2 X word 15, position 0-3 A3 X word 15, position 4-7 A4 X word 15, position 8-11 A5 X word 15, position 12-15 A6 X word 16, position 0-3 A7 X word 16, position 4-7 A8 X word 16, position 8-11 A9 X word 16, position 12-15 A10 X word 17, position 0-3 A11 X word 17, position 4-7 A12 X word 17, position 8-11 A13 X word 17, position 12-15 A14 X word 18, position 0-3 A15 X word 18, position 4-7 A16 X word 18, position 8-11 A17 X

Word

18, position 12-15 A18 X word 19, position 0-3 A19 X word 19, position 4-7 A20 X word 19, position 8-11 A21 X word 19, position 12-15 A22 X 9.OSID and OTG-are used for OSID and OTG record when received from SS7 generic digital parameters of international inbound VNet or SAC calling. Behind the recording parameters, remaining byte contains TBCD zero. OSID and OTG form: word 14, position 8-11 A1 X (OSID) word 14, position 12-15 A2 X (OSID) word 15, position 0-3 A3 X (OSID) word 15, position 4-7 A4 X (OTG) word 15, position 8-11 A5 X (OTG) word 15, position 12-15 A6 X (OTG) word 16, position 0-3 A7 X (OTG) word 16, position 4-7 A8 TCBD zero word 16, position 8-11 A9 TCBD zero word 16, position 12-15 A10 TCBD zero word 17, position 0-3 A11 TCBD zero word 17, position 4-7 A12 TCBD zero word 17, position 8-11 A13 TCBD zero word 17, position 12-15 A14 TCBD zero word 18, position 0-3 A15 TCBD zero word 18, position 4-7 A16 TCBD zero word 18, position 8-11 A17 TCBD zero word 18, position 12-15 A18 TCBD zero word 19, position 0-3 A19 TCBD zero word 19, position 4-7 A20 TCBD zero

Word 19, position 8-11 A21 TCBD zero word 19, position 12-15 A22 TCBD zero OSID=ingress switch group (000-999) OTG=starts, and 10. commercial group ID-is concerning some SS7 junction line group for junction line group (0000-8191), and commercial group ID receives and be recorded in A1-A6 in the SS7 parameter. In the end record TBCD zero after the numeral then is to replenish code. No byte contains TBCD zero. Word 14, position 8-11 A1 X word 14, position 12-15 A2 X word 15, position 0-3 A3 X word 15, position 4-7 A4 X word 15, position 8-11 A5 X word 15, position 12-15 A6 X word 16, position 0-3 A7 TBCD zero word 16, position 4-7 A8 SUPP1 word 16, position 8-11 A9 SUPP2 word 16, position 12-15 A10 SUPP3 word 17, position 0-3 A11 SUPP4 word 17, position 4-7 A12 SUPP5 word 17, position 8-11 A13 SUPP6 word 17, position 12-15 A14 SUPP7 word 18, position 0-3 A15 SUPP8 word 18, position 4-7 A16 SUPP9 word 18, position 8-11 A17 SUPP10 word 18, position 12-15 A18 SUPP11 word 19, position 0-3 A19 SUPP12 word 19, position 4-7 A20 SUPP13 word 19, position 8-11

A21 SUPP14

Word

19,11. network informations-concerning some SS7 junction line group, the network information receives and is recorded in A1-A4 to position 12-15 A22 SUPP15 in the SS7 parameter. In the end record TBCD zero after the numeral then is to replenish code. No byte contains TBCD zero. Word 14, position 8-11 A1 N word 14, position 12-15 A2 X word 15, position 0-3 A3 X word 15, position 4-7 A4 N word 15, position 8-11 A5 TBCD zero word 15, position 12-15 A6 SUPP1 word 16, position 0-3 A7 SUPP2 word 16, position 4-7 A8 SUPP3 word 16, position 8-11 A9 SUPP4 word 16, position 12-15 A10 SUPP5 word 17, position 0-3 A11 SUPP6 word 17, position 4-7 A12 SUPP7 word 17, position 8-11 A13 SUPP8 word 17, position 12-15 A14 SUPP9 word 18, position 0-3 A15 SUPP10 word 18, position 4-7 A16 SUPP11 word 18, position 8-11 A17 SUPP12 word 18, position 12-15 A18 SUPP13 word 19, position 0-3 A19 SUPP14 word 19, position 4-7 A20 SUPP15 word 19, position 8-11 A21 SUPP16 word 19, position 12-15 A22 SUPP17 12.BOC card: BOC/LEC card number code is recorded among the A1-A10, its

Remaining byte contains TBCD zero. Word 14, position 8-11 A1 N word 14, position 12-15 A2 X word 15, position 0-3 A3 X word 15, position 4-7 A4 N word 15, position 8-11 A5 X word 15, position 12-15 A6 X word 16, position 0-3 A7 X word 16, position 4-7 A8 X word 16, position 8-11 A9 X word 16, position 12-15 A10 X word 17, position 0-3 A11 TBCD zero word 17, position 4-7 A12 TBCD zero word 17, position 8-11 A13 TBCD zero word 17, position 12-15 A14 TBCD zero word 18, position 0-3 A15 TBCD zero word 18, position 4-7 A16 TBCD zero word 18, position 8-11 A17 TBCD zero word 18, position 12-15 A18 TBCD zero word 19, position 0-3 A19 TBCD zero word 19, position 4-7 A20 TBCD zero word 19, position 8-11 A21 TBCD zero word 19, position 12-15 A22 TBCD 0 13. the 3rd correspondent number: keep accounts to the 3rd correspondent NANP number if call out, just record this number at A1-A10, all the other bytes contain TBCD zero. Word 14, position 8-11 A1 N word 14, position 12-15 A2 X

Word

15, position 0-3 A3 X word 15, position 4-7 A4 N word 15, position 8-11 A5 X word 15, position 12-15 A6 X word 16, position 0-3 A7 X word 16, position 4-7 A8 X word 16, position 8-11 A9 X word 16, position 12-15 A10 X word 17, position 0-3 A11 TBCD zero word 17, position 4-7 A12 TBCD zero word 17, position 8-11 A13 TBCD zero word 17, position 12-15 A14 TBCD zero word 18, position 0-3 A15 TBCD zero word 18, position 4-7 A16 TBCD zero word 18, position 8-11 A17 TBCD zero word 18, position 12-15 A18 TBCD zero word 19, position 0-3 A19 TBCD zero word 19, position 4-7 A20 TBCD zero word 19, position 8-11 A21 TBCD zero word 19, position 12-15 A22 TBCD 0 14. international numbers: keep accounts recording start number in A1 if call out to international number. No byte contains TBCD zero. Word 14, position 8-11 A1 X (CC) word 14, position 12-15 A2 X (CC) word 15, position 0-3 A3 X (CC) word 15, position 4-7 A4 X (NN) word 15, position 8-11 A5 X (NN) word 15, position 12-15 A6 X (NN) word 16, position 0-3 A7 X (NN)

Word 16, position 4-7 A8 X (NN) word 16, position 8-11 A9 X (NN) word 16, position 12-15 A10 X (NN) word 17, position 0-3 A11 X (NN) word 17, position 4-7 A12 X (NN) word 17, position 8-11 A13 X (NN) word 17, position 12-15 A14 X (NN) word 18, position 0-3 A15 X (NN) word 18, position 4-7 A16 TBCD zero word 18, position 8-11 A17 TBCD zero word 18, position 12-15 A18 TBCD zero word 19, position 0-3 A19 TBCD zero word 19, position 4-7 A20 TBCD zero word 19, position 8-11 A21 TBCD zero word 19, position 12-15 A22 TBCD zero CC=client connects NN=national number 15.LAN sequence number: process if call out by LAN, charging information can not transmit back the record keeping switch, and LAN just is recorded in all charging informations in the record keeping detail record (BDR) and to switch and sends it back a LAN sequence number. The LAN sequence number is at the A1-A16 record, and all the other contain TBCD zero. Word 14, position 8-11 A1 X word 14, position 12-15 A2 X word 15, position 0-3 A3 X word 15, position 4-7 A4 X word 15, position 8-11 A5 X word 15, position 12-15 A6 X

Word

16, position 0-3 A7 X word 16, position 4-7 A8 X word 16, position 8-11 A9 X word 16, position 12-15 A10 X word 17, position 0-3 A11 X word 17, position 4-7 A12 X word 17, position 8-11 A13 X word 17, position 12-15 A14 X word 18, position 0-3 A15 X word 18, position 4-7 A16 X word 18, position 8-11 A17 TBCD zero word 18, position 12-15 A18 TBCD zero word 19, position 0-3 A19 TBCD zero word 19, position 4-7 A20 TBCD zero word 19, position 8-11 A21 TBCD zero word 19, position 12-15 A22 TBCD zero 16.DNIS:DNIS can be by from the general address parameter of SS7-such as using being recorded like that of the calling reception processed through EVS/NARS. Word 14, position 8-11 A1 N word 14, position 12-15 A2 X word 15, position 0-3 A3 X word 15, position 4-7 A4 N word 15, position 8-11 A5 X word 15, position 12-15 A6 X word 16, position 0-3 A7 X word 16, position 4-7 A8 X word 16, position 8-11 A9 X word 16, position 12-15 A10 X word 17, position 0-3 A11 TBCD zero

Word 17, position 4-7 A12 TBCD zero word 17, position 8-11 A13 TBCD zero word 17, position 12-15 A14 TBCD zero word 18, position 0-3 A15 TBCD zero word 18, position 4-7 A16 TBCD zero word 18, position 8-11 A17 TBCD zero word 18, position 12-15 A18 TBCD zero word 19, position 0-3 A19 TBCD zero word 19, position 4-7 A20 TBCD zero word 19, position 8-11 A21 TBCD zero word 19, the position 12-15 A22 TBCD 0 17. calling network identifiers (NCID) if-NCID is at " A " territory record, it will be begun record from A1 with binary form. This input code (Entry Code) will be indicated the call treatment related with this specific call or will be " 0 ". If NCID records in the NCID territory of 64 word call records, then input code also will be indicated the call treatment related with this specific call or will be " 0 ". NCID is comprised of following: the ingress switch ID junction line group originating terminal slogan time point 1 NCID sequence number that starts

Word 20, position 0-15 word 21, position 0-15 word 22, position 0-15 word 23, position 0-15 word 24, position 0-3	Destination-address: this be 17 be exactly the destination-address of just called domestic or international number, or operator's number format. In POSR, if the number that dials is changed by NCS/DAP or LAN, the number after the conversion just is recorded. If require figure place to surpass 17, just use the ECDR/EPNR form. No byte contains TBCD zero. 7 10 DDD IDDD words 20, position 0-3 D1 N N N CC word 20, position 4-7 D2 X X X CC word 20, position 8-11 D3 X X X CC word 20, position 12-15 D4 X N N NN word 21, position 0-3 D5 X X X NN word 21, position 4-7 D6 X X X NN word 21, position 8-11 D7 X X X NN word 21, position 12-15 D8 X (TSID) X X NN word 22, position 0-3 D9 X (TSID) X X NN word 22, position 4-7 D10 X (TSID) X X NN word 22, position 8-11 D11 X (TTG) X (TSID) T zero NN word 22, position 12-15 D12 X (TTG) X (TSID) T zero NN word 23, position 0-3 D13 X (TTG) X (TSID) T zero NN word 23, position 4-7 D14 X (TTG) X (TTG) T zero NN
		Word 23, position 8-11 D15 T zero X (TTG) T zero NN word 23, position 12-15 D16 T zero X (TTG) T zero T zero word 24, position 0-3 D17 T zero X (TTG) T zero T zero CC=client connects NN=national number TSID=termination switch ID TTG=termination junction line group
			BOC operator operator is inwardly artificial to the domestic member of operation to the operation person of dialing

	/ international switching word 20, position 0-3 D1 N X (CC) X (CC) word 20, position 4-7 D2 0/1 X (CC) X (CC) word 20, position 8-11 D3 X X (CC) X (CC) word 20, position 12-15 D4 X (ATC) TBCD 01 words 21, position 0-3 D5 X (ATC) TBCD 06 words 21, position 4-7 D6 X (ATC) TBCD 00 words 21, position 8-11 D7 X (S11) TBCD zero TBCD zero word 21, position 12-15 D8 X (S12) TBCD zero TBCD zero word 22, position 0-3 D9 X (S13) TBCD zero TBCD zero word 22, position 4-7 D10 X (S14) TBCD zero TBCD zero word 22, position 8-11 D11 X (S15) TBCD zero TBCD zero word 22, position 12-15 D12 TBCD zero TBCD zero TBCD zero word 23, position 0-3 D13 TBCD zero TBCD zero TBCD zero word 23, position 4-7 D14 TBCD zero TBCD zero TBCD zero word 23, position 8-11 D15 TBCD zero TBCD zero TBCD zero word 23, position 12-15 D16 TBCD zero TBCD zero TBCD zero word 24, position 0-3 D17 TBCD zero TBCD zero TBCD zero
		Word 24, position 4-15 word 25, position 0-1	Operator ID number (OPIN): contain operator ID number of the operator that process to call out.
Word 25, position 2	Need not	Word 24, position 4-15 word 25, position 0-1
Word 25, position 2	Need not	Word 25, position 3-15	The binary counting of the number of seconds between the time that the time that time point 5 (TPS): time T P1 occurs and operator stop to process the calling and discharging this position. If call out and be transferred to other operators, the release time that the operator of service is provided will be expressed in this territory.
Word 26, position 0-15	Room number (RN): when calling originates from hotel, university or any other contains last 4 bit digital of calling-station-ID (CSI) during with the corporations of a main telephone number mark. CSI will obtain from the signaling information that starts, and perhaps in fact obtain by the operator with the manual input of this information OSR.	Word 25, position 3-15
Word 26, position 0-15		Word 27, position 0-3	Condition code (FC): switch is determined a condition code for calling out, and points out

	Whether this calling needs the data circuit of particular type, such as the high-quality circuit that is used for facsimile transmission. DS3 (HSCS) 6-8=of DS1 (HSCS) the 5=exchange of the default 1=of 0=fax 2=NARS 3=data call 4=exchange selects 11=AAP to call out (being used for the conversion of gateway charge ticket) the dial-out audio/video conference 14=of 12=toll bar refusal 13=forum concert freephone 15=without the outer route of 9=NX64 10=net need not
		Word 27, position 4-7	Termination network code (TNC): the termination equipment of pointing out to be used as the remainder in the path of calling out. The sign that for example represents non-satellite transmission. The default 1=of 0=without Route Selection restriction 2=avoid satellite 3=by DS1 Route Selection 4=by the DS1 Route Selection and avoid satellite 5=to require preferably need not by there being the protection facility to carry out Route Selection 7-15=by there being the protection facility to carry out Route Selection 6=
Word 27, position 8-11	Network insertion type (NAT): point out defined such as ingress switch on the network, what use is the network insertion of which type; In other words, the calling subscriber is access network how. Access style has: the default 1=800 of 0=calls out	Word 27, position 4-7

	The long-range access 5=of access 4=VNET that 2=credit card access 3=operator assists need not by the straight-through access of the side of record keeping preferred (BPP) access 6=FGD 7-15=
		Word 27, position 12-15	Time point 7 qualifiers (TP7Q): first that contains calling disconnects qualifier, namely calls out how to terminate. Disconnecting type has: 0=calling party disconnect that 1=callee disconnects that 2=calling party starts again that the 3=switch starts (for example. switch mistake cutting call) the busy 5=of all routes of 4=ring time long disconnecting of causing; Ring timer expiry 6-15=need not
Word 28, position 0-6	Input code (EC): the type of the type of the call treatment that indication occurs and the information that in the authorization code territory, records. If receive a plurality of input codes, record last. Following code is effective: the BOC that the default 1=Human To Human of 0=(P-P) 2=Station To Station (S-S) 3=third party record keeping (third party's number records) 4=P-P recipient paying (keeping accounts to the callee) 5=S-S recipient paying (keeping accounts to the callee) 6=MCI card or VNet card (S-S) 7=do not have calling to finish inwardly dials 8=and generally helps 9=BOC/LEC card 10=reservation credit card 11=PTT card 12=catalogue to help	Word 27, position 12-15

13＝ 14＝BOC 15＝MCIVNet ( P-P ) 16-19＝ 20＝ANI ( / ) 21＝Auth ( ) 22＝ 23＝700 ( #20 ) 24＝500、800 ( #20 ) 25＝900 ( #20 ) 26-28＝ 29＝ 30＝EVS/NARS- ( DMR ) 31＝EVS/NARS-MCIDMR 32＝EVS/NARS-MCIDMR 33＝EVS/NARS-MCI ( CE ) DMR 34＝EVS/NARS-MCI ( CE ) DMR 35＝EVS/NARS-CE ( CMA ) 36＝EVS/NARS-CECMA 37＝EVS/NARS- ( ECR ) 38-41＝EVS/NARS- 42-47＝ 48＝GETS 49＝ 50＝ 51＝ID 52＝ 53＝VNet 54＝SS7 55＝OSIDOTG

	56=DNIS is recorded 57=service groups ID and is recorded the 58=network information and is recorded 59=BG+ zero+OSID/OTG 60=card number+zero+OSID/OTG 61=VNet RA+, zero+OSID/OTG 62=VNet RA+, zero+OSID/OTG 63=calling network transmission (NCT) 64-79=and keeps 88-89=and keep 90-99=to keep 100=18C be that I PIN S/S 101=18C is that I overall S/S 102=18C is that I ANI S/S 103=18C is that the international speed dial 112-127=of I the NPA S/S 104=18C courier S/S 105=18C courier PIN S/S 106=18C courier overall situation S/S 107=18C BOC card S/S 108=18C MCI card S/S 109=Aos courier international courier 111=of S/S 110=need not
		Word 28, position 7-9	Prefix number (PD): the prefix number that represents called number. These numerals tell how switch processes calling. 0=is without received 1=0-(operator assists) 2=0+ (domestic CDOS) 3=01+ of prefix numeral (international CDOS) 4=011+IDDD

	That 5=1+DDD 6=0+ operator assists, station address 7=*XX, wherein XX=0-9, star card
		Word
28, position 10-12	NDID (NCS/DAP ID): whether the indication switch was processed calling or whether was included but not limited to VNET, call card, 800 and 900 callings to a database (such as the NCS/DAP) business information-business of inquiring about. NDID further points out the ID of the NCS/DAP that relates in last affairs are attempted. The 0=calling of switchboard is processed 7=TCAP that 1=NCS/DAP 1 2=NCS/DAP 2 3=NCS/DAP 3 4-5=receive from operator's platform by RLT without 6=to NCS/DAP	Word
28, position 10-12		Word
28, position 13-15	Partition id (DIVID): contain the partition id of Credit Card Calling, comprise the card of telecommunication system. DIVID receives from NCS/DAP for the checking of card number code. If switch does not receive information, just record default value ' 0 '. The partition id 1=partition id 1 2=partition id 2 3=partition ids 3 4=partition ids 4 5=partition ids 5 6=partition ids 6 7=partition ids 7 of 0=no standard	Word
28, position 13-15		Word
29, position 0	Overflow at a distance (DO): when being set to 1 in the call record at ingress switch, indication in the middle of certain or termination switch place attempted once directly termination and overflowed (DTO) affairs to obtain the final destination address digit of this calling.	Word

Word 29, position 1	Need not
Word 29, position 1	Need not	Word 29, position 2	The client connects (CC): indication is to calculate call duration with time point 6 or time point 3. 0=calculates call duration with time point 6, * F. 1=calculates call duration with time point 3, * C.
Word		Word 29, position 2
Word	29, position 3	Between network (IN): from a client/network originated, termination is to a different client/network for indicating call. Default setting=0; If receive service groups or Netinfo parameter from NCS/DAP, this position is set as 1.
Word 29, position 4	29, position 3		Need not
Word 29, position 4	Word 29, position 5	SAC position (SC): this position is used for flexible SAC feature. Whenever the number of collecting at the address digit collection phase is identified as when being a SAC number among the FlexSac Index related with the junction line group that starts, this position is set in 1. all other situations, and this position is set to 0.	Need not
Word 29, position 6	Word 29, position 5		Call direction (CD): point out to call out at home and still start in the international network. 0=calls out and 1=to occur in the network that starts at home calls out to start and occur in the network at home
Word 29, position 6	Word
29, position 7	Word	Destination (DE): point out to expect to call out the international destination that when terminates. 0=is default, the calling of any international destination of not expecting to terminate of NANP, domestic VNET or other. 1=expectation termination is to the calling of international destination.
29, position 7	Word 29, position 8		Special-purpose termination (DT) indication has one 10 shared network number to be accomplished to a special-purpose destination. If the termination junction line class (TTC) in the call record equals 3 or 7, so just think that it is the junction line that directly terminates.
Word 29, position 9	Word 29, position 8	The people is to people (PP): if the operator authorizes a people to call out to the people, this position is set to 1. This position and input code are used in combination, with the character of determining to call out.
Word 29, position 9	Word 29, position 10		Transmitted position (XB): if call out from an operator position or

	ARU is transferred to another operator position or ARU, then this position 1.
		Word 29, position 11	Satellite (SA): indicating call will be used satellite circuit. Default setting is 0; The position is set to represent in 1 o'clock call out and will relates to satellite. When the incoming trunk group is labeled as the outfit satellite by class, when the numeral of the SAT in the IMT calling in the input tape shows that connection relates to satellite circuit, or when SS7 connection nature parameters points out that used satellite trunk last time, this position, position. This is for trouble shoot, rather than in order to keep accounts.
Word 29, position 12-15	Call out the character (NOCLI) of position ID: being identified at and calling out what record among the ID of position is the binary value of what data. Call out ID territory, position and contain the information of in NOCLI, quoting. The pseudo-ANI 6=that 0=creates at this switch from the original called number 5=of the ANI 2=SS7 of inbound junction line charge number 3=SS7 caller rs number 4=without 1=adds the ANI 14-15=of the CLI 13=NCT originator that CSI 8=NNN+OSID+OTG or 00Y+OSID+OTG (N=TBCD zero) 9=country code+national number 10=receive from operator's platform by RLT without CLI record 11=redirect number 12=from the NPA-NXX junction line group information of the CSI 7=registration of the junction line that starts need not	Word 29, position 11
Word 29, position 12-15		Word 30, position 0-15	Communication common carrier number (CN): representative is at FG-B or FG-D start the communication common carrier number that provides or the communication common carrier number that receives at SS7 IMT. If only use 3 figure places, they just are recorded among CN2-CN4, and CN1 will contain TBCD zero. Rear 4 bit digital (9595) of the specific 800 number of distributing to VISA credit card are also contained in this territory. It also will contain rear 4 bit digital of MCI card access number-no matter be

	What access device. The example of communication common carrier number is: MCI=22, ATT=288, friend=333. 4 CIC cards of 3 CIC of FGB/FGD FGB/D visa word 30, position 0-3 CN1 TBCD zero X 9 words 30, position 4-7 CN2 X X 5 words 30, position 8-11 CN3 X X 9 words 30, position 12-15 CN4 X X 5 SS7 TNS MCI card Vnet card words 30, position 0-3 CN1 X 11 words 30, position 4-7 CN2 X 01 words 30, position 8-11 CN3 X 21 words 30, position 12-15 CN4 X 21
		Word 31, position 0-3	Authorization code ID territory (ACIF): contain the authorization code identification field that is useful on registration card number state. This territory indicating card number (call card or credit card) is that get well or bad. 0=7 position authorization code file 1=first or unique the 5th five digital document 6=of the 4th five digital document 5=of the 3rd five digital document 4=of second five digital document 3=of five authorization code file 2=six digital document 7=scope fault restriction (invalid address numeral) the positive commercial letter of credit of 8=/89 card/M cards checking 9=invalid or not distribution without 10=MCI card/Visa card. Do not allow. The 11=BOC account number distributes but blocks the use of 12=BOC account number to transfinite

	13=without 14=from the overtime situation of replying of NCS/DAP, the MCI card that the default mandate 15=NCS/DAP of MCI card/Visa card authorizes/Visa card
		Word
31, position 4-10	Release code: be used for determining with time point 7 qualifiers release message is from where. This code is pointed out the reason of one of correspondent on-hook, for example normally discharges=16, can be with=34 without circuit. 1=unassigned number 2=normally removes the busy 18=no user of 17=user and replys the 19=no user and reply (user is warned) 21=and call out and be rejected without sending the wrong junction line prefix 16=that dials of specific information tone 5=to the route 3=of particular network without the route 4=to the destination	Word
31, position 4-10			The 22=number change the 27=destination stop to serve 28=address insufficient 29=equipment be rejected 31=normal-unspecified 34=do not subscribe the 55=incoming call 57=bearer capabilities unauthorized that is obstructed without the equipment that circuit can-not regulation 50=request unavailable with the unavailable 47=resource of channel of 38=network failure 41=temporary derangement 42=switching equipment swelling plug 44=request in CUG

	The unrealized 70=of equipment of the unrealized 69=of the unavailable 63=business of 58=bearer capabilities or the unavailable 65=bearer capabilities of option request only conditional digital information carrier function can with 79=business or the unrealized 87=called subscriber of option be not the regulation 97=type of message of the invalid message of the invalid transition network selector 95=of the incompatible destination 91=of CUG member 88=-not do not exist or unrealized 99=parameter do not exist or unrealized-abandon 102=to recover that timer time expires that the 103=parameter does not exist or unrealized-continue to transmit the regulation of the regulation 127=inter-working of 111=protocol error-not-
		Word 31, position 11-13	NCID sequence number: the calls with same time point 1 value that representative has occured on same port number. First calling is set as ' 0 ' with sequence number. To each calling subsequently that number has same time point 1 value at same port, this value increases progressively. Scope=0-7.
Word 31, position 14	NCID position (NCIDLOC): this bit-identify when NCID is recorded to the authorization code territory of call record. If in the middle of NCID is recorded to and the authorization code territory of the call record of termination switch-authorization code territory is not used for the record out of Memory. If the authorization code territory is used for the record out of Memory, then NCID is recorded in " NCID " territory of 64 word call records. 0=NCID is not recorded in authorization code territory (default) 1=NCID and is recorded in the authorization code territory	Word 31, position 11-13
Word 31, position 14		Word
31, position 15	Long-range ANI shielding (RS): if ANI does not list in the table of the local service area of switch, and this ANI is sent to DAP and does the shielding of ANI index, and then this position is set to ' 1 '. If switch will	Word

ANI sends to DAP and does ANI index shielding, but do not receive DAP reply or when normal switch A NI shielding had occured, this position was set to ' 0 '. 0=ANI is not shielded by DAP by DAP shielding (default) 1=ANI

Table 304-EOSR/EPOSR record format ()

Word #, position
Word #, position		Word 0-11, position 0-15	With the OSR/POSR form
Word		Word 0-11, position 0-15	With the OSR/POSR form
Word	12, position 0-15 word 13, position 0-15 word 14, position 0-15 word 15, position 0-11	Call out position ID: the 1-15 numeral that contains starting station circuit. This is calling party's ANI number. If receive 1 to 15 ANI or CSI number, they are recorded in the position that begins with CLI1 according to the order of sequence. No byte contains TBCD zero. If do not have ANI or CSI to use, just record in CLI4-10 that OSID/OTG-especially indicates except. If there is not whatever record in the LCI territory, just with 0 NOCLI value. One of following 9 kinds of forms are contained in this territory: 1.Vnet CAMA DAL starts: if CSI is available, with can with documentation HNPA and HNXX information come prefix CSI and record. NOCLI value with 7. 2.FG-C start: if ANI or CSI information are unavailable, and number format is 00Y+NXX-XXXX, and the 00Y code that then record receives in CLI1-3 records OSID/OTG in CLI4-10. NOCLI value with 8. 3. FG-D starts in the band: the ANI that begins with CLI1 that record is received. NOCLI value with 1. 4.SS7 FG-D starts: record charge number (if getable words), if can not get, with regard to metered call side's number. NOCLI value with 2 or 3. 5. start in the world: the country code of metered call side and national number. NOCLI value with 9. 6.SS7 IMT starts: record following information according to sequence of importance:

1) charge number, 2) caller number, 3) from the OSID/OTG of generic numeral. NOCLI value with 2,3 or 8. Discuss 7.SS7 resell and to start: with TBCD zero padding CLI territory. 8.SS7 dedicated network tissue: with TBCD zero padding CLI territory. 9.PRI start: be recorded in the caller number that receives in the isdn setup message. Form: the international word 12 of 1-15 position ANI/CSI (13 examples) OSID/OTG input, position 0-3 CLI1 X TCBD zero X (CC) word 12, position 4-7 CLI2 X TCBD zero X (CC) word 12, position 8-11 CLI3 X TCBD zero X (CC) word 12, position 12-15 CLI4 X X (OSID) X (NN) word 13, position 0-3 CLI5 X X (OSID) X (NN) word 13, position 4-7 CLI6 X X (OSID) X (NN) word 13, position 8-11 CLI7 X X (OTG) X (NN) word 13, position 12-15 CLI8 X X (OTG) X (NN) word 14, position 0-3 CLI9 X X (OTG) X (NN) word 14, position 4-7 CLI10 X X (OTG) X (NN) word 14, position 8-11 CLI11 X TBCD zero X (NN) word 14, position 12-15 CLI12 X TBCD zero X (NN) word 15, position 0-3 CLI13 X TBCD zero X (NN) word 15, position 4-7 CLI114 TBCD zero TBCD zero X (NN) word 15, position 8-11 CLI115 TBCD zero TBCD zero X (NN) CC=user connects NN=national number OSID=ingress switch ID

	The OTG=junction line group that starts
	The OTG=junction line group that starts	Word 15, position 12-15 word 16, position 0-15 word 17, position 0-15 word 18, position 0-15 word 19, position 0-15 word 20, position 0-15 word 21, position 0-15 word 22, position 0-15 word 23, position 0-15 word 24, position 0-15 word 25, position 0-15 word 26, position 0-15	Authorization code: (Auth Code): identical with the authorization code of OSR/POSR form, but represent 45 numerals. 1. authorization code: 5 numerals, 6 digital 7 numeric words 15, position 12-15 A1 AUTH1 AUTH1 AUTH1 word 16, position 0-3 A2 AUTH2 AUTH2 AUTH2 word 16, position 4-7 A3 AUTH3 AUTH3 AUTH3 word 16, position 8-11 A4 AUTH4 AUTH4 AUTH4 word 16, position 12-15 A5 AUTH5 AUTH5 AUTH5 word 17, position 0-3 A6 SEC1 AUTH6 AUTH6 word 17, position 4-7 A7 SEC2 SEC1 AUTH7 word 17, position 8-11 A8 SEC3 SEC2 SEC1 word 17, position 12-15 A9 SEC4 SEC3 SEC2 word 18, position 0-3 A10 T zero SEC4 SEC3 word 18, position 4-7 A11 SUPP1 T zero SEC4 word 18, position 8-11 A12 SUPP2 SUPP1 T zero word 18, position 12-15 A13 SUPP3 SUPP2 SUPP1 word 19, position 0-3 A14 SUPP4 SUPP3 SUPP2 word 19, position 4-7 A15 SUPP5 SUPP4 SUPP3 word 19, position 8-11 A16 SUPP6 SUPP5 SUPP4 word 19, position 12-15 A17 SUPP7 SUPP6 SUPP5 word 20, position 0-3 A18 SUPP8 SUPP7 SUPP6 word 20, position 4-7 A19 SUPP9 SUPP8 SUPP7 word 20, position 8-11 A20 SUPP10 SUPP9 SUPP8 word 20, position 12-15 A21 SUPP11 SUPP10 SUPP9 word 21, position 0-3 A22 SUPP12 SUPP11 SUPP10 word 21, position 4-7 A23 SUPP13 SUPP12 SUPP11 word 21, position 8-11 A24 SUPP14 SUPP13 SUPP12 word 21, position 12-15 A25 SUPP15 SUPP14 SUPP13

	Word 22, position 0-3 A26 SUPP16 SUPP15 SUPP14 word 22, position 4-7 A27 SUPP17 SUPP16 SUPP15 word 22, position 8-11 A28 SUPP18 SUPP17 SUPP16 word 22, position 12-15 A29 SUPP19 SUPP18 SUPP17 word 23, position 0-3 A30 SUPP20 SUPP19 SUPP18 word 23, position 4-7 A31 SUPP21 SUPP20 SUPP19 word 23, position 8-11 A32 SUPP22 SUPP21 SUPP20 word 23, position 12-15 A33 SUPP23 SUPP22 SUPP21 word 24, position 0-3 A34 SUPP24 SUPP23 SUPP22 word 24, position 4-7 A35 SUPP25 SUPP24 SUPP23 word 24, position 8-11 A36 SUPP26 SUPP25 SUPP24 word 24, position 12-15 A37 SUPP27 SUPP26 SUPP25 word 25, position 0-3 A38 SUPP28 SUPP27 SUPP26 word 25, position 4-7 A39 SUPP29 SUPP28 SUPP27 word 25, position 8-11 A40 SUPP30 SUPP29 SUPP28 word 25, position 12-15 A41 T zero SUPP30 SUPP29 word 26, position 0-3 A42 T zero T zero SUPP30 word 26, position 4-7 A43 T zero T zero T zero word 26, position 8-11 A44 T zero T zero T zero word 26, position 12-15 A45 T zero T zero T zero T zero=TBCD zero
			2. several 7 numeric word words 15 of calling-station-ID (CSI) 1-10, position 12-15 A1 X X word 16, position 0-3 A2 X X word 16, position 4-7 A3 X X word 16, position 8-11 A4 X X word 16, position 12-15 A5 X X word 17, position 0-3 A6 X X

Word 17, position 4-7 A7 X X word 17, position 8-11 A8 TBCD zero X word 17, position 12-15 A9 SUPP1 X word 18, position 0-3 A10 SUPP2 X word 18, position 4-7 A11 SUPP3 TBCD zero word 18, position 8-11 A12 SUPP4 SUPP1 word 18, position 12-15 A13 SUPP5 SUPP2 word 19, position 0-3 A14 SUPP6 SUPP3 word 19, position 4-7 A15 SUPP7 SUPP4 word 19, position 8-11 A16 SUPP8 SUPP5 word 19, position 12-15 A16 SUPP9 SUPP6 word 20, position 0-3 A18 SUPP10 SUPP7 word 20, position 4-7 A19 SUPP11 SUPP8 word 20, position 8-11 A20 SUPP12 SUPP9 word 20, position 12-15 A21 SUPP13 SUPP10 word 21, position 0-3 A22 SUPP14 SUPP11 word 21, position 4-7 A23 SUPP15 SUPP12 word 21, position 8-11 A24 SUPP16 SUPP13 word 21, position 12-15 A25 SUPP17 SUPP14 word 22, position 0-3 A26 SUPP18 SUPP15 word 22, position 4-7 A27 SUPP19 SUPP16 word 22, position 8-11 A28 SUPP20 SUPP17 word 22, position 12-15 A29 SUPP21 SUPP18 word 23, position 0-3 A30 SUPP22 SUPP19 word 23, position 4-7 A31 SUPP23 SUPP20 word 23, position 8-11 A32 SUPP24 SUPP21 word 23, position 12-15 A33 SUPP25 SUPP22 word 24, position 0-3 A34 SUPP26 SUPP23 word 24, position 4-7 A35 SUPP27 SUPP24 word 24, position 8-11 A36 SUPP28 SUPP25 word 24, position 12-15 A37 SUPP29 SUPP26 word 25, position 0-3 A38 SUPP30 SUPP27

	Word 25, position 4-7 A39 TBCD zero SUPP28 word 25, position 8-11 A40 TBCD zero SUPP29 word 25, position 12-15 A41 TBCD zero SUPP30 word 26, position 0-3 A42 TBCD zero TBCD zero word 26, position 4-7 A43 TBCD zero TBCD zero word 26, position 8-11 A44 TBCD zero TBCD zero word 26, position 12-15 A45 TBCD zero TBCD zero
			3. replenish code word 15, position 12-15 A1 SUPP1 word 16, position 0-3 A2 SUPP2 word 16, position 4-7 A3 SUPP3 word 16, position 8-11 A4 SUPP4 word 16, position 12-15 A5 SUPP5 word 17, position 0-3 A6 SUPP6 word 17, position 4-7 A7 SUPP7 word 17, position 8-11 A8 SUPP8 word 17, position 12-15 A9 SUPP9 word 18, position 0-3 A10 SUPP10 word 18, position 4-7 A11 SUPP11 word 18, position 8-11 A12 SUPP12 word 18, position 12-15 A13 SUPP13 word 19, position 0-3 A14 SUPP14 word 19, position 4-7 A15 SUPP15 word 19, position 8-11 A16 SUPP16 word 19, position 12-15 A16 SUPP17 word 20, position 0-3 A18 SUPP18 word 20, position 4-7 A19 SUPP19 word 20, position 8-11 A20 SUPP20 word 20, position 12-15 A21 SUPP21 word 21, position 0-3 A22 SUPP22

	Word 21, position 4-7 A23 SUPP23 word 21, position 8-11 A24 SUPP24 word 21, position 12-15 A25 SUPP25 word 22, position 0-3 A26 SUPP26 word 22, position 4-7 A27 SUPP27 word 22, position 8-11 A28 SUPP28 word 22, position 12-15 A29 SUPP29 word 23, position 0-3 A30 TBCD zero word 23, position 4-7 A31 TBCD zero word 23, position 8-11 A32 TBCD zero word 23, position 12-15 A33 TBCD zero word 24, position 0-3 A34 TBCD zero word 24, position 4-7 A35 TBCD zero word 24, position 8-11 A36 TBCD zero word 24, position 12-15 A37 TBCD zero word 25, position 0-3 A38 TBCD zero word 25, position 4-7 A39 TBCD zero word 25, position 8-11 A40 TBCD zero word 25, position 12-15 A41 TBCD zero word 26, position 0-3 A42 TBCD zero word 26, position 4-7 A43 TBCD zero word 26, position 8-11 A44 TBCD zero word 26, position 12-15 A45 TBCD zero
			4.VNET long-range access and caller rs number word 15, position 12-15 A1 N word 16, position 0-3 A2 X word 16, position 4-7 A3 X word 16, position 8-11 A4 N word 16, position 12-15 A5 X word 17, position 0-3 A6 X

Word 17, position 4-7 A7 X word 17, position 8-11 A8 X word 17, position 12-15 A9 X word 18, position 0-3 A10 X word 18, position 4-7 A11 TBCD zero word 18, position 8-11 A12 SUPP1 word 18, position 12-15 A13 SUPP2 word 19, position 0-3 A14 SUPP3 word 19, position 4-7 A15 SUPP4 word 19, position 8-11 A16 SUPP5 word 19, position 12-15 A16 SUPP6 word 20, position 0-3 A18 SUPP7 word 20, position 4-7 A19 SUPP8 word 20, position 8-11 A20 SUPP9 word 20, position 12-15 A21 SUPP10 word 21, position 0-3 A22 SUPP11 word 21, position 4-7 A23 SUPP12 word 21, position 8-11 A24 SUPP13 word 21, position 12-15 A25 SUPP14 word 22, position 0-3 A26 SUPP15 word 22, position 4-7 A27 SUPP16 word 22, position 8-11 A28 SUPP17 word 22, position 12-15 A29 SUPP18 word 23, position 0-3 A30 SUPP19 word 23, position 4-7 A31 SUPP20 word 23, position 8-11 A32 SUPP21 word 23, position 12-15 A33 SUPP22 word 24, position 0-3 A34 SUPP23 word 24, position 4-7 A35 SUPP24 word 24, position 8-11 A36 SUPP25 word 24, position 12-15 A37 SUPP26 word 25, position 0-3 A38 SUPP27

	Word 25, position 4-7 A39 SUPP28 word 25, position 8-11 A40 SUPP29 word 25, position 12-15 A41 SUPP30 word 26, position 0-3 A42 TBCD zero word 26, position 4-7 A43 TBCD zero word 26, position 8-11 A44 TBCD zero word 26, position 12-15 A45 TBCD zero
			5. caller rs number: word 15, position 12-15 A1 N word 16, position 0-3 A2 X word 16, position 4-7 A3 X word 16, position 8-11 A4 N word 16, position 12-15 A5 X word 17, position 0-3 A6 X word 17, position 4-7 A7 X word 17, position 8-11 A8 X word 17, position 12-15 A9 X word 18, position 0-3 A10 X word 18, position 4-7 A11 TBCD zero word 18, position 8-11 A12 SUPP1 word 18, position 12-15 A13 SUPP2 word 19, position 0-3 A14 SUPP3 word 19, position 4-7 A15 SUPP4 word 19, position 8-11 A16 SUPP5 word 19, position 12-15 A17 SUPP6 word 20, position 0-3 A18 SUPP7 word 20, position 4-7 A19 SUPP8 word 20, position 8-11 A20 SUPP9 word 20, position 12-15 A21 SUPP10 word 21, position 0-3 A22 SUPP11

	Word 21, position 4-7 A23 SUPP12 word 21, position 8-11 A24 SUPP13 word 21, position 12-15 A25 SUPP14 word 22, position 0-3 A26 SUPP15 word 22, position 4-7 A27 SUPP16 word 22, position 8-11 A28 SUPP17 word 22, position 12-15 A29 SUPP18 word 23, position 0-3 A30 SUPP19 word 23, position 4-7 A31 SUPP20 word 23, position 8-11 A32 SUPP21 word 23, position 12-15 A33 SUPP22 word 24, position 0-3 A34 SUPP23 word 24, position 4-7 A35 SUPP24 word 24, position 8-11 A36 SUPP25 word 24, position 12-15 A37 SUPP26 word 25, position 0-3 A38 SUPP27 word 25, position 4-7 A39 SUPP28 word 25, position 8-11 A40 SUPP29 word 25, position 12-15 A41 SUPP30 word 26, position 0-3 A42 TBCD zero word 26, position 4-7 A43 TBCD zero word 26, position 8-11 A44 TBCD zero word 26, position 12-15 A45 TBCD zero
			6. credit card: word 15, position 12-15 A1 X word 16, position 0-3 A2 X word 16, position 4-7 A3 X word 16, position 8-11 A4 X word 16, position 12-15 A5 X word 17, position 0-3 A6 X word 17, position 4-7 A7 X

Word 17, position 8-11 A8 X word 17, position 12-15 A9 X word 18, position 0-3 A10 X word 18, position 4-7 A11 X word 18, position 8-11 A12 X word 18, position 12-15 A13 X word 19, position 0-3 A14 X word 19, position 4-7 A15 X word 19, position 8-11 A16 X word 19, position 12-15 A16 X word 20, position 0-3 A18 X word 20, position 4-7 A19 X word 20, position 8-11 A20 TBCD zero word 20, position 12-15 A21 SUPP1 word 21, position 0-3 A22 SUPP2 word 21, position 4-7 A23 SUPP3 word 21, position 8-11 A24 SUPP4 word 21, position 12-15 A25 SUPP5 word 22, position 0-3 A26 SUPP6 word 22, position 4-7 A27 SUPP7 word 22, position 8-11 A28 SUPP8 word 22, position 12-15 A29 SUPP9 word 23, position 0-3 A30 SUPP10 word 23, position 4-7 A31 SUPP11 word 23, position 8-11 A32 SUPP12 word 23, position 12-15 A33 SUPP13 word 24, position 0-3 A34 SUPP14 word 24, position 4-7 A35 SUPP15 word 24, position 8-11 A36 SUPP16 word 24, position 12-15 A37 SUPP17 word 25, position 0-3 A38 SUPP18 word 25, position 4-7 A39 SUPP19

	Word 25, position 8-11 A40 SUPP20 word 25, position 12-15 A41 SUPP21 word 26, position 0-3 A42 SUPP22 word 26, position 4-7 A43 SUPP23 word 26, position 8-11 A44 SUPP24 word 26, position 12-15 A45 SUPP25
			7.14 digital MCI/VNet call card: word 15, position 12-15 A1 X word 16, position 0-3 A2 X word 16, position 4-7 A3 X word 16, position 8-11 A4 X word 16, position 12-15 A5 X word 17, position 0-3 A6 X word 17, position 4-7 A7 X word 17, position 8-11 A8 X word 17, position 12-15 A9 X word 18, position 0-3 A10 X word 18, position 4-7 A11 TBCD-A word 18, position 8-11 A12 TBCD-A word 18, position 12-15 A13 TBCD-A word 19, position 0-3 A14 TBCD-A word 19, position 4-7 A15 TBCD zero word 19, position 8-11 A16 SUPP1 word 19, position 12-15 A16 SUPP2 word 20, position 0-3 A18 SUPP3 word 20, position 4-7 A19 SUPP4 word 20, position 8-11 A20 SUPP5 word 20, position 12-15 A21 SUPP6 word 21, position 0-3 A22 SUPP7 word 21, position 4-7 A23 SUPP8

	Word 21, position 8-11 A24 SUPP9 word 21, position 12-15 A25 SUPP10 word 22, position 0-3 A26 SUPP11 word 22, position 4-7 A27 SUPP12 word 22, position 8-11 A28 SUPP13 word 22, position 12-15 A29 SUPP14 word 23, position 0-3 A30 SUPP15 word 23, position 4-7 A31 SUPP16 word 23, position 8-11 A32 SUPP17 word 23, position 12-15 A33 SUPP18 word 24, position 0-3 A34 SUPP19 word 24, position 4-7 A35 SUPP20 word 24, position 8-11 A36 SUPP21 word 24, position 12-15 A37 SUPP22 word 25, position 0-3 A38 SUPP23 word 25, position 4-7 A39 SUPP24 word 25, position 8-11 A40 SUPP25 word 25, position 12-15 A41 SUPP26 word 26, position 0-3 A42 SUPP27 word 26, position 4-7 A43 SUPP28 word 26, position 8-11 A44 SUPP29 word 26, position 12-15 A45 SUPP30
			8.OSD/OTG: word 15, position 12-15 A1 X (OSID) word 16, position 0-3 A2 X (OSID) word 16, position 4-7 A3 X (OSID) word 16, position 8-11 A4 X (OTG) word 16, position 12-15 A5 X (OTG) word 17, position 0-3 A6 X (OTG) word 17, position 4-7 A7 X (OTG)

Word 17, position 8-11 A8 TBCD zero word 17, position 12-15 A9 TBCD zero word 18, position 0-3 A10 TBCD zero word 18, position 4-7 A11 TBCD zero word 18, position 8-11 A12 TBCD zero word 18, position 12-15 A13 TBCD zero word 19, position 0-3 A14 TBCD zero word 19, position 4-7 A15 TBCD zero word 19, position 8-11 A16 TBCD zero word 19, position 12-15 A17 TBCD zero word 20, position 0-3 A18 TBCD zero word 20, position 4-7 A19 TBCD zero word 20, position 8-11 A20 TBCD zero word 20, position 12-15 A21 TBCD zero word 21, position 0-3 A22 TBCD zero word 21, position 4-7 A23 TBCD zero word 21, position 8-11 A24 TBCD zero word 21, position 12-15 A25 TBCD zero word 22, position 0-3 A26 TBCD zero word 22, position 4-7 A27 TBCD zero word 22, position 8-11 A28 TBCD zero word 22, position 12-15 A29 TBCD zero word 23, position 0-3 A30 TBCD zero word 23, position 4-7 A31 TBCD zero word 23, position 8-11 A32 TBCD zero word 23, position 12-15 A33 TBCD zero word 24, position 0-3 A34 TBCD zero word 24, position 4-7 A35 TBCD zero word 24, position 8-11 A36 TBCD zero word 24, position 12-15 A37 TBCD zero word 25, position 0-3 A38 TBCD zero word 25, position 4-7 A39 TBCD zero

	Word 25, position 8-11 A40 TBCD zero word 25, position 12-15 A41 TBCD zero word 26, position 0-3 A42 TBCD zero word 26, position 4-7 A43 TBCD zero word 26, position 8-11 A44 TBCD zero word 26, position 12-15 A45 TBCD zero OSID=ingress switch ID (000-999) OTG=junction line group (0000-8191) that starts
			9. telecommunications/PTT card: word 15, position 12-15 A1 X word 16, position 0-3 A2 X word 16, position 4-7 A3 X word 16, position 8-11 A4 X word 16, position 12-15 A5 X word 17, position 0-3 A6 X word 17, position 4-7 A7 X word 17, position 8-11 A8 X word 17, position 12-15 A9 X word 18, position 0-3 A10 X word 18, position 4-7 A11 X word 18, position 8-11 A12 X word 18, position 12-15 A13 X word 19, position 0-3 A14 X word 19, position 4-7 A15 X word 19, position 8-11 A16 X word 19, position 12-15 A17 X word 20, position 0-3 A18 X word 20, position 4-7 A19 X word 20, position 8-11 A20 X word 20, position 12-15 A21 X

	Word 21, position 0-3 A22 X word 21, position 4-7 A23 X word 21, position 8-11 A24 TBCD zero word 21, position 12-15 A25 SUPP1 word 22, position 0-3 A26 SUPP2 word 22, position 4-7 A27 SUPP3 word 22, position 8-11 A28 SUPP4 word 22, position 12-15 A29 SUPP5 word 23, position 0-3 A30 SUPP6 word 23, position 4-7 A31 SUPP7 word 23, position 8-11 A32 SUPP8 word 23, position 12-15 A33 SUPP9 word 24, position 0-3 A34 SUPP10 word 24, position 4-7 A35 SUPP11 word 24, position 8-11 A36 SUPP12 word 24, position 12-15 A37 SUPP13 word 25, position 0-3 A38 SUPP14 word 25, position 4-7 A39 SUPP15 word 25, position 8-11 A40 SUPP16 word 25, position 12-15 A41 SUPP17 word 26, position 0-3 A42 SUPP18 word 26, position 4-7 A43 SUPP19 word 26, position 8-11 A44 SUPP20 word 26, position 12-15 A45 SUPP21
			10. service groups ID word 15, position 12-15 A1 X word 16, position 0-3 A2 X word 16, position 4-7 A3 X word 16, position 8-11 A4 X word 16, position 12-15 A5 X

Word 17, position 0-3 A6 X word 17, position 4-7 A7 TBCD zero word 17, position 8-11 A8 SUPP1 word 17, position 12-15 A9 SUPP2 word 18, position 0-3 A10 SUPP3 word 18, position 4-7 A11 SUPP4 word 18, position 8-11 A12 SUPP5 word 18, position 12-15 A13 SUPP6 word 19, position 0-3 A14 SUPP7 word 19, position 4-7 A15 SUPP8 word 19, position 8-11 A16 SUPP9 word 19, position 12-15 A17 SUPP10 word 20, position 0-3 A18 SUPP11 word 20, position 4-7 A19 SUPP12 word 20, position 8-11 A20 SUPP13 word 20, position 12-15 A21 SUPP14 word 21, position 0-3 A22 SUPP15 word 21, position 4-7 A23 SUPP16 word 21, position 8-11 A24 SUPP17 word 21, position 12-15 A25 SUPP18 word 22, position 0-3 A26 SUPP19 word 22, position 4-7 A27 SUPP20 word 22, position 8-11 A28 SUPP21 word 22, position 12-15 A29 SUPP22 word 23, position 0-3 A30 SUPP23 word 23, position 4-7 A31 SUPP24 word 23, position 8-11 A32 SUPP25 word 23, position 12-15 A33 SUPP26 word 24, position 0-3 A34 SUPP27 word 24, position 4-7 A35 SUPP28 word 24, position 8-11 A36 SUPP29 word 24, position 12-15 A37 SUPP30

	Word 25, position 0-3 A38 TBCD zero word 25, position 4-7 A39 TBCD zero word 25, position 8-11 A40 TBCD zero word 25, position 12-15 A41 TBCD zero word 26, position 0-3 A42 TBCD zero word 26, position 4-7 A43 TBCD zero word 26, position 8-11 A44 TBCD zero word 26, position 12-15 A45 TBCD zero
			11. the network information: word 15, position 12-15 A1 X word 16, position 0-3 A2 X word 16, position 4-7 A3 X word 16, position 8-11 A4 X word 16, position 12-15 A5 TBCD zero word 17, position 0-3 A6 SUPP1 word 17, position 4-7 A7 SUPP2 word 17, position 8-11 A8 SUPP3 word 17, position 12-15 A9 SUPP4 word 18, position 0-3 A10 SUPP5 word 18, position 4-7 A11 SUPP6 word 18, position 8-11 A12 SUPP7 word 18, position 12-15 A13 SUPP8 word 19, position 0-3 A14 SUPP9 word 19, position 4-7 A15 SUPP10 word 19, position 8-11 A16 SUPP11 word 19, position 12-15 A17 SUPP12 word 20, position 0-3 A18 SUPP13 word 20, position 4-7 A19 SUPP14 word 20, position 8-11 A20 SUPP15 word 20, position 12-15 A21 SUPP16

Word 21, position 0-3 A22 SUPP17 word 21, position 4-7 A23 SUPP18 word 21, position 8-11 A24 SUPP19 word 21, position 12-15 A25 SUPP20 word 22, position 0-3 A26 SUPP21 word 22, position 4-7 A27 SUPP22 word 22, position 8-11 A28 SUPP23 word 22, position 12-15 A29 SUPP24 word 23, position 0-3 A30 SUPP25 word 23, position 4-7 A31 SUPP26 word 23, position 8-11 A32 SUPP27 word 23, position 12-15 A33 SUPP28 word 24, position 0-3 A34 SUPP29 word 24, position 4-7 A35 SUPP30 word 24, position 8-11 A36 TBCD zero word 24, position 12-15 A37 TBCD zero word 25, position 0-3 A38 TBCD zero word 25, position 4-7 A39 TBCD zero word 25, position 8-11 A40 TBCD zero word 25, position 12-15 A41 TBCD zero word 26, position 0-3 A42 TBCD zero word 26, position 4-7 A43 TBCD zero word 26, position 8-11 A44 TBCD zero word 26, position 12-15 A45 TBCD zero

12.BOC/LEC card: word 15, position 12-15 A1 N word 16, position 0-3 A2 X word 16, position 4-7 A3 X

Word 16, position 8-11 A4 N word 16, position 12-15 A5 X word 17, position 0-3 A6 X word 17, position 4-7 A7 X word 17, position 8-11 A8 X word 17, position 12-15 A9 X word 18, position 0-3 A10 X word 18, position 4-7 A11 TBCD zero word 18, position 8-11 A12 TBCD zero word 18, position 12-15 A13 TBCD zero word 19, position 0-3 A14 TBCD zero word 19, position 4-7 A15 TBCD zero word 19, position 8-11 A16 TBCD zero word 19, position 12-15 A17 TBCD zero word 20, position 0-3 A18 TBCD zero word 20, position 4-7 A19 TBCD zero word 20, position 8-11 A20 TBCD zero word 20, position 12-15 A21 TBCD zero word 21, position 0-3 A22 TBCD zero word 21, position 4-7 A23 TBCD zero word 21, position 8-11 A24 TBCD zero word 21, position 12-15 A25 TBCD zero word 22, position 0-3 A26 TBCD zero word 22, position 4-7 A27 TBCD zero word 22, position 8-11 A28 TBCD zero word 22, position 12-15 A29 TBCD zero word 23, position 0-3 A30 TBCD zero word 23, position 4-7 A31 TBCD zero word 23, position 8-11 A32 TBCD zero word 23, position 12-15 A33 TBCD zero word 24, position 0-3 A34 TBCD zero word 24, position 4-7 A35 TBCD zero

	Word 24, position 8-11 A36 TBCD zero word 24, position 12-15 A37 TBCD zero word 25, position 0-3 A38 TBCD zero word 25, position 4-7 A39 TBCD zero word 25, position 8-11 A40 TBCD zero word 25, position 12-15 A41 TBCD zero word 26, position 0-3 A42 TBCD zero word 26, position 4-7 A43 TBCD zero word 26, position 8-11 A44 TBCD zero word 26, position 12-15 A45 TBCD zero
			13. third party's number: word 15, position 12-15 A1 N word 16, position 0-3 A2 X word 16, position 4-7 A3 X word 16, position 8-11 A4 N word 16, position 12-15 A5 X word 17, position 0-3 A6 X word 17, position 4-7 A7 X word 17, position 8-11 A8 X word 17, position 12-15 A9 X word 18, position 0-3 A10 X word 18, position 4-7 A11 TBCD zero word 18, position 8-11 A12 TBCD zero word 18, position 12-15 A13 TBCD zero word 19, position 0-3 A14 TBCD zero word 19, position 4-7 A15 TBCD zero word 19, position 8-11 A16 TBCD zero word 19, position 12-15 A17 TBCD zero word 20, position 0-3 A18 TBCD zero word 20, position 4-7 A19 TBCD zero word 20, position 8-11 A20 TBCD zero

	Word 20, position 12-15 A21 TBCD zero word 21, position 0-3 A22 TBCD zero word 21, position 4-7 A23 TBCD zero word 21, position 8-11 A24 TBCD zero word 21, position 12-15 A25 TBCD zero word 22, position 0-3 A26 TBCD zero word 22, position 4-7 A27 TBCD zero word 22, position 8-11 A28 TBCD zero word 22, position 12-15 A29 TBCD zero word 23, position 0-3 A30 TBCD zero word 23, position 4-7 A31 TBCD zero word 23, position 8-11 A32 TBCD zero word 23, position 12-15 A33 TBCD zero word 24, position 0-3 A34 TBCD zero word 24, position 4-7 A35 TBCD zero word 24, position 8-11 A36 TBCD zero word 24, position 12-15 A37 TBCD zero word 25, position 0-3 A38 TBCD zero word 25, position 4-7 A39 TBCD zero word 25, position 8-11 A40 TBCD zero word 25, position 12-15 A41 TBCD zero word 26, position 0-3 A42 TBCD zero word 26, position 4-7 A43 TBCD zero word 26, position 8-11 A44 TBCD zero word 26, position 12-15 A45 TBCD zero
			14. international number: word 15, position 12-15 A1 X (CC) word 16, position 0-3 A2 X (CC) word 16, position 4-7 A3 X (CC) word 16, position 8-11 A4 X (NN) word 16, position 12-15 A5 X (NN)

Word 17, position 0-3 A6 X (NN) word 17, position 4-7 A7 X (NN) word 17, position 8-11 A8 X (NN) word 17, position 12-15 A9 X (NN) word 18, position 0-3 A10 X (NN) word 18, position 4-7 A11 X (NN) word 18, position 8-11 A12 X (NN) word 18, position 12-15 A13 X (NN) word 19, position 0-3 A14 X (NN) word 19, position 4-7 A15 X (NN) word 19, position 8-11 A16 TBCD zero word 19, position 12-15 A17 TBCD zero word 20, position 0-3 A18 TBCD zero word 20, position 4-7 A19 TBCD zero word 20, position 8-11 A20 TBCD zero word 20, position 12-15 A21 TBCD zero word 21, position 0-3 A22 TBCD zero word 21, position 4-7 A23 TBCD zero word 21, position 8-11 A24 TBCD zero word 21, position 12-15 A25 TBCD zero word 22, position 0-3 A26 TBCD zero word 22, position 4-7 A27 TBCD zero word 22, position 8-11 A28 TBCD zero word 22, position 12-15 A29 TBCD zero word 23, position 0-3 A30 TBCD zero word 23, position 4-7 A31 TBCD zero word 23, position 8-11 A32 TBCD zero word 23, position 12-15 A33 TBCD zero word 24, position 0-3 A34 TBCD zero word 24, position 4-7 A35 TBCD zero word 24, position 8-11 A36 TBCD zero word 24, position 12-15 A37 TBCD zero

	Word 25, position 0-3 A38 TBCD zero word 25, position 4-7 A39 TBCD zero word 25, position 8-11 A40 TBCD zero word 25, position 12-15 A41 TBCD zero word 26, position 0-3 A42 TBCD zero word 26, position 4-7 A43 TBCD zero word 26, position 8-11 A44 TBCD zero word 26, position 12-15 A45 TBCD zero CC=client connects the NN=national number
			15.LAN sequence number: word 15, position 12-15 A1 X word 16, position 0-3 A2 X word 16, position 4-7 A3 X word 16, position 8-11 A4 X word 16, position 12-15 A5 X word 17, position 0-3 A6 X word 17, position 4-7 A7 X word 17, position 8-11 A8 X word 17, position 12-15 A9 X word 18, position 0-3 A10 X word 18, position 4-7 A11 X word 18, position 8-11 A12 X word 18, position 12-15 A13 TBCD zero word 19, position 0-3 A14 TBCD zero word 19, position 4-7 A15 TBCD zero word 19, position 8-11 A16 TBCD zero word 19, position 12-15 A17 TBCD zero word 20, position 0-3 A18 TBCD zero

	Word 20, position 4-7 A19 TBCD zero word 20, position 8-11 A20 TBCD zero word 20, position 12-15 A21 TBCD zero word 21, position 0-3 A22 TBCD zero word 21, position 4-7 A23 TBCD zero word 21, position 8-11 A24 TBCD zero word 21, position 12-15 A25 TBCD zero word 22, position 0-3 A26 TBCD zero word 22, position 4-7 A27 TBCD zero word 22, position 8-11 A28 TBCD zero word 22, position 12-15 A29 TBCD zero word 23, position 0-3 A30 TBCD zero word 23, position 4-7 A31 TBCD zero word 23, position 8-11 A32 TBCD zero word 23, position 12-15 A33 TBCD zero word 24, position 0-3 A34 TBCD zero word 24, position 4-7 A35 TBCD zero word 24, position 8-11 A36 TBCD zero word 24, position 12-15 A37 TBCD zero word 25, position 0-3 A38 TBCD zero word 25, position 4-7 A39 TBCD zero word 25, position 8-11 A40 TBCD zero word 25, position 12-15 A41 TBCD zero word 26, position 0-3 A42 TBCD zero word 26, position 4-7 A43 TBCD zero word 26, position 8-11 A44 TBCD zero word 26, position 12-15 A45 TBCD zero
			16.DNIS: word 15, position 12-15 A1 N word 16, position 0-3 A2 X word 16, position 4-7 A3 X

	Word 24, position 8-11 A36 TBCD zero word 24, position 12-15 A37 TBCD zero word 25, position 0-3 A38 TBCD zero word 25, position 4-7 A39 TBCD zero word 25, position 8-11 A40 TBCD zero word 25, position 12-15 A41 TBCD zero word 26, position 0-3 A42 TBCD zero word 26, position 4-7 A43 TBCD zero word 26, position 8-11 A44 TBCD zero word 26, position 12-15 A45 TBCD zero
			17. calling network identifier (NCID) if-NCID is by record in " A " territory, it will be begun record from A1 with binary form. Input code will be indicated the call treatment related with this specific call or will be " 0 ". If NCID records in the NCID territory of 64 word call records, then input code also will be indicated the call treatment related with this specific call or will be " 0 ". NCID is comprised of following: the ingress switch ID junction line group originating terminal slogan time point 1 NCID sequence number that starts
Word 27, position 0-3	Condition code (FC): with the OSR/POSR form
Word 27, position 0-3	Condition code (FC): with the OSR/POSR form	Word 27, position 4-7	Termination network code (TNC): with the OSR/POSR form
Word 27, position 8-11	Network insertion type (NAT): with the OSR/POSR form	Word 27, position 4-7	Termination network code (TNC): with the OSR/POSR form
Word 27, position 8-11	Network insertion type (NAT): with the OSR/POSR form	Word 27, position 12-15	Time point 7 qualifiers (TP7Q): with the OSR/POSR form
Word 28, position 0-6	Input code (EC): with the OSR/POSR form	Word 27, position 12-15	Time point 7 qualifiers (TP7Q): with the OSR/POSR form
Word 28, position 0-6	Input code (EC): with the OSR/POSR form	Word 28, position 7-9	Prefix number (PD): with the OSR/POSR form
Word 28, position 10-12	NCS/DAP ID (NDID): with the OSR/POSR form	Word 28, position 7-9	Prefix number (PD): with the OSR/POSR form
Word 28, position 10-12	NCS/DAP ID (NDID): with the OSR/POSR form	Word 28, position 13-15	Partition id (DIVID): with the OSR/POSR form
Word 29, position 0	Overflow at a distance (DO): with the OSR/POSR form	Word 28, position 13-15	Partition id (DIVID): with the OSR/POSR form
Word 29, position 0	Overflow at a distance (DO): with the OSR/POSR form	Word 29, position 1	The MCI network overflows (MNO): with the OSR/POSR form

Word 29, position 2	The client connects (CC): with the OSR/POSR form
Word 29, position 2	The client connects (CC): with the OSR/POSR form	Word 29, position 3	Between network (IN): with the OSR/POSR form
Word 29, position 4	Need not	Word 29, position 3	Between network (IN): with the OSR/POSR form
Word 29, position 4	Need not	Word 29, position 5	SAC position (SAC): this position is used for flexibly SAC feature. When the number of collecting at the address digit collection phase that receives was identified as a SAC number in the FlexSac index related with the junction line group that starts, this position just put ' 1 '. This position is in all other situation underlyings ' 0 '.
Word 29, position 6	Call direction (CD): with the OSR/POSR form	Word 29, position 5
Word 29, position 6	Call direction (CD): with the OSR/POSR form	Word 29, position 7	Destination (DE): with the OSR/POSR form
Word 29, position 8	Special-purpose termination (DT): with the OSR/POSR form	Word 29, position 7	Destination (DE): with the OSR/POSR form
Word 29, position 8	Special-purpose termination (DT): with the OSR/POSR form	Word 29, position 9	Human To Human (PO): with the OSR/POSR form
Word 29, position 10	Be transmitted position (XB): with the OSR/POSR form	Word 29, position 9	Human To Human (PO): with the OSR/POSR form
Word 29, position 10	Be transmitted position (XB): with the OSR/POSR form	Word 29, position 1l	Satellite (SA): with the OSR/POSR form
Word 29, position 12-15	Call out the character (NOCLI) of position ID: with the OSR/POSR form	Word 29, position 1l	Satellite (SA): with the OSR/POSR form
Word 29, position 12-15		Word 30, position 0-15	Communication common carrier number (CN): with the OSR/POSR form
Word 3l, position 0-3	Authorization code ID territory (ACIF): with the OSR/POSR form	Word 30, position 0-15
Word 3l, position 0-3		Word 31, position 4-10	Release code: with the OSR/POSR form
Word 3l, position 11-13	NCID sequence number: with the OSR/POSR form	Word 31, position 4-10	Release code: with the OSR/POSR form
Word 3l, position 11-13	NCID sequence number: with the OSR/POSR form	Word 31, position 14	NCID position (NCIDLOC): with the OSR/POSR form
Word 3l, position 15	Long-range ANI shielding (RS): with the OSR/POSR form	Word 31, position 14	NCID position (NCIDLOC): with the OSR/POSR form
Word 3l, position 15	Long-range ANI shielding (RS): with the OSR/POSR form	Word 32, position 0-15 word 33, position 0-15	Time and charge guest's name (T﹠C Guest): record will send back from time and operator's service platform of charge feature the time and charge guest name of switch. This information begins record with ascii character from the first character that word 32, position 0-7 begin.
Word 34, position 0-15 word 35, position 0-15 word 36, position 0-15 word 37, position 0-15 word 38, position 0-15 word 39, position 0-15	Destination-address (DA): from D1, by receiving or change the destination-address that journal reaches 25 TBCD form. No byte contains TBCD zero. 7 numerals, 10 digital DDD IDDD words 34, position 0-3 D1 N N N CC word 34, position 4-7 D2 X X X CC	Word 32, position 0-15 word 33, position 0-15

Word 40, position 0-3	Word 34, position 8-11 D3 X X X CC word 34, position 12-15 D4 X N N NN word 35, position 0-3 D5 X X X NN word 35, position 4-7 D6 X X X NN word 35, position 8-11 D7 X X X NN word 35, position 12-15 D8 X (TSID) X X NN word 36, position 0-3 D9 X (TSID) X X NN word 36, position 4-7 D10 X (TSID) X X NN word 36, position 8-11 D11 X (TTG) X (TSID) T zero NN word 36, position 12-15 D12 X (TTG) X (TSID) T zero NN word 37, position 0-3 D13 X (TTG) X (TSID) T zero NN word 37, position 4-7 D14 X (TTG) X (TTG) T zero NN word 37, position 8-11 D15 T zero X (TTG) T zero NN word 37, position 12-15 D16 T zero X (TTG) T zero T zero word 38, position 0-3 D17 T zero X (TTG) T zero T zero word 38, position 4-7 D18 T zero T zero T zero T zero word 38, position 8-11 D19 T zero T zero T zero T zero word 38, position 12-15 D20 T zero T zero T zero T zero word 39, position 0-3 D21 T zero T zero T zero T zero word 39, position 4-7 D22 T zero T zero T zero T zero word 39, position 8-11 D23 T zero T zero T zero T zero word 39, position 12-15 D24 T zero T zero T zero T zero word 40, position 0-3 D25 T zero T zero T zero T zero CC=client connects NN=national number TSID=termination switch ID TTG=termination junction line ID T zero=TBCD zero
		18 numeric words 34, position 0-3 D1 N

	Word 34, position 4-7 D2 N word 34, position 8-11 D3 N word 34, position 12-15 D4 N word 35, position 0-3 D5 N word 35, position 4-7 D6 N word 35, position 8-11 D7 N word 35, position 12-15 D8 N word 36, position 0-3 D9 N word 36, position 4-7 D10 N word 36, position 8-11 D11 N word 36, position 12-15 D12 N word 37, position 0-3 D13 N word 37, position 4-7 D14 N word 37, position 8-11 D15 N word 37, position 12-15 D16 N word 38, position 0-3 D17 N word 38, position 4-7 D18 N word 38, position 8-11 D19 X (TSID) word 38, position 12-15 D20 X (TSID) word 39, position 0-3 D21 X (TSID) word 39, position 4-7 D22 X (TTG) word 39, position 8-11 D23 X (TTG) word 39, position 12-15 D24 X (TTG) word 40, position 0-3 D25 X (TTG) TSID=termination switch ID TTG=termination junction line group
		Word 40, position 4-15 word 41, position 0-15 word 42, position 0-15 word 43, position 0-15	The numeral (PTD) of conversion in advance: representative is 15 the calling subscriber translation number of dialling the number nearly. 10 00Y 7 digital VNet/IDD

	Vnet, SAC are for Vnet or D 15 digital SAC, DNIS code SNS (example) or hot line word 40, position 4-7 PTD1 N 0 N N word 40, position 8-11 PTD2 X 0 N N word 40, position 12-15 PTD3 X Y X N word 41, position 0-3 PTD4 N N X N word 41, position 4-7 PTD5 X X X N word 41, position 8-11 PTD6 X X X N word 41, position 12-15 PTD7 X X X N word 42, position 0-3 PTD8 X X T zero N word 42, position 4-7 PTD9 X X T zero N word 42, position 8-11 PTD10 X X T zero N word 42, position 12-15 PTD11 T zero T zero T zero N word 43, position 0-3 PTD12 T zero T zero T zero N word 43, position 4-7 PTD13 T zero T zero T zero N word 43, position 8-11 PTD14 T zero T zero T zero N word 43, position 12-15 PTD15 T zero T zero T zero N T zero=TBCD zero
		Word 44, position 0-7	International Route Selection (EIR) type of call that strengthens: contain from NCS charging information parameter DAP or the operator receives from NCS charging information ISUP RLT parameter EIR type of call ID. With binary recording, default value=' 0 '.
Word 44, position 8-14	Overflow cause value (OVFVAL): this territory is the value such as binary system of interior first cause value that receives or format of switch. This value is that the cause value subdomain of the cause parameter of overflowing from startup extracts.	Word 44, position 0-7
Word 44, position 8-14		Word 44, position 15	Press call attempt counting (CB): be used for the EIR feature. This information by DAP from the CB territory of NCS charging information parameter or operator's reception from NCS charging information ISUP RLT parameter is set to ' 1 ' or ' 0 '.

	0=presses the call attempt counting not according to call attempt counting (default) 1=
		Word 45, position 0-3	Overflow reason position (OVFCL): this territory is to receive in the switch or the value such as binary system of the value of first reason position record of format. This information is that the reason position subdomain of the cause parameter of overflowing from startup extracts.
Word 45, position 4-15 word 46, position 0-15 word 47, position 0-15 word 48, position 0-15	Expectation end address (DTA): these 15 bytes contained before triggering is overflowed in the original plan or the termination of " expectation ". They contain: 1) mail to expectation termination switch ID or the junction line group of the calling of DTC terminal point, perhaps 2) national number, perhaps 3) be the international number what action identification code determines according to what return from DAP for the expectation termination. DTC DTSID+ DTTG DDD word 45, position 4-7 DTA1 0 N word 45, position 8-11 DTA2 X (DTSID1) X word 45, position 12-15 DTA3 X (DTSID2) X word 46, position 0-3 DTA4 X (DTSID3) N word 46, position 4-7 DTA5 0 X word 46, position 8-11 DTA6 X (DTTG1) X word 46, position 12-15 DTA7 X (DTTG2) X word 47, position 0-3 DTA8 X (DTTG3) X word 47, position 4-7 DTA9 X (DTTG4) X word 47, position 8-11 DTA10 TBCD zero X word 47, position 12-15 DTA11 TBCD zero TBCD zero word 48, position 0-3 DTA12 TBCD zero TBCD zero word 48, position 4-7 DTA13 TBCD zero TBCD zero word 48, position 8-11 DTA14 TBCD zero TBCD zero word 48, the termination switch ID of position 12-15 DTA15 TBCD zero TBCD zero DTSID=expectation	Word 45, position 0-3

	The termination junction line group of DTTG=expectation
	The termination junction line group of DTTG=expectation	IDDD DTC (example) (in the future) word 45, position 4-7 DTA1 CC X (DTSID1) word 45, position 8-11 DTA2 CC X (DTSID2) word 45, position 12-15 DTA3 CC X (DTSID3) word 46, position 0-3 DTA4 NN X (DTSID4) word 46, position 4-7 DTA5 NN X (DTTG1) word 46, position 8-11 DTA6 NN X (DTTG2) word 46, position 12-15 DTA7 NN X (DTTG3) word 47, position 0-3 DTA8 NN X (DTTG4) word 47, position 4-7 DTA9 NN X (DTTG5) word 47, position 8-11 DTA10 NN TBCD zero word 47, position 12-15 DTA11 NN TBCD zero word 48, position 0-3 DTA12 NN TBCD zero word 48, position 4-7 DTA13 NN TBCD zero word 48, position 8-11 DTA14 NN TBCD zero word 48, position 12-15 DTA15 TBCD zero TBCD zero CC=client connects the termination junction line group of the termination switch ID DTTG=expectation of NN=national number DTSID=expectation
	Word 49, position 0-6		Overflow counting (OVFC): point out to overflow the sum of attempt in the centre that hits pay dirk before terminating. This value increases progressively at every turn for flooding information access DAP the time.
Word 49, position 7-12	Word 49, position 0-6	Expectation termination action identification code (DTAC): the action identification code that this territory DAP of representative from first is replied receives. This information is used for being identified at the type of DTA territory canned data.
Word 49, position 7-12	Word 49, position 13		Need not

Word 49, position 14-15 word 50-54, position 0-15	Calling network identifier (NCID): the binary representation that contains NCID. If the authorization code territory is used to record out of Memory, just at middle and termination switch record NCID. NCID creates at ingress switch, is passed to middle and the termination switch. The form of NCID is: ingress switch ID (OSID) junction line group (OTG) port (OP) time point 1 (TP1) the NCID sequence number that starts that starts
Word 49, position 14-15 word 50-54, position 0-15		Word 55, position 0-15 word 56, position 0-15 word 57, position 0-15	Time and charge room number (T﹠C Room): record will send back from time and operator's service platform of charge feature the time and charge room number of switch. This information begins record with ascii character from the first character that word 53, position 0-7 begin.
Word 58, position 0-15 word 59, position 0-15 word 60, position 0-15	EVS applicating counter (EAC-1): if ARU is used in the calling, this territory record EVS applicating counter value. The numeral of being dialled by client response audio menu option is contained in this territory.
		Word 61, position 0-13	Operator ID number (OPIN): operator ID number of the operator that process to call out contained in this territory.
Word 61, position 14-15	Overflow reason coding standard (OVFCS): the value such as binary system that contain first coding standard of switch reception or format. This value is that the coding standard subdomain of the cause parameter of overflowing from startup extracts. The format value covers in the coding standard that it can not received subsequently or the switch, and this territory only is used for the calling of overflowing of enhancing.	Word 61, position 0-13
Word 61, position 14-15		Word 62, position 0-12	Time point 5 (TPS): the time that time point 1 occurs and operator stop to process the binary counting value of the number of seconds between the time of calling out off-position also. If call out and be transferred to other operators, the contained value in this territory will be expressed the release time that the operator of service is provided.
Word 62, position 13-15	Need not	Word 62, position 0-12
Word 62, position 13-15	Need not	Word 63, position 0-15	Room number (RN): when calling out from the hotel, during the group origin of university or a main telephone number mark of any other usefulness, containing calling station

	Rear four of ID (CSI). CSI will obtain from the signaling information that starts, or actual in the operator's acquisition to the manual input message of OSR.
		Word 0, position 0-3	Call record ID (CDID): the type of identification record. The default 1=CDR 2=SER of 0=3=PNR 4=OSR 5=POSR 6=ECDR 7=EPOSR 8=EOSR 9=EPOSR 10-15=need not
Word 0, position 4-15	Synchronization character: this word contains negative 2 (77768).	Word 0, position 0-3
Word 0, position 4-15		Word 1, position 0-15 word 2, position 0-15	Calling disconnects ID (CDID): the identifying call letters record. Each call record has an exclusive number. When the switch cold start-up occuring or reload, CDID is set to 0, writes the switch logout with event code 3. When the upset of CDID counting, the SER of recording events code 10.
Word 3, position 0-15	Switch ID (SWID): the exclusive identifier that contains current switch. SWID is comprised of the alphanumeric characters of 3 compressions. Initial character can be any 16 system numbers (0-F). All the other two characters are that base is any numeral of 36. The symbol of base 36 is 0-9, A-Z. The maximum 8 system numbers of base 36 are 438, represent zed. Value 448 to 778 need not. Word 3, position 0-3 SWID1 (0-9, A-F) word 3, position 4-9 SWID2 (0-9, A-Z) word 3, position 10-15 SWID3 (0-9, A-Z)	Word 1, position 0-15 word 2, position 0-15
Word 3, position 0-15		Word 4, position 0-7	Switch type (ST): the type of indication switch. 0=is default

	1=580L SCX 2=DEX-400 3=CTSS-1000 4=CTSS-4000 5=DMS-250 6=AXE-10 7=DEX-600 8=DEX-300 9=DMS-topS 10=DEX-600E 11=AS20 12=AS27 13=EXS ARU 14-255=need not
		Word 4, position 8-15	Event qualifier (EQ): sign causes the event that records. The default 1=of 0=changed the input command on date or automatic system upgrade 2=changed the input command of time or automatic system upgrade 3=system restart 4=record by the hour (HH:00:00) 5=recover action 6=account data ending (End of File) 7=account data begin (Start of File) 8=NEMAS SRB piece record (end of billing block) 9=summer time change (time and time deviation amount change) 10=CDID LOG (CDID wraparound to 0) 11=without the blank SER of 12=(the filling record of record keeping piece) 13-255=without event code 7 SER first record of call history data centralization always. Event code 8 SER will always call out last record in the piece,

	What be close to previously is event code 6. Event code 9 SER will be by the people who calls daylight change-machine command calls. Event code 10 SER will disconnect ID (CDID) in calling and be written into to ' 0 ' time from the maximum wraparound at every turn. This event code will not write because of the CDID wraparound owing to system restart.
		Word 5, position 0-15 word 6, position 0-15	SER event time (SERET): contain the time in epoch of this SER, be used for event code.
Word 7, position 0-3	Need not	Word 5, position 0-15 word 6, position 0-15
Word 7, position 0-3	Need not	Word 7, position 4-15	First CDID (FCDID): contain last 12 of the CDID that in first call record or this record keeping piece, records among the SER. This territory is used for SER event code 8.
Word 8, position 0-3	Need not	Word 7, position 4-15
Word 8, position 0-3	Need not	Word 8, position 4-15	Last CDID (LCDID): contain the CDID that records among the SER in a call record in the end or this record keeping piece. This territory is used for SER 8.
Word 9, position 0-3	Need not	Word 8, position 4-15
Word 9, position 0-3	Need not	Word 9, position 4-15	Next CDID (NCDID): contain the CDID among next call record or the SER. This territory is used for SER 8.
Word 10, position 0-15	NEMAS piece sequence number (NBSN): contain the NEMAS piece sequence number among event code 8 SER. First event code 8 SER in the call history file are set to NBSN value 0. The NBSN value sequentially increases progressively with event code 8 SER.	Word 9, position 4-15
Word 10, position 0-15		Word 11, position 0-15 word 12, position 0-15	Former time (PT): contain the system time time in epoch of the time before being changed. Be used among the SER 1,2 and 9.
Word 13, position 0	Sign bit (SB): instruction time, departure was negative or positive number. This territory is used for all SER. 0=positively biased residual quantity 1=negative bias residual quantity	Word 11, position 0-15 word 12, position 0-15
Word 13, position 0		Word
13, position 1-10	Time deviation amount (TO): be used for record and universal time (UTC) in minute the time deviation amount. This territory is used for all SER.	Word

Word 13, position 11-15 word 14, position 0-15 word 15, position 0-15	Need not
	Need not	Word 16, position 0-15 word 17, position 0-15 word 18, position 0-15	Bootload ID1-6: the Bootload identifier that contains 6 bytes that record the switch of keeping accounts. This territory writes with the EBCDIC form, contains the data identical with the Bootload identifier that records in the call history tape label.
Word 19, position 0-15	Last code #1, the #2 of inserting: these 2 bytes contain the nearest lot number of the switch that record a keeps accounts/release. This territory writes with the EBCDIC form, contain with the call history tape label in the identical data of nearest lot number/discharge that record. Point discharges the upgrading level of the current Bootload of sign. Be used in SER7.
Word 19, position 0-15		Word 20, position 0-5	Quantity CDR (QCDR): the quantity that contains the CDR that records in this record keeping piece. Only be used for event code 8 SER.
Word 20, position 6-11	Quantity ECDR (QECDR): the quantity that contains the expansion CDR that records in this record keeping piece. Only be used for event code 8 SER.	Word 20, position 0-5
Word 20, position 6-11		Word 20, position 12-15	Need not
Word 21, position 0-5	Quantity PNR (QPNR): the quantity that contains the PNR that records in this record keeping piece. Only be used for event code 8 SER.	Word 20, position 12-15	Need not
Word 21, position 0-5		Word 21, position 6-11	Quantity EPNR (QEPNR): the quantity that contains the expansion PNR that records in this record keeping piece. Only be used for event code 8 SER.
Word 21, position 12-15	Need not	Word 21, position 6-11
Word 21, position 12-15	Need not	Word 22, position 0-5	Quantity OSR (QOSR): the quantity that contains the OSR that records in this record keeping piece. Only be used for event code 8 SER.
Word 22, position 6-11	Quantity EOSR (QEOSR): the quantity that contains the expansion OSR that records in this record keeping piece. Only be used for event code 8 SER.	Word 22, position 0-5
Word 22, position 6-11		Word 22, position 12-15	Need not
Word 23, position 0-5	Quantity POSR (QPOSR): the quantity that contains the POSR that records in this record keeping piece. Only be used for event code 8 SER.	Word 22, position 12-15	Need not
Word 23, position 0-5		Word 23, position 6-11	Quantity EPOSR (QEPOSR): the quantity that contains the expansion POSR that records in this record keeping piece. Only be used for event code 8 SER.

Word 23, position 12-15	Need not
Word 23, position 12-15	Need not	Word 24, position 0-5	Quantity SER (QSER): the quantity that contains the SER that records in this record keeping piece. Only be used for event code 8SER.
Word 24, position 6-12	Call history document number (CHFN): contain the call history document number of distributing when opening the call history file at the switch place. First file of opening contains CHFN value 0. Whenever open on the same day new file, CHFN just increases progressively 1. When change Julian date (JD) (during midnight), the file that the next one is opened will make CHFN return to 0.	Word 24, position 0-5
Word 24, position 6-12		Word 24, position 13-14	Need not.
Word 24, position 15	The SER12 (SU) that uses: if a upper call record is a SER12, this position just arranges in SER8.	Word 24, position 13-14	Need not.
Word 24, position 15		Word 25, position 0-15 word 26, position 0-15	CDR regulates the time started: the time in epoch when record CDR regulates beginning. Be used among the SER8.
Word 27, position 0-15 word 28, position 0-15	CDR regulates dwell time: record CDR regulates the time in epoch when stopping. Be used among the SER8.	Word 25, position 0-15 word 26, position 0-15
Word 27, position 0-15 word 28, position 0-15		Word 29, position 0-11	Need not
Word 29, position 12-15	Format version: 32/64 word format is filled to identify with 1 in this territory. Accounting system must check that 0 0-3 of word determines the type of used call record.	Word 29, position 0-11	Need not
Word 29, position 12-15		Word 30, position 0-15 word 31, position 0-15	Regulate counting: the quantity that is used for recording the CDR that does not write during the CDR adjusting is called. Be used among the SER8.

Claims

1. hybrid telecommunication system comprises:

A switched communication network;

A packet transmission networks that links to each other with switched communication network;

A call router that links to each other with packet transmission networks with switched communication network;

One links to each other with call router and the memory of stored calls parameter database therein;

Call router is configured to call out at switched communication network and packet transmission networks transmission according at least one calling parameter from the calling parameter database.

2. the telecommunication system of claim 1, calling parameter database wherein comprises the profile information about the user of hybrid telecommunication system.

3. the telecommunication system of claim 1, calling parameter database wherein comprises the information about type of call.

4. the telecommunication system of claim 1, calling parameter database wherein comprises the information about the use of switched communication network and packet transmission networks.

5. the telecommunication system of claim 1, calling parameter database wherein comprises the information about call time.

6. the telecommunication system of claim 1, packet transmission networks wherein comprises an Internet.

7. the telecommunication system of claim 1, switched communication network wherein comprises public switched communication network.

8. the telecommunication system of claim 1, public switched communication network wherein is telephone network.

9. one kind guides the method for calling out in the hybrid telecommunication system that comprises switched communication network and packet transmission networks, comprises:

Stored calls parameter database in memory;

Receipt of call on hybrid telecommunication system;

The access call parameter database is to determine at least one calling parameter;

Call out at switched communication network and packet transmission networks transmission according to this at least one calling parameter.

10. the method for claim 9, calling parameter database wherein comprises the profile information about the user of hybrid telecommunication system.

11. the method for claim 9, calling parameter database wherein comprises the information about type of call.

12. the method for claim 9, calling parameter database wherein comprises the information about the use of switched communication network and packet transmission networks.

13. the method for claim 9, calling parameter database wherein comprises the information about call time.

14. the method for claim 9, packet transmission networks wherein comprise an Internet.

15. the method for claim 14, switched communication network wherein comprises public switched communication network.

16. the method for claim 15, public switched communication network wherein is telephone network.

17. one kind is used for the computer program of realizing at computer-readable medium called out in the hybrid telecommunication system guiding that comprises switched communication network and packet transmission networks, comprises:

The first software of stored calls parameter database in memory;

The access call parameter database is to determine the second software of at least one calling parameter when the hybrid telecommunication system receipt of call;

Transmit the 3rd software of calling at switched communication network and packet transmission networks according to this at least one calling parameter.

18. the computer program of realizing at computer-readable medium of claim 17, calling parameter database wherein comprises the profile information about the user of hybrid telecommunication system.

19. the computer program of realizing at computer-readable medium of claim 17, calling parameter database wherein comprises the information about type of call.

20. the computer program of realizing at computer-readable medium of claim 17, calling parameter database wherein comprises the information about the use of switched communication network and packet transmission networks.

21. the computer program of realizing at computer-readable medium of claim 17, calling parameter database wherein comprises the information about call time.

22. the computer program of realizing at computer-readable medium of claim 17, packet transmission networks wherein comprises an Internet.

23. the computer program of realizing at computer-readable medium of claim 22, switched communication network wherein comprises public switched communication network.

24. the computer program of realizing at computer-readable medium of claim 23, public switched communication network wherein is telephone network.

25. a hybrid telecommunication system comprises:

A switched communication network;

Computer with attached display of communicating by letter with packet transmission networks with switched communication network;

Computer is configured to start the telemanagement of hybrid telecommunication system.

26. the hybrid telecommunication system of claim 25 further comprises the callback logic of the test that can start hybrid telecommunication system.

27. the hybrid telecommunication system of claim 25, wherein, this test pack vinculum road is analyzed.

28. the hybrid telecommunication system of claim 25 further comprises a management equipment, be used for to select signaling status, such as the loop begin, ground connection begins or such as the signaling of dual-tone multifrequency detection, multifrequency or dial impulse.

29. the hybrid telecommunication system of claim 25, wherein, hybrid telecommunication system comprises supports the Internet phone.

30. the hybrid telecommunication system of claim 25 comprises the device of the management of operator monitor hybrid network.

31. the hybrid telecommunication system of claim 25 further comprises an expert system of regulating the service quality of hybrid telecommunication system.

32. one kind is used for the method for communicating by letter at hybrid telecommunication system, this hybrid telecommunication system comprises the switched communication network that one or more and one or more packet transmission networks link to each other, and the step that the method comprises has:

Connect a call router to switched communication network and packet transmission networks;

An integrated computer and a display that links to each other are to communicate by letter with packet transmission networks, and this calculates the telemanagement that function starts hybrid telecommunication system.

33. the described method for communicating by letter at hybrid telecommunication system of claim 32, wherein, the callback logic is used to start the test of hybrid telecommunication system.

34. the described method for communicating by letter at hybrid telecommunication system of claim 33, wherein, test pack vinculum road is analyzed.

35. the described method for communicating by letter at hybrid telecommunication system of claim 32 further comprises by selecting to manage hybrid telecommunication system such as the loop begins, ground connection begins signaling status or detection such as the signal of dual-tone multifrequency, multifrequency or dial impulse.

36. the described method for communicating by letter at hybrid telecommunication system of claim 32, wherein, hybrid telecommunication system comprises supports the Internet phone.

37. the described method for communicating by letter at hybrid telecommunication system of claim 32 further comprises the step of the management of operator monitor hybrid telecommunication system.

38. the described method for communicating by letter at hybrid telecommunication system of claim 32 further comprises the step of regulating the service quality of hybrid telecommunication system with expert system.

39. one kind is used for the computer program of realizing at computer-readable medium of communicating by letter at hybrid telecommunication system, this hybrid telecommunication system comprises the exchange network that one or more and one or more packet transmission networks link to each other, and this computer program comprises:

Connect a call router to the first software of switched communication network and packet transmission networks;

Second software of communicating by letter with packet transmission networks, the telemanagement of this second software startup hybrid telecommunication system.

40. the described computer program of realizing at computer-readable medium for communicating by letter at hybrid telecommunication system of claim 39 further comprises the callback logic for the test that starts hybrid telecommunication system.

41. the described computer program of realizing at computer-readable medium for communicating by letter at hybrid telecommunication system of claim 40, wherein, this test pack vinculum road is analyzed.

42. the described method that realizes at computer-readable medium for communicating by letter at hybrid telecommunication system of claim 39 further comprises for selecting such as the loop begins, ground connection begins signaling status or detecting management software such as the signal of dual-tone multifrequency, multifrequency or dial impulse.

43. the described computer program of realizing at computer-readable medium for communicating by letter at hybrid telecommunication system of claim 39, wherein, hybrid telecommunication system comprises supports the Internet phone.

44. the described computer program of realizing at computer-readable medium for the communication on hybrid telecommunication system of claim 39 further comprises operator's software that convenient operation person monitors the management of hybrid telecommunication system.

45. the described computer program of realizing at computer-readable medium for communicating by letter at hybrid telecommunication system of claim 39, wherein hybrid telecommunication system comprises an expert system of regulating the service quality of hybrid telecommunication system.